The URL can be used to link to this page

7013 - Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements, 3.Specifications- Volume 1 PROJECT MANUAL FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements IFB 7013 Engineering Project No. 6305 Chris Watts Todd Hileman Mayor City Manager Todd Estes, P.E. City Engineer Frank Pugsley, P.E. Deputy Director, Water and Wastewater Prepared for The City of Denton 2019 Volume 1 4055 International Plaza, @200 Fort Worth, TX 76109 Phone – (817) 735-7300 12400 Coit Road Dallas, TX 75251 Phone – (972) 934-3711 Adopted September 2018 City of Denton Standard Construction Specification Documents 00 00 00 - 1 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Page 1 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 00 00 TABLE OF CONTENTS VOLUME 1 Division 00 - General Conditions 00 05 15 Addenda [Insert] 00 11 13 Invitation to Bidders 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 35 13 Conflict of Interest Affidavit 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 43 13 Bid Bond 00 43 36 Proposed Subcontractors Form 00 43 37 Vendor Compliance to State Law Nonresident Bidder 00 45 13 Bidder’s Minimum Qualification Statement 00 45 26 Contractor Compliance with Workers' Compensation Law 00 52 43 Agreement 00 61 13 Performance Bond 00 61 14 Payment Bond 00 61 19 Maintenance Bond 00 61 25 Certificate of Insurance [Insert] 00 72 00 General Conditions 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 73 Form 1295 – Certificate of Interested Parties [Insert] Division 01 - General Requirements 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Change Management 01 29 00 Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 19 Preconstruction Meeting 01 31 20 Project Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 33 Preconstruction Video 01 33 00 Submittals 01 33 06 Graphic Documentation 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 35 13 Special Project Procedures 01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 64 00 Owner-Furnished Goods and Special Services 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 70 00 Mobilization and Remobilization 01 71 23 Construction Staking and Survey 01 74 23 Cleaning 00 00 00 - 2 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Page 2 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 01 75 00 Starting and Adjusting 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Contractor shall refer to the following documents for Technical Specifications, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents: North Central Texas Council of Governments Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction – Fourth Edition, Divisions 200-800 (incorporated by reference) North Central Texas Council of Governments Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction – Fourth Edition, Divisions 200-800 – Amendments DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03 11 00 Concrete Forming 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 45 00 Architectural Precast Concrete DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04 05 05 Unit Masonry Construction 04 05 11 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 21 13 Brick Masonry 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry DIVISION 5 METALS 05 05 13 Galvanizing 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 50 13 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 51 00 Metal Stairs 05 52 15 Aluminum Handrails and Railings DIVISION 6 WOODS, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 82 23 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 07 19 16 Silate Water Repellants 07 21 05 Building Insulation 07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 53 00 Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roofing System 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 00 00 00 - 3 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Page 3 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 07 71 00 Roof Specialties 07 72 33 Roof Hatches 07 73 00 Manufactured Roof Curbs 07 92 00 Joint Sealants DIVISION 8 OPENINGS 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 16 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 14 00 Wood Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum Storefronts 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 71 13 Automatic Door Operators 08 81 00 Glass Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 61 53 Concrete Hardener 09 65 05 Resilient Flooring 09 67 23 Resinous Flooring 09 91 00 Painting VOLUME 2 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 10 28 05 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 00 Lockers DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS 12 21 00 Window Blinds DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 11 00 Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping 21 11 16 Facility Fire Hydrants 21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 00 01 Plumbing Systems 00 00 00 - 4 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Page 4 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 22 13 14 Packaged Sewage Lift Station DIVISION 23 HVAC MECHANICAL 23 00 00 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 38 13 Commercial-Kitchen Hoods 23 74 09 Rooftop Air Conditioners 23 74 33 Make-up Air Systems 23 81 13 Wall Mount Air Conditioners 23 81 29 Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems 23 82 39.16 Propeller Unit Heaters DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 01 26 Testing of Electrical Systems 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 10 Electrical Demolition 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Conductors & Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.01 Conduits 26 05 33.02 Wireways 26 05 33.03 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.04 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 24 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 26 05 43.01 Manholes and Concrete Pull Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 12 01 Medium Voltage Pad-Mounted Switch 26 12 19 Pad-Mounted, Liquid Filled, Medium Voltage Transformers 26 13 00 Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear 26 13 23 Medium Voltage Motor Control Center 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers 26 24 13 600 Volt Switchboards 26 24 16.02 Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 00 00 00 - 5 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Page 5 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 26 29 87 Electrical Control Panels 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switches 26 41 13 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 50 00 Lighting DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 23.01 Fiber Optic Data Network DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 31 05 13 Soils for Earthwork 31 05 16 Aggregates for Earthwork 31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing 31 23 10 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 23.34 Flowable Fill 31 23 33.14 Trench Safety 31 23 33.19 Trenching and Backfill 31 25 13.13 Seeding for Erosion Control 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 11 23 Aggregate Base Courses 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 31 13.53 High-Security Chain Link Fences and Gates 32 91 13 Soil Preparation 32 91 19.13 Topsoil Placement and Grading 32 92 13 Hydro-Mulching DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 05 01.02 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.09 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.13 PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe 33 10 13 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution 33 39 13 Sanitary Utility Sewage Manholes, Frames and Covers DIVISION 40 PROCESS INTEGRATION 40 05 23.23 Stainless Steel Process Pipe for Liquid Service 40 05 43 Miscellaneous Valves 40 05 53 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment 40 05 61 Gate Valves 40 05 62 Eccentric Plug Valves 40 05 64 Butterfly Valves 40 05 65.23 Swing Check Valves 40 05 78 Air Release and Air and Vacuum Valves 40 80 00 Commissioning of Process Systems 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 40 90 01 Instrumentation 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System 40 92 13.13 Electrically Operated Primary Control Valves DIVISION 41 MATERIAL PROCESSING & HANDLING EQUIPMENT 41 22 13.13 Bridge Crane Rehabilitation 00 00 00 - 6 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Page 6 of 6 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 DIVISION 43 PROCESS GAS & LIQUID HANDLING 43 21 13.16 Centrifugal Magnetic Drive Sealless End Suction Pumps DIVISION 46 WATER & WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT 46 33 44 Skid Mounted Peristaltic Metering Pumps 46 35 11 Copper Ion Solution Generator 46 36 11.16 Liquid Polymer Feed System Appendix GC-4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions GC-6.09 Permits and Utilities GR-01 64 00 Owner Furnished Goods and Special Services A. Valves and Related Materials B. Electrical Transformers END OF SECTION TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY DAVID SLOAN, P.E. SECTION TITLE 01 11 00 Summary of Work 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Change Management 01 29 00 Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 31 19 Preconstruction Meeting 01 31 20 Project Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 33 Preconstruction Video 01 33 00 Submittals 01 33 06 Graphic Documentation 01 35 00 Special Procedures 01 35 13 Special Project Procedures 01 45 23 Testing and Inspection Services 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 13 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 64 00 Owner-Furnished Goods and Special Services 01 70 00 Mobilization and Remobilization 01 71 23 Construction Staking and Survey 01 74 23 Cleaning 01 75 00 Starting and Adjusting 01 77 19 Closeout Requirements 01 78 23 Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel 22 13 14 Packaged Sewage Lift Station 32 31 13.53 High-Security Chain Link Fences and Gates 33 05 01.02 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.09 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings 33 05 01.13 PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe 33 10 13 Disinfecting of Water Utility Distribution 4-15-2019 33 39 13 Sanitary Utility Sewage Manholes, Frames and Covers 40 05 43 Miscellaneous Valves 40 05 53 Identification for Process Piping and Equipment 40 05 61 Gate Valves 40 05 62 Eccentric Plug Valves 40 05 64 Butterfly Valves 40 05 65.23 Swing Check Valves 40 05 78 Air Release and Air and Vacuum Valves 41 22 13.13 Bridge Crane Rehabilitation 46 36 11.16 Liquid Polymer Feed System TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY PRABIN KC, P.E. SECTION TITLE 03 11 00 Concrete Forming 03 21 00 Reinforcing Steel 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 45 00 Architectural Precast Concrete 05 05 13 Galvanizing 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 51 00 Metal Stairs 31 23 10 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 23.34 Flowable Fill 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts 3/20/2019 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY VAN CASHEN, P.E., LEED AP BD+C, ENV SP SECTION TITLE 21 11 00 Facility Fire-Suppression Water-Service Piping 21 11 16 Facility Fire Hydrants 21 13 13 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems 22 00 01 Plumbing Systems 23 00 00 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 05 29 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 53 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC 23 07 13 Duct Insulation 23 07 19 HVAC Piping Insulation 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 23 31 13 Metal Ducts 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 23 HVAC Power Ventilators 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 23 37 13 Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles 23 38 13 Commercial-Kitchen Hoods 23 74 09 Rooftop Air Conditioners 23 74 33 Make-up Air Systems 23 81 13 Wall Mount Air Conditioners 23 81 29 Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems 23 82 39.16 Propeller Unit Heaters 03/20/2019 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY ERROL DAWKINS, AIA SECTION TITLE 03 45 00 Architectural Precast Concrete 04 05 05 Unit Masonry Construction 04 05 11 Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 19 Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 21 13 Brick Masonry 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 05 50 13 Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 52 15 Aluminum Handrails and Railings 06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 82 23 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 07 19 16 Silate Water Repellants 07 21 05 Building Insulation 07 22 16 Roof Board Insulation 07 41 13 Metal Roof Panels 07 53 00 Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roofing System 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 71 00 Roof Specialties 07 72 33 Roof Hatches 07 73 00 Manufactured Roof Curbs 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 16 Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 14 00 Wood Doors 08 16 13 Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum Storefronts 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 71 13 Automatic Door Operators 08 81 00 Glass Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 09 21 16 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 30 13 Ceramic Tile 09 51 13 Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 61 53 Concrete Hardener 09 65 05 Resilient Flooring 09 67 23 Resinous Flooring 09 91 00 Painting 10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces 10 14 00 Signage 10 21 13 Toilet Compartments 10 28 05 Toilet and Bath Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10 51 00 Lockers 12 21 00 Window Blinds TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PREPARED BY JEFF HENSLEY, P.E. SECTION TITLE 26 01 26 Testing of Electrical Systems 26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 26 05 10 Electrical Demolition 26 05 13 Medium Voltage Cables 26 05 19 Low Voltage Electrical Conductors & Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 05 33.01 Conduits 26 05 33.02 Wireways 26 05 33.03 Outlet Boxes 26 05 33.04 Pull and Junction Boxes for Electrical Systems 24 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems 26 05 43.01 Manholes and Concrete Pull Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems 26 12 01 Medium Voltage Pad-Mounted Switch 26 12 19 Pad-Mounted, Liquid Filled, Medium Voltage Transformers 26 13 00 Medium Voltage Metal Clad Switchgear 26 13 23 Medium Voltage Motor Control Center 26 22 13 Low Voltage Distribution Transformers 26 24 13 600 Volt Switchboards 26 24 16.02 Lighting and Branch Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 13 Fuses 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 29 13 Enclosed Controllers 26 29 87 Electrical Control Panels 26 36 23 Automatic Transfer Switches 26 41 13 Lightning Protection for Structures 26 50 00 Lighting 27 15 23.01 Fiber Optic Data Network 40 80 00 Commissioning of Process Systems 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems 40 90 01 Instrumentation 40 90 02 Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) System 40 92 13.13 Electrically Operated Primary Control Valves 3/25/2019 00 11 13 - 1 INVITATION TO BIDDERS Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 11 13 1 INVITATION TO BIDDERS 2 3 RECEIPT OF BIDS 4 Sealed bids for the construction of: 5 6 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH II Improvements will be received by the City of 7 Denton Purchasing Office: 8 9 City of Denton 10 Purchasing Division 11 901-B Texas Street 12 Denton, Texas 76209 13 940-349-7100 14 15 until 11:00 A.M. D/CST, Tuesday, May 21, 2019, and bids will be opened publicly and read 16 aloud at 11:00 AM D/CST in the Purchasing Conference Room, 2nd Floor, 901-B Texas Street. 17 18 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK 19 The major work will consist of the (approximate) following: 20 1. Miscellaneous Improvements at the Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant, including: 21 a. Construction of a new 4866-square-foot Administration Building and 1700-square-22 foot High Service Electrical Building 23 b. Architectural and other renovations at the Operations Building, Filter Building, 24 Chemical Building and High Service Pump Station 25 c. Various valve replacements and other piping improvements, including offsite valves 26 near the plant site 27 d. Electrical Switchgear replacement and other electrical improvements 28 e. Road and parking improvements 29 f. SCADA and security improvements 30 g. Various HVAC and plumbing improvements. 31 2. Improvements at the Lake Lewisville Raw Water Pump Station site, including: 32 a. Replacement of main electrical transformers 33 b. Modifications to the lower intake structure (submerged) 34 c. Construction of new 996-square-foot Chemical Feed Building 35 d. Replacement of various valves and other piping improvements 36 e. Architectural, ventilation and other improvements to the pump building 37 f. Construction of a new potable water supply line, approximately 840 feet of 8” and 2” 38 piping. 39 3. Improvements at the Lake Ray Roberts Raw Water Pump Station site, including: 40 a. Construction of a new 980-square-foot Chemical Feed Building and related piping 41 improvements 42 b. Construction of a new potable water supply line, approximately 2800 feet of 4” and 43 smaller piping. 44 45 46 47 48 00 11 13 - 2 INVITATION TO BIDDERS Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1 2 3 DOCUMENT EXAMINATION AND PROCUREMENTS 4 The Bidding and Contract Documents may be examined or obtained on-line by visiting the City 5 of Denton’s Purchasing Division website at http://www.https://www.cityofdenton.com/en-6 us/business/solicitations-contracting and clicking on the “See Open Solicitations” link to the 7 advertised project folders on the Laserfiche Weblink site. The Contract Documents may be 8 downloaded, viewed, and printed by interested contractors and/or suppliers. The contractor is 9 required to fill out the Certificate of Interested Parties Form 1295 and the form must be 10 submitted to the Project Manager before the contract will be presented to the City Council. 11 The form can be obtained at https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/tec/1295-Info.htm . 12 13 PREBID CONFERENCE 14 A prebid conference may be held as described in Section 00 21 13 - INSTRUCTIONS TO 15 BIDDERS at the following location, date, and time: 16 DATE: Wednesday, May 1, 2019 17 TIME: 10:00 AM CST 18 PLACE: 901-B Texas Street 19 Denton, Texas 76209 20 LOCATION: Purchasing Conference Room 21 22 PREBID WALKTHROUGH 23 After the prebid conference, interested parties may reconvene at the Lake Lewisville Water 24 Treatment Plant site, immediately thereafter at approximately 11:00 AM CST for a walkthrough 25 of the project site. 26 27 CITY'S RIGHT TO ACCEPT OR REJECT BIDS 28 City reserves the right to waive irregularities and to accept or reject bids. 29 30 INQUIRIES 31 All inquiries relative to this procurement should be addressed to the following: 32 Attn: Jamie Cogdell, City of Denton 33 Email: jamie.cogdell@cityofdenton.com 34 Phone: 940-349-7133 35 Please email all questions to above email address. Phone calls regarding questions are not 36 recommended. 37 38 ADVERTISEMENT DATES 39 April 17, 2019 40 April 24, 2019 41 42 END OF SECTION 43 00 21 13 - 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 21 13 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 2 Defined Terms 3 4 1.1. Terms used in these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, which are defined in Section 00 72 5 00 - GENERAL CONDITIONS. 6 7 1.2. Certain additional terms used in these INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS have the 8 meanings indicated below which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. 9 10 1.2.1. Bidder: Any person, firm, partnership, company, association, or corporation acting 11 directly through a duly authorized representative, submitting a bid for performing 12 the work contemplated under the Contract Documents. 13 14 1.2.2. Nonresident Bidder: Any person, firm, partnership, company, association, or 15 corporation acting directly through a duly authorized representative, submitting a 16 bid for performing the work contemplated under the Contract Documents whose 17 principal place of business is not in the State of Texas. 18 19 1.2.3. Successful Bidder: The lowest responsible and responsive Bidder to whom City 20 (on the basis of City's evaluation as hereinafter provided) makes an award. 21 22 1.2.4. Purchasing Agent: City designated representative to assist in solicitation of bids 23 from vendors for City contracts. 24 25 2. Copies of Bidding Documents 26 27 2.1. Neither City nor Engineer shall assume any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations 28 resulting from the Bidders use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. 29 30 2.2. City and Engineer in making Bidding Documents available do so only for the purpose of 31 obtaining Bids for the Work and do not authorize or confer a license or grant for any 32 other use. 33 34 3. Minimum Qualifications 35 36 3.1. The following minimum requirements must be demonstrated in order for the submission 37 to be considered responsive. The form can be found in Section 00 45 13 – Bidder’s 38 Minimum Qualification Statement. 39 40 3.1.1. Bidder shall provide documentation demonstrating three (3) years minimum 41 experience providing services similar to those indicated in Section 00 11 13 – 42 Invitation to Bidders. Experience shall include the following: 43 3.1.1.1. Repairs or renovations requiring system isolation and coordination of 44 activities at an active municipal water treatment facility 45 3.1.1.2. Installation and startup of piping, valves and equipment handling potable 46 water for public consumption 47 3.1.1.3. Large, multidiscipline projects which include extensive electrical, 48 instrumentation, architectural and civil work 49 00 21 13 - 2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1 3.1.2. Bidder shall provide documentation of five (5) references from governmental 2 entities for which Bidder has performed similar services to those indicated in 3 Section 00 11 13 – Invitation to Bidders. 4 5 3.1.3. Bidder shall fill out provided safety record questionnaire. 6 7 4. Examination of Bidding and Contract Documents, Other Related Data, and Site 8 9 4.1. Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall: 10 11 4.1.1. Examine and carefully study the Contract Documents and other related data 12 identified in the Bidding Documents (including "technical data" referred to in 13 Paragraph 4.2. below). No information given by City or any representative of the 14 City other than that contained in the Contract Documents and officially 15 promulgated addenda thereto, shall be binding upon the City. 16 17 4.1.2. Visit the site to become familiar with and satisfy Bidder as to the general, local and 18 site conditions that may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the 19 Work. 20 21 4.1.3. Consider federal, state and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, 22 progress, performance or furnishing of the Work. 23 24 4.1.4. Study all: (i) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or 25 contiguous to the Site and all drawings of physical conditions relating to existing 26 surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) that 27 have been identified in the Contract Documents as containing reliable "technical 28 data" and (ii) reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, 29 at the Site that have been identified in the Contract Documents as containing 30 reliable "technical data." 31 32 4.1.5. Be advised that the Contract Documents on file with the City shall constitute all of 33 the information which the City will furnish. All additional information and data 34 which the City will supply after promulgation of the formal Contract Documents 35 shall be issued in the form of written addenda and shall become part of the Contract 36 Documents just as though such addenda were actually written into the original 37 Contract Documents. No information given by the City other than that contained in 38 the Contract Documents and officially promulgated addenda thereto, shall be 39 binding upon the City. 40 41 4.1.6. Perform independent research, investigations, tests, borings, and such other means 42 as may be necessary to gain a complete knowledge of the conditions which will be 43 encountered during the construction of the project. On request, City may provide 44 each Bidder access to the site to conduct such examinations, investigations, 45 explorations, tests and studies as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a 46 Bid. Bidder must fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former 47 conditions upon completion of such explorations, investigations, tests and studies. 48 49 00 21 13 - 3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 4.1.7. Determine the difficulties of the Work and all attending circumstances affecting the 1 cost of doing the Work, time required for its completion, and obtain all information 2 required to make a proposal. Bidders shall rely exclusively and solely upon their 3 own estimates, investigation, research, tests, explorations, and other data which are 4 necessary for full and complete information upon which the proposal is to be based. 5 It is understood that the submission of a proposal is prima-facie evidence that the 6 Bidder has made the investigation, examinations and tests herein required. Claims 7 for additional compensation due to variations between conditions actually 8 encountered in construction and as indicated in the Contract Documents will not be 9 allowed. 10 11 4.1.8. Promptly notify City of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities or discrepancies in or 12 between the Contract Documents and such other related documents. The Contractor 13 shall not take advantage of any gross error or omission in the Contract Documents, 14 and the City shall be permitted to make such corrections or interpretations as may 15 be deemed necessary for fulfillment of the intent of the Contract Documents. 16 17 4.2. Reference is made to Section 00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions for identification of: 18 19 4.2.1. those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to 20 the site which have been utilized by City in preparation of the Contract Documents. 21 The logs of Soil Borings, if any, on the plans are for general information only. 22 Neither the City nor the Engineer guarantee that the data shown is representative of 23 conditions which actually exist. 24 25 4.2.2. those drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and 26 subsurface structures (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to 27 the site that have been utilized by City in preparation of the Contract Documents. 28 29 4.2.3. copies of such reports and drawings will be made available by City to any Bidder 30 on request. Those reports and drawings may not be part of the Contract 31 Documents, but the "technical data" contained therein upon which Bidder is entitled 32 to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02. of the General Conditions has been identified 33 and established in Paragraph SC 4.02 of the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is 34 responsible for any interpretation or conclusion drawn from any "technical data" or 35 any other data, interpretations, opinions or information. 36 37 4.3. The submission of a Bid will constitute an incontrovertible representation by Bidder (i) 38 that Bidder has complied with every requirement of this Paragraph 4, (ii) that without 39 exception the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the 40 Contract Documents and applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences or 41 procedures of construction (if any) that may be shown or indicated or expressly required 42 by the Contract Documents, (iii) that Bidder has given City written notice of all 43 conflicts, errors, ambiguities and discrepancies in the Contract Documents and the 44 written resolutions thereof by City are acceptable to Bidder, and when said conflicts, 45 etc., have not been resolved through the interpretations by City as described in 46 Paragraph 6., and (iv) that the Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate 47 and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performing and furnishing the 48 Work. 49 50 00 21 13 - 4 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 4 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 4.4. The provisions of this Paragraph 4, inclusive, do not apply to Asbestos, Polychlorinated 1 biphenyls (PCBs), Petroleum, Hazardous Waste or Radioactive Material covered by 2 Paragraph 4.06. of the General Conditions, unless specifically identified in the Contract 3 Documents. 4 5 4.5. The Bidder acknowledges and agrees to comply with the requirements of City Ethics 6 Ordinance No. 18-157. 7 8 5. Availability of Lands for Work, Etc. 9 10 5.1. The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights-of-way and easements for 11 access thereto and other lands designated for use by Contractor in performing the Work 12 are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto 13 required for temporary construction facilities, construction equipment or storage of 14 materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work are to be obtained and paid for 15 by Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing 16 facilities are to be obtained and paid for by City unless otherwise provided in the 17 Contract Documents. 18 19 5.2. Outstanding right-of-way, easements, and/or permits to be acquired by the City are listed 20 in Paragraph SC 4.01 of the Supplementary Conditions. In the event the necessary right-21 of-way, easements, and/or permits are not obtained, the City reserves the right to cancel 22 the award of contract at any time before the Bidder begins any construction work on the 23 project. 24 25 5.3. The Bidder shall be prepared to commence construction without all executed right-of-26 way, easements, and/or permits, and shall submit a schedule to the City of how 27 construction will proceed in the other areas of the project that do not require permits 28 and/or easements. 29 30 6. Interpretations and Addenda 31 32 6.1. All questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents are to be directed to 33 City in writing on or before 2 p.m., the Monday prior to the Bid opening. Questions 34 received after this day WILL NOT be responded to. Interpretations or clarifications 35 considered necessary by City in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda 36 delivered to all parties recorded by City as having received the Bidding Documents. 37 Only questions answered by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other 38 interpretations or clarifications will be without legal effect. 39 40 Address questions to: 41 42 City of Denton 43 901-B Texas Street 44 Denton, TX 76209 45 Attn: Jamie Cogdell, Purchasing Division 46 Email: jamie.cogdell@cityofdenton.com 47 Phone: 940-349-7133 48 49 00 21 13 - 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 6.2. Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by 1 City. 2 3 6.3. Addenda or clarifications may be posted via the City’s online hosting site, which can be 4 located by visiting the City of Denton’s Purchasing Division website at 5 http://www.https://www.cityofdenton.com/en-us/business/solicitations-contracting and 6 clicking on the “See Open Solicitations” link. 7 8 6.4. A prebid conference may be held at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or 9 INVITATION TO BIDDERS. Representatives of City will be present to discuss the 10 Project. Bidders are encouraged to attend and participate in the conference. City will 11 transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addenda as City considers necessary 12 in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied 13 upon and will not be binding or legally effective. 14 15 7. Bid Security 16 17 7.1. Each Bid for projects over $100,000, must be accompanied by Bid Bond made payable to 18 City in an amount of five (5) percent of Bidder's maximum Bid price on form attached, 19 issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01 of the General 20 Conditions, and in accordance with Texas Local Government Code 262.032. 21 22 7.2. The Bid Bond of all Bidders will be retained until the conditions of the Notice of Award 23 have been satisfied. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the complete 24 Agreement within 10 days after the Notice of Award, City may consider Bidder to be in 25 default, rescind the Notice of Award, and the Bid Bond of that Bidder will be forfeited. 26 Such forfeiture shall be City's exclusive remedy if Bidder defaults. The Bid Bond of all 27 other Bidders whom City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award 28 will be retained by City until final contract execution. 29 30 8. Contract Times 31 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, Milestones are to be achieved in 32 accordance with the General Requirements and the Work is to be completed and ready for 33 Final Acceptance is set forth in the Agreement or incorporated therein by reference to the 34 attached Bid Form. 35 36 9. Liquidated Damages 37 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Agreement. 38 39 10. Substitute and "Or-Equal" Items 40 The Contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of materials and equipment described in the 41 Bidding Documents without consideration of possible substitute or "or-equal" items. 42 Whenever it is indicated or specified in the Bidding Documents that a "substitute" or "or-43 equal" item of material or equipment may be furnished or used by Contractor if acceptable to 44 City, application for such acceptance will not be considered by City until after the Effective 45 Date of the Agreement. The procedure for submission of any such application by Contractor 46 and consideration by City is set forth in Paragraphs 6.05A., 6.05B. and 6.05C. of the General 47 Conditions and is supplemented in Section 01 25 00 of the General Requirements. 48 49 11. Subcontractors, Suppliers and Others 50 51 00 21 13 - 6 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 6 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 11.1. No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, other person 1 or organization against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. 2 3 12. Bid Form 4 5 12.1. The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents; excel format must be used 6 when submitting. 7 8 12.2. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed and the Bid Form signed. Erasures or 9 alterations shall be initialed by the person signing the Bid Form. A Bid price shall be 10 indicated for each Bid item, alternative, and unit price item listed therein. In the case 11 of optional alternatives, the words "No Bid," "No Change," or "Not Applicable" may 12 be entered. Bidder shall state the prices, in both words and numerals, for which the 13 Bidder proposes to do the work contemplated or furnish materials required. If 14 handwritten, all prices shall be written legibly. In case of discrepancy between price 15 in written/typed words and the price in written/typed numerals, the price in 16 written/typed words shall govern. 17 18 12.3. Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a 19 vice-president or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to 20 sign, as provided herein, Section 00 45 43 – Corporate Resolution of Authorizing 21 Signatories. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below 22 the signature. 23 24 12.4. Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a 25 partner, whose title must appear under the signature accompanied by evidence of 26 authority to sign. The official address of the partnership shall be shown below the 27 signature. 28 29 12.5. Bids by limited liability companies shall be executed in the name of the firm by a 30 member and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of formation of 31 the firm and the official address of the firm shall be shown. 32 33 12.6. Bids by individuals shall show the Bidder's name and official address. 34 35 12.7. Bids by joint ventures shall be executed by each joint venturer in the manner 36 indicated on the Bid Form. The official address of the joint venture shall be shown. 37 38 12.8. All names shall be typed below the signature. 39 40 12.9. The Bid shall contain an acknowledgement of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of 41 which shall be filled in on the Bid Form. 42 43 12.10. Postal and e-mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the 44 Bid shall be shown. 45 46 12.11. Evidence of authority to conduct business as a Nonresident Bidder in the state of 47 Texas shall be provided in accordance with Section 00 43 37 – Vendor Compliance 48 to State Law Non Resident Bidder. 49 50 00 21 13 - 7 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 7 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 13. Submission of Bids 1 2 13.1. Bids may be submitted electronically or by hard copy. Electronic submittals may be 3 emailed to ebids@cityofdenton.com with the Bid Number and solicitation name in 4 the subject line. Bidder shall consolidate attachments as much as possible, and 5 electronic bids shall not exceed 35MB total for attachments. Emails received by the 6 City will remain unopened until after the due date and time. 7 8 13.2. Hard copies of bid bonds shall be submitted for both electronic and hard copy 9 submissions. Bonds must be submitted in a sealed envelope before the due date and 10 time as indicated in Section 00 11 13 – Invitation to Bidders. 11 12 13.3. Bids shall be submitted on the prescribed Bid Form, provided with the Bidding 13 Documents, at the time and place indicated in the Advertisement or INVITATION 14 TO BIDDERS, and shall be enclosed in an opaque sealed envelope, marked with the 15 Bid Number, Project title, the name and address of Bidder, and accompanied by the 16 Bid security and other required documents, as indicated in Section 00 41 00 – Bid 17 Form. If the Bid is sent through the mail or other delivery system, the sealed 18 envelope shall be enclosed in a separate envelope with the notation "BID 19 ENCLOSED" on the face of it. Hard copy submissions shall also include a flash 20 drive, containing a complete copy of the response with bid form in excel format, 21 and be addressed as follows: 22 23 City of Denton 24 901-B Texas Street 25 Denton, TX 76209 26 Attn: Materials Management/Purchasing Division, IFB 701327 00 21 13 - 8 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 8 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 Modification and Withdrawal of Bids 1 2 13.4. Bids addressed to the Purchasing Agent and filed with the Purchasing Division may 3 be withdrawn prior to the time set for bid opening. A request for withdrawal must be 4 made in writing by an appropriate document duly executed in the manner that a Bid 5 must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted at any 6 time prior to the opening of Bids. After all Bids not requested for withdrawal are 7 opened and publicly read aloud, the Bids for which a withdrawal request has been 8 properly filed may, at the option of the City, be returned unopened. 9 10 13.5. Bidders may modify their Bid by electronic communication at any time prior to the 11 time set for the closing of Bid receipt. 12 13 14. Opening of Bids 14 Bids will be opened and read aloud publicly at the place where Bids are to be submitted. An 15 abstract of the amounts of the base Bids and major alternates (if any) will be made available 16 to Bidders after the opening of Bids. 17 18 15. Bids to Remain Subject to Acceptance 19 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the time period specified for Notice of Award 20 and execution and delivery of a complete Agreement by Successful Bidder. City may, at 21 City's sole discretion, release any Bid and nullify the Bid security prior to that date. 22 23 16. Evaluation of Bids and Award of Contract 24 25 16.1. City reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation the rights 26 to reject any or all nonconforming, nonresponsive, unbalanced or conditional Bids 27 and to reject the Bid of any Bidder if City believes that it would not be in the best 28 interest of the Project to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is 29 not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to 30 meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by City. City also reserves 31 the right to waive informalities not involving price, contract time or changes in the 32 Work with the Successful Bidder. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units 33 of Work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies 34 between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will 35 be resolved in favor of the correct sum. Discrepancies between words and figures 36 will be resolved in favor of the words. 37 38 16.1.1. Any or all bids will be rejected if City has reason to believe that collusion exists 39 among the Bidders, Bidder is an interested party to any litigation against City, 40 City or Bidder may have a claim against the other or be engaged in litigation, 41 Bidder is in arrears on any existing contract or has defaulted on a previous 42 contract, Bidder has performed a prior contract in an unsatisfactory manner, or 43 Bidder has uncompleted work which in the judgment of the City will prevent or 44 hinder the prompt completion of additional work if awarded. 45 46 00 21 13 - 9 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 9 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 16.2. City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and 1 other persons and organizations proposed for those portions of the Work as to which 2 the identity of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations must 3 be submitted as provided in the Contract Documents or upon the request of the City. 4 City also may consider the operating costs, maintenance requirements, performance 5 data and guarantees of major items of materials and equipment proposed for 6 incorporation in the Work when such data is required to be submitted prior to the 7 Notice of Award. 8 9 16.3. City may conduct such investigations as City deems necessary to assist in the 10 evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications, and financial 11 ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons and 12 organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract 13 Documents to City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 14 15 16.4. Contractor shall perform with his own organization, work of a value not less than 16 35% of the value embraced on the Contract, unless otherwise approved by the City. 17 Contractor shall complete and submit Section 00 43 36 – Proposed Subcontractors 18 Form. 19 20 16.5. If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to lowest responsible and 21 responsive Bidder whose evaluation by City indicates that the award will be in the 22 best interests of the City. 23 24 16.6. Pursuant to Texas Government Code Chapter 2252.001, the City will not award 25 contract to a Nonresident Bidder unless the Nonresident Bidder’s bid is lower than 26 the lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas Bidder by the same amount that a 27 Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a Nonresident Bidder to obtain a 28 comparable contract in the state in which the nonresident’s principal place of 29 business is located. 30 31 16.7. A contract is not awarded until formal City Council authorization. If the Contract is 32 to be awarded, City will award the Contract within 120 days after the day of the Bid 33 opening unless extended in writing. No other act of City or others will constitute 34 acceptance of a Bid. Upon the contractor award a Notice of Award will be issued by 35 the City. 36 37 16.8. Failure or refusal to comply with the requirements may result in rejection of Bid. 38 39 16.9. Contractor is required to fill out the Certificate of Interested Parties Form 1295 and 40 the form must be submitted to the City Project Manager before the contract will be 41 presented to the City Council. The form can be obtained at 42 https://www.ethics.state.tx.us/tec/1295-Info.htm. 43 44 45 00 21 13 - 10 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 10 of 10 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 17. Signing of Agreement 1 When City issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the 2 required number of unsigned counterparts of the Agreement. Within 14 days thereafter 3 Contractor shall sign and deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement to 4 City with the required Bonds, Certificates of Insurance, and all other required documentation. 5 City shall thereafter deliver one fully signed counterpart to Contractor. 6 7 END OF SECTION 8 00 35 13 - 1 CONFLICT OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT Page 1 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 35 13 1 CONFLICT OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT 2 00 35 13 - 2 CONFLICT OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT Page 2 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 CONFLICT OF INTEREST QUESTIONNAIRE - FORM CIQ For vendor or other person doing business with local governmental entity This questionnaire reflects changes made to the law by H.B. 23, 84th Leg., Regular Session. This questionnaire is being filed in accordance with Chapter 176, Local Government Code, by a vendor who has a business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a) with a local governmental entity and the vendor meets requirements under Section 176.006(a). By law this questionnaire must be filed with the records administrator of the local government entity not later than the 7th business day after the date the vendor becomes aware of facts that require the statement to be filed. See Section 176.006(a-1), Local Government Code. A vendor commits an offense if the vendor knowingly violates Section 176.006, Local Government Code. An offense under this section is a misdemeanor. 1 Name of vendor who has a business relationship with local governmental entity. 2 Check this box if you are filing an update to a previously filed questionnaire. (The law requires that you file an updated completed questionnaire with the appropriate filing authority not later than the 7th business day after the date on which you became aware that the originally filed questionnaire was incomplete or inaccurate.) 3 Name of local government officer about whom the information in this section is being disclosed. Name of Officer This section, (item 3 including subparts A, B, C & D), must be completed for each officer with whom the vendor has an employment or other business relationship as defined by Section 176.001(1-a), Local Government Code. Attach additional pages to this Form CIQ as necessary. A. Is the local government officer named in this section receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from the vendor? Yes No B. Is the vendor receiving or likely to receive taxable income, other than investment income, from or at the direction of the local government officer named in this section AND the taxable income is not received from the local governmental entity? Yes No C. Is the filer of this questionnaire employed by a corporation or other business entity with respect to which the local government officer serves as an officer or director, or holds an ownership of one percent or more? Yes No D. Describe each employment or business and family relationship with the local government officer named in this section. 4 I have no Conflict of Interest to disclose. 5 00 35 13 - 3 CONFLICT OF INTEREST AFFIDAVIT Page 3 of 3 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 END OF SECTION 1 Signature of vendor doing business with the governmental entity Date 00 41 00 - 1 BID FORM Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 41 00 1 BID FORM 2 TO: Jamie Cogdell 3 c/o: Purchasing Division 4 901-B Texas Street 5 Denton, Texas 76209 6 7 FOR: Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 8 9 1 Enter Into Agreement 10 11 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement 12 with City in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform and furnish all Work as 13 specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the Bid Price and within the Contract Time 14 indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract 15 Documents. 16 17 2 BIDDER Acknowledgements and Certification 18 19 2.1 In submitting this Bid, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the INVITATION 20 TO BIDDERS and INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, including without limitation those 21 dealing with the disposition of Bid Bond. 22 2.2 Bidder is aware of all costs to provide the required insurance, will do so pending contract 23 award, and will provide a valid insurance certificate meeting all requirements within 14 24 days of notification of award. 25 2.3 Bidder certifies that this Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any 26 undisclosed individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive 27 agreement or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation. 28 2.4 Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit a false 29 or sham Bid. 30 2.5 Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding. 31 2.6 Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in competing 32 for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph: 33 a. "corrupt practice" means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of any thing 34 of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process. 35 36 b. "fraudulent practice" means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to 37 influence the bidding process to the detriment of City (b) to establish Bid prices 38 at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive City of the benefits of free 39 and open competition. 40 41 c. "collusive practice" means a scheme or arrangement between two or more 42 Bidders, with or without the knowledge of City, a purpose of which is to 43 establish Bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels. 44 45 d. "coercive practice" means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly, 46 persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or 47 affect the execution of the Contract. 48 49 00 41 00 - 2 BID FORM Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 2.7 The Bidder acknowledges and agrees to comply with the requirements of City Ethics 1 Ordinance No. 18-757. 2 3 3 Time of Completion 4 5 3.1 The Work will be complete for Final Acceptance within 380 days after the date when the 6 Contract Time commences to run as provided in Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions. 7 3.2 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of 8 failure to complete the Work {and/or achievement of Milestones} within the times 9 specified in the Agreement. 10 11 4 Attached to this Bid 12 13 The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Bid: 14 a. This Bid Form 15 b. Required Bid Bond, Section 00 43 13 issued by a surety meeting the requirements of 16 Paragraph 5.01 of the General Conditions. 17 c. Proposal Form Section 18 d. Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Bidder, Section 00 43 37 19 e. Conflict of Interest Affidavit, Section 00 35 13 20 f. Proposed Subcontractors Form, Section 00 43 36 21 g. Bidders Minimum Qualification Statement, Section 00 45 13 22 h. Corporate Resolution of Authorized Signatories, Section 00 45 43 23 i. Any additional documents that may be required by Section 12 of the Instructions to 24 Bidders 25 26 5 Total Bid Amount 27 28 5.1 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the 29 following bid amount. In the space provided below, please enter the total bid amount for 30 this project. Only this figure will be read publicly by the City at the bid opening. 31 5.2 It is understood and agreed by the Bidder in signing this proposal that the total bid amount 32 entered below is subject to verification and/or modification by multiplying the unit bid 33 prices for each pay item by the respective estimated quantities shown in this proposal and 34 then totaling all of the extended amounts. 35 36 Bid Item No. 1 37 38 For construction of improvements at or near the Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant and all 39 Work not included in other Bid Items, as shown on the Plans or as otherwise required by these 40 Contract Documents, the amount of _______________________________________________ 41 _________________________________________________________________ Dollars. 42 43 $ _________________ 44 45 46 00 41 00 - 3 BID FORM Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 Bid Item No. 2 1 2 For construction of improvements at or near the site of the Lake Lewisville Raw Water Pump 3 Station, including intake improvements in Lake Lewisville and potable water piping to the site, as 4 shown on the Plans or as otherwise required by these Contract Documents, the amount of 5 ________________________________________________________________________ 6 _________________________________________________________________ Dollars. 7 8 $ _________________ 9 10 Bid Item No. 3 11 12 For construction of improvements at or near the site of the Lake Ray Roberts Raw Water Pump 13 Station, including raw water piping improvements and potable water piping to the site from the 14 Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant, as shown on the Plans or as otherwise required by 15 these Contract Documents, the amount of 16 ________________________________________________________________________ 17 _________________________________________________________________ Dollars. 18 19 $ _________________ 20 21 22 Total Bid Amount (Bid Items 1-3): $____________________________ 23 24 25 Owner Selected Alternates: 26 27 The Owner Selected Alternates listed below may be selected by the Owner after the opening of 28 Bids. 29 30 Bid Alternate A: 31 32 Contingency Allowance for unanticipated Work required at the Owner’s direction only, as 33 described in Section 01 29 01, “Measurement and Payment”, the amount of 34 One Hundred Fifty Thousand ______________________________ Dollars. 35 36 $ 150,000______ 37 38 39 40 41 00 41 00 - 4 BID FORM Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 6 Bid Submittal 1 2 This Bid is submitted on _____________________________, 20___ by the entity named below. 3 4 5 Respectfully submitted, 6 7 By: ______________________________ 8 (Signature) 9 10 _________________________________ 11 (Printed Name) 12 13 Title: _____________________________ 14 15 Company: _________________________ 16 17 Address: __________________________ 18 ___________________________ 19 State of Incorporation: _______________ 20 Email: ____________________________ 21 Phone: ____________________________ 22 Receipt is acknowledged of the following Addenda: Initial Addendum No. 1: Addendum No. 2: Addendum No. 3: Addendum No. 4: Exhibit 1 Respondent's Business Name Principal Place of Business (City and State) Services Proposal Pricing: ITEM Quantity UOM Type of Service Requested Cost of Service 1 LS EA For construction of improvements at or near the Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant and all Work not included in other Bid Items, as shown on the Plans or as otherwise required by these Contract Documents 2 LS EA For construction of improvements at or near the site of the Lake Lewisville Raw Water Pump Station, including intake improvements in Lake Lewisville and potable water piping to the site, as shown on the Plans or as otherwise required by these Contract Documents 3 LS EA For construction of improvements at or near the site of the Lake Ray Roberts Raw Water Pump Station, including raw water piping improvements and potable water piping to the site from the Lake Ray Roberts Water Treatment Plant, as shown on the Plans or as otherwise required by these Contract Documents $0.00Total Cost IFB 7013 Pricing Sheet for LLWTP Phase II Improvements The respondent shall complete the following section, which directly corresponds to the specifications. The contractor shall not make changes to this format. 00 43 13 - 1 BID BOND Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 43 13 1 BID BOND 2 3 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 4 That we, (Bidder Name)___________________________________________________, 5 known as “Principal” herein, and (Surety Name)_____________________________________, a 6 corporate surety duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as “Surety” herein, 7 are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a municipal corporation created pursuant to 8 the laws of Texas, known as “City” herein, in the penal sum of five percent (5%) of Bidder’s 9 maximum bid price, in lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton County, 10 Texas for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, 11 executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. 12 WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a proposal to perform work for the following 13 project designated as 14 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements . 15 16 NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the City shall award the 17 Contract for the foregoing project to the Principal, and the Principal shall satisfy all 18 requirements and conditions required for the execution of the Contract and shall enter into the 19 Contract in writing with the City in accordance with the terms of such same, then this obligation 20 shall be and become null and void. If, however, the Principal fails to execute such Contract in 21 accordance with the terms of same or fails to satisfy all requirements and conditions required 22 for the execution of the Contract, this bond shall become the property of the City, without 23 recourse of the Principal and/or Surety, not to exceed the penalty hereof, and shall be used to 24 compensate City for the difference between Principal’s total bid amount and the next selected 25 bidder’s total bid amount. 26 PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in 27 Denton County, Texas or the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas, 28 Sherman Division. 29 30 00 43 13 - 2 BID BOND Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have SIGNED and SEALED this 1 instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the _______ day of 2 ____________________, 20___. 3 4 5 By: ___________________________________________________________________________ 6 (Principal Name) 7 8 ______________________________________________________________________________ 9 (Signature and Title of Principal) 10 11 *By: __________________________________________________________________________ 12 (Surety Name) 13 14 ______________________________________________________________________________ 15 (Signature of Attorney-in-Fact) 16 17 *Attach Power of Attorney (Surety) for Attorney-in-Fact 18 END OF SECTION 19 Impressed Surety Seal 00 43 36 - 1 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 43 36 1 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM 2 3 Each Bidder for a City procurement is required to complete the information below by identifying 4 the proposed subcontractors whom they intend to utilize and the approximate percentage of 5 the overall contract that will be allocated to each entity. Bidder is reminded that a minimum of 6 35% of the Contract must be performed by Bidder’s company. 7 8 Company Name Type of Work to be Performed Overall Contract Percentage (%) General Contractor: Subcontractors: 9 10 The undersigned hereby certifies that the subcontractors described in the table above 11 will be utilized for this project at the approximate percentage levels indicated above. 12 13 BIDDER: 14 15 _____________________________________ By: ___________________________________ 16 00 43 36 - 2 PROPOSED SUBCONTRACTORS FORM Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 Company (Please Print) 1 2 _____________________________________ Signature: ______________________________ 3 Address 4 5 _____________________________________ Title: __________________________________ 6 City/State/Zip (Please Print) 7 8 Date: __________________________________ 9 10 END OF SECTION 11 00 43 37 - 1 VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 43 37 1 VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW NON- RESIDENT BIDDER 2 3 Texas Government Code Chapter 2252 was adopted for the award of contracts to nonresident 4 bidders. This law provides that, in order to be awarded a contract as low bidder, nonresident 5 bidders (out-of-state contractors whose corporate offices or principal place of business are 6 outside the State of Texas) bid projects for construction, improvements, supplies or services in 7 Texas at an amount lower than the lowest Texas resident bidder by the same amount that a 8 Texas resident bidder would be required to underbid a nonresident bidder in order to obtain a 9 comparable contract in the State which the nonresident’s principal place of business is located. 10 The appropriate blanks in Section A must be filled out by all nonresident bidders in order for 11 your bid to meet specifications. The failure of nonresident bidders to do so will automatically 12 disqualify that bidder. Resident bidders must check the box in Section B. 13 A. Nonresident bidders in the State of ______________________, our principal place of 14 business, are required to be ________________ percent lower than resident bidders by 15 State Law. A copy of the statute is attached. 16 Nonresident bidders in the State of _____________________, our principal place of 17 business, are not required to underbid resident bidders. 18 B. The principal place of business of our company or our parent company or majority owner is 19 in the State of Texas. 20 21 BIDDER: 22 23 _____________________________________ By: ___________________________________ 24 Company (Please Print) 25 26 _____________________________________ Signature: ______________________________ 27 Address 28 29 _____________________________________ Title: __________________________________ 30 City/State/Zip (Please Print) 31 32 00 43 37 - 2 VENDOR COMPLIANCE TO STATE LAW Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 Date: __________________________________ 1 2 END OF SECTION 3 00 45 13 - 1 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 1 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 45 13 1 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT 2 3 List three (3) Government references, other than the City of Denton, who can verify the quality of service 4 your company provides. The City prefers customers of similar size and scope of work to this solicitation. 5 6 REFERENCE ONE 7 GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME: 8 LOCATION: 9 CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE: 10 TELEPHONE NUMBER: 11 SCOPE OF WORK: 12 CONTRACT PERIOD: 13 14 REFERENCE TWO 15 GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME: 16 LOCATION: 17 CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE: 18 TELEPHONE NUMBER: 19 SCOPE OF WORK: 20 CONTRACT PERIOD: 21 22 REFERENCE THREE 23 GOVERNMENT/COMPANY NAME: 24 LOCATION: 25 CONTACT PERSON AND TITLE: 26 TELEPHONE NUMBER: 27 SCOPE OF WORK: 28 CONTRACT PERIOD: 29 30 31 32 33 34 00 45 13 - 2 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 2 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 PROJECT INFORMATION FORM 1 2 Detail five (5) of the most recent projects Bidder’s firm has completed providing 3 services similar to this project: 4 5 Project #1 6 Name of Project: 7 8 Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number: 9 10 Original Contract Amount: 11 12 Final Contract Amount: 13 14 Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days): 15 16 Start Date for Project: 17 18 Final Completion Date for Project: 19 20 Number of Days to complete (calendar days): 21 22 23 Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues, 24 successes, or potential problems and solutions encountered. 25 26 _________________________________________________________________________________________27 _________________________________________________________________________________________28 _________________________________________________________________________________________29 _________________________________________________________________________________________30 _________________________________________________________________________________________31 _________________________________________________________________________________________32 _________________________________________________________________________________________33 _________________________________________________________________________________________34 _________________________________________________________________________________________35 _________________________________________________________________________________________36 _________________________________________________________________________________________37 _________________________________________________________________________________________ 38 39 00 45 13 - 3 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 3 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1 PROJECT INFORMATION FORM 2 3 4 5 6 Project #2 7 Name of Project: 8 9 Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number: 10 11 Original Contract Amount: 12 13 Final Contract Amount: 14 15 Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days): 16 17 Start Date for Project: 18 19 Final Completion Date for Project: 20 21 Number of Days to complete (calendar days): 22 23 24 Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues, 25 successes, or potential problems and solutions encountered. 26 27 _________________________________________________________________________________________28 _________________________________________________________________________________________29 _________________________________________________________________________________________30 _________________________________________________________________________________________31 _________________________________________________________________________________________32 _________________________________________________________________________________________33 _________________________________________________________________________________________34 _________________________________________________________________________________________35 _________________________________________________________________________________________36 _________________________________________________________________________________________37 _________________________________________________________________________________________38 _________________________________________________________________________________________39 _________________________________________________________________________________________40 __ 41 42 00 45 13 - 4 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 4 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1 PROJECT INFORMATION FORM 2 3 4 5 Project #3 6 Name of Project: 7 8 Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number: 9 10 Original Contract Amount: 11 12 Final Contract Amount: 13 14 Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days): 15 16 Start Date for Project: 17 18 Final Completion Date for Project: 19 20 Number of Days to complete (calendar days): 21 22 23 Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues, 24 successes, or potential problems and solutions encountered. 25 26 _________________________________________________________________________________________27 _________________________________________________________________________________________28 _________________________________________________________________________________________29 _________________________________________________________________________________________30 _________________________________________________________________________________________31 _________________________________________________________________________________________32 _________________________________________________________________________________________33 _________________________________________________________________________________________34 _________________________________________________________________________________________35 _________________________________________________________________________________________36 _________________________________________________________________________________________37 _________________________________________________________________________________________38 _________________________________________________________________________________________39 __ 40 41 00 45 13 - 5 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 5 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1 PROJECT INFORMATION FORM 2 3 4 5 Project #4 6 Name of Project: 7 8 Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number: 9 10 Original Contract Amount: 11 12 Final Contract Amount: 13 14 Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days): 15 16 Start Date for Project: 17 18 Final Completion Date for Project: 19 20 Number of Days to complete (calendar days): 21 22 23 Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues, 24 successes, or potential problems and solutions encountered. 25 26 _________________________________________________________________________________________27 _________________________________________________________________________________________28 _________________________________________________________________________________________29 _________________________________________________________________________________________30 _________________________________________________________________________________________31 _________________________________________________________________________________________32 _________________________________________________________________________________________33 _________________________________________________________________________________________34 _________________________________________________________________________________________35 _________________________________________________________________________________________36 _________________________________________________________________________________________37 _________________________________________________________________________________________38 _________________________________________________________________________________________39 __ 40 41 00 45 13 - 6 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 6 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1 PROJECT INFORMATION FORM 2 3 4 5 Project #5 6 Name of Project: 7 8 Project Owner Name, Address and Phone Number: 9 10 Original Contract Amount: 11 12 Final Contract Amount: 13 14 Contract Time Allotted (Calendar Days): 15 16 Start Date for Project: 17 18 Final Completion Date for Project: 19 20 Number of Days to complete (calendar days): 21 22 23 Detail the project, including size, length, and materials used. Also describe any known contractual issues, 24 successes, or potential problems and solutions encountered. 25 26 _________________________________________________________________________________________27 _________________________________________________________________________________________28 _________________________________________________________________________________________29 _________________________________________________________________________________________30 _________________________________________________________________________________________31 _________________________________________________________________________________________32 _________________________________________________________________________________________33 _________________________________________________________________________________________34 _________________________________________________________________________________________35 _________________________________________________________________________________________36 _________________________________________________________________________________________37 _________________________________________________________________________________________38 _________________________________________________________________________________________39 __ 40 41 00 45 13 - 7 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 7 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SAFETY RECORD QUESTIONNAIRE 1 2 The City of Denton desires to avail itself of the benefits of Section 252.0435 of the Local 3 Government Code, and consider the safety records of potential contractors prior to award of City 4 contracts. Pursuant to Section 252.0435 of the Local Government Code, the City of Denton has 5 adopted the following written definition and criteria for accurately determining the safety record 6 of a respondent prior to awarding City contracts. 7 8 The definition and criteria for determining the safety record of a respondent for this consideration 9 shall be: 10 11 The City of Denton shall consider the safety record of the respondent in determining the 12 responsibility thereof. The City may consider any incidence involving worker safety or 13 safety of the citizens of the City of Denton, be it related or caused by environmental, 14 mechanical, operational, supervision or any other cause or factor. Specifically, the City 15 may consider, among other things: 16 A. Complaints to, or final orders entered by, the Occupational Safety and Health 17 Review Commission (OSHRC), against the respondent for violations of OSHA 18 regulations within the past three (3) years. 19 B. Citations (as defined below) from an Environmental Protection Agency (as 20 defined below) for violations within the past five (5) years. Environmental 21 Protection Agencies include, but are not necessarily limited to, the U.S. Army 22 Corps of Engineers (USACOE), the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (USFWS), the 23 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), the Texas Commission on 24 Environmental Quality (TCEQ), the Texas Natural Resource Conservation 25 Commission (TNRCC) (predecessor to the TCEQ), the Texas Department of 26 Health (TDH), the Texas Parks and Wildlife Department (TPWD), the Structural 27 Pest Control Board (SPCB), agencies of local governments responsible for 28 enforcing environmental protection or worker safety related laws or regulations, 29 and similar regulatory agencies of other states of the United States. Citations 30 include notices of violation, notices of enforcement, suspension/revocations of 31 state or federal licenses or registrations, fines assessed, pending criminal 32 complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final 33 orders, and judicial final judgments. 34 C. Convictions of a criminal offense within the past ten (10) years, which resulted in 35 bodily harm or death. 36 D. Any other safety related matter deemed by the City Council to be material in 37 determining the responsibility of the respondent and his or her ability to perform 38 the services or goods required by the solicitation documents in a safe 39 environment, both for the workers and other employees of respondent and the 40 citizens of the City of Denton. 41 42 In order to obtain proper information from respondents so that City of Denton may consider the 43 safety records of potential contractors prior to awarding bids on City contracts, City of Denton 44 requires that respondents answer the following three (3) questions and submit them with their 45 submissions: 46 47 48 00 45 13 - 8 BIDDER'S MINIMUM QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Page 8 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 QUESTION ONE 1 2 Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the 3 respondent, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received 4 citations for violations of OSHA within the past three (3) years? 5 6 YES NO 7 8 If the respondent has indicated YES for question number one above, the respondent must provide 9 to City of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each such 10 citation: 11 12 Date of offense, location of establishment inspected, category of offense, final disposition of 13 offense, if any, and penalty assessed. 14 15 QUESTION TWO 16 17 Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by the 18 respondent, or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership or institution, received 19 citations for violations of environmental protection laws or regulations, of any kind or type, 20 within the past five years? Citations include notice of violation, notice of enforcement, 21 suspension/revocations of state or federal licenses, or registrations, fines assessed, pending 22 criminal complaints, indictments, or convictions, administrative orders, draft orders, final orders, 23 and judicial final judgments. 24 25 YES NO 26 27 If the respondent has indicated YES for question number two above, the respondent must provide 28 to City of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each such 29 conviction: 30 31 Date of offense or occurrence, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition 32 of offense, if any, and penalty assessed. 33 34 QUESTION THREE 35 36 Has the respondent, or the firm, corporation, partnership, or institution represented by respondent, 37 or anyone acting for such firm, corporation, partnership, or institution, ever been convicted, 38 within the past ten (10) years, of a criminal offense which resulted in serious bodily injury or 39 death? 40 41 YES NO 42 43 If the respondent has indicated YES for question number three above, the respondent must 44 provide to City of Denton, with its submission, the following information with respect to each 45 such conviction: 46 Date of offense, location where offense occurred, type of offense, final disposition of offense, if 47 any, and penalty assessed. 48 END OF SECTION 49 00 45 26 - 1 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW Page 1 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 45 26 1 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW 2 3 Pursuant to Texas Labor Code Section 406.096(a), as amended, Contractor certifies that it 4 provides worker’s compensation insurance coverage for all of its employees employed on Lake 5 Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements. Contractor further certifies that, 6 pursuant to Texas Labor Code, Section 406.096(b), as amended, it will provide to City its 7 subcontractor’s certificates of compliance with worker’s compensation coverage. 8 9 CONTRACTOR: 10 11 _____________________________________ By: ___________________________________ 12 Company (Please Print) 13 14 _____________________________________ Signature: ______________________________ 15 Address 16 17 _____________________________________ Title: __________________________________ 18 City/State/Zip (Please Print) 19 20 21 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 22 23 COUNTY OF DENTON § 24 25 BEFORE ME, the undersigned authority, on this day personally appeared 26 ___________________________________, known to me to be the person whose name is 27 subscribed to the foregoing instrument, and acknowledged to me that he/she executed the 28 same as the act and deed of ____________________________________ for the purposes and 29 consideration therein expressed and in the capacity therein stated. 30 31 GIVEN UNDER MY HAND AND SEAL OF OFFICE this ____________day of 32 _______________________, 20__. 33 34 35 00 45 26 - 2 CONTRACTOR COMPLIANCE WITH WORKER'S COMPENSATION LAW Page 2 of 2 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 __________________________________ 1 Notary Public in and for the State of Texas 2 3 END OF SECTION 4 5 00 52 43 - 1 Agreement Page 1 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 52 43 1 AGREEMENT 2 THIS AGREEMENT, authorized on ______________is made by and between the City of Denton, a 3 Texas home rule municipality, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager, (“City”), 4 and ______________________________________________________________, authorized to 5 do business in Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized representative, (“Contractor”). 6 City and Contractor, in consideration of the mutual covenants hereinafter set forth, agree as 7 follows: 8 Article 1. WORK 9 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents for the 10 Project identified herein. 11 Article 2. PROJECT 12 The project for which the Work under the Contract Documents may be the whole or only a part 13 is generally described as follows: 14 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements_________________________ 15 IFB 7013______________________________________________________ 16 Article 3. CONTRACT PRICE 17 City agrees to pay Contractor for performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract 18 Documents an amount, in current funds, of __________________________________Dollars 19 ($___________________). 20 Article 4. CONTRACT TIME 21 4.1 Final Acceptance. 22 The Work will be complete for Final Acceptance within 380 days after the date when the 23 Contract Time commences to run, as provided in Paragraph 2.03 of the General Conditions, 24 plus any extension thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. 25 4.2 Liquidated Damages 26 Contractor recognizes that time is of the essence for completion of Milestones, if any, and 27 to achieve Final Acceptance of the Work and City will suffer financial loss if the Work is 28 not completed within the time(s) specified in Paragraph 4.1 above. The Contractor also 29 00 52 43 - 2 Agreement Page 2 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 recognizes the delays, expense and difficulties involved in proving in a legal proceeding, 1 the actual loss suffered by the City if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, 2 instead of requiring any such proof, Contractor agrees that as liquidated damages for 3 delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay City One Thousand Dollars ($1,000.00) 4 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 4.1 for Final Acceptance 5 until the City issues the Final Letter of Acceptance. 6 Article 5. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 7 5.1 CONTENTS: 8 A. The Contract Documents which comprise the entire agreement between City and 9 Contractor concerning the Work consist of the following: 10 1. This Agreement. 11 2. Attachments to this Agreement: 12 a. Bid Form 13 1) Proposal Form 14 2) Vendor Compliance to State Law Non-Resident Bidder 15 3) State and Federal documents (project specific) 16 b. Current Prevailing Wage Rate Table 17 c. Insurance ACORD Form(s) 18 d. Payment Bond 19 e. Performance Bond 20 f. Maintenance Bond 21 g. Power of Attorney for the Bonds 22 h. Worker’s Compensation Affidavit 23 i. Form 1295 – Certificate of Interested Parties 24 3. General Conditions. 25 4. Supplementary Conditions. 26 00 52 43 - 3 Agreement Page 3 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 5. Specifications specifically made a part of the Contract Documents by attachment or, 1 if not attached, as incorporated by reference and described in the Table of Contents 2 of the Project’s Contract Documents. 3 6. North Central Texas Council of Governments Standard Specifications for Public 4 Works Construction – Fourth Edition, Divisions 200-800, and as amended by City, as 5 incorporated by reference and described in the Table of Contents of the Project’s 6 Contract Documents. 7 7. Drawings. 8 8. Addenda. 9 9. Documentation submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. 10 10. The following which may be delivered or issued after the Effective Date of the 11 Agreement and, if issued, become an incorporated part of the Contract Documents: 12 a. Notice to Proceed. 13 b. Field Orders. 14 c. Change Orders. 15 d. Letter of Final Acceptance. 16 17 Article 6. INDEMNIFICATION 18 6.1 Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own 19 expense, the city, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims 20 arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed by the 21 contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees under this 22 contract. This indemnification provision is specifically intended to operate and be 23 effective even if it is alleged or proven that all or some of the damages being sought were 24 caused, in whole or in part, by any act, omission or negligence of the city. This indemnity 25 provision is intended to include, without limitation, indemnity for any and all costs, 26 expenses and legal fees incurred by the city in defending against such claims and causes 27 of actions. 28 29 6.2 Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless, at its own expense, the 30 city, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all loss of, damage to, 31 00 52 43 - 4 Agreement Page 4 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 or destruction of, property of the city, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work 1 and services to be performed by the contractor, its officers, agents, employees, 2 subcontractors, licensees or invitees under this contract. This indemnification provision 3 is specifically intended to operate and be effective even if it is alleged or proven that all 4 or some of the damages being sought were caused, in whole or in part, by any act, 5 omission or negligence of the city. 6 7 Article 7. MISCELLANEOUS 8 7.1 Terms. 9 Terms used in this Agreement which are defined in Article 1 of the General Conditions will 10 have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. 11 7.2 Assignment of Contract. 12 This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents may not be assigned by the 13 Contractor without the advanced express written consent of the City. 14 7.3 Successors and Assigns. 15 City and Contractor each binds itself, its partners, successors, assigns and legal 16 representatives to the other party hereto, in respect to all covenants, agreements and 17 obligations contained in the Contract Documents. 18 7.4 Severability. 19 Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be unconstitutional, void or 20 unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction shall be deemed stricken, and all 21 remaining provisions shall continue to be valid and binding upon City and Contractor. 22 7.5 Governing Law and Venue. 23 This Agreement, including all of the Contract Documents is performable in the State of 24 Texas. Venue shall be Denton County, Texas, or the United States District Court for the 25 Eastern District of Texas, Sherman Division. 26 7.6 Authority to Sign. 27 Contractor shall attach evidence of authority to sign Agreement if signed by someone other 28 than the duly authorized signatory of the Contractor. 29 30 00 52 43 - 5 Agreement Page 5 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1 2 7.7 Prohibition On Contracts With Companies Boycotting Israel. 3 Contractor acknowledges that in accordance with Chapter 2270 of the Texas Government 4 Code, the City is prohibited from entering into a contract with a company for goods or 5 services unless the contract contains a written verification from the company that it: (1) 6 does not boycott Israel; and (2) will not boycott Israel during the term of the contract. 7 The terms “boycott Israel” and “company” shall have the meanings ascribed to those terms 8 in Section 808.001 of the Texas Government Code. By signing this contract, Contractor 9 certifies that Contractor’s signature provides written verification to the City that 10 Contractor: (1) does not boycott Israel; and (2) will not boycott Israel during the term of 11 the contract. 12 13 7.8 Immigration Nationality Act. 14 Contractor shall verify the identity and employment eligibility of its employees who perform 15 work under this Agreement, including completing the Employment Eligibility Verification 16 Form (I-9). Upon request by City, Contractor shall provide City with copies of all I-9 forms 17 and supporting eligibility documentation for each employee who performs work under this 18 Agreement. Contractor shall adhere to all Federal and State laws as well as establish 19 appropriate procedures and controls so that no services will be performed by any 20 Contractor employee who is not legally eligible to perform such services. CONTRACTOR 21 SHALL INDEMNIFY CITY AND HOLD CITY HARMLESS FROM ANY PENALTIES, LIABILITIES, 22 OR LOSSES DUE TO VIOLATIONS OF THIS PARAGRAPH BY CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR’S 23 EMPLOYEES, SUBCONTRACTORS, AGENTS, OR LICENSEES. City, upon written notice to 24 Contractor, shall have the right to immediately terminate this Agreement for violations of 25 this provision by Contractor. 26 27 7.9 No Third-Party Beneficiaries. 28 This Agreement gives no rights or benefits to anyone other than the City and the Contractor 29 and there are no third-party beneficiaries. 30 31 32 00 52 43 - 6 Agreement Page 6 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 7.10 No Cause of Action Against Engineer. 1 Contractor, its subcontractors and equipment and materials suppliers on the Project or their 2 sureties, shall maintain no direct action against the Engineer, its officers, employees, and 3 subcontractors, for any claim arising out of, in connection with, or resulting from the 4 engineering services performed. Only the City will be the beneficiary of any undertaking by 5 the Engineer. The presence or duties of the Engineer's personnel at a construction site, 6 whether as on-site representatives or otherwise, do not make the Engineer or its personnel 7 in any way responsible for those duties that belong to the City and/or the City's Contractors 8 or other entities, and do not relieve the Contractors or any other entity of their obligations, 9 duties, and responsibilities, including, but not limited to, all construction methods, means, 10 techniques, sequences, and procedures necessary for coordinating and completing all 11 portions of the construction work in accordance with the Contract Documents and any 12 health or safety precautions required by such construction work. The Engineer and its 13 personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or 14 other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety 15 precautions. 16 17 SIGNATURE PAGE TO FOLLOW 18 19 00 52 43 - 7 Agreement Page 7 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, City and Contractor have each executed this Agreement to be effective as 1 of the date subscribed by the City’s designated City Manager (“Effective Date”). 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 ATTEST: 37 JENNIFER WALTERS, CITY SECRETARY 38 39 40 ____________________________________ 41 42 43 APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: 44 AARON LEAL, CITY ATTORNEY 45 46 ____________________________________ 47 ____________________________________ 00 52 43 - 8 Agreement Page 8 of 8 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 CITY OF DENTON BY: ___________________________________ TITLE: ___________________________________ CONTRACTOR [CONTRACTOR’S CORPORATE NAME HERE] BY: ___________________________________ AUTHORIZED AGENT ____________________________________ NAME ____________________________________ TITLE ____________________________________ PHONE NUMBER ____________________________________ EMAIL ADDRESS 00 61 13 - 1 PERFORMANCE BOND Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 61 13 1 PERFORMANCE BOND 2 3 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 4 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 5 COUNTY OF DENTON § 6 7 That we, _____________________________________________________, known as 8 “Principal” herein and ____________________________________________, a corporate 9 surety(sureties, if more than one) duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as 10 “Surety” herein (whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a 11 municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of Texas, known as “City” herein, in the 12 penal sum of, ___________________________________________ Dollars 13 ($_______________________), lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton 14 County, Texas for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our 15 heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these 16 presents. 17 WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the City 18 awarded the _____ day of ________________, 20___, which Contract is hereby referred to and 19 made a part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein, to furnish all materials, 20 equipment labor and other accessories defined by law, in the prosecution of the Work, including 21 any Change Orders, as provided for in said Contract designated as Lake Lewisville Water 22 Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 23 NOW, THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if the said Principal shall 24 faithfully perform it obligations under the Contract and shall in all respects duly and faithfully 25 perform the Work, including Change Orders, under the Contract, according to the plans, 26 specifications, and contract documents therein referred to, and as well during any period of 27 00 61 13 - 2 PERFORMANCE BOND Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 extension of the Contract that may be granted on the part of the City, then this obligation shall 1 be and become null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. 2 PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in 3 Denton County, Texas or the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas, 4 Sherman Division. 5 This bond is made and executed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of 6 the Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in 7 accordance with the provisions of said statue. 8 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have SIGNED and SEALED this 9 instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the day of 10 , 20 . 11 PRINCIPAL: 12 13 ____________________________________ 14 15 ____________________________________ 16 17 BY: 18 ________________________________ 19 Signature 20 ATTEST: 21 22 ______________________________ 23 ____________________________________ 24 (Principal) Secretary Name and Title 25 26 00 61 13 - 3 PERFORMANCE BOND Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 Address: 1 ____________________________ 2 3 ____________________________ 4 5 ____________________________ 6 _____________________________ 7 Witness as to Principal 8 SURETY: 9 10 ____________________________________ 11 12 ____________________________________ 13 14 BY: 15 ________________________________ 16 Signature 17 18 19 ____________________________________ 20 Name and Title 21 22 Address: 23 ____________________________ 24 25 ____________________________ 26 27 ____________________________ 28 _____________________________ 29 00 61 13 - 4 PERFORMANCE BOND Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: 1 ___________________ 2 3 4 5 *Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract 6 from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If 7 Surety’s physical address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided. 8 The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded. 9 10 00 61 14 - 1 PAYMENT BOND Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 61 14 1 PAYMENT BOND 2 3 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 4 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 5 COUNTY OF DENTON § 6 7 That we, _____________________________________________________, known as 8 “Principal” herein, and _________________________________________________________, a 9 corporate surety (sureties), duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as 10 “Surety” herein (whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a 11 municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of the State of Texas, known as “City” herein, 12 in the penal sum of___________________________________________ Dollars 13 ($_______________________), lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton 14 County, Texas, for the payment of which sum well and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, 15 executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents: 16 WHEREAS, Principal has entered into a certain written Contract with City, awarded the 17 _____ day of ______________________, 20_____, which Contract is hereby referred to and made 18 a part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein, to furnish all materials, equipment, labor 19 and other accessories as defined by law, in the prosecution of the Work as provided for in said 20 Contract and designated as DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements. 21 NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that if Principal shall pay 22 all monies owing to any (and all) payment bond beneficiary (as defined in Chapter 2253 of the 23 Texas Government Code, as amended) in the prosecution of the Work under the Contract, then 24 this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. 25 00 61 14 - 2 PAYMENT BOND Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 This bond is made and executed in compliance with the provisions of Chapter 2253 of the 1 Texas Government Code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in 2 accordance with the provisions of said statute. 3 4 00 61 14 - 3 PAYMENT BOND Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and Surety have each SIGNED and SEALED this 1 instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the _________ day of 2 ___________________, 20_____. 3 4 PRINCIPAL: _________________________________ _________________________________ ATTEST: BY: _____________________________ Signature ___________________________________ _____________________________ (Principal) Secretary Name and Title Address: _________________________ _________________________ ___________________________________ _________________________ Witness as to Principal SURETY: _________________________________ _________________________________ ATTEST: BY: _____________________________ Signature 00 61 14 - 4 PAYMENT BOND Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 __________________________________ _____________________________ (Surety) Secretary Name and Title Address: _________________________ _________________________ __________________________________ _________________________ Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: ________________ 1 Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety, there must be on file a certified extract from the 2 bylaws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If Surety’s physical address 3 is different from its mailing address, both must be provided. 4 5 THE DATE OF THE BOND SHALL NOT BE PRIOR 6 TO THE DATE THE CONTRACT IS AWARDED. 7 END OF SECTION 8 9 00 61 19 - 1 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 1 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 61 19 1 MAINTENANCE BOND 2 3 THE STATE OF TEXAS § 4 § KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: 5 COUNTY OF TARRANT § 6 7 That we_____________________________________________________, known as 8 “Principal” herein and ____________________________________________, a corporate surety 9 (sureties, if more than one) duly authorized to do business in the State of Texas, known as 10 “Surety” herein (whether one or more), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Denton, a 11 municipal corporation created pursuant to the laws of the State of Texas, known as “City” 12 herein, in the sum of_________________________________________ Dollars 13 ($_______________________), lawful money of the United States, to be paid in Denton, Denton 14 County, Texas, for payment of which sum well and truly be made unto the City and its 15 successors, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, 16 jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. 17 18 WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the City awarded 19 the_____ day of , 20 , which Contract is hereby 20 referred to and a made part hereof for all purposes as if fully set forth herein, to furnish all 21 materials, equipment labor and other accessories as defined by law, in the prosecution of the 22 Work, including any Work resulting from a duly authorized Change Order (collectively herein, 23 the “Work”) as provided for in said contract and designated as Lake Lewisville Water Treatment 24 Plant Phase II Improvements; and 25 26 00 61 19 - 2 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 2 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 WHEREAS, Principal binds itself to use such materials and to so construct the Work in 1 accordance with the plans, specifications and Contract Documents that the Work is and will 2 remain free from defects in materials or workmanship for and during the period of two (2) years 3 after the date of Final Acceptance of the Work by the City (“Maintenance Period”); and 4 5 WHEREAS, Principal binds itself to repair or reconstruct the Work in whole or in part upon 6 receiving notice from the City of the need therefor at any time within the Maintenance Period. 7 8 NOW THEREFORE, the condition of this obligation is such that if Principal shall remedy 9 any defective Work, for which timely notice was provided by City, to a completion satisfactory to 10 the City, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise to remain in full force and 11 effect. 12 13 PROVIDED, HOWEVER, if Principal shall fail so to repair or reconstruct any timely 14 noticed defective Work, it is agreed that the City may cause any and all such defective Work to 15 be repaired and/or reconstructed with all associated costs thereof being borne by the Principal 16 and the Surety under this Maintenance bond; and 17 18 PROVIDED FURTHER, that if any legal action be filed on this Bond, venue shall lie in 19 Denton County, Texas or the United States District Court for the Eastern District of Texas, 20 Sherman Division; and 21 22 PROVIDED FURTHER, that this obligation shall be continuous in nature and successive 23 recoveries may be had hereon for successive breaches. 24 25 00 61 19 - 3 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 3 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety have each SIGNED and SEALED this 1 instrument by duly authorized agents and officers on this the day of 2 , 20 __. 3 4 PRINCIPAL: 5 6 ____________________________________ 7 8 ____________________________________ 9 10 BY: 11 ________________________________ 12 Signature 13 ATTEST: 14 15 ______________________________ 16 ____________________________________ 17 (Principal) Secretary Name and Title 18 19 Address: 20 ____________________________ 21 22 ____________________________ 23 24 ____________________________ 25 _____________________________ 26 Witness as to Principal 27 SURETY: 28 00 61 19 - 4 MAINTENANCE BOND Page 4 of 4 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1 ____________________________________ 2 3 ____________________________________ 4 5 BY: 6 ________________________________ 7 Signature 8 9 10 ____________________________________ 11 ATTEST: Name and Title 12 13 _____________________________ Address: 14 ____________________________ 15 (Surety) Secretary 16 ____________________________ 17 18 ____________________________ 19 _____________________________ 20 Witness as to Surety Telephone Number: 21 ___________________ 22 23 *Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract 24 from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If 25 Surety’s physical address is different from its mailing address, both must be provided. 26 The date of the bond shall not be prior to the date the Contract is awarded. 27 28 00 61 25 - 1 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE Page 1 of 1 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 61 25 1 CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 END OF SECTION 23 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 STANDARD GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page Article 1 – Definitions and Terminology .......................................................................................................... 1 1.01 Defined Terms............................................................................................................................... 1 1.02 Terminology .................................................................................................................................. 6 Article 2 – Preliminary Matters ......................................................................................................................... 7 2.01 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................... 7 2.02 Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed ................................................................ 7 2.03 Starting the Work .......................................................................................................................... 7 2.04 Before Starting Construction ........................................................................................................ 7 2.05 Preconstruction Conference.......................................................................................................... 8 2.06 Public Meeting .............................................................................................................................. 8 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules.................................................................................................... 8 2.08 Electronic Submittals.................................................................................................................... 8 Article 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse ............................................................................ 8 3.01 Intent.............................................................................................................................................. 8 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................... 9 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies....................................................................................... 9 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents................................................................. 10 3.05 Reuse of Documents ................................................................................................................... 10 3.06 Electronic Data............................................................................................................................ 11 Article 4 – Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions; Reference Points........................................................................................................... 11 4.01 Availability of Lands .................................................................................................................. 11 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .......................................................................................... 12 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ............................................................................. 12 4.04 Underground Facilities ............................................................................................................... 13 4.05 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site .............................................................................. 14 Article 5 – Bonds and Insurance ..................................................................................................................... 15 5.01 Licensed Sureties and Insurers ................................................................................................... 15 5.02 Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds....................................................................... 15 5.03 Certificates of Insurance ............................................................................................................. 16 5.04 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................ 18 5.05 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace........................................................... 19 Article 6 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ........................................................................................................ 19 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence............................................................................................... 19 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 6.02 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................ 19 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ........................................................................................... 20 6.04 Project Schedule.......................................................................................................................... 20 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” ....................................................................................................... 21 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others.................................................................... 23 6.07 Wage Rates.................................................................................................................................. 24 6.08 Patent Fees and Royalties ........................................................................................................... 25 6.09 Permits and Utilities.................................................................................................................... 26 6.10 Laws and Regulations ................................................................................................................. 26 6.11 Taxes ........................................................................................................................................... 27 6.12 Use of Site and Other Areas ....................................................................................................... 27 6.13 Record Documents...................................................................................................................... 28 6.14 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................. 29 6.15 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................. 29 6.16 Hazard Communication Programs ............................................................................................. 30 6.17 Emergencies and/or Rectification............................................................................................... 30 6.18 Submittals.................................................................................................................................... 30 6.19 Continuing the Work................................................................................................................... 31 6.20 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee .......................................................................... 32 6.21 Indemnification ......................................................................................................................... 32 6.22 Delegation of Professional Design Services .............................................................................. 33 6.23 Right to Audit.............................................................................................................................. 34 6.24 Nondiscrimination....................................................................................................................... 34 Article 7 – Other Work at the Site................................................................................................................... 34 7.01 Related Work at Site ................................................................................................................... 34 7.02 Coordination................................................................................................................................ 35 Article 8 – City’s Responsibilities................................................................................................................... 35 8.01 Communications to Contractor................................................................................................... 35 8.02 Furnish Data ................................................................................................................................ 35 8.03 Pay When Due ............................................................................................................................ 35 8.04 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests................................................................................... 36 8.05 Change Orders............................................................................................................................. 36 8.06 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .............................................................................................. 36 8.07 Limitations on City’s Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 36 8.08 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition .................................................................... 36 8.09 Compliance with Safety Program............................................................................................... 36 Article 9 – City’s Observation Status During Construction ........................................................................... 36 9.01 City’s Project Manager ……...................................................................................................... 36 9.02 Visits to Site ................................................................................................................................ 37 9.03 Authorized Variations in Work .................................................................................................. 37 9.04 Rejecting Defective Work .......................................................................................................... 37 9.05 Determinations for Work Performed .......................................................................................... 37 9.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ..................... 38 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 Article 10 – Changes in the Work; Claims; Extra Work ................................................................................ 38 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................... 38 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ........................................................................................... 38 10.03 Execution of Change Orders....................................................................................................... 38 10.04 Extra Work .................................................................................................................................. 38 10.05 Notification to Surety.................................................................................................................. 39 10.06 Contract Claims Process ............................................................................................................. 39 Article 11 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work; Plans Quantity Measurement...................... 40 11.01 Cost of the Work ......................................................................................................................... 40 11.02 Allowances .................................................................................................................................. 43 11.03 Unit Price Work .......................................................................................................................... 43 11.04 Plans Quantity Measurement ...................................................................................................... 45 Article 12 – Change of Contract Price; Change of Contract Time................................................................. 45 12.01 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................ 45 12.02 Change of Contract Time............................................................................................................ 46 12.03 Delays .......................................................................................................................................... 47 Article 13 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work ...................... 47 13.01 Notice of Defects ........................................................................................................................ 47 13.02 Access to Work ........................................................................................................................... 47 13.03 Tests and Inspections .................................................................................................................. 47 13.04 Uncovering Work........................................................................................................................ 49 13.05 City May Stop the Work ............................................................................................................. 49 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work ................................................................................ 49 13.07 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................ 50 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................... 51 13.09 City May Correct Defective Work ............................................................................................. 51 Article 14 – Payments to Contractor and Completion .................................................................................... 52 14.01 Schedule of Values...................................................................................................................... 52 14.02 Progress Payments ...................................................................................................................... 52 14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................... 54 14.04 Partial Utilization ........................................................................................................................ 54 14.05 Final Inspection ........................................................................................................................... 55 14.06 Final Acceptance......................................................................................................................... 55 14.07 Final Payment.............................................................................................................................. 55 14.08 Final Completion Delayed and Partial Retainage Release ........................................................ 56 14.09 Waiver of Claims ........................................................................................................................ 56 Article 15 – Suspension of Work and Termination ........................................................................................ 57 15.01 City May Suspend Work............................................................................................................. 57 15.02 City May Terminate for Cause ................................................................................................... 57 15.03 City May Terminate For Convenience ....................................................................................... 59 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 Article 16 – Dispute Resolution ...................................................................................................................... 61 16.01 Methods and Procedures ............................................................................................................. 61 Article 17 – Miscellaneous .............................................................................................................................. 62 17.01 Giving Notice .............................................................................................................................. 62 17.02 Computation of Times ................................................................................................................ 62 17.03 Cumulative Remedies ................................................................................................................. 62 17.04 Survival of Obligations ............................................................................................................... 63 17.05 Headings...................................................................................................................................... 63 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 1 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Wherever used in these General Conditions or in other Contract Documents, the terms listed below have the meanings indicated which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof, and words denoting gender shall include the masculine, feminine and neuter. Said terms are generally capitalized or written in italics, but not always. When used in a context consistent with the definition of a listed-defined term, the term shall have a meaning as defined below whether capitalized or italicized or otherwise. In addition to terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement—The written instrument which is evidence of the agreement between City and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Application for Payment—The form acceptable to City which is to be used by Contractor during the course of the Work in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 4. Asbestos—Any material that contains more than one percent asbestos and is friable or is releasing asbestos fibers into the air above current action levels established by the United States Occupational Safety and Health Administration. 5. Award – Authorization by the City Council for the City to enter into an Agreement. 6. Bid—The offer or proposal of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work to be performed. 7. Bidder—The individual or entity who submits a Bid directly to City. 8. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents (including all Addenda). 9. Bidding Requirements—The advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Bid security of acceptable form, if any, and the Bid Form with any supplements. 10. Business Day – A business day is defined as a day that the City conducts normal business, generally Monday through Friday, except for federal or state holidays observed by the City. 11. Calendar Day – A day consisting of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 2 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 12. Change Order—A document, which is prepared and approved by the City, which is signed by Contractor and City and authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 13. City— The City of Denton is a Texas home-rule municipal corporation acting by its City Council through its City Manager or his designee. 14. City Attorney – The officially appointed City Attorney of the City of Denton, Texas, or his duly authorized representative. 15. City Council - The duly elected and qualified governing body of the City of Denton, Texas. 16. City Manager – The officially appointed and authorized City Manager of the City of Denton, Texas, or his duly authorized representative. 17. Contract Claim—A demand or assertion by City or Contractor seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Time, or both, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Contract Claim. 18. Contract—The entire and integrated written document between the City and Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract contains the Agreement and all Contract Documents and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. 19. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement. All items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Approved Submittals, other Contractor submittals, and the reports and drawings of subsurface and physical conditions are not Contract Documents. 20. Contract Price—The moneys payable by City to Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents as stated in the Agreement (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03 in the case of Unit Price Work). 21. Contract Time—The number of days or the dates stated in the Agreement to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any and (ii) complete the Work so that it is ready for Final Acceptance. 22. Contractor—The individual or entity with whom City has entered into the Agreement. 23. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 11.01 of these General Conditions for definition. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 3 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 24. Damage Claims – A demand for money or services arising from the Project or Site from a third party, City or Contractor exclusive of a Contract Claim. 25. Day or day – A day, unless otherwise defined, shall mean a Calendar Day. 26. Drawings—That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by Engineer which graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by Contractor. Submittals are not Drawings as so defined. 27. Effective Date of the Agreement—The date indicated in the Agreement on which it becomes effective, but if no such date is indicated, it means the date on which the Agreement is signed and delivered by the last of the two parties to sign and deliver. 28. Engineer—The licensed professional engineer or engineering firm registered in the State of Texas performing professional services for the City. 29. Extra Work – Additional work made necessary by changes or alterations of the Contract Documents or quantities; or for other reasons for which no prices are provided in the Contract Documents. Extra work shall be part of the Work. 30. Field Order — A written order issued by City which requires changes in the Work but which does not involve a change in the Contract Price, Contract Time, or the intent of the Engineer. 31. Final Acceptance – The written notice given by the City to the Contractor that the Work specified in the Contract Documents has been completed to the satisfaction of the City. 32. Final Inspection – Inspection carried out by the City to verify that the Contractor has completed the Work, and each and every part or appurtenance thereof, fully, entirely, and in conformance with the Contract Documents. 33. General Requirements—Sections of Division 1 of the Contract Documents. 34. Hazardous Environmental Condition — The presence at the Site of Asbestos, PCBs, Petroleum, Hazardous Waste, Radioactive Material, or other materials in such quantities or circumstances that may present a substantial danger to persons or property exposed thereto. 35. Hazardous Waste—Hazardous waste is defined as any solid waste listed as hazardous or possesses one or more hazardous characteristics as defined in the federal waste regulations, as amended from time to time. 36. Incidental – Work items that the Contractor is not paid for directly, but costs for which are included under the various bid items of the Project. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 4 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 37. Laws and Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and orders of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having jurisdiction. 38. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Project funds, real property, or personal property. 39. Major Item – An Item of work included in the Contract Documents that has a total cost equal to or greater than 5% of the original Contract Price or $25,000 whichever is less. 40. Milestone—A principal event specified in the Contract Documents relating to an intermediate Contract Time prior to Final Acceptance of the Work. 41. Notice of Award—The written notice by City to the Successful Bidder stating that upon timely compliance by the Successful Bidder with the conditions precedent listed therein, City will sign and deliver the Agreement. 42. Notice to Proceed—A written notice given by City to Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform the Work specified in Contract Documents. 43. PCBs—Polychlorinated biphenyls. 44. Petroleum—Petroleum, including crude oil or any fraction thereof which is liquid at standard conditions of temperature and pressure (60 degrees Fahrenheit and 14.7 pounds per square inch absolute), such as oil, petroleum, fuel oil, oil sludge, oil refuse, gasoline, kerosene, and oil mixed with other non-Hazardous Waste and crude oils. 45. Plans – See definition of Drawings. 46. Project Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, in accordance with the General Requirements, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor’s plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Time. 47. Project—The Work to be performed under the Contract Documents. 48. Project Manager —The authorized representative of the City who will be assigned to the Project. 49. Project Manual – The documentary information prepared for bidding and furnishing the Work. A listing of the contents of the Project Manual is contained in its Table of Contents. 50. Public Meeting – An announced meeting conducted by the City to facilitate public participation and to assist the public in gaining an informed view of the Project. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 5 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 51. Radioactive Material—Source, special nuclear, or byproduct material as defined by the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 (42 USC Section 2011 et seq.) as amended from time to time. 52. Regular Working Hours – Excluding legal holidays, regular working hours shall be Monday thru Friday between 6:00 a.m. and 8:30 p.m. from June 1 to September 30 and between 7:00 a.m. and 8:30 p.m. from October 1 to May 31. 53. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are representative of some portion of the Work and which establish the standards by which such portion of the Work will be judged. 54. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of required submittals and the time requirements to support scheduled performance of related construction activities. 55. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment. 56. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by City upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights-of-way, permits, and easements for access thereto, and such other lands furnished by City which are designated for the use of Contractor. 57. Specifications—That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. Specifications may be specifically made a part of the Contract Documents by attachment or, if not attached, may be incorporated by reference as indicated in the Table of Contents (Division 00 00 00) of each Project. 58. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site. 59. Submittals—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information which are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. 60. Subsidiary – See definition of Incidental. 61. Successful Bidder—The Bidder submitting the lowest and most responsive Bid to whom City makes an Award. 62. Superintendent – The representative of the Contractor who is available at all times and able to receive instructions from the City and to act for the Contractor. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 6 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 63. Supplementary Conditions—That part of the Contract Documents which amends or supplements these General Conditions. 64. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or Subcontractor. 65. Underground Facilities—All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities, including but not limited to, those that convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 66. Unit Price Work—See Paragraph 11.03 of these General Conditions for definition. 67. Weekend Working Hours – Hours between 8:00 a.m. and 8:30 p.m., Saturday, and between 1:00 p.m. and 8:30 p.m. Sunday or legal holiday, as approved in advance by the City. 68. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction including any Change Order or Field Order, and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 69. Working Day – A working day is defined as a day, not including Saturdays, Sundays, or legal holidays authorized by the City for contract purposes, in which weather or other conditions not under the control of the Contractor will permit the performance of the principal unit of work underway for a continuous period of not less than 7 hours between 7 a.m. and 8 p.m. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraph 1.02.B through E are not defined but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: 1. The Contract Documents include the terms “as allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to authorize an exercise of judgment by City. In addition, the adjectives “reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe an action or determination of City as to the Work. It is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement indicating otherwise). 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 7 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 C. Defective: 1. The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. does not conform to the Contract Documents; or b. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard, test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. has been damaged prior to City’s written acceptance. D. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide: 1. The word “Furnish” or the word “Install” or the word “Perform” or the word “Provide” or the word “Supply,” or any combination or similar directive or usage thereof, shall mean furnishing and incorporating in the Work including all necessary labor, materials, equipment, and everything necessary to perform the Work indicated, unless specifically limited in the context used. E. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning. ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Copies of Documents City shall furnish to Contractor one (1) original executed copy and one (1) electronic copy of the Contract Documents, and three (3) additional copies of the Drawings. Additional copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of reproduction. 2.02 Commencement of Contract Time; Notice to Proceed The Contract Time will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. 2.03 Starting the Work Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Time commences to run. No Work shall be done at the Site prior to the date on which the Contract Time commences to run. 2.04 Before Starting Construction Baseline Schedules: Submit in accordance with the Contract Documents, and prior to starting the Work. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 8 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 2.05 Preconstruction Conference Before any Work at the Site is started, the Contractor shall attend a Preconstruction Conference as specified in the Contract Documents. 2.06 Public Meeting Contractor may not mobilize any equipment, materials or resources to the Site prior to Contractor attending the Public Meeting as scheduled by the City. 2.07 Initial Acceptance of Schedules No progress payment shall be made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to City in accordance with the Schedule Specification as provided in the Contract Documents. 2.08 Electronic Submittals A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the City and Contractor may transmit, and shall accept, Project-related correspondence, text, data, documents, drawings, information, and graphics, including but not limited to Shop Drawings and other submittals, in electronic media or digital format. B. When transmitting items in electronic media or digital format, the transmitting party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the items resulting from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the items, or from those established in applicable transmittal protocols. ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, AMENDING, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one is as binding as if required by all. B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that reasonably may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result will be provided whether or not specifically called for, at no additional cost to City. C. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by City. D. The Specifications may vary in form, format and style. Some Specification sections may be written in varying degrees of streamlined or declarative style and some sections may be 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 9 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 relatively narrative by comparison. Omission of such words and phrases as “the Contractor shall,” “in conformity with,” “as shown,” or “as specified” are intentional in streamlined sections. Omitted words and phrases shall be supplied by inference. Similar types of provisions may appear in various parts of a section or articles within a part depending on the format of the section. The Contractor shall not take advantage of any variation of form, format or style in making Contract Claims. E. The cross referencing of specification sections under the subparagraph heading “Related Sections include but are not necessarily limited to:” and elsewhere within each Specification section is provided as an aid and convenience to the Contractor. The Contractor shall not rely on the cross referencing provided and shall be responsible to coordinate the entire Work under the Contract Documents and provide a complete Project whether or not the cross referencing is provided in each section or whether or not the cross referencing is complete. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standards, Specifications, Codes, Laws, and Regulations 1. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the standard, specification, manual, code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. 2. No provision of any such standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of City, Contractor, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees, from those set forth in the Contract Documents. No such provision or instruction shall be effective to assign to City, or any of its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents Before Starting Work: Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures therein against all applicable field measurements and conditions. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to City any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy which Contractor discovers, or has actual knowledge of, and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from City before proceeding with any Work affected thereby. 2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents During Performance of Work: If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 10 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 within the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable Law or Regulation , (b) any standard, specification, manual, or code, or (c) any instruction of any Supplier, then Contractor shall promptly report it to City in writing. Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.17.A) until an amendment or supplement to the Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods indicated in Paragraph 3.04. 3. Contractor shall not be liable to City for failure to report any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof. B. Resolving Discrepancies: 1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between the provisions of the Contract Documents and the provisions of any standard, specification, manual, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically incorporated by reference in the Contract Documents). 2. In case of discrepancies, figured dimensions shall govern over scaled dimensions, Drawings shall govern over Specifications, and Supplementary Conditions shall govern over General Conditions and Specifications. 3.04 Amending and Supplementing Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be amended to provide for additions, deletions, and revisions in the Work or to modify the terms and conditions thereof by a Change Order. B. The requirements of the Contract Documents may be supplemented, and minor variations and deviations in the Work not involving a change in Contract Price or Contract Time, may be authorized, by one or more of the following ways: 1. A Field Order; 2. City’s review of a Submittal (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 6.18.C); or 3. City’s written interpretation or clarification. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor and any Subcontractor or Supplier shall not: 1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings, Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing the seal of Engineer, including electronic media editions; or 2. reuse any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions of the Project or any other project without written consent of City and specific written 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 11 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 verification or adaptation by Engineer. B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the Contract. Nothing herein shall preclude Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract Documents for record purposes. 3.06 Electronic Data A. Unless otherwise stated in the Supplementary Conditions, the data furnished by City or Engineer to Contractor, or by Contractor to City or Engineer, that may be relied upon are limited to the printed copies included in the Contract Documents (also known as hard copies). Files in electronic media format of text, data, graphics, or other types are furnished only for the convenience of the receiving party. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived from such electronic files will be at the user’s sole risk. If there is a discrepancy between the electronic files and the hard copies, the hard copies govern. B. When transferring documents in electronic media format, the transferring party makes no representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of documents resulting from the use of software application packages, operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those used by the data’s creator. ARTICLE 4 – AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.01 Availability of Lands A. City shall furnish the Site. City shall notify Contractor of any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. City will obtain in a timely manner and pay for easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities. 1. The City has obtained or anticipates acquisition of and/or access to right-of-way, and/or easements. Any outstanding right-of-way and/or easements are anticipated to be acquired in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding right-of-way, and/or easements. 2. The City has or anticipates removing and/or relocating utilities, and obstructions to the Site. Any outstanding removal or relocation of utilities or obstructions is anticipated in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding utilities or obstructions to be removed, adjusted, and/or relocated by others. B. Upon reasonable written request, City shall furnish Contractor with a current statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which the Work is to be performed. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 12 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required for construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment. 4.02 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. those reports known to City of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or contiguous to the Site; and 2. those drawings known to City of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities). B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Contractor may not make any Contract Claim against City, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. 4.03 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notice: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed either: 1. is of such a nature as to establish that any “technical data” on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 4.02 is materially inaccurate; or 2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Contract Documents; or 3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents; then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing the 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 13 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.17.A), notify City in writing about such condition. B. Possible Price and Time Adjustments Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Time if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of such conditions at the time Contractor made a final commitment to City with respect to Contract Price and Contract Time by the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract; or 2. the existence of such condition could reasonably have been discovered or revealed as a result of the examination of the Contract Documents or the Site; or 3. Contractor failed to give the written notice as required by Paragraph 4.03.A. 4.04 Underground Facilities A. Shown or Indicated: The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the Site is based on information and data furnished to City or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities, including City, or by others. Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. City and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data provided by others; and 2. the cost of all of the following will be included in the Contract Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for: a. reviewing and checking all such information and data; b. locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; c. coordination and adjustment of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities, including City, during construction; and d. the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. B. Not Shown or Indicated: 1. If an Underground Facility which conflicts with the Work is uncovered or revealed at or contiguous to the Site which was not shown or indicated, or not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 6.17.A), 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 14 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 identify the owner of such Underground Facility and give notice to that owner and to City. City will review the discovered Underground Facility and determine the extent, if any, to which a change may be required in the Contract Documents to reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility. Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of such discovered Underground Facility. 2. If City concludes that a change in the Contract Documents is required, a Change Order may be issued to reflect and document such consequences. 3. Verification of existing utilities, structures, and service lines shall include notification of all utility companies a minimum of 48 hours in advance of construction including exploratory excavation if necessary. 4.05 Hazardous Environmental Condition at Site A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify those reports and drawings known to City relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at the Site. B. Limited Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the “technical data” contained in such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Such “technical data” is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Contractor may not make any Contract Claim against City, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors with respect to: 1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including, but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor and safety precautions and programs incident thereto; or 2. other data, interpretations, opinions and information contained in such reports or shown or indicated in such drawings; or 3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any “technical data” or any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. Contractor shall not be responsible for any Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site which was not shown or indicated in Drawings or Specifications or identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for a Hazardous Environmental Condition created with any materials brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible. D. If Contractor encounters a Hazardous Environmental Condition or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, Contractor shall immediately: (i) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (ii) stop all Work in connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 15 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 Paragraph 6.17.A); and (iii) notify City (and promptly thereafter confirm such notice in writing). City may consider the necessity to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such condition or take corrective action, if any. E. Contractor shall not be required to resume Work in connection with such condition or in any affected area until after City has obtained any required permits related thereto and delivered written notice to Contractor: (i) specifying that such condition and any affected area is or has been rendered suitable for the resumption of Work; or (ii) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed. F. If after receipt of such written notice Contractor does not agree to resume such Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe, or does not agree to resume such Work under such special conditions, then City may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work. City may have such deleted portion of the Work performed by City’s own forces or others. G. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless City, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 4.06.G shall obligate Contractor to indemnify any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 4.02, 4.03, and 4.04 do not apply to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 5 – BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.01 Licensed Sureties and Insurers All bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents to be purchased and maintained by Contractor shall be obtained from surety or insurance companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue bonds or insurance policies for the limits and coverages so required. Such surety and insurance companies shall also meet such additional requirements and qualifications as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions. 5.02 Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds A. Contractor shall furnish performance and payment bonds, in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253 or successor statute, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all of Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor shall furnish maintenance bonds in an amount equal to the Contract Price as security 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 16 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 to protect the City against any defects in any portion of the Work described in the Contract Documents. Maintenance bonds shall remain in effect for two (2) years after the date of Final Acceptance by the City. C. All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as provided otherwise by Laws or Regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the list of “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a sealed and dated power of attorney which shall show that it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed each bond. The bonds must be dated on, or after, the date of the Contract. D. If the surety on any bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in the State of Texas or it ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 5.02.C, Contractor shall promptly notify City and shall, within 30 days after the event giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which shall comply with the requirements of Paragraphs 5.01 and 5.02.C. 5.03 Certificates of Insurance A. Contractor shall deliver to City, with copies to each additional insured and loss payee identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by City or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain. 1. The certificate of insurance shall document the City, and all identified entities named in the Supplementary Conditions as “Additional Insured” on all liability policies. 2. The Contractor’s general liability insurance shall include a, “per project” or “per location”, endorsement, which shall be identified in the certificate of insurance provided to the City. 3. The certificate shall be signed by an agent authorized to bind coverage on behalf of the insured, be complete in its entirety, and show complete insurance carrier names as listed in the current A.M. Best Property & Casualty Guide 4. The insurers for all policies must be licensed and/or approved to do business in the State of Texas. Except for workers’ compensation, all insurers must have a minimum rating of A-: VII in the current A. M. Best Key Rating Guide or have reasonably equivalent financial strength and solvency to the satisfaction of Risk Management. If the rating is below that required, written approval of City is required. 5. All applicable policies shall include a Waiver of Subrogation (Rights of Recovery) in favor of the City. In addition, the Contractor agrees to waive all rights of subrogation against the Engineer (if applicable), and each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 17 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 6. Failure of the City to demand such certificates or other evidence of full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure of the City to identify a deficiency from evidence that is provided shall not be construed as a waiver of Contractor’s obligation to maintain such lines of insurance coverage. 7. If insurance policies are not written for specified coverage limits, an Umbrella or Excess Liability insurance for any differences is required. Excess Liability shall follow form of the primary coverage. 8. Unless otherwise stated, all required insurance shall be written on the “occurrence basis”. If coverage is underwritten on a claims-made basis, the retroactive date shall be coincident with or prior to the date of the effective date of the agreement and the certificate of insurance shall state that the coverage is claims-made and the retroactive date. The insurance coverage shall be maintained for the duration of the Contract and for three (3) years following Final Acceptance provided under the Contract Documents or for the warranty period, whichever is longer. An annual certificate of insurance submitted to the City shall evidence such insurance coverage. 9. Policies shall have no exclusions by endorsements, which, neither nullify or amend, the required lines of coverage, nor decrease the limits of said coverage unless such endorsements are approved in writing by the City. In the event a Contract has been bid or executed and the exclusions are determined to be unacceptable or the City desires additional insurance coverage, and the City desires the contractor/engineer to obtain such coverage, the contract price shall be adjusted by the cost of the premium for such additional coverage plus 10%. 10. Any self-insured retention (SIR), in excess of $25,000.00, affecting required insurance coverage shall be approved by the City in regards to asset value and stockholders' equity. In lieu of traditional insurance, alternative coverage maintained through insurance pools or risk retention groups, or self-funding, must also be approved by City. 11. Any deductible in excess of $5,000.00, for any policy that does not provide coverage on a first-dollar basis, must be acceptable to and approved by the City. 12. City, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to review the insurance requirements and to make reasonable adjustments to insurance coverage’s and their limits when deemed necessary and prudent by the City based upon the scope of the Work, changes in statutory law, court decision or the claims history of the industry as well as of the contracting party to the City. The City shall be required to provide prior notice of 90 days, and the insurance adjustments shall be incorporated into the Work by Change Order. 13. City shall be entitled, upon written request and without expense, to receive copies of policies and endorsements thereto and may make any reasonable requests for deletion or revision or modifications of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations, or exclusions necessary to conform the policy and endorsements to the requirements of the Contract. Deletions, revisions, or modifications shall not be required where policy provisions are established by 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 18 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 law or regulations binding upon either party or the underwriter on any such policies. 14. City shall not be responsible for the direct payment of insurance premium costs for Contractor’s insurance. 5.04 Contractor’s Insurance A. Workers Compensation and Employers’ Liability. Contractor shall purchase and maintain such insurance coverage with limits consistent with statutory benefits outlined in the Texas Workers’ Compensation Act (Texas Labor Code, Ch. 406, as amended), and minimum limits for Employers’ Liability as is appropriate for the Work being performed and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor’s performance of the Work and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed by Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable: 1. claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts; 2. claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor’s employees. B. Commercial General Liability. Coverage shall include but not be limited to covering liability (bodily injury or property damage) arising from: premises/operations, independent contractors, products/completed operations, personal injury, liability under an insured contract, and explosion/collapse/underground (where those exposures exist). Insurance shall be provided on an occurrence basis, and as comprehensive as the current Insurance Services Office (ISO) policy. This insurance shall apply as primary insurance with respect to any other insurance or self-insurance programs afforded to the City. The Commercial General Liability policy, shall have no exclusions by endorsements that would alter of nullify premises/operations, products/completed operations, contractual, personal injury, or advertising injury, which are normally contained with the policy, unless the City approves such exclusions in writing. For construction projects that present a substantial completed operation exposure, the City may require the contractor to maintain completed operations coverage for a minimum of no less than three (3) years following the completion of the project (if identified in the Supplementary Conditions). C. Automobile Liability. A commercial business auto policy shall provide coverage on “any auto”, defined as autos owned, hired and non-owned and provide indemnity for claims for damages because bodily injury or death of any person and or property damage arising out of the work, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle by the Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 19 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 D. Railroad Protective Liability. If any of the work or any warranty work is within the limits of railroad right-of-way, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements identified in the Supplementary Conditions. E. Notification of Policy Cancellation: Contractor shall immediately notify City upon cancellation or other loss of insurance coverage. Contractor shall stop work until replacement insurance has been procured. There shall be no time credit for days not worked pursuant to this section. 5.05 Acceptance of Bonds and Insurance; Option to Replace If City has any objection to the coverage afforded by or other provisions of the bonds or insurance required to be purchased and maintained by the Contractor in accordance with Article 5 on the basis of non-conformance with the Contract Documents, the City shall so notify the Contractor in writing within 10 Business Days after receipt of the certificates (or other evidence requested). Contractor shall provide to the City such additional information in respect of insurance provided as the City may reasonably request. If Contractor does not purchase or maintain all of the bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents, the City shall notify the Contractor in writing of such failure prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the required coverage. ARTICLE 6 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES 6.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent Superintendent, who is proficient in English, and who shall not be replaced without written notice to City. If at any time the Superintendent is not satisfactory to the City, Contractor shall, if requested by City, replace the Superintendent with another satisfactory to City. C. Contractor shall notify the City 24 hours prior to moving areas during the sequence of construction. 6.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, all Work at the Site shall be performed during Regular Working Hours. Contractor will not permit the 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 20 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 performance of Work beyond Regular Working Hours or for Weekend Working Hours without City’s written consent (which will not be unreasonably withheld). Written request (by letter or electronic communication) to perform Work: 1. for beyond Regular Working Hours, request must be made by noon at least two (2) Business Days prior 2. for Weekend Working Hours, request must be made by noon of the preceding Wednesday 3. for legal holidays, request must be made by noon seven Days prior to the legal holiday. 6.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, Contractor required testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work shall be as specified or, if not specified, shall be of sufficient quality to complete the Work and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties and guarantees required by the Specifications shall expressly run to the benefit of City. If required by City, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment. C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected, protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents. D. All items of standard equipment to be incorporated into the Work shall be the latest model at the time of bid, unless otherwise specified. 6.04 Project Schedule A. Contractor shall adhere to the Project Schedule established in accordance with Paragraph 2.07 and the General Requirements as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below. 1. Contractor shall submit to City for acceptance (to the extent indicated in Paragraph 2.07 and the General Requirements) proposed adjustments in the Project Schedule that will not result in changing the Contract Time. Such adjustments will comply with any provisions of the General Requirements applicable thereto. 2. Contractor shall submit to City a monthly Project Schedule with a monthly progress payment 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 21 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 for the duration of the Contract in accordance with the schedule specification 01 32 16. 3. Proposed adjustments in the Project Schedule that will change the Contract Time shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 12. Adjustments in Contract Time may only be made by a Change Order. 6.05 Substitutes and “Or-Equals” A. Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent, or “or-equal” item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment of other Suppliers may be submitted to City for review under the circumstances described below. 1. “Or-Equal” Items: If in City’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by City as an “or-equal” item, in which case review and approval of the proposed item may, in City’s sole discretion, be accomplished without compliance with some or all of the requirements for approval of proposed substitute items. For the purposes of this Paragraph 6.05.A.1, a proposed item of material or equipment will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if: a. the City determines that: 1) it is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability, appearance, strength, and design characteristics; 2) it will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole; and 3) it has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service; and 4) it is not objectionable to the City. b. Contractor certifies that, if approved and incorporated into the Work: 1) there will be no increase in cost to the City or increase in Contract Time; and 2) it will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the item named in the Contract Documents. 2. Substitute Items: a. If in City’s sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item under Paragraph 6.05.A.1, it may be submitted as a 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 22 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 proposed substitute item. b. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow City to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Requests for review of proposed substitute items of material or equipment will not be accepted by City from anyone other than Contractor. c. Contractor shall make written application to City for review of a proposed substitute item of material or equipment that Contractor seeks to furnish or use. The application shall comply with Section 01 25 00 and: 1) shall certify that the proposed substitute item will: a) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the general design; b) be similar in substance to that specified; c) be suited to the same use as that specified; and 2) will state: a) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will prejudice Contractor’s achievement of final completion on time; b) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with City for other work on the Project) to adapt the design to the proposed substitute item; c) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or royalty; and 3) will identify: a) all variations of the proposed substitute item from that specified; b) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement services; and 4) shall contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including costs of redesign and Damage Claims of other contractors affected by any resulting change. B. Substitute Construction Methods or Procedures: If a specific means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is expressly required by the Contract Documents, Contractor may furnish or utilize a substitute means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 23 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 of construction approved by City. Contractor shall submit sufficient information to allow City, in City’s sole discretion, to determine that the substitute proposed is equivalent to that expressly called for by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall make written application to City for review in the same manner as those provided in Paragraph 6.05.A.2. C. City’s Evaluation: City will be allowed a reasonable time within which to evaluate each proposal or submittal made pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A and 6.05.B. City may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed substitute. City will be the sole judge of acceptability. No “or-equal” or substitute will be ordered, installed or utilized until City’s review is complete, which will be evidenced by a Change Order in the case of a substitute and an accepted Submittal for an “or-equal.” City will advise Contractor in writing of its determination. D. Special Guarantee: City may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a special performance guarantee, warranty, or other surety with respect to any substitute. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless City and anyone directly or indirectly employed by them from and against any and all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including attorneys fees) arising out of the use of substituted materials or equipment. E. City’s Cost Reimbursement: City will record City’s costs in evaluating a substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor pursuant to Paragraphs 6.05.A.2 and 6.05.B. Whether or not City approves a substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor may be required to reimburse City for evaluating each such proposed substitute. Contractor may also be required to reimburse City for the charges for making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct contract with City) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute. F. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed substitute or “or-equal” at Contractor’s expense. G. City Substitute Reimbursement: Costs (savings or charges) attributable to acceptance of a substitute shall be incorporated to the Contract by Change Order. H. Time Extensions: No additional time will be granted for substitutions. 6.06 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor shall perform with his own organization, work of a value not less than 35% of the value embraced on the Contract, unless otherwise approved by the City. B. Contractor shall not employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity, whether initially or as a replacement, against whom City may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity to furnish or perform any of the Work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection (excluding those acceptable to City as indicated in Paragraph 6.06.C). C. The City may from time to time require the use of certain Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 24 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 individuals or entities on the project, and will provide such requirements in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor shall be fully responsible to City for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity any contractual relationship between City and any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other individual or entity; nor 2. shall create any obligation on the part of City to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. E. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the Work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. F. All Subcontractors, Suppliers, and such other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work shall communicate with City through Contractor. G. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of City. 6.07 Wage Rates A. Duty to pay Prevailing Wage Rates. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code (as amended), including the payment of not less than the rates determined by the City Council of the City of Denton to be the prevailing wage rates in accordance with Chapter 2258. Such prevailing wage rates are included in these Contract Documents. B. Penalty for Violation. A Contractor or any Subcontractor who does not pay the prevailing wage shall, upon demand made by the City, pay to the City $60 for each worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the prevailing wage rates stipulated in these contract documents. This penalty shall be retained by the City to offset its administrative costs, pursuant to Texas Government Code 2258.023. C. Complaints of Violations and City Determination of Good Cause. On receipt of information, including a complaint by a worker, concerning an alleged violation of 2258.023, Texas Government Code, by a Contractor or Subcontractor, the City shall make an initial determination, before the 31st day after the date the City receives the information, as to whether 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 25 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 good cause exists to believe that the violation occurred. The City shall notify in writing the Contractor or Subcontractor and any affected worker of its initial determination. Upon the City’s determination that there is good cause to believe the Contractor or Subcontractor has violated Chapter 2258, the City shall retain the full amounts claimed by the claimant or claimants as the difference between wages paid and wages due under the prevailing wage rates, such amounts being subtracted from successive progress payments pending a final determination of the violation. D. Arbitration Required if Violation Not Resolved. An issue relating to an alleged violation of Section 2258.023, Texas Government Code, including a penalty owed to the City or an affected worker, shall be submitted to binding arbitration in accordance with the Texas General Arbitration Act (Article 224 et seq., Revised Statutes) if the Contractor or Subcontractor and any affected worker does not resolve the issue by agreement before the 15th day after the date the City makes its initial determination pursuant to Paragraph C above. If the persons required to arbitrate under this section do not agree on an arbitrator before the 11th day after the date that arbitration is required, a district court shall appoint an arbitrator on the petition of any of the persons. The City is not a party in the arbitration. The decision and award of the arbitrator is final and binding on all parties and may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction. E. Records to be Maintained. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall, for a period of three (3) years following the date of acceptance of the work, maintain records that show (i) the name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor in the construction of the Work provided for in this Contract; and (ii) the actual per diem wages paid to each worker. The records shall be open at all reasonable hours for inspection by the City. The provisions of Paragraph 6.23, Right to Audit, shall pertain to this inspection. F. Progress Payments. With each progress payment or payroll period, whichever is less, the Contractor shall submit an affidavit stating that the Contractor has complied with the requirements of Chapter 2258, Texas Government Code. G. Posting of Wage Rates. The Contractor shall post prevailing wage rates in a conspicuous place at all times. H. Subcontractor Compliance. The Contractor shall include in its subcontracts and/or shall otherwise require all of its Subcontractors to comply with Paragraphs A through G above. 6.08 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of City, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by City in the Contract Documents. Failure of the City to disclose such information does not relieve the Contractor from its obligations to pay for the 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 26 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 use of said fees or royalties to others. B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless City, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 6.09 Permits and Utilities A. Contractor obtained permits and licenses. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses except those provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or Contract Documents. City shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids, or, if there are no Bids, on the Effective Date of the Agreement, except for permits provided by the City as specified in 6.09.B. City shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work. B. City obtained permits and licenses. City will obtain and pay for all permits and licenses as provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or Contract Documents. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to carry out the provisions of the permit. If the Contractor initiates changes to the Contract and the City approves the changes, the Contractor is responsible for obtaining clearances and coordinating with the appropriate regulatory agency. The City will not reimburse the Contractor for any cost associated with these requirements of any City acquired permit. The following are permits the City will obtain if required: 1. Texas Department of Transportation Permits 2. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Permits 3. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality Permits 4. Railroad Company Permits 5. Texas Department of Licensing and Regulation (TDLR) Permits C. Outstanding permits and licenses. The City anticipates acquisition of and/or access to permits and licenses. Any outstanding permits and licenses are anticipated to be acquired in accordance with the schedule set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. The Project Schedule submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents must consider any outstanding permits and licenses. 6.10 Laws and Regulations 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 27 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, the City shall not be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or Regulations. B. If Contractor performs any Work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such Work. However, it shall not be Contractor’s responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.02. C. Changes in Laws or Regulations not known at the time of opening of Bids having an effect on the cost or time of performance of the Work may be the subject of an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time. 6.11 Taxes A. On a contract awarded by the City, an organization which qualifies for exemption pursuant to Texas Tax Code, Subchapter H (as amended), the Contractor may purchase, rent or lease all materials, supplies and equipment used or consumed in the performance of this contract by issuing to his supplier an exemption certificate in lieu of the tax, said exemption certificate to comply with State Comptroller’s Rulings applicable to Texas Tax Code, Subchapter H. Any such exemption certificate issued to the Contractor in lieu of the tax shall be subject to and shall comply with all applicable rulings pertaining to the Texas Tax Code, Subchapter H. B. Texas Tax permits and information may be obtained from: 1. Comptroller of Public Accounts Sales Tax Division Capitol Station Austin, TX 78711; or 2. http://www.window.state.tx.us/taxinfo/taxforms/93-forms.html 6.12 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site and other areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall not unreasonably encumber the Site and other areas with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof, or of any adjacent land or areas 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 28 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 resulting from the performance of the Work. 2. At any time when, in the judgment of the City, the Contractor has obstructed, closed, or is carrying on operations in a portion of a street, right-of-way, or easement greater than is necessary for proper execution of the Work, the City may require the Contractor to finish the section on which operations are in progress before work is commenced on any additional area of the Site. 3. Construction equipment, spoil materials, supplies, forms, buildings, labs, or equipment and supply storage buildings, or any other item that may be transported by flood flows, shall not be stored within existing federal floodways during the course of the Work. 4. Should any Damage Claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly attempt to resolve the Damage Claim. 5. Pursuant to Paragraph 6.21, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless City, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against City. B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work Contractor shall keep the Site and other areas free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials, rubbish, and other debris shall conform to applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Site Maintenance Cleaning: 24 hours after written notice is given to the Contractor that the clean-up on the job site is proceeding in a manner unsatisfactory to the City, if the Contractor fails to correct the unsatisfactory procedure, the City may take such direct action as the City deems appropriate to correct the clean-up deficiencies cited to the Contractor in the written notice (by letter or electronic communication), and the costs of such direct action, plus 25% of such costs, shall be deducted from the monies due or to become due to the Contractor. D. Final Site Cleaning: Prior to Final Acceptance of the Work, Contractor shall clean the Site and the Work and make it ready for utilization by City or adjacent property owner. At the completion of the Work Contractor shall remove from the Site all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to original condition or better all property disturbed by the Work. E. Loading Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject any part of the Work or adjacent property to stresses or pressures that will endanger it. 6.13 Record Documents A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site or in a place designated by the Contractor and approved by the City, one (1) record copy of all Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Field Orders, and written interpretations and clarifications in good order and annotated to 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 29 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 show changes made during construction. These record documents together with all approved Samples and a counterpart of all accepted Submittals will be available to City for reference. Upon completion of the Work, these record documents, any operation and maintenance manuals, and Submittals will be delivered to City prior to Final Inspection. Contractor shall include accurate locations for buried and embedded items. 6.14 Safety and Protection A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: 1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work; 2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the Site; and 3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. B. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury, or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and other utility owners when prosecution of the Work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property. C. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of City’s safety programs, if any. D. Contractor shall inform City of the specific requirements of Contractor’s safety program, if any, with which City’s employees and representatives must comply while at the Site. E. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 6.14.A.2 or 6.14.A.3 caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. F. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and City has accepted the Work. 6.15 Safety Representative Contractor shall inform City in writing of Contractor’s designated safety representative at the Site. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 30 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 6.16 Hazard Communication Programs Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among employers in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 6.17 Emergencies and/or Rectification A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Contractor shall give City prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby or are required as a result thereof. If City determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Change Order may be issued. B. Should the Contractor fail to respond to a request from the City to rectify any discrepancies, omissions, or correction necessary to conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the City shall give the Contractor written notice that such work or changes are to be performed. The written notice shall direct attention to the discrepant condition and request the Contractor to take remedial action to correct the condition. In the event the Contractor does not take positive steps to fulfill this written request, or does not show just cause for not taking the proper action, within 24 hours, the City may take such remedial action with City resources or by contract. The City shall deduct an amount equal to the entire costs for such remedial action, plus 25%, from any funds due or become due the Contractor on the Project. 6.18 Submittals A. Contractor shall submit required Submittals to City for review and acceptance in accordance with the accepted Schedule of Submittals (as required by Paragraph 2.07). Each submittal will be identified as City may require. 1. Submit in accordance with the General Requirements. 2. Data shown on the Submittals will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar data, to demonstrate to City the services, materials, and equipment Contractor proposes to provide, and to enable City to review the information for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.18.C. 3. Submittals submitted as herein provided by Contractor and reviewed by City for conformance with the design concept shall be executed in conformity with the Contract Documents unless otherwise required by City. 4. When Submittals are submitted for the purpose of showing the installation in greater detail, their review shall not excuse Contractor from requirements shown on the Drawings and Specifications. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 31 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 5. For-Information-Only submittals upon which the City is not expected to conduct review or take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. 6. Submit required number of Samples specified in the Specifications. 7. Clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as City may require to enable City to review the submittal for the limited purposes required by Paragraph 6.18.C. B. Where a Submittal is required by the Contract Documents or the Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to City’s review and acceptance of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of Contractor. C. City’s Review: 1. City will provide timely review of required Submittals in accordance with the Schedule of Submittals acceptable to City. City’s review and acceptance will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. City’s review and acceptance will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction (except where a particular means, method, technique, sequence, or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and acceptance of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. 3. City’s review and acceptance shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of Section 01 33 00 and City has given written acceptance of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Submittal. City’s review and acceptance shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 6.19 Continuing the Work Except as otherwise provided, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Project Schedule during all disputes or disagreements with City. No Work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as City and Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 32 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 6.20 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to City that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. City and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors shall be entitled to rely on representation of Contractor’s warranty and guarantee. B. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by: 1. abuse, modification, or improper maintenance or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom Contractor is responsible; or 2. normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor’s obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. observations by City; 2. recommendation or payment by City of any progress or final payment; 3. the issuance of a certificate of Final Acceptance by City or any payment related thereto by City; 4. use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by City; 5. any review and acceptance of a Submittal by City; 6. any inspection, test, or approval by others; or 7. any correction of defective Work by City. D. The Contractor shall remedy any defects or damages in the Work and pay for any damage to other work or property resulting therefrom which shall appear within a period of two (2) years from the date of Final Acceptance of the Work unless a longer period is specified and shall furnish a good and sufficient maintenance bond, complying with the requirements of Article 5.02.B. The City will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. 6.21 Indemnification A. Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify, hold harmless and defend, at its own expense, the City, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all claims arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licenses or invitees under this 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 33 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 Contract. THIS INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE AND BE EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF THE CITY. This indemnity provision is intended to include, without limitation, indemnity for costs, expenses and legal fees incurred by the City in defending against such claims and causes of actions. B. Contractor covenants and agrees to indemnify and hold harmless, at its own expense, the City, its officers, servants and employees, from and against any and all loss, damage or destruction of property of the City, arising out of, or alleged to arise out of, the work and services to be performed by the Contractor, its officers, agents, employees, subcontractors, licensees or invitees under this Contract. THIS INDEMNIFICATION PROVISION IS SPECIFICALLY INTENDED TO OPERATE AND BE EFFECTIVE EVEN IF IT IS ALLEGED OR PROVEN THAT ALL OR SOME OF THE DAMAGES BEING SOUGHT WERE CAUSED, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BY ANY ACT, OMISSION OR NEGLIGENCE OF THE CITY. 6.22 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor will not be required to provide professional design services unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless such services are required to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. B. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, City will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such professional. Submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to City. C. City shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals, provided City has specified to Contractor performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 6.22, City’s review and acceptance of design calculations and design drawings will be only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with performance and design criteria given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. City’s review and acceptance of Submittals (except design calculations and design drawings) will be only for the purpose stated in Paragraph 6.18.C. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 34 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 6.23 Right to Audit A. The City shall have the right to audit and make copies of the books, records and computations pertaining to the Contract. The Contractor shall retain such books, records, documents and other evidence pertaining to the Contract period and five years thereafter, except if an audit is in progress or audit findings are yet unresolved, in which case records shall be kept until all audit tasks are completed and resolved. These books, records, documents and other evidence shall be available, within ten (10) business days of written request. Further, the Contractor shall also require all Subcontractors, material suppliers, and other payees to retain all books, records, documents and other evidence pertaining to the Contract, and to allow the City similar access to those documents. All books and records will be made available within a 50 mile radius of the City. The cost of the audit will be borne by the City unless the audit reveals an overpayment of 1% or greater. If an overpayment of 1% or greater occurs, the reasonable cost of the audit, including any travel costs, must be borne by the Contractor which must be payable within five (5) business days of receipt of an invoice. B. Failure to comply with the provisions of this section shall be a material breach of the Contract and shall constitute, in the City’s sole discretion, grounds for termination thereof. Each of the terms “books”, “records”, “documents” and “other evidence”, as used above, shall be construed to include drafts and electronic files, even if such drafts or electronic files are subsequently used to generate or prepare a final printed document. 6.24 Nondiscrimination A. The City is responsible for operating Public Transportation Programs and implementing transit- related projects, which are funded in part with Federal financial assistance awarded by the U.S. Department of Transportation and the Federal Transit Administration (FTA), without discriminating against any person in the United States on the basis of race, color, or national origin. B. Title VI, Civil Rights Act of 1964 as amended: Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Act and the Regulations as further defined in the Supplementary Conditions for any project receiving Federal assistance. ARTICLE 7 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 7.01 Related Work at Site A. City may perform other work related to the Project at the Site with City’s employees, or other City contractors, or through other direct contracts therefor, or have other work performed by utility owners. If such other work is not noted in the Contract Documents, then written notice thereof will be given to Contractor prior to starting any such other work; and B. Contractor shall afford each other contractor who is a party to such a direct contract, each utility owner, and City, if City is performing other work with City’s employees or other City contractors, proper and safe access to the Site, provide a reasonable opportunity for the 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 35 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of such other work, and properly coordinate the Work with theirs. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of City and the others whose work will be affected. C. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work performed by others under this Article 7, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to City in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work. Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects in the work provided by others. 7.02 Coordination A. If City intends to contract with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the Site, the following will be set forth in Supplementary Conditions: 1. the individual or entity who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various contractors will be identified; 2. the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and 3. the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, City shall have authority for such coordination. ARTICLE 8 – CITY’S RESPONSIBILITIES 8.01 Communications to Contractor Except as otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, City shall issue all communications to Contractor. 8.02 Furnish Data City shall timely furnish the data required under the Contract Documents. 8.03 Pay When Due City shall make payments to Contractor in accordance with Article 14. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 36 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 8.04 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests City’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements and providing engineering surveys to establish reference points are set forth in Paragraphs 4.01 and 4.05. Paragraph 4.02 refers to City’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at or contiguous to the Site that have been utilized by City in preparing the Contract Documents. 8.05 Change Orders City shall execute Change Orders in accordance with Paragraph 10.03. 8.06 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals City’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in Paragraph 13.03. 8.07 Limitations on City’s Responsibilities A. The City shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. City will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. City will notify the Contractor of applicable safety plans pursuant to Paragraph 6.14. 8.08 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition City’s responsibility with respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition is set forth in Paragraph 4.06. 8.09 Compliance with Safety Program While at the Site, City’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which City has been informed pursuant to Paragraph 6.14. ARTICLE 9 – CITY’S OBSERVATION STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.01 City’s Project Manager or Duly Authorized Representative City will provide a Project Manager or duly authorized representative during the construction period. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of City’s Project Manager or duly appointed representative during construction are set forth in the Contract Documents. City’s Project Manager for this Contract is as set forth in the Supplementary Conditions. City will establish a duly authorized representative at the Preconstruction Meeting in accordance with Section 01 31 19. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 37 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 9.02 Visits to Site A. City will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of construction as City deems necessary in order to observe the progress that has been made and the quality of the various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, City will determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. City will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check the quality or quantity of the Work. City’s efforts will be directed toward providing City a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform generally to the Contract Documents. B. City’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 8.07. Particularly, but without limitation, during or as a result of City’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work, City will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. 9.03 Authorized Variations in Work City’s Project Manager or duly authorized representative may authorize minor variations in the Work from the requirements of the Contract Documents which do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and are compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. These may be accomplished by a Field Order and will be binding on City and also on Contractor, who shall perform the Work involved promptly. 9.04 Rejecting Defective Work City will have authority to reject Work which City’s Project Manager or duly authorized representative believes to be defective, or will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. City will have authority to conduct special inspection or testing of the Work as provided in Article 13, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed. 9.05 Determinations for Work Performed Contractor will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Work performed. City’s Project Manager or duly authorized representative will review with Contractor the preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written recommendation. City’s written decision will be final (except as modified to reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data). 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 38 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 9.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. City will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the Work thereunder. B. City will render a written decision on any issue referred. C. City’s written decision on the issue referred will be final and binding on the Contractor, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 10.06. ARTICLE 10 – CHANGES IN THE WORK; CLAIMS; EXTRA WORK 10.01 Authorized Changes in the Work A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, City may, at any time or from time to time, order Extra Work. Upon notice of such Extra Work, Contractor shall proceed with the Work involved only upon receiving written notice from City. Extra Work will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as otherwise specifically provided). Extra Work shall be memorialized by a Change Order which may or may not precede an order of Extra work. B. For minor changes of Work not requiring changes to Contract Time or Contract Price, a Field Order may be issued by the City. 10.02 Unauthorized Changes in the Work Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Paragraph 3.04, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 6.17. 10.03 Execution of Change Orders A. City and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering: 1. changes in the Work which are: (i) ordered by City pursuant to Paragraph 10.01.A, (ii) required because of acceptance of defective Work under Paragraph 13.08 or City’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 13.09, or (iii) agreed to by the parties; 2. changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties, including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed. 10.04 Dispute of Extra Work A. Should a difference arise as to what does or does not constitute Extra Work, or as to the payment thereof, and the City insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written orders and shall keep accurate account of the actual 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 39 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 reasonable cost thereof. Contract Claims regarding Extra Work shall be made pursuant to Paragraph 10.06. B. The Contractor shall furnish the City such installation records of all deviations from the original Contract Documents as may be necessary to enable the City to prepare for permanent record a corrected set of plans showing the actual installation. C. The compensation agreed upon for Extra Work whether or not initiated by a Change Order shall be a full, complete and final payment for all costs Contractor incurs as a result or relating to the change or Extra Work, whether said costs are known, unknown, foreseen or unforeseen at that time, including without limitation, any costs for delay, extended overhead, ripple or impact cost, or any other effect on changed or unchanged work as a result of the change or Extra Work. 10.05 Notification to Surety If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time), the giving of any such notice will be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted by the Contractor to reflect the effect of any such change. 10.06 Contract Claims Process A. City’s Decision Required: All Contract Claims, except those waived pursuant to Paragraph 14.09, shall be referred to the City for decision. A decision by City shall be required as a condition precedent to any exercise by Contractor of any rights or remedies he may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws and Regulations in respect of such Contract Claims. B. Notice: 1. Written notice stating the general nature of each Contract Claim shall be delivered by the Contractor to City no later than 15 days after the start of the event giving rise thereto. The responsibility to substantiate a Contract Claim shall rest with the party making the Contract Claim. 2. Notice of the amount or extent of the Contract Claim, with supporting data shall be delivered to the City on or before 45 days from the start of the event giving rise thereto (unless the City allows additional time for Contractor to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Contract Claim). 3. A Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.01. 4. A Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Time shall be prepared in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 12.02. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 40 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 5. Each Contract Claim shall be accompanied by Contractor’s written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the Contractor believes it is entitled as a result of said event. 6. The City shall submit any response to the Contractor within 30 days after receipt of the claimant’s last submittal (unless Contract allows additional time). C. City’s Action: City will review each Contract Claim and, within 30 days after receipt of the last submittal of the Contractor, if any, take one of the following actions in writing: 1. deny the Contract Claim in whole or in part; 2. approve the Contract Claim; or 3. notify the Contractor that the City is unable to resolve the Contract Claim if, in the City’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the City to do so. For purposes of further resolution of the Contract Claim, such notice shall be deemed a denial. D. City’s written action under Paragraph 10.06.C will be final and binding, unless City or Contractor invoke the dispute resolution procedure set forth in Article 16 within 30 days of such action or denial. E. No Contract Claim for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this Paragraph 10.06. F. If the City fails to take any action pursuant to Paragraph 10.06 (C) the contract Claim is considered to have been denied by the City. ARTICLE 11 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK; PLANS QUANTITY MEASUREMENT 11.01 Cost of the Work A. Costs Included: The term Cost of the Work means the sum of all costs, except those excluded in Paragraph 11.01.B, necessarily incurred and paid by Contractor in the proper performance of the Work. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order, the costs to be reimbursed to Contractor will be only those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work. Such costs shall not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 11.01.B, and shall include but not be limited to the following items: 1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by City and Contractor. Such employees shall include, without limitation, superintendents, foremen, and other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not employed full time on the Work shall be apportioned on the basis of their time spent on the Work. Payroll costs shall include; 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 41 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 a. salaries and wages plus the cost of fringe benefits, which shall include social security contributions, unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and retirement benefits, bonuses, sick leave, vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The expenses of performing Work outside of Regular Working Hours, Weekend Working Hours, or legal holidays, shall be included in the above to the extent authorized by City. 2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services required in connection therewith. 3. Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts thereof whether rented from Contractor or others in accordance with rental agreements approved by City, and the costs of transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal thereof. All such costs shall be in accordance with the terms of said rental agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts shall cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work. 4. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. If required by City, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids from subcontractors acceptable to City and Contractor and shall deliver such bids to City, who will then determine, which bids, if any, will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and fee shall be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 11.01. 5. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects, testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed for services specifically related to the Work. 6. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work. b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site, and hand tools not owned by the workers, which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of Contractor. c. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which Contractor is liable not covered under Paragraph 6.11, as imposed by Laws and Regulations. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 42 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 d. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses. e. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work, provided such losses and damages have resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses shall include settlements made with the written consent and approval of City. No such losses, damages, and expenses shall be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of determining Contractor’s fee. f. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site. g. Minor expenses such as telegrams, long distance telephone calls, telephone and communication services at the Site, express and courier services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work. h. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance Contractor is required by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain. B. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work shall not include any of the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals (of partnerships and sole proprietorships), general managers, safety managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks, and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 11.01.A.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 11.01.A.4, all of which are to be considered administrative costs covered by the Contractor’s fee. 2. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable, including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property. 5. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 43 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 C. Contractor’s Fee: When all the Work is performed on the basis of cost-plus, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in the Agreement. When the value of any Work covered by a Change Order for an adjustment in Contract Price is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor’s fee shall be determined as set forth in Paragraph 12.01.C. D. Documentation: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be determined pursuant to Paragraphs 11.01.A and 11.01.B, Contractor will establish and maintain records thereof in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit in a form acceptable to City an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data. 11.02 Allowances A. Specified Allowance: It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to City. B. Cash Allowances: 1. Contractor agrees that: a. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and b. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the allowances, and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. C. Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that a contingency allowance, if any, is for the sole use of City. D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.03 Unit Price Work A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 44 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 City subject to the provisions of Paragraph 9.05. C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item. Work described in the Contract Documents, or reasonably inferred as required for a functionally complete installation, but not identified in the listing of unit price items shall be considered incidental to unit price work listed and the cost of incidental work included as part of the unit price. D. City may make an adjustment in the Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 12.01 if: 1. the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Agreement; and 2. there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work. E. Increased or Decreased Quantities: The City reserves the right to order Extra Work in accordance with Paragraph 10.01. 1. If the changes in quantities or the alterations do not significantly change the character of work under the Contract Documents, the altered work will be paid for at the Contract unit price. 2. If the changes in quantities or alterations significantly change the character of work, the Contract will be amended by a Change Order. 3. If no unit prices exist, this will be considered Extra Work and the Contract will be amended by a Change Order in accordance with Article 12. 4. A significant change in the character of work occurs when: a. the character of work for any Item as altered differs materially in kind or nature from that in the Contract or b. a Major Item of work varies by more than 25% from the original Contract quantity. 5. When the quantity of work to be done under any Major Item of the Contract is more than 125% of the original quantity stated in the Contract, then either party to the Contract may request an adjustment to the unit price on the portion of the work that is above 125%. 6. When the quantity of work to be done under any Major Item of the Contract is less than 75% of the original quantity stated in the Contract, then either party to the Contract may request an adjustment to the unit price. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 45 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 11.04 Plans Quantity Measurement for Unclassified Excavation or Embankment A. Plans quantities may or may not represent the exact quantity of work performed or material moved, handled, or placed during the execution of the Contract. The estimated bid quantities are designated as final payment quantities, unless revised by the governing Section or this Article. B. If the quantity measured as outlined under “Price and Payment Procedures” varies by more than 25% (or as stipulated under “Price and Payment Procedures” for specific Items) from the total estimated quantity for an individual Item originally shown in the Contract Documents, an adjustment may be made to the quantity of authorized work done for payment purposes. The party to the Contract requesting the adjustment will provide field measurements and calculations showing the final quantity for which payment will be made. Payment for revised quantity will be made at the unit price bid for that Item, except as provided for in Article 10. C. When quantities are revised by a change in design approved by the City, by Change Order, or to correct an error, or to correct an error on the plans, the plans quantity will be increased or decreased by the amount involved in the change, and the 25% variance will apply to the new plans quantity. D. If the total Contract quantity multiplied by the unit price bid for an individual Item is less than $250 and the Item is not originally a plans quantity Item, then the Item may be paid as a plans quantity Item if the City and Contractor agree in writing to fix the final quantity as a plans quantity. E. For callout work or non-site specific Contracts, the plans quantity measurement requirements are not applicable. ARTICLE 12 – CHANGE OF CONTRACT PRICE; CHANGE OF CONTRACT TIME 12.01 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. B. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order will be determined as follows: 1. where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 11.03); or 2. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum or unit price (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 12.01.C.2), and shall include the cost of any secondary impacts that are foreseeable at the time of pricing the cost of Extra Work; or 3. where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 46 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 and agreement to a lump sum or unit price is not reached under Paragraph 12.01.B.2, on the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 11.01) plus a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in Paragraph 12.01.C). C. Contractor’s Fee: The Contractor’s additional fee for overhead and profit shall be determined as follows: 1. a mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 2. if a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. for costs incurred under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1, 11.01.A.2. and 11.01.A.3, the Contractor’s additional fee shall be 15 percent except for: 1) rental fees for Contractor’s own equipment using standard rental rates; 2) bonds and insurance; b. for costs incurred under Paragraph 11.01.A.4 and 11.01.A.5, the Contractor’s fee shall be five percent (5%); 1) where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 12.01.C.2.a and 12.01.C.2.b is that the Subcontractor who actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, will be paid a fee of 15 percent of the costs incurred by such Subcontractor under Paragraphs 11.01.A.1 and 11.01.A.2 and that any higher tier Subcontractor and Contractor will each be paid a fee of five percent (5%) of the amount paid to the next lower tier Subcontractor, however in no case shall the cumulative total of fees paid be in excess of 25%; c. no fee shall be payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraphs 11.01.A.6, and 11.01.B; d. the amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to City for any change which results in a net decrease in cost will be the amount of the actual net decrease in cost plus a deduction in Contractor’s fee by an amount equal to five percent (5%) of such net decrease. 12.02 Change of Contract Time A. The Contract Time may only be changed by a Change Order. B. No extension of the Contract Time will be allowed for Extra Work or for claimed delay unless the Extra Work contemplated or claimed delay is shown to be on the critical path of the Project Schedule or Contractor can show by Critical Path Method analysis how the Extra Work or claimed delay adversely affects the critical path. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 47 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 12.03 Delays A. Where Contractor is reasonably delayed in the performance or completion of any part of the Work within the Contract Time due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a Contract Claim is made therefor. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts or neglect by City, acts or neglect of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by Article 7, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, or acts of God. Such an adjustment shall be Contractor’s sole and exclusive remedy for the delays described in this Paragraph. B. If Contractor is delayed, City shall not be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) sustained by Contractor on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project. C. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time for delays within the control of Contractor. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. D. The Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work, except when direct and unavoidable extra cost to the Contractor is caused by the failure of the City to provide information or material, if any, which is to be furnished by the City. ARTICLE 13 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.01 Notice of Defects Notice of all defective Work of which City has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor. Defective Work may be rejected, corrected, or accepted as provided in this Article 13. 13.02 Access to Work City, independent testing laboratories, and governmental agencies with jurisdictional interests will have access to the Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testing. Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply therewith as applicable. 13.03 Tests and Inspections A. Contractor shall give City timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests, or approvals and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. B. If Contract Documents, Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 48 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 of the Work (or part thereof) to be inspected, tested, or approved, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such independent inspections, tests, retests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish City the required certificates of inspection or approval; excepting, however, those fees specifically identified in the Supplementary Conditions or any Texas Department of Licensure and Regulation (TDLR) inspections, which shall be paid as described in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests, re-tests, or approvals required for City’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; or acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work. Such inspections, tests, re-tests, or approvals shall be performed by organizations acceptable to City. D. City may arrange for the services of an independent testing laboratory (“Testing Lab”) to perform any inspections or tests (“Testing”) for any part of the Work, as determined solely by City. 1. City will coordinate such Testing to the extent possible, with Contractor; 2. Should any Testing under this Section 13.03 D result in a “fail”, “did not pass” or other similar negative result, the Contractor shall be responsible for paying for any and all retests. Contractor’s cancellation without cause of City initiated Testing shall be deemed a negative result and require a retest. 3. Any amounts owed for any retest under this Section 13.03 D shall be paid directly to the Testing Lab by Contractor. City will forward all invoices for retests to Contractor. 4. If Contractor fails to pay the Testing Lab, City will not issue Final Payment until the Testing Lab is paid. E. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of City, Contractor shall, if requested by City, uncover such Work for observation. F. Uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 13.03.E shall be at Contractor’s expense. G. Contractor shall have the right to make a Contract Claim regarding any retest or invoice issued under Section 13.03 D. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 49 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 13.04 Uncovering Work A. If any Work is covered contrary to the Contract Documents or specific instructions by the City, it must, if requested by City, be uncovered for City’s observation and replaced at Contractor’s expense. B. If City considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by City or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at City’s request, shall uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as City may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material, and equipment. 1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); or City shall be entitled to accept defective Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.08 in which case Contractor shall still be responsible for all costs associated with exposing, observing, and testing the defective Work. 2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an extension of the Contract Time directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement, and reconstruction. 13.05 City May Stop the Work If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, City may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, this right of City to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of City to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of them. 13.06 Correction or Removal of Defective Work A. Promptly after receipt of written notice, Contractor shall correct all defective Work pursuant to an acceptable schedule, whether or not fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by City, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, additional testing, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Failure to require the removal of any defective Work shall not constitute acceptance of such Work. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 50 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 B. When correcting defective Work under the terms of this Paragraph 13.06 or Paragraph 13.07, Contractor shall take no action that would void or otherwise impair City’s special warranty and guarantee, if any, on said Work. 13.07 Correction Period A. If within two (2) years after the date of Final Acceptance (or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents), any Work is found to be defective, or if the repair of any damages to the land or areas made available for Contractor’s use by City or permitted by Laws and Regulations as contemplated in Paragraph 6.10.A is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to City and in accordance with City’s written instructions: 1. repair such defective land or areas; or 2. correct such defective Work; or 3. if the defective Work has been rejected by City, remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective, and 4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to the work of others or other land or areas resulting therefrom. B. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of City’s written instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, City may have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed and replaced. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. C. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Acceptance of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Contract Documents. D. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected or removed and replaced under this Paragraph 13.07, the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work may be required to be extended for an additional period of one year after the end of the initial correction period. City shall provide 30 days written notice to Contractor should such additional warranty coverage be required. Contractor may dispute this requirement by filing a Contract Claim, pursuant to Paragraph 10.06. E. Contractor’s obligations under this Paragraph 13.07 are in addition to any other obligation or warranty. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.07 shall not be construed as a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 51 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 13.08 Acceptance of Defective Work If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, City prefers to accept it, City may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs) attributable to City’s evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work and for the diminished value of the Work to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Final Acceptance, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work, and City shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted. 13.09 City May Correct Defective Work A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from City to correct defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by City in accordance with Paragraph 13.06.A, or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, City may, after seven (7) days written notice to Contractor, correct, or remedy any such deficiency. B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09, City shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, City may exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment incorporated in the Work, stored at the Site or for which City has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow City, City’s representatives, agents, consultants, employees, and City’s other contractors, access to the Site to enable City to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph. C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs) incurred or sustained by City in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09 will be charged against Contractor, and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and City shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price. D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of City’s rights and remedies under this Paragraph 13.09. ARTICLE 14 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 14.01 Schedule of Values The Schedule of Values for lump sum contracts established as provided in Paragraph 2.07 will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of Application for Payment 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 52 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 acceptable to City. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.02 Progress Payments A. Applications for Payments: 1. Contractor is responsible for providing all information as required to become a vendor of the City. 2. At least 20 days before the date established in the General Requirements for each progress payment, Contractor shall submit to City for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. 3. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment shall also be accompanied by a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that City has received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens and evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate insurance or other arrangements to protect City’s interest therein, all of which must be satisfactory to City. 4. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application shall include an affidavit of Contractor stating that previous progress payments received on account of the Work have been applied on account to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations associated with prior Applications for Payment. 5. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in the Contract Documents. B. Review of Applications: 1. City will, after receipt of each Application for Payment, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment or return the Application to Contractor indicating reasons for refusing payment. In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. 2. City’s processing of any payment requested in an Application for Payment will be based on City’s observations of the executed Work, and on City’s review of the Application for Payment and the accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of City’s knowledge: a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated; b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents (subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon Final Acceptance, 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 53 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 the results of any subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for Work performed under Paragraph 9.05, and any other qualifications stated in the recommendation). 3. Processing any such payment will not thereby be deemed to have represented that: a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the responsibilities specifically assigned to City in the Contract Documents; or b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to be paid additionally by City or entitle City to withhold payment to Contractor, or c. Contractor has complied with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work. 4. City may refuse to process the whole or any part of any payment because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or tests, and revise or revoke any such payment previously made, to such extent as may be necessary to protect City from loss because: a. the Work is defective, or the completed Work has been damaged by the Contractor or his subcontractors, requiring correction or replacement; b. discrepancies in quantities contained in previous applications for payment; c. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; d. City has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 13.09; or e. City has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraph 15.02.A. C. Retainage: 1. For all contracts, retainage shall be five percent (5%). D. Liquidated Damages: For each calendar day that any work shall remain uncompleted after the time specified in the Contract Documents, the sum per day specified in the Agreement, will be deducted from the monies due the Contractor, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages suffered by the City. E. Payment: Contractor will be paid pursuant to the requirements of this Article 14 and payment will become due in accordance with the Contract Documents. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 54 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 F. Reduction in Payment: 1. City may refuse to make payment of the amount requested because: a. Claims have been made against City on account of Contractor’s performance or furnishing of the Work; b. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to City to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens; c. there are other items entitling City to a set-off against the amount recommended; or d. City has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in Paragraphs 14.02.B.4.a through 14.02.B.4.e or Paragraph 15.02.A. 2. If City refuses to make payment of the amount requested, City will give Contractor written notice stating the reasons for such action and pay Contractor any amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. City shall pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by City and Contractor, when Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 55 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 14.03 Contractor’s Warranty of Title Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to City no later than the time of payment free and clear of all Liens. 14.04 Partial Utilization A. Prior to Final Acceptance of all the Work, City may use or occupy any substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or which City, determines constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by City for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the remainder of the Work. City at any time may notify Contractor in writing to permit City to use or occupy any such part of the Work which City determines to be ready for its intended use, subject to the following conditions: 1. Contractor at any time may notify City in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use. 2. Within a reasonable time after notification as enumerated in Paragraph 14.05.A.1, City and Contractor shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If City does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, City will notify Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefor. 3. Partial Utilization will not constitute Final Acceptance by City. 14.05 Final Inspection A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work is complete in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. City will promptly schedule a Final Inspection with Contractor. 2. City will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. B. City reserves the right to deny request for Final Inspection if City determines that the entire Work is not sufficiently complete to warrant a Final Inspection. 14.06 Final Acceptance Upon completion by Contractor to City’s satisfaction, of any additional Work identified in the Final Inspection, City will issue to Contractor a letter of Final Acceptance. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 56 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 14.07 Final Payment A. Application for Payment: 1. Upon Final Acceptance, and in the opinion of City, Contractor may make an application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by Paragraph 5.03; b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment; c. a list of all pending or released Damage Claims against City that Contractor believes are unsettled; and d. affidavits of payments and complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to City) of all Lien rights arising out of or Liens filed in connection with the Work. B. Payment Becomes Due: 1. After City’s acceptance of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, requested by Contractor, less previous payments made and any sum City is entitled, including but not limited to liquidated damages, will become due and payable. 2. After all Damage Claims have been resolved: a. directly by the Contractor or; b. Contractor provides evidence that the Damage Claim has been reported to Contractor’s insurance provider for resolution. 3. The making of the final payment by the City shall not relieve the Contractor of any guarantees or other requirements of the Contract Documents which specifically continue thereafter. 14.08 Final Completion Delayed and Partial Retainage Release A. If final completion of the Work is significantly delayed, and if City so confirms, City may, upon receipt of Contractor’s final Application for Payment, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by City for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in Paragraph 14.02.C, and if bonds have been furnished as required in Paragraph 5.02, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to City with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 57 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Contract Claims. B. Partial Retainage Release. For a Contract that provides for a separate vegetative establishment and maintenance, and test and performance periods following the completion of all other construction in the Contract Documents for all Work locations, the City may release a portion of the amount retained provided that all other work is completed as determined by the City. Before the release, all submittals and final quantities must be completed and accepted for all other work. An amount sufficient to ensure Contract compliance will be retained. 14.09 Waiver of Claims The acceptance of final payment will constitute a release of the City from all claims or liabilities under the Contract for anything done or furnished or relating to the work under the Contract Documents or any act or neglect of City related to or connected with the Contract. ARTICLE 15 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.01 City May Suspend Work A. At any time and without cause, City may suspend the Work or any portion thereof by written notice to Contractor and which may fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. During temporary suspension of the Work covered by these Contract Documents, for any reason, the City will make no extra payment for stand-by time of construction equipment and/or construction crews. B. Should the Contractor not be able to complete a portion of the Project due to causes beyond the control of and without the fault or negligence of the Contractor, and should it be determined by mutual consent of the Contractor and City that a solution to allow construction to proceed is not available within a reasonable period of time, Contractor may request an extension in Contract Time, directly attributable to any such suspension. C. If it should become necessary to suspend the Work for an indefinite period, the Contractor shall store all materials in such a manner that they will not obstruct or impede the public unnecessarily nor become damaged in any way, and he shall take every precaution to prevent damage or deterioration of the work performed; he shall provide suitable drainage about the work, and erect temporary structures where necessary. D. Contractor may be reimbursed for the cost of moving his equipment off the job and returning the necessary equipment to the job when it is determined by the City that construction may be resumed. Such reimbursement shall be based on actual cost to the Contractor of moving the equipment and no profit will be allowed. Reimbursement may not be allowed if the equipment is moved to another construction project for the City. 15.02 City May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events by way of example, but not of 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 58 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 limitation, may justify termination for cause: 1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, failure to adhere to the Project Schedule established under Paragraph 2.07 as adjusted from time to time pursuant to Paragraph 6.04. 2. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; 3. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of City; or 4. Contractor’s violation in any substantial way of any provisions of the Contract Documents; or 5. Contractor’s failure to promptly make good any defect in materials or workmanship, or defects of any nature, the correction of which has been directed in writing by the City; or 6. Substantial indication that the Contractor has made an unauthorized assignment of the Contract or any funds due therefrom for the benefit of any creditor or for any other purpose; or 7. Substantial evidence that the Contractor has become insolvent or bankrupt, or otherwise financially unable to carry on the Work satisfactorily; or 8. Contractor commences legal action in a court of competent jurisdiction against the City. B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 15.02A. occur, City will provide written notice to Contractor and Surety to arrange a conference with Contractor and Surety to address Contractor's failure to perform the Work. Conference shall be held not later than 15 days, after receipt of notice. 1. If the City, the Contractor, and the Surety do not agree to allow the Contractor to proceed to perform the construction Contract, the City may, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, declare a Contractor default and formally terminate the Contractor's right to complete the Contract. Contractor default shall not be declared earlier than 20 days after the Contractor and Surety have received notice of conference to address Contractor's failure to perform the Work. 2. If Contractor's services are terminated, Surety shall be obligated to take over and perform the Work. If Surety does not commence performance thereof within 15 consecutive calendar days after date of an additional written notice demanding Surety's performance of its obligations, then City, without process or action at law, may take over any portion of the Work and complete it as described below. a. If City completes the Work, City may exclude Contractor and Surety from the site and take possession of the Work, and all materials and equipment incorporated into the 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 59 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 Work stored at the Site or for which City has paid Contractor or Surety but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as City may deem expedient. 3. Whether City or Surety completes the Work, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by City arising out of or resulting from completing the Work, such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to City. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by City will be incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this Paragraph, City shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. 4. Neither City, nor any of its respective consultants, agents, officers, directors or employees shall be in any way liable or accountable to Contractor or Surety for the method by which the completion of the said Work, or any portion thereof, may be accomplished or for the price paid therefor. 5. City, notwithstanding the method used in completing the Contract, shall not forfeit the right to recover damages from Contractor or Surety for Contractor's failure to timely complete the entire Contract. Contractor shall not be entitled to any claim on account of the method used by City in completing the Contract. 6. Maintenance of the Work shall continue to be Contractor's and Surety's responsibilities as provided for in the bond requirements of the Contract Documents or any special guarantees provided for under the Contract Documents or any other obligations otherwise prescribed by law. C. Notwithstanding Paragraphs 15.02.B, Contractor’s services will not be terminated if Contractor begins within seven days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate to correct its failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure within no more than 30 days of receipt of said notice. D. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by City, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of City against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by City will not release Contractor from liability. E. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the provisions of Paragraph 5.02, the termination procedures of that bond shall not supersede the provisions of this Article. 15.03 City May Terminate For Convenience A. City may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of City, terminate the Contract. Any termination shall be effected by mailing a notice of the termination to the 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 60 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 Contractor specifying the extent to which performance of Work under the contract is terminated, and the date upon which such termination becomes effective. Receipt of the notice shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established when the letter is placed in the United States Postal Service Mail by the City. Further, it shall be deemed conclusively presumed and established that such termination is made with just cause as therein stated; and no proof in any claim, demand or suit shall be required of the City regarding such discretionary action. B. After receipt of a notice of termination, and except as otherwise directed by the City, the Contractor shall: 1. Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified in the notice of termination; 2. place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work under the Contract as is not terminated; 3. terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of the Work terminated by notice of termination; 4. transfer title to the City and deliver in the manner, at the times, and to the extent, if any, directed by the City: a. the fabricated or unfabricated parts, Work in progress, completed Work, supplies and other material produced as a part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the Work terminated by the notice of the termination; and b. the completed, or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other property which, if the Contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the City. 5. complete performance of such Work as shall not have been terminated by the notice of termination; and 6. take such action as may be necessary, or as the City may direct, for the protection and preservation of the property related to its contract which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the owner has or may acquire the rest. C. At a time not later than 30 days after the termination date specified in the notice of termination, the Contractor may submit to the City a list, certified as to quantity and quality, of any or all items of termination inventory not previously disposed of, exclusive of items the disposition of which has been directed or authorized by City. D. Not later than 15 days thereafter, the City shall accept title to such items provided, that the list 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 61 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 submitted shall be subject to verification by the City upon removal of the items or, if the items are stored, within 45 days from the date of submission of the list, and any necessary adjustments to correct the list as submitted, shall be made prior to final settlement. E. Not later than 60 days after the notice of termination, the Contractor shall submit his termination claim to the City in the form and with the certification prescribed by the City. Unless an extension is made in writing within such 60 day period by the Contractor, and granted by the City, any and all such claims shall be conclusively deemed waived. F. In such case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items): 1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; 2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; and 3. reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. G. In the event of the failure of the Contractor and City to agree upon the whole amount to be paid to the Contractor by reason of the termination of the Work, the City shall determine, on the basis of information available to it, the amount, if any, due to the Contractor by reason of the termination and shall pay to the Contractor the amounts determined. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. ARTICLE 16 – DISPUTE RESOLUTION 16.01 Methods and Procedures A. Either City or Contractor may request mediation of any Contract Claim submitted for a decision under Paragraph 10.06 before such decision becomes final and binding. The request for mediation shall be submitted to the other party to the Contract. Timely submission of the request shall stay the effect of Paragraph 10.06.E. B. City and Contractor shall participate in the mediation process in good faith. The process shall be commenced within 60 days of filing of the request. C. If the Contract Claim is not resolved by mediation, City’s action under Paragraph 10.06.C or a denial pursuant to Paragraphs 10.06.C.3 or 10.06.D shall become final and binding 30 days after termination of the mediation unless, within that time period, City or Contractor: 1. elects in writing to invoke any other dispute resolution process provided for in the 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 62 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 Supplementary Conditions; or 2. agrees with the other party to submit the Contract Claim to another dispute resolution process; or 3. gives written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the Contract Claim to a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 17 – MISCELLANEOUS 17.01 Giving Notice A. Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, it will be deemed to have been validly given if: 1. delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended; or 2. delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. 3. delivered by electronic means to or from the Project Manager. B. Business address changes must be promptly made in writing to the other party. C. Whenever the Contract Documents specifies giving notice by electronic means such electronic notice shall be deemed sufficient upon confirmation of receipt by the receiving party. 17.02 Computation of Times When any period of time is referred to in the Contract Documents by days, it will be computed to exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday the next Working Day shall become the last day of the period. 17.03 Cumulative Remedies The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract Documents. The provisions of this Paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply. 00 72 00 - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS Page 63 of 63 CITY OF DENTON STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Revised September 20, 2018 17.04 Survival of Obligations All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by, or given in accordance with the Contract Documents, as well as all continuing obligations indicated in the Contract Documents, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or termination or completion of the Contract or termination of the services of Contractor. 17.05 Headings Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute parts of these General Conditions. 00 73 00 - 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 1 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SECTION 00 73 00 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 2 TO 3 GENERAL CONDITIONS 4 5 Supplementary Conditions 6 7 These Supplementary Conditions modify and supplement Section 00 72 00 - General Conditions, and other 8 provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions of the General Conditions that are 9 modified or supplemented remain in full force and effect as so modified or supplemented. All provisions 10 of the General Conditions which are not so modified or supplemented remain in full force and effect. 11 12 Defined Terms 13 14 The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions which are defined in the General Conditions have the 15 meaning assigned to them in the General Conditions, unless specifically noted herein. 16 17 Modifications and Supplements 18 19 The following are instructions that modify or supplement specific paragraphs in the General Conditions and 20 other Contract Documents. 21 22 SC-4.01A 23 24 Easement limits shown on the Drawing are approximate and were provided to establish a basis for bidding. 25 Upon receiving the final easements descriptions, Contractor shall compare them to the lines shown on the 26 Contract Drawings. 27 28 SC-4.01A.1., “Availability of Lands” 29 30 The following is a list of known outstanding right-of-way, and/or easements to be acquired, if any as of 31 March 28, 2019: 32 33 Outstanding Right-Of-Way, and/or Easements to Be Acquired 34 PARCEL NUMBER OWNER TARGET DATE OF POSSESSION Lake Ray Roberts Raw Water Chemical Feed Building U.S. Army Corps of Engineers March 31, 2019 The Contractor understands and agrees that the dates listed above are estimates only, are not guaranteed, 35 and do not bind the City. 36 37 If Contractor considers the final easements provided to differ materially from the representations on the 38 Contract Drawings, Contractor shall within five (5) Business Days and before proceeding with the Work, 39 notify City in writing associated with the differing easement line locations. 40 41 SC-4.01A.2, “Availability of Lands” 42 43 Utilities or obstructions to be removed, adjusted, and/or relocated 44 45 00 73 00 - 2 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 2 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 The following is list of utilities and/or obstructions that have not been removed, adjusted, and/or relocated 1 as of March 28, 2019: 2 3 EXPECTED OWNER UTILITY AND LOCATION TARGET DATE OF ADJUSTMENT None The Contractor understands and agrees that the dates listed above are estimates only, are not guaranteed, 4 and do not bind the City. 5 6 SC-4.02A., “Subsurface and Physical Conditions” 7 8 The following are reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site of the Work: 9 10 A Geotechnical Report titled Switchgear and Administration Buildings, dated July 30, 2018, prepared by 11 Freese and Nichols, Inc., a consultant of the City, providing additional information on soil and foundation 12 conditions at the sites of the proposed High Service Electrical Switchgear Building and the proposed 13 Administration Building. 14 15 The following are drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface and subsurface 16 structures (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site of the Work: 17 18 19 SC-4.06A., “Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site” 20 21 The following are reports and drawings of existing hazardous environmental conditions known to the City: 22 None 23 24 SC-5.03A., “Certificates of Insurance” 25 26 The entities listed below are "additional insureds as their interest may appear" including their respective 27 officers, directors, agents and employees. 28 29 (1) City 30 (2) Consultant: Freese and Nichols, Inc. and Arcadis U.S., Inc. 31 (3) Other: None 32 33 SC-5.04A., “Contractor’s Insurance” 34 35 The limits of liability for the insurance required by Paragraph GC-5.04 shall provide the following 36 coverages for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 37 38 5.04A. Workers' Compensation, under Paragraph GC-5.04A. 39 40 Statutory limits 41 Employer's liability 42 $100,000 each accident/occurrence 43 $100,000 Disease - each employee 44 $500,000 Disease - policy limit 45 46 SC-5.04B., “Contractor’s Insurance” 47 48 00 73 00 - 3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 3 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 5.04B. Commercial General Liability, under Paragraph GC-5.04B. Contractor's Liability Insurance 1 under Paragraph GC-5.04B., which shall be on a per project basis covering the Contractor with 2 minimum limits of: 3 4 $1,000,000 each occurrence 5 $2,000,000 aggregate limit 6 7 The policy must have an endorsement (Amendment – Aggregate Limits of Insurance) making the 8 General Aggregate Limits apply separately to each job site. 9 10 The Commercial General Liability Insurance policies shall provide “X”, “C”, and “U” coverage’s. 11 Verification of such coverage must be shown in the Remarks Article of the Certificate of Insurance. 12 13 SC 5.04C., “Contractor’s Insurance” 14 5.04C. Automobile Liability, under Paragraph GC-5.04C. Contractor’s Liability Insurance under 15 Paragraph GC-5.04C., which shall be in an amount not less than the following amounts: 16 17 (1) Automobile Liability - a commercial business policy shall provide coverage on "Any Auto", 18 defined as autos owned, hired and non-owned. 19 20 $1,000,000 each accident on a combined single limit basis. Split limits are acceptable if limits are at 21 least: 22 23 $250,000 Bodily Injury per person / 24 $500,000 Bodily Injury per accident / 25 $100,000 Property Damage 26 27 SC-5.04D., “Contractor’s Insurance” 28 29 The Contractor’s construction activities will require its employees, agents, subcontractors, equipment, and 30 material deliveries to cross railroad properties and tracks, or perform work within 25 feet of the center line 31 of tracks owned and operated by None. 32 33 The Contractor shall conduct its operations on railroad properties in such a manner as not to interfere with, 34 hinder, or obstruct the railroad company in any manner whatsoever in the use or operation of its/their trains 35 or other property. Such operations on railroad properties may require that Contractor to execute a “Right of 36 Entry Agreement” with the particular railroad company or companies involved, and to this end the 37 Contractor should satisfy itself as to the requirements of each railroad company and be prepared to execute 38 the right-of-entry (if any) required by a railroad company. The requirements specified herein likewise relate 39 to the Contractor’s use of private and/or construction access roads crossing said railroad company’s 40 properties. 41 42 The Contractual Liability coverage required by Paragraph 5.04D of the General Conditions shall provide 43 coverage for not less than the following amounts, issued by companies satisfactory to the City and to the 44 Railroad Company for a term that continues for so long as the Contractor’s operations and work cross, 45 occupy, or touch railroad property: 46 47 (1) General Aggregate: $Confirm Limits with Railroad 48 49 (2) Each Occurrence: $Confirm Limits with Railroad 50 51 Required for this Contract X Not required for this Contract 52 53 With respect to the above outlined insurance requirements, the following shall govern: 54 55 00 73 00 - 4 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 4 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 1. Where a single railroad company is involved, the Contractor shall provide one insurance policy in 1 the name of the railroad company. However, if more than one grade separation or at-grade 2 crossing is affected by the Project at entirely separate locations on the line or lines of the same 3 railroad company, separate coverage may be required, each in the amount stated above. 4 5 2. Where more than one railroad company is operating on the same right-of-way or where several 6 railroad companies are involved and operated on their own separate rights-of-way, the Contractor 7 may be required to provide separate insurance policies in the name of each railroad company. 8 9 3. If, in addition to a grade separation or an at-grade crossing, other work or activity is proposed on a 10 railroad company’s right-of-way at a location entirely separate from the grade separation or at-11 grade crossing, insurance coverage for this work must be included in the policy covering the grade 12 separation. 13 14 4. If no grade separation is involved but other work is proposed on a railroad company’s right-of-15 way, all such other work may be covered in a single policy for that railroad, even though the work 16 may be at two or more separate locations. 17 18 No work or activities on a railroad company’s property to be performed by the Contractor shall be 19 commenced until the Contractor has furnished the City with an original policy or policies of the insurance 20 for each railroad company named, as required above. All such insurance must be approved by the City and 21 each affected Railroad Company prior to the Contractor’s beginning work. 22 23 The insurance specified above must be carried until all Work to be performed on the railroad right-of-way 24 has been completed and the grade crossing, if any, is no longer used by the Contractor. In addition, 25 insurance must be carried during all maintenance and/or repair work performed in the railroad right-of-way. 26 Such insurance must name the railroad company as the insured, together with any tenant or lessee of the 27 railroad company operating over tracks involved in the Project. 28 29 SC-6.09., “Permits and Utilities” 30 31 SC-6.09A., “Contractor obtained permits and licenses” 32 The following are known permits and/or licenses required by the Contract to be acquired by the Contractor: 33 1. City of Denton Building Permits for new buildings at the Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant 34 and at the Lake Ray Roberts Raw Water Pump Station 35 2. Town of Hickory Creek Building Permit for the new Chemical Building at the Lake Lewisville 36 Raw Water Pump Station 37 38 SC-6.09B. “City obtained permits and licenses” 39 The following are known permits and/or licenses required by the Contract to be acquired by the City: 40 3. Work at the Lake Lewisville Raw Water Intake will be under the existing Nationwide Permit 3 of 41 the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers. 42 43 SC-6.09C. “Outstanding permits and licenses” 44 45 The following is a list of known outstanding permits and/or licenses to be acquired, if any as of March 28, 46 2019: 47 48 Outstanding Permits and/or Licenses to Be Acquired 49 OWNER PERMIT OR LICENSE AND LOCATION TARGET DATE OF POSSESSION None 50 00 73 00 - 5 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 5 of 5 CITY OF DENTON IFB 7013 STANDARD CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATION DOCUMENTS Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant PH 2 Improvements Revised September 20, 2018 SC-7.02., “Coordination” 1 2 The individuals or entities listed below have contracts with the City for the performance of other work at 3 the Site: 4 5 Vendor Scope of Work Coordination Authority None 6 7 SC-8.01, “Communications to Contractor” 8 9 The City may delegate certain construction administration communications to the City’s Consulting 10 Engineer to facilitate administration of the project. Such authorization will be clarified at the Pre-11 Construction Meeting. 12 13 SC-9.01., “City’s Project Manager” 14 15 The City’s Project Manager for this Contract is Mamun Yusuf, or his successor pursuant to written 16 notification from the City Engineer. 17 18 SC-13.03C., “Tests and Inspections” 19 20 None 21 22 SC-16.01C.1, “Methods and Procedures” 23 24 None 25 26 27 END OF SECTION Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Summary of Work to be performed in accordance with the Contract Documents B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 - Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms, and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 - General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Work Covered by Contract Documents 1. Work is to include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals, and performing all Work necessary for this construction project as detailed in the Drawings and Specifications. 2. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully operable. 3. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 4. Provide the civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, and all other Work required for a complete and operable Project. 5. Test and place the completed Project in operation. 6. Provide the special tools, spare parts, lubricants, supplies, or other materials as indicated in the Contract Documents for the operation and maintenance of the Project. 7. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Construction Manager. B. Incidental Work 1. Any and all Work specifically governed by documentary requirements for the project, such as conditions imposed by the Contract Documents in which no specific item for bid has been provided for in the Proposal, then the item shall be considered as an incidental item of Work, the cost of which shall be included in the price bid in the Proposal for various bid items. C. Use of Premises 1. Coordinate uses of premises under direction of the City. 2. Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of materials and equipment stored on the Site. 3. Use and occupy only portions of the public streets and alleys, or other public places or other rights-of-way as provided for in the ordinances of the City, as shown in the Contract Documents, or as may be specifically authorized in writing by the City. a. A reasonable amount of tools, materials, and equipment for construction purposes may be stored in such space, but no more than is necessary to avoid delay in the construction operations. b. Excavated and waste materials shall be stored in such a way as not to interfere with the use of spaces that may be designated to be left free and unobstructed and so as not to inconvenience occupants of adjacent property. c. If the street is occupied by railroad tracks, the Work shall be carried on in such manner as not to interfere with the operation of the railroad. D. Work within Easements 1. Do not enter upon private property for any purpose without having previously obtained permission from the owner of such property. 2. Do not store equipment or material on private property unless and until the specified approval of the property owner has been secured in writing by the Contractor and a copy furnished to the City. 3. Unless specifically provided otherwise, clear all rights-of-way or easements of obstructions which must be removed to make possible proper prosecution of the Work as a part of the project construction operations. 4. Preserve and use every precaution to prevent damage to, all trees, shrubbery, plants, lawns, fences, culverts, curbing, and all other types of structures or improvements, to all water, sewer, and gas lines, to all conduits, overhead pole lines, or appurtenances thereof, including the construction of temporary fences and to all other public or private property adjacent to the Work. 5. Notify the proper representatives of the owners or occupants of the public or private lands of interest in lands which might be affected by the Work. Summary of Work 01 11 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a. Such notice shall be made at least 48 hours in advance of the beginning of the Work. b. Notices shall be applicable to both public and private utility companies and any corporation, company, individual, or other, either as owners or occupants, whose land or interest in land might be affected by the Work. c. Be responsible for all damage or injury to property of any character resulting from any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the manner or method or execution of the Work, or at any time due to defective work, material, or equipment. 6. Fence a. Restore all fences encountered and removed during construction of the Project to the original or a better than original condition. b. Erect temporary fencing in place of the fencing removed whenever the Work is not in progress and when the site is vacated overnight, and/or at all times to provide site security. c. The cost for all fence work within easements, including removal, temporary closures and replacement, shall be incidental to the various items bid in the project proposal. 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 25 00 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The procedure for requesting the approval of substitution of a product that is not equivalent to a product which is specified by descriptive or performance criteria or defined by reference to 1 or more of the following: a. Name of manufacturer b. Name of vendor c. Trade name d. Catalog number 2. Substitutions are not "or-equals". B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Request for Substitution - General 1. Within 30 days after award of Contract (unless noted otherwise), the City will consider formal requests from Contractor for substitution of products in place of those specified. 2. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in Specifications by means of references to names of manufacturers and vendors, trade names, or catalog numbers. a. The products of the listed manufacturers are to be furnished where the Specifications list several manufacturers and do not specifically list “or equal” or “or approved equal” products. Use of any products other than Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow the procedures in this Specification for a substitution.. b. Contractor may submit other manufacturers’ products that are in full compliance with the Specifications where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase “or equal” or “or approved equal.” Follow requirements for Shop Drawings in Section 01 33 00 “Submittals”. 3. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable substitutions under the following conditions: a. Or-equals are unavailable due to strike, discontinued production of products meeting specified requirements, or other factors beyond control of Contractor; or, b. Contractor proposes a cost and/or time reduction incentive to the City. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Request for Substitution Form (attached) B. Procedure for Requesting Substitution 1. Substitution shall be considered only: a. After award of Contract b. Under the conditions stated herein 2. Submit one PDF copy to Document Management System as indicated by City’s duly appointed representative, including: a. Documentation 1). Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents 2). Data relating to changes in construction schedule, when a reduction is proposed 3). Data relating to changes in cost b. For products 1). Product identification a). Manufacturer's name b). Telephone number and representative contact name c). Specification Section or Drawing reference of originally specified product, including discrete name or tag number assigned to original product in the Contract Documents 2). Manufacturer's literature clearly marked to show compliance of proposed product with Contract Documents 3). Itemized comparison of original and proposed product addressing product characteristics including, but not necessarily limited to: Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a). Size b). Composition or materials of construction c). Weight d). Electrical or mechanical requirements 4). Product experience a). Location of past projects utilizing product b). Name and telephone number of persons associated with referenced projects knowledgeable concerning proposed product c). Available field data and reports associated with proposed product 5). Samples a). Provide at request of City. b). Samples become the property of the City. c. For construction methods: 1). Detailed description of proposed method 2). Illustration drawings C. Approval or Rejection 1. Written approval or rejection of substitution given by the City 2. City reserves the right to require proposed product to comply with color and pattern of specified product if necessary to secure design intent. 3. In the event the substitution is approved, the resulting cost and/or time reduction will be documented by Change Order in accordance with the General Conditions and procedures described in Section 01 26 00 “Change Management”. 4. No additional contract time will be given for substitution. 5. Substitution will be rejected if: a. Submittal is not through the Contractor with his stamp of approval b. Request is not made in accordance with this Specification Section c. In the City’s opinion, acceptance will require substantial revision of the original design d. In the City’s opinion, substitution will not perform adequately the function consistent with the design intent 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements A. In making request for substitution or in using an approved product, the Contractor represents that the Contractor: 1. Has investigated proposed product, and has determined that it is adequate or superior in all respects to that specified, and that it will perform function for which it is intended 2. Will provide same guarantee for substitute item as for product specified 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into Work, to include building modifications if necessary, making such changes as may be required for Work to be complete in all respects 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which subsequently arise 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Substitution Procedures 01 25 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements EXHIBIT A REQUEST FOR SUBSTITUTION FORM: TO: PROJECT: DATE: We hereby submit for your consideration the following product instead of the specified item for the above project: SECTION PARAGRAPH SPECIFIED ITEM Proposed Substitution: Reason for Substitution: Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation. Fill in Blanks Below: A. Will the undersigned contractor pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detailing costs caused by the requested substitution? B. What effect does substitution have on other trades? C. Differences between proposed substitution and specified item? D. Differences in product cost or product delivery time? E. Manufacturer's guarantees of the proposed and specified items are: Equal Better (explain on attachment) The undersigned states that the function, appearance and quality are equivalent or superior to the specified item. Submitted By: For Use by City Signature Recommended Recommended as noted Firm Not recommended Received late Address By Date Date Remarks Telephone For Use by City: Approved Rejected City Date Change Management 01 26 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 26 00 CHANGE MANAGEMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUESTS FOR CHANGE PROPOSAL A. City or their designated representative will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for Change Proposal (RCP). 1. City and Design Professional will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. City will issue the Request for Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 1.02 for evaluation by the Owner’s Project Team (OPT). 1.02 CHANGE PROPOSALS A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the City for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. Submit the Change Proposal and attach the forms provided by the City. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided by the City. 2. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT’s description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for labor by classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies, fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; 9) Home office cost; and 10) Other items of cost. d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark ups for Work Change Management 01 26 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with the General Conditions for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the City to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Section 01 33 02 “Shop Drawings.” 1.03 CITY WILL EVALUATE THE REQUEST FOR A MODIFICATION A. City will issue a Modification per the General Conditions if the Change Proposal is acceptable to the Owner. City will issue a Change Order or Contract Amendment for any changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor’s risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 29 00 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the General Conditions, the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Section. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials, if any; 3. Providing Work for alternates and allowances, if any; 4. Commissioning, startup, training, and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing at the manufacturer’s facilities or at the Site; 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly from the Project; 7. Project management, contract administration, and field office and field operations staff including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documentation and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor’s use and storage facilities for stored materials and equipment including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, and technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all these facilities and equipment. 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location in accordance with Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination”; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 16. Temporary facilities for managing water including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environmental conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, startup, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical, temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing performance and payment bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Submit approval using the “Consent of Surety Company to Payment Procedures” form provided by the Project Manager. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. Project Manager may withhold processing the Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation is not up to date: 1. Progress Schedule per Section 01 32 16 “Construction Progress Schedule.” 2. Project videos and photographs per Section 01 33 06 “Graphic Documentation.” 3. Record Documents per Section 01 79 00 “Project Record Documents.” Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.02 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form provided by the Project Manager. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the Project Manager. D. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a decimal fraction of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies or that will be installed in a single payment period. Items that are not subdivided into units or subassemblies may only be included in the Application for Payment when Work on the entire unit or subassembly is complete. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to estimate earned value. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. 4. Include Contractor’s overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the Schedule of Values must equal the total Contract Price. E. Use each unit price line item in the Agreement as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other cost associated with the item in the Agreement. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Include a breakdown of both mobilization and demobilization costs in the Schedule of Values. The total cost for both mobilization and demobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. Payment for mobilization and demobilization will be based on the earned value of Work completed. Payment for these costs will only be made for Work completed to the lump sum amount, for the following: 1. Bonds and insurance; Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2. Transportation and setup for equipment; 3. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; 4. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; and 5. Salaries for field personnel directly related to the mobilization of the Project. H. Submit a Change Proposal to request any changes to the Application for Payment after the first Application for Payment has been submitted. 1.03 SCHEDULE OF ANTICIPATED PAYMENTS A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested on the form provided by the Project Manager. B. Update the schedule of anticipated payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. 1.04 BASIS FOR PAYMENTS A. Unit Price Items: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Agreement. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 1.05. 2. Measure the Work described for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the Unit Price for that line item. B. Lump Sum Items: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. b. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 1.02.D.3 will be made for the estimated units, regardless of the actual measured number of units. c. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 1.05. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.05 PAYMENT FOR STORED MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Payment will be made for materials and equipment stored properly at the Site, provided that the materials and equipment are complete and ready for installation. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment will be made for the invoice amount, up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be paid for under other line items. 3. If total invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item, the excess amount can be added to the labor portion of that Work item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on Attachment B - Tabulation of Values for Materials and Equipment. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided with the next Application for Payment. C. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest. D. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor’s obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until final acceptance in accordance with the General Conditions. E. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 1.06 RETAINAGE AND SET-OFFS A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include Attachment C - Summary of set-offs in the Application for Payment. 1.07 PROCEDURES FOR SUBMITTING AN APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the Project Manager each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the Project Manager to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly to the Project Manager after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. Provide all information requested in the Application for Payment form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter “N/A” in the space provided. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. 3. Include Attachment A - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed to show the earned value on each line item in the Application for Payment for Work in the original Contract and approved Change Orders. 4. Include Attachment B to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachment A. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 5. Include Attachment C to document set-offs made per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D - Retainage Calculation to show method for calculating retainage. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments is stipulated in the Agreement. Any reduction in retainage must be accompanied by a Consent of Surety to Reduction or Partial Release of Retainage. 7. Include Attachment E - EVA Calculation and the EVA Chart showing the anticipated and actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials. Create a graphic representation (curve) of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Compare the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to determine performance on budget and schedule. Adjust the table and curve to incorporate Modifications. 8. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment has been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents, that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF). 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided by the Project Manager. Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 1.08 PROJECT MANAGER’S RESPONSIBILITY A. Project Manager will review each draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the amount to be recommended to Owner for payment. Contractor is to revise the Application for Payment to incorporate changes, if any, resulting from this review process. B. Project Manager will review the Application for Payment to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. Project Manager will either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment. Project Manager will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. Project Manager’s recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation that based on its experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. Project Manager does not represent by recommending payment that: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it was performed were exhaustive or extended to every aspect of the Work in progress; or 2. Other matters or issues that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor exist. G. Neither Project Manager’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor Project Manager’s recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on the Owner or their representatives: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor’s performance of the Work; Application for Payment Procedures 01 29 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 1.09 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments; 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order; 3. Deductions for Defective Work that have been accepted by the Owner; 4. Penalties and bonuses; 5. Deduction for all final set-offs; and 6. Other adjustments if needed. B. Project Manager will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and, if necessary, to reconcile estimated unit price quantities with actual quantities. C. Submit the final Application for Payment per the General Conditions, including the final Change Order. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Evidence of payment or release of Liens on the forms provided by the Project Manager and as required by the General Conditions. 2. Consent from surety to final payment. D. Final payment will also require additional procedures and documentation per Section 01 70 00 “Execution and Closeout Requirements.” 1.10 PAYMENT BY OWNER A. Owner is to pay the amount recommended for monthly payments within 30 days after receipt of the Project Manager’s recommended Application for Payment. B. Final payment may take longer than 30 days since Owner’s council must approve final payment. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all costs for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct costs for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Section 01 29 00 “Application for Payment Procedures” for each lump sum item. Include costs not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Section 01 29 00 “Application for Payment Procedures.” Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all costs for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct costs for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Section 01 29 00 “Application for Payment Procedures” for each unit price item. Include costs not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include costs for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE ITEMS A. Item 1 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Improvements: 1. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment for mobilization will be based on the earned value of Work completed. B. Item 2 - Lake Lewisville Raw Water Pump Station Area Improvements: 1. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment for mobilization will be based on the earned value of Work completed. C. Item 3 - Lake Ray Roberts Raw Water Pump Station Area Improvements: 1. Measuring for payment is on a lump sum basis. Payment for mobilization will be based on the earned value of Work completed. Measurement and Basis for Payment 01 29 01 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.04 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR ALLOWANCES A. Item A-1 – Contingency Allowance: 1. Contingency allowance is a stipulated amount available as reserve for sole use by Owner to cover unanticipated costs. The amount of the allowance shall be as set forth in the Bid Form. 2. When authorization of Work under contingency allowance is contemplated by the City for a defined scope, submit Change Proposal in accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions and Section 01 26 00, “Change Management”, except that payments within limit of contingency allowance shall exclude cost of bond and insurance premiums. 3. Do not perform Work under an allowance without written authorization of City. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents and within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollution, management of water, and management of excess earth as required in Section 01 50 00 “Temporary Facilities and Controls.” 1.02 STANDARDS A. Perform Work to comply with: 1. Requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Laws and Regulations; and 3. Specified industry standards. 1.03 DOCUMENTATION A. Provide documents in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittals.” B. Provide copies of Supplier’s printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. C. Incorporate field notes, sketches, recordings, and computations made by the Contractor in Record Drawings per Section 01 78 39 “Project Record Documents.” 1.04 PERMITS A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Building permit and review fees will be paid by the Owner. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work and include the cost for these inspections and certifications in the Contract Price. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay fees associated with obtaining services or inspections. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.05 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Maintain a supply of personal protective equipment for visitors to the Site. E. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA) and other Laws and Regulations. F. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports, including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injuries, or deaths related to the Project to the Construction Manager as Product Data per Section 01 33 03 “Product Data.” 1.06 COMMUNICATION DURING THE PROJECT A. The Project Manager or their designated representative is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The Project Manager will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Contract administration; 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents; 3. Contract modifications; 4. Observation of Work and testing; and 5. Claims. C. The Project Manager will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the Project Manager or their designated representative at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner; 2. Project name; 3. Contract title; 4. Project number; 5. Date; and 6. A reference statement. E. Submit communications on the forms referenced in this Section or in Section 01 33 00 “Submittals.” Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.07 CONDUCT OF CONTRACTOR’S OR SUBCONTRACTOR’S EMPLOYEES: A. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. B. Do not allow the use of offensive language or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. C. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, or any exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Site. D. Do not allow the use, possession, concealment, transportation, promotion, or sale of the following prohibited items anywhere on the Site: 1. Firearms (including air rifles and pistols and BB or pellet guns) and ammunition; 2. Bows, crossbows, arrows, bolts, or any other projectile weapons; 3. Explosives of any kind, including fireworks; 4. Illegal knives; 5. Other weapons prohibited by state Laws and Regulations; and 6. Any other item that has been designed or intended to be used as a weapon. No exceptions will be made for the possession of a firearm by a person that has a valid state-issued license to carry a firearm. Remove any of the prohibited items listed above from the Site immediately and permanently. Any person found to be in possession of any prohibited item must also be removed from the Site and may be reported to local law enforcement. 1.08 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, underground facilities, and existing structures. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the Construction Manager before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action per Section 01 35 00 “Special Procedures.” Coordinate Work with local utility company and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect utilities, underground facilities and existing structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the Owner and utility or property owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements approved by the Construction Manager. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. Mark trees that may be removed during construction and review with the Construction Manager for approval before removing. Protect trees to remain from damage limiting activity, including stockpiling of materials within the drip line of the tree. F. Protect buildings from damage when handling material or equipment. Protect finished surfaces, including floors, doors, and jambs. Remove doors and install temporary wood protective coverings over jambs, if needed. 1.09 DISRUPTION TO SERVICES/CONTINUED OPERATIONS A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner or utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves, operators, or electrical panels. 2. Do not store material or products inside structures. 3. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 4. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action in accordance with Section 01 35 00 “Special Procedures” if facilities must be taken out of operation. 1.10 FIELD VERIFICATION A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Verify pipe class, equipment capacities, existing electrical systems, and power sources for existing conditions. D. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. E. Include field measurements in Record Documents as required in Section 01 78 39 “Project Record Documents.” 1.11 BLASTING A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 1.12 ARCHAEOLOGICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact of the sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for working in these areas from regulatory agencies. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the site(s) of artifacts. 3. Adhere to the requirements of applicable local, state, and federal Laws and Regulations. 4. Notify the Project Manager and any local, state, or federal agency as required by applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by state or federal agencies for non- compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 1.13 ENDANGERED SPECIES RESOURCES A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to destroy or adversely modify the habitat or jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA) or applicable state Laws and Regulations. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the Project Manager if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. Project Manager will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable state statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the Project Manager. 1.14 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the efforts of various trades having interdependent responsibilities for Work. B. Conceal ducts, pipes, wiring, and other non-finish items in finished areas, except as otherwise shown. Coordinate locations of concealed items with finish elements. Install access panel or doors where units requiring access for maintenance or operation are concealed behind finished surfaces. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements C. Coordinate architectural reflected ceiling plans with the exact location of items installed in suspended ceilings. Request clarification from the Construction Manager prior to proceeding with fabrication or installation of an item if it appears that a conflict exists. D. Coordinate the installation of items to be installed later, including: 1. Accepted alternates. 2. Products purchased using allowances. 3. Work by others. 4. Owner-supplied, Contractor-installed items. E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical, electrical, and other systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements: 1. Coordinate mechanical and electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during progress of construction. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices, sleeves, embedded items, and other structural components to be set in concrete before concrete is placed. 5. Install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned. 6. Coordinate the connection of systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with the Laws and Regulations and requirements of franchise service companies. Provide required connection for each service. 7. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Operation and Maintenance Data. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Adjust routing of piping, ductwork, utilities, and location of equipment as needed to resolve spatial conflicts between the various trades. Document changes in the indicated routings in the Record Documents per Section 01 78 39 “Project Record Documents.” 8. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. 9. Install systems, materials, and equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. 10. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope. 1.15 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching required to complete the Work or to: 1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of new Work or the correction of Defective Work. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of mechanical, electrical, and plumbing Work. 3. Uncover Work that has been covered prior to observation by the Construction Manager. B. Submit Notification to the Project Manager in advance of performing any cutting which affects: 1. Work of any other contractor or the Owner; 2. Structural integrity of any structure or system of the Project; 3. Integrity or effectiveness of weather exposed or moisture resistant structure or systems; 4. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance, or safety of any structure or system; or 5. Appearance of any structure or surfaces exposed occasionally or constantly to view. C. Include in request: 1. Location and description of affected Work; 2. Reason for cutting, alteration, or excavation; 3. Effect on the Work of any separate contractor or Owner; 4. Effect on the structural or weatherproof integrity of the Work; 5. Description of proposed Work, including: a. Scope of cutting, patching, or alteration; b. Trades that will perform the Work; c. Products proposed for use; and d. Extent of refinishing to be performed. 6. Alternatives to cutting and patching; 7. Written authorization from any separate Contractor whose Work would be affected; and 8. Date and time Work will be uncovered or altered. D. Inspect existing conditions prior to starting the Work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. Uncover elements where required for an adequate inspection. Notify the Construction Manager of any conditions that negatively impact the ability to perform cutting and patching. Contractor is deemed to have accepted the existing conditions and assumed the risk associated with completing the Work when cutting or patching is started after the inspection. E. Provide adequate support to maintain the structural integrity of facilities, structures, or elements that could be affected by cutting, patching or installing new Work. Provide devices and methods to protect facilities, structures, or elements from damage that could be affected by Contractor’s efforts. Provide protection from the weather for portions of the Project that may be exposed by cutting and patching. Project Management and Coordination 01 31 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements F. Make cuts or penetrations using methods that prevent damage to other Work and provide proper surfaces for patching and repairs. G. Fit and adjust installed products to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances, and finishes. H. Patch or repair facilities, structures or elements to provide completed Work per the Contract Documents. I. Fit Work air-tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through the surfaces. Where fire rated separations are penetrated, fill the space around the pipe with materials with physical characteristics equivalent to fire resistance requirements of penetrated surface. Provide firestop inserts inside pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations when required by fire resistance requirements. J. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new products specified for the original installation. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide an even finish to match adjacent finishes: 1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to the nearest intersection. 2. For an assembly, refinish the entire unit. 1.16 PRELIMINARY OCCUPANCY A. Owner may deliver, install, and connect equipment, furnishings, or other apparatus in buildings or other structures. These actions do not indicate acceptance of any part of the building or structure and does not affect the start of warranties or correction periods. B. Protect the Owner’s property after installation is complete. C. Owner may use any product for testing or to determine that the product meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. This use does not constitute acceptance by OPT. These actions do not indicate acceptance of any part of the product and does not affect the start of warranties or correction periods. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Preconstruction Meeting 01 31 19 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements SECTION 01 31 19 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provisions for the preconstruction meeting to be held prior to the start of Work to clarify construction contract administration procedures B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Attend preconstruction meeting. 2. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 3. Meeting administered by City may be tape recorded. a. If recorded, tapes will be used to prepare minutes and retained by City for future reference. 4. Project Manager will establish their duly authorized representative(s) authorized to make decisions as identified in the Contract Documents. B. Preconstruction Meeting 1. A preconstruction meeting will be held within 14 days after the execution of the Agreement and before Work is started. a. The meeting will be scheduled and administered by the City. 2. The Project Manager will preside at the meeting, prepare the notes of the meeting and distribute copies of same to all participants who so request by fully completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of the meeting. Preconstruction Meeting 01 31 19 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3. Attendance shall include: a. Project Manager b. Project Manager’s duly authorized representative (if any) c. Contractor's project manager d. Contractor's superintendent e. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire to invite or the City may request f. Other City representatives g. Others as appropriate 4. Construction Schedule a. Prepare baseline construction schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16 and provide at Preconstruction Meeting. b. City will notify Contractor of any schedule changes upon Notice of Preconstruction Meeting. 5. Preliminary Agenda may include: a. Introduction of Project Personnel b. General Description of Project c. Status of right-of-way, utility clearances, easements or other pertinent permits d. Contractor’s work plan and schedule e. Contract Time f. Notice to Proceed g. Construction Staking h. Progress Payments i. Extra Work and Change Order Procedures j. Field Orders k. Disposal Site Letter for Waste Material l. Insurance Renewals m. Payroll Certification n. Material Certifications and Quality Control Testing o. Public Safety and Convenience p. Documentation of Pre-Construction Conditions q. Weekend Work Notification r. Legal Holidays Preconstruction Meeting 01 31 19 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements s. Trench Safety Plans t. Confined Space Entry Standards u. Coordination with the City’s representative for operations of existing water systems v. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan w. Coordination with other Contractors x. Early Warning System y. Contractor Evaluation z. Special Conditions applicable to the project aa. Damages Claims bb. Submittal Procedures cc. Substitution Procedures dd. Correspondence Routing ee. Record Drawings ff. Temporary construction facilities gg. Final Acceptance hh. Final Payment ii. Communications Plan jj. Questions or Comments 6. Preliminary Submittals. In addition to Baseline Schedule required in paragraph 1.4B.4 above, provide the following preliminary items at the Preconstruction Meeting: a. Preliminary Schedule of Documents per Section 01 33 00 “Submittals”. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated schedule of payments per Section 01 29 00 “Application for Payment Procedures”. c. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers d. Contractor’s organizational chart as it relates to this Project, and e. Letter indicating the agents of authority with respect to the execution of legal documents, contract modifications, and payment requests. 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] Preconstruction Meeting 01 31 19 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Project Meetings 01 31 20 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 31 20 PROJECT MEETINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provisions for project meetings throughout the construction period to enable orderly review of the progress of the Work and to provide for systematic discussion of potential problems B. Deviations this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Schedule, attend and administer as specified, periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout progress of the Work. 2. Representatives of Contractor, subcontractors and suppliers attending meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. 3. Meetings administered by City may be recorded. 4. Meetings, in addition to those specified in this Section, may be held when requested by the City, Engineer or Contractor. B. Progress Meetings 1. Formal project coordination meetings will be held monthly. Meetings will be scheduled and administered by Project Manager. a. Additional meetings may be held at the request of the : 1). City 2). Engineer 3). Contractor Project Meetings 01 31 20 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2. Additional progress meetings to discuss specific topics will be conducted on an as-needed basis. Such additional meetings shall include, but not be limited to: a. Coordinating shutdowns b. Installation of piping and equipment c. Coordination between other construction projects d. Resolution of construction issues e. Equipment approval 3. The Project Manager will preside at progress meetings, prepare the notes of the meeting and distribute copies of the same to all participants who so request by fully completing the attendance form to be circulated at the beginning of each meeting. a. Review meting notes and notify Project Manager within 10 days of any discrepancies in notes. 4. Attendance shall include: a. Contractor's project manager b. Contractor's superintendent c. Any subcontractor or supplier representatives whom the Contractor may desire to invite or the City may request d. Engineer's representatives e. City’s representatives f. Others, as requested by the Project Manager 5. Preliminary Agenda may include: a. Review of Work progress since previous meeting b. Field observations, problems, conflicts c. Items which impede construction schedule d. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules e. Review of construction interfacing and sequencing requirements with other construction contracts f. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule g. Revisions to construction schedule h. Progress, schedule, during succeeding Work period i. Coordination of schedules j. Review submittal schedules k. Maintenance of quality standards l. Pending changes and substitutions Project Meetings 01 31 20 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements m. Review proposed changes for: 1). Effect on construction schedule and on completion date 2). Effect on other contracts of the Project n. Review Record Documents o. Review monthly pay request p. Review status of Requests for Information 6. Meeting Location a. The City will establish a meeting location. 1). To the extent practicable, meetings will be held at the Site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 32 16 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for the preparation, submittal, updating, status reporting and management of the Construction Progress Schedule B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Definitions 1. Baseline Schedule - Initial schedule submitted before work begins that will serve as the baseline for measuring progress and departures from the schedule. 2. Progress Schedule - Monthly submittal of a progress schedule documenting progress on the project and any changes anticipated. 3. Schedule Narrative - Concise narrative of the schedule including schedule changes, expected delays, key schedule issues, critical path items, etc B. Reference Standards 1. None 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Baseline Schedule 1. General a. Prepare a baseline Schedule using approved software and the Critical Path Method (CPM). b. Review the draft baseline Schedule with the City to demonstrate understanding of the work to be performed and known issues and constraints related to the schedule. Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements c. Designate an authorized representative (Project Scheduler) responsible for developing and updating the schedule and preparing reports. B. Progress Schedule 1. Update the progress Schedule monthly. 2. Prepare the Schedule Narrative to accompany the monthly progress Schedule. 3. Change Orders a. Incorporate approved change orders, resulting in a change of contract time, in the baseline Schedule. C. Responsibility for Schedule Compliance 1. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current progress Schedule and CPM Status Report that delays to the critical path have resulted and the Contract completion date will not be met, or when so directed by the City, make some or all of the following actions at no additional cost to the City a. Submit a Recovery Plan to the City for approval, with revised baseline Schedule outlining: 1). A written statement of the steps intended to take to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule 2). Increase construction manpower in such quantities and crafts as will substantially eliminate the backlog of work and return current Schedule to meet projected baseline completion dates 3). Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per day, working days per week, the amount of construction equipment, or any combination of the foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate the backlog of work 4). Reschedule activities to achieve maximum practical concurrency of accomplishment of activities, and comply with the revised schedule 2. If no written statement of the steps intended to take is submitted when so requested by the City, the City may direct the Contractor to increase the level of effort in manpower (trades), equipment and work schedule (overtime, weekend and holiday work, etc.) to be employed by the Contractor in order to remove or arrest the delay to the critical path in the approved schedule. a. No additional cost for such work will be considered. D. The Contract completion time will be adjusted only for causes specified in this Contract. a. Requests for an extension of any Contract completion date must be supplemented with the following: 1). Furnish justification and supporting evidence as the City may deem necessary to determine whether the requested extension of time is entitled under the provisions of this Contract. Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a). The City will, after receipt of such justification and supporting evidence, make findings of fact and will advise the Contractor, in writing thereof. 2). If the City finds that the requested extension of time is entitled, the City's determination as to the total number of days allowed for the extensions shall be based upon the approved total baseline schedule and on all data relevant to the extension. a). Such data shall be included in the next updating of the Progress schedule. b). Actual delays in activities which, according to the Baseline schedule, do not affect any Contract completion date shown by the critical path in the network will not be the basis for a change therein. 2. Submit each request for change in Contract completion date to the City within 30 days after the beginning of the delay for which a time extension is requested but before the date of final payment under this Contract. a. No time extension will be granted for requests which are not submitted within the foregoing time limit. b. From time to time, it may be necessary for the Contract schedule or completion time to be adjusted by the City to reflect the effects of job conditions, weather, technical difficulties, strikes, unavoidable delays on the part of the City or its representatives, and other unforeseeable conditions which may indicate schedule adjustments or completion time extensions. 1). Under such conditions, the City will direct the Contractor to reschedule the work or Contract completion time to reflect the changed conditions and the Contractor shall revise his schedule accordingly. a). No additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for such schedule changes except for unavoidable overall contract time extensions beyond the actual completion of unaffected work, in which case the Contractor shall take all possible action to minimize any time extension and any additional cost to the City. b). Available float time in the Baseline schedule may be used by the City as well as by the Contractor. 3. Float or slack time is defined as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date or between the earliest finish date and the latest finish date of a chain of activities on the Baseline Schedule. a. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or the City. b. Proceed with work according to early start dates, and the City shall have the right to reserve and apportion float time according to the needs of the project. c. Acknowledge and agree that actual delays, affecting paths of activities containing float time, will not have any effect upon contract completion Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements times, providing that the actual delay does not exceed the float time associated with those activities. E. Coordinating Schedule with Other Contract Schedules 1. Where work is to be performed under this Contract concurrently with or contingent upon work performed on the same facilities or area under other contracts, the Baseline Schedule shall be coordinated with the schedules of the other contracts. a. Obtain the schedules of the other appropriate contracts from the City for the preparation and updating of Baseline schedule and make the required changes in his schedule when indicated by changes in corresponding schedules. 2. In case of interference between the operations of different contractors, the City will determine the work priority of each contractor and the sequence of work necessary to expedite the completion of the entire Project. a. In such cases, the decision of the City shall be accepted as final. b. The temporary delay of any work due to such circumstances shall not be considered as justification for claims for additional compensation. F. Progress Schedule for Project Submittals 1. Provide a progress schedule for shop drawings and other project submittals. 2. Indicate the specific dates each document is to be delivered to the City. 3. Allow a reasonable time to review each document, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for at least a second review. 5. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period is indicated in the Contract Documents or provided by the City. 6. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet specification requirements. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Baseline Schedule 1. Submit Schedule in native file format and pdf format. 2. Submit draft baseline Schedule to City prior to the pre-construction meeting and bring in hard copy to the meeting for review and discussion. B. Progress Schedule 1. Submit progress Schedule in native file format and pdf format. 2. Submit progress Schedule monthly no later than the 25th day of the month. Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements C. Schedule Narrative 1. Submit the schedule narrative in pdf format. 2. Submit schedule narrative monthly no later than the 25th day of the month. D. Near-Term Look Ahead Schedules 1. Provide a near-term look ahead schedule (NTLA Schedule) every 30 days, typically at periodic coordination meetings, using the form provided by the City which shows the days of planned activity for the following: a. Submittals to be provided and day of anticipated return; b. Equipment and material deliveries; c. Arrival and departure of key construction equipment; and d. Activities for the contractor and each subcontractor. 2. Coordinate NTLA Schedule with Project Schedule. Submit a report with each NTLA Schedule identifying deviations from the Project Schedule. 3. Submit a report of near-term work planned in the previous NTLA Schedule that was delayed or not executed by marking actual activity on the previous near term look ahead schedule. Provide explanation of why planned work was not executed and plan to execute in the future and regain time lost. E. Submittal Process 1. Contractor shall submit one (1) hard copy of documents to the Project Manager’s duly appointed representative. 2. Contractor shall submit documents in electronic format as directed by the City. 3. Once the project has been completed and Final Acceptance has been issued by the City, no further progress schedules are required. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The person preparing and revising the construction Progress Schedule shall be experienced in the preparation of schedules of similar complexity. B. Schedule and supporting documents addressed in this Specification shall be prepared, updated and revised to accurately reflect the performance of the construction. C. Contractor is responsible for the quality of all submittals in this section meeting the standard of care for the construction industry for similar projects. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] Construction Progress Schedule 01 32 16 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Preconstruction Video 01 32 33 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements SECTION 01 32 33 PRECONSTRUCTION VIDEO 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for: a. Preconstruction Videos B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preconstruction Video 1. Produce a preconstruction video of the site/alignment, including all areas in the vicinity of and to be affected by construction. a. Provide digital copy of video upon request by the City. 2. Retain a copy of the preconstruction video until the end of the maintenance surety period. 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] Preconstruction Video 01 32 33 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Submittals 01 33 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 33 00 SUBMITTALS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General methods and requirements of submissions applicable to the following Work-related submittals: a. Shop Drawings b. Product Data (including Project Material Submittal Checklist submittals) c. Samples d. Mock Ups e. Requests for Information f. Substitutions g. Change Management h. Progress Schedules i. Graphic Documentation j. Applications for Payment k. Certified Test Reports l. Equipment Installation Reports B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] Submittals 01 33 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination 1. Notify the City in writing, at the time of submittal, of any deviations in the submittals from the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Coordination of Submittal Times a. Prepare, prioritize and transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performing the related Work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual Work Sections, of the Specifications. b. Contractor is responsible such that the installation will not be delayed by processing times including, but not limited to: a). Disapproval and resubmittal (if required) b). Coordination with other submittals c). Testing d). Purchasing e). Fabrication f). Delivery g). Similar sequenced activities c. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to transmit submittals sufficiently in advance of the Work. d. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the City for review. Use the form provided by the City for this list. e. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Section 01 32 16 “Construction Progress Schedule.” f. Make submittals promptly in accordance with approved schedule, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the work of any other contractor. B. Submittal Numbering 1. When submitting shop drawings or samples, utilize a submittal cross-reference identification numbering system in the following manner: a. Use the applicable Specification Section Number. Submittals 01 33 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b. For the next 2 digits number use numbers 01-99 to sequentially number each initial separate item or drawing submitted under each specific Section number. c. Last use a letter, A-Z, indicating the resubmission of the same drawing (i.e. A=2nd submission, B=3rd submission, C=4th submission, etc.). A typical submittal number would be as follows: 303-02-B 1). 303 is the Specification Section for Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 2). 02 is the second initial submittal under this Specification Section 3). B is the third submission (second resubmission) of that particular shop drawing C. Contractor Certification 1. Review shop drawings, product data and samples, including those by subcontractors, prior to submission to determine and verify the following: a. Field measurements b. Field construction criteria c. Catalog numbers and similar data d. Conformance with the Contract Documents e. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the City or their designated representative 2. Provide each shop drawing, sample and product data submitted by the Contractor with a Certification Statement affixed including: a. The Contractor's Company name b. Signature of submittal reviewer c. Certification Statement 1). “By this submittal, I hereby represent that I have determined and verified field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers and similar data and I have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable approved shop drawings." D. Submittal Format 1. Fold shop drawings larger than 8 ½ inches x 11 inches to 8 ½ inches x 11inches. 2. Bind shop drawings and product data sheets together. 3. Order Submittals 01 33 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a. Cover Sheet 1). Description of Packet 2). Contractor Certification b. List of items / Table of Contents c. Product Data /Shop Drawings/Samples /Calculations E. Submittal Content 1. The date of submission and the dates of any previous submissions 2. The Project title and number 3. Contractor identification 4. The names of: a. Contractor b. Supplier c. Manufacturer 5. Identification of the product, with the Specification Section number, page and paragraph(s) 6. Field dimensions, clearly identified as such 7. Relation to adjacent or critical features of the Work or materials 8. Applicable standards, such as ASTM or Federal Specification numbers 9. Identification by highlighting of deviations from Contract Documents 10. Identification by highlighting of revisions on resubmittals 11. An 8-inch x 3-inch blank space for Contractor and City stamps F. Shop Drawings 1. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. As specified in individual Work Sections includes, but is not necessarily limited to: a. Custom-prepared data such as fabrication and erection/installation (working) drawings b. Scheduled information c. Setting diagrams Submittals 01 33 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements d. Actual shopwork manufacturing instructions e. Custom templates f. Special wiring diagrams g. Coordination drawings h. Individual system or equipment inspection and test reports including: 1). Performance curves and certifications i. As applicable to the Work 2. Details a. Relation of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure b. Where correct fabrication of the Work depends upon field measurements 1). Provide such measurements and note on the drawings prior to submitting for approval. 3. Submit a Substitution Proposal per Section 01 25 00 “Substitution Procedures” to request modifications to the Contract Documents for specific products, including those for approval of “or equal” products when specific products or manufacturers are named without the words “or equal” or “or approved equal”. 4. Contractor may submit other manufacturers’ products that are in full compliance with the Specifications where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase “or equal” or “or approved equal.” a. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this Specification to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. b. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the City’s responsibility to prove the product is not equal. 1). Indicate on a point-by-point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. 2). Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer’s published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. 3). The decision of the City regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. c. Provide a certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: 1). Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. Submittals 01 33 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2). Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. 3). Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. 4). Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 5). Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 5. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor’s risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner’s option. 6. Submit each specific product, class of material, or equipment system separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one independent system in the same Submittal. 7. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 8. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections; b. Drawing number and detail designation; c. Equipment designation or name; d. Schedule references; e. System into which the product is incorporated; and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. G. Product Data 1. Provide Product Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. 2. For submittals of product data for products included on the City’s Product Material Submittal Checklist, highlight each item selected for use on the Project. 3. For submittals of product data for products not included on the City’s Product Material Submittal Checklist, submittal data may include, but is not necessarily limited to: Submittals 01 33 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a. Standard prepared data for manufactured products (sometimes referred to as catalog data) 1). Such as the manufacturer's product specification and installation instructions 2). Availability of colors and patterns 3). Manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability 4). Roughing-in diagrams and templates 5). Catalog cuts 6). Product photographs 7). Standard wiring diagrams 8). Printed performance curves and operational-range diagrams 9). Production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications 10). Mill reports 11). Product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended spare-parts listing and printed product warranties 12). As applicable to the Work 4. Submittals of product data for products not included on the City’s Product Material Submittal Checklist may be considered a Substitution in accordance with Section 01 25 00. 5. All deviations from City’s Product Material Submittal Checklist shall require approval by the Engineer of Record for the Project. H. Samples 1. As specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to: a. Physical examples of the Work such as: 1). Sections of manufactured or fabricated Work 2). Small cuts or containers of materials 3). Complete units of repetitively used products color/texture/pattern swatches and range sets 4). Specimens for coordination of visual effect 5). Graphic symbols and units of Work to be used by the City for independent inspection and testing, as applicable to the Work Submittals 01 33 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements I. Do not start Work requiring a shop drawing, sample or product data nor any material to be fabricated or installed prior to the approval or qualified approval of such item. 1. Fabrication performed, materials purchased or on-site construction accomplished which does not conform to approved shop drawings and data is at the Contractor's risk. 2. The City will not be liable for any expense or delay due to corrections or remedies required to accomplish conformity. 3. Complete project Work, materials, fabrication, and installations in conformance with approved shop drawings, applicable samples, and product data. J. Submittal Distribution 1. Electronic Distribution a. Provide all submittals in electronic format as directed by the City or their duly appointed representative. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. b. Deliver all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). 1). Create PDF document using Bluebeam Revu software. 2). Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. 3). Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. 4). Provide PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 5). Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. 6). Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. 7). Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. 8). Use Bluebeam Revu software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for “Drop Metadata”. Uncheck the “Drop Metadata” box when reducing file size. Submittals 01 33 00 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 9). Add footers to each document with the name of the Project. c. Shop Drawings, Product Data and Other Submittals 1). Electronic submittal to Document Management System as indicated by City’s duly appointed representative. 2). Hard Copies a). Not required 3). Meet submission requirements specific to other submittals. d. Samples 1). Distributed to the City’s Project Manager K. Submittal Review 1. The review of shop drawings, data and samples will be for general conformance with the design concept and Contract Documents. This is not to be construed as: a. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements b. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including details, dimensions, and materials c. Approving departures from details furnished by the City, except as otherwise provided herein 2. The review and approval of shop drawings, samples or product data by the City does not relieve the Contractor from his/her responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. a. All risks of error and omission are assumed by the Contractor, and the City will have no responsibility therefore. 3. The Contractor remains responsible for details and accuracy, for coordinating the Work with all other associated work and trades, for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly and for performing Work in a safe manner. 4. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and show a departure from the Contract requirements which City finds to be in the interest of the City and to be so minor as not to involve a change in Contract Price or time for performance, the City may return the reviewed drawings without noting an exception. 5. Submittals will be returned to the Contractor under 1 of the following codes: a. Code 1 Submittals 01 33 00 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1). "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or comments on the submittal. a). When returned under this code the Contractor may release the equipment and/or material for manufacture. b. Code 2 1). "EXCEPTIONS NOTED". This code is assigned when a confirmation of the notations and comments IS NOT required by the Contractor. a). The Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product. c. Code 3 1). "EXCEPTIONS NOTED/RESUBMIT". This combination of codes is assigned when notations and comments are extensive enough to require a resubmittal of the package. a). This resubmittal is to address all comments, omissions and non-conforming items that were noted. b). Resubmittal is to be received by the City within 15 Calendar Days of the date of the City's transmittal requiring the resubmittal. d. Code 4 1). "NOT APPROVED" is assigned when the submittal does not meet the intent of the Contract Documents. a). The Contractor must resubmit the entire package revised to bring the submittal into conformance. b). It may be necessary to resubmit using a different manufacturer/vendor to meet the Contract Documents. 6. Resubmittals a. Handled in the same manner as first submittals 1). Corrections other than requested by the City 2). Marked with revision triangle or other similar method a). At Contractor’s risk if not marked b. Submittals for each item will be reviewed no more than twice at the City’s expense. Submittals 01 33 00 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1). All subsequent reviews will be performed at times convenient to the City and at the Contractor's expense, based on the City's or City Representative’s then prevailing rates. 2). Provide Contractor reimbursement to the City within 30 Calendar Days for all such fees invoiced by the City. c. The need for more than 1 resubmission or any other delay in obtaining City's review of submittals, will not entitle the Contractor to an extension of Contract Time. 7. Partial Submittals a. City reserves the right to not review submittals deemed partial, at the City’s discretion. b. Submittals deemed by the City to be not complete will be returned to the Contractor, and will be considered "Not Approved" until resubmitted. c. The City may at its option provide a list or mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete. 8. If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to constitute a change to the Contract Documents, then written notice must be provided thereof to the City at least 7 Calendar Days prior to release for manufacture. 9. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the City, the Contractor may carry out the construction in accordance therewith and no further changes therein except upon written instructions from the City. 10. Each submittal, appropriately coded, will be returned within 30 Calendar Days following receipt of submittal by the City. L. Mock ups 1. Mock Up units as specified in individual Sections, include, but are not necessarily limited to, complete units of the standard of acceptance for that type of Work to be used on the Project. Remove at the completion of the Work or when directed. M. Qualifications 1. If specifically required in other Sections of these Specifications, submit a P.E. Certification for each item required. N. Request for Information (RFI) 1. Contractor Request for additional information a. Clarification or interpretation of the contract documents Submittals 01 33 00 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b. When the Contractor believes there is a conflict between Contract Documents c. When the Contractor believes there is a conflict between the Drawings and Specifications 1). Identify the conflict and request clarification d. When the Contractor encounters an unknown condition in the field 2. Use the Request for Information (RFI) form provided by the City (attached). 3. Numbering of RFI a. Prefix with “RFI” followed by series number, “-xxx”, beginning with “01” and increasing sequentially with each additional transmittal. 4. Sufficient information shall be attached to permit a written response without further information. 5. The City will log each request and will review the request. a. If review of the project information request indicates that a change to the Contract Documents is required, the City will issue a Field Order or Change Order, as appropriate. O. Substitutions 1. Substitution requests shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25 00 “Substitution Procedures”. P. Change Management 1. Proposed changes to the contract shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 26 00 “Change Management”. Q. Progress Schedules 1. Progress Schedules shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 32 16 “Construction Progress Schedule”. R. Graphic Documentation 1. Progress photos shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 06 “Graphic Documentation”. S. Applications for Payment 1. Applications for Payment shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 29 00 “Application for Payment Procedures”. T. Certified Test Reports Submittals 01 33 00 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1. Certified Test Reports shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 45 23 “Testing and Inspection Services”. U. Equipment Installation Reports 1. Equipment Installation Reports shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 75 00 “Starting and Adjusting”. 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Submittals 01 33 00 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements REQUEST FOR INFORMATION Project: RFI #: Engineering Project No.: Date Sent: Sender: Receiver: Copies To: Subject: Request: Sender’s Proposed Answer/Solution: THE PROPOSED ANSWER/SOLUTION IS, IS NOT, INCLUDED IN THE CONTRACT. Submittals 01 33 00 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements Receiver’s Response: Response By: Company: Date: DISTRIBUTION: Graphic Documentation 01 33 06 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 33 06 GRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide aerial photographs of the completed Project from an angle and height to include the entire Site. 2. Provide a minimum of four different views. 3. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 4. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 5. Do not take completion photographs until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 6. Employ a professional photographer approved by the Project Manager to photograph the Project. B. Provide video recordings of the Site in accordance with Section 01 32 33 “Preconstruction Video”. C. All photographs and video recordings are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for public or private publication or display without the written consent of the City. 1.02 DOCUMENTATION A. Submit photographic documentation in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittals.” 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide clear photographs taken with proper exposure. View photographs in the field and take new photographs immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHS A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280x960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the Construction Manager. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. Graphic Documentation 01 33 06 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Name of the Project. 2. Date, time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photograph in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-inch x 10-inch glossy color prints for each of the 10 photographs selected by the Project Manager. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 CONSTRUCTION SEQUENCE A. Perform the Work as required to complete the entire Project within the contract time. Overall project sequence discretion is granted to Contractor, but several conditional sequences are stipulated below: 1. New Administration Building must be constructed and fully ready for occupation at least 14 days prior to starting the entrance road repaving and work in the existing Operations Building (excluding High Service Pump Station). 2. Offsite distribution valves and discharge header valves at discharge tee shall be replaced prior to replacement of other valves in High Service Pump Station Area and Finished Water Meter Vaults. 3. Installation of 30” Filtered Water valve west of Filter No. 4 shall be completed prior to filtered water pipe cleaning and individual filtered water plug valve replacements. 4. Each Filter Building stair replacement shall be completed and returned to service before beginning subsequent replacements. B. Consider the sequences, duration limitations, and governing factors outlined in this Section to prepare the schedule for the Work. C. Perform the Work not specifically described in this Section as required to complete the entire Project within the contract time. 1.02 SHUT DOWNS AND PLANS OF ACTION A. Shut downs of operations or equipment must be planned and scheduled. 1. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: a. Electrical power. b. Control power. c. Process piping. d. Treatment equipment. e. Communications equipment. f. Other designated functions. 2. Describe the following in the plan of action: a. Construction necessary. b. Utilities, piping, or services affected. c. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed. d. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work. Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements e. Plan of Action to handle emergencies. f. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met. 3. Submit plan 3 weeks prior to beginning the Work. 1.03 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum out of service time and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: Critical Operation Maximum Time Out of Operation Times Operation Can be Shut Down Liquidated Damages (Dollars per Increment) Lake Lewisville Water Treatment and Pumping 14 days November 1 – March 1 $400/hour Up to four “full plant” shutdowns will be allowed during the project, with a minimum of 12 days of normal operation between successive shutdowns. Lake Lewisville Water Treatment and Pumping Partial Operation 56 days October 1 – May 15 $1,000/day Excluding summer period indicated, up to half the plant production capacity may be removed from service for required work, except that Lake Lewisville Treatment and Pumping operations shall not be reduced concurrently with production impacts to the Lake Ray Roberts water supply and treatment facilities. Lake Ray Roberts Raw Water Supply 12 days November 1 – March 1 $400/hour One “full plant” shutdown will be allowed during the project. Lake Lewisville Water Treatment, Pumping and associated Distribution Mains must be capable of full capacity operation for a minimum of 5 days of normal operation prior and subsequent to interruption of Lake Ray Roberts supply shutdown. Finished Water Distribution Service 0 days None $400/hour B. Submit a written plan of action for approval for critical operations. 1. Describe the following in the plan of action: a. Construction necessary. b. Utilities, piping, or services affected. c. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed. d. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work. e. Plan of action to handle emergencies. f. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met. Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements g. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies. Identify backups for key pieces of equipment such as excavators and pumps and key personnel such as welders. 2. Plan must be received by the Owner 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. C. Work affecting critical operations may be performed on a 24-hour a day basis as needed until Owner’s normal operations have been restored. D. Provide additional manpower and equipment as required to complete the Work affecting critical operations within the allotted time. E. Include the cost for Work affecting critical operations in the contract price. F. Liquidated damages will be assessed if Work on critical operations is not completed within the time indicated. 1. These items are critical to the supply of potable water to the City’s residents for health and sanitation. 2. Loss of water production and distribution can subject the Owner to loss of revenue, additional operations cost, and fines from regulatory agencies. 3. Liquidated damages have been established for each critical operation. G. Designated Critical Operations are described in more detail as follows: 1. Lake Lewisville Water Treatment and Pumping – Several work items will require a complete shutdown of raw water pumping, filtration operations or finished water pumping, and these functions are interdependent. Work items identified as likely requiring “full plant” shutdowns include: a. Lake Lewisville Raw Water Pump Station: 1). Installation of chemical feed points at raw water intakes 2). Installation of inlet valves at wet well b. Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant and High Service Pumping: 1). Installation of 30” filtered water valve west of Filter No. 4 2). Replacement of 12” filtered water isolation plug valves at Filters No. 9-16. (Filtered water header divider valve should allow north filters to operate during work on south filtered water header.) 3). Replacement of two 36” suction side butterfly valves between Clearwell No. 2 and High Service Pump Stations 4). Replacement of two 36” discharge side butterfly valves at discharge tee west of interior High Service Pump Station 2. Lake Lewisville Water Treatment and Pumping Partial Operation – Numerous work items will require removing various facilities from production. During the designated non-critical part of the year, the City can accommodate extended reductions in production capacity provided approximately half of parallel units remain in service, including the following: a. One raw water inlet Special Procedures 01 35 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b. Two raw water pumps (including electric power supply) c. One raw water transmission pipeline d. One polymer feed unit e. One flocculated water pipeline f. Eight filters g. Two clearwell tanks h. One high service pump station (Interior – 1-4 or exterior – 5 & 6), including electric power supply i. One finished water meter and distribution connection 3. Lake Ray Roberts Raw Water Supply – Installation of a new access manway into the raw water pipeline through Raw Water Valve Vault No. 2 will require pipeline shutdown, and consequently, shutdown of the treatment plant until raw water supply is restored. Chemical feed taps in the raw water piping must either be placed concurrently with this work or installed without additional shutdown. 4. Finished Water Distribution Service – Finished water distribution shall not be interrupted due to completion of work under this contract. Due to system interconnections, shutdown of the north or south finished water pipelines from the Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant during moderate demand periods will not result in a loss of finished water supply to Denton residents. However, offsite valve replacements will require line-stop placements to maintain service pressure in areas near replacement sites. 1.04 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. The Owner will assist the Contractor in draining the existing pipelines as much as possible through existing blow-off valves. The Contractor will be responsible for providing dewatering pumps, etc. required to completely dewater the facilities and handle any leakage past closed valves, gates or adjacent structures. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 35 13 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The procedures for special project circumstances that includes, but is not limited to: a. Coordination with the Texas Department of Transportation b. Work near High Voltage Lines c. Confined Space Entry Program d. Excavation Protection e. Air Pollution Watch Days f. Use of Explosives, Drop Weight, Etc. g. Water Utilities Notification h. Public Notification Prior to Beginning Construction i. Coordination with United States Army Corps of Engineers j. Coordination within Railroad permits areas k. Dust Control l. Employee Parking m. Coordination with North Central Texas Council of Governments Clean Construction Specification n. Pollution Control o. Management of Water B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with these Items is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements A. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. Health and Safety Code, Title 9. Safety, Subtitle A. Public Safety, Chapter 752. High Voltage Overhead Lines. 3. North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) – Clean Construction Specification 4. Occupational Health and Safety Administration (OSHA) Standards – 29 CFR Part 1910.146 – Permit-Required Confined Spaces 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination with the Texas Department of Transportation 1. When work in the right-of-way which is under the jurisdiction of the Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT): a. Notify the Texas Department of Transportation prior to commencing any work therein in accordance with the provisions of the permit b. All work performed in the TxDOT right-of-way shall be performed in compliance with and subject to approval from the Texas Department of Transportation B. Work near High Voltage Lines 1. Regulatory Requirements a. All Work near High Voltage Lines (more than 600 volts measured between conductors or between a conductor and the ground) shall be in accordance with Health and Safety Code, Title 9, Subtitle A, Chapter 752. 2. Warning sign a. Provide sign of sufficient size meeting all OSHA requirements. 3. Equipment operating within 10 feet of high voltage lines will require the following safety features a. Insulating cage-type of guard about the boom or arm b. Insulator links on the lift hook connections for back hoes or dippers c. Equipment must meet the safety requirements as set forth by OSHA and the safety requirements of the owner of the high voltage lines 4. Work within 6 feet of high voltage electric lines a. Notification shall be given to: 1). The power company (example: Denton Municipal Electric) a). Maintain an accurate log of all such calls to power company and record action taken in each case. Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b. Coordination with power company 1). After notification coordinate with the power company to: a). Erect temporary mechanical barriers, de-energize the lines, or raise or lower the lines c. No personnel may work within 6 feet of a high voltage line before the above requirements have been met. C. Confined Space Entry Program 1. Provide and follow approved Confined Space Entry Program in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2. Confined Spaces include: a. Manholes b. All other confined spaces in accordance with OSHA’s Permit Required for Confined Spaces D. Excavation Protection 1. Excavation protection shall be in strict compliance with OSHA excavation safety standards (29 CFR Part 1926 Subpart P Safety and Health regulations for Construction). 2. Submit three (3) copies of a site-specific trench safety plan prepared by a licensed Professional Engineer in the State of Texas to the City prior to construction in accordance with Section 01 33 00. a. The City will not review the submittal. Receipt of submittal is confirmation that the Contractor has prepared a trench safety plan as required by state and federal law. b. The City assumes no responsibility for trench safety and shall be held harmless under the indemnification clause of the General Conditions. 3. Any changes in the trench excavation plan after initiation of construction will not be cause for an extension of time and will require a new submittal to the City. 4. The Contractor accepts sole responsibility for compliance with all applicable safety requirements. E. Air Pollution Watch Days 1. General a. Observe the following guidelines relating to working on City construction sites on days designated as “AIR POLLUTION WATCH DAYS”. b. Typical Ozone Season 1). May 1 through October 31. c. Critical Emission Time 1). 6:00 a.m. to 10:00 a.m. Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2. Watch Days a. The Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), in coordination with the National Weather Service, will issue the Air Pollution Watch by 3:00 p.m. on the afternoon prior to the WATCH day. b. Requirements 1). Begin work after 10:00 a.m. whenever construction phasing requires the use of motorized equipment for periods in excess of 1 hour. 2). However, the Contractor may begin work prior to 10:00 a.m. if: a). Use of motorized equipment is less than 1 hour, or b). If equipment is new and certified by EPA as “Low Emitting“, or equipment burns Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD), diesel emulsions, or alternative fuels such as CNG. F. TCEQ Air Permit 1. Obtain TCEQ Air Permit for construction activities per requirements of TCEQ. G. Use of Explosives, Drop Weight, Etc. 1. When Contract Documents permit on the project the following will apply: a. Public Notification 1). Submit notice to City and proof of adequate insurance coverage, 24 hours prior to commencing. 2). Minimum 24-hour public notification in accordance with Section 01 31 13 H. Water Utilities Coordination 1. During the construction of this project, it may be necessary to deactivate, for a period of time, existing lines. The Contractor shall be required to coordinate with Water Utilities to determine the best times for deactivating and activating those lines. 2. Coordinate any event that will require connecting to or the operation of an existing City water line system with the City’s representative. a. If needed, obtain a hydrant water meter from Water Utilities for use during the life of named project. b. In the event that a water valve on an existing live system be turned off and on to accommodate the construction of the project is required, coordinate this activity through the appropriate City representative. 1). Do not operate water line valves of existing water system. a). Failure to comply will render the Contractor in violation of Texas Penal Code Title 7, Chapter 28.03 (Criminal Mischief) and the Contractor will be prosecuted to the full extent of the law. Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b). In addition, the Contractor will assume all liabilities and responsibilities as a result of these actions. I. Public Notification Prior to Beginning Construction 1. Prior to beginning construction on any block in the project, on a block-by-block basis, prepare and deliver a notice or flyer of the pending construction to the front door of each residence or business that will be impacted by construction. The notice shall be prepared as follows: a. Post notice or flyer 7 days prior to beginning any construction activity on each block in the project area. 1). Prepare flyer on the Contractor’s letterhead and include the following information: a). Name of Project b). Engineering Project Number (EPN) c). Scope of Project (i.e. type of construction activity) d). Actual construction duration within the block e). Name of the contractor’s foreman and phone number f). Name of the City’s inspector and phone number g). City’s after-hours phone number 2). A sample of the ‘pre-construction notification’ flyer is attached as Exhibit A. 3). Submit schedule showing the construction start and finish time for each block of the project to the inspector. 4). Deliver flyer to the City Inspector for review prior to distribution. b. No construction will be allowed to begin on any block until the flyer is delivered to all residents of the block. J. Public Notification of Temporary Water Service Interruption during Construction 1. In the event it becomes necessary to temporarily shut down water service to residents or businesses during construction, prepare and deliver a notice or flyer of the pending interruption to the front door of each affected resident. 2. Prepared notice as follows: a. The notification or flyer shall be posted 24 hours prior to the temporary interruption. b. Prepare flyer on the contractor’s letterhead and include the following information: 1). Name of the project 2). Engineering Project Number (EPN) 3). Date of the interruption of service Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 4). Period the interruption will take place 5). Name of the contractor’s foreman and phone number 6). Name of the City’s inspector and phone number c. A sample of the temporary water service interruption notification is attached as Exhibit B. d. Deliver a copy of the temporary interruption notification to the City inspector for review prior to being distributed. e. No interruption of water service can occur until the flyer has been delivered to all affected residents and businesses. f. Electronic versions of the sample flyers can be obtained from the Project Construction Inspector. K. Coordination with United States Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) 1. At locations in the Project where construction activities occur in areas where USACE permits are required, meet all requirements set forth in each designated permit. 2. Improvements at the Lake Lewisville Raw Water Intake include activities within Lake Lewisville, governed by USACE Nationwide Permit 3 (NWP3), Maintenance. A copy of NWP3 is included with these Contract Documents as Appendix GC- 6.09. 3. Comply with applicable conditions of NWP3 when performing activities within the lake boundaries. L. Coordination within Railroad Permit Areas 1. At locations in the project where construction activities occur in areas where railroad permits are required, meet all requirements set forth in each designated railroad permit. This includes, but is not limited to, provisions for: a. Flagmen b. Inspectors c. Safety training d. Additional insurance e. Insurance certificates f. Other employees required to protect the right-of-way and property of the Railroad Company from damage arising out of and/or from the construction of the project. Proper utility clearance procedures shall be used in accordance with the permit guidelines. 2. Obtain any supplemental information needed to comply with the railroad’s requirements. 3. Railroad Flagmen Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a. Submit receipts to City for verification of working days that railroad flagmen were present on Site. M. Dust Control 1. Use acceptable measures to control dust at the Site. a. If water is used to control dust, capture and properly dispose of waste water. b. If wet saw cutting is performed, capture and properly dispose of slurry. N. Employee Parking 1. Provide parking for employees at locations approved by the City. O. Coordination with North Central Texas Council of Governments (NCTCOG) Clean Construction Specification 1. Equipment Requirements a. All construction equipment being used to perform work on the Contract shall meet EPA emissions standards of Tier 3 or equivalent, or cleaner. Model Form A.14. Schedule for Phase-In of Tier 1-Tier 4 Non-Road Engines is included in Appendix A. Compliance may be achieved through the use of equipment powered by an EPA-certified engine, through engine repowers, or through the use of retrofits which have been verified by the EPA and/or California Air Resources Board. A list of available retrofits is available online at EPA’s website “Verified Technologies List for Clean Diesel.” b. Equipment that meets one or more of the following conditions may be exempt from these requirements: 1). Equipment powered by an engine that is less than or equal to ten (10) years old. 2). Equipment that must be used to fulfill use or reporting requirements for a grant program or other clean air initiative. Documentation of such obligations must be submitted to City for verification. 3). Equipment that is designated as low-use equipment, which is defined as any piece of construction equipment which is used for less than ten (10) hours per week on a single public works contract. A Low-Use Exemption Weekly Reporting Form will be required for all equipment for which this exemption is claimed. 4). Equipment that is being used to address a critical or emergency public works need, including, but not limited to, broken water mains or sanitary sewer lines. This exemption is limited to work performed in a situation in which the procurement of construction services is performed on an emergency basis, as provided for by State law. 2. Operational Requirements a. All diesel fuel used to perform work on the public works contract shall be Ultra-Low Sulfur Diesel (ULSD) fuel which also complies with Texas Low Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements Emission Diesel (TxLED) program requirements. This may include TxLED- compliant Biodiesel blends. b. The Contractor shall limit idling of equipment to no more than five (5) minutes, unless the idling is applicable to one or more of the following exceptions: 1). is being used for emergency response purposes; 2). is idling as a necessary component of mechanical operation, maintenance, or diagnostic purposes; or 3). is idling for the health or safety of the equipment operator. c. To the greatest extent possible, Contractor shall stage equipment away from, and minimize operation near, sensitive receptors including, but not limited to, fresh air intakes, hospitals, schools, licensed day care facilities, and residences. 3. Reporting Requirements a. On or before the day construction activity commences, the Contractor shall submit to the City an inventory report containing identifying data for each piece of equipment to be used on the worksite. A form for submitting such information will be provided by the City. This inventory may be used by the City to conduct site inspections and/or verify compliance with specification elements. b. If additional equipment is brought on-site after construction begins, the Contractor shall provide this same inventory information to the City for the new equipment on or before the day it begins work on-site. c. Reports shall be provided for all equipment used on-site. 4. Enforcement Requirements a. All construction equipment used at the Site is subject to inspection by the City at random. Contractor is responsible for ensuring that all subcontractors meet the requirements of this specification. P. POLLUTION CONTROL 1. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. 2. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. a. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. c. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. d. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. 3. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Do not allow contaminated water to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. a. Construct temporary holding ponds or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. b. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. Q. MANAGEMENT OF WATER 1. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. 2. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. 3. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. 4. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. 5. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the Construction Manager and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Construction Notice Flyer B. Notice of Temporary Water Service Interruption Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements EXHIBIT A (To be printed on Contractor’s Letterhead) Date: EPN No.: Project Name: Limits of Construction: THIS IS TO INFORM YOU THAT UNDER A CONTRACT WITH THE CITY OF DENTON, OUR COMPANY WILL WORK ON UTILITY LINES ON OR AROUND YOUR PROPERTY. CONSTRUCTION WILL BEGIN APPROXIMATELY SEVEN DAYS FROM THE DATE OF THIS NOTICE. IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS ABOUT ACCESS, SECURITY, SAFETY OR ANY OTHER ISSUE, PLEASE CALL: <CONTRACTOR’S SUPERINTENDENT> AT <TELEPHONE NO.> OR <CITY INSPECTOR> AT < TELEPHONE NO.> PLEASE KEEP THIS FLYER HANDY WHEN YOU CALL Special Project Procedures 01 35 13 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements EXHIBIT B Date: EPN No.: Project Name:_____________________ NOTICE OF TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE INTERRUPTION Due to utility improvements in your neighborhood, your water service will be interrupted on ___________________________________________________ between the hours of __________________ and _______________________. IF YOU HAVE QUESTIONS ABOUT THIS DISRUPTION, PLEASE CALL: <CONTRACTOR’S SUPERINTENDENT> AT <TELEPHONE NO.> OR <CITY INSPECTOR> AT < TELEPHONE NO.> THIS SERVICE INTERRUPTION WILL BE AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE Thank you, _________________________, Contractor Testing and Inspection Services 01 45 23 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 45 23 TESTING AND INSPECTION SERVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Testing and inspection services procedures and coordination B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. a. In accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions, Contractor is responsible for performing, coordinating, and payment of all inspections, tests, re-tests, or approvals. b. In accordance with Article 13 of the General Conditions, City is responsible for performing and payment for first set additional independent testing chosen by the City to be performed. 1). If the first independent test performed by the City fails, the Contractor is responsible for payment of subsequent testing until a passing test occurs. a). Final acceptance will not be issued by City until all required payments for testing by Contractor have been paid in full. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Testing 1. Complete testing in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Coordination a. When testing is required to be performed by the City, notify City, sufficiently in advance, when testing is needed. b. When testing is required to be completed by the Contractor, notify City, sufficiently in advance, that testing will be performed. Testing and Inspection Services 01 45 23 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3. Distribution of Testing Reports a. Electronic Distribution 1). Submit all reports electronically to Document Management System as indicated by Project Manager or their duly appointed representative. 4. Provide Project Manager’s duly appointed representative with trip tickets for each delivered load of Concrete or Lime material including the following information: a. Name of mixing plant or pit b. Date of delivery c. Material delivered B. Inspection 1. Inspection or lack of inspection does not relieve the Contractor from obligation to perform work in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Quality Management Plan 1. Provide a Contractor’s Quality Control Plant (CQCP) that describes testing and inspections for Work performed at the Site and at remote locations. Include Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The CQCP is to include: a. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; b. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; c. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; d. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; e. Control, verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: 1). Name of tests to be performed, 2). Specification paragraph requiring test, 3). Parameters of Work to be tested, 4). Test frequency, 5). Persons responsible for each test, and 6). Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; f. Incorporate the testing indicated in the Owner’s Quality Management Plan into the CQCP, specifically identifying the tests or inspections that will be provided by the Owner; Testing and Inspection Services 01 45 23 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements g. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. h. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the City. i. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications. 2. Use the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan Checklist provided by the Project Manager to review the CQCP before submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the CQCP. Do not begin Work until the CQCP is accepted. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the complete CQCP for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the complete CQCP is accepted. 3. Meet with the City’s project manager 7 days after CQCP is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the CQCP. 4. Notify the City of any changes to the CQCP or quality control personnel. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Materials Testing Reports sealed by a Professional Engineer or Professional Geoscientist licensed in the State of Texas. 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide temporary facilities and controls needed for the Work including, but not necessarily limited to: a. Temporary utilities b. Sanitary facilities c. Storage Sheds and Buildings d. Dust control e. Temporary fencing of the construction site B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Temporary Utilities 1. Obtaining Temporary Service a. Make arrangements with utility service companies for temporary services. b. Abide by rules and regulations of utility service companies or authorities having jurisdiction. c. Be responsible for utility service costs until Work is approved for Final Acceptance. 1). Included are fuel, power, light, heat and other utility services necessary for execution, completion, testing and initial operation of Work. 2. Water Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a. Contractor to provide water required for and in connection with Work to be performed and for specified tests of piping, equipment, devices or other use as required for the completion of the Work. b. Provide and maintain adequate supply of potable water for domestic consumption by Contractor personnel and Project Manager and Project Manager’s duly authorized representative. c. Coordination 1). Contact City 1 week before water for construction is desired d. Contractor Payment for Construction Water 1). Obtain construction water meter from City for payment as billed by City’s established rates. 3. Electricity and Lighting a. Provide and pay for electric powered service as required for Work, including testing of Work. 1). Provide power for lighting, operation of equipment, or other use. b. Electric power service includes temporary power service or generator to maintain operations during scheduled shutdown. 4. Telephone a. Provide emergency telephone service at Site for use by Contractor personnel and others performing work or furnishing services at Site. 5. Temporary Heat and Ventilation a. Provide temporary heat as necessary for protection or completion of Work. b. Provide temporary heat and ventilation to assure safe working conditions. B. Sanitary Facilities 1. Provide and maintain sanitary facilities for persons on Site. a. Comply with regulations of State and local departments of health. 2. Enforce use of sanitary facilities by construction personnel at job site. a. Enclose and anchor sanitary facilities. b. No discharge will be allowed from these facilities. c. Collect and store sewage and waste so as not to cause nuisance or health problem. d. Haul sewage and waste off-site at no less than weekly intervals and properly dispose in accordance with applicable regulation. 3. Locate facilities near Work Site and keep clean and maintained throughout Project. 4. Remove facilities at completion of Project C. Storage Sheds and Buildings Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1. Provide adequately ventilated, watertight, weatherproof storage facilities with floor above ground level for materials and equipment susceptible to weather damage. 2. Storage of materials not susceptible to weather damage may be on blocks off ground. 3. Store materials in a neat and orderly manner. a. Place materials and equipment to permit easy access for identification, inspection and inventory. 4. Equip building with lockable doors and lighting, and provide electrical service for equipment space heaters and heating or ventilation as necessary to provide storage environments acceptable to specified manufacturers. 5. Fill and grade site for temporary structures to provide drainage away from temporary and existing buildings. 6. Remove building from site prior to Final Acceptance. D. Temporary Fencing 1. Provide and maintain for the duration of construction when required in contract documents E. Dust Control 1. Contractor is responsible for maintaining dust control through the duration of the project. a. Contractor remains on-call at all times b. Must respond in a timely manner F. Temporary Protection of Construction 1. Contractor or subcontractors are responsible for protecting Work from damage due to weather. G. City’s Field Office 1. Provide and continuously maintain City field office separate from Contractor’s field office, as specified in Paragraph 2.01 below. 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.01 CITY FIELD OFFICE A. Provide and continuously maintain City’s field office separate from Contractor’s field office. Provide an office with a minimum nominal size of 12 feet by 30 feet. 1. Office and/or materials of construction may be new or slightly used but must be serviceable, adequate for the intended purpose, acceptable to the Project Manager, and must not violate codes or regulations. 2. Offices are to be structurally sound, weather-tight, insulated and have floor raised above the ground. Brace and anchor offices to prevent movement. 3. Skirt around perimeter of structures with the same material as structure siding. 4. Divide the office into two separate spaces (one office, restroom, and conference). Provide 12-foot by 12-foot office at one end with full height walls and interior 3-foot by 6-foot-8-inch doors. 5. Provide an ADA compliant restroom with door in the center section of the office. 6. Provide vinyl or VCT tile on floors. 7. Provide outside doors with padlocks and door locks. 8. Provide operable, screened windows with locks. 9. Provide Venetian type window blinds. 10. Provide mounted boot brush / cleaner / scraper on porch at entrances. B. Construct a wood porch with steps and a covered overhang at doors that ensures that rain will be completely diverted from doors. Provide wooden railing around porch and on the steps. C. Provide electricity to the field office adequate to power equipment, appliances, and heating and cooling systems. 1. Provide sufficient lighting for office environment using fluorescent light fixtures with lenses energized by wall switches. Provide separate switches just inside exterior doors for the main area, inside of offices and inside the restroom. 2. Provide outside security lighting. 3. Provide three duplex receptacles in office and three duplex receptacles in remainder of building. D. Provide an electric heating and cooling system for the field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heat to a minimum of 75 deg F inside when outside temperatures are 10 deg F. 2. Cool to a minimum 72 deg F inside temperature when outside temperatures are 105 deg F. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3. Maintain relative humidity between 48 to 54 percent. E. Provide fully plumbed indoor restroom with flush toilet, sink, hot water, mirror, and storage cabinet for paper goods. Connect fixtures to complete potable water, sanitary, and vent systems. F. Provide furnishings at the field office as follows: Qty. Furnishing 1 2’-6” x 5’-0” office desks with credenzas 2 Fabric covered cushioned arm chairs with swivel/tilt/roll capabilities 6 Folding chairs (Lifetime Commercial Grade white granite) 1 3’-0” x 8’-0” folding tables (Lifetime Commercial Grade white granite) 1 Legal size, four-drawer metal filing cabinets 1 6’H X 48”W x 12” book shelf 1 Full-size drafting/plan table 2 Plastic waste cans for each office G. Provide internet service at the field office with the following features: 1. Minimum 10 Mbps download, 3 Mbps upload speed; 2. Maximum file transfer size of 100 MB; and 3. Unlimited email/storage size. H. Provide wireless router for internet services with adequate range to reach all areas of the office. I. Provide one new desktop computer system at the field office as follows: 1. Pentium Dual-Core Processor 4.2 GHz minimum. 2. Wireless mouse. 3. Wireless 104-key keyboard. 4. 4 GB DDR2 800 MHz SDRAM (2 DIMMS). 5. 10BaseT/100BaseTX Mbps High Speed Ethernet Connection PCI LAN Card. 6. Two 27-inch widescreen LCD Monitors for each computer. a. Resolution 1920 x 1200 at 60 Hertz with 1000:1 contrast ratio. b. Anti-glare, anti-static screen. c. Super VGA video board with 256 MB RAM. 7. Minimum of four USB 2.0 connections, two USB 3.0 connections and two DVI-I Video Connection or appropriate splitter cable to allow concurrent use of both monitors. 8. 16X DVD+/-R/RW Drive. Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 9. 500 GB 7200 RPM SATA Hard Drive. 10. Windows 10 or latest version installed and on CD ROM. 11. Microsoft Office 2010 Ultimate or latest version. 12. Bluebeam PDF Review Version 15 or latest. J. Provide color copier with the following capabilities: 1. Provide service and maintenance agreement throughout the Project. Provide toner, paper supply for the duration of the Project, and other supplies as needed to operate the copier. 2. Ability to scan to email/file/folder. 3. Ability to print, sort and collate. 4. Produce up to 45 copies per minute in black and white. 5. Ability to scan and print in black and white, grayscale, or color. 6. Ability to auto feed and auto duplex. 7. Provide a minimum of two paper trays with 500-sheet capacity. 8. Reduction and enlargement capability with range from 25 to 400 percent. 9. Ability to scan, copy, and print up to 11 x 17 format. K. Provide external hard drive with the following capabilities: 1. Dual drive storage system with mirroring. 2. 2 terabyte total capacity with 1 TB capacity in RAID configuration. 3. Provides automatic data backup software. 4. USB 3.0 Connection with serial bus. L. Provide a fire extinguisher and commercially serviced first aid kit. M. Field office and furniture will remain the property of the Contractor. Computer equipment must be turned over to the Owner at the end of the Project. N. Provide access to reserved parking spaces for two vehicles adjacent to the City’s field offices. Provide a durable parking area surface to prevent erosion, mud, dust, or rutting caused by vehicles. Provide a minimum of 4 inches of flexible crushed limestone base material. 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] 3.01 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.02 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.03 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Temporary Facilities Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 50 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1. Maintain all temporary facilities for duration of construction activities as needed. 3.05 [REPAIR] / [RESTORATION] 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION 3.07 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.09 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES A. Temporary Facilities 1. Remove all temporary facilities and restore area after completion of the Work, to a condition equal to or better than prior to start of Work. 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Storm Water Pollution Prevention 01 57 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 57 13 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures for Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan a. Measurement for this Item shall be by lump sum. b. Payment 1). The work performed and the materials furnished in accordance with this Item shall be paid for at the lump sum price bid for “Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan”. c. The price bid shall include: 1). Preparation of Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 2). Implementation 3). Permitting fees 4). Installation 5). Maintenance 6). Removal 1.03 REFERENCES A. Abbreviations and Acronyms 1. Notice of Intent: NOI 2. Notice of Termination: NOT 3. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan: SWPPP 4. Texas Commission on Environmental Quality: TCEQ 5. Notice of Change: NOC Storm Water Pollution Prevention 01 57 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements B. Reference Standards 1. Reference standards cited in this Specification refer to the current reference standard published at the time of the latest revision date logged at the end of this Specification, unless a date is specifically cited. 2. Integrated Storm Management (iSWM) Technical Manual for Construction Controls 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. Contractor is responsible for resolution and payment of any fines issued associated with compliance to Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan. 2. As a condition of approval, applicants conducting land disturbing activities will complete the online construction site survey. This survey can be found at https://www.surveymonkey.com/r/HT2BDHZ B. Construction Activities resulting in: 1. Less than 1 acre of disturbance a. Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with Drawings. 2. 1 to less than 5 acres of disturbance a. Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Construction Permit is required b. Complete SWPPP in accordance with TCEQ requirements 1). TCEQ Small Construction Site Notice Required under general permit TXR150000 a). Sign and post at job site b). Prior to Preconstruction Meeting, send 1 copy to City Watershed Protection Department, Joetta Dailey (940) 349-7153 or David Hunter (940) 349-7123. 2). Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with: a). Drawings b). TXR150000 General Permit c). SWPPP d). TCEQ requirements 3. 5 acres or more of Disturbance a. Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Construction Permit is required b. Complete SWPPP in accordance with TCEQ requirements 1). Prepare a TCEQ NOI form and submit to TCEQ along with required fee Storm Water Pollution Prevention 01 57 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a). Sign and post at job site b). Send copy to City Watershed Protection Department, Joetta Dailey (940) 349 7153 or David Hunter (940) 349 7123. 2). TCEQ Notice of Change required if making changes or updates to NOI 3). Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with: a). Drawings b). TXR150000 General Permit c). SWPPP d). TCEQ requirements 4). Once the project has been completed and all the closeout requirements of TCEQ have been met a TCEQ Notice of Termination can be submitted. a). Send copy to City Watershed Protection Department, Joetta Dailey (940) 349-7153 or David Hunter (940) 349-7123. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. SWPPP 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00, except as stated herein. a. Prior to the Preconstruction Meeting, submit a draft copy of SWPPP to the City as follows: 1). 1 copy to the Project Manager a). Project Manager will forward to the City Watershed Protection Department, Joetta Dailey (940) 349-7153 or David Hunter (940) 349-7123 for review. B. Modified SWPPP 1. If the SWPPP is revised during construction, resubmit modified SWPPP to the City in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Temporary Project Signage 01 58 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 58 13 TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary Project Signage Requirements B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.02 EQUIPMENT, PRODUCT TYPES, AND MATERIALS Temporary Project Signage 01 58 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements A. Design Criteria 1. Provide three (3) free standing Project Designation Signs as indicated below: The flag shall resemble the Texas Flag. The background of the stars and the “City of Denton” lettering shall be blue. The lower bar of the flag shall be red, and the upper bar shall be white. The dimensions, from the farthest ends, shall be 12-inches vertically and 23.5-inches horizontally. The flag shall appear in the dimensions shown. The contractor may request a digital copy in either .jpg or .tif format. 2. The Project Designation Sign shall be placed at strategic points with lettering as needed to adequately describe the work. 3. Signs shall be painted white with blue letters and symbols. Letter size shall conform to dimensions shown on sign drawing. Exceptions or variations from the sign shown above shall not be allowed. B. Materials 1. Sign a. Constructed of ¾-inch fir plywood, grade A-C (exterior) or better 2.03 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION Temporary Project Signage 01 58 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3.01 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.02 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.03 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.04 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Provide vertical installation at extents of project. 2. Signs shall be placed prior to beginning the Work and maintained until the end of the project. 3. Relocate sign as needed, upon request of the City. B. Mounting options a. Skids b. Posts c. Barricade 3.05 [NOT USED] 3.06 MAINTENANCE A. General 1. Maintenance will include painting and repairs as needed or directed by the City. 3.07 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. References for Product Requirements and Product Material Submittal Checklist B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES [NOT USED] 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. A list of City approved products for use is located online as follows: 1. https://www.cityofdenton.com/CoD/media/City-of- Denton/Business/Development%20Review/Materials-List.pdf B. Only products specifically included on City’s Product Material Submittal Checklist in these Contract Documents shall be allowed for use on the Project. 1. Any subsequently approved products will only be allowed for use upon specific approval by the City. C. Any specific product requirements in the Contract Documents supersede similar products included on the Product Material Submittal Checklist. 1. The City reserves the right to not allow products to be used for certain projects even though the product is listed on the Product Material Submittal Checklist. D. Although a specific product is included on Product Material Submittal Checklist, not all products from that manufacturer are approved for use, including but not limited to, that manufacturer’s standard product. E. See Section 01 33 00 for submittal requirements of Product Data included on Product Material Submittal Checklist. 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] A. Design Criteria: 1. Provide products designed for structural stability and operational capability. 2. Provide members designed to withstand all loads imposed by installation, erection, and operation of the product without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operational requirements of the product. Size and strength of materials for structural members are specified as minimums only. 3. Design mechanical and electrical components for all loads, currents, stresses, and wear imposed by startup and normal operations of the equipment without deformation, failure, or adversely affecting the operation of the unit. Mechanical and electrical components specified for equipment are specified as the minimum acceptable for the equipment. B. Coordination: 1. Provide coordination of the entire Project, including verification that structures, piping, and equipment components to be furnished and installed for this Project are compatible. 2. Determine that the equipment furnished for this Project is compatible with the requirements of the Contract Documents and with the equipment and materials furnished by others. 3. Provide electrical components for equipment that comply with all provisions of the Contract Documents. 4. Apply protective coatings and paints to equipment in the shop that are fully compatible with the final coatings to be field applied in accordance with the Contract Documents. C. Adapting Substitute Products: 1. The Drawings and Specifications are prepared for the specified products. Make modifications to incorporate the products into the Project if a substitution is requested for a product is and approved in accordance with Section 01 26 00 “Change Management.” 2. Do not provide a product with a physical size that exceeds the available space. Consideration may be given to the acceptance of these products or equipment if the Contractor assumes all costs necessary to incorporate the item and the City approves such revisions. 3. Coordinate electrical requirements for the products to be installed in the Project, including revisions in electrical equipment components wiring and other elements necessary to incorporate the component. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide products according to normally accepted engineering and shop practices, except where a higher standard of quality is required by the Contract Documents. B. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gages that are interchangeable. C. Two or more items of the same kind are to be identical and made by the same Supplier. D. Provide products suitable for the intended service. E. Adhere to the equipment capacities, sizes, and dimensions indicated in the Contract Documents. F. Do not use products for any purpose other than that for which they were designed. G. Provide new products. Do not provide equipment that has been in service at any time prior to delivery except for testing in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Provide materials suitable for service conditions. I. Provide iron castings that are tough, close grained gray iron free from blowholes, flaws, or excessive shrinkage and that conform to ASTM A48. J. Design structural members for shock or vibratory loads. K. Provide steel that is at least 1/4 inch thick for all elements that will be submerged or subject to splashing all or part of the time during normal operation of the equipment. Chamfer or grind all edges to eliminate sharp exposed edges. 2.02 ELECTRIC MOTORS A. Provide equipment with motors that comply with the following requirements unless the detailed equipment specifications have different requirements: 1. Provide motors designed in compliance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, and AFBMA standards and the NEC for the specific duty imposed by the driven equipment that are appropriate for the application per these same standards. 2. Provide motors designed for frequent starting duty equivalent to the duty service required by the driven equipment where frequent starting occurs. 3. Provide motors rated for continuous duty at 40 deg C ambient unless recognized and defined by the standards and codes for intermittent duty as a standard industry practice. Provide motors for which motor temperature rise above 40 deg C ambient does not exceed the NEMA limit when operating continuously at nameplate horsepower. 4. Provide motors designed to start with an appropriate starter or variable speed drive. 5. Provide motors designed for motor bearing life based upon the actual operating load conditions imposed by the driven equipment. Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 6. Provide motors sized for the altitude of the location where the equipment is to be installed. 7. Provide motors that meet the following service factor requirements: a. Maximum load of 87 percent of the nameplate horsepower for motors with a 1.0 service factor; and b. Maximum load of 100 percent of the nameplate horsepower for motors with a 1.15 service factor. 8. Provide motors that comply with the latest applicable provisions of NEMA MG1 and are manufactured using the following process when the detailed specifications call for encapsulated motor windings: a. Seal the stator assembly by vacuum pressure impregnation (VPI) with epoxy resin after stator assembly; b. Provide two VPI treatments for stator, with each treatment consisting of a dip followed by an oven bake; and c. Provide a final (third) coating of a durable epoxy varnish suitable for protection against dust, moisture, and chemical degradation after the final cure for the stator assembly. 9. Provide motors with clamp type grounding terminals inside the motor conduit box. 10. Provide oversized conduit boxes for motors with external conduit boxes. 11. Provide motors with maximum starting current that meets NEMA MG1, Class H. 12. Provide motors with efficiencies that comply with NEMA MG1 for premium efficiency motors. 13. Provide motors with minimum insulation Type F. 14. Provide motors that are random wound with copper coils. 15. Provide motors rated for the appropriate classification when motors are installed in a hazardous location. B. Provide the manufacturer’s standard motor on integrally constructed motor driven equipment such as appliances, hand tools, etc. if redesign of the complete unit would be required to provide a motor with the specified features. C. Provide motors within the horsepower ranges indicated below that are rated and constructed as follows unless otherwise required by the detailed equipment specifications. 1. Below 1/2 hp: a. 115 volts, 60 Hertz, single phase; b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations; TEFP in all other locations; c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings; and Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements d. Built in manual reset thermal protector or furnished with integrally mounted stainless steel enclosed manual motor overload switch. 2. 1/2 to 1 hp: a. 230/460 volts, 60 Hertz, 3 phase; b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations, TEFC in all other locations; and c. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. 3. 1-1/2 hp and above: a. 230/460 volts, 60 Hertz, 3 phase; b. Dripproof in clean and dry locations, TEFC in all other locations; c. Oil or grease lubricated anti friction or oil lubricated sleeve bearings; and d. Vertical motors must have 15-year average life thrust bearings. D. Provide space heaters operating on 120-volt single-phase service for motors with horsepower ratings of 15 hp or greater. 2.03 EQUIPMENT APPURTENANCES A. Provide a safety guard covering all sides on belt or chain drives, fan blades, couplings, and other moving or rotating parts: 1. Fabricate safety guards from 16 US gage or heavier galvanized or aluminum clad sheet steel or 1/2-inch mesh galvanized expanded metal; 2. Design guards for easy installation and removal; 3. Provide galvanized supports and accessories for each guard; 4. Provide stainless steel bolts and hardware; and 5. Provide safety guards designed to prevent the entrance of rain and dripping water in outdoor locations. 2.04 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Provide suitable anchor bolts for each product. B. Provide anchor bolts with templates or setting drawings in time to permit casting the anchor bolts in the concrete when concrete is placed. C. Provide two nuts for each bolt. D. Provide anchor bolts for products mounted on baseplates that are long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. Bolts must be long enough to provide full nut engagement and leave three threads exposed. Housekeeping pads are not structural concrete. E. Provide stainless steel anchor bolts, nuts, and washers. 2.05 SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES Product Requirements 01 60 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements A. Furnish tools, instruments, lifting and handling devices, and accessories necessary for proper maintenance and adjustment that are available only from the manufacturer or are not commonly available. 2.06 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION PLAQUES A. Provide a plaque for each piece of equipment in accordance with Section 40 05 53 “Identification for Process Piping and Equipment.” 2.07 LUBRICATION SYSTEMS FOR EQUIPMENT A. Provide equipment lubricated by systems which: 1. Require attention no more frequently than weekly during continuous operation. 2. Do not require attention during startup or shut down. 3. Do not waste lubricants. B. Provide lubricants to fill lubricant reservoirs and to replace lubricant consumed during testing, startup, and operation prior to acceptance of equipment by the Owner. 2.08 INSULATION OF PIPING A. Insulate all piping on or related to equipment as required to prevent freezing under any condition. Insulate piping per the manufacturer’s written instruction or per Section 23 07 19 “HVAC Piping Insulation” whichever is more stringent. 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Owner-Furnished Goods and Special Services 01 64 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 64 00 OWNER-FURNISHED GOODS AND SPECIAL SERVICES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Accept the transfer of Owner’s pre-purchased Goods and Special Services defined in Paragraph 2.01 for installation. B. Receive, install, and place Goods in operation in accordance with the Contract Documents and the associated agreement and contract documents for Goods and Special Services. C. Provide Special Services in accordance with the Contract Documents and the associated agreement and contract documents for Goods and Special Services. D. Provide documentation required by the Contract Documents and the contract documents for the pre-purchase of Goods and Special Services. E. The contract documents for the pre-purchase of Goods and Special Services are included in referenced appendices. 1.02 DOCUMENTATION A. Owner will provide documentation of the Transfer of Owner Furnished Goods and Special Services listed in Paragraph 2.01 using forms provided by the City. These forms will fix the date for transfer of responsibilities for the receipt, storage, and installation of the Goods and provision of Special Services in accordance with the Contract Documents and the contract documents for the Goods and Special Services. B. Owner will provide Shop Drawings prepared by the Seller. C. Owner will provide operation and maintenance manuals prepared by the Seller. D. Provide Equipment Installation Reports as required by Section 01 75 00 “Starting and Adjusting.” E. Provide other documentation required regarding the Goods and Special Services per the requirements of Section 01 33 00 “Submittals.” 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Inspect the condition of all equipment accepted for installation and promptly advise the Project Manager in writing of defects or damage. B. Provide the services of the Seller’s representative to assist in installation of the equipment in accordance with Section 01 75 00 “Starting and Adjusting” and the contract documents for the pre-purchase of Goods and Special Services included in the referenced appendices. Owner-Furnished Goods and Special Services 01 64 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 OWNER-PURCHASED GOODS AND SPECIAL SERVICES A. Owner has or will purchase and provide the following Goods and Special Services to the Contractor: Item Description Seller Appendix 1 Two 36” butterfly valves outside the High Service Pump Stations A 2 Two 24” butterfly valves on the discharage of the external High Service Pump Station A 3 One 20” motorized butterfly valve and vault on the discharge of the Lake Lewisville Raw Water Pump Station A 4 Two medium voltage transformers for the Lake Lewisville Raw Water Pump Station B B. Products are described in the referenced appendices. Obtain clarification from the Project Manager in the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. C. Assume responsibilities for coordination, installation, and startup of Owner-provided products as for products selected and purchased by the Contractor. D. Payment for the product will be made directly by the Owner per the agreement between Owner (as Buyer) and Seller. E. Include all other costs associated with the installation, startup, and initial operation of the product in the Contract Price. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Arrange for delivery of the equipment to be furnished and furnish personnel and equipment as needed to carefully unload the items and either store them or set them in place. B. Provide the labor, tools, equipment, and appurtenances necessary to inspect, install, and place in operating conditions all Goods pre-purchased by the Owner or pre-selected and assigned to the Contractor. C. Assemble equipment disassembled for shipping. Determine the extent of assembly that will be required and include the cost of this assembly in the Contract Price. D. Furnish all incidental items not supplied with the Goods that may be required for complete installation. Include the cost for these items in the Contract Price. E. Provide the services of the manufacturer’s representative to assist in installation of the equipment in accordance with the specifications included in appendices and Owner-Furnished Goods and Special Services 01 64 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements Section 01 75 00 “Starting and Adjusting.” Schedule the representative to be available when needed to assist and instruct in the proper installation and adjustment of the equipment. All Work and adjustments must be done in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer’s representative. F. Provide installation, documentation, and training as required in the contract documents for the pre-selected or pre-purchased equipment and as required by these Contract Documents. END OF SECTION Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 66 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Scheduling of product delivery 2. Packaging of products for delivery 3. Protection of products against damage from: a. Handling b. Exposure to elements or harsh environments B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Delivery Requirements 1. Schedule delivery of products or equipment as required to allow timely installation and to avoid prolonged storage. 2. Provide appropriate personnel and equipment to receive deliveries. Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 66 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3. Delivery trucks will not be permitted to wait extended periods of time on the Site for personnel or equipment to receive the delivery. 4. Deliver products or equipment in manufacturer's original unbroken cartons or other containers designed and constructed to protect the contents from physical or environmental damage. 5. Clearly and fully mark and identify as to manufacturer, item and installation location. 6. Provide manufacturer's instructions for storage and handling. B. Handling Requirements 1. Handle products or equipment in accordance with these Contract Documents and manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions. C. Storage Requirements 1. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements of these Specifications. 2. Make necessary provisions for safe storage of materials and equipment. a. Place loose soil materials and materials to be incorporated into Work to prevent damage to any part of Work or existing facilities and to maintain free access at all times to all parts of Work and to utility service company installations in vicinity of Work. 3. Keep materials and equipment neatly and compactly stored in locations that will cause minimum inconvenience to other contractors, public travel, adjoining owners, tenants and occupants. a. Arrange storage to provide easy access for inspection. 4. Restrict storage to areas available on construction site for storage of material and equipment as shown on Drawings, or approved by Project Manager or their duly authorized representative. 5. Provide off-site storage and protection when on-site storage is not adequate. a. Provide addresses of and access to off-site storage locations for inspection by Project Manager or their duly authorized representative. 6. Do not use lawns, grass plots or other private property for storage purposes without written permission of owner or other person in possession or control of premises. 7. Store in manufacturers’ unopened containers. 8. Neatly, safely and compactly stack materials delivered and stored along line of Work to avoid inconvenience and damage to property owners and general public and maintain at least 3 feet from fire hydrant. 9. Keep public and private driveways and street crossings open. 10. Repair or replace damaged lawns, sidewalks, streets or other improvements to satisfaction of Project Manager or their duly authorized representative. Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 66 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a. Total length which materials may be distributed along route of construction at one time is 1,000 linear feet, unless otherwise approved in writing by Project Manager. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 [NOT USED] 3.02 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections 1. Inspect all products or equipment delivered to the site prior to unloading. B. Non-Conforming Work 1. Reject all products or equipment that are damaged, used or in any other way unsatisfactory for use on the project. 3.03 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.04 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.05 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.06 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect all products or equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written directions. B. Store products or equipment in location to avoid physical damage to items while in storage. C. Protect equipment from exposure to elements and keep thoroughly dry if required by the manufacturer. 3.08 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.09 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Mobilization and Remobilization 01 70 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 70 00 MOBILIZATION AND REMOBILIZATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mobilization and Demobilization a. Mobilization 1). Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating supplies to the Site 2). Establishment of necessary general facilities for the Contractor’s operation at the Site 3). Premiums paid for performance and payment bonds 4). Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating supplies to another location within the designated Site 5). Relocation of necessary general facilities for the Contractor’s operation from 1 location to another location on the Site. b. Demobilization 1). Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating supplies away from the Site including disassembly 2). Site Clean-up 3). Removal of all buildings and/or other facilities assembled at the Site for this Contract c. Mobilization and Demobilization do not include activities for specific items of work that are for which payment is provided elsewhere in the contract. 2. Remobilization a. Remobilization for Suspension of Work specifically required in the Contract Documents or as required by City includes: 1). Demobilization a). Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating supplies from the Site including disassembly or temporarily securing equipment, supplies, and other facilities as designated by the Contract Documents necessary to suspend the Work. b). Site Clean-up as designated in the Contract Documents Mobilization and Remobilization 01 70 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2). Remobilization a). Transportation of Contractor’s personnel, equipment, and operating supplies to the Site necessary to resume the Work. b). Establishment of necessary general facilities for the Contractor’s operation at the Site necessary to resume the Work. 3). No Payments will be made for: a). Mobilization and Demobilization from one location to another on the Site in the normal progress of performing the Work. b). Stand-by or idle time c). Lost profits Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with these Items is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item, except as described in the Schedule of Values per Section 01 29 00 “Application for Payment Procedures”. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] Mobilization and Remobilization 01 70 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Construction Staking and Survey 01 71 23 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 71 23 CONSTRUCTION STAKING AND SURVEY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for construction staking to be provided by the Contractor. 2. Requirements for coordination with City to allow performance of as-built survey at the Site. B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Construction Staking a. Measurement and Payment 1). Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 2. As-Built Survey a. Measurement and Payment 1). Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals, if required, shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Certificates 1. Provide certificate certifying that elevations and locations of improvements are in conformance or non-conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Construction Staking and Survey 01 71 23 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements a. Certificate must be sealed by a registered professional land surveyor in the State of Texas. B. Field Quality Control Submittals 1. Documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering work. 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construction Staking 1. Construction staking will be performed by the Contractor. 2. Coordination a. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate staking such that construction activities are not delayed or negatively impacted. 3. General a. Contractor is responsible for preserving and maintaining staking. b. If in the opinion of the City, a sufficient number of stakes or markings have been lost, destroyed or disturbed, by Contractor’s neglect, such that the contracted Work cannot take place, then the Contractor will be required to re-stake the deficient areas. B. As-built Survey 1. As-built Survey will be performed by the City. 2. Coordination a. Contractor to verify that control data established in the design survey remains intact. b. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to coordinate As-built Survey such that construction activities are not delayed or negatively impacted. c. Contractor shall coordinate construction operations with City sufficiently in advance and make provisions for City to perform as-built survey on various items indicated in Paragraph B.3.b. d. Contractor shall restore or replace all necessary control data damaged during construction operations. 1). Contractor shall perform replacements and/or restorations. 3. General a. As-built survey will be performed in order to maintain complete and accurate logs of control and survey work as it progresses for Project Records. Construction Staking and Survey 01 71 23 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b. The Contractor will ensure coordination is maintained with the City to allow performance of as-built survey to obtain construction features including, but not limited to, the following: 1). All Utility Lines a). Rim and flowline elevations and coordinates for each manhole or junction structure 2). Water Lines a). Top of pipe elevations and coordinates for waterlines at the following locations: (1). Every 250 linear feet (2). Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc. (All Fittings) (3). Cathodic protection test stations (4). Sampling stations (5). Meter boxes/vaults (All sizes) (6). Fire lines (7). Fire hydrants and valves (8). Gate valves and Butterfly Valves (9). Plugs, stubouts, dead-end lines (10). Air Release valves (Manhole rim and vent pipe) (11). Blow off valves (Manhole rim and valve lid) (12). Pressure plane valves (13). Cleaning wyes (14). Casing pipe (each end) b). Storm Sewer (1). Top of pipe elevations and coordinates at the following locations: (a). Every 250 linear feet (b). Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc. c). Sanitary Sewer (1). Top of pipe elevations and coordinates for sanitary sewer lines at the following locations: (a). Every 250 linear feet (b). Horizontal and vertical points of inflection, curvature, etc. (c). Cleanouts Construction Staking and Survey 01 71 23 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements c. As-built survey will be performed in order to maintain complete and accurate logs of control and survey work associated with meeting or exceeding the line and grade required by these Specifications. d. The Contractor will ensure coordination is maintained with the City to allow performance of as-built survey and verify control data including, but not limited to, the following: 1). Verification that established benchmarks and control are accurate. 2). Use of Benchmarks to furnish and maintain all reference lines and grades for tunneling. 3). Use of lines and grades to establish the location of the pipe. 4). Submit to the City copies of field notes, if requested, used to establish all lines and grades and allow the City to check guidance system setup prior to beginning each tunneling drive. 5). Provide access for the City, when requested, to verify the guidance system and the line and grade of the carrier pipe on a daily basis. 6). The Contractor remains fully responsible for the accuracy of the work and the correction of it, as required. 7). Monitor line and grade continuously during construction. 8). Record deviation with respect to design line and grade once at each pipe joint and submit daily records to City. 9). If the installation does not meet the specified tolerances, immediately notify the City and correct the installation in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.02 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.03 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.04 APPLICATION 3.05 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] Construction Staking and Survey 01 71 23 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3.07 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to maintain all stakes and control data in accordance with this Specification. B. Do not change or relocate stakes or control data without approval from the City. 3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.09 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Cleaning 01 74 23 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 74 23 CLEANING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Intermediate and final cleaning for Work not including special cleaning of closed systems specified elsewhere B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Scheduling 1. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants disturbed by cleaning process will not fall on newly painted surfaces. 2. Schedule final cleaning upon completion of Work and immediately prior to final inspection. 1.05 SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE [NOT USED] 1.10 STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Store cleaning products and cleaning wastes in containers specifically designed for those materials. Cleaning 01 74 23 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIEDPRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents 1. Compatible with surface being cleaned 2. New and uncontaminated 3. For manufactured surfaces a. Material recommended by manufacturer 2.03 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.02 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.03 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.04 APPLICATION [NOT USED] 3.05 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.07 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.09 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING A. General 1. Prevent accumulation of wastes that create hazardous conditions. 2. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with laws and safety orders of governing authorities. 3. Do not dispose of volatile wastes such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains or sewers. 4. Dispose of degradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site. Cleaning 01 74 23 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 5. Dispose of nondegradable debris at an approved solid waste disposal site or in an alternate manner approved by City and regulatory agencies. 6. Transport and deposit vegetative material removed as a result of work operations off-site at a legal site in accordance with all applicable federal, state, and local laws and regulations. a. Removed vegetation will not be allowed to remain in piles or mounds on the easement or surrounding property. 7. Handle materials in a controlled manner with as few handlings as possible. 8. Thoroughly clean, sweep, wash and polish all Work and equipment associated with this project. 9. Remove all signs of temporary construction and activities incidental to construction of required permanent Work. 10. If project is not cleaned to the satisfaction of the City, the City reserves the right to have the cleaning completed at the expense of the Contractor. 11. Do not burn on-site. B. Intermediate Cleaning during Construction 1. Keep Work areas clean so as not to hinder health, safety or convenience of personnel in existing facility operations. 2. At maximum weekly intervals, dispose of waste materials, debris and rubbish. 3. Confine construction debris daily in strategically located container(s): a. Cover to prevent blowing by wind b. Store debris away from construction or operational activities c. Haul from site at a minimum of once per week 4. Vacuum clean interior areas when ready to receive finish painting. a. Continue vacuum cleaning on an as-needed basis, until Final Acceptance. 5. Prior to storm events, thoroughly clean site of all loose or unsecured items, which may become airborne or transported by flowing water during the storm. C. Interior Final Cleaning 1. Remove grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, labels and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces. 2. Wipe all lighting fixture reflectors, lenses, lamps and trims clean. 3. Wash and shine glazing and mirrors. 4. Polish glossy surfaces to a clear shine. 5. Ventilating systems a. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters if units were operated during construction. Cleaning 01 74 23 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 6. Replace all burned out lamps. 7. Broom clean process area floors. 8. Mop office and control room floors. D. Exterior (Site or Right of Way) Final Cleaning 1. Remove trash and debris containers from site. a. Re-seed areas disturbed by location of trash and debris containers. 2. Sweep roadway to remove all rocks, pieces of asphalt, concrete or any other object that may hinder or disrupt the flow of traffic along the roadway. 3. Clean any interior areas including, but not limited to, vaults, manholes, structures, junction boxes and inlets. 4. If no longer required for maintenance of erosion facilities, and upon approval by City, remove erosion control from site. 5. Clean signs, lights, signals, etc. 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Starting and Adjusting 01 75 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 75 00 STARTING AND ADJUSTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide step-by-step procedures for starting provided systems, including equipment, pumps, and processes. B. Provide pre-startup inspections by equipment manufacturers. C. Place each system in service and operate the system to prove performance and to provide for initial correction of defects in workmanship, calibration, and operation. D. Provide for initial maintenance and operation. E. Include costs for starting and adjusting provided by manufacturer’s representative in the Cost of Work for the equipment package. F. Owner will provide chemicals, if any, required for continued operations. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Comply with the specified standards associated with the testing or startup of equipment. 1.03 DOCUMENTATION A. Provide the following documents in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittals”: 1. A Plan of Action for testing, checking, and starting equipment as Product Data. 2. Equipment Installation Reports on the form provided by the City certifying that the equipment and related appurtenances have been thoroughly examined and approved for startup and operation. 3. Operation and maintenance manuals per Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data.” Preliminary operation and maintenance data must be approved before installation, testing, and initial operation of equipment or providing training required by Section 01 79 00 “Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel.” 1.04 SPECIAL JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not start or test any equipment until the complete unit has been installed and thoroughly checked. B. Provide the services of a qualified representative of the manufacturer to attend the tests and startup procedures as required by this Section. C. Do not start or test any equipment until the preliminary operation and maintenance manual per Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data” has been approved. Starting and Adjusting 01 75 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TESTING INSTRUMENTATION A. Provide new instrumentation and testing devices needed to conduct tests for maintenance and operation as recommended in the operation and maintenance manuals. This equipment is to become the property of the Owner and transferred in good working order as a spare part at Substantial Completion. This equipment is to be calibrated and ready for use during the startup procedure and for training provided in accordance with Section 01 79 00 “Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel.” 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER’S REPRESENTATIVES A. Provide the services of experienced and technically competent representatives of the manufacturer for inspections, tests, supervision of installation, training, and assistance with placing equipment in operation. B. Perform installation, adjustment, and testing of the equipment under the direct supervision of the manufacturer’s representative where specified. Certify that the equipment and related appurtenances have been thoroughly examined and approved for startup and operation in the Equipment Installation Reports. C. Provide on-site services as necessary for proper and trouble free operation of the equipment. 3.02 INSPECTION AND STARTUP A. Inspect equipment prior to placing any equipment or system into operation. Make adjustments as necessary for proper operation. Do not start or test any apparatus until the complete unit has been installed and thoroughly checked. 1. Check for adequate and proper lubrication. 2. Determine that parts or components are free from undue stress from structural members, piping, or anchorage. 3. Adjust equipment for proper balance and operations. 4. Determine that vibrations are within acceptable limits. 5. Determine that equipment operates properly under full load conditions. 6. Determine that the equipment is in true alignment. 7. Ensure that the proper procedure is employed in startup of systems. 3.03 STARTING REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to the individual Specification Sections for specific startup procedures or other requirements. Starting and Adjusting 01 75 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3.04 INITIAL OPERATION A. Start, test, and place equipment and systems into operation for 30 days to allow the City to observe the operation and overall performance of the equipment and to determine that controls function as intended. B. Operate equipment which is used on a limited or part-time basis in the presence of the City for a period long enough to demonstrate that controls function as specified. C. Perform acceptance test as specified in individual Specification Sections. Demonstrate that equipment and systems meet the specified performance criteria. D. Equipment and systems may be considered as substantially complete at the end of this initial operation period if the equipment is placed in continuous beneficial use by the Owner, unless specifically stated otherwise in the individual equipment Specifications. 3.05 INITIAL MAINTENANCE A. Maintain equipment in accordance with the operation and maintenance manuals until Project is substantially complete and provisions have been made by the Owner for accepting responsibility for equipment operation in accordance with the General Conditions. B. Service equipment in accordance with the operation and maintenance manuals immediately before releasing the equipment to the Owner. END OF SECTION Closeout Requirements 01 77 19 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 77 19 CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. The procedure for closing out a contract B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Guarantees, Bonds and Affidavits 1. No application for final payment will be accepted until all guarantees, bonds, certificates, licenses and affidavits required for Work or equipment as specified are satisfactorily filed with the City. B. Release of Liens or Claims 1. No application for final payment will be accepted until satisfactory evidence of release of liens has been submitted to the City. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit all required documentation to Project Manager. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.02 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] Closeout Requirements 01 77 19 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3.03 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.04 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE A. Prior to requesting Final Inspection, submit: 1. Project Record Documents in accordance with Section 01 78 39 2. Operation and Maintenance Data, if required, in accordance with Section 01 78 23 B. Prior to requesting Final Inspection, perform final cleaning in accordance with Section 01 74 23. C. Final Inspection 1. After final cleaning, provide notice to the Project Manager and their duly appointed representative that the Work is completed. a. City reserves the right to deny request for Final Inspection if City determines that the entire Work is not sufficiently complete to warrant a Final Inspection b. The City will make an initial Final Inspection with the Contractor present. c. Upon completion of this inspection, the City will notify the Contractor, in writing within 10 business days, of any particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is defective or incomplete. 2. Upon receiving written notice from the City, immediately undertake the Work required to remedy deficiencies and complete the Work to the satisfaction of the City. 3. Upon completion of Work associated with the items listed in the City's written notice, inform the City, that the required Work has been completed. Upon receipt of this notice, the City, in the presence of the Contractor, will make a subsequent Final Inspection of the project. 4. Provide all special accessories required to place each item of equipment in full operation. These special accessory items include, but are not limited to: a. Specified spare parts b. Adequate oil and grease as required for the first lubrication of the equipment c. Initial fill up of all chemical tanks and fuel tanks d. Light bulbs e. Fuses f. Vault keys g. Handwheels h. Other expendable items as required for initial start-up and operation of all equipment Closeout Requirements 01 77 19 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements D. Notice of Project Completion 1. Once the City Project Representative finds the Work subsequent to Final Inspection to be satisfactory, the City will issue a Notice of Project Completion. E. Supporting Documentation 1. Coordinate with the City Project Representative to complete the following additional forms: a. Final Payment Request b. Statement of Contract Time c. Affidavit of Payment and Release of Liens d. Consent of Surety to Final Payment F. Letter of Final Acceptance 1. Upon review and acceptance of Notice of Project Completion and Supporting Documentation, in accordance with General Conditions, City will issue Letter of Final Acceptance and release the Final Payment Request for payment. 3.05 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.07 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.09 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Product data and related information appropriate for City's maintenance and operation of products furnished under Contract 2. Such products may include, but are not limited to: a. Valves and Actuators b. Chemical Feed Equipment c. Pumps d. Electrical Equipment e. HVAC Equipment B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Schedule 1. Submit manuals in final form to the City within 30 calendar days of product shipment to the project site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00. All submittals shall be approved by the City prior to delivery. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Form 1. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by City personnel. Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2. Format a. Size: 8 ½ inches x 11 inches b. Paper 1). 40 pound minimum, white, for typed pages 2). Holes reinforced with plastic, cloth or metal c. Text: Manufacturer’s printed data, or neatly typewritten d. Drawings 1). Provide reinforced punched binder tab, bind in with text 2). Reduce larger drawings and fold to size of text pages. e. Provide fly-leaf for each separate product, or each piece of operating equipment. 1). Provide typed description of product, and major component parts of equipment. 2). Provide indexed tabs. f. Cover 1). Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS". 2). List: a). Title of Project b). Identity of separate structure as applicable c). Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual 3. Binders a. Commercial quality 3-ring binders with durable and cleanable plastic covers b. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related consistent groupings. 4. If available, provide an electronic form of the O&M Manual. B. Manual Content 1. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic order a. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone number b. A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume c. List, with each product: 1). The name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor or installer Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2). A list of each product required to be included, indexed to content of the volume 3). Identify area of responsibility of each 4). Local source of supply for parts and replacement d. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set forth in Contract Documents. 2. Product Data a. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. b. Annotate each sheet to: 1). Clearly identify specific product or part installed 2). Clearly identify data applicable to installation 3). Delete references to inapplicable information 3. Drawings a. Supplement product data with drawings as necessary to clearly illustrate: 1). Relations of component parts of equipment and systems 2). Control and flow diagrams b. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to assure correct illustration of completed installation. c. Do not use Project Record Drawings as maintenance drawings. 4. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular installation: a. Organize in consistent format under separate headings for different procedures. b. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. 5. Copy of each warranty, bond and service contract issued a. Provide information sheet for City personnel giving: 1). Proper procedures in event of failure 2). Instances which might affect validity of warranties or bonds C. Manual for Materials and Finishes 1. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form. 2. Content, for architectural products, applied materials and finishes: a. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products 1). Catalog number, size, composition 2). Color and texture designations 3). Information required for reordering special manufactured products Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements b. Instructions for care and maintenance 1). Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and methods 2). Cautions against cleaning agents and methods which are detrimental to product 3). Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance 3. Content, for moisture protection and weather exposure products: a. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products 1). Applicable standards 2). Chemical composition 3). Details of installation b. Instructions for inspection, maintenance and repair D. Manual for Equipment and Systems 1. Submit 5 copies of complete manual in final form. 2. Content, for each unit of equipment and system, as appropriate: a. Description of unit and component parts 1). Function, normal operating characteristics and limiting conditions 2). Performance curves, engineering data and tests 3). Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts b. Operating procedures 1). Start-up, break-in, routine and normal operating instructions 2). Regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions 3). Summer and winter operating instructions 4). Special operating instructions c. Maintenance procedures 1). Routine operations 2). Guide to "trouble shooting" 3). Disassembly, repair and reassembly 4). Alignment, adjusting and checking d. Servicing and lubrication schedule 1). List of lubricants required e. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions f. Description of sequence of operation by control manufacturer 1). Predicted life of parts subject to wear Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 2). Items recommended to be stocked as spare parts g. As installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer h. Each contractor's coordination drawings 1). As installed color coded piping diagrams i. Charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve j. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage k. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications 3. Content, for each electric and electronic system, as appropriate: a. Description of system and component parts 1). Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions 2). Performance curves, engineering data and tests 3). Complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts b. Circuit directories of panelboards 1). Electrical service 2). Controls 3). Communications c. As installed color coded wiring diagrams d. Operating procedures 1). Routine and normal operating instructions 2). Sequences required 3). Special operating instructions e. Maintenance procedures 1). Routine operations 2). Guide to "trouble shooting" 3). Disassembly, repair and reassembly 4). Adjustment and checking f. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions g. List of original manufacturer's spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage h. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of Specifications 4. Prepare and include additional data when the need for such data becomes apparent during instruction of City's personnel. 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] Operation and Maintenance Data 01 78 23 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide operation and maintenance data by personnel with the following criteria: 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described products 2. Skilled as technical writer to the extent required to communicate essential data 3. Skilled as draftsman competent to prepare required drawings 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING [NOT USED] 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 78 39 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work associated with documenting the project and recording changes to project documents, including: a. Record Drawings B. Deviations from this City of Denton Standard Specification 1. None. C. Related Specification Sections include, but are not necessarily limited to: 1. Division 0 – Bidding Requirements, Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract 2. Division 1 – General Requirements 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Work associated with this Item is considered incidental to the various Items bid. No separate payment will be allowed for this Item. 1.03 REFERENCES [NOT USED] 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS [NOT USED] 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to submitting a request for Final Inspection, deliver Project Record Documents to Project Manager. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS/INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS [NOT USED] 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Accuracy of Records 1. Thoroughly coordinate changes within the Record Documents, making adequate and proper entries on each page of Specifications and each sheet of Drawings and other Documents where such entry is required to show the change properly. 2. Accuracy of records shall be such that future search for items shown in the Contract Documents may rely reasonably on information obtained from the approved Project Record Documents. Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3. To facilitate accuracy of records, make entries within 24 hours after receipt of information that the change has occurred. 4. Provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation and examination. 1.10 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Handling Requirements 1. Maintain the job set of Record Documents, which shall include the Drawings and the Project Manual, completely protected from deterioration and from loss and damage until completion of the Work and transfer of all recorded data to the final Project Record Documents. 2. In the event of loss of recorded data, use means necessary to again secure the data to the City's approval. a. In such case, provide replacements to the standards originally required by the Contract Documents. 1.11 FIELD [SITE] CONDITIONS [NOT USED] 1.12 WARRANTY [NOT USED] 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 OWNER-FURNISHED [OR] OWNER-SUPPLIED PRODUCTS [NOT USED] 2.02 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Job set 1. Promptly following receipt of the Notice to Proceed, secure from the City, at no charge to the Contractor, 1 complete set of all Documents comprising the Contract. B. Final Record Documents 1. At a time nearing the completion of the Work and prior to Final Inspection, provide the City 1 complete set of all Final Record Drawings in the Contract. 2.03 ACCESSORIES [NOT USED] 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLERS [NOT USED] 3.02 EXAMINATION [NOT USED] 3.03 PREPARATION [NOT USED] 3.04 MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTS Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements A. Maintenance of Job Set 1. Immediately upon receipt of the job set, identify each of the Documents with the title, "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET". The Job set shall include the Drawings and the Project Manual. 2. Preservation a. Considering the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions upon which the job set must be taken out for new entries and for examination, and the conditions under which these activities will be performed, devise a suitable method for protecting the job set. b. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by the City, until start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents. c. Maintain the job set at the site of work. 3. Coordination with Construction Survey a. At a minimum, in accordance with the intervals set forth in Section 01 71 23, clearly mark any deviations from Contract Documents associated with installation of the infrastructure. 4. Making entries on Drawings and Specifications a. Record any deviations from Contract Documents on Drawings and in the Specifications if applicable. b. Use an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe the change by graphic line and note as required. c. Date all entries. d. Call attention to the entry by a "cloud" drawn around the area or areas affected. e. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes. 5. Conversion of schematic layouts a. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout. 1). Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the City's approval. 2). However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items which are shown only schematically on the Drawings. b. Show on the job set of Record Drawings, by dimension accurate to within 1 inch, the centerline of each run of items. Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 1). Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the City's approval. 2). Show, by symbol or note, the vertical location of the Item ("under slab", "in ceiling plenum", "exposed", and the like). 3). Make all identification sufficiently descriptive that it may be related reliably to the Specifications. c. The City may waive the requirements for conversion of schematic layouts where, in the City's judgment, conversion serves no useful purpose. However, do not rely upon waivers being issued except as specifically issued in writing by the City. B. Final Project Record Documents 1. Transfer of data to Drawings and Specifications a. Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings and Project Manual if applicable, to the corresponding final documents, coordinating the changes as required. b. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other Drawing a full description of changes made during construction, and the actual location of items. c. Call attention to each entry by drawing a "cloud" around the area or areas affected. d. Make changes neatly, consistently and with the proper media to assure longevity and clear reproduction. 2. Transfer of data to other Documents a. If the Documents, other than Drawings, have been kept clean during progress of the Work, and if entries thereon have been orderly to the approval of the City, the job set of those Documents, other than Drawings, will be accepted as final Record Documents. b. If any such Document is not so approved by the City, secure a new copy of that Document from the City at the City's usual charge for reproduction and handling, and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy to the approval of the City. 3.05 REPAIR / RESTORATION [NOT USED] 3.06 RE-INSTALLATION [NOT USED] 3.07 FIELD [OR] SITE QUALITY CONTROL [NOT USED] 3.08 SYSTEM STARTUP [NOT USED] 3.09 ADJUSTING [NOT USED] 3.10 CLEANING [NOT USED] 3.11 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES [NOT USED] Project Record Documents 01 78 39 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3.12 PROTECTION [NOT USED] 3.13 MAINTENANCE [NOT USED] 3.14 ATTACHMENTS [NOT USED] END OF SECTION Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel 01 79 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 01 79 00 TRAINING OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide services of Supplier’s operation and maintenance training specialists to instruct Owner’s personnel in recommended operation and maintenance procedures for equipment furnished. Details for training may be established in the specifications for that equipment. B. Provide a combination of classroom and hands on training. C. Training may be conducted at Contractor’s or Supplier’s facilities provided Contractor pays for travel, lodging, and per diem costs of the Owner. D. Record training sessions on video and submit to the Owner on DVD disk in MPEG-4 format for Owner’s later use in instructing Owner’s personnel. Include this recording as part of the final operation and maintenance manual. Provide legal releases or pay additional fees required to allow training by the manufacturer to be recorded. E. Include the cost for training and startup in the Cost of the Work for each equipment package. 1.02 DOCUMENTATION A. Provide documentation in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittals” and include: 1. Equipment Installation Reports in accordance with Section 01 75 00 “Starting and Adjusting” on forms provided by the Project Manager; 2. A lesson plan for training in accordance with Paragraph 3.01.C; 3. Credentials of Supplier’s proposed operation and maintenance instructors demonstrating compliance with requirements of Paragraph 1.04; and 4. Operation and maintenance manuals per Section 01 78 23 “Operation and Maintenance Data.” Preliminary operation and maintenance data must be approved before installation, testing, and initial operation of equipment or providing training required by the Section. 1.03 SCHEDULING OF TRAINING A. Coordinate training services with startup and initial operation of equipment on days and times Owner is available. B. Training may be required outside of normal business hours to accommodate schedules of operation and maintenance personnel. C. Provide training of Owner’s personnel after acceptable preliminary operation and maintenance manuals have been approved. D. Coordinate training with equipment startup and testing and availability of Owner’s personnel. E. Provide a proposed training schedule for review and acceptance by City showing all training required in the Contract Documents. Demonstrate compliance with specified training Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel 01 79 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements requirements relative to number of hours of training, number of training sessions, and scheduling. F. Submit initial training schedule at least 60 days before scheduled start of first training session. Submit final training schedule, incorporating revisions in accordance with City’s comments, no later than 30 days prior to starting the first training session. G. Owner reserves the right to modify personnel availability for training in accordance with process or emergency needs. H. Schedule for training is to be approved by Owner. 1. Schedule training and startup operations for no more than one piece of equipment or system at a time. 2. Owner may require re-scheduling of training if operations personnel are not available for training on a scheduled date. 3. Provide a minimum of 2 weeks’ notice if training must be rescheduled. 4. Training is to be limited to 24 hours per week. 5. Time required for training is to be included in the development of the Project schedule. I. Schedule and coordinate training for equipment or systems which depend upon other equipment or systems for proper operation so that trainees can be made familiar with the operation and maintenance of the entire operating system. 1.04 SERVICES OF SUPPLIER’S REPRESENTATIVE A. Supplier’s instructors must be factory-trained by the equipment manufacturer. B. Instructors must have knowledge of the theory of operation and practical experience with the equipment or system. C. Instructors must be proficient and experienced in conducting training of the type required and must have successfully conducted similar training courses. D. Qualifications of instructors are subject to acceptance by City. Provide services of replacement instructor with acceptable qualifications if City does not accept qualifications of proposed instructor. Include each instructor’s résumé and specific details of instructor’s operating, maintenance, and training experience relative to the specific equipment for which instructor will provide training to demonstrate their qualifications. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 OPERATOR TRAINING A. Provide classroom and hands-on training of the care and operation of the equipment to the Owner’s personnel. Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel 01 79 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements B. Provide training in adequate detail to ensure that the trainees who complete the program will be qualified and capable of operating and maintaining the equipment, products, and systems provided. C. Provide a training plan that indicates the schedule and sequence of the training programs. The training plan is to include for each course: 1. Number of hours for the course; 2. Agenda and narrative description, including the defined objectives for each lesson; 3. Draft copy of training handbooks; 4. A descriptive listing of suggested reference publications; 5. Audio-visual equipment required for training; and 6. Type and number of tools or test equipment required for each training session. D. Provide and use training aids to complement the instruction and enhance learning. 1. Provide training handbooks for use in both the classroom and the hands-on phases of training for each course. 2. Instructional materials must include references to the operation and maintenance manuals and identify and explain the use of the manual. 3. Provide a copy of all audio/visual training materials used in the presentations to the Owner. E. Operations training is to include: 1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem configuration and operation; 2. Terminology, nomenclature, and display symbols; 3. Operations theory; 4. Equipment appearance, functions, concepts, and operation; 5. Operating modes, practices, and procedures under normal, diminished, and emergency conditions; 6. Startup and shutdown procedures; 7. Safety precautions; 8. On-the-job operating experience for monitoring functions, supervisory, or command activities. Include functions and activities associated with diminished operating modes, failure recognition, and responses to system/subsystem and recovery procedures; and 9. Content and use of operation and maintenance manuals and related reference materials. F. Provide training for performing on-site routine, preventive, and remedial maintenance of the equipment or system. Maintenance training is to include: 1. Orientation to provide an overview of system/subsystem concept, configuration, and operation; 2. Operations theory and interfaces; Training of Operation and Maintenance Personnel 01 79 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville WTP Phase II Improvements 3. Instructions necessary to ensure a basic theoretical and practical understanding of equipment appearance, layout, and functions; 4. Safety precautions; 5. Use of standard and special tools and test equipment; 6. Adjustment, calibration, and use of related test equipment; 7. Detailed preventive maintenance activities; 8. Troubleshooting, diagnostics, and testing; 9. Equipment assembly and disassembly; 10. Repair and parts replacement; 11. Parts ordering practices and storage; 12. Failure and recovery procedures; 13. Cabling and/or interface connectors; 14. Content and use of operation and maintenance manuals and related reference materials; 15. Procedures for warranty repairs; 16. Lubrication; and 17. Procedures, practices, documentation, and materials required to commence system maintenance. G. Provide training for the equipment listed in the table below. The table indicates the minimum acceptable training time. Provide additional hours of training if required to meet the training objectives described in this Section. Specification Section Equipment/System Description Min. Hours 43 21 13.16 Centrifugal Magnetic Drive Sealless End Suction Pumps 8 46 33 44 Skid Mounted Peristaltic Metering Pumps 8 46 35 11 Copper Ion Solution Generator 8 46 36 11.16 Liquid Polymer Feed System 8 END OF SECTION Concrete Forming 03 11 00 - 1 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish material and labor to form, tie, brace and support wet concrete, reinforcing steel and embedded items until the concrete has developed sufficient strength to remove forms. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: Forms shall be designed for the pressure exerted by a liquid weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot. The rate of placing the concrete, the temperature of the concrete, and all other pertinent factors shall be taken into consideration when determining the depth of the equivalent liquid. An additional design live load of 50 pounds per square foot shall be used on horizontal surfaces. B. Alignment Control: 1. True alignment of walls and other vertical surfaces having straight lines or rectangular shapes shall be controlled and checked by the following procedures: a. Forming shall be arranged with provisions for adjusting the horizontal alignment of a form, after the form has been filled with concrete to grade, using wedges, turn buckles, or other adjustment methods. Establish a transit line or other reference so that adjustments can be made to an established line while the concrete in the top of the form is still plastic. b. Adjusting facilities shall be at intervals which permit adjustments to a straight line. Concrete shall not be placed until adequate adjusting facilities are in place. C. Tolerances: Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Record Data. a. Manufacturers’ literature for specified products. 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Specifications: ACI 117 Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete Concrete Forming 03 11 00 - 2 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 2. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Publication: a. AISC Manual of Steel Construction. 3. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Publication: a. AISI Cold Formed Steel Design Manual. 4. American Plywood Association (APA) Standards: a. APA Design/Construction Guide: Concrete Forming. 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Lumber for forms shall be stacked neatly on platforms raised above ground. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer upon completion of various portions of the work required for placing concrete so that compliance with the plans and specifications may be monitored. The Engineer will authorize the Contractor to proceed with the placement after this has been completed and corrections, if required, have been made. B. In hot weather, both sides of the face forms may be required to be treated with oil to prevent warping and to secure tight joints. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber: Properly seasoned and of good quality; free from loose or unsound knots, knot holes, twists, shakes, decay, splits, and other imperfections which would affect its strength or impair the finished surface of the concrete. B. Fiber Board Form Lining: Hardboard finished smooth on one side; minimum thickness of 3/16 inch thoroughly wet with water at least 12 hours before using. C. Plywood Form Lining: Conforming to APA HDO; exterior exposure waterproof adhesive, 3/8 inch thick. D. Form Oil: Light, clear oil; shall not discolor or injuriously affect the concrete surface, subsequent coatings, or delay or impair curing operations. 2.02 FABRICATIONS A. Lumber: Lumber for facing or sheathing shall be surfaced on at least one side and two edges, and sized to uniform thickness. Lumber of nominal 1-inch thickness or plywood of 3/4-inch thickness shall be permitted for general use on structures, if backed by a sufficient number of studs and wales. Concrete Forming 03 11 00 - 3 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 B. Special Form Lumber: 1. Molding for chamfer strips or other uses shall be made of redwood, cypress, or pine materials of a grade that will not split when nailed, and which can be maintained to a true line without warping. The form shall be mill cut and dressed on all faces. Fillet forms at sharp corners, both inside and outside and at edges, with triangular chamfer strips at all non-contiguous edges exposed to view. Thoroughly oil chamfer strips before installation on forms. 2. Construct forms for railings and ornamental work to standards equivalent to first class mill work. 3. All moldings, panel work, and bevel strips shall be straight and true with neatly mitered joints, and designed so that the finished work shall be true, sharp and clean cut. C. Forms: 1. Forms shall be built mortar tight and of material sufficient in strength to prevent bulging between supports. 2. Reused forms or form lumber shall be maintained clean and in good condition as to accuracy, shape, strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. 3. All forms shall be so constructed as to permit removal without damage to the concrete. Exercise special care in framing forms for copings, offsets, railing and ornamental work, so that there will be no damage to the concrete when the forms are removed. D. Carton Forms: 1. Use new carton forms of corrugated cardboard for slab and grade beam construction on drilled shafts for buildings. Forms shall be impregnated throughout with paraffin and laminated with water resistant adhesive. 2. Forms of the height indicated on the drawings shall be designed to support the concrete load plus a normal construction load. 3. Install carton forms according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and maintain in dry condition before concrete is placed. Carton forms which have not been maintained in a dry condition shall be replaced before concrete is placed. 4. Do not used trapezoidal carton forms. 5. Carton forms shall be fabricated using vertical internal cells and dividers. 6. Acceptable manufacturers: a. SureVoid Products, Inc., Englewood, CO (800) 458-5444. b. Savway Carton Forms, Inc., Irving TX (800) 552-6937. c. Other manufacturers with products meeting the requirements of this specification and approved by the Engineer. E. Metal Forms: 1. The specifications for “Forms” regarding design, mortar tightness, filleted corners, beveled projections, bracing, alignment, removal, re use, oiling, and wetting shall apply equally to metal forms. Concrete Forming 03 11 00 - 4 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 2. The metal used for forms shall be of such thickness that the forms will remain true to shape. Bolt and rivet heads on the facing sides shall be countersunk. Clamps, pins, or other connecting devices shall be designed to hold the forms rigidly together and to allow removal without injury to the concrete. 3. Metal forms which do not present a smooth surface or line up properly shall not be used. Exercise special care to keep metal free from rust, grease, or other foreign material that discolors the concrete. F. Form Linings: 1. Timber forms for exposed concrete surfaces which are to be given a rubbed finish shall be face-lined with an approved type of form lining material. 2. If plywood is used for form lining, it shall be made with waterproof adhesive and have a minimum thickness of 3/4 inch. It shall preferably be oiled at the mill and then re-oiled or lacquered on the job before using. 3. If fiber board is used, apply water to the screen side on the board. Stack the boards screen side to screen side. Use the smooth hard face as the contact surface of the form. Such surfaces may be formed with 3/4-inch thick plywood made with waterproof adhesive if backed with adequate studs and wales. The greatest strength of the outer plies should be at right angles to the studding. In this case, form lining will not be required. 4. Carefully align edges and faces of adjacent panels and fill the joints between panels with patching plaster or cold water putty to prevent leakage. Lightly sand with No. 0 sandpaper to make the joints smooth. 5. Forms which are reused shall have all unused form tie holes filled and smoothed as specified above. G. Form Ties: 1. Metal form ties shall be used to hold forms in place and to provide easy metal removal. The use of wire for ties shall not be permitted. 2. Leave no metal or other material within 1-1/2 inches of the surface, when removing form tie assemblies which are used inside the forms to hold the forms in correct alignment. The assembly shall provide cone-shaped depressions in the concrete surface at least 1 inch in diameter and 1-1/2 inches deep to allow filling and patching. Such devices, when removed, shall leave a smooth depression in the concrete surface without undue injury to the surface from chipping or spalling. 3. Burning off rods, bolts, or ties shall not be permitted. 4. Metal ties shall be held in place by devices attached to wales. Each device shall be capable of developing the strength of the tie. 5. Metal and wooden spreaders which are separate from the forms shall be wired to top of form and shall be entirely removed as the concrete is placed. 6. In the construction of basement or water bearing walls, the portion of a single rod tie that is to remain in the concrete shall be provided with a tightly fitted washer at midpoint to control seepage. Multi-rod ties do not require washers. The use of form Concrete Forming 03 11 00 - 5 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 ties which are tapered on encased in paper or other material to allow the removal of complete tie, and which leave a hole through the concrete structure, shall not be permitted. H. Falsework: 1. Falsework shall be designed and constructed so that no excessive settlement or deformation occurs. Falsework shall provide necessary rigidity. 2. Timber used in falsework centering shall be sound, in good condition and free from defects which impair its strength. 3. Steel members shall be of adequate strength and shape for the intended purpose. 4. Timber piling used in falsework may be of any wood species which satisfactorily withstands driving and which adequately supports the superimposed load. 5. When sills or timber grillages are used to support falsework columns, unless founded on solid rock, shale or other hard materials, place them in excavated pits. Backfill to prevent the softening of the supporting material from form drip or from rains that may occur during the construction process. Sills or grillages shall be of ample size to support the superimposed load without settlement. 6. Falsework not founded on a satisfactory spread footing shall be supported on piling, which shall be driven to a bearing capacity to support the superimposed load without settlement. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Before placing concrete, insure that embedded items are correctly, firmly and securely fastened into place. Embedded items shall be thoroughly clean and free of oil and other foreign material. Anchor bolts shall be set to the correct location, alignment and elevation by the use of suitable anchor bolt templates. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Pre-Placement: 1. During the elapsed time between building the forms and placing the concrete, maintain the forms to eliminate warping and shrinking. 2. Treat the facing of forms with suitable form oil before concrete is placed. Apply oil before the reinforcement is placed. Wet form surfaces which will come in contact with the concrete immediately before the concrete is placed. 3. At the time of placing concrete, the forms shall be clean and entirely free from all chips, dirt, sawdust, and other extraneous matter at the time. Forms for slab, beam and girder construction shall not have tie wire cuttings, nails or any other matter which would mar the appearance of the finished construction. Clean forms and keep them free of foreign matter during concrete placement. Concrete Forming 03 11 00 - 6 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 B. Placement: 1. Set and maintain forms to the lines designated, until the concrete is sufficiently hardened to permit form removal. If, at any stage of the work, the forms show signs of bulging or sagging, immediately remove that portion of the concrete causing this condition. If necessary, reset the forms and securely brace against further movement. 2. Provide adequate cleanout openings where access to the bottom of the forms is not otherwise readily attainable. 3. Carefully and accurately place and support reinforcement in concrete structures. C. Removal: Remove forms so that the underlying concrete surface is not marred or damaged in any way. Forms shall not be removed until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to safely carry the dead load, but in no case less than the number of curing days set forth in the following table: Forms for concrete of minor structural load carrying importance 1 day Forms for walls, columns, sides of drilled shafts, massive structural components and other members not resisting a bending moment during curing 1 day Forms and falsework under slabs, beams and girders where deflections due to dead load moment may exist (for spans < or = 10 feet) 7 days Forms and falsework under slabs, beams and girders where deflections due to dead load moment may exist (for spans > 10 feet and < or = 20 feet) 14 days D. Carton Forms: 1. Do not wrap carton forms in waterproof sheeting. 2. All flat carton forms for beams and slabs shall be protected by a 1/4-inch exterior hardboard siding or cementitious tile backer board placed on top of the forms. 3. Carton forms shall be fit neatly together. To correctly form the circular edge of drilled shafts, use manufactured fittings or cut neatly to fit and fill small voids with expanding urethane foam. END OF SECTION Reinforcing Steel 03 21 00 - 1 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 03 21 00 REINFORCING STEEL 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Furnish labor and reinforcing materials required to cut, bend, tie, splice, place and support the reinforcement in the material grades, sizes, quantities and locations specified. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Tolerances: 1. Reinforcement shall be placed where specified, with the following maximum tolerances, plus or minus: a. Concrete Cover: 1/4 inch. b. Rebar Spacing: 1/4 inch in 12 inches. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings: Reinforcing bar layout drawing with bar lists clearly marked and referenced to the Drawings. 2. Record Data: a. Manufacturers’ literature for specified products. 3. Certified Test Reports: a. Certification of steel quality, size, grade and manufacturer’s origin. 1.04 STANDARDS A. The applicable provisions of the following standards shall apply as if written here in their entirety: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete ASTM A615 Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publications: ACI 301 Specification for Structural Concrete ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete Reinforcing Steel 03 21 00 - 2 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Publications: CRSI Manual of Standard Practice 1.05 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Store steel reinforcement above the surface of the ground upon platform skids or other supports. Protect from mechanical and chemical injury and surface deterioration caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the Work, steel reinforcement shall be free from dirt, scale, dust, paint, oil and other foreign material. Tag and store steel reinforcement for ease of correlation with Shop Drawings. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Proposed deviations from reinforcing indicated on the Drawings or Specifications shall be approved in writing by the Engineer prior to fabrication. B. Lap lengths shall be of the length shown on the Drawings or noted in lap and embedment table, and shall be in compliance with ACI 318. C. Specified cover for reinforcing shall be maintained throughout construction. Bars shall be cut to lengths necessary to allow for proper clearances. Cover of concrete shall be measured from face of forms to outside face of reinforcement. D. Stirrups shall be hooked. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Billet-Steel bars for concrete reinforcement conforming to ASTM A615; Grade 60, with minimum yield strength of 60,000 psi. Steel reinforcing bars shall be produced in the United States of America. B. Welded Wire Fabric: Cold-drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM A1064; flat sheets fabricated in accordance with ASTM A1064. C. Supports (Chairs): Bar supports shall be of the proper type for the intended use. Bar supports shall be uniform high density polyethylene (plastic) or fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) conforming to CRSI Class 1, Maximum Protection. D. Spacers: Precast mortar blocks with a 28-day compressive strength that is greater than the specified concrete strength in which the blocks are being placed. E. Mechanical Bar Splices: Cadweld splices as manufactured by Erico Products, Inc., or approved equal, installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. The mechanical devices shall develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield of the spliced bars. F. Mechanical Threaded Splices: Mechanical threaded connections shall utilize a metal coupling sleeve with internal threads which engage threaded ends of the bars to be spliced and shall develop in tension or compression 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the bar. Reinforcing Steel 03 21 00 - 3 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 2.02 FABRICATIONS A. Bending: Reinforcement shall be bent cold by machine to shapes indicated on the Drawings; true to shapes indicated; irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection. Unless otherwise noted, all hook and bend details and tolerances shall conform to the requirements of ACI SP-66 and ACI 318. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Before any concrete is placed, all mortar blocks to be used for holding steel in position adjacent to formed surfaces shall be cast in individual molds, after which time the blocks shall be immersed in water for the remainder of at least a 4-day curing period. The blocks shall be cast with the sides beveled and in such a manner that the size of the block increases away from the surface to be placed against the forms. Blocks shall be in the form of a frustum of a cone or pyramid. Suitable tie wires shall be provided in each block for anchoring the block to the reinforcing steel, and to avoid displacement when placing the concrete. The size of the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall not exceed 2-1/2 inches square or the equivalent thereof when circular or rectangular areas are provided. Blocks shall be accurately cast to the thickness required, and the surface to be placed adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane free of surface imperfections. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Place the reinforcement carefully and accurately in the concrete structures. Rigidly tie and support the reinforcement. Welding of any type of reinforcement shall not be permitted. B. Splices: 1. Splicing of bars, except where indicated on the Drawings, shall not be permitted unless approved by the Engineer prior to fabrication. Splices shall be kept to a minimum. Splices shall preferably occur at points of minimum stress. Lap splices which are permitted shall have a lap in accordance with ACI 318. Rigidly clamp or wire the bars at all splices, in accordance with ACI. Overlap sheets of wire fabric sufficiently to maintain a uniform strength and securely fasten. 2. Welding of reinforcing steel splices shall not be permitted. 3. Make mechanical splices where shown on the Drawings using Cadweld splices or approved equal, installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations. The mechanical device shall develop at least 125 percent of the specified yield strength of the bar. C. Placement: 1. Place steel reinforcement, as indicated on the Drawings with the specified tolerances. Hold securely in place during the placing of the concrete. The minimum clear distance between bars shall be per ACI 318 unless noted otherwise. Always pass vertical stirrups around the main tension members and securely attach thereto. Wire reinforcing together at a sufficient number of intersections to produce a sound, sturdy mat or cage Reinforcing Steel 03 21 00 - 4 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 of reinforcement that will maintain the reinforcement in correct positions when the concrete is placed. 2. Hold the reinforcing steel in concrete slabs firmly in place with wire supports or “chairs.” Sizing and spacing of the chairs shall be sufficient to properly support the steel, and shall be in accordance with CRSI Publications “Manual of Standard Practice in.” 3. Space the reinforcing steel in concrete walls the proper distance from the face of the forms, as indicated on the Drawings: a. For wall surfaces exposed to view, use chairs. b. For wall surfaces not exposed to view, use chairs or precast mortar blocks. 4. Where reinforcing conflicts with location of anchor bolts, inserts, etc., submit prompt notifications so that revisions can be made before concrete is placed. No cutting of reinforcing shall be permitted without the prior approval of the Engineer. 5. Welded wire shall be fabricated flat sheets, in longest practical lengths. Lap joints one mesh. Do not locate end laps over beams of continuous structures or midway between supporting beams. Offset end laps of adjacent widths to prevent continuous lap. Fasten ends and sides of welded wire fabric at 48 inches O.C. with tie wire. 6. Reinforcing shall extend through construction joints. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Concrete shall not be placed until the Engineer has observed the final placing of the reinforcing steel, and has given permission to place concrete. END OF SECTION Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 1 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 1.00 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Furnish labor, materials, mixing and transporting equipment and incidentals necessary to proportion, mix, transport, place, consolidate, finish, and cure concrete in the structure. DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast- furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements. SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Shop Drawings for: a. Mix design: For each concrete mix, complete the form “Concrete Mix Design” and one of the following forms: “Documentation of Required Average Strength – Field Strength Test Record” or “Documentation of Average Strength – Trial Mixtures.” b. Submit a schedule to the Owner’s representative which shows the sequence of concrete placements. [ 2. Certified Test Reports for: a. Materials used in the trial mix design. b. Water: Verification that all potable mix water and curing water sources do not exceed the non-potable water limits listed in ASTM C1602 Table 2. c. Aggregate, conforming to ASTM C33, including the test reports for soundness and abrasion resistance. d. Aggregate: 1). Verification that aggregate is not “potentially reactive” per ASTM C1260. 2). Or a cement chemical analysis indicating that the total alkali content is acceptable per Paragraph 2.02.A. 3). When mix water exceeds 50 percent of the chloride limit indicated in ASTM C1602 Table 2, then all aggregate sources shall be tested for chloride content in accordance with ASTM C1524. e. 7-day and 28-day compressive strength tests results. 1). When more than 15, 28-day compressive tests results are available from the current Project for a given class of concrete, include the 15-test running average Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 2 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 compressive strength versus the required average compressive strength (based on the previous 15 tests) in graphical form. f. If the sum total of chlorides in mix water and aggregates exceeds 80 percent of the specified limit for hardened concrete, then prior to use of concrete, test mix design to verify acceptable chloride ion concentrations in accordance with ASTM C1218. 3. Record Data for: a. Manufacturer’s literature on specified materials. b. Documentation indicating conformance with ASTM C94 requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products complying with ASTM C94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. 2. Manufacturer must be certified according to the National Ready Mixed Concrete Association’s Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and the Engineer, qualified according to ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program. D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer’s plant, each aggregate from one source, and each admixture from the same manufacturer. E. Pre-Submittal Conference: 1. Conduct conference at the Site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination.” DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver cement in bulk or bags which are plainly marked with the brand and manufacturer’s name. Immediately upon receipt, store cement in a dry, weather-tight, and properly ventilated structure which excludes moisture. Storage facilities shall permit easy access for inspection and identification. Cement not stored in accordance with the requirements shall not be used. B. Sufficient cement shall be in storage to complete placement of concrete started. In order that cement may not become unduly aged after delivery, maintain records of delivery dates. Use cement which has been stored at the Site for 60 days or more before using cement of Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 3 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 lesser age. No cement shall be used which is lumped, caked, stored more than 90 days, or whose temperature exceeds 170 F. STANDARDS A. Mixing, sampling, placing, curing and testing of concrete, and the materials used shall be in compliance with the latest revisions of the following standards, unless otherwise noted in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall maintain one copy of each of the applicable standards at the construction field office. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM Standards ASTM C31 Standard Practice for of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ASTM C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates ASTM C39 Standard Specification Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens ASTM C42 Standard Specification Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete ASTM C87 Standard Specification Test Method for Effect of Organic Impurities in Fine Aggregate on Strength of Mortar ASTM C94 Standard Specification of Ready Mixed Concrete ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars ASTM C125 Terminology Relating to Concrete and Concrete Aggregates ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C156 Standard Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials ASTM C171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C173 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method ASTM C191 Standard Test Method for Time of Setting of Hydraulic Cement by Vicat Needle ASTM C192 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory ASTM C231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method ASTM C260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C293 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Center-Point Loading) ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 4 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 ASTM Standards ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete ASTM C579 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes ASTM C580 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete ASTM C806 Standard Test Method for Restrained Expansion of Expansive Cement Mortar ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Stages of Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures ASTM C845 Standard Specification for Expansive Hydraulic Cement ASTM C878 Standard Test Method for Restrained Expansion of Shrinkage Compensating Concrete ASTM C881 Standard Specification for Epoxy Resin Base Bonding Systems for Concrete ASTM C1240 Standard Specification for Silica Fume used in Cementitious Mixtures ASTM C1260 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method) ASTM C1524 Standard Test Method for Water-Extractable Chloride in Aggregate (Soxhlet Method) ASTM C1602 Standard Specification for Mixing Water Used in the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM D570 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics ASTM D746 Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact ASTM D994 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type) ASTM D1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property Durometer Hardness ASTM D6690-07 Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealant, Hot Applied, for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements ASTM E96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 5 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 2. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Standards: ACI Standards ACI 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavy-weight, and Mass Concrete ACI 214 Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results ACI 223 Standard Practice for Use of Shrinkage Compensating Concrete ACI 301 Specification for Structural Concrete ACI 304 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting & Placing Concrete ACI 304.2R Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods ACI 305.1 Hot Weather Concreting ACI 306.1 Cold Weather Concreting ACI 308.1 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete ACI 309 Guide for Consolidation of Concrete ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete 3. Corps of Engineers, Department of the Army Specification: a. CRD C621 83 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non-Shrink Grout. 4. Federal Specification: a. TT S 00227E - Type II, Class A or B, Expansion Joint Sealant. 5. Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau (CPMB) Standards: a. Concrete Plant Standards. 2.00 PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 6 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material; General: If the fine and/or coarse aggregates test “Potentially Reactive”, in accordance with ASTM C1260, then a low alkali cementitious material shall be used. A low alkali cementitious material shall be such that, the total alkali content calculated as the percentage of sodium oxide (Na2O) plus 0.658 times the percentage of potassium oxide (K2O) shall not exceed 0.6 percent of the total cementitious material content. B. Cement; Type: 1. Type I or I/II Portland cement, conforming to ASTM C150; used for all concrete, unless noted otherwise. C. Fly Ash/Pozzolans: Fly ashConforming to ASTM C618, Class C or Ffly ash; used in all classes of concrete. A supplier’s certificate of the analysis and composition of the fly ash shall be supplied. D. Coarse Aggregate: 1. Crushed stone or gravel conforming to ASTM C33, in the gradation size specified. 2. For gradation size number 467, a maximum aggregate size of 1-1/2 inches is: Sieve Size Percent Retained Percent Passing 2” 0 100 1-1/2” 0-5 95-100 3/4” 30-65 35-70 3/8” 70-90 10-30 No. 4 95-100 0-5 3. For gradation size number 57, the maximum aggregate size of 1 inch is: Sieve Size Percent Retained Percent Passing 1-1/2” 0 100 1” 0-5 95-100 1/2” 40-75 25-60 No. 4 90-100 0-10 No. 8 95-100 0-5 4. For gradation size number 67, the maximum aggregate size of 3/4 inch is: Sieve Size Percent Retained Percent Passing 1” 0 100 3/4” 0-10 90-100 3/8” 45-80 20-55 No. 4 90-100 10-10 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 7 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 Sieve Size Percent Retained Percent Passing No. 8 90-100 0-5 5. For gradation size number 8, the maximum aggregate size of 3/8 inch is: Sieve Size Percent Retained Percent Passing 1” 0 100 3/8” 0-15 85-100 No. 4 70-90 10-30 No. 8 90-100 0-10 No. 16 95-100 0-5 E. Fine Aggregate: 1. Washed and screened natural sands or sands manufactured by crushing stones; conforming to ASTM C33. The gradation in ASTM C33 for air entrained concrete is: Sieve Size Percent Retained Percent Passing 3/8” 0 100 #4 0-5 95-100 #8 0-20 80-100 #16 15-50 50-85 #30 40-75 25-60 #50 70-90 10-30 2. Fine aggregate shall have not more than 45 percent retained between any two consecutive sieves. Its fineness modulus, as defined in ASTM C125, shall be not less than 2.3 nor more than 3.1. F. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C1602 and ASTM C1602 Table 2. ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Admixture: Conforming to ASTM C260. B. Water Reducing Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C494; Types “A” or “D” only; accurately measured and added to the mix according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. C. Set Retarding Admixtures: Conforming to ASTM C494; Types “B” and “D” only; accurately measured and added to the mix in according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. D. Water Reducing Admixtures - High Range (HRWR): High Range Water Reducer shall comply with ASTM C494, Type F or G. HRWR shall be accurately measured in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. HRWR shall be added to the concrete mix at the concrete batch plant. HRWR may not be added at placement site except to redose a batch and only after approval of the HRWR manufacturer. The high range water reducing admixture shall be able to maintain the plasticity range without significant loss of slump or rise in concrete temperature for 2 hours. Other admixtures may only be used with the Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 8 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 HRWR if approved by the HRWR manufacturer. A representative of the HRWR manufacturer shall be present during any large placement, placement of slabs, or during times of unusual circumstance which may require changes to the product formulation. 1. Manufacturers: a. BASF Corporation. b. W. R. Grace & Co. c. Sika Corporation. WATERSTOPS A. Flexible PVC Waterstops: CE CRD-C 572, for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory fabricate corners, intersections, and directional changes. Unless indicated otherwise, provide the following configurations. 1. Construction Joints: a. Profile: Ribbed without center bulb. b. Width: 6 inches. c. Minimum thickness: 3/8 inch. 2. Expansion Joint: a. Profile: Ribbed with center bulb. b. Width: 9 inches. c. Minimum thickness: 3/8 inch. 3. Manufacturers: a. Greenstreak. b. Meadows: W. R. Meadows, Inc. c. Murphy: Paul Murphy Plastics Co. d. Progress Unlimited Inc. e. Sternson Group. f. Durajoint® Waterstop. g. Vinylex Corporation. h. Westec Barrier Technologies; Div. of Western Textile Products, Inc. VAPOR RETARDERS A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, Class A. Include manufacturer’s recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape. 1. Available Products: a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra A. b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 9 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn Type-105. d. Stego Wrap (15-mil) Vapor Barrier; STEGO INDUSTRIES LLC. CURING MATERIALS A. Sheet Curing Material: Conforming to ASTM C171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap - polyethylene film. B. Membrane Curing Compounds: Membrane curing compound conforming to ASTM C309; having a color to indicate coverage when applied; non-staining; applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. No curing compound shall be used on walls which are to receive a plaster mix finish. When tested according to ASTM C156, the curing compound shall provide a film which has retained, within the specimen, the following percentages of moisture present when the curing compound was applied: 1. At least 97 percent at the end 24 hours. 2. At least 95 percent at the end of 3 days. 3. At least 91 percent at the end of 7 days. C. Concrete Curing and Sealing Compound: 1. Where a sealer is necessary, use a concrete curing and sealing compound. Application of this product shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Interior Concrete Surfaces: MasterKure CC 200 WB by BASF Corporation. 3. Exterior Concrete Surfaces: MasterKure CC 1315 WB by BASF Corporation. 4. Chemical Storage Areas: MasterKure HD 200 WB by BASF Corporation. D. Finishing Aid: Spraying material designed to form a monomolecular film on fresh concrete that reduces the rate of evaporation of surface moisture prior to finishing; conforming to Confilm, as manufactured by Master Builders, Inc. This material is not a curing compound. Concrete must be cured as specified. RELATED MATERIALS A. Joint Materials for Water-Retaining Structures: 1. Pre-molded, resilient, non-bituminous expansion joint filler conforming to ASTM D1752, Type “II”, in the thickness specified. 2. Joint sealer conforming to ASTM D6690. 3. Expansion joint sealant for non-potable water shall be a two-component, non-sag, polysulfide-base, elastomeric sealing compound. The material shall conform to Federal Specification TT S 00227E, Type “II”, Class B; installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Backing material for sealant shall be a rod of a diameter and composition recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 10 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 4. Expansion joint sealant for potable water shall be a two-component, non-sag, polysulfide sealant containing no lead or mercury; conforming to Fed. Spec. TT S 00227E, Type “II”, Class A; applied according to the manufacturer’s specifications. Backing material for sealant shall be a rod of a diameter and composition recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 5. Where surface is to receive a swept in grout topping, a 3-inch wide, 1-mil polyethylene strip shall be placed above the joint sealant and held in place with 1-inch wide polyethylene tape spaced at 12-inch centers (maximum). B. Joint Materials for Non-Water-Retaining Structures: 1. Bituminous-type, preformed, expansion joint filler; conforming to ASTM D994. 2. Pre-molded, resilient, non-bituminous expansion joint filler conforming to ASTM D1752, Type “II”, in the thickness specified. C. Bonding Agents: Install according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and written instructions. 1. Bonding agent shall be Sika Armatec 110 EpoCem by Sika Corporation. 2. Epoxy bonding system shall conform to ASTM C881. Epoxy bonding agent shall be Sikadur 32, Hi-Mod by Sika Corporation. The epoxy shall carry the manufacturer’s recommendation for the planned application and shall be followed in every detail. D. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. General: Non-shrink grout for grouting of pump, motor, and equipment baseplates or bedplates, column baseplates, other miscellaneous baseplates, piping block outs and other uses of grout. Grout shall meet the following requirements, as verified by independent laboratory tests: a. No shrinkage from the time of placement, or expansion after set, under ASTM C827 and CRD C621 83 (Corps of Engineers). When non-shrink grouts are tested under CRD C621 83, the grout shall be tested in a fluid state. A fluid state shall be defined as flowing through a flow cone at a rate of 20 seconds, plus or minus 5 seconds. b. An initial set time of not less than 45 minutes under ASTM C191. 2. Non-Shrink Non Metallic Grout: Pre mixed, non-staining, non-shrink grout; minimum 28-day compressive strength of 5000 psi. a. Do not use for vibrating equipment. b. Products: 1). Masterflow 713 Plus by BASF The Chemical Company. 2). Five Star Grout by Five Star Products, Inc. 3). SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corporation. 3. Non-Shrink Epoxy Structural Grouts: Furnished in two components from the factory and mixed on the Site; conforming to ASTM C579, ASTM C580, and ASTM C827; chemical resistant, water resistant and a minimum 7-day compressive strength of 12,000 psi. a. Use for vibrating equipment. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 11 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 b. Products: 1). Sikadur 42, Grout-Pak by Sika Corporation. 2). Five Star HP Epoxy Grout by Five Star Products, Inc. 3). Masterflow 648 CP by BASF The Chemical Company. E. Normal Shrinkage Grout: 1 part Portland cement, Type I/ or I/II, to 3 parts of clean, first quality sand; proportioning on a volumetric basis; used for non-structural applications for grouting areas as shown on the Drawings which do not require non-shrink grout. F. Foundation Waterproofing: Foundation coating shall be used only on the exterior of concrete walls not exposed to view where indicated on the Drawings. 1. MasterSeal 581 (Thoroseal) as manufactured BASF Corporation. 2. Approved Equal. G. Zinc Rich Primer: Aluminum surfaces which contact or are embedded in concrete shall be coated with zinc rich primer. Primer shall be Tneme-Zinc. REPAIR MATERIALS A. Structural Concrete Repair Material: Low-shrink, non-slump, non-metallic, quick setting patching mortar; as approved by the manufacturer for each application and applied accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 1. Products: a. Sikatop 123 by Sika Corporation. b. Sikatop 122 by Sika Corporation. c. Five Star Structural Concrete by Five Star Products, Inc. CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Design Criteria: 1. Provide a mix design for each concrete application indicated. This may necessitate multiple mix designs for each class of concrete depending on HRWR, entrained air, and other requirements. 2. All Concrete shall be normal weight concrete composed of Portland cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, admixtures, and water, as specified. 3. ACI 211.1 shall be the basis for selecting the proportions for concrete made with aggregates of normal and high density and of workability suitable for usual cast in place structures. 4. The workability of any mix shall be as required for the specific placing conditions and the method of placement. The concrete shall have the ability to be worked readily into corners and around reinforcing steel without the segregation of materials or the collection of free water on the surface. Compliance with specified slump limitations shall not necessarily designate a satisfactory mix. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 12 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 5. In no case shall the amount of coarse material produce harshness in placing or honeycombing in the structure, when forms are removed. 6. The maximum amount of coarse aggregate (dry loose volume) per cubic foot of finished concrete shall not exceed 0.82 cubic feet. 7. In calculating water-cement ratio: The water content shall include the amount of water batched or to be added later, plus the free water in the aggregate, and minus the water content at SSD conditions. 8. No allowance shall be made for the evaporation of water after batching. If additional water is required to obtain the desired slump, a compensating amount of cement shall also be added. In no case shall the maximum water cement ratio exceed the specified maximum or that of the approved mix design. 9. Air Entrainment: Provide the percent air entrainment in each concrete mix design as recommended by ACI 318 and ACI 350 for “Moderate Exposure” (Class F1), unless otherwise specified/restricted: a. Do not provide air-entrainment in drilled shafts unless placed underwater. b. Do not provide air-entrainment and entrapped air shall not exceed 3 percent for the following applications: 1). Interior slabs. 2). Slabs on composite metal decks. 10. When job conditions dictate, water-reducing and set-controlling admixtures may be used. Only specified admixtures shall be used. Admixtures shall be batched at the batch plant. 11. High Range Water Reducer (HRWR): Provide HRWR in mix designs as indicated for specified applications. Slump of concrete with the addition of HRWR may be increased to 8 inches (+/- 1 inch). a. Drilled shafts, footings, walls, columns, and beams. b. Interior of building curbs which are not cast monolithically with slabs. c. Precast concrete. d. Do not provide HRWR in slabs and pavement (a water reducer is permitted provided performance requirements are met). 12. If fly ash is to be used in place of cement, no more than 25 percent of the cement may be replaced . 13. Concrete shall be capable of developing two-thirds of the required 28-day compressive strength in 7 days. 14. Maximum water-soluble chloride ion content in concrete, by percent weight of concrete, shall not exceed ACI 318 and ACI 350 limits for Exposure Class C1. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 13 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 B. Concrete Classifications: Class Min. 28-Day Compressive Strength (psi) Max. Size Aggregate (inches) Max. Water: Cement Ratio Slump +/- 1 (inches) Min. Sacks of Cement Per Cubic Yard ** A 4000 1.5 Size No. 467 0.45 3 (8*) 5.75 B 3000 1.5 Size No. 467 0.47 3 5.75 C 4000 1.0 Size No. 57 0.45 4 (8*) 5.75 D 5000 0.75 Size No. 67 0.47 4 6.00 E 1500 1.5 Size No. 467 0.70 4 4.00 F 4000 0.375 Size No. 8 0.47 3 6.50 * Slump shown is with HRWR ** Provide one additional sack of cement per cubic yard if concrete must be deposited in standing water. C. Concrete Usage: Class Usage Class A Use Footings and slabs, and other unless noted otherwise Class B Use Pavement, gutters, and sidewalks Class C Use Walls, columns, beams, drilled shafts Class D Use Precast concrete and precast panels Class E Use Cradling, Blocking, mud slab, lean concrete backfill Class F Use Stair Pans and Landings, interior building curbs. D. Required Average Compressive Strength: 1. All concrete is required to have an average compressive strength greater than the specified strength. The required average compressive strength shall be established according to the requirements of ACI 301, 4.2.3.3. 2. Standard Deviation: If the production facility has records of field tests performed within the past 12 months and spanning a period of not less than 60 calendar days for a class of concrete within 1000 psi of that specified for the Work, calculate a standard deviation and establish the required average strength fcr’ in accordance with ACI 301, 4.2.3.2 and 4.2.3.3.a. If field test records are not available, select the required average strength from ACI 301, Table 4.2.3.3.b. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 14 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 E. Documentation of Required Average Compressive Strength: 1. Documentation indicating the proposed concrete proportions will produce an average compressive strength equal to or greater than the required average compressive strength, shall consist of field strength records or trial mixture. 2. Field Strength Records: Document field strength records according to ACI 301, 4.2.3.4.a and including the following: a. Field test data shall not be older than 1 year. b. If field test data are available and represent a single group of at least 10 consecutive strength tests for one mixture, using the same materials, under the same conditions, and encompassing a period of not less than 60 days, verify that the average of the field test results equals or exceeds fcr’. Submit for acceptance the mixture proportions along with the field test data. c. If the field test data represent two groups of compressive strength tests for two mixtures, plot the average strength of each group versus the water-cementitious materials ratio of the corresponding mixture proportions and interpolate between them to establish the required mixture proportions for fcr’. 3. Trial Mixtures: a. Establish trial mixture proportions according to ACI 301, 4.2.3.4.b and including the following. 1). Make at least three trial mixtures complying with performance and design requirements. Each trial mixture shall have a different cementitious material content. Select water-cementitious materials ratios that will produce a range of compressive strengths encompassing the required average compressive strength fcr’. 2). Submit a plot of a curve showing the relationship between water-cementitious materials ratio and compressive strength. 3). Establish mixture proportions so that the maximum water-cementitious materials ratio is not exceeded when the slump is at the maximum specified. b. Laboratory Samples shall be taken in accordance with the trial mix designs for laboratory testing purposes. c. The fresh concrete shall be tested for Slump (ASTM C143) and Air Content (ASTM C173 and ASTM C231). Strength test specimens shall be made, cured, and tested for 7-day and 28-day strength in accordance with ASTM C192, ASTM C39, and ASTM C293. d. Suitable facilities shall be provided for readily obtaining representative Samples of aggregate from each of the weigh batchers for test purposes and for obtaining representative Samples of concrete for uniformity tests. The necessary platforms, tools, and equipment for obtaining Samples shall be furnished. Aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1260. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 15 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 e. The cement contents specified are minimum values. If additional quantities are required to obtain the specified strengths, supply the cement at no additional cost to the Owner. f. A trial mix shall be designed by an independent testing laboratory, retained and paid by the Contractor and approved by the Owner. The testing laboratory shall submit verification that the materials and proportions of the trial concrete mix design meet the requirements of the Specifications. g. From these trial mix tests, the ratios between 7-day and 28-day strengths shall be established. The 7-day strength which corresponds to the required 28-day strength shall be determined. h. The final results of the trial mix design shall be submitted to the Engineer at least 10 days prior to the scheduled beginning of concrete placement and shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the placement of any concrete. 4. Revisions to concrete mixtures: a. When less than 15 compressive strength tests results for a given class of concrete are available from the current Project: 1). If any of the following criteria are met, take immediate steps to increase average compressive strength of the concrete. a). A 7-day compressive strength test result multiplied by 1.5 falls below the required 28-day compressive strength. b). A 28-day compressive strength test result is deemed not satisfactory. b. When at least 15 compressive strength test results for a given class of concrete become available from the current Project: 1). Calculate the actual average compressive strength, standard deviation and required average compressive strength using the previous 15 consecutive strength tests. Submit results in graphical form with each 28-day test result for that class of concrete. 2). If any of the following criteria are met, take immediate steps to increase average compressive strength of the concrete. a). A 7-day compressive strength test result multiplied by the average job-to- date ratio of 7-day to 28-day compressive strength falls below the required 28-day compressive strength. b). A 28-day compressive strength test result is deemed not satisfactory. c). The average compressive strength falls below the required average compressive strength. c. When revisions to the mix design are required, notify the Engineer in writing of the corrective actions taken. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 16 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 OFF-SITE BATCH PLANT A. Batch plants shall be an established concrete batching facility meeting the requirements of the Concrete Plant Standards of the Concrete Plant Manufacturers Bureau. CONCRETE MIXING A. Mixers may be stationary, truck, or paving mixers of approved design. They shall be capable of combining the materials into a uniform mixture and of discharging without mixture segregation. Stationary and paving mixers shall be provided with an acceptable device to lock the discharge mechanism until the required mixing time has elapsed. The mixers or mixing plant shall include a device for automatically counting the total number of batches of concrete mixed. The mixers shall be operated at the drum or mixing blade speed designated by the manufacturer on the name plate. B. The mixing time for stationary mixers shall be based upon the mixer’s ability to produce uniform concrete throughout the batch and from batch to batch. For guidance purposes, the manufacturer’s recommendations, or 1 minute for 1 cubic yard plus 1/4 minute for each additional cubic yard may be used. Final mixing time shall be based on mixer performance. Mixers shall not be charged in excess of the capacity specified by the manufacturer. C. When a stationary mixer is used for partial mixing of the concrete (shrink mixed), the stationary mixing time may be reduced to the minimum necessary to intermingle the ingredients (about 30 seconds). D. When a truck mixer is used, either for complete mixing (transit-mixed) or to finish the partial mixing in a stationary mixer and in the absence of uniformity test data, each batch of concrete shall be mixed not less than 70 nor more than 100 revolutions of the drum, at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as mixing speed. If the batch is at least 1/2 cubic yard less than the rated capacity, in the absence of uniformity test data, the number of revolutions at mixing speed may be reduced to no less than 50. Additional mixing shall be performed at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as agitating speed. When necessary for proper control of the concrete, mixing of transit-mixed concrete shall not be permitted until the truck mixer is at the Site of the concrete placement. Truck mixers shall be equipped with accurate revolution counters. E. Paving mixers may be either single compartment drum or multiple compartment drum type. A sled or box of suitable size shall be attached to the mixer under the bucket to catch any concrete spillage that may occur when the mixer is discharging concrete into the bucket. Multiple compartment drum paving mixers shall be properly synchronized. The mixing time shall be determined by time required to transfer the concrete between compartments of the drum. F. Vehicles used in transporting materials from the batching plant to the paving mixers shall have bodies or compartments of adequate capacity to carry the materials and to deliver each batch, separated and intact, to the mixer. Cement shall be transported from the batching plant to the mixers in separate compartments which are equipped with windproof and rain proof covers. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 17 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 3.00 EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Notify the Owner’s representative upon completion of various portions of the work required for placing concrete, so that inspection may be made as early as possible. Keep the Owner’s representative informed of the anticipated concrete placing schedules. B. All items, including lines and grades, forms, waterstops, reinforcing, inserts, piping, electrical, plumbing and the Contractor’s concreting materials and equipment shall be in compliance with the Contract Documents before proceeding. C. Do not place any concrete until formwork and the placing reinforcement in that unit is complete. Place no concrete before the completion of all adjacent operations which might prove detrimental to the concrete. D. Brilliantly light the Site so that all operations are plainly visible when concrete mixing, placing, and finishing, continues after daylight. Whenever possible, concrete finishing shall be completed in daylight hours. E. When placing concrete, the forms shall be clean and entirely free from all chips, dirt, sawdust and other extraneous matter. Forms for slab, beam and girder construction shall not have tie wire cuttings, nails, or any other matter which would mar the appearance of the finished construction. Clean forms and keep them free of any foreign matter during concrete placing. F. The concrete shall be mixed in quantities required for immediate use. Any concrete which is not in place within the time limits specified shall not be used. Concrete shall not be re- tempered. G. Concrete shall not be placed if impending weather conditions would impair the quality of the finished Work. H. Unless otherwise provided, the following requirements shall govern the time sequence on which construction operations shall be carried. 1. Forms for walls or columns shall not be erected on concrete footings until the concrete in the footing has cured for at least 2 curing days. Concrete may be placed in a wall or column as soon as the forms and reinforcing steel placements are approved. 2. Steel beams or forms and falsework for superstructures shall not be erected on concrete substructures until the substructure concrete has cured for at least 4 curing days. Falsework required for superstructures shall not be erected until the substructure has cured for 4 curing days, and shall not be removed until the superstructure has cured. EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Where aluminum anchors, aluminum shapes, or aluminum electrical conduits are embedded in concrete, paint aluminum contact surfaces with zinc rich primer. Allow the paint to thoroughly dry before placing the aluminum in contact with the concrete. B. Paint steel or other ferrous metal to be mounted on or placed in contact with dry/cured concrete, and coat in accordance with Section 09 96 00.01 “High-Performance Coatings” prior to installation. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 18 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E1643 and manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Granular fill below the vapor retarder shall be smoothed and free of protrusions that might damage or rupture the polyethylene film. Completely cover porous fill with film. Lap film not less than six inches at all joints, with the top placed in the direction of concrete spreading. Use pressure-sensitive tape at all laps of vapor barrier. Lap reinforcement directly over film before placing concrete, taking precautions to prevent film punctures. Carefully cut film around pipes and wiring outlets, and then apply pressure sensitive tape around these protrusions to insure maximum barrier effectiveness. JOINTS A. Expansion Joints and Devices: 1. Workmanship: Exercise careful workmanship in joint construction to separate the concrete sections by an open joint or by the joint materials, and make the joints true to the outline indicated. 2. Expansion Joints: Construct expansion joints and devices to provide expansion and contraction. Construct joints which are to be left open or filled with poured joint material with forms which are adaptable for loosening or early removal. In order to avoid jamming by the expansion action of the concrete and the consequent likelihood of injuring adjacent concrete, remove or loosen these forms as soon as possible after the concrete has initially set. Make provisions for loosening the forms to permit free concrete expansion without requiring full removal. 3. Armored Joints: Carefully construct armored joints to avoid defective anchorage of the steel and porous or honeycombed concrete adjacent to same. Anchor pre-molded materials to the concrete on one side of the joint with approved adhesive. Anchor so that the material does not fall out of the joint. B. Construction Joints: 1. Construction joints are formed by placing plastic concrete in direct contact with concrete which has attained its initial set. When concrete is specified as monolithic, the term shall be interpreted as the manner and sequence of concrete placement so that construction joints do not occur. a. Unless noted otherwise, the maximum horizontal spacing of construction joints shall be 40 feet. b. For slabs on grade, the maximum spacing between two construction joints or between a construction joint and a control joint shall be 15 feet, unless noted otherwise. c. Unless noted otherwise or approved by the Engineer, the maximum vertical spacing of construction joints shall be 15 feet. If not detailed on the Drawings, construction joint details and locations shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 19 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 2. Additional horizontal and vertical construction joints, when submitted and approved by the Engineer, may have an impact on reinforcing details. Revise reinforcing details to reflect additional joints. 3. Unless otherwise provided, construction joints shall be square and normal to the forms. Provide bulkheads in the forms for all joints except horizontal joints. 4. At the proper time, clean horizontal construction joints for receiving the succeeding lift using air water cutting. The surface shall be exposed sound, clean aggregate. The air pressure supply to the jet shall be approximately 100 lb. per square inch, and the water pressure sufficient to bring the water into effective influence of the air pressure. After cutting, wash the surface until there is no trace of cloudiness in the wash water. 5. In areas where air water cutting cannot be satisfactorily accomplished, or in areas where it is undesirable to disturb the surface of the concrete before it has hardened, prepare the surface for receiving the next lift by wet sand blasting to immediately remove all laitance and unsound concrete prior to placing of the next lift. Thoroughly wash the surface of the concrete after sand blasting to remove all loose material. 6. Provide construction joints with concrete keyways, reinforcing steel dowels, and waterstops. The method of forming keys in keyed joints shall permit the easy removal of forms without chipping, breaking, or damaging the concrete. C. Existing Hardened Concrete: Where new concrete or grout is to be placed in contact with existing hardened concrete, texture the existing surface by chipping or other means so that an irregular surface having a height variance of not less than 1/4 inch is created. The existing concrete shall then be coated with a bonding agent and new concrete or grout placed. WATERSTOPS A. PVC Waterstops: Install in construction joints as indicated to form a continuous diaphragm. Install in longest lengths practicable. Support and protect exposed waterstops during progress of Work. 1. At formed surfaces, a split form shall be used. The split form shall have a tight fit which prevents misalignment and concrete leakage. 2. The embedded flange of the waterstop must be secured prior to concrete placement. The flange shall be secured at 12 inches on-center by factory installed hog rings or grommets at the outermost rib. Never place nails or screws through the body of the waterstop. 3. All fittings and changes in direction shall be factory fabricated. Only straight butt splices shall be made in the field. Field splices shall be according to the manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows: a. Cut adjoining ends square to form matching edges. b. Uniformly melt the ends at 380 F using a thermostatically controlled, Teflon coated splicing iron. c. When a 1/8-inch diameter melt bead develops on each waterstop end, remove the splicing iron and firmly press the two ends together in proper alignment. Hold until Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 20 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 the material has fused and cooled. Allow the splice to cool naturally; do not quench. CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Cold Weather: 1. If air temperature has fallen to, or is expected to fall below 40 F during the protection period (a minimum of 48 hours unless longer time frame is recommended by ACI 306R), then cold weather concreting shall be performed in accordance with ACI 306.1. 2. In cases where the temperature drops below 40 F after the concreting operations have been started, sufficient canvas and framework or other type of housing shall be furnished to enclose and protect the structure, in accordance with the requirements of ACI 306R. Sufficient heating apparatus to provide heat shall be supplied, and heating source and protection from combustion gas shall be in accordance with ACI 306.1. The concrete shall be protected when placed under all weather conditions. Should concrete placed under such conditions prove unsatisfactory, remove and replace the concrete at no cost to the Owner. 3. When the air temperature is above 30 F: a. The minimum concrete temperature at the time of mixing shall be 60 F unless other requirements of ACI 306.1 are met, which may allow for a lower mix temperature. b. The minimum concrete temperature at the time of placement and during the protection period shall be 55 F unless other requirements of ACI 306.1 are met, which may allow for a lower temperature. 4. The means used to heat a concrete mix shall be in accordance with ACI 306.1. 5. Salts, chemicals, or other foreign materials shall not be mixed with the concrete to preventing freezing. Calcium chloride is not permitted. B. Hot Weather: 1. Hot weather is defined as any combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind velocity that impairs the quality of the concrete. Hot weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305.1. Concrete shall be placed in the forms without the addition of any more water than that required by the design (slump). No excess water shall be added on the concrete surface for finishing. Control of initial set of the concrete and extending the time for finishing operations may be accomplished with the use of approved water reducing and set retarding admixture, as specified. 2. Maximum time intervals between the addition of mixing water and/or cement to the batch, and the placing of concrete in the forms shall not exceed the following (excluding HRWR admixture use): Concrete Temperature Maximum time From Water Batch to Placement Non-Agitated Concrete Up to 80 F 30 Minutes Over 80 F 15 Minutes Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 21 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 Concrete Temperature Maximum time From Water Batch to Placement Agitated Concrete Up to 75 F 90 Minutes 75 F to 89 F 60 Minutes a. The use of an approved set-retarding admixture will permit the extension of the above time maximums by 30 minutes, for agitated concrete only. b. The use of an approved high range water reducing (HRWR) admixture will allow placement time extensions as determined by the manufacturer. 3. The maximum temperature of concrete shall not exceed 90 F at the time the concrete is placed. The temperatures of the mixing water shall be reduced by the use of chilled water or ice. 4. The maximum temperature of concrete with high range water reducing admixture shall not exceed 100 F at the time concrete is placed. 5. Under extreme heat, wind, or humidity conditions, concreting operations may be suspended if the quality of the concrete being placed is not acceptable. C. Handling and Transporting: 1. Delivery tickets shall be required for each batch and shall be in accordance with ASTM C94, Section 16. Each delivery ticket must show plainly the amount of water, in gallons that can be added to the mixer truck at the Site without exceeding the maximum water cement ratio approved for that mix design. Amount of water added must be in proportion to contents of truck. 2. Arrange and use chutes, troughs, or pipes as aids in placing concrete so that the ingredients of the concrete are not segregated. They shall be steel or steel lined. When steep slopes are necessary, equip the chutes with baffles or make in short lengths that reverse the direction of movement. Extend open troughs and chutes, if necessary, inside the forms or through holes left in the forms. Terminate the ends of these chutes in vertical downspouts. 3. Keep chutes, troughs, and pipes clean and free from coatings of hardened concrete by thoroughly flushing with water before and after placement. Discharge water used for flushing away from the concrete in place. 4. Concrete pumping is permitted and shall comply with ACI 304.2R. 5. Carting or wheeling concrete batches on completed concrete floor slab shall not be permitted until the slab has aged at least 4 curing days. Unless pneumatic tired carts are used, wheel the carts on timber planking so that the loads and impact are distributed over the slab. Curing operations shall not be interrupted for the purpose of wheeling concrete over finished slabs. D. Depositing: 1. The method and manner of placing shall prevent segregation or separation of the aggregate or the displacement of the reinforcement. Use drop chutes of rubber or Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 22 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 metal when necessary. Prevent the spattering of forms or reinforcement bars if the spattered concrete dries or hardens before it is incorporated into the mass. 2. Fill each part of the forms by directly depositing concrete as near its final position as possible. Work the coarse aggregate back from the face and force the concrete under and around the reinforcement bars without displacing them. Depositing large quantities at one point in the forms, then running or working it along the forms shall not be permitted. 3. After the concrete has taken initial set, the forms shall not be jarred. No force or load shall be placed upon projecting reinforcement. 4. Deposit the concrete through vertical drop chutes of rubber or metal of satisfactory size when operations involve placing concrete from above, such as directly into an excavated area, or through the completed forms, particularly in walls, piers, columns, and similar structures. Drop chutes shall be made in sections or provided in several lengths so that the outlet may be adjusted to proper heights during placing. 5. Except for drilled shafts, concrete shall not be dropped free more than 10 feet when HRWR admixture is used or 5 feet without HRWR. Place in continuous horizontal layers with a depth of from 1 to 3 feet, depending upon the wall thickness. Each layer shall be soft when a new layer is placed upon it. No more than 1 hour shall elapse between the placing of successive concrete layers in any portion of the structures included in continuous placement. 6. Place required sections in one continuous operation to avoid additional construction joints. 7. If excessive bleeding causes water to form on the surface of the concrete in tall forms, make the mix dryer to reduce the bleeding. In tall walls, place the concrete to a point about 1 foot below the top of the wall and allow to settle for 1 to 2 hours. Resume and complete concreting before set occurs. 8. For slopes greater than two percent, start concrete placement at low end and proceed upslope. E. Consolidating: 1. Compact each layer of concrete and flush the mortar to the surface of the forms by continuous-working mechanical vibrators. Vibrators which operate by attachment to forms shall not be used. Apply the vibrator to the concrete immediately after deposit. Move vibrator throughout the layer of the newly placed concrete, several inches into the plastic layer below. Thoroughly work the concrete around the reinforcement, embedded fixtures and into the corners and angles of the forms until it is well- compacted. 2. Mechanical vibrators shall not be operated so that they penetrate or disturb previously placed layers which are partially set or hardened. They shall not be used to aid the flow of concrete laterally. The vibration shall be of sufficient duration to completely compact and embed reinforcement and fixtures, but not to an extent causing segregation. 3. Keep vibrators constantly moving in the concrete and apply vertically at points uniformly spaced, not farther apart than the radius over which the vibrator is visibly Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 23 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 effective. The vibrator shall not be held in one location longer than required to produce a liquified appearance on the surface. 4. When submerged in concrete, internal vibrators shall maintain a frequency of not less than 6000 impulses per minute for spuds with diameters greater than 5 inches and 10,000 impulses for smaller spuds. The vibration intensity (amplitude) shall be sufficient to produce satisfactory consolidation. 5. Provide one vibrator (powered pneumatically or electrically) for each 10 cubic yards of concrete per hour being placed. Provide at least one vibrator, which may be of the gasoline powered type, as a standby for each two vibrators in service. To produce satisfactory consolidation, and based upon the observed performance, the Owner’s representative may require the use of a larger sized and powered vibrator. 6. Check vibrators intended for regular service or standby service before beginning concreting operations. F. Placement in Water: 1. Deposit concrete in water only when dry conditions cannot be obtained. The forms, cofferdams, or caissons shall be sufficiently tight to prevent any water flowing through the space where concrete is to be deposited. Pumping of water shall not be permitted while the concrete is being placed, nor until it has set for at least 36 hours. 2. Carefully place the concrete compact mass using a tremie, closed bottom dumping bucket, or another approved method which does not permit the concrete to fall through the water without protection. The concrete shall not be disturbed after being deposited. Regulate depositing to maintain horizontal surfaces. 3. When a tremie is used, it shall consist of a tube constructed in sections having water- tight connections. The means of supporting the tremie shall permit the movement of the discharge end over the entire top surface of the work, and shall allow the tremie to be rapidly lowered to retard the flow. The number of times it is necessary to shift the location of the tremie shall be held to a minimum for any continuous placement of concrete. During the placing of concrete, keep the tremie tube full to the bottom of the hopper. When a batch is dumped into the hopper, slightly raise the tremie, but not out of the concrete at the bottom, until the batch discharges to the level of the bottom of the hopper. Stop the flow by lowering the tremie. Continue placing operations until the work is completed. 4. When concrete is placed by means of the bottom dump bucket, the bucket shall have a capacity of not less than 1/2 cubic yard. Lower the bucket gradually and carefully until it rests upon the concrete already placed. Raise it very slowly during the discharge travel to maintain still water at the point of discharge and to avoid agitating the mixture. 5. Use a sump or other approved method to channel displaced fluid and concrete away from the shaft excavation. Recover slurry and dispose of it as approved. Do not discharge displaced fluids into or in close proximity to streams or other bodies of water. G. Placement in Slabs: 1. Allow concrete in columns, walls and deep beams or girders to stand for at least 1 hour to permit full settlement from consolidation, before concrete is placed for slabs they are Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 24 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 to support. Haunches are considered as part of the slab and shall be placed integrally with them. 2. When monolithic slabs are placed in strips, the widths of the strips, unless otherwise specified or indicated, shall insure that concrete in any one strip is not allowed to lie in place for more than 1 hour before the adjacent strips are placed. 3. Immediately before placing concrete, thoroughly dampen the earthen cushion to receive concrete to prevent moisture absorption from the concrete. 4. As soon as concrete placing is complete for a slab section of sufficient width to permit finishing operations, level the concrete, strike off, tamp and screed. The screed shall be of a design adaptable to the use intended, shall have provision for vertical adjustment and shall be sufficiently rigid to hold true to shape during use. 5. The initial strike off shall leave the concrete surface at an elevation slightly above grade so that, when consolidation and finishing operations are completed, the surface of the slab is at grade elevation. 6. Continue tamping and screeding operations until the concrete is properly consolidated and free of surface voids. Bring the surface to a smooth, true alignment using longitudinal screeding, floating, belting, and/or other methods. 7. When used, templates shall be of a design which permits early removal so satisfactory finishing at and adjacent to the template is achieved. 8. While the concrete is still plastic, straightedge the surface using a standard 10-foot metal straightedge. Lap each straightedge pass one-half of the preceding pass. Remove high spots and fill depressions with fresh concrete and re-float. Continue to check with a straightedge during the final finishing operation, until the surface is true to grade and free of depressions, high spots, voids, or rough spots. 9. Check the final surface with a straightedge. Ordinates measured from the face of the straightedge to the surface of the slab shall not exceed 1/16 inch per foot from the nearest point of contact. The maximum ordinate shall be 1/8 inch per 10 feet. 10. Unless noted otherwise, where floor drains or hub drains are shown in slabs of buildings, vaults, or treatment basin units and sloping the slab is not indicated, slope slab to drain on a grade of 1/16 inch per foot with a maximum total slope of 1-1/4 inches. The thickness of slab at floor or hub drain shall be the thickness of slab, as indicated on the Drawings. H. Placement in Foundations: Place concrete in deep foundations so that segregation of the aggregates or displacement of the reinforcement is avoided. Provide suitable chutes or vertical pipes. When footings can be placed in dry foundation pits without the use of cofferdams or caissons, forms may be omitted and the entire excavation filled with concrete to the elevation of the top of footing. The placing of concrete bases above seal courses is permitted after the forms are free from water and the seal course cleaned. Execute necessary pumping or bailing during concreting from a suitable sump located outside the forms. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 25 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Forms for walls, columns, and sides of beams and girders shall be removed as specified in Section 03 11 00 “Concrete Forming.” Patch, repair, finish, and clean concrete after form removal. Finish concrete within 7 days of form removal. Cure concrete as finishing progresses. B. Air voids, for all types of finishes, are defects and shall be removed by rubbing or patching. C. Finish Schedule: Type of Finish Location No Finish Surfaces which are not visible from the inside or outside of the completed structure or more than 12” below finish grade (i.e. back of retaining walls below embankment, etc.) Smooth Finish Surfaces exposed to view and areas below to a point 12” below grade D. No Finish: After forms are removed, repair or patch-tie holes and defects. Otherwise, no additional finish is required. E. Rough Finish: Surfaces for which rough finish is indicated or required shall have tie holes and defects larger than 1/4 inch in width or depth patched or repaired. Remove fins flush with the adjacent surface by rubbing or grinding and dress rough edges. Otherwise, leave surfaces with the texture imparted by the forms. F. Smooth Finish: Unless otherwise shown on the schedule above, provide smooth form finish for concrete surfaces to be exposed to view. Surfaces to receive a rubbed finish shall have a smooth form finish. The form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical with a minimum number of seams. Patch tie holes and defects and remove fins flush with the adjacent surface. G. Smooth Rubbed Finish: 1. Rub surfaces with fluted carborundum stone rubbing at the proper time in the concrete aging process. Rubbing shall remove form marks, surface imperfections, and otherwise smooth, shape, or finish the surface. Proceed with surface rubbings when the forms are removed. 2. After form removal, perform necessary pointing. When the pointing has set sufficiently to permit rubbing, wet surfaces requiring surface finish and rub surface with a No. 16 Carborundum Stone or an abrasive of equal quality. Bring the surface to a paste, to remove all form marks and projections, and to produce a smooth dense surface without pits or irregularities. 3. Carefully spread or uniformly brush the material ground to a paste over the surface and allow to take a reset. The use of cement or plaster to form a surface shall not be permitted. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 26 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 4. Prepare a 4-by-8-foot panel for the Owner’s approval which shows how final finished surfaces will appear. This panel shall be used as a guide for judging the workmanship of surface finish. H. Plaster Mix Finish: I. Form Liner Finish: Finish shall be as specified in Section 03 11 00 “Concrete Forming.” FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. B. Finish slabs, platforms, and steps monolithically and apply as indicated on the Drawings and the following schedule of finishes: Type of Finish Location Rough Finish Tank floors that receive grout topping and slabs which receive additional concrete toppings. Scratch Finish Surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, Portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes. Trowel Finish Slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, and ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish Surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method Broom Finish Exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps. 1. Rough Finish: Provide a rough surface by screeding only without further finish. 2. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes. 3. Float Finish: Finish surfaces using a float to a true, even plane with no coarse aggregate visible. In the initial floating, while the concrete is plastic, use sufficient pressure on the float to bring excess moisture to the surface for removal. Apply a final “light float” finish to the surface as the concrete hardens. The surface shall have a uniform granular texture and shall meet the straightness requirements. 4. Trowel Finish: a. After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and re-straighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 27 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 b. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 1/8 inch C. Give sidewalks a brush finish, unless noted otherwise. Score sidewalks at a spacing equal to the width of the walk and edge on each side using a tool with a radius of approximately 1/4 inch. D. Finishing in Hot, Dry Weather: During periods of high temperature and/or low humidity, take extreme care in finishing the slabs to eliminate initial shrinkage cracks. Following the initial set of concrete, but while the concrete is still “green” continue to finish as required to remove shrinkage cracks which may occur. In hot, dry weather, keep a cement finisher on the job following normal finishing operations for a sufficient length of time to insure the removal of initial shrinkage cracks. MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Normal Shrinkage Grouting: 1. Prior to grout application, thoroughly clean the surface of all foreign matter and wet down. Thoroughly clean the foundation and the forms set in place and securely anchor, with holes or cracks in forms caulked with rags, cotton waste or dry sand mixture to prevent the loss of grout. The necessary materials and tools shall be on hand before starting grouting operations. Concrete shall be damp when the grout is poured, but shall not have excess water to dilute the grout. 2. After wetting and just prior to grouting, sprinkle the surface lightly with cement to improve the bond between the grout and the surface. 3. After mixing, quickly and continuously place the grout to avoid overworking, segregation and breaking down of the initial set. Mix and place the grout according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Cure grout using wet curing method for concrete. Grout shall receive a steel trowel finish. B. Non-Shrink Grout: 1. Obtain field technical assistance from the Grout manufacturer, as required, to insure that grout mixing and installation comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations and procedures. 2. Saturate the foundation for non-shrink grouts 24 hours before installation and clear of excess water. Free baseplates or bedplates of oil, grease, laitance and other foreign substances. 3. Place grout according to the manufacturer’s directions so that spaces and cavities below the top of the baseplates and bedplates are completely filled. Provide forms where structural components of the baseplates or bedplates do not confine the grout. Where necessary and acceptable under the manufacturer’s procedures, a round head pencil vibrator, 3/4-inch maximum diameter may be used to consolidate the grout. 4. Steel trowel finish the non-shrink grout where the edge of the grout is exposed to view and after the grout has reached its initial set. Cut off the exposed edges of the grout at a 45-degree angle to the baseplate, bedplate, member, or piece of equipment. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 28 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 5. Wet curing should occur for at least 3 days, unless specified by manufacturer, with wet rags, wet burlap or polyethylene sheets. Keep cloths constantly wet for the curing cycle. 6. Clean and dry the foundation, baseplate or other surface of epoxy grouts prior to installation. Dry curing is acceptable for epoxy grouts. 7. Use epoxy non-shrink grout under all machinery, pumps, equipment, and where chemicals are present that would abate cementitious non-shrink grouts. 8. Mix, install, cure, and finish epoxy grouts according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Install grout in recommended lifts to prevent excess heat. CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Give careful attention to proper concrete curing. The curing methods shall be wet curing, sheet materials conforming to ASTM C171, or membrane curing compound conforming to ASTM C309. Membrane curing is not permitted on surfaces to be rubbed or on surfaces to which additional concrete, plaster mix mortar, or terrazzo is to be applied. Unless the curing method is specified otherwise, select the appropriate curing method. B. Length of Curing Period: 1. A “curing day” shall be any day on which the atmospheric temperature taken in the shade, or the air temperature adjacent to the concrete, remains above 50 F for at least 18 hours. 2. Cure concrete for a period of 7 consecutive days. In cold weather, when curing may be retarded, extend this period to 7 “curing days”, up to a limit of 14 consecutive days. C. Wet Curing: 1. Immediately following the finishing operations, cover concrete slabs, including roof slabs, with wet cotton mats or with a temporary covering of canvas or burlap. Keep thoroughly wet for a period of 4 curing days after the concrete is placed. The covering shall be held in direct contact with the concrete. A temporary covering shall be required when the size of slab, size of mats, or other factors dictate that the mats cannot be placed immediately after the finishing operations without marring the finishing of the slab. 2. Water used for curing shall be free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, salt, or other deleterious substances. 3. Canvas or burlap covering material shall weigh not less than 12 ounces per square yard. Place the sections with a lap at the edges of at least 8 inches. Saturate cover material with water previous to placing. Keep saturated as long as it remains in place. Use care in the placing of the cover material to prevent marring the concrete surface. 4. When temporary coverings are used, keep them in place only until the slab has sufficiently hardened so that a cotton mat covering can be substituted without marring or disturbing the slab finish. Thoroughly saturate cotton mats before placing and keep the mats on the slab in a saturated condition for a period of at least 4 curing days. D. Sheet Curing: Sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171. They shall be in contact with the entire concrete surface and applied according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 29 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 Patch all holes. Where pedestrian traffic is unavoidable, provide suitable walkways to protect the sheet material. E. Membrane Curing: 1. Membrane curing shall not be used on surfaces which receive paint, floor hardener, or plaster mix finish or other finish which would be hindered by the use of the curing compound. 2. Cover the surface of the concrete with a continuous, uniform, water-impermeable coating, conforming to ASTM C309 “Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete” and apply according to ACI 308. 3. Immediately after the removal of the side and end forms, apply a coating to the sides and ends of all concrete. Apply the solution under pressure with a spray nozzle so that the entire exposed surface is completely covered with a uniform film. The rate of application shall insure complete coverage, but the area covered shall not exceed 150 square feet per gallon of curing compound. 4. The coating shall be sufficiently transparent and free of permanent color to not result in a pronounced color change from that of the natural concrete at the conclusion of the curing period. The coating shall, however, contain a dye of color strength to render the film distinctively visible on the concrete for a period of at least 4 hours after application. 5. After application and under normal conditions, the curing compound shall be dry to touch within 1 hour and shall dry thoroughly and completely within 4 hours. When thoroughly dry, it shall provide a continuous flexible membrane free from cracks or pinholes and shall not disintegrate, check, peel, or crack during the required curing period. 6. If the seal is broken during the curing period, immediately repair it with additional sealing solution. CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. After the tie rods are broken back or removed, thoroughly clean the holes to remove grease and loose particles. Patch holes with structural concrete repair material. After the holes are completely filled, strike off flush excess mortar and finish the surface to render the filled hole inconspicuous. B. If the surface of the concrete is bulged, uneven, or shows honeycombing or form marks, which in the Engineer’s opinion cannot be repaired satisfactorily, remove and replace the entire section. C. Patch honeycomb and minor defects in all concrete surfaces with structural concrete repair material. Cut back each defective area with a pneumatic chipping tool as deep as the defect extends, but in no case less than 1/2 inch. Prepare the existing concrete according to the recommendations of patching material manufacturer’s. Apply repair material according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Finish the surface of the patches to match finish on surrounding concrete. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 30 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. General: a. Tests shall be required throughout the Work to monitor the quality of concrete. Samples shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172. b. The Engineer may waive these requirements on concrete placements of ten cubic yards or less. However, evidence shall be furnished showing a design mix which meets the Specifications. c. Unless noted otherwise, testing of the materials, ready mix, transit mix, or central plant concrete will be by an independent testing agency. The independent testing agency will be approved by the Owner and paid by the Contractor. A summary of all tests performed will be available. No concrete shall be placed without a representative present at either the plant or at the Site. d. Unless the Owner’s laboratory is on the Site, provide housing for the curing and storage of test specimens and equipment. 2. Slump Test: Slump tests, in accordance with ASTM C143, shall be used to indicate the workability and consistency of the concrete mix from batch to batch. Generally, a slump test shall be made at the start of operations each day, at regular intervals throughout a working day, and at any time when the appearance of the concrete suggests a change in uniformity. 3. Air Content Test: Tests for the concrete’s air content shall be made in accordance with ASTM C231 or ASTM C173, at the point of delivery of concrete, prior to placing in forms. The test shall be made frequently to monitor a proper air content uniform from batch to batch. 4. Temperature Test: Test for the concrete’s temperature in accordance with ASTM C1064 and as follows: the temperature of the concrete to be placed shall be taken with a thermometer immediately before placement, with the point of measurement being in the chute or bucket. Temperature test shall be performed for each truck. Record temperatures on batch ticket. 5. Compression Test: a. Compression test specimens shall be 6-by-12-inch concrete cylinders made and cured in accordance with ASTM C31. If the maximum aggregate size is no larger than 1 inch, 4-by-8-inch concrete cylinders are acceptable. No fewer than two 6-by- 12-inch or three 4-by-8-inch specimens shall be made for each test Sample. Samples shall be taken at a minimum of every 50 cubic yards of concrete for each class placed. At least one set of test specimens per day shall be made for each class of concrete used that day. Specimens shall be cured under laboratory conditions specified in ASTM C31. Additional concrete cylinders may be required for curing on the job under actual job curing conditions. These Samples could be required when: 1). There is a possibility of the air temperature surrounding the concrete falling below 40 F, or rising above 90 F. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 31 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 2). The curing procedure may need to be improved and/or lengthened. 3). It is necessary to determine when the structure may be put into service. b. Compression strength tests shall be made on the laboratory-cured and job-cured concrete cylinders at 7 and 28 days, in accordance with ASTM C39. The value of each test result shall be the average compressive strength of all of the cylinders in the test Sample. All cylinders within a test Sample shall be taken at the same time from the same batch of concrete. For the 28-day cylinders, the strength level shall be satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results exceed the required design compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below the required compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 6. High Early Strength Concrete Test: When Type “III” High Early Strength Portland cement is used instead of Type “I” Portland cement, the minimum allowable 28-day strength for Type “I” Portland cement concrete shall be at 7 days. The ages at time of test for Type “III” shall be 3 days and 7 days, instead of 7 days and 28 days, respectively, for Type “I.” 7. Failure to Meet Requirements: a. Should the 7-day strengths shown by the test specimens fall below the required values, additional curing shall be performed on those portions of the structures represented by the test specimens at the Contractor’s expense. Test cores shall be obtained and tested in accordance with ASTM Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete, Designation C 42. If additional curing does not give the strength required, the Owner reserves the right to require strengthening, replacement of those substandard portions of the structure, or additional testing, at the Contractor’s expense. b. Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written request, substandard concrete work may be reexamined in place by nondestructive testing methods or core Samples, in accordance with ACI 301. The services of an independent testing laboratory shall be retained and all expenses paid without compensation from the Owner. Laboratory results shall be evaluated by the Engineer, who shall make the final decision on acceptability of the concrete in question. Core Sample holes shall be repaired. B. The Owner may withhold payment for any section of concrete which does not meet the requirements of the Specifications. Withheld payment shall be based upon the unit prices established for concrete and reinforcing steel. Payment shall be withheld until the unacceptable concrete has been refinished, removed and replaced or otherwise brought into conformance with the Specifications. C. PVC Waterstops: Waterstops shall be observed by the Owner’s representative prior to concrete placement. Unacceptable splicing defects include: 1. Misalignment of center bulb, ribs, and end bulbs greater than 1/16 inch. 2. Bond failure at joint deeper than 1/16 inch. 3. Misalignment which reduces waterstop cross-section more than 15 percent. 4. Bubble or visible porosity in the weld. 5. Visible signs of splice separation when a cooled splice is bent by hand at a sharp angle. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 32 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 6. Charred or burnt material. END OF SECTION Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 33 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 Concrete Mix Design Project Name: FNI Project Number: Project Location: Owner: General Contractor: Mix Number / Class: A. Mix Design: Cement = lb/yd³ Fly Ash = lb/yd³ Other Cementitious Material: _______________________ = lb/yd³ Fine Aggregate = lb/yd³ Course Aggregate = lb/yd³ Water = lb/yd³ Water Reducing Admixture = oz/yd³ High Range Water Reducer = oz/yd³ Air Entraining Admixture = oz/yd³ Other Admixture: _______________________ = oz/yd³ Slump = inches Gross Weight = lb/yd³ Air Content = percent Water/Cement Ratio = B. Materials: Source ASTM Type Remarks Cement Fly Ash Other Cementitious Material: _______________________ Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate Water Water Reducer High Range Water Reducer Air Entraining Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 34 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 Source ASTM Type Remarks Other Admixture: _______________________ C. Determination of Average Strength Required (fcr’): 1. Test Records Available: A. Summary of Test Records (Provide Supporting Documentation): Test Group No. No. of Consecutive Tests Specified Strength (psi) Standard Deviation (psi) Average Standard Deviation: B. Standard Deviation Modification Factor (ACI 30 1, Table 4.2.3.3.a): ____. C. Standard Deviation Used: ____. D. Average Compressive Strength Required: ____. 2. Test Records Not Available: A. Average Compressive Strength Required (ACI 30 1, Table 4.2.3.3.b, if required): ____. D. Documentation of Required Average Compressive Strength (Check One): 1. Field Strength: a. Field Strength Test Records (ACI 30 1, Table 4.2.3.3.a): ____. *Complete Attachment A. 2. Trial Mixtures: a. Trial Mixtures (ACI 301, Table 4.2.3.3.b, if required): ____. *Complete Attachment B. I, certify that the above information is correct and all gradations, cement certifications, and test results are located at our place of business for review by the Engineer. Name: Date: Title: Company: Address: Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 35 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 36 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 Attachment A Documentation of Required Average Strength – Field Strength Records (ACI 301, 4.2.3.4.a) A. Summary of Test Records (Provide Supporting Documentation): Test Record No. No. of Tests in Record Duration of Record (days) Water- Cementitious Materials Ratio Average Strength (psi) B. Interpolation used? ________. 1. Provide an interpolation calculation or plot of strength versus proportions. C. Submit the following data for each mix: 1. Brand, type, and amount of cement. 2. Brand, type, and amount of each admixture. 3. Source of each material used. 4. Amount of water. 5. Proportions of each aggregate material per cubic yard. 6. Gross weight per cubic yard. 7. Measured slump. 8. Measured air content. 9. Results of consecutive strength tests. Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 30 00 - 37 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 Attachment B Documentation of Required Average Strength – Trial Mixtures (ACI 301, 4.2.3.4.b) A. Summary of Test Record(s): Trial Mix No. 7-Day Tests 28-Day Tests Water- Cementitious Materials Ratio Slump (in) Air Content (percent) Temperature (F) No. of Test Cylinders Strength (psi) No. of Test Cylinders Strength (psi) B. Maximum water-cementitious materials ratio ________. 1. Provide an interpolation calculation or plot of strength versus water-cementitious materials ratio. C. Submit the following data for each mix: 1. Brand, type, and amount of cement. 2. Brand, type, and amount of each admixture. 3. Amount of water used in trial mixes. 4. Proportions of each aggregate material per cubic yard. 5. Gross weight per cubic yard. 6. Measured slump. 7. Measured air content. 8. Compressive strength developed at 7 days and 28 days, from not less than three test cylinders cast for each 7-day and 28-day test. END OF ATTACHMENTS Architectural Precast Concrete 03 45 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 03 45 00 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to provide precast concrete units as shown and specified. The Work also includes: a. Providing all necessary connection hardware required to be embedded in the precast concrete and all loose connection hardware. B. Coordination: 1. Review applicable installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed in the precast concrete units. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. ACI 318, Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete, which includes referenced ASTM Standards. a. Comply with local building code requirements where more stringent than ACI 318. 2. PCI MNL 116, Quality Control for Plants and Production of Structural Precast Products. 3. PCI MNL 117, Manual for Quality Control, for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products. 4. PCI MNL 122, Architectural Precast Concrete. B. Fabrication Qualifications: Fabricated by a firm regularly engaged in the manufacture of precast concrete. Manufacturer must be able to show that he has the experienced personnel, physical facilities, established quality control procedures, and a management capability sufficient to produce the required units without causing delay of the project. The manufacturer shall be certified under the PCI Plant Certification program for the category of work required for this project. The manufacturer shall follow in principle the procedures for quality control as established in the PCI Manual MNL 117, "Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of Architectural Precast Concrete Products." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings showing all unit shapes (elevations and sections), fabrication details, finishes, reinforcement, connection details, joint details, lifting and erection insert locations, location and details of hardware attached to the structure, relationship of Architectural Precast Concrete 03 45 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements precast to adjacent material, handling procedures and sequence of erection. Shop Drawings shall indicate separate identification marks for each different precast unit. B. Samples. Submit the following: 1. Submit three (3) precast samples approximately 12"x12"x2" to illustrate the color and each texture of the proposed finished product. 2. Attached to the back of each sample shall be a label, identifying the manufacturer, the project, and the concrete mix design as follows: a. Type and color of cement (for face mix). b. Type of coarse aggregate and size, gradation and source (for face mix). c. Type of fine aggregate and size, gradation and source (for face mix). d. Water/cement ratio. e. Type of finish and how achieved. f. Twenty-eight-day compressive strength. 3. The concrete should be mixed, placed, consolidated, and finished in the same manner as in the actual production. The exposed exterior surface shall also be accomplished by standard production techniques. After approval, one sample will be returned to the manufacturer as his control sample, one other sample shall remain at the jobsite, and the other sample returned to the ENGINEER. All approved samples shall be signed by the ENGINEER. 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Delivery and Handling: Transport and handle precast concrete units with proper equipment to protect them from dirt and damage. Handle by means of lifting inserts. B. Storage: Store units off the ground and on firm surfaces to avoid warping and cracking. Protect units from damage and discoloration. Stack so that lifting devices are accessible and undamaged. Separate stacked members by battens across full width of each bearing. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete: Refer to Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. B. Reinforcing Steel: Refer to Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete. C. Cast In Anchors and Connection Hardware: 1. Material: a. Plates, angles, and other heavy steel hardware used for connections shall be stainless steel. b. Inserts, bolts and other accessories used for permanent connections that do not require welding shall be stainless steel. c. Provide all necessary anchors and connection hardware required for facing panels. Architectural Precast Concrete 03 45 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2.02 DESIGN AND FABRICATION A. Design precast concrete to support the shipping, handling and lifting loads shown or specified, in addition to the dead weight load of the precast concrete. B. Molds: Molds for precast concrete shall be rigid and constructed of material that will result in finished products conforming to the shape, lines, and dimensions shown on the approved Shop Drawings and will permit the manufacture of finished products to the tolerances specified herein. C. Connections: The design and sizing of connections of units to supporting members and to other units for all design loads shall be by manufacturer. D. Finishes: 1. Exposed face of units shall be cast in such a manner as required to impart a surface without fins or surface blemishes. Provide a reveal on the exposed face of the units as indicated on the contract drawings. 2. Other surfaces not exposed to view shall be finished in accordance with Section 03 30 00. E. Cover: 1. All reinforcing steel shall have a minimum cover of 1-1/2 inches and shall be accurately located as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. 2. No metal or plastic rebar support chairs shall be used in the finished face. 3. Install embedded anchors, inserts, plates, angles and other cast in items as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. All such items shall have sufficient anchorage and embedment for design requirements. F. Curing: Curing shall be in accordance with the recommendations made by ACI Committee 533 and manufac¬turer's standard acceptable practice. G. Identification: Provide permanent markings on each unit to correspond to identification marks shown on the Shop Drawings for each location. Mark each precast concrete unit with the date cast. Markings shall not be shown in the finished work. H. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Manufacture and install precast concrete unit so that tolerances for dimensions, concrete requirements and appearance shall be as indicated in PCI Manual "Architectural Precast Concrete" Paragraphs 4.7.1, Tolerances for Erection, 4.7.2, Tolerances for Manufacturing, 4.7.3, Tolerances for Interfacing of Other Manufactured Building Materials, 4.7.4, Suggested Tolerances for Manufacturing, and Paragraph 4.7.5, Acceptability of Appearance. a. Bowing, concave or convex of a flat surface: Not over L/360 with a maximum of 3/4" up to 30 feet. b. Maximum permissible warpage of one corner out of the plane of the other three: Shall be 1/16" per foot distance from the nearest adjacent corner. 2. Dimensional Tolerances of Finished Panels: Architectural Precast Concrete 03 45 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Overall height and width of precast units measured at face adjacent to mold at time of casting: 1). Units 10 ft. or under plus or minus 1/8". 2). Units 10 ft. to 20 ft. + 1/8", 3/16". 3). Units 20 ft. to 30 ft. + 1/8", 1/4". 4). Units over 30 ft. plus or minus 1/16" for each additional 10 ft. b. Thickness of units + 1/8", 1/8". c. Openings within one unit plus or minus 1/4". d. Units and openings within units: Not out of square more than 1/8" per 6' or 1/4" total, whichever is greater. e. Tolerances on any dimension not specified herein: The numerically greater of plus or minus 1/16" per 10'. 3. Position Tolerances: For cast in items measured from datum line, locations as shown on the approved Shop Drawings: a. Location of anchors and inserts plus or minus 3/8" of centerline location. b. Location of block outs and reinforcement where such positions have structural implications or affect concrete cover: Plus or minus 1/4" of the position shown; otherwise plus or minus 1/2". I. Color: Color and texture to be selected by Engineer from manufacturers standard selection of colors and textures. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. After standard samples are accepted for color and texture, the ENGINEER may visit the precast manufac¬turer's facility for the purpose of inspecting and review of the first production units only. Precast products which do not meet the color and texture range or the dimensional tolerances of these specifications may be rejected at the option of the ENGINEER if they cannot be satisfactorily corrected. The ENGINEER will mark the approved production standard which will serve as the control model for deter¬mining the range of acceptability with respect to color and texture variations, surface defects and overall appearance. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintain¬ing the standard quality so established. B. Units which do not meet the color and texture range or the dimensional tolerances shall be rejected by the ENGINEER if they cannot be satisfactorily corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Preparation: 1. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing lines, center and grades in sufficient detail to allow installation of the precast units. Architectural Precast Concrete 03 45 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Prior to installation of the precast units, the manufacturer/ erec¬tor shall check at the jobsite all dimensions affecting the work under his contract. Any discrepancies between design dimensions and field dimensions which could adversely affect installation in strict accordance with the contract documents shall be brought to the CONTRACTOR's and ENGINEER's attention. If such condition exists, installation shall not proceed until they are corrected or until installation requirements are modified. B. Installation: 1. Clear, well drained unloading areas and road access shall be provided and maintained by the CONTRACTOR, to a degree that all trucks delivering precast concrete products are able to reach their unloading areas under their own power. 2. Only competent workmen who are properly trained to handle and erect precast concrete units shall be employed. All precast concrete units shall be erected level, plumb, square and true within the allowable tolerances. They must be positioned so that cumulative dimensional error is not allowed. Horizontal and vertical joints shall be correctly aligned and uniform joint width shall be maintained as erection progresses. Each unit shall be securely fastened in place as indicated on the approved Shop Drawings. Adjustments or changes in connections which could involve additional stresses in the products or the connections, shall not be permitted without approval by the ENGINEER. Units shall be erected in a sequence indicated on the Shop Drawings. 3. Tolerances of the erected units shall be in accordance with those indicated herein and as indicated in Paragraph 4.7 of PCI Manual "Architectural Precast Concrete." C. Damage and Repairs: The manufacturer/erector shall be responsible for any chipping, spalling, cracking or other damage to the precast units after delivery to the jobsite. After installation is completed and damaged units are repaired, inspected, and approved, any further damage is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. In any event any repairs will be done by the manufacturer, who will be compensated by the CONTRACTOR for repairs for damage for which he is not responsible. D. Protection of Work: The manufacturer shall protect units from damage by field welding or cutting operations, and provide non combustible shields as necessary during these operations. All work and materials of other trades shall be adequately protected by the manufacturer/ erec¬tor at all times. E. Cleaning: 1. All exposed facing shall be cleaned as necessary to remove dirt and stains which may be on the units after erection. The precast units shall be cleaned only after all installation procedures, including joint treatment, are completed. The exposed facings shall be cleaned by the manufacturer in accor¬dance with the best industry practices. Construction dirt, caused by rain splashed mud on the panels after they have been installed clean, will be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. 2. Care shall be taken that no part of the building or surrounding site work be damaged, or that the character of the architectural finishes be changed by the cleaning material or process. END OF SECTION Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 04 05 05 UNIT MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 1.00 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install all unit masonry construction. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in unit masonry construction to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into unit masonry construction all items such as sleeves, anchorage devices, inserts, and other items to be embedded in unit masonry construction for which placement is not specifically included under other Sections. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items to be installed with or before unit masonry construction Work. 2. Remove and rebuild unit masonry construction advanced without built in flashings and other built in items at no additional cost to OWNER, even after unit masonry construction has been completed. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 05 11, Masonry Mortaring and Grouting. 2. Section 04 05 19, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing. 3. Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications. 4. Section 06 10 53, Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 5. Section 07 11 13, Bituminous Dampproofing. 6. Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 7. Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 8. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 9. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 530, Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 2. ACI 530.1, Specification for Masonry Structures. 3. ASTM C67, Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Brick and Structural Clay Tile. 4. ASTM C140, Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 5. ASTM C387, Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 6. ASTM C780, Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unity Masonry. 7. ASTM C1091, Test Method for Hydrostatic Infiltration Testing of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines. 8. ASTM C1093, Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. 9. ASTM C1314, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. 10. BIA, Technical Notes on Brick Construction. 11. NCMA, TEK Manual for Concrete Masonry Design and Construction. 12. UL, Design No. U 905, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Non-bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. 13. UL, Design No. U 906, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Non-bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. 14. UL, Design No. U 907, Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 or 4 HR. 15. UL, Design No. U 909, Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 or 4 HR. 16. UL, Design No. U 913, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Non-bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. 17. UL, Design No. U 914, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Non-bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR. 1.03 TERMINOLOGY A. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: 1. “Masonry control joint” is a joint in interior and exterior masonry walls that allows expansion and contraction to occur independently without damage to the masonry. 2. “Masonry expansion joint” is a control joint in interior and exterior masonry walls, located at the separation between adjoining parts of a concrete or steel structure that is provided to allow movements transferred to the masonry to occur independently without damage to the masonry. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a. Engage a single installer regularly engaged in preformed unit masonry installation and with successful and documented experience in erecting unit masonry of the scope and type of Work required; and who employs only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in the type of Work required. Submit name and qualifications with the following information for a minimum of three successful projects: 1). Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects, or engineers responsible for projects. 2). Approximate contract cost of unit masonry. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3). Quantity (area) of unit masonry installed. 2. Testing Laboratory: a. In accordance with ASTM C1093 and Section 01 45 29.13, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Owner, and Section 01 45 29.23, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain each type of concrete masonry units from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform texture and color or in an established uniform blend thereof. 2. Use a single source and brand of mortar materials throughout the Work. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Where fire-resistance classification is shown or indicated (e.g., four-hour rating, three- hour rating, and similar designations) for unit masonry construction, comply with applicable requirements for materials and installation established by UL tests referenced in this Section and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Job Mock up: 1. Prior to installing unit masonry and after ENGINEER’s approval of Samples, erect job mock ups using materials, pattern bond, and joint tooling shown or specified. Build mock up at the Site, at location acceptable by ENGINEER, of full required wall thickness. Mock-up shall be approximately four feet by 3.33 feet unless another size or location is shown or indicated for the job mock-up. Provide special features as directed, including finished opening 16 inches by 16 inches, finished end, and masonry control joint. Indicate proposed range of color, texture, and workmanship to be expected in the completed Work. Obtain ENGINEER’s approval of visual qualities of mock up before starting unit masonry construction. Retain and protect mock up during construction as a standard for judging unit masonry Work. Do not alter, move, or destroy mock up until given permission by ENGINEER. 2. Build as many mock up panels as required to obtain ENGINEER’s approval. 3. Masonry construction that does not comply with standards approved on mock-up panel shall be removed and rebuilt to conform to the Contract Documents. Provide mock up panel for the following: a. Typical complete exterior walls, including metal cavity wall flashing, anchors and masonry wall ties, and other components of complete exterior wall system. b. Typical interior partition of concrete unit masonry using all shapes and accessories shown or indicated on the approved Shop Drawings and other submittals. E. Pre-Construction Masonry Conference: 1. Prior to installing unit masonry construction, CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR’s installer shall attend pre-construction masonry conference at the Site. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to unit masonry construction including, but not limited to, the following: a. Requirements of the Contract Documents. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Structural concept. c. Sequence of masonry construction. d. Special masonry details. e. Standard of workmanship. f. Prism and grout sampling, and unit masonry test results. g. Quality control requirements. h. Project organization and availability of materials, tradesmen, equipment, and facilities required to avoid delays. i. Masonry control and expansion joint locations and materials. j. Modular planning requirements. k. Weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. l. Required inspection, testing, and certifying procedures. m. Requirements for complying with building codes. 2. Attendance at the conference is mandatory for the following: a. CONTRACTOR, including Site superintendant. b. Masonry Subcontractor’s superintendent and foreman. c. Authorized representative of face brick and concrete unit masonry Suppliers. d. ENGINEER e. Resident Project Representative, if any. f. Coordinating Special Inspector. 3. If additional information is required to adequately cover items on agenda, reconvene conference as soon as possible. 4. CONTRACTOR shall record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) and furnish a copy of the record to each person and entity attending. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: Shop Drawings: a. Complete layout of all masonry walls showing modular planning and all special shapes to be used in the Work. Show all details for each condition encoun¬tered in the Work. Submit plan and elevation views drawn at scale of 1/4-inch equal to one foot, and details drawn at scale of 1.5-inch equal to one foot. Show all items included in the unit masonry construction. b. Masonry control joint locations and details. c. Drawings showing location, extent, and accurate configuration and profile of all items required by the Contract Documents, in this and other Sections, for unit Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements masonry construction. Provide elevations drawn at scale of 1/4-inch equal to one foot, and details drawn at scale of 1.5-inch equal to one foot. d. Drawings for fabricating, bending, and placing of reinforcing bars. Submit bar schedules, diagrams of bent bars, stirrup spacing, lateral ties, and other arrangements and assemblies required for fabricating and placing of reinforcing for unit masonry construction. e. Job Mock-Up: Shop Drawings showing location, extent, and accurate configuration of items to be built-in to mock-ups. Provide elevations drawn at scale of 1.5-inch equal to one foot. 2. Samples: a. Mock-ups. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Pre-installation test results in accordance with ASTM C140 and ASTM C1314, and the field quality control Article of this Section. b. Post-installation quality control submittals in accordance with the field quality control Article of this Section. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer. b. Testing laboratory. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Record Documentation: a. Indication location of all masonry control joints and expansion joints. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1. Storage: Maintain temperatures in shelter so that masonry materials are above 20 degrees F when installed. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. General: a. Temporary Facilities and Temporary Utilities: Provide supplemental heat sources and energy as required for unit masonry construction in cold weather. b. Do not perform unit masonry construction when air temperature is below 28 degrees F for rising temperature, or below 36 degrees F for falling temperatures, without providing temporary enclosures and heat, or without heating materials or other measures necessary to prevent freezing as specified. c. Do not use frozen materials and do not build on frozen unit masonry construction. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements d. Remove and replace all unit masonry construction damaged by cold temperatures and freezing. 2. Protection: a. Cold Weather Protection: Protect unit masonry construction against freezing for at least 48 hours after placement, as follows: 1). When anticipated minimum temperature will be between 40 degrees F and 25 degrees F, cover newly constructed masonry with weather-resistive membrane for 48 hours after installation. 2). When anticipated minimum temperature will be between 25 degrees F and 20 degrees F, completely cover newly constructed masonry with weather-resistive insulating blankets, or equal protection, for 48 hours after installation. 3). When anticipated minimum temperature will be below 20 degrees F, maintain newly constructed masonry at temperature above 32 degrees F for at least 48 hours after installation by using heated enclosures, electric heating blankets, infrared lamps, or other acceptable methods of supplementary heating. b. Hot Weather Protection: When mean daily temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or exceeds 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than eight miles per hour, fog-spray newly constructed masonry until damp at least three times per day until masonry is 72 hours old. c. When Work is not in progress, protect partially-completed unit masonry construction against rapid heat loss and from water entering the masonry by covering top of walls with strong, waterproof, non-staining membrane. Extend membrane at least two feet down both sides of wall and secure in place using wall cover clamps spaced at intervals of four feet and at each end, and at joints in the membrane. d. Do not apply floor or roof loading for at least 72 hours after completing masonry columns or walls. e. Do not apply concentrated loads for at least 168 hours after completing masonry columns or walls. 3. Cold Weather Unit Masonry Construction: a. When mean daily temperature is below 40 degrees F, mortar used in unit masonry construction shall be portland cement-lime-sand mortar using high-early strength portland cement. Use mortar within 1.5 hours of initial mixing. Use grout within 1.5 hours of initial mixing. b. Clay or shale unit masonry with suctions in excess of 20 grams of water per 30 square inches per minute shall be sprinkled with heated water just prior to installation. Provide water temperature above 70 degrees F when temperature of masonry units is above 32 degrees F. Water temperature shall be above 120 degrees F when temperature of masonry units is below 32 degrees F.For Air Temperatures of 40 degrees F to 32 degrees F: Water and aggregates used in mortar and grout shall not be heated above 140 degrees F. Heat mortar sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F at Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements time of mixing. Heat water and aggregates for grout when water or aggregate temperature is below 32 degrees F. c. For Air Temperatures of 32 degrees F to 25 degrees F: Comply with Paragraph 1.7.A.3.c of this Section and the following: Maintain mortar temperature above freezing until used in masonry. Heat aggregates and mixing water for grout to produce grout temperature between 70 degrees F and 120 degrees F at time of mixing. Maintain grout temperature above 70 degrees F at time of grout placement. 4. Hot Weather Unit Masonry Construction: Using methods acceptable to ENGINEER, protect unit masonry construction from direct exposure to wind and sun when ambient air temperature is 99 degrees F in shade with relative humidity less than 50 percent. a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or exceeds 90 degrees F with wind velocity greater than eight miles per hour, maintain temperature of mortar and grout below 120 degrees F. Flush mixers, mortar transport containers, and mortarboards with cool water before they come into contact with mortar ingredients or mortar. Maintain mortar consistency by re-tempering with cool water. Use mortar within two hours of initial mixing. Use grout within 1.5 hours of initial mixing. Maintain sand piles in damp, loose condition. b. When ambient temperature exceeds 115 degrees F, or exceeds 105 degrees F with wind velocity greater than eight miles per hour, comply with Paragraph 1.7.A.4.a of this Section and the following: Use cool mixing water for mortar and grout. Use of ice will be allowed in mixing water prior to use; ice is not allowed in the mixing water when added to other mortar or grout materials. Shade materials and mixing equipment from exposure to direct sunlight. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Material requirements for masonry materials are in the following: 1. Section 04 05 11, Masonry Mortaring and Grouting. 2. Section 04 05 19, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing. 3. Section 04 21 13, Brick Masonry. 4. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. B. Mortar, General: 1. Where question of compliance with or interpretation of requirements of this Section arises, mortar properties Specification will take precedence over mortar proportion Specifications. 2. Make no change in proportions established for mortar approved under property Specifications, and do not use materials with different physical characteristics in mortar unless compliance with require¬ments of property Specifications is re established by Shop Drawing or submittal data. 3. Do not combine two air entraining materials in mortar. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which unit masonry construction will be installed, and notify ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Wetting of Masonry Units: 1. Face Brick: Wet brick having ASTM C67 absorption rates in excess of 20 grams of water per 30 square inches per minute, so that rate of absorption when laid does not exceed the following. a. Determine absorption by placing 20 drops of water using medicine dropper inside one-inch diameter circle on typical brick units. If water is absorbed within 90 seconds, wet the brick before laying. 2. Use wetting methods that ensure that each masonry unit is nearly saturated, but surface-dry when laid. 3. Concrete Masonry Units: Except for absorbent units specified to be wetted, lay masonry units dry. Do not wet concrete masonry units. B. Cleaning of Reinforcing: Before placing, remove loose rust, mill scale, earth, ice, and other contamination from reinforcing materials. Do not use reinforcing bars with kinks or bends not shown or approved Shop Drawings, or bars with reduced cross section due to rusting or other causes. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Thickness: Build walls, floors, and other unit masonry construction to thickness shown or indicated. Build single wythe walls to actual thickness of masonry units using units of nominal thickness shown or indicated. B. Build chases and recesses as shown or required by others, as specified. Provide not less than eight inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and between adjacent chases and recesses. C. Leave openings for equipment, piping, ducts, and other items to be installed subsequent to starting unit masonry construction. After installa¬tion of said items, complete unit masonry construction to match the Work immediately adjacent to openings. D. Cut masonry units using motor-driven wet cutting saws to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units as required to provide pattern shown and to fit adjoining Work neatly. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. Provide special unit masonry shapes for transitions and intersections. Do not attempt to field-cut special shapes from regular unit masonry shapes, and do not use other options for special unit masonry shapes. E. Build interior masonry walls visible from both sides in the finished Work using two wythes of masonry. Masonry shall be continuous over entire plane of wall, including walls that continue behind fixtures, equipment, furniture, lockers, and similar items Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. General: 1. Mortar Types: Unless otherwise shown or indicated, use mortar specified in Section 04060, Mortar and Masonry Grout, as follows: a. Use Type S mortar for all exterior and interior load-bearing and non load-bearing walls. b. Use mortar type specified in Section 04060, Mortar and Masonry Grout, for tuck pointing mortar. c. Use grout fill for structural requirements and for grouting reinforcing steel in unit masonry construction. d. Do not use mortar that has begun to set or if more than thirty minutes have elapsed since initial mixing. Re-temper mortar during the thirty-minute period only as required to restore workability. 2. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface pattern bond with uniform joint widths and to properly locate openings, masonry control joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less than half-size units at corners, jambs, and where possible at other locations. 3. Lay up walls plumb and true to comply with specified tolerances, with courses level, accurately spaced, and coordinated with other work. 4. Pattern Bond: a. Lay exterior, and interior concrete unit masonry in running bond pattern with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below. Avoid using less than full-size units. b. Lay exterior and interior face brick unit masonry in pattern bonds shown or, if not shown, lay in running bond with vertical joints in each course centered on units in courses above and below. c. Lay concrete unit masonry scheduled or shown to be concealed by finish materials, except paint, with units in wythe bonded by lapping not less than two inches. d. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. e. Do not use units with less than four inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 5. Color and Texture: a. Lay brick masonry using mortar of natural color. b. Lay concrete unit masonry using mortar of natural color. c. Lay existing brick masonry using tuck pointing mortar of natural color. B. Construction Tolerances: 1. Variation from Plumb: For lines and surfaces of columns, walls and arises, do not exceed 1/4-inch in ten feet, or 3/8-inch in a story height (20 feet), maximum, nor 1/2-inch in 40 feet or more. Except for external corners, expansion joints and other conspicuous lines, Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements do not exceed 1/4-inch in any story or 20 feet maximum, nor 1/2-inch in 40 feet or more. 2. Variation from Level: For lines of exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines, do not exceed 1/4-inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/4-inch in 40 feet or more. 3. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position shown and related portion of columns, walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2-inch in any bay or 20 feet maximum, nor 3/4- inch in 40 feet or more. 4. Variation in Cross Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4-inch nor plus 1/2-inch. C. Mortar Bedding and Jointing: 1. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joint; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. 2. Lay hollow concrete masonry units with full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. Bed webs in mortar in starting course of piers, columns, and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. 3. Maintain joint widths shown, except for minor variations re¬quired to maintain pattern bond alignment. If not shown, lay unit masonry to provide the following joint widths: a. Brick and Concrete Unit Masonry: 3/8-inch. b. Prefaced Concrete Unit Masonry: 1/4-inch. c. Concrete Unit Masonry Patches: Match existing adjacent joint width. 4. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by other materials, except paint, unless otherwise shown. 5. Tool exposed joints slightly concave, when mortar is “thumbprint hard”, unless otherwise required to match existing joint treatment. 6. Remove masonry units disturbed after laying; clean and reset in fresh mortar. Do not pound corners at jambs to fit stretcher units that have been set in position. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean off mortar and reset in fresh mortar. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Rake back one unit masonry length in each course; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set masonry, wet units lightly, if required, and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying new masonry. E. Built-in Work: 1. As the Work progresses, build-in the items shown, specified or required in the Contract Documents. Fill cores in one-block width solidly with mortar around built in items. 2. Do not fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar. 3. Where built in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place layer of cavity fill mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 4. Where required by Laws or Regulations, or to comply with thickness-to-height ratio, or to provide required fire resistance, fill all cells of unit masonry construction solid with grout. F. Structural Bonding of Multi Wythe Masonry: 1. Use individual metal ties embedded in horizontal joints to bond wythes together Refer to Section 04 05 19, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing, for type of ties required. Provide ties as shown, but not less than one metal tie for four square feet of wall area spaced not to exceed two feet on centers horizontally and vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than three feet apart around perimeter of openings. 2. Use continuous reinforcing embedded in horizontal mortar joints for bond tie between wythes as specified in this Section. 3. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each course at corners, unless otherwise shown or indicated. a. For horizontally reinforced masonry, provide continuity at corners with prefabricated “L” units as specified in this Section, in addition to masonry bonding. 4. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or masonry control joints are shown at juncture, provide same type of bonding specified for structural bonding between wythes and space as follows: a. Provide masonry bond in alternate courses. b. Provide individual metal ties at not more than two feet on centers vertically. c. Provide continuity with horizontal joint reinforcing using prefabricated “T” and “L” units. G. Non-Load Bearing Interior Partitions and Non-Load Bearing Interior Cavity Wall Wythe: 1. Build full height of story to underside of structure above, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 2. Tie non-load bearing partitions and non-load bearing interior wythe of cavity walls at top and sides with masonry anchors at terminations. Build in end blocks as shown and specified to facilitate placing compressible filler. Insert compressible filler, specified in Section 04 05 19, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing, in all horizontal and vertical joints where non-load bearing masonry and non-load bearing interior wythe of cavity walls terminate. Insert filler 3/4-inch from both faces of masonry. Use filler four times as thick as widest part of joint. Thickness of filler shall be a minimum of 1.5 times the compressed thickness. Compress filler to less than thickness of joint and insert. At splices, overlap strips by three inches and compress ends to form tight joint. Finish with backer rod and sealant. 3. At terminations of non-load bearing masonry walls and non load bearing interior wythe of cavity walls requiring a fire rating, use fire-safing insulation specified in Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. Build in end blocks to facilitate placing fire-safing insulation. Insert insulation in a continuous, vapor-tight, solid blanket to 3/4-inch from both faces of masonry. Finish with backer rod and sealant. H. Cavity Walls: Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Verify that bituminous dampproofing is installed; refer to Section 07 11 13, Bituminous Dampproofing. 2. Position insulation as shown and in accordance with Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 3. Install cavity drainage material. 4. Keep cavity clean of mortar droppings during construction by using continuous horizontal board of same width as cavity with lifting wires at each end. Lift board upward before placing horizontal joint reinforcing. Clean mortar droppings from board. Do not clean into cavity. Joints facing cavity shall be struck flush. 5. Tie exterior wythe to back up with individual metal ties spaced not more than 16 inches on centers vertically and 16 inches on centers horizontally. Stagger in alternate courses. 6. Tie exterior wythe to back up with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing, embedded in mortar joints at not more than 16 inches on centers vertically. Refer to Section 04090, Masonry Accessories, for type of reinforcing required. 7. Provide weep vents in exterior wythe of cavity wall in wall top courses and immediately below ledges and flashing, spaced two feet on centers, unless closer spacing is shown or indicated. Provide plastic weep vents. Keep weep vents free of mortar and other obstructions. I. Horizontal Joint Reinforcing: 1. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing as shown and specified. Refer to Section 04 05 19, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing, for reinforcing units required. Fully embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for entire length of rods with minimum cover of 5/8-inch on exterior side of walls and 1/2-inch at other locations. Lap reinforcing minimum of six inches at ends of units. Do not bridge masonry control joints and building expansion joints with reinforcing. 2. Reinforce walls with continuous horizontal joint reinforcing unless specifically indicated as being omitted. 3. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by using prefabricated “L” and “T” sections. Cut and bend units in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions for continuity at returns, offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures and other special conditions. 4. Space continuous horizontal reinforcing as follows: a. For multi-wythe walls, solid or cavity, that are structur¬ally bonded by masonry headers or individual wire ties, space horizontal reinforcing two feet on centers vertical¬ly. b. For multi-wythe walls, solid or cavity, where continuous horizontal reinforcing also acts as structural bond or tie between wythes, space reinforcing as required by Laws and Regulations, but not more than 16 inches on centers vertically. c. For single-wythe walls, space reinforcing at 16 inches on centers vertically, unless otherwise shown. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements d. For parapets, space reinforcing at eight inches on centers vertically, unless otherwise shown. 5. Reinforce masonry openings greater than 12 inches wide, with horizontal joint reinforcing placed in two horizontal joints approximately eight inches apart, immediately above lintel and immediately below sill. Extend reinforcing a minimum of two feet beyond jambs of opening. 6. In addition to wall reinforcing, provide additional reinforcing at openings as required to comply with the above. 7. Provide substantial and tight formwork and shores as required for temporary support of reinforced masonry elements. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork. 8. Construct formwork to conform to shape, line and dimensions shown. Make sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar grout. Brace, tie, and support as required for maintaining position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 9. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and all other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. 10. Allow not less than the following duration to elapse after completing a member before removing shores or forms, provided suitable curing conditions have been obtained during the curing period: a. Girders and Beams: Ten days. J. Grouting Structural Reinforced Unit Masonry Construction: 1. Limit extent of masonry construction to sections that do not exceed the maximum pour requirements specified. Provide temporary dams or barriers to control horizontal flow of grout at ends of wall sections. Build dams to full height of grout pour. If masonry units are used, do not bond into permanent masonry wythes. Remove temporary dams after completing grout pour. 2. Use fine grout for filling spaces less than four inches in both horizontal directions. Use coarse grout for filling spaces four inches or larger in both horizontal directions. 3. For spaces 10 inches and larger, use concrete fill. 4. Low Lift Grouting: a. Use low-lift grouting techniques using fine grout mix for the following: 1). Two-wythe walls with grout space of two inches or less in width. 2). Multi-wythe walls. 3). Columns, piers and pilasters where masonry units are shown in core areas enclosed by masonry units. 4). Grout spaces less than 2-inches in width at intervals not to exceed two feet in lifts of six to eight inches. 5). At CONTRACTOR’s option, low-lift-grouting technique may be used for structural reinforced unit masonry construction with grout spaces wider than two inches, Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements except use coarse grout mix and place in lifts not to exceed eight inches in height. b. Construct low lift structural reinforced unit masonry construction by placing reinforcing, laying masonry units and pouring grout as the Work progresses. c. Place vertical reinforcing bars and supports prior to laying of masonry units. Extend above elevation of maximum pour height as required to allow for splicing. Horizontal reinforcing bars may be placed progressively with laying of masonry units. d. Limit grout pours as required to prevent displacing masonry by grout pressure (blowout), but do not exceed 12-inch pour height. e. Lay masonry units prior to each grout pour, but do not construct more than 12 inches above maximum grout pour height in one exterior wythe and four inches above in other exterior wythe. Provide metal wall ties, if required, to prevent blowouts. f. Pour grout using container with spout and consolidate immediately by rodding or puddling; do not use trowels. Place grout continuously; do not interrupt pouring of grout for more than one hour. If poured in lifts, place from center to center of masonry courses. Terminate pour 1.5 inches below top of highest course in pour. 5. High Lift Grouting: a. High lift grouting technique may be used for the following structural reinforced unit masonry construction: 1). Two wythe walls with grout spaces of 2.5 inches or greater width. 2). Columns, piers, or pilasters when no unit masonry fill is shown to be placed in reinforced grout space. b. Place reinforcing and support in proper position, prior to laying of masonry units, except if shown to be placed in mortar joints, place as masonry units are laid. Place horizontal bars in grout spaces on same side of vertical bars. c. Construct high lift structural reinforced unit masonry construction by laying masonry to full height and width prior to placing of grout. Provide cleanout holes in first course of masonry, and use high-pressure water jet stream to remove excess mortar from grout spaces, reinforcing bars and top surface of structural members, which support wall. Clean grout spaces daily during construction of masonry. d. Walls: Omit every other masonry unit in first course of one wythe to provide cleanout holes. Tie wythes together with metal ties as shown or required by Laws and Regulations, but provide not less than nine-gage wire ties spaced not less than two feet on centers horizontally and 16 inches on centers vertically for running pattern bond or 12 inches on centers vertically for stack bond. e. Preparation of Grout Spaces: Prior to grouting, inspect and clean grout spaces. Remove dirt, dust, mortar dropp¬ings, loose pieces of masonry, and other foreign materials from grout spaces. Clean reinforcing and adjust to proper positioning. Clean top surface of structural members supporting masonry to ensure bond. After Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements cleaning and inspection, close cleanout holes with matching masonry units and brace closures to resist grout pressures. f. Place grout after entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained sufficient strength to resist grout pressure, but not less than three days curing time. Install shores and bracing, if required, before starting grouting operations. g. Place grout by pumping into grout spaces, unless alternate methods are acceptable to ENGINEER. h. Use coarse grout mix. Rod or vibrate each grout lift during placing and again after excess moisture has been absorbed, but before plasticity is lost. Do not penetrate or damage grout placed in previous lifts or pours. i. Limit grout pours to sections that can be completed in one working day with not more than one-hour interruption of pouring operation. Limit pours to not exceed capacity of masonry to resist displacement or loss of mortar bond due to grout pressures. 1). Do not exceed 12 feet pour height. 2). Do not exceed 25 feet horizontal pour dimension. j. Where pour height exceeds four feet place grout in series of lifts not exceeding four feet in height. Place each lift as continuous pouring operation. Allow at least 30 minutes and not more than 60 minutes between lifts of each pour. k. When more than one pour is required to complete a section of masonry, extend reinforcing beyond masonry as required for splicing. Pour grout to within 1.5 inches of top course of first pour. After grouted masonry is cured, remove temporary dams, lay masonry units, and place reinforcing for second pour section before grouting. K. Anchoring Masonry Work: 1. Provide anchoring devices as specified under Section 04 05 19, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing. If not shown or indicated, provide standard type for facing and back up involved in compliance with Laws and Regulations. 2. Anchor masonry to structural members where masonry abuts or faces such members to comply with the following: a. Provide an open space not less than a 1/2-inch or more than one-inch in width between masonry and structural members, unless otherwise shown. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials. b. Space anchors as shown, but not more than two feet on center vertically and three feet on centers horizontally. c. Provide end blocks where masonry abuts structural support to facilitate installation of compressible filler, fire-safing insulation, backer rod, and sealant. 3. Anchor single-wythe masonry veneer to backing with metal ties as follows: a. Anchor veneer to structural members with metal anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. Provide anchors with flexible tie section, unless otherwise shown. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 16 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Anchor veneer to concrete back-up with dovetail anchors and to structural steel back-up with slotted anchors. c. Space anchors as shown, but not more than two feet on centers vertically and three feet on centers horizontally. L. Masonry Control and Expansion Joints: 1. Provide vertical expansion and control joints in masonry where shown. Build in related items as unit masonry construction progresses. Rake out mortar in preparation for application of calking and sealants, in accordance with Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 2. Provide masonry control and expansion joints items specified under Section 04 05 19, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing, where masonry control and expansion joints are shown. a. Build-in compressible fillers as specified. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. b. Build-in factory-premolded control joint strips into masonry. Build-in sash block and premolded control joint strips as the Work progresses. c. Provide end blocks where masonry partitions abut structure to facilitate installation of compressible filler, fire-safing insulation, backer rod, and sealant. 3. Masonry Control and Expansion Joint Spacing: Provide masonry control and expansion joints as shown. M. Lintels and Bond Beams: 1. Provide steel lintels where shown and as specified in Section 05 50 13, Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications. 2. Provide masonry lintels and bond beams where shown and where openings of 16-inches or greater are shown without structural steel lintels. Provide formed-in-place masonry lintels and bond beams. Temporarily support formed in place lintels and bond beams. Unless otherwise shown or indicated, provide one horizontal No. 4 deformed reinforcing bar for each four inches of wall thickness. a. For hollow masonry unit walls, use specially formed U-shaped lintel and bond beam units with reinforcing bars placed as shown, filled with grout as specified in Section 04 05 11, Masonry Mortaring and Grouting. 3. Provide minimum bearing at each jamb, of four inches for openings less than six feet wide, and eight inches for wider openings. 4. On concrete and clay unit masonry walls where pattern bond remains visually exposed, increase minimum bearing of masonry lintels to maintain joint pattern of wall and install to be indistinguishable from surrounding masonry. N. Flashing of Masonry Work: 1. Provide concealed flashings in masonry Work as shown or indicated. Refer to Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim, for flashing requirements. Prepare masonry surfaces smooth and free from projections that might puncture flashing. Place through- wall flashing on bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal flashing penetrations with Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 17 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements mastic before covering with mortar. Terminate flashing 1/2-inch from face of wall, unless otherwise shown or indicated. a. Extend flashings beyond edge of lintels and sills at least four inches and turn up edge on sides to form pan to direct moisture to exterior. b. Interlock end joints of deformed metal flashings by overlapping deformations not less than 1.5 inches and seal lap with elastic sealant. c. For metal through-wall flashing, weld joints watertight. d. Install flashings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings and other submittals. e. Provide flexible flashings in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and approved Shop Drawings and other submittals. 2. Provide weep vents in head joints of first course of masonry immediately above concealed flashings. Spacing is specified elsewhere in this Section. 3. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related Work where shown to be built into unit masonry construction. 4. Install flexible masonry flashing into cast in place elastic masonry flashing reglets with lead wedges and fill reglet with elastic flashing manufacturers recommended bonding rubber based adhesive cement. 3.05 REPAIR, POINTING, AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or defective, or if units do not match adjoining units as intended. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in fresh mortar or grout, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up all joints at corners, openings, and adjacent Work to provide a neat, uniform appearance, properly prepared for application of sealant compounds. C. Cleaning Exposed, Unglazed Masonry Surfaces: 1. Wipe off excess mortar as the Work progresses. Dry-brush at end of each day’s work. 2. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean sample wall area of approximately 20 square feet as described below. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of sample cleaning before proceeding to clean remainder of masonry Work. a. Dry clean to remove large particles of mortar using wood paddles and scrappers. Use chisel or wire brush if required. b. Presoak wall by saturating with water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. c. Scrub down wall with stiff fiber brush and solution of half-cup of sodium hexameta phosphate and half-cup of household detergent dissolved in one gallon of water. d. Rinse walls, using clean, pressurized water, to neutralize cleaning solution and remove loose material. Unit Masonry Concrete 04 05 05 - 18 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements e. Acid cleaning of masonry is unacceptable. D. Protection: 1. Protect the unit masonry construction from deterioration, discoloration, and damage during subsequent construction opera¬tions. At areas where items are installed that project from the finish plane of masonry walls, such as concrete curbs, precast concrete sills, and the like, immediately upon completion of the projecting portion of the Work, provide a minimum 3/4-inch thick plywood cover, cut to fit, to prevent damage from operations continuing above the work. Refer to Section 06 10 53, Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Pre-construction Testing: a. Engage independent testing laboratory to obtain samples and conduct the following tests prior to the start of installation of unit masonry construction: 1). Mortar Test: For each mix required: ASTM C780. 2). Grout Test: For each mix required: ASTM C1019 and ACI 530.1. 3). Prism Test: For each type of construction required: ASTM C1314 and ACI 530.1. 4). Compressive strength of completed concrete unit masonry walls shall be at least 1,500 psi as determined by methods in ACI 530.1. b. Obtain ENGINEER’s acceptance of tests results prior to commencing installation of materials. c. After initial test, ENGINEER will require performance of up to five additional tests ENGINEER’s discretion. 2. During and After Installation: Comply with special Inspections notes on Structural contract drawings: a. Test and inspect unit masonry during construction in accordance with quality assurance program defined in ACI 530, ACI 530.1 and Laws and Regulations in effect at the Site, including building code. Level of special inspections shall comply with requirements of B and F-2 classification and occupancy. 3. Repair masonry walls that do not comply with requirements of the special inspections in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. END OF SECTION Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 04 05 11 MASONRY MORTARING AND GROUTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install masonry mortaring and grouting for unit masonry construction. 2. This Section includes masonry mortaring and grouting for masonry products specified in: a. Section 03 45 00, Architectural Precast Concrete. b. Section 04 21 13, Brick Masonry. c. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 3. Types of materials required under this Section include: a. Portland cement-lime mortars. b. Fire-resistant mortars. c. Ready-mixed mortar d. Fine grout. e. Coarse grout. f. Grout fill around reinforcement in masonry lintels and bond beams. g. Mortar waterproofing admixtures, inorganic pigments, and other miscellaneous mortar components and additives. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 45 00, Architectural Precast Concrete. 2. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 3. Section 04 21 13, Brick Masonry. 4. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI A108/A118/A136.1, Installation of Ceramic Tile. 2. ANSI/UL 263, Fire Resistance Ratings. a. BXUV U904, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR. b. BXUV U905, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. c. BXUV U906, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. d. BXUV U907, Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 or 4 HR. Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements e. BXUV U909, Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 or 4 HR. f. BXUV U912, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR. g. BXUV U913, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. h. BXUV U914, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR. 3. ASTM C5, Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes. 4. ASTM C144, Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 5. ASTM C150/C150M, Specification for Portland Cement. 6. ASTM C207, Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 7. ASTM C270, Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 8. ASTM C387/C387M, Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 9. ASTM C404, Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 10. ASTM C1019, Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Do not change source or brands of mortar materials during the Project. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Where fire-resistance classification is shown or indicated for unit masonry construction (four-hour, three-hour, and similar designations), proportion mortar and masonry grouts to comply with requirements established by fire rating designations of ANSI/UL 263 indicated in this Section, Laws and Regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. C. Job Mockup: Refer to Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. D. Pre-submittal Meeting: 1. Before submitting Samples of colored mortar for approval, CONTRACTOR and Supplier shall meet at the Site with ENGINEER to review existing mortar to be matched and to preview proposed materials and colors. 2. Refer to Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule of locations where each mortar type will be used in the Work. b. Grout mix design and material certification. 2. Product Data: Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Manufacturer’s specifications and instructions for each manufactured material or product. b. Compression test results of grout mix, for identical mix previously prepared and tested, in accordance with ASTM C1019, at maximum aggregate allowed. If no previously-prepared mix is identical, perform tests on the job mix design in accordance with ASTM C1019 and submit to ENGINEER. c. Product data and specifications for integral waterproofing admixture. 3. Samples: a. Each type of colored mortar, showing range of color expected in the Work. b. Standard and custom colors of epoxy pointing mortar for final selection by ENGINEER. c. Label samples to indicate type and quantity of colorant used. d. ENGINEER’s review will be for color only. Compliance with other requirements is CONTRACTOR’s responsibility. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: Provide the following for portland cement-lime mortars: 1. ASTM C150/C150M: a. Use Type I when installation temperature is 50 degrees F or higher. b. Use Type III, high-early strength, when installation temperature is lower than 50 degrees F. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Type I and Type III Portland Cement, by Essroc Italcementi Group. b. Type I and Type III Portland Cement, by Lehigh Portland Cement Company. c. White Portland Cement Type I and Type III, by Federal White Cement Ltd. d. White Portland Cement Type I and Type III, by Lehigh Portland Cement Company. e. Or equal. 3. Provide non-staining portland cement of natural color or of color required to be compatible with required mortar pigment color selected by ENGINEER. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S, or lime putty ASTM C5. C. Sand Aggregates: 1. Mortar Aggregates: ASTM C144, except for joints less than 1/4-inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 2. White Mortar Aggregates: Provide natural white sand or ground white stone for portland cement-lime mortars. Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Colored Mortar Aggregates: Provide ground marble, granite or other sound stone, as required to match the Sample approved by ENGINEER for portland cement-lime mortars. 4. Fine Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, Size No. 1. 5. Coarse Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404, Size No. 8 or Size No. 89. D. Colored Mortar Pigments: Provide the following for portland cement-lime mortars: 1. Commercial iron oxide, manganese dioxide, ultramarine blue, chromium oxide, or carbon black, compounded for use in mortar mixes. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. True-Tone Mortar Colors, by Davis Colors, a Subsidiary of Rockwood Pigments, Inc. b. SGS Concentrated Mortar Colors, by Solomon Colors. c. Or equal. 3. Do not exceed pigment to cement ratios, by weight, of one-to-35 for carbon black, and one-to-seven for other pigments. 4. Submit complete selection of manufacturer’s standard and custom colors for final selection by ENGINEER. E. Ready-mixed Mortar: Cementitious materials, water, and aggregate complying with requirements specified in Article 2.1 of this Section, combined with set-controlling admixtures to produce a ready-mixed mortar complying with ASTM C270 and ASTM C387/C387M. F. Water: Free of injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalis, and organic matter, and clean, fresh, and potable. G. Water-repellent Admixture for Exterior Masonry Mortar: 1. Provide cross-linked acrylic polymer integral waterproofing system. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. DRY-BLOCK Mortar Admixture, by Grace Construction Products Division, W. R. Grace & Company. b. Eucon Blocktite Mortar Admixture, by Euclid Chemical Company. c. Or equal. 3. Proportion: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 2.02 MORTAR MIXES A. General: 1. Material Performance: a. Masonry Strength: Refer to Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. b. If questions of compliance with the Contract Documents arise, Specifications for mortar properties shall take precedence over Specification for mortar proportions. Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Do not change proportions established for mortar approved, and do not use materials with different physical characteristics in mortar used in the Work, unless compliance with the Contract Documents for mortar properties is re-established via submittals approved by ENGINEER. 3. Do not combine in mortar different air-entraining materials. 4. Anti-freeze Admixture or Agents: Not allowed. 5. Calcium Chloride: Not allowed. B. Fire-Resistant Mortar: 1. Reference Standard: ANSI/UL BXUV U901 through BXUV U914. 2. Proportion: Use one part portland cement, three parts clean sand, and 15 percent hydrated lime (by cement volume). C. Mortar for All Other Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270, Table 2, except limit materials to those specified in this Section. Limit cement-to-lime ratio by volume as follows: 1. Type S: a. Provide the following proportions by volume: 1). Portland Cement: One part. 2). Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Over 1/4 to 1/2, maximum. 3). Aggregate Ratio (measured in damp loose condition): Not less than 2-1/4 and not more than three times sum of volumes of cementitious materials. b. Properties: 1). Average Compressive Strength, ASTM C270: 1,800 psi. 2). Minimum Water Retention, ASTM C270: 75 percent. 2. Maximum Air Content, ASTM C270: 12 percent. D. Grout: 1. Fine Grout: a. Provide the following proportions by volume: 1). Portland Cement: One part. 2). Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Zero to 1/10 part. 3). Aggregate Ratio (measured in a damp loose condition): Sand; not less than 2-1/4 and not more than three times sum of volumes of cementitious materials. b. Mix grout to have slump of ten inches plus or minus one inch at time of placement. 2. Coarse Grout: a. Provide the following proportions by volume: 1). Portland Cement: One part. 2). Hydrated Lime or Lime Putty: Zero to 1/10 part. Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3). Fine Aggregate Ratio (measured in a damp loose condition): Sand; not less than 2-1/4 and not more than three times sum of volumes of cementitious materials. 4). Coarse Aggregate Ratio: Not less than one and not more than two times the sum of volumes of cementitious materials. b. Mix grout to have slump of ten inches plus or minus one inch at time of placement. E. Grout Fill Around Reinforcement in Masonry Lintels: Portland cement, sand, gravel and water, to be proportioned as required to provide 28-day minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi. F. Colored Pigmented Cement Mortar: For portland cement-lime mortars proportion pigments with other ingredients as follows: 1. Mix to match Sample approved by ENGINEER. 2. For black mortar, mix with 1/8 part black iron oxide per part of portland cement and reduce lime content to not more than 1/10 part. G. Colored Aggregate Mortar: For portland cement-lime mortars proportion colored aggregate with other ingredients to match Sample approved by ENGINEER. 1. Proportion colored aggregate with other ingredients as follows: 2. Mix to match Sample approved by ENGINEER. H. Water-repellent Admixture: Add to mix in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which the Work will be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Measurement of Materials: 1. Cement and Hydrated Lime: Batched by the bag. 2. Sand: Batched by volume in suitably calibrated containers. Make allowance for bulking and consolidation, and for weight per cubic foot of contained moisture. 3. Proportion of Volumetric Mixtures: One 94-pound sack of portland cement and one 50-pound sack of hydrated lime constitute nominal one cubic foot. 4. Shovel measurement: Unacceptable. B. Mortar Mixing: 1. Type of Mixer: Machine mix in appropriate mixer in which quantity of water is accurately and uniformly controlled. Masonry Mortaring and Grouting 04 05 11 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. While mixer is operating, add approximately three-quarters of required water, half the sand, all the cement, and then add remainder of sand. 3. Allow batch to mix briefly and then add balance of water in small quantities until satisfactory workability is obtained. 4. Mix for not less than five minutes after all materials have been added. 5. Hydrated Lime for Mortar Requiring Lime Content: Use dry-mix method. Turn materials over together for each batch until even color of mixed, dry materials indicates that cementitious material has been thoroughly distributed throughout the mass, and then add water to obtain required plasticity. 6. Prepare lime putty, if approved for use, in accordance with ASTM C5. 7. Waterproofing Admixture: Add to mortar mix for all exterior masonry in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 8. Mixer drum shall be completely emptied before recharging the next batch. 9. Limit batch size to avoid re-tempering. Re-tempering of mortar is not allowed. 3.03 INSTALLATION AND MORTAR AND GROUT TYPE LOCATION A. For mortar and grout type, location, and installation requirements, refer to: 1. Section 03 45 00, Precast Architectural Concrete. 2. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. Refer to Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction, for load-bearing masonry wall strength tests. END OF SECTION Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 04 05 19 MASONRY ANCHORAGE AND REINFORCING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install masonry anchorages and reinforcing. 2. Section specifies masonry anchorages and reinforcing for Work specified in: a. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 3. Types of products required include: a. Continuous horizontal wire reinforcing and ties. b. Individual wire ties. c. Anchoring and positioning devices. d. Miscellaneous masonry accessories, reinforcing bars, compressible filler, and premolded control joint strips. B. Coordination: 1. Provide masonry anchorages and reinforcing of sizes, dimensions and configurations coordinated with unit masonry construction system component sizes, dimensions and configurations. 2. Where continuous horizontal cavity wall reinforcement is required for restraining cavity wall insulation, coordinate dimensions with specified thickness of cavity wall insulation for proper clearances. Refer to Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 01 21, Masonry Restoration and Cleaning. 2. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 3. Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. 4. Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 5. Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 6. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 7. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ACI 315, Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 2. ASTM A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A82/A82M, Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 4. ASTM A153/A153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 5. ASTM A167, Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. 6. ASTM A240/A240M, Specification for Heat-Resisting Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 7. ASTM A580/A580M, Specification for Stainless Steel Wire. 8. ASTM A615/A615M, Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ASTM A663/A663M, Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality, Mechanical Properties. 10. ASTM A1008/A1008M, Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 11. ASTM A1011/A1011M, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. 12. ASTM D2240, Test Method for Rubber Property – Durometer Hardness. 13. ASTM D2287, Specification for Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds 14. UL U904, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR (ANSI/UL 263). 15. UL U905, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR (ANSI/UL 263). 16. UL U906, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR (ANSI/UL 263). 17. UL U907, Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 or 4 HR (ANSI/UL 263). 18. UL U909, Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 or 4 HR (ANSI/UL 263). 19. UL U912, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR (ANSI/UL 263). 20. UL U913, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR (ANSI/UL 263). 21. UL U914, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR (ANSI/UL 263). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Provide all metal sheet, wire, plate and bar stock masonry anchorages and reinforcing from same manufacturer. 2. Miscellaneous masonry accessory items other than metal sheet, wire, plate and bar stock shall each be obtained from a single, manufacturer, which may be different from the manufacturer of other products specified in this Section. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Where fire-resistance classification (four-hour, three-hour, and similar designations) is shown or indicated for unit masonry construction, provide masonry anchorages and Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements reinforcing complying with requirements established by UL tests referenced in this Section (UL U901 through UL U914, as applicable), Laws and Regulations, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit drawings and material schedules showing all dimensions and sizes of masonry anchorages and reinforcing coordinated with unit masonry Work and other Work in which masonry anchorages and reinforcing will be embedded, be supported from, or restrained. b. Submit schedule indicating type, location, and spacing of each masonry accessory in unit masonry construction and that type, location, and spacing are in compliance with code requirements. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s product literature and specifications for each masonry accessory required. Include data substantiating that materials comply with the Contract Documents. 3. Samples: a. One unit or one modular length of each item specified. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Manufacturer's Instructions: a. Manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, and installing for each masonry accessory required. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with: 1. Applicable requirements of standards referenced in this Section. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Continuous Horizontal Wire Reinforcing and Ties: Provide the following for all masonry walls unless otherwise shown or indicated: 1. General: Provide the following: a. Reinforcement, wire and ties of cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A1064 and hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 ounces per square foot of zinc coating complying with ASTM A153. b. Welded wire units, prefabricated in straight lengths, at least ten feet long, with matching corner “L” and intersection “T” units, all with deformed continuous nine- Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements gage side rods and plain nine-gage truss-type diagonal cross-rods, butt-welded to side rods, not more than 16 inches on centers, with unit width of 1.5 to two inches less than thickness of wall or partition. c. Rectangular boxes, pintles and ties fabricated of 3/16-inch diameter wire, unless otherwise specified. 2. Single-wythe and Multi-wythe Masonry Walls (except cavity wall): a. Wall reinforcement system with one horizontal rod beneath each unit masonry face shell wall. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1). Truss Mesh Reinforcement with #120 Truss-Mesh, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). Series 300 Truss Mesh, by Wire-Bond.. 3). Or equal. 3. Multi-wythe Masonry Cavity Walls: a. Tab-type wall reinforcing and support system with single pair of side rods in interior wythe, four-inch wide boxes with restraint bar welded across box and adjustable rectangular pintle ties spaced not more than 16 inches on centers. Space side rods for embedment in each face shell wall of back-up wythe and extend box to allow engagement of rectangular pintle box tie for proper embedment in facing wythe. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). #165 Truss, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). Series 700 Truss Adjustable Tab, by Wire-Bond. 3). Or equal. 4. Provide special, custom-fabricated shapes to accommodate curved cavity, multi-wythe and single-wythe wall construction. B. Individual Wire Ties for Masonry: Provide the following where shown: 1. General: Provide the following: a. Reinforcing, wire, and ties of Cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82, and hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 ounces per square foot of zinc coating complying with ASTM A153 b. Crimped with vee-drip for use in cavity wall construction and of length required for proper embedment in outer-most face shell walls of wythes of masonry shown or indicated. c. Rectangular box ties and adjustable box ties fabricated of 3/16-inch diameter wire. 2. Single-piece Ties (where facing and back-up joints align): a. For use with hollow masonry units laid with cells vertical and with solid masonry units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal, provide four-inch wide rectangular shaped box-ties. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1). Rectangular Box Ties, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). No. 253 Rectangular Wire Ties, by Heckmann Building Products. 3). Or equal. 3. Adjustable Two-piece Ties (where facing and back-up joints do not align): a. For use with hollow masonry units laid with cells vertical, and with solid masonry units or hollow units laid with cells horizontal, provide four-inch wide adjustable rectangular shaped pintle and eye box-ties. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Rectangular Adjustable Wall Ties, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). No. 265 Adjustable Box Anchor, by Heckmann Building Products. 3). Or equal. C. Anchoring Devices for Masonry: Provide the following, unless otherwise shown or indicated: 1. General: Provide the following: a. Cold-rolled steel sheet complying with ASTM A1008; hot-rolled steel sheet and strip complying with ASTM A1011; plates and bars complying with ASTM A36; and cold-drawn steel wire complying with ASTM A82 all hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication with 1.5 ounces per square foot of zinc coating complying with ASTM A153 b. Rectangular, corrugated, one-inch wide ties, fabricated of 12-gage sheet metal, unless otherwise specified. c. Size tie lengths to extend to within one-inch of outside face of outer wythe face shell of opposite face of masonry or to a maximum depth of 12 inches and between 1.5 to two inches less than width of masonry abutting webs and to maximum depth of 12 inches abutting flanges of structural supports. Provide wire crimped with a vee-drip for use in cavity wall construction. d. Flexible Anchors: Where masonry abuts structural walls or framework, provide flexible anchors that allow horizontal and vertical movement of masonry, but provides lateral restraint. 2. Anchorage to Steel Columns and Steel Beam Webs: Provide the following for lateral restraint of unit masonry walls at structural steel framework: a. U-shaped, 7.5-inch long channels welded to steel structure, with 5.5 inches of vertical adjustment, fabricated from 11-gage steel with slotted ties. b. Weld-on, 12-gage, 3/4-inch wide seven-inch long anchor straps providing four inches of vertical adjustment, welded to steel structure. c. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). #360 - Gripstay Channels and #364 - Corrugated Gripstay Anchor, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). No. 130 Channel Anchor Slots and No. 134 Corrugated Anchor, by Heckmann Building Products. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3). Or equal. d. Triangular-shaped ties fabricated of 3/16-inch diameter wire with parallel overlapping ends. e. Rigid, polyvinylchloride or 22-gage steel seismic restraint clips, one for each triangular-shaped tie, 3/16-inches high with four horizontal snap-tight connection grooves, one accommodating nine-gage wire and three accommodating 3/16-inch diameter wire. f. Continuous, nine-gage wire snap-locked into seismic restraint clips for embedment in outer veneer wythe of masonry. 3. Anchorage to Bottom of Concrete Beams and Slabs and Bottom of Steel Beam Flanges: Provide the following for lateral restraint of unit masonry walls at bottom of beam flanges and concrete slabs: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). #PTA - 420 - Partition Top Anchors with PTA Tube, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). #419 Pin Type with #421 Plastic Tube, by Heckmann Building Products. 3). Or equal. b. Factory-fabricated partition anchor assembly consisting of 1/4-inch thick plate welded to 3/8-inch diameter, eight-inch long rod at center of plate face. Provide plate with two holes to accept fasteners. c. Clear acrylic tube with compressible polyethylene filler, one for each rod. 4. Lateral Supporting Masonry Wall Anchors: Provide the following for bracing freestanding walls exceeding allowable unbraced span: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). #344 Rigid Partition Anchor, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). #140 Masonry Anchor, by Heckmann Building Products. 3). Or equal. b. Plate, 1/4-inch thick by two inches wide fabricated with two-inch long bent legs at 90 degrees to flat face of anchor and of length to extend to center of each wythe of wall, but not less than 2.33 feet long. Cut to length as required. 5. Rebar Positioners: Provide the following: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). #RB Series and #RB-Twin Series Rebar Positioners, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). Rebar Positioners, by Heckmann Building Products. 3). Or equal. b. Nine-gage reinforcing bar positioners that accommodate both horizontal and vertical reinforcing steel. c. Fabricate units as required for the Work. Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements D. Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories: Provide the following where shown: 1. Reinforcing Bars: a. Deformed carbon steel, ASTM A615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 to No. 18, except as otherwise shown. b. Plain carbon steel, ASTM A663, Grade 80 where No. 2 bars are shown or required. c. Provide galvanized steel reinforcing bars complying with ASTM A153, Class B-1, where shown. 2. Compressible Filler: Provide watertight joint filler where unit masonry construction abuts structural framework members, or as shown. Provide the following: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Polytite Standard, by Polytite Manufacturing Corp. 2). Polyseal, by Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc. 3). Or equal. b. Polyurethane foam strip saturated with polybutylene waterproofing material that, when installed at a compression ratio of two-to-one, is impermeable to water. c. Resilient to -40 degrees F with 100 percent movement recovery. d. Elongation of 140 percent with a tensile strength of not less than 53 pounds per square inch. 3. Masonry Control Joint Components: Provide the following: a. Premolded Control Joint Strips: Provide complete selection of solid extruded rubber and PVC strips with a Shore A durometer hardness of 80 to 90 complying with ASTM D2240 and ASTM D2287, designed to fit standard sash block and maintain lateral stability in masonry wall. Size and configuration shall be as shown. 1). Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a). #RS12 - Control Joints, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. b). #2902 and #2903 Rubber Control Joints, by Wire-Bond.Or equal. b. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 4. Weep Vents: Provide the following: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one the following: 1). Goodco Brick Vents, by Williams Products, Inc. 2). No. 602 Louvered Weep Holes and Vents, by WIRE-BOND. 3). Or equal. b. Provide injection molded flexible polyvinylchloride brick vents of custom color to match face brick mortar color with top flap, flexible side wings, vertical louvers and water ridges. 5. Cavity Fill Mesh: Provide the following: Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). #MGS - Mortar/Grout Screen, by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. 2). No. 267 Plastic Mesh Wall Ties, by Heckmann Building Products. 3). Or equal. b. Monofilament screen of polypropylene polymers 1/4-inch mesh hardware cloth. Provide below all block courses that are to be filled with mortar. 6. Cavity Drainage Material: a. Manufactured of high density polyethelene or nylon strands woven into a 90 percent open mesh 1). Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a). Mortar Net, by Hohmann and Barnard, Inc. b). Mortar Net, by Heckmann Building Products. c). Or equal. 7. Drainable Wall Flashing: Provide the following a. High density polyethylene composition molded into a 0.0625-inch thick flashing pan with perimeter flanges and concaved weep spouts with a drip edge that extend beyond the out flange. b. Products and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1). Blok-Flash by Mortar Net. 2). Or equal. 8. Imbedded Flashing Materials: a. Metal Flashing: Refer to Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Weld-in-place all channel slots and other specified weld-on anchors at the shop. Field welding is unacceptable. B. Coordinate location of weld-on anchors and show on structural steel Shop Drawings required under Section 05 12 00, Structural Steel Framing. C. Weld anchor slots and other required accessories in place before shop priming of structural steel. D. Prime coat weld-on anchors and other accessories and passivate anchor coating in accordance with Section 09 91 00, Painting. E. Shop-fabricate reinforcing bars that are shown or required to be bent or hooked. Comply with ACI 315 for fabricating reinforcing steel for unit masonry Work. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing 04 05 19 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Refer to the following: 1. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. END OF SECTION Brick Masonry 04 21 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 04 21 13 BRICK MASONRY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all brick masonry. 1. Extent of each type of brick masonry is shown. 2. Types of products required include: a. Face brick b. Custom shapes, profiles, textures, colors, and sizes. c. Building (common) brick. d. Brick masonry units required to match existing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM C62, Specifications for Building Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 2. ASTM C126, Specifications for Ceramic Glazed Structural Facing Tile, Facing Brick, and Solid Masonry Units. 3. ASTM C216, Specifications for Facing Brick (Solid Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 4. ASTM C652, Specifications for Hollow Brick (Hollow Masonry Units Made from Clay or Shale). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain each type of brick masonry from one manufacturer, of uniform texture and color or uniform blend in the variation thereof, for each continuous area and for visually related areas. 2. Do not change source or brands of brick masonry materials during the Work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: Brick Masonry 04 21 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Submit copies of brick manufacturer’s specifications and test data for each type of brick masonry required. 2. Samples: a. Straps of each type of brick masonry specified. Select units to show range of color and texture expected in finished Work. b. Each type of custom molded brick masonry shapes shown or required. c. ENGINEER’s review will be for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following 1. Certifications: a. Recycle Content Face Brick Certifications: 1). Proof of compliance with requirements of federal and state authorities having jurisdiction regarding processing of recycled material transportation, testing, and handling. 2). Proof of successful operation and production of face brick units as specified. b. Certification of Compliance: Submit certification that each type of brick masonry required complies with the Contract Documents and applicable referenced standards. 2. Supplier Instructions: a. Submit instructions for handling, storing, installing, and protecting each type of brick masonry. 3. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit for approval laboratory testing acceptable to ENGINEER establishing minimum recycle content of face brick. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 BRICK SIZE A. Size: Unless otherwise shown or specified, provide standard modular-size brick for 3/8-inch mortar joints. Actual size for exposed vertical brick when laid as a stretcher shall be 7-5/8 inches long by 2-1/4 inches high by 3-5/8 inches wide. 1. Provide custom-molded shapes, profiles, and sizes where shown and for applications that cannot be sawed from standard brick sizes. 2. Where specified brick masonry is comprised of a mix or range of colors or textures, provide custom-molded brick masonry shapes in same mix or range of colors and textures as brick masonry specified. B. Size: Unless otherwise shown or specified, provide nominal eight-inch by eight-inch by four-inch brick. Actual size for exposed vertical brick masonry shall be 7-5/8 inches by 7-5/8 inches by 3-5/8 inches. Brick Masonry 04 21 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Provide custom-molded shapes, profiles, and sizes where shown and for applications that cannot be sawed from standard brick sizes. 2. Where specified brick masonry is comprised of a mix or range of colors or textures, provide custom-molded brick masonry shapes in same mix or range of colors and textures as brick masonry specified. 2.02 BRICK A. Hollow Face Brick: ASTM C652, Grade SW, complying with the following types. 1. Type HBS. 2. Color and Texture: a. Provide complete selection of brick manufacturer’s standard colors and textures within the following color group: 1). Red color group. b. Custom Colors and Textures: Match ENGINEER’s sample. 3. Face Brick to Match Existing: Match custom color, texture, and size of existing face brick 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Acme Brick, Company. b. Western Brick Company. c. Or equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to the following: 1. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. END OF SECTION Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install concrete unit masonry. 2. Extent of each type of concrete unit masonry is shown and indicated. 3. Types of materials and features required include: a. Hollow load bearing units. b. Hollow non-load-bearing units. c. Solid load bearing units. d. Split face load bearing units. e. Ground-face load bearing units. f. Integral waterproofing admixtures, lightweight aggregates, high recycle content, special and custom shapes required to complete the Work, complete selection of manufacturer’s standard and custom colors and other special, and custom features. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 2. Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 3. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM C33, Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. ASTM C90, Specification for Load bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 3. ASTM C129, Specification for Non-load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 4. ASTM C140, Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 5. ASTM C331, Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units. 6. ASTM C426, Test Method for Drying Shrinkage of Concrete Masonry Units. 7. ASTM C744, Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units. 8. ASTM C1093, Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. 9. ASTM C1262, Test Method for Evaluating the Freeze-Thaw Durability of Manufactured Concrete Masonry Units and Related Concrete Units. 10. ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Charac¬teristics of Building Materials. Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 11. ASTM E119, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 12. UL U 904, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR. 13. UL U 905, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. 14. UL U 906, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. 15. UL U 907, Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 or 4 HR. 16. UL U 909, Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 or 4 HR. 17. UL U 912, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR. 18. UL U 913, Bearing Wall Rating – 2 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 2 HR. 19. UL U 914, Bearing Wall Rating – 3 HR.; Nonbearing Wall Rating – 3 HR. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Testing Laboratory: In accordance with ASTM C1093. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain each type of concrete masonry units from one manufacturer, cured by one process and of uniform texture and color or an established uniform blend texture and color. C. Regulatory Requirements 1. Where fire resistance classification is shown (four hour, three hour, and similar designations) for concrete unit masonry construction, provide materials complying with requirements established by UL tests referenced in this Section (UL U901 through UL U914), Laws and Regulations including applicable building codes, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Complete layout of masonry walls showing modular planning, colors, patterns and all special shapes to be provided. Show details for each condition encoun¬tered in the Work. Provide plans and elevation at scale of 1/4-inch equals one foot, and details at scale of 1.5-inch equals one foot. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s specifications, manufacturing procedures, and test data for each material specified. Include instructions for handling, storage, installation, and protection of each type of concrete masonry unit. b. Laboratory test reports in accordance with ASTM C140. 3. Samples: Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Submit Sample of each type of concrete masonry unit required. Select each type of concrete masonry unit to show range of color and texture that will be provided in finished Work. b. Complete selection of manufacturer’s standard and custom colors. c. ENGINEER’s review will be for color and texture only. Compli¬ance with other requirements is responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certifications: Submit certification that concrete unit masonry has been manufactured using only licensing manufacturer’s approved materials, manufacturing methods, product standards, and is in accordance with ASTM C744. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Submit test results as specified in this Section. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Testing laboratory, if not explicitly included in submittals furnished under other Sections. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. At time of unloading at Site, concrete masonry units shall comply with ASTM C90, Table 2. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature in area of storage and installation so that masonry products are above 20 degrees F when installed. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL, CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY A. General: Unless specifically modified by other requirements of the Contract Documents, provide concrete unit masonry in compliance with classifications, weights, grades, colors, textures, scores, thermal resistance values, and other features specified in this Section. 1. Cure units by autoclave treatment at minimum temperature of 350 degrees F, and minimum pressure of 125 pounds per square inch. B. Hollow and Solid Load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, with minimum of 15 percent coal fly ash and 50 percent recycle aggregate as part of concrete mix. 1. Minimum compressive strength: 1,900-psi average of three units. C. Hollow Non-load-bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C129, with minimum of 15 percent coal fly ash and minimum 20 percent recycle aggregate as part of concrete mix. D. Size: Manufacturer’s standard units with nominal face dimensions of 16 inches long by eight inches high (15 5/8 inches by 7 5/8 inches actual). E. Moisture Control: Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Limit total moisture absorption until time of installation to maximum percentage specified for the weight classification in ASTM C90, Table 2. 2. Total linear dry shrinkage at time of installation shall be less than 0.065 percent. F. Special Shapes: Provide the following: 1. Lintels, bond beams, reinforcing units, and flush-end reinforcing units, interior and exterior corner shapes, solid jambs, sash block, coves, pre-molded control joint blocks, headers, and other special conditions. 2. Bullnose units for outside vertical corners including doors, windows, louvers and other openings, unless specifically shown on the Drawings indicating that such feature is not required. 3. End blocks at locations where masonry walls abut concrete, or steel columns, to facilitate installation of compressible filler, backer rod, and sealant or fire-rated fire stop sealant systems, if required. G. Waterproofing Admixture: Manufacture all types of concrete unit masonry used for constructing exterior walls (including interior Wythe of cavity walls) with integral waterproofing admixture as follows: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. DRY-BLOCK System, by Grace Construction Products Division, W. R. Grace & Company. b. Eucon Blocktite Integral Water-Repellent Masonry Admixture, by Euclid Chemical Company. c. Or equal. 2. Material: Cross-linking acrylic polymer. 3. Proportion: In accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. H. Provide lightweight concrete masonry units using aggregate complying with ASTM C331 producing dry net weight of not more than 105 pounds per cubic foot. I. Provide normal weight split-face units using concrete aggregates complying with ASTM C33 producing dry net weight of not less than 125 pounds per cubic foot. J. Exposed Faces: Provide manufacturer’s custom colors and textures as specified for type of concrete masonry unit. K. Provide two-core concrete masonry units. L. Provide exterior concrete masonry units with polystyrene foam insulation core inserts specified in Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation, with loose fill insulation specified in Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 2.02 SPLIT FACE CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. In addition to requirements applicable to all concrete masonry units, split face concrete masonry units shall comply with requirements of this Article. B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: Concrete Unit Masonry 04 22 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Split Faced Concrete Unit Masonry, by Headwaters Construction Materials. 2. Split Faced Concrete Unit Masonry, by Featherlite Building Products.Or equal. C. Hollow Load-bearing Split Face Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following: 1. ASTM C90 compliant. 2. ASTM C426, Dry Shrinkage: 0.025 percent maximum average for five specimens. D. Color and Texture: Provide the following: 1. ENGINEER will select maximum of four colors and textures for the Work. 2. Custom Colors: Match Sample approved by ENGINEER. 3. Color, surface texture, and aggregate uniform within normal range established by Sample approved by ENGINEER. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. END OF SECTION Galvanizing 05 05 13 - 1 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 05 05 13 GALVANIZING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section covers galvanic coatings or requirements for galvanizing and galvanizing of metal items as indicated on the Drawings or in the Specifications. This Section also covers galvanizing repairs as required. B. This Section covers all galvanized items. Such items shall be galvanized in accordance with relevant and appropriate manufacturing procedures in compliance with the referenced ASTM Standards and any special requirements as shown on the Drawings or in the Specifications. All referenced ASTM Standards apply to the Work. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards: ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A143 Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting Embrittlement ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A384 Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies ASTM A385 Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip) ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings ASTM B6 Specification for Zinc ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel ASTM B695 Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel ASTM D6386 Practice for Preparation of Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coated Iron and Steel Product and Hardware Surfaces for Painting ASTM E376 Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic-Field or Eddy- Current (Electromagnetic) Test Methods B. American Galvanizers Association (AGA) Standards: 1. Inspection of Products Hot-dip Galvanized After Fabrication. 2. The Design of Products to be Hot-dip Galvanized After Fabrication. 3. Recommended Details of Galvanized Structures. 4. Quality Assurance Manual. C. Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation: 1. Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or ASTM A490 bolts. Galvanizing 05 05 13 - 2 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 D. Federal Specifications: 1. DOD-P-21035 Paint, High Zinc Dust Content, Galvanizing Repair. 2. MIL-P-26915 Primer Coating, Zinc Dust Pigmented. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 “Submittal Procedures” and shall include: 1. Furnish notarized Certificate of Compliance with ASTM standards and specifications herein listed. The Certificate must be signed by the galvanizer and contain a detailed description of the material processed. The Certificate shall include information as to the ASTM standard used for the coating. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Galvanizer shall be a member of the American Galvanizers Association or as approved by the Engineer. B. Shop Drawing Review and Coordination: 1. Shop Drawings produced for items requiring galvanizing shall be reviewed by and coordinated with the Galvanizer, prior to Shop Drawings submittal to the Engineer. a. The Galvanizer shall review fabricator Shop Drawings for suitability of materials for galvanizing and coatings and coordinate any required fabrication modifications. b. The Shop Drawings shall clearly indicate lifting, filling, vent and drain hole size and locations. c. Materials: For steel to be hot-dip galvanized, provide steel chemically suitable for metal coatings complying with the following requirements: carbon below 0.25%, phosphorous below 0.04%, manganese below 1.3%, and silicon below 0.04%. Notify the galvanizer if steel does not meet these requirements so that suitability for galvanizing may be determined and whether special processing techniques are required. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Load and store galvanized articles in accordance with accepted industry standards. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Thickness of Coating: The thickness of galvanized coating shall be determined according to ASTM A653 or as shown on the Drawings. B. Repairs: Unless otherwise specified herein, all exposed galvanized surfaces which have been damaged by shipping, handling, welding or other operations shall be repaired by one of the following methods, as shown in the Contract Documents, or as directed by the Engineer. All exposed metal items shall be repaired by one of the methods described below. Galvanizing 05 05 13 - 3 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 1. Zinc-Based Solders: Zinc-based solders used for repair shall be of zinc-tin-copper alloys having liquidus temperatures in the range of 500 F to 600 F. The solders may be used in rod form or as powders. a. Solder shall be compatible with the galvanized items being repaired and meet Federal Specifications A-A-51145. 2. Organic Zinc-Rich Paints: Zinc-rich paints based on organic binders, premixed and formulated specifically for use on steel surfaces and which will provide a dried film containing a minimum of 94 percent zinc dust, by weight. Zinc rich paint shall have a silvery-finish and closely match color of new hot dip galvanizing. a. ZRC Galvilite Galvanizing Repair Compound. 3. Sprayed Zinc (Metalizing): A zinc coating applied by spraying the surface with droplets of molten metal using wire, ribbon or powder processes. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fabricated members or assemblies which are required to be hot-dip galvanized shall provide for proper filling, venting and draining during the cleaning and galvanizing operations. Drain holes or slots may be located as required except where prohibited by the Drawings. 1. Lifting, filling, venting and drain holes shall be constructed at the steel fabricator’s plant. B. Material 1/4 inch or greater in thickness shall have all sharp burrs removed and all edges to be exposed to human activity, such as railings, hand holes, and access holes, as well as electrical conductors, shall be chamfered approximately 1/16 inch to prevent injury or damage. C. Safeguard products against steel embrittlement in conformance with ASTM A143. D. Handle all articles to be galvanized in such a manner as to avoid any mechanical damage and to minimize distortion. E. Surface Finish: Continuous, adherent, and as smooth and evenly distributed as possible and free from any defect detrimental to the stated end use of the coated article. F. Coating Adhesion: Withstand normal handling consistent with the nature and thickness of the coating and normal use of the article. 3.02 QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection and testing of hot-dip galvanized coatings shall be done under the guidelines provided in the AGA publication “Inspection of Products Hot-dip Galvanized After Fabrication.” B. Include visual examination and tests in accordance with ASTM A123 or ASTM A153, as applicable, to determine the thickness of the zinc coating on the metal surface. Galvanizing 05 05 13 - 4 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 C. Galvanized coatings shall be inspected as follows: 1. Red Rust: Evidence of red rust on galvanized items indicates the presence of uncoated areas. Bare spots not greater than 1/8 inch across may be accepted, unless they are numerous, as determined by the Engineer. Larger bare spots shall be repaired in accordance with the repair process requirements outlined in this Section. 2. White Rust: A white powdery residue indicates the presence of moisture. Light coatings of white rust may be allowed to remain or be chemically removed when directed by the Engineer. White rust shall be removed from galvanized articles which will be in direct contact with soils. Heavy layers of white rust which have caused pitting of the coating shall be cause for rejection. 3. Alligator Cracking or Spider Webbing: Apparent dark lines resembling alligator skin are caused by the composition of the base metal. If the coating adhesion is sound, the coating is acceptable. Tapping with a small hammer will demonstrate coating adhesion. Lack of adhesion shall be cause for rejection. 4. Dull Gray Coating: Dull gray coatings may be caused by many factors but the coating is acceptable if the adhesion to the base metal is sound. Tapping with a small hammer will show if the coating is brittle. Scaling and flaking shall be cause for rejection. 5. Heavy Runs or Drips: Runs or drips of zinc coating are acceptable if they do not interfere with the intended use of the product. Excessive zinc (runs, lumps or heavy accumulations) may be carefully removed by hand filing. 3.03 REPAIR PROCESS A. Surfaces to be repaired with metalizing shall be dry, free of oil, grease, corrosion products and any welding slag or flux. The surface shall be cleaned to white metal. Apply the coating by metal-spraying pistols fed with either zinc wire or zinc powder. The sprayed coating shall be of uniform texture, free of lumps, coarse areas or loosely adhering particles. B. Surfaces to be repaired with zinc-based solders shall be free of moisture, oil, grease, dirt, corrosion products and welding slag or flux. Surfaces to be repaired shall be cleaned by wire brushing, light grinding or mild blasting extending into the surrounding undamaged galvanized coating. Preheat the cleaned areas to at least 600 F, but not more than 750 F, wire brush while heating and apply an evenly distributed layer of the zinc-solder. Do not direct flame on the solder rod but rather let heat from the base metal melt the alloy. Keep the base metal from overheating. When completed, flush the repaired area with water or wipe with a damp cloth to remove the flux residue. 1. For ZRC Galvilite Galvanizing Repair Compound provide two coats of 1.5 mils DFT, total 3 mil DFT. 2. For approved equal provide a minimum of two coats of 1.5 mils DFT, total 3 mil DFT, but not less than that recommended by the manufacturer. C. Galvanized items shall be field repaired and painted as per ASTM A780. 1. The maximum area to be repaired is defined in accordance with ASTM A123, Section 6.2. Galvanizing 05 05 13 - 5 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 D. After completion of the repair process, cooling or curing, the coating thickness in the repaired area shall be measured in accordance with ASTM A653. The minimum coating thickness for repairs shall be the same as that required for the specified galvanizing. END OF SECTION Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 1 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural steel. 2. Grout. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC's “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges,” that support design loads. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components. 1. Include details of cuts, connections, splices, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Include embedment drawings. 3. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. 4. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical high-strength bolted connections. 5. Indicate size and location of all lifting, filling, vent and drain holes required for galvanizing. Lifting, filling, vent and drain holes shall be coordinated with the galvanizer. 6. Galvanized items which will receive paint must be designated as such. C. Welding Certificates: 1. Provide the following welding certificates: a. Weld Procedure Specifications (WPSs) for all welds indicated in the Contract Documents. 1). If a WPS is not prequalified in accordance with AWS D1.1, then submit a performance qualification record (PQR) for each WPS that is not prequalified. b. Personnel qualifications for each person performing welding on the Site. D. Qualification Data: For installer and fabricator. Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 2 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 E. Mill Test Reports: Signed by manufacturers certifying that the following products comply with requirements: 1. Structural steel including chemical and physical properties. 2. Bolts, nuts, and washers including mechanical properties and chemical analysis. F. Source Quality-Control Test Reports. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer with a record of successfully performed projects of comparable size and complexity during the previous 5 years. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer is one who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category as follows: 1. Certified Steel Erector. 2. Advanced Certified Steel Erector. C. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator with a record of successfully performed projects of comparable size and complexity during the previous 5 years. D. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator is one who participates in one of the following certification programs: 1. The AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Conventional Steel Building Structures . 2. The International Accreditation Service (IAS) AC172, Accreditation Criteria for Fabricator Inspection Programs for Structural Steel. E. Shop-Painting Applicators: 1. Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint Endorsement: a. P1-Sophisticated Paint Endorsement-Enclosed. b. P2-Sophisticated Paint Endorsement-Covered. c. P3-Sophisticated Paint Endorsement-Outside. F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code--Steel.” G. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents: 1. AISC's “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” 2. AISC's “Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings” and “Supplement No. 2.” 3. AISC's “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,” ANSI/AISC 360-05. 4. RCSC's “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.” H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at the Site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 “Project Management and Coordination.” 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 3 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. a. If allowed, Tension-Control bolt assemblies shall be protected from moisture and corrosion. Tension-Control bolts may not be cleaned or relubricated. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Furnish anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. B. Coordinate lifting, filling, venting and drain holes required for galvanized items with the galvanizer prior to shop drawing submittal. The fabricator shall consult with Architect/Engineer and hot-dip galvanizer regarding potential concerns during the galvanizing process that may require design modification before fabrication proceeds. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS A. W-Shapes: ASTM A992, Grade 50, unless noted otherwise. B. Channels, Angles, and miscellaneous shapes: ASTM A36, unless noted otherwise. C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A36, unless noted otherwise. D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 1. Square and rectangular: ASTM A500, Grade B, unless noted otherwise. 2. Round: ASTM A500, Grace C, unless noted otherwise. E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B. F. Medium-Strength Steel Castings: ASTM A27, Grade 65-35, carbon steel. G. . H. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements. 1. Unless indicated otherwise, all electrodes shall be E70XX, low hydrogen. 2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, heavy hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A563 heavy hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F436 hardened carbon-steel washers. Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 4 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 1. Material: a. ASTM A325, unless noted otherwise. b. ASTM A490, in locations shown or allowed on the Drawings. Do not use ASTM A490 in galvanized or zinc coated applications. 2. Finish: a. Unless noted otherwise: Plain. b. For bolts at galvanized members or as otherwise indicated: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM F2329 or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B695, Class 55. B. Anchor Rods (headed or unheaded): ASTM F1554, Grade 36 unless noted otherwise. 1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex carbon steel. 3. Plate Washers: ASTM A36 carbon steel. 4. Washers: ASTM F436 hardened carbon steel. 5. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM F2329 or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B695, Class 55. C. Threaded Rods: ASTM A36. 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex carbon steel. 2. Washers: ASTM F436 hardened carbon steel. 3. Finish: a. Unless noted otherwise: Plain. b. For rods at galvanized members or as otherwise indicated: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM F2329 or Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B695, Class 55. D. Clevises and Turnbuckles: ASTM A108, Grade 1035, cold-finished carbon steel. E. Eye Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A108, Grade 1030, cold-finished carbon steel. F. Sleeve Nuts: ASTM A108, Grade 1018, cold-finished carbon steel. 2.03 GROUT A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive, nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and ANSI/AISC 360 1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 5 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 2. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A6/ A 6M and maintain markings until structural steel has been erected. 3. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 4. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop- priming operations, if required. B. Drawings indicate the design, sections and weights of members. Substitutions shall not be permitted except upon written permission from the Engineer. C. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible. 1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1. D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill or punch bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. 1. Unless noted otherwise, all holes are AISC standard. E. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads. F. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC- SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning.” 1. Slip critical faying surfaces shall be treated according to the RCSC Specification. 2. Slip critical faying surfaces for galvanized members shall be galvanized and roughened with hand wire brush according to the RCSC Specification for a Class C surface. G. Galvanized Components: 1. Lifting, filling, vent and drain holes shall be constructed at the Fabricator’s shop prior to delivery to the galvanizer. 2. Fabricate structural steel in accordance with Class I, II, III guidelines as described in AGA's Recommended Details for Galvanized Structures. 3. Fabrication practices for products to be in accordance with the applicable portions of ASTM A143, A384, and A385. Avoid fabrication techniques that could cause steel distortion or embrittlement. 4. Provide holes and/or lifting lugs to allow for handling during galvanizing. 2.05 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. Shop connections shall be composed of bolted or welded connections. Combinations of bolted and welded connections on a common shearing face are not allowed. B. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened bearing type with threads included in the shear plane, unless noted otherwise. C. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 6 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of axes without exceeding tolerances of AISC's “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” for mill material. 2.06 SHOP PRIMING A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces to be field welded. 2. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 3. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 4. Galvanized surfaces. B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards: 1. SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning.” 2. SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning.” 3. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections. C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. 2.07 GALVANIZING A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel indicated in the Drawings and Specifications according to ASTM A123/A123M. B. Refer to Division 05 05 13 “Galvanizing” for galvanized coatings and repairs. 2.08 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Contractor will engage an Owner approved independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports. 1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. C. Welded Connections: 1. Full penetration welds and other welds as specified: In addition to 100 percent visual inspection, 10 percent of connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 7 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments, with steel erector present, for compliance with requirements. B. Dimensions scaled from the Drawings shall not be used for fabrication, and the Contractor shall determine actual dimensions of the structure. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep structural steel secure, plumb, and in alignment against temporary construction loads and loads equal in intensity to design loads. Remove temporary supports when permanent structural steel, connections, and bracing are in place, unless otherwise indicated. 3.03 ERECTION A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC's “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,” ANSI/AISC 360. B. Base and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set base and bearing plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of base plate where required. 3. Tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate before packing with grout. 4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and base or bearing plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts. C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” D. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 8 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 be in permanent contact with members. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature when structure is completed and in service. E. Splice members only where indicated. F. Do not use thermal cutting during erection unless approved by Engineer. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1. G. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts. 3.04 FIELD CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts” for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, unless noted otherwise. . B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1 for welding procedure specifications, tolerances, appearance, and quality of welds and for methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Comply with AISC's “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges” and “Specification for Structural Steel Buildings,” ANSI/AISC 360-05, for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, beam flanges employing full penetration welds shall have 1- 1/4-by-3/16-inch backup plate. Back gouge root pass and weld flush on backside where full penetration is specified. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections. B. Bolted Connections: Field-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's “Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.” C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be 100 percent visually inspected according to AWS D1.1. 1. Full penetration welds and other welds as specified: In addition to 100 percent visual inspection, 10 percent of connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1 and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option: a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E165. Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 9 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E94. D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents. 1. Corrective measures shall be taken when welding is unsatisfactory or indicates inferior workmanship. Chip and grind if the removal of part of the weld or a portion of the base metal is required. Where deposition of additional weld material is necessary, the sides of the area to be welded shall have no less than one to one (1:1) slope to allow room for depositing new material. Correct defective or unsound welds by the removal and replacement of the entire weld using the following procedures: a. Excessive Convexity: Reduce to size by removal of excess weld metal by grinding. b. Shrinkage Cracks, Cracks in Base Metal, Craters and Excessive Porosity: Remove defective portions of base and weld material down to sound metal, and deposit additional sound material. c. Undercutting, Undersize, and Excessive Concavity: Clean and deposit additional weld metal. d. Overlapping and Incomplete Fusion: Remove and replace the defective portion of the weld. e. Slag Inclusion: Remove those parts of the welds containing slag. Fill with sound weld metal. f. Removal of Adjacent Base Metal during Welding: Clean and form full size by depositing weld material. 2. Remove cracked welds throughout their length. 3. Where work performed subsequently to the making of the deficient weld has rendered the weld inaccessible, or has caused new conditions which make connection of the deficiency dangerous or ineffectual, restore the original conditions by removing welds or members, or both before making the necessary corrections. Another option is to compensate for the deficiency with additional work according to the revised design, approved by the Engineer. 4. Cut apart and reweld improperly fitted and misaligned parts. 5. Straighten members distorted by heat of welding using mechanical means or by carefully supervised application of a limited amount of localized heat. Heated areas shall not exceed 1200 degrees Fahrenheit as measured by Tempilsticks. Parts to be heated for straightening shall be free from external stress forces, except when mechanical means are used in conjunction with heat application. 6. If faulty welding or its removal for rewelding damages the base metal so that, in the Engineer's judgment, it is not in accordance with the intent of the Contract Documents, remove and replace the damaged material and compensate for the deficiency in a manner acceptable to the Engineer. Structural Steel Framing 05 12 00 - 10 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 7. Maximum space between pieces or members for fillet welds shall be 1/16 inch. Only effective portion shall be considered in measuring fillet welds. 3.06 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on galvanized items according to Division 05 Section “Galvanizing”. END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 50 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 05 50 13 MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish miscellaneous metal fabrications including surface preparation and shop priming. 2. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in miscellaneous metal fabrications to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections, and attaching to miscellaneous metal fabrications all items such as sleeves, bands, studs, fasteners, and all items required for which provision is not specifically included under other Sections. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the Work to be installed with, or attached to miscellaneous metal fabrications Work. 2. Hot-dip Galvanizing: Coordinate with steel fabricator detailing for and fabrication of assemblies to be hot-dip galvanized, to minimize distortion during galvanizing process. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 60 00, Grouting. 2. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 3. Section 05 52 15, Aluminum Handrails and Railings. 4. Section 05 53 16, Aluminum Grating. 5. Section 09 91 00, Painting, 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI A14.3, Ladders – Fixed –Safety Requirements. 2. ANSI Z359.1, Safety Requirements for Personal Fall Arrest Systems, Subsystems, and Components. 3. ASTM A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 4. ASTM A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless. 5. ASTM A123/A123M, Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 6. ASTM A153/A153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 50 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 7. ASTM A240/A240M, Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications. 8. ASTM A320/A320M, Specification for Alloy-Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for Low-Temperature Service. 9. ASTM A384/A384M-02 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies. 10. ASTM A500, Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 11. ASTM A572/A572M, Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. 12. ASTM A793, Specification for Rolled Floor Plate, Stainless Steel. 13. ASTM A992/A992M, Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 14. ASTM B209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. 15. ASTM B211, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Bar, Rod and Wire. 16. ASTM B221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 17. ASTM B308/B308M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard Structural Profiles. 18. ASTM B429, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 19. ASTM B632/B632M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate. 20. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, Structural Welding Code – Steel. 21. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, Structural Welding Code – Aluminum. 22. AWS D1.6, Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel. 23. NAAMM, Metal Finishes Manual. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Welding: a. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, D1.2/D1.2M, or D1.6, as applicable. b. When requested by ENGINEER, provide certification that each welder employed on or to be employed for the Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. Ensure that all certifications are current. B. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to the following: 1. 29 CFR 1910, Occupational Health and Safety Standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 50 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Fabrication and erection details for assemblies of miscellaneous metal Work. Include plans, elevations, and details of sections and connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Include setting drawings and templates for locating and installing miscellaneous metal items and anchorage devices. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer’s specifications, load tables, dimension diagrams, anchor details, and installation instructions for products to be used in miscellaneous metal Work. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Mill test report that indicate chemical and physical properties of eachtype of material, when requested by ENGINEER. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Copies of welder’s certifications, when requested by ENGINEER. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver products to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage materials to be embedded in other construction in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel: 1. W-Shapes and WT-Shapes: ASTM A992/A992M. 2. S-Shapes and Channels: ASTM A572/A572M, Grade 50. 3. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. 4. Angles, Plates, Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. B. Aluminum: 1. Aluminum Shapes: ASTM B308/B308M, Alloy 6061-T6, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6. 2. Aluminum Tubes and Pipes: ASTM B429, Alloy 6061-T6. 3. Aluminum Bars and Rod: ASTM B211, Alloy 6061-T6. 4. Aluminum Plates: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 50 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements C. Stainless Steel: 1. Plates and Sheets: ASTM A240/A240M, Type 304L or Type 316 stainless steel. 2. Submerged or Intermittently Submerged: Type 316 stainless steel. 3. Non-submerged: Type 304L stainless steel. D. Stainless Steel Fasteners and Fittings: ASTM A 320/A 320M, Type 304L or Type 316 Stainless Steel. E. Zinc-coated Hardware: ASTM A153/A153M. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS A. Shop Assembly: 1. Pre-assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field-splicing and field-assembly of units at the Site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Aluminum Ladders: 1. Fabricate ladders for locations shown or indicated with dimensions, spacing, details, and anchorages as shown and specified. Comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1910 and ANSI A14.3, except as otherwise shown or specified. a. Unless otherwise shown, provide 1.5-inch diameter continuous side rails, spaced at least 1.5 feet apart. b. Provide extruded square rungs, spaced maximum of 12 inches on centers, with non-slip surface on top of each rung. Adhesive strips for non-slip surfaces are not acceptable. 2. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld, and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 3. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than five feet on centers. 4. Use welded or bolted brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold ladder clear of wall surface with minimum of seven inches between wall and centerline of rungs. 5. Unless otherwise shown or approved by ENGINEER, extend rails 3.5 feet above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure, unless other secure handholds are provided. If adjacent structure does not extend above top rung, goose-neck extended rails back to structure to provide secure ladder access. 6. Use extruded aluminum conforming to alloy and temper 6061-T6. C. Steel Lintels: 1. Provide loose structural steel lintels for openings and recesses in masonry walls and brick walls as specified or as shown. 2. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit, where shown or indicated. Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 50 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Provide not less than eight inches bearing at each side of openings, unless otherwise shown. 4. Steel lintels to be installed in exterior walls shall be hot-dip galvanized and finish painted. Other steel lintels shall be painted. 5. Surface preparation and painting shall conform to Section 09 91 00, Painting. 6. Where lintels are not shown on the Drawings, provide lintels as specified in the following table. Provide other lintels where shown and of size indicated on the Drawings. Clear Span (Max) Exterior Angle Interior Angles (typical 8-inch wall) 4.0 feet 3.5 inches by 3.5 inches by 5/16 inches Two 3.5 inches by 3.5 inches by 5/16 inches 6.0 feet Four inches by 3.5-inches by 5/16 inches Two 4 inches by 3.5 inches by 5/16 inches 8.0 feet Five inches by 3.5 inches by 5/16 inches Two 5 inches by 3.5 inches by 5/16 inches D. Shelf Angles: 1. Provide structural steel shelf angles of sizes shown, for attachment to concrete or masonry construction. Provide slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than six inches from ends and not more than 2.0 feet on centers, unless otherwise shown. a. Provide galvanized shelf angles on outdoor construction. 2. Provide wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, for attachment of shelf angles to cast-in-place concrete. E. Aluminum Stair Nosings: 1. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Supergrit Type 241BF by Wooster Products, Inc. b. Or equal. 2. Fabricate extruded aluminum nosing of sizes and configurations as shown on the Drawings. a. Unless otherwise shown, provide ribbed abrasive filled type, using black abrasive filler. 3. Provide anchors for embedding in concrete, either integral or applied to treads, as standard with manufacturer. F. Safety Post: Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 50 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Provide safety post for each fixed access ladder located below an access hatch. Safety post shall be manufactured of high-strength structural material with telescoping tubular section that locks automatically when fully extended. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. LadderUP Safety Post by Bilco Company b. Or equal. 3. Use upward and downward movement of post shall be controlled by stainless steel spring balancing mechanism. 4. Safety post shall be hot-dip galvanized steel. G. Bollards: 1. Provide Schedule 80 galvanized steel pipe filled with concrete as shown on the Drawings. Paint as required in accordance with Section 09 91 00, Painting. Unless otherwise shown or specified, finish-paint bollard “Safety Yellow.” H. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous metal framing and supports that are not part of structural steel framework and are required to complete the Work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes, and profiles shown on the Drawings or, if not shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent grating, plates, tanks, doors, and other work to be retained by the framing. 3. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural shapes, plates, and bars, of all- welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets, and splice plates and minimum number of joints for field connection. 4. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work. 5. Furnish units with integrally welded anchors for casting into concrete or building into masonry. Furnish inserts if units are to be installed after concrete is placed. a. Except as otherwise shown, space anchors, 2.0 feet on centers, and provide units the equivalent of 1.25-inch by 1/4-inch by eight-inch strips. b. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous frames and supports. c. Where shown or indicated, galvanize miscellaneous frames and supports that are not to be installed outdoors. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports shall be hot-dip galvanized and finish-painted, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 6. For railings, refer to Section 05 52 15, Aluminum Handrails and Railing. 7. For grating requirements refer to Section 05 53 16, Aluminum Grating. 8. Surface preparation and painting of galvanized surface shall conform to Section 09 91 00, Painting Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 50 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements I. Fasteners and Hardware: Provide Type 316 stainless steel fasteners for aluminum fabrications and zinc-coated hardware for galvanized fabrications, unless otherwise shown or specified. J. Anchors and Expansion Anchors: Refer to Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 2.03 FINISHING A. Surface Preparation and Shop Priming: Perform surface preparation and apply primer coat to miscellaneous metal fabrications in the shop. Conform to surface preparation and shop priming requirements in Section 09 91 00, Painting. B. Galvanizing: 1. Galvanizing of fabricated steel items shall comply with ASTM A123/A123M. 2. Details of fabrication of steel items and assemblies to be hot-dip galvanized shall conform to recommendations of ASTM A384/A384M to minimize the potential for distortion. C. Aluminum Finish: Provide natural mill finish for aluminum Work unless otherwise shown or specified. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Materials and fabrication procedures shall be subject to inspection and tests in the mill, shop, and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication procedures complying with the Contract Documents. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions under which the Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true, and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. Brace temporarily or anchor temporarily in formwork where fabrications are to be built into concrete, masonry, or other construction. B. Anchor securely as shown and as required for the intended use, using concealed anchors where possible. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints. Field-weld steel connections that are not to be exposed joints and cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, D1.2/D1.2M and D1.6, as applicable to the material being welded. Grind steel joints smooth and touch-up shop paint Miscellaneous Metal Fabrications 05 50 13 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements coat. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: 1. Coat surfaces of aluminum that will contact dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, and steel, in accordance with Section 09 91 00, Painting. END OF SECTION Metal Stairs 05 51 00 - 1 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 05 51 00 METAL STAIRS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Industrial-type stairs with steel grating treads. 2. Metal bar gratings. 3. Related Sections: 4. 1.03 SECTION 05 52 15 “ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS”PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m). 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm). 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4 mm), whichever is less. C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft. (0.093 sq. m). b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. Metal Stairs 05 51 00 - 2 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following: 1. Metal floor plate treads. 2. Paint products. 3. Grout. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with “Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs” in NAAMM AMP 510, “Metal Stairs Manual,” for class of stair designated, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Industrial-Type Stairs: Industrial class. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, “Structural Welding Code - Steel.” 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers’ written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS, GENERAL Metal Stairs 05 51 00 - 3 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.02 FERROUS METALS A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A513. C. Steel Bars for Grating Treads: ASTM A36/A36M or steel strip, ASTM A1011/A1011M or ASTM A1018/A1018M. D. Wire Rod for Grating Crossbars: ASTM A510 (ASTM A510M). 2.03 NONFERROUS METALS 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. B. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A307, Grade A (ASTM F568M, Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. C. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A563 (ASTM A563M); and, where indicated, flat washers. 1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for stairs indicated to be galvanized. D. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M). E. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M). F. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M). G. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M). H. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B633 or ASTM F1941 (ASTM F1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 2 (A4) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F593 (ASTM F738M), and nuts, ASTM F594 (ASTM F836M). 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. Metal Stairs 05 51 00 - 4 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. C. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. D. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications. 2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA’s “Voluntary Joint Finish Standards” forType 4 welds: good quality, uniform undressed weld with minimal splatter. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.07 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS Metal Stairs 05 51 00 - 5 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Alfab, Inc. 2. American Stair, Inc. 3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The). B. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with performance requirements. 3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces. 4. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. C. Metal Bar-Grating Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from metal bar grating; fabricate to comply with NAAMM MBG 531, “Metal Bar Grating Manual.” 1. Fabricate treads and platforms from welded or pressure-locked steel grating with openings in gratings no more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) in least dimension. 2. Surface: Serrated. 3. Finish: Galvanized. 2.08 STAIR RAILINGS A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 05 52 13 “Pipe and Tube Railings .” 2.09 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM’s “Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products” for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A153/A153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A123/A123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL Metal Stairs 05 51 00 - 6 Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements DTN18104 A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in “Fabrication, General” Article. G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Section 03 30 00 “Cast- In-Place Concrete.” 1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Center nosings on tread width. H. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates. B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout. 1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless otherwise indicated. 2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780. END OF SECTION Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 05 52 15 ALUMINUM HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install aluminum handrail and railing systems. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in, and attachments to, aluminum handrail and railing systems to accommodate the Work under this and other Specification Sections. Provide all items for aluminum handrails and railings, including anchorages, fasteners, studs, and other items required for which provision for is not specifically included under other Sections. 2. Aluminum handrails and railings Work shall include components and features shown and specified, and all components and features available from specified manufacturers required for providing complete aluminum handrail and railing system in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before aluminum handrails and railings Work. 2. Aluminum handrail and railing locations shall comply with Laws and Regulations. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. AA, Aluminum Design Manual. 2. ASTM B26/B26M, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Sand Castings. 3. ASTM B117, Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. 4. ASTM B136, Standard Method for Measurement of Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum. 5. ASTM B137, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Coating Mass per Unit Area on Anodically Coated Aluminum. 6. ASTM B221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 7. ASTM B241/B241M, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 8. ASTM B244, Standard Test Method for Measurement of Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-Current Instruments. 9. ASTM B247, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Die Forgings, Hand Forgings, and rolled Ring Forgings. 10. ASTM B429, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube. 11. ASTM E 935, Standard Test Methods for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. 12. NAAMM/Architectural Metal Products Division (AMP), Pipe Railing Manual. 13. NAAMM/AMP AMP 501 Finishes for Aluminum. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Upon request manufacturer shall submit document at least five years successful experience in fabricating aluminum handrail and railing systems of scope and type similar to that required. b. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing custom detail drawings for the products required. 2. Professional Engineer: a. CONTRACTOR or handrail and railing manufacturer shall retain a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in same state as the Site. Professional engineer shall have at least five years experience designing aluminum handrails and railings. b. Responsibilities include: 1). Reviewing aluminum handrail and railing system performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. 2). Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR. 3). Preparing or supervising preparation of design calculations verifying compliance of aluminum handrail and railing system with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4). Signing and sealing all calculations. 5). Certifying that: a). Design of aluminum handrail and railing system was performed in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and b). Design conforms to all applicable local, state, and federal Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Installer: a. Retain a single installer trained and with record of successful experience in installing aluminum handrail and railing systems. b. Installer shall have record of successfully installing aluminum handrail and railing systems in accordance with recommendations and requirements of manufacturer, or shall provide evidence of being acceptable to the manufacturer. c. Installer shall employ only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in the type of Work required. d. When requested by ENGINEER, submit name and qualifications of installer with the following information for at least three successful, completed projects: 1). Names and telephone numbers of owner and architect or engineer responsible for each project. 2). Approximate contract cost of the aluminum handrail and railing systems for which installer was responsible. 3). Amount (linear feet) of aluminum handrail and railing installed. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all materials furnished under this Section regardless of component manufacturer, from a single aluminum handrail and railing system manufacturer. 2. Aluminum handrail and railing system manufacturer shall review and approve or prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals (except for delegated design submittals, when professional engineer is retained by other than handrail and railing manufacturer) for all components furnished under this Section. 3. Components shall be specifically constructed for specified service conditions and shall be integrated into overall assembly by aluminum handrails and railings manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with Laws and Regulations including: 1. OSHA Part 1910.23, Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes. D. Certifications: 1. Submit certification, signed by authorized officer of manufacturer and notarized, stating that handrail and railing systems comply with the design prepared by the professional engineer. 2. Submit certification, signed by authorized officer of CONTRACTOR and notarized, stating that all components and fittings are furnished by the same manufacturer. E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.2, “Structural Welding Code - Aluminum.” 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Drawings for fabrication and installation of aluminum handrail and railing systems with sizes of members, pipe wall thickness, information on components, and anchorage devices. Show all anchorages. Provide details drawn at scale of 1.5-inch equal to one foot. b. Indicate required location of posts. c. Indicate locations and details of all expansion joints, if any. d. Indicate locations and details of gaps across seismic joints, if any. e. Profile drawings of aluminum handrail and railing system components. f. Custom detail drawings. Details of forming, jointing, sections, connections, internal supports, trim and accessories. Provide details drawn at scale of 1.5-inch equal to one foot. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s specifications, standard detail drawings, and installation instructions for aluminum handrail and railing systems. b. Manufacturer’s catalogs showing complete selection of standard and custom components and miscellaneous accessories for selection by ENGINEER. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. Design Data: 1). Design computations or complete structural analysis of handrail and railing systems, signed and sealed by professional engineer. Professional engineer’s seal shall be clearly legible, including state of registration, registration number, and name on seal. 2). Certification by professional engineer that professional engineer has performed design of aluminum handrail and railing systems in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and that design conforms to all local, state, and federal Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. b. ENGINEER will review Samples for finish, color, joint tolerances, workmanship, and general component assembly only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. 4. Test Procedure: Submit detailed description of proposed shop testing procedures. Do not perform shop testing until ENGINEER approves shop test procedure: B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certification on source of supply, as specified in Article 1.3 of this Section. b. Manufacturer certification specified in Article 1.3 of this Section. 2. Source Quality Control Submittals: Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Manufacturer’s load testing report in accordance with ASTM E935 for completed aluminum handrail and railing systems, demonstrating compliance with applicable requirements of building codes, safety codes, and other Laws and Regulations. 3. Qualifications Statements: Submit qualifications for the following: a. Manufacturer, when requested by ENGINEER. b. Professional engineer. c. Installer, when requested by ENGINEER. Qualifications statement shall include record of experience with references specified. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Manuals: Furnish detailed maintenance manuals that include the following: a. Product name and number. b. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning, including cleaning materials, application methods and precautions in use of products that may be detrimental to finish when improperly applied. c. Handrail and railings systems manufacturer’s current catalog including individual parts. d. Maintenance manuals shall be in accordance with Section 01 78 23, Operations and Maintenance Data. 2. Guarantee: Provide in maintenance manual the guarantee specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Keep products off ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect products from corrosion and deterioration. B. Handling of Products: 1. Do not subject handrail and railing products to bending or stress. 2. Do not damage edges or handle products in a manner that will cause scratches, warping, or dents. 3. Protect handrails and railings by paper or coating as acceptable to handrail and railing manufacturer, against scratching, splashes of mortar, paint, and other marring during transportation, handling, and erection. Protect until completion of adjacent work. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication. 1.07 GUARANTEE Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Guarantee: Manufacturer shall provide written guarantee of availability of replacement parts and components for period of at least five years after completion of the Project. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. System Description: Aluminum handrail and railing system shall consist of equally spaced horizontal rails with totally concealed mechanical fasteners, internally threaded tubular rivets and components fastened to posts spaced no more than five feet on centers and system of handrails supported from adjacent construction by mounting brackets spaced at no more than five feet on centers. B. Design Criteria and Performance Criteria: 1. Design, fabricate, and install aluminum handrail and railing systems to withstand the most critical effects resulting from the following loads (loads listed below do not act concurrently): a. Uniform Load: 50 pounds per foot, applied at top in any direction. b. Concentrated Load: 200 pounds single load, applied at any point along the top in any direction. c. Components: Intermediate rails (all rails except the handrail), balusters, and panel fillers, if any, shall withstand horizontally-applied normal load of 50 pounds on an area equal to one square foot, including openings and space between rails. Reactions due to this loading are not required to be superimposed to loading specified for main supporting members of handrails and railings. d. Comply with AA Aluminum Design Manual for determining allowable stresses and safety factors for aluminum structural components. e. Limit deflection in each single span of railing and handrail to 1.5-inch maximum, and to 1/4-inch maximum on railing posts. Applied loads shall not produce permanent deflection in the completed Work when loads are removed. 2. Thermal Control: Provide adequate expansion within fabricated systems that allows for thermal expansion and contraction caused by material temperature change of 140 degrees F to -20 degrees F without warp or bow of system components. Distance between expansion joints shall be based on providing 1/4-inch wide joint at 70 degrees F, which accommodates movement of 150 percent of calculated amount of movement for specified temperature range. 3. Where handrail and railing systems cross expansion joints in the building or structure, provide expansion joints in handrail and railings systems. 4. For posts located at or near end of runs as shown, uniformly space intermediate posts as required to conform to loading and deflection criteria specified, at intervals no greater than maximum post spacing specified. Where posts are shown for handrails along both sides of walkways and other similar locations, locate posts opposite each other; do not stagger post locations. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Custom Fabricated Connectorail System, by Julius Blum & Company, Inc. 2. Custom Fabricated Series 500 Non-Welded Aluminum Pipe Aluminum handrails and railing systems, by Superior Aluminum Products, Inc. 3. Or equal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum Architectural and Ornamental Shapes: ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T52. B. Aluminum Forgings: ASTM B247. C. Extruded or Drawn Aluminum Pipe and Tube: 1. ASTM B429 or ASTM B241/B241M, Alloy 6063-T5, 6063-T52, or 6063-T832 as required by loadings, deflections, and post spacing specified. 2. Provide Schedule 40 pipe, minimum, unless conditions of detail and fabrication require extra-heavy pipe to comply with Specifications. Rails and posts shall have minimum outside diameter of 1.90 inches. D. Reinforcing Bars: Solid, circular profile, two feet long, 6061-T6 aluminum reinforcing bars with same outside diameter as inside diameter of post. E. Anchors and Fastenings: 1. For anchors and fasteners, use Type 316 stainless steel; minimum 3/8-inch diameter. 2. Provide minimum of four bolt fasteners per post where surface-mounted posts are shown. Components shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and as approved or accepted (as applicable) by ENGINEER on submittals. 3. Anchors: In accordance with Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. F. Castings: 1. Provide high-strength aluminum alloy brackets, flanges, and fittings suitable for anodizing as specified. 2. Aluminum alloy sand castings: ASTM B26/B26M. G. Connector Sleeves: Schedule 40, five-inch long by 1.610-inch diameter. H. Sockets: Provide six-inch deep by 2.5-inch outside diameter aluminum sockets with 3.5-inch wide socket cover on bottom of each socket and on top and bottom of removable post sockets. I. Custom Cover Flanges: 1/4-inch high by four-inch diameter, aluminum. J. Adhesive: Two-part waterproof epoxy-type as recommended by handrail and railing systems manufacturer. K. Non-shrink Grout: Comply with Section 03 60 00, Grouting. L. Toeboards: Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Provide extruded Alloy 6063-T5 or T52 aluminum alloy toeboards, unless railing is mounted on curbs or other construction of sufficient height and type to comply with OSHA 1910.23. Bars or plates are not acceptable. 2. Unless otherwise specified, toeboards shall comply with OSHA 1910.23, Section (e). M. System Components and Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide complete selection of manufacturer’s standard and custom aluminum handrail and railing systems components and miscellaneous accessories required. Show type and location of all such items on Shop Drawings and other submittals as applicable. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: Unless otherwise shown or specified, provide typical non-welded construction details and fabrication techniques recommended in NAAMM/AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501. B. Fabricate handrail and railing systems true to line and level, with accurate angles surfaces and straight edges. Fabricate corners without using fittings. Provide bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. Form elbow bends and wall returns to uniform radius, free from buckles and twists, with smooth finished surfaces, or use prefabricated bends. Provide not less than four-inch outside radius. C. Remove burrs from exposed edges. D. Close aluminum pipe ends by using prefabricated fittings. E. Weep Holes: 1. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather to exclude water. 2. Provide 15/64-inch diameter weep holes at lowest possible point on each post in handrail and railing systems. 3. Provide pressure relief holes at closed ends of handrail and railing systems. F. Toeboards: 1. Provide manufacturer’s standard toeboard, that accommodates movement caused by thermal change specified without warping or bowing toeboards. 2. Provide manufacturer’s standard toeboard, which accommodates storage for removable socket covers. 3. Coordinate and cope toeboard as required to accommodate cover flanges at posts. 4. Toeboards shall follow curvature of railing. Where railing is shown to have curved contours at corners, or other locations, toeboard shall likewise be curved to follow line of railing system. G. Reinforcing Bars: Provide reinforcing bar friction-fitted at each post in railing system. Extend reinforcing bars of tubes six inches into cast-in-place sleeves or other types of supporting brackets. H. Mechanically Fitted Component Pipe Handrail and Railing System: Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Use non-welded pipe handrail and railing system with posts, top and two intermediate rails, and flush joints. 2. Provide top and one intermediate horizontal rail(s), equally spaced. 3. Do not use blind rivets, pop rivets, or other exposed fastening devices in the Work under this Section. Fasteners used for side-mounting fascia flanges where shown or specified may be exposed in the Work. Provide internal threaded aluminum rivets, stainless steel through-bolts with lock nuts, stainless steel sheet metal screws with lock washers, and epoxy adhesive for fastening components of the Work. I. For changes in direction made by bending, use jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required. Maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. J. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings. K. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less. L. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 2.05 FINISHES A. General: 1. Prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with recommendation of aluminum producer and the aluminum finisher or processor. 2. Adjust and control direction of mechanical finishes specified to achieve best overall visual effect in the Work. 3. Color and Texture Tolerance: Provide uniform color and continuous mechanical texture for aluminum components. ENGINEER reserves the right to reject aluminum materials because of color or texture variations that are visually objectionable, but only where variation exceed range of variations established by manufacturer prior to fabrication, by means of range of Samples approved by ENGINEER. 4. Anodize aluminum components. B. Finish: 1. Mechanically finish aluminum by wheel or belt polishing with aluminum oxide grit of 180 to 220 size, using peripheral wheel speed of 6,000 feet per minute; AA Designation - M32 Medium Satin Directional Texture. 2. Hand-Rubbed Finish: Where required to complete the Work and provide uniform, continuous texture, provide hand-rubbed finish to match medium satin directional texture specified to even out and blend satin finishes produced by other means. C. Cleaning: Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Provide non-etching chemical cleaning by immersing aluminum in inhibited chemical solution, as recommended by coating applicator, to remove lard oil, fats, mineral grease, and other contamination detrimental to providing specified finishes. 2. Clean and rinse with water between steps as recommended by aluminum manufacturer. D. Exposed Aluminum Anodic Coating: Provide anodic coatings as specified that do not depend on dyes, organic or inorganic pigments, or impregnation processes to obtain color. Apply coatings using only the alloy, temperature, current density, and acid electrolytes to obtain specified colors in compliance with designation system and requirements of NAAMM/AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501. Comply with the following: 1. Provide Architectural Class I high density anodic treatment by immersing the components in tank containing solution of 15 percent sulfuric acid at 70 degrees F with 12 amperes per square foot of direct current for minimum of sixty minutes; AA Designation A41 Clear. 2. Physical Properties: a. Anodic Coating Thickness, ASTM B244: Minimum of 0.7-mils thick. b. Anodic Coating Weight, ASTM B137: Minimum of 32 mg/sq. in. c. Resistance to Staining, ASTM B136: No stain after five minutes dye solution exposure. d. Salt Spray, ASTM B117: 30,000 hours exposure with no corrosion or shade change. 3. Seal finished anodized coatings using deionized boiling water to seal pores and prevent further absorption. 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Alumilite 215 Clear by Aluminum Company of America, Inc. b. Or equal. 2.06 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Limit variation of cast-in-place inserts, sleeves and field-drilled anchor and fastener holes to the following: a. Spacing: Plus-or-minus 3/8-inch. b. Alignment: Plus-or-minus 1/4-inch. c. Plumbness: Plus-or-minus 1/8-inch. 2. Minimum Handrails and Railings Systems Plumb Criteria: a. Limit variation of completed handrail and railing system alignment to 1/4-inch in 12 feet with posts set plumb to within 1/16-inch in 3.0 feet. b. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of stairs and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4-inch in 12.0 feet. 3. Provide “pencil-line” thin butt joints. Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which Work will be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify to ENGINEER the gage of aluminum pipe railing posts and rails brought to the Site by actual measurement of on-Site material in presence of ENGINEER. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Do not erect components that are scarred, dented, chipped, discolored, otherwise damaged, or defaced. Remove from Site railing and handrail system components that have holes, cuts, gouges, deep scratches, or dents of any kind. Repairs to correct such Work will not be accepted. Remove and replace with new material. 2. Comply with installation and anchorage recommendations of NAAMM/AMP Pipe Railing Manual and NAAMM/AMP AMP 501 in addition to requirements specified and approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: 1. Remove protective plastic immediately before installing. Adjust handrails and railings prior to securing in place, to ensure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building or structure as follows: a. Anchor posts in concrete by providing sockets set and anchored into concrete floor slab. Provide closure secured to bottom of sleeve. Before installing posts, remove debris and water from sleeves. Verify that reinforcing bars or tubes have been inserted into posts before installation. Do not install posts without reinforcing bar. For all non-removable handrail and railing systems sections, after posts have been inserted into sockets, fill annular space between posts and sockets solid with grout as specified in Section 03 60 00, Grouting. Crown the grout and slope grout to drain away from posts. Anchor posts to stair stringers with stringer or support flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, shop-connected to posts and bolted to steel supporting members. Flanges shall be as recommended by manufacturer. Verify that reinforcing bars are inserted into posts before installation. Do not install posts without reinforcing bar. b. Side-mount posts by fastening them securely in brackets attached to steel or concrete fascia as shown and in accordance with approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. c. Provide removable railing sections where shown. Provide removable railing system posts with friction-fitted reinforcing bar in each post. Provide sockets with socket covers stored in extruded toeboard. Provide aluminum pipe collars for all removable posts. Accurately locate sleeves to match post spacing. Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements d. Provide posts set in concrete with an aluminum floor cover flange. 2. Use devices and fasteners recommended by handrail and railing systems manufacturer and as shown on approved or accepted (as applicable) submittals. C. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: 1. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. Set the Work accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, true, and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Do not cut or abrade surfaces of units that have been finished after fabrication, and are intended for field connections. 3. Make permanent field splice connections using manufacturer’s recommended epoxy adhesive and five-inch minimum length connector sleeves. Tight press-fit field splice connectors and install in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Follow epoxy manufacturer’s recommendations for requirements of installation and conditions of use. 4. Make splices as near as possible to posts, but not exceeding 12 inches from nearest post. 5. Field welding is not allowed. Make splices using pipe splice lock employing a single allen screw to lock joint. 6. Secure handrails to walls with wall brackets and end fittings as shown. Drill wall plate portion of the bracket to receive one bolt, unless otherwise shown for concealed anchorage. Locate brackets as shown or, if not shown, at not more than five feet on centers. Provide flush type wall return fittings with same projection shown for wall brackets. Secure wall brackets and wall return fittings to building or structure. Refer to Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 7. Securely fasten toeboards in place with not more than 1/4-inch clearance above floor level. 8. Drill one 15/64-inch diameter weep hole not more than 1/4-inch above top of location of solid reinforcing bar or tube in each post. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide slip joint with internal sleeve extending not less than two inches beyond joint on each side. 2. Construct expansion joints as for field splices, except fasten internal sleeve securely to one side of rail only. 3. Locate joints within six inches of posts. E. Protection from Dissimilar Materials: 1. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, and steel, in accordance with Section 09 91 00, Painting. 2. Do not extend coating beyond contact surfaces. Remove coating where exposed-to-view in the finished Work. Aluminum Handrails and Railings 05 52 15 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.03 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Cleaning: 1. Clean exposed surfaces of handrail and railing systems after completion of installation. Comply with recommendations of both handrail and railing system manufacturer and finish manufacturer. Do not use abrasives or unacceptable solvent cleaners. Test cleaning techniques on an unused section of railing before employing cleaning technique. 2. Remove stains, dirt, grease, and other substances by washing handrails and railings systems thoroughly using clean water and soap; rinse with clean water. 3. Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasives. 4. If stain remains after washing, remove defective sections and replace with new material complying with this Section. B. Handrails and railings shall be free of dents, burrs, scratches, holes, and other blemishes. Replace damaged or otherwise defective Work with new material that complies with this Section at no additional cost to OWNER. C. Prior to Substantial Completion, replace adjacent work marred by the Work of this Section END OF SECTION Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 06 10 53 MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, material, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install all miscellaneous rough carpentry Work. 2. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in miscellaneous rough carpentry to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into miscellaneous rough carpentry items such as sleeves, anchorages, inserts and other items to be embedded in or penetrating miscellaneous rough carpentry for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections. 3. Types of materials required include: a. Miscellaneous blocking, furring strips, and other miscellaneous wood framing. b. Lumber for temporary protection. c. Lumber for temporary support. d. Miscellaneous accessories. e. Vapor barrier system. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before miscellaneous rough carpentry Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ALSC PS 20, American Softwood Lumber Standard. 2. ASME B18.2.1 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws, Inch Series. 3. ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws, Inch Series. 4. ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 5. ASTM D2898, Standard Practice for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant- Treated Wood for Fire Testing 6. ASTM D5516, Test Method for Evaluating the Flexural Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Softwood Plywood Exposed to Elevated Temperatures. 7. ASTM D5664, Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 8. ASTM D6305, Practice for Calculating Bending Strength Design Adjustment Factors for Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood Roof Sheathing. 9. ASTM D6841, Practice for Calculating Design Value Treatment Adjustment Factors for Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber. 10. ASTM F1667, Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples. 11. AWPA M4, Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products. 12. AWPA P5, Waterborne Preservatives. 13. AWPA P17, Fire Retardant Formulations. 14. AWPA T1, Use Category System: Processing and Treatment Standard. 15. AWPA U1, Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood. 16. APA E445S, Performance Standards and Policies for Structural-Use Panels (APA PRP-108). 17. NIST PS-1, Construction and Industrial Plywood. 18. National Lumber Grade Authority (NLGA), Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. 19. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (NELMA), Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber. 20. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB), Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and the building code referred to in Section 01 42 00, References for size, spacing and attachment of wood members, unless more stringent requirements are shown or specified in the Contract Documents. B. Certifications: 1. Pressure Treatment: For each type of pressure treatment specified, submit certification by wood treating plant stating chemicals and process used, and certifying conformance with applicable standards referenced in the Contract Documents. a. For water borne preservatives, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to maximum of 19 percent prior to shipment to the Site. 2. Certificates of Grade: Where appearance of wood is important and grade marks will deface the Work, in lieu of grade markings on wood, submit certificates attesting that materials comply with grade requirements specified. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals; Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. List of species and grade of lumber proposed for each use. b. Fastener schedule with location, size, material and type of each fastener to be used in the Work. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Lumber treater’s certification of compliance, in accordance with Paragraph 1.3.B.1 of this Section. b. Certificates of grade in accordance with Paragraph 1.3.B.2 of this Section. 2. Tests and Evaluation Reports: a. For fire retardant treated structural panels, test data and design adjustment values in accordance with ASTM D5516 and ASTM D6305. b. For fire retardant treated lumber, test data and design adjustment in accordance with ASTM D5664 and ASTM D6841. 3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: a. Chemical treatment manufacturer’s instructions for proper use of each type of treated material. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: B. Deliver products to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage products that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. 1. Handle treated materials in accordance with AWPA M4. C. Storage and Protection: 1. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. 2. Keep materials off ground using pallets, platforms, or other appropriate supports. Protect materials from corrosion and deterioration. Stack lumber, and provide air circulation within stacks. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Lumber, General: 1. Factory-mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency. Surfaces that will be exposed to view shall not have grade marks or other types of identifying marks. 2. Nominal sizes are shown or indicated, unless otherwise shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. Provide actual sizes as required by ALSC PS 20 for moisture content specified for each use. a. Provide dressed lumber, surfaced four sides (S4S), unless otherwise shown or specified. b. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing. c. Provide the following grade and species: d. Construction Grade, for material up to and including four-inch wide. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1). No. 2 or better for material greater than four-inch wide up to and including 12-inch wide. e. Southern Pine, SPIB. 3. Lumber for Protection and Temporary Support: Size and grades to conform to Laws and Regulations, including OSHA. B. Vapor Barrier: 1. Provide reinforced rubber, modified high density polyethylene vapor barrier with perm rating of 0.045 maximum. Provide maximum widths to minimize field seaming. 2. Provide adhesive, tapes and flashings as recommended by vapor barrier manufacturer, of type that maintains perm rating of entire vapor barrier installation 3. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Rufco SS-300 Vapor Retarder and Adhesives by Raven Industries, Inc. b. Or equal. C. Fasteners and Anchorages: 1. Fasteners exposed to the weather as well as fasteners embedded in, or in contact with, preservative treated wood shall be hot-dip galvanized. 2. Fasteners for fire retardant-treated lumber exposed to the weather shall be copper alloy. 3. Common wire nails shall conform to ASTM F1667. 4. Wood screws shall conform to ASME B18.6.1. 5. Lag screws and lag bolts shall conform to ASME B18.2.1. 6. Anchorage devices shall conform to Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 7. Use joist hangers, framing anchors and clips where shown or specified. a. Joist hangers shall be steel, zinc coated, sized to fit the supporting member, of sufficient strength to develop full strength of the supported member in accordance with applicable building code, and furnished complete with special nails required by joist hanger manufacturer. b. Framing anchors shall be hot-dip galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 G90. Steel shall not be lighter than 18-gage. Use special nails furnished by manufacturer for nailing. c. Clips shall consist of hot-dip galvanized conforming to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 G90 steel angles, minimum 3/16-inch thick. D. Wood Trim: 1. Western red cedar, custom grade. 2. Provide solid wood boards and battens complying with ALSC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of authorized lumber inspection bureau or association under which each species is produced, S4S, with square edges. 3. Provide dressed, seasoned boards and battens with 15 percent maximum moisture content complying with dry size requirements of ALSC PS 20. Mark boards “MC-15” (moisture content 15 percent) or “KD” (kiln dried). E. Panel edge clips: Extruded galvanized steel, H-shaped clips to prevent differential deflection of roof sheathing. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2.02 WOOD TREATMENT 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates and supporting structure and conditions under which miscellaneous rough carpentry Work will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Coordination: Fit miscellaneous rough carpentry Work to other Work and work under other contracts, as applicable, and scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds and similar supports to allow proper attachment of other construction. B. General: 1. Discard units of material with defects that might impair quality of the Work, and units too small to fabricate the Work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 2. Set miscellaneous rough carpentry Work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true, accurately cut and fitted. 3. Securely attach miscellaneous rough carpentry Work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. Countersink nail heads on exposed miscellaneous rough carpentry Work and fill holes. Make tight connections between members. 4. Install fasteners without splitting of wood, pre-drill as required and for masonry anchors fastened to wood stud wall framing. C. Wood Grounds, Nailers, and Blocking: 1. Provide where shown or indicated, and where required for attachment of other construction. Form to shapes as shown or indicated and cut as required for true line and level of Work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. 2. Attach substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 3. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, preservative-treated, key-bevelled lumber not less than 1.5-inch wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material involved. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. D. Plywood, General: 1. Install in accordance with the Contract Documents and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 06 10 53 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Allow for installed clearances between individual plywood panels as specified by plywood manufacturer. Provide 1/4-inch space at panel edge joints and 1/8-inch space at panel end joints, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. 3. Install plywood with long dimension across supports. E. Vapor Barrier: 1. Install vapor barrier over entire interior room-side surfaces of exterior gypsum board perimeter walls, and over entire interior room-side surface plane of bottom of ceiling joists. 2. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations and using all taped joints and all taped fastener location to maintain perm rating of entire installed system in accordance with the Contract Documents. END OF SECTION Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 06 40 23 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, material, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install all interior architectural woodwork Work. 2. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in interior architectural woodwork to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into interior architectural woodwork items such as sleeves, anchorages, inserts and other items to be embedded in or penetrating interior architectural woodwork for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections. 3. Extent of interior architectural woodwork is shown or indicated. 4. Types of materials required include: a. Plastic-laminate cabinets. b. Plastic-laminate countertops. c. Closet and utility shelving. d. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before interior architectural woodwork Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 2. Section 06 10 53, Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry 1.02 REFERENCES A. References: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. Woodwork Institute (WI), Architectural Woodwork Standards. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals; Submit the following: 1. Product Data: For manufacturer’s data for each type of product indicated. a. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large- scale details, attachment devices, and other components a). Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections 3. Samples: a. Provide Sample of each fastener tagged for use in the Work. b. Shop-applied transparent finishes c. Shop-applied opaque finishes. d. Plastic laminates. e. PVC edge material. f. Solid-surfacing materials B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Certification: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. 2. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: 1. Deliver products to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage products that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. 2. Handle treated materials in accordance with AWPA M4. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Keep materials dry during delivery and storage. 2. Keep materials off ground using pallets, platforms, or other appropriate supports. Protect materials from corrosion and deterioration. Stack lumber, and provide air circulation within stacks. 3. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All materials and workmanship covered by this section will carry a one (1) year warranty from date of acceptance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Product and Manufacturer Casework: Provide one of the following: 1. TMI Systems Design Corporation. 2. Or Equal. B. Product and Manufacturer Laminate: Provide one of the following: 1. Formica Corporation. 2. Wilsonart International. 3. Or Equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. B. Core Materials: Particleboard up to 7/8 inch thick: Industrial Grade average 47-pound density particleboard, ANSI A 208.1-2009, M-2 requirements. C. Decorative Laminates: GREENGAURD Indoor Air Quality Certified. 1. High-pressure decorative laminate VGS (.028), NEMA Test LD 3-2005. 2. High-pressure decorative laminate HGS (.048), NEMA Test LD 3-2005. 3. High-pressure decorative laminate HGP (.039), NEMA Test LD 3-2005. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 4. High-pressure cabinet liner CLS (.020), NEMA Test LD 3-2005 5. High-pressure backer BKH (.048), (.039), (.028), NEMA Test LD3-2005. 6. Thermally fused melamine TFM laminate, NEMA Test LD 3-2005. (TFM allowed on casework interiors only, as specified below. Utilization of TFM on any exterior casework surfaces, including door and drawer faces and finished ends, will not be permitted.) 7. High-pressure decorative laminate HGS (.048), NEMA Test LD 3-2005. D. Laminate Color Selection: Maximum 1 color per unit face and 5 colors per project. E. Edging Materials: 1. 1mm PVC banding, machine applied. 2.03 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets. B. Hinges: 1. Concealed 120-degree swing, self-closing, clip-on style. a. Doors up to 34 inches in height have 2 hinges per door. b. Doors 35 inches to 62 inches in height have 3 hinges per door. C. Pulls: 1. Door and drawer front pulls, are epoxy powder coated metal wire, 96mm spacing on screws. Pull design shall comply with the Americans with Disability Act (ADA). D. Drawer Slides: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter. 1. Regular, kneespace and pencil: 100-pound load rated epoxy coated steel, bottom corner mounted with smooth and quiet nylon rollers. Positive stop both directions with self- closing feature. Paper storage, 150-pound load rated epoxy coated steel slides. 2. File: Full extension, 150-pound load rated epoxy coated steel, bottom corner mounted with smooth and quiet nylon rollers. Positive stop both directions with self-closing feature 3. Adjustable Shelf Supports: E. Adjustable Shelf Supports: 1. Injection molded transparent polycarbonate friction fit into cabinet end panels and vertical dividers, adjustable on 32mm centers. Each shelf support has 2 integral support pins, 5mm diameter, to interface pre-drilled holes, and to prevent accidental rotation of support. The support automatically adapts to 3/4 inch or 1 inch thick shelving and provides non-tip feature for shelving. Supports may be field fixed if desired. Structural load to 1200 pounds (300 pounds per support) without failure. F. Sliding Door Track: Anodized aluminum double channel. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements G. Coat Rods: 1 inch diameter, 14-gauge chrome plated steel installed in captive mounting hardware. H. File Suspension System: Extruded molding integral with top of drawer box sides to accept standard hanging file folders. I. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 for BHMA finish number indicated. 1. Dark, Oxidized, Satin Bronze, Oil Rubbed: BHMA 613 for bronze base; BHMA 640 for steel base; match Architect's sample. 2. Bright Brass, Clear Coated: BHMA 605 for brass base; BHMA 632 for steel base. 3. Satin Brass, Blackened, Bright Relieved, Clear Coated: BHMA 610 for brass base; BHMA 636 for steel base. 4. Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base. 5. Bright Chromium Plated: BHMA 625 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 651 for steel base. 6. Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate casework, countertops and related products to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. B. All casework panel components must go through a supplemental sizing process after cutting, producing a panel precisely finished in size and square to within 0.010 inches, ensuring strict dimensional quality and structural integrity in the final fabricated product. C. Cabinet body construction: 1. Tops and bottoms are glued and doweled to cabinet sides and internal cabinet components such as fixed horizontals, rails and verticals. Minimum 6 dowels each joint for 24 inch deep cabinets and a minimum of 4 dowels each joint for 12 inch deep cabinets. (Mechanical or metal hardware fasteners joining cabinet top and bottom panels to the sides will not be accepted.) a. Tops, bottoms and sides of all cabinets are particleboard core. 2. Cabinet backs: 1/4 inch thick medium density fiberboard panel fully captured by the cabinet top, bottom and side panels. Finish to match cabinet interior. 3/4 inch x 4 inch particleboard rails will be placed behind the back panel at the top and bottom, and doweled to the sides utilizing 10mm hardwood fluted dowels. A third intermediate rail will be included on all cabinets taller than 56 inches. Utilize hot melt glue to further secure back and increase overall strength. a. Exposed back on fixed or movable cabinets: 3/4 inch thick particleboard with the exterior surface finished in VGS laminate as selected. 3. Fixed base and tall units have an individual factory-applied base, constructed of 3/4 inch thick plywood. Base is 102mm (nominal 4 inch) high unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 4. Base units, except sink base units: Full sub-top glued and doweled to cabinet sides. (Mechanical or metal hardware fasteners joining cabinet sub-top panel to the sides will not be accepted.) a. Sink base units are provided with open top and a stretcher at the front, attached to the sides. Back to be split removable access panel. 5. Side panels and vertical dividers shall receive adjustable shelf hardware at 32mm line boring centers. Mount door hinges, drawer slides and pull-out shelves in the line boring for consistent alignment. 6. Exposed and semi exposed edges. a. Edging: 1mm PVC machine applied. 7. Adjustable Shelves in Cabinets a. Core: Particleboard. b. Core Thickness: 3/4 inch up to 36 inches wide, 1 inch over 36 inches wide. c. Edge: 1mm PVC on Front Edge Only. 8. Interior finish, units with open Interiors: a. Top, bottom, back, sides, horizontal and vertical members, and adjustable shelving faces with high-pressure decorative VGS laminate. Use of TFM on exposed open interiors will not be permitted. 9. Interior finish, units with closed Interiors: a. Top, bottom, back, sides, horizontal and vertical members, and adjustable shelving faces with TFM Thermally Fused Melamine laminate. 10. Exposed ends: a. Faced with high-pressure decorative VGS laminate. Use of TFM on exposed ends will not be permitted. 11. Wall unit bottom: a. Faced with high-pressure decorative VGS laminate. Use of TFM on wall unit bottoms will not be permitted. 12. Balanced construction of all laminated panels is mandatory. Unfinished core stock surfaces, even on concealed surfaces (excluding edges), are not permitted. D. Drawers: 1. Sides, back and sub front: Minimum 1/2 inch thick particleboard, laminated with TFM Thermally Fused Melamine, doweled and glued into sides. Top edge banded with 1mm PVC. 2. Drawer bottom: Minimum 1/2 inch thick particleboard laminated with TFM Thermally Fused Melamine, screwed directly to the bottom edges of drawer box. E. Door/Drawer Fronts: 1. Core: 3/4 inch thick particleboard. Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. High-pressure decorative VGS laminate exterior, balanced with high-pressure cabinet liner CLS. Use of TFM on exterior or interior surfaces of door/drawer fronts will not be permitted. 3. Edges: 3mm PVC, machine applied, external edges and outside corners machine profiled to 1/8 inch radius. 4. Provide double doors in opening in excess of 24 inches wide. 2.05 DECORATIVE LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS: A. Core: All countertops: 1-1/8 inch thick ANSI a208.1-1993 m-2 particleboard. . B. Surface: high-pressure decorative HGS/HGP laminate with balanced backer sheeting. C. Exposed edges, except applied backsplash: 1-1/4 inch red oak bullnose material finish. D. Exposed edges of applied backsplash: HGS high-pressure decorative laminate. E. All countertops joints must be dry fit at the factory to check for consistency in color from one panel to the other and overall finished panel thickness, resulting in a high quality product easy to install. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor and his installer shall examine the substrates and supporting structure and the conditions under which the casework Work is to be installed, and notify Engineer in writing of the conditions detrimental to the Work. Do not proceed with the installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Cut out counters and install sinks specified. Set in mastic or sealant for water tight installation. B. Install casework in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and final shop drawings. C. Use toggle bolts or adjustable casework anchors for fastening wall casework to walls. D. Use toggle bolts, expansion anchors, wood screws or other suitable fastener for securely fastening blocking to walls. E. Units shall be mounted plumb and in alignment, with countertops mounted dead level. F. Provide concealed shims, fasteners, bracing, blocking and other miscellaneous material required to complete installation. G. Installed work shall be securely fastened to walls or floors. H. Securely fasten tops to base units. I. Apply fillet of caulking to cover joint between back splashes and wall, and between countertops and walls. 3.03 ADJUSTING Interior Architectural Woodwork 06 40 23 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Check and adjust operating hardware on doors, drawers, and moving parts. B. Replace defective hardware. C. Repair damaged and defective room casework units and countertops wherever possible to eliminate functional or visual defects; where not possible to repair properly, replace defective work. 3.04 CLEANING A. At completion of installation, remove protective coverings and clean surfaces. B. Use only those solvents or detergents for cleaning as approved by manufacturer of surface materials. END OF SECTION Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 06 82 23 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, incidentals, and professional design services as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install fiberglass-reinforced plastic (FRP) handrails and railings. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in, and attachments to, FRP handrail and railing systems to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections. Provide all items for FRP handrails and railings, including anchorages, fasteners, studs, and other items required for which provision for is not specifically included under other Sections. 2. FRP handrails and railings Work shall include components and features shown and specified, and all components and features available from specified manufacturers required for providing complete FRP handrail and railing system in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Handrail and railing systems are shown to indicate general types of locations where handrails and railings are required. Where handrail or railing systems are not shown but may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents as required by either an authority having jurisdiction, OSHA, or other Laws or Regulations, provide handrail and railing systems of the type specified in this Section at no additional cost to OWNER. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before FRP handrails and railings Work. 2. FRP handrail and railings shall comply with Laws and Regulations. When CONTRACTOR is aware that FRP handrails and railings Work shown or indicated in the Contract Documents does not comply with Laws or Regulations, obtain written interpretation from ENGINEER. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 60 00, Grouting. 2. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI/ASSE A1264.1, Safety Requirements for Workplace/Working Surfaces and Their Access; Workplace Floor, Wall and Roof Openings; Stairs and Guardrails Systems. 2. ASTM D635, Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 3. ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience producing materials substantially similar to those required and shall be able to submit documentation of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years each. b. Manufacturer shall be capable of preparing and submitting custom detail shop drawings for the materials required. 2. Professional Engineer: a. CONTRACTOR or handrail and railing manufacturer shall retain a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where the Site is located. Professional engineer shall have at least five years experience designing FRP handrails and railings. b. Responsibilities include: 1). Reviewing FRP handrail and railing system performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. 2). Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR. 3). Preparing or supervising preparation of design calculations verifying compliance of FRP handrail and railing system with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4). Signing and sealing all calculations. 5). Certifying that: c. Design of FRP handrail and railing system was performed in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and d. Design conforms to Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. 3. Installer: a. Retain a single installer trained and with record of successful experience installing FRP handrail and railing systems. b. Installer shall have record of successfully installing FRP handrail and railing systems in accordance with recommendations and requirements of manufacturer, or shall submit evidence of being acceptable to the manufacturer. c. Installer shall employ only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in the type of Work required. d. When requested by ENGINEER, submit name and qualifications of installer with the following information for at least three successful, completed projects: 1). Names and telephone numbers of owner and architect or engineer responsible for each project. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2). Approximate contract cost of the FRP handrail and railing systems for which installer was responsible. 3). Amount (linear feet) of FRP handrail and railing installed. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all products furnished under this Section regardless of component manufacturer, from a single FRP handrail and railing system manufacturer. 2. FRP handrail and railing system manufacturer shall prepare, or shall review and approve, all Shop Drawings and other submittals (except for delegated design submittals, when professional engineer is retained by other than handrail and railing manufacturer) for all components furnished under this Section. 3. Components shall be suitable for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into overall assembly by FRP handrails and railings manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. OSHA, 29 CFR 1910.23, Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes. 2. Building codes referred to in Section 01 42 20, References. D. Certifications: 1. Furnish notarized certification, signed by authorized officer of manufacturer, stating that handrail and railing systems conform to the design prepared by the professional engineer. 2. Furnish notarized certification, signed by authorized officer of CONTRATOR, stating that all components and fittings are furnished by the same manufacturer 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Submit drawings for fabricating and installing FRP handrail and railing systems with sizes of members, tube wall thickness, information on components, and anchorage devices. Show all anchorages. Include details drawn at scale of 1.5-inch equal to one foot. b. Indicate required location of posts. c. Indicate locations and details of all expansion joints, if any. d. Indicate locations and details of gaps across seismic joints, if any. e. Profile drawings of FRP handrail and railing system components. f. Custom detail drawings. Details of forming, jointing, sections, connections, internal supports, trim, and accessories. Include details drawn at scale of 1.5-inch equal to one foot. 2. Product Data: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Manufacturer’s published literature, specifications, standard detail drawings for FRP handrail and railing systems. b. Manufacturer’s catalogs showing complete selection of standard and custom components and miscellaneous accessories for selection by ENGINEER. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. Design computations or complete structural analysis of handrail and railing systems, signed and sealed by professional engineer. Professional engineer’s seal shall be clearly legible, including jurisdiction of registration, registration number, and name on seal. b. Certification by professional engineer that professional engineer has performed design of FRP handrail and railing systems in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and that design complies to Laws and Regulations, and to prevailing standards of practice. 4. Test Procedure: a. Submit detailed description of proposed shop testing procedures. Do not perform shop testing until ENGINEER approves shop test procedure. b. Submit detailed description of proposed field testing procedures. Do not perform field testing until ENGINEER approves test procedure. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturer certification that materials were fabricated in accordance with professional engineer's design, in accordance with Paragraph 1.3 D.1 of this Section. b. Certification on source of supply, in accordance with Paragraph 1.3 B and Paragraph 1.3.D.2 of this Section. 2. Supplier Instructions: a. Instructions for handling, storing, and installing materials furnished. Templates for mounting to concrete. 3. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Manufacturer’s load testing report for FRP handrail and railing systems to be furnished for the Project, demonstrating compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. 4. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Load testing report for completed, installed FRP handrail and railing systems at the Site, demonstrating compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. 5. Qualifications Statements: Submit qualifications for the following: a. Manufacturer, when requested by ENGINEER. b. Professional engineer, when requested by ENGINEER. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements c. Installer, when requested by ENGINEER. Qualifications statement shall include record of experience with references specified. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance manuals for materials furnished under this Section, including: a. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning, including cleaning materials, application methods, and precautions in using the materials that may be detrimental to finish when improperly applied. b. Handrail and railings systems manufacturer’s current catalog including individual parts. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: 1. Protect materials from corrosion, staining, scratching, and deterioration. 2. Protect handrails and railings by paper or coating as acceptable to handrail and railing manufacturer, against scratching, splashes of mortar, paint, and other marring during transportation, handling, and erection. Protect until completion of adjacent work. B. Handling of Products: 1. Do not subject handrail and railing materials to bending or stress. 2. Do not damage edges or handle materials in a manner that will cause scratches, warping, or dents. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. System Description: 1. Railing system shall consist of top and one intermediate horizontal rails equally spaced, with toeboards where applicable. 2. Rails, Posts, and Toeboards: a. Rails shall each be minimum 1.75-inch square tube, with minimum 1/8-inch wall thickness. b. Posts shall be minimum of two-inch square tube, 5/32-inch wall thickness with solid reinforcing stiffener. c. Rails shall be continuous at post intersections. d. Toeboards shall be 1/2-inch deep by four inches high. Toeboard shall have reinforcing ribs or other manufacturer-standard fabricated toeboard approved by ENGINEER. 3. Nominal Handrail Height Above Floor: In accordance with Laws and Regulations, but not less than 3.5 feet. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 4. Comply with ANSI/ASSE A1264.1. B. Design Criteria: 1. FRP handrail and railing system shall consist of equally-spaced horizontal rails, mechanical fasteners, and adhesively bonded components, fastened to posts spaced not more than five feet on centers and a system of handrails supported from adjacent construction by mounting brackets spaced at not more than five feet on centers. 2. Design Loads: Design, fabricate, and install FRP handrail and railing systems to withstand the most critical effects resulting from the following loads (loads listed below do not act concurrently): a. Uniform Load: 50 pounds per foot, applied at top in any direction. b. Concentrated Load: 200 pounds single load, applied at any point along the top in any direction. c. Components: Intermediate rails shall withstand horizontally-applied normal load of 50 pounds on an area equal to one square foot, including openings and space between rails. Reactions due to this loading are not required to be superimposed to loading specified for main supporting members of handrails and railings. d. Comply with generally accepted standards used in the FRP industry for determining allowable stresses and safety factors for structural FRP components. e. Limit deflection in each single span of railing and handrail to 1.5-inch maximum, and to 1.4-inch maximum on railing posts. Applied loads shall not produce permanent deflection in the completed Work when loads are removed. 3. Thermal Control: a. Provide adequate expansion within fabricated systems that allows for thermal expansion and contraction caused by material temperature change from 140 degrees F to -20 degrees F without warp or bow of system components. b. Distance between expansion joints shall be based on providing 1/4-inch wide joint at 70 degrees F, that accommodates movement of 150 percent of calculated amount of movement for specified temperature range. 4. Where handrail and railing systems cross expansion joints in the building or structure, provide expansion joints in handrail and railings systems. 5. For posts located at or near end of runs as shown, uniformly space intermediate posts as required to comply with loading and deflection criteria specified, at intervals no greater than maximum post spacing specified. Where posts are shown or indicated for handrails along both sides of walkways and other similar locations, locate posts opposite each other; do not stagger post locations. 6. Provide each railing system post with solid reinforcing stiffener with outside dimension equal to inside dimension of post. Each post shall receive one reinforcing stiffener. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Dynarail, by Fibergrate Composite Structures, Inc. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. SAFRAIL, by Strongwell Corporation. 3. Or equal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP): 1. Premium-grade, fire-retardant vinyl ester resin with glass reinforcing. 2. Finished surfaces of FRP items shall be smooth, resin-rich, free of voids and without dry spots, cracks, crazes, or un-reinforced areas. Glass fibers shall be well-covered with resin to protect against exposure due to wear and weathering. 3. Fire Resistance: 25, ASTM E84, self-extinguishing ASTM D635. B. Attachment, Clips, Fasteners, Rivets, and Hardware: Provide clips, bolts, nuts, washers, sleeves, fasteners, rivets, and associated hardware. C. Color and Finish: 1. Color: Safety Yellow. 2. Finish: None. D. Manufacturing Method: 1. Handrails and railings shall be pultruded FRP components. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Handrail and Railing – General: 1. Use materials of minimum size and thickness as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents and in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and submittals. 2. Posts and Tubes: a. Fabricate connection of handrail to post so that rails are unbroken and continuous through post without using of packs or splices. b. Install bottom rail through post at prepared hole made to fit outside dimensions of rail. c. Fit top rail into machined, U-shaped pocket formed into top of post such that rail is located at center of post. d. For square cross-section members, exposed post corners shall be radiused to eliminate sharp edges. e. Join rails to post through combination of bonding and riveting. f. Sharp, protruding edges are unacceptable. 3. Support Post Attachments: a. Attach post bases according to the approved Shop Drawings, delegated design submittals, and manufacturer’s recommendations. b. Reinforce post bases to a minimum height of 8.5 inches. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 4. Rail Splices: Where required, splice rails using a 10-inch length of FRP tube bonded and riveted into place using epoxy adhesive, and rivets of material specified for fasteners. 5. Sealing: Coat shop-fabricated cuts in FRP with vinyl ester resin. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Fabrication Tolerances: 1. Minimum Handrails and Railings Systems Plumb Criteria: a. Limit variation of completed handrail and railing system alignment to 1/4-inch in 12.0 feet. b. Posts shall be plumb to within 1/16-inch in 3.0 feet. c. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of stairs and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4-inch in 12.0 feet. 2. Provide “pencil-line” thin butt joints. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine conditions under which materials will be installed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation – General: 1. Remove protective wrapping from FRP handrails and railings immediately before installing materials. 2. Adjust handrails and railings prior to securing in place, to ensure proper matching at butting joints and correct alignment throughout their length. Plumb posts in each direction. 3. Installation Tolerances: a. Limit variation of cast-in-place inserts, sleeves and field-drilled anchor and fastener holes to the following: 1). Spacing: Plus-or-minus 3/8-inch. 2). Alignment: Plus-or-minus 1/4-inch. 3). Plumbness: Plus-or-minus 1/8-inch. b. Minimum Handrails and Railings Systems Plumb Criteria: 1). Limit variation of completed handrail and railing system alignment to 1/4-inch in 12.0 feet with posts set plumb to within 1/16-inch in 3.0 feet. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2). Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and from parallel with rake of stairs and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4-inch in 12.0 feet. c. Provide “pencil-line” thin butt joints. Secure posts and rail ends to buildings or structures as follows: d. Anchor posts to stair stringers with stringer or support flanges, angle type or floor type as required by conditions, shop-connected to posts and bolted to supporting members. Flanges shall be as recommended by FRP handrail and railing manufacturer. Provide reinforcing stiffeners in each post before installing post; do not install posts without reinforcing stiffeners. e. Side-mount posts by fastening posts securely in brackets attached to fascia as shown and in accordance with approved Shop Drawings. 4. Use devices and fasteners recommended by FRP handrail and railing systems manufacturer and as shown or indicated on approved Shop Drawings. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placing: 1. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation. 2. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight hairline joints. Do not cut or abrade the surfaces of units that have been finished after fabrication, and are intended for field connections. 3. Make permanent field-splice connections using blind rivets and manufacturer's recommended adhesive and five-inch minimum length connector sleeves. Tightly press-fit field splice connectors and install in accordance with the Contract Documents and manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with epoxy manufacturer's recommen- dations for requirements of installation and conditions of use. Provide two blind rivets per joint on 180-degree centers. Make splices as near as possible to posts, but not more than 12 inches from nearest post. 4. Provide flush-type wall return fittings with the same projection as that shown for wall brackets. Drill wall plate portion of bracket to receive one bolt, unless otherwise shown or indicated. 5. Secure wall brackets to building or structure as follows: a. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use expansion shields and lag anchors, in accordance with Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. b. For hollow masonry anchorage, use toggle bolts having square heads. 6. Fasten toeboards in place with bolt hardware, not more than 1/4-inch clearance above floor level. C. Fastening to Existing Construction: 1. Provide heavy-duty fascia or floor flange and anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing handrail and railing systems components to existing construction; including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts and other connectors as required, in accordance with Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Handrails and Railings 06 82 23 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Use devices and fasteners recommended by the handrail and railing systems manufacturer and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. D. Expansion Joints: 1. Provide slip joint with internal sleeve extending two inches, minimum, beyond joint on each side. 2. Construct expansion joints as for field splices, except fasten internal sleeve securely to one side of rail only. 3. Locate joints within six inches of a post. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: 1. Load-test handrail and railing systems at the Site. 2. Submit written report identifying and documenting testing methods used, loads imposed, and how and where loads were applied, and results of such testing on actual complete handrail and railing systems including anchors and fasteners used in the Work. END OF SECTION Bituminous Dampproofing 07 11 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install bituminous dampproofing. 2. Extent of bituminous dampproofing is shown. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before bituminous dampproofing Work. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM D1187, Specification for Asphalt-Base Emulsions for Use as Protective Coatings for Metal. 2. ASTM D1227, Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as Protective Coating for Roofing. 3. ASTM D4479, Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings—Asbestos-Free. 4. ASTM D4586, Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Provide all bituminous dampproofing of each type required produced by one manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule of all Project-specific surfaces where bituminous dampproofing will be applied. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer's specifications and technical data for each required dampproofing material. Indicate VOC content of materials proposed. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Submit bituminous dampproofing manufacturer's certification or other data substantiating that materials proposed for use comply with the Contract Bituminous Dampproofing 07 11 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements Documents, and are recommended by bituminous dampproofing manufacturer for the required applications. b. Certification indicating compliance with Laws and Regulations for air quality regarding maximum VOC content for bituminous dampproofing materials. c. Certification that materials furnished is Asbestos-free as required by ASTM D4479 and ASTM D4586. 2. Supplier’s Instructions: a. Manufacturer’s instructions for handling and storing. b. Manufacturer's instructions for application methods and application procedures. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer: Submit copy of manufacturer’s acceptance of installer and installer’s record of experience in work similar to that required under this Section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Do not store damaged or opened containers at the Site. Remove from Site and do not offer such damaged material again. 2. Include with each bulk shipment information on the material’s shelf-life, date, quantity delivered, and other information as may be required to establish acceptability of materials delivered to the Site. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store emulsions at temperatures above 40 degrees F. C. Handling of Materials: 1. Do not open containers or mix components until preparatory Work is completed. 2. Do not use solvent-based bituminous dampproofing without adequate ventilation. Prevent build-up of explosive and hazardous fumes. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not install bituminous dampproofing when ambient air temperature is 40 degrees F or less. 2. Do not apply bituminous dampproofing materials to frozen substrates or to substrate in condition not complying with bituminous dampproofing material manufacturer’s recommendations. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Bituminous Dampproofing 07 11 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. For interior and concealed-in-wall uses, provide bituminous dampproofing material that is odor-free after drying for 24 hours. B. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back Asphalt Dampproofing: 1. Asphalt Compound: Manufacturer's standard asphalt and cut-back solvent-based compound with mineral stabilizers, recommended for concealed in cavity wall interior applications, compounded to penetrate the substrate and build to a moisture-resistant, firm, elastic coating. 2. Non-Fibrated Dampproofing Material: a. Provide non-fibrated type, spray-applied liquid dampproofing compound, complying with ASTM D4479, Type I. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Spray-Mastic, by W.R. Meadows, Inc. 2). Or equal. C. Cold-Applied Asphalt Emulsion Dampproofing: 1. Asphalt Emulsion: Manufacturer's standard asphalt and water emulsion, recommended by bituminous dampproofing material manufacturer for below-grade exterior applications to either damp (green) or dry substrates, compounded to penetrate the substrate and build to a moisture-resistant, breathing-type of elastic coating. 2. Heavy-Fibrated, Torwel-Applied Material: a. Provide heavy-fibrated type, trowel-applied mastic dampproofing compound complying with ASTM D1187 Type I, or ASTM D1227 Type II, Class I. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Hydrocide 700 Mastic, by ChemRex, Inc., Sonneborn Building Products Division. 2). 920 AF Fibered (Trowel Grade) Emulsion Mastic, by Karnak Chemical Corporation. 3). Or equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrates and conditions under which bituminous dampproofing Work will be applied, and advise ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: 1. Do not proceed with bituminous dampproofing Work until blocking, nailers, piping, conduits, and other projections through the substrate are installed, with substrate properly patched and sealed or flashed to receive the bituminous dampproofing. Bituminous Dampproofing 07 11 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove from the substrate dirt, oil, loose materials, and other substances that interfere with penetration, bond, and performance of bituminous dampproofing materials. 2. Dampen with water surfaces that are dry and are to receive application of bituminous dampproofing. Keep such surfaces damp ahead of application. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Cold-Applied, Cut-Back Bituminous Dampproofing on Exterior and Interior Surfaces: 1. Prime the substrate when recommended by bituminous dampproofing manufacturer's instructions, using the type and quantity of primer recommended by bituminous dampproofing manufacturer. 2. Apply coating of cold-applied, fibrated mastic bituminous dampproofing material by troweling-on to the substrate at uniform rate of one gallon per 12 square feet to provide uniform dry film thickness of not less than 1/16-inch. 3. Apply coating of cold-applied, semi-fibrated, semi-mastic bituminous dampproofing material by brushing or spraying at the rate of one gallon per 20 square feet, to provide uniform dry film thickness of not less than 1/16-inch. 4. Cold-Applied, Non-fibrated Liquid Dampproofing: a. Apply coating of cold-applied, non-fibrated liquid bituminous dampproofing material by brushing or spraying at the rate of one gallon per 80 square feet to produce uniform dry film thickness of not less than 12 mils. b. After first coat has dried for not less than 24 hours, repeat the application. Apply second coat at rate of one gallon per 120 square feet. Apply second coat at right angles to first coat. 5. Fill cracks, crevices, and grooves. Coating shall be continuous and free of breaks and pinholes. Spread dampproofing around joints, grooves, and slots, and into all chases, corners, reveals, and soffits. B. Cold-Applied Bituminous Dampproofing Emulsions on Exterior and Interior Surfaces: 1. Apply coating of liquid emulsion bituminous dampproofing material by spraying at the rate of one gallon per 20 square feet to produce uniform dry film thickness of not less than 1/16-inch. When necessary, apply in two coats to obtain required thickness, allowing time for complete drying between coating applications. 3.04 PROTECTION OF EXECUTED WORK A. Protect other work from spillage of bituminous dampproofing materials, and prevent such materials from penetrating and clogging drains, conductors, and other utilities. B. Remedy damage to other construction that is soiled or otherwise damaged during installation of bituminous dampproofing. END OF SECTION Silate Water Repellents 07 19 16 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 19 16 SILATE WATER REPELLENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install silate water repellents. 2. Extent of surface-applied silate water repellents includes all exterior split-face concrete unit masonry. 3. Types of silate water repellents required include: a. Liquid, colorless, non-gloss-producing, VOC-compliant, applied water repellent. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before silate water repellants Work. 2. Coordinate water repellant provided with sealant. Water repellant and sealant shall be compatible with each other. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00, Concrete Masonry Units. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a. Water repellant applicator shall be acceptable to or licensed by water repellant manufacturer and shall be regularly-engaged in installing water repellant products and work similar to the Work required under this Section. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Provide all water repellants of each type required produced by one manufacturer. C. Mock-up: 1. Prior to installing materials required under this Section, apply silate water repellant to area acceptable to ENGINEER on mock-up up required under Section 04 22 00, Concrete Units Masonry. 2. Mock-up shall indicate, relative to silate water repellants, proposed range of color change, surface sheen, and workmanship to be expected in the completed Work. Obtain ENGINEER’s approval of visual qualities of mock-up before starting unit masonry construction and silate water repellants Work. 3. Provide as many mock-up panels as required to obtain ENGINEER’s approval. 4. Water repellant application that does not comply with standards approved on mock-up panels shall be removed and reapplied to comply with the Contract Documents. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Silate Water Repellents 07 19 16 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s literature and specifications on products proposed for use. Indicate VOC emissions of materials. b. Detailed chemical analysis and test results of previously-performed tests of materials required under this Section applied to surfaces identical to, or similar to, those to which silate water repellants will be applied for the Project. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Manufacturer's certification indicating silate water repellent complies with or exceeds requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. Supplier’s Instructions: a. Manufacturer’s instructions for handling, storing, and shelf-life. b. Manufacturer's instructions for methods and application procedures. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer: Submit copy of manufacturer’s acceptance of installer and installer’s record of experience in work similar to that required under this Section. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, and shelf-life. 1.05 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions for Installation: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions regarding required temperature of surface to which material is applied. 2. Do not apply water repellant when ambient air temperature is lower than 50 degrees F. 3. Do apply materials when ice or frost covers the substrate. 4. Do apply materials when ambient temperature of surface exceeds 100 degrees F. 5. Do apply materials in rainy conditions or when heavy rain is expected with four hours after application. 6. Maintain ambient temperature above 20 degrees F during 24 hours after installation. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Protectosil Chem-Trete BSM 40 VOC, by Evonik Degussa Corporation. 2. Prime-A-Pell Plus Series 662, by Tnemec Company, Inc. 3. Or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS Silate Water Repellents 07 19 16 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Chemical Bonding Water Repellants Without Silicone Resin: 1. Provide silane solution, with or without diffused quartz carbide; colorless, and VOC-compliant. 2. When dry, water repellant shall be colorless and without gloss. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine under which the Work will be performed. Notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Verify that surfaces to receive water-repellent are clean, and free of efflorescence, stains, oil, grease, and other foreign matter detrimental to application. C. Verify that required sealants have been installed in areas to receive water repellant. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection of Adjacent Surfaces: 1. Protect adjacent surfaces that will not receive silate water repellents. When applied or splashed onto surfaces not required to receive water repellents, remove immediately, using method recommended by water repellant manufacturer. Maintain cleaning materials available at the Site for immediate use. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. Remove grease and oil using solvent, effective alkaline cleaner, or detergent as instructed by water repellant manufacturer. Scrub surfaces with water. 2. Surfaces shall be dry prior to applying water repellant. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Provide water repellants in accordance with water repellant manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Apply in two continuous, uniform coats as recommended by water repellant manufacturer. Allow to dry between coats as recommended by water repellant manufacturer. C. Protect materials in vicinity of application. During windy conditions, do not apply water repellant by spraying. When plants and other flora receive water repellant coating, immediately remove water repellant from plants and flora by washing. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Site Tests: 2. Spray Test: After water repellent has dried, spray with water the surfaces to which water repellant was applied. After surfaces have adequately dried, inspect for Silate Water Repellents 07 19 16 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements signs of water adsorption in presents of ENGINEER, and reapply water repellant to areas that indicate water absorption. END OF SECTION Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 21 05 BUILDING INSULATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install building insulation. 2. Extent of each type of building insulation is shown and indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before building insulation Work. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM C177, Test Methods for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 2. ASTM C203, Test Method for Breaking Load and Flexural Properties of Block-Type Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM C236, Test Methods for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box. 4. ASTM C272, Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials for Structural Sandwich Constructions. 5. ASTM C303, Test Method for Dimensions and Density of Preformed Block and Board- Type Thermal Insulation. 6. ASTM C518, Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus. 7. ASTM C520, Test Methods for Density of Granular Loose Fill Insulation. 8. ASTM C531, Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars and Monolithic Surfacings. 9. ASTM C549, Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. 10. ASTM C553, Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications. 11. ASTM C578, Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 12. ASTM C612, Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 13. ASTM C665, Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 14. ASTM C764, Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal Insulation. Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 15. ASTM D696, Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics between -30 Degrees C and 30 Degrees C with a Vitreous silica dilatometer. 16. ASTM D1621, Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics. 17. ASTM D2126, Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging. 18. ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 19. ASTM E96, Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 20. ASTM E119, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 21. UL 1479, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturers: a. Obtain building insulations, requiring hydrochlorofluorocarbon blowing agent from manufacturer(s) that manufacture product required using blowing agent acceptable for use until the year 2020 and complying in all respects with Copenhagen Amendments to the Montreal Protocol. b. Manufacturer shall provide complete technical services including preparation and review of Shop Drawings and submittals, installation methods, and proposed detailing for the Work. 2. Installer: Engage single installer for each type of building insulation. Each installer shall be skilled, trained, and have record of successful experience in applying and installing each product, and possess successful record of performing work in accordance with recommendations and requirements of manufacturer or that can submit written evidence of being acceptable to manufacturer for providing the required Work. Installers shall employ only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in each type of Work required. Submit to ENGINEER name and qualifications of each installer with the following information for at least three successful, completed projects per installer: a. Names and telephone numbers of owner and architect or engineer responsible for each project. b. Approximate contract cost of the building insulation system installed. c. Quantity (area) of building insulation installed. B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with code interpretations by authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Drawings showing extent of the building insulation Work and all details required for the Work, referencing system components provided as Samples. b. Complete selection of fire stop manufacturer’s recommended systems for each condition and kind of penetration encountered in the Work. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers for required number and kind of penetrations through fire-rated construction. Provide schedule of penetrations and fire stop system to be included for each condition and kind of penetration encountered. 2. Product Data: a. Material specifications and general recommendations from building insulation manufacturer for each type of building insulation product. Include manufacturer’s data substantiating that materials comply with Contract Documents. b. Test Reports: Copies of reports of tests on materials being furnished or previously- manufactured, identical materials verifying compliance with physical properties and environmental features specified in the Contract Documents. When requested by ENGINEER, submit qualifications and summary of experience of testing agencies in performing tests similar to those required. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: Certificate from manufacturer stating that manufacturer of foam-type rigid board insulation has used an environmentally safe blowing agent complying with specified requirements. 2. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Manufacturer’s installation instructions. Indicate by copy of transmittal form that installer has received copy of manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery and Handling of Materials: 1. Do not deliver insulation materials to the Site before the time of installation. 2. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities to allow uninterrupted continuity of the Work. 3. Handle materials carefully to avoid damage and breakage or compressing of boards to less than their specified thickness, or other damage. 4. Handle materials in manner that prevents inclusion of foreign materials. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store materials in dry, enclosed area, off ground and away form possible contact with water, ice, and snow. 2. Prevent damage to materials during storage, including minimizing the time materials are stored at the Site before being incorporated into the Work. Store only sufficient quantity of building insulation materials at the Site required for continuous advancement of the Work without causing delay. 3. Conform to Section 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Complete the installation and concealment of building insulation materials as rapidly as possible to avoid damage from adjacent construction operations and adverse weather conditions. 2. Install building insulations when weather and temperature conditions comply with building insulations manufacturers’ written recommendations. 3. Install building insulations when damaging environmental condition are not forecasted for the time when exposed systems materials components would be exposed to potential damage from the elements. 4. Protect building insulation Work from precipitation, frost, and direct sunlight. 5. Do not apply pressure-sensitive tape when temperature is below 35 degrees F or above 110 degrees F. 6. Record decisions, conditions, and agreements to proceed with the Work when weather conditions may be unfavorable. State reasons for proceeding, along with names of persons involved, and changes or revisions (if any), if required, to allow the Work to proceed. 1.07 SCHEDULING A. Proceed with building insulation Work when preceding Work is ready to receive the Work of this Section. B. Proceed with building insulation and associated Work after curbs, blocking, substrate board, nailer strips, vents, drains and other projections through the substrates have been installed, and when substrate construction and framing of openings is complete. C. Proceed with and complete the Work when materials, equipment and tradesmen required for the installation of building insulation and backfilling operations are at the Site and ready to follow with the Work in manner that does not leave the Work vulnerable to damage or deterioration. D. Do not advance installation of building insulation beyond that necessary for proper sequencing of the Work. Do not advance the Work when there is no proper and secure protection from damaging weather and construction activities. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Performance Criteria: 1. Thermal Conductivity: Thicknesses shown are for thermal conductivity, k-value at 75 degrees F, specified for each material. 2. Provide adjusted thicknesses based on thicknesses shown or specified for building insulations, as required to comply with required thermal resistances for material having different thermal conductivity. 2.02 MATERIALS Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Glass Fiber Insulations: Provide the following types: 1. General: Provide insulations formed from glass fibers and resinous binders fabricated into flexible blankets, semi-rigid and rigid sheets complying with ASTM C665, ASTM C553, and ASTM C612. 2. Unfaced Batt Insulation: Provide unfaced thermal batt insulation complying with ASTM C665, Type I. a. Physical Properties: 1). Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C518: 0.33 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F maximum. 2). Density, ASTM C303: 1.5 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 3). Flame Spread, ASTM E84: 25 maximum. 4). Smoke Developed, ASTM E84: 50 maximum. b. Thickness: 3.5 inches,minimum. c. Width: 24 inches. d. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Unfaced Thermal Batt Insulation by Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation. 2). Unfaced Thermal Batt Insulation by Johns Manville. 3). Or equal. 3. Rigid Board Insulation: Provide thermal rigid board insulation complying with ASTM C612, Classes 1A and 1B. a. Physical Properties: 1). Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C518: 0.23 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2). ensity, Manufacturer's Certified Test: Six pounds per cubic foot (pcf.) 3). Compressive Strength (psi at 10 percent deformation): 350 psi. 4). Flame Spread, ASTM E84: 15. 5). Smoke Developed, ASTM E84: Zero b. Thickness: 2 inches. c. Width: 2.0 feet. d. Length: 4.0 feet. e. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Type 705, 700 Series Board Insulation by Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation. 2). Insul-Shield Thermal Board Insulation by Johns Manville. 3). Or equal. B. Foam Plastic Insulations: Provide the following types: Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. General: Rigid, closed-cell, thermally stabilized, extruded, hydrochlorofluro-carbon blown, foam board insulation consisting of 100 percent virgin extruded polystyrene modified resin complying with ASTM C578. 2. Provide blowing agent with lowest available ozone depletion potential, such as HCFC- 142b or better. HCFC-141b is not acceptable. 3. Perimeter Foundation Insulations: Provide very high-load-resisting, rigid foam board insulation complying with ASTM C578, Type VI. a. Physical Properties: Provide the following: 1). Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C177 and ASTM C518: 0.20 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2). Compressive Strength (psi at five percent deformation) ASTM D1621: 40 psi minimum. 3). Flexural Strength, ASTM C203: 60 psi minimum. 4). Coefficient of Thermal Expansion, ASTM D696: 3.5x10^5 inches/inch/degree F. 5). Water Absorption, ASTM C272: Less than 0.1 percent by volume maximum. 6). Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E96: 0.3 to 0.8 perms/inch maximum. 7). Flame Spread, ASTM E84: Five. 8). Smoke Developed, ASTM E84: 165 maximum. b. Thickness: one layers each two inches thick. c. Width: 2.0 feet. d. Length: 8.0 feet. e. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). STYROFOAM 40 HIGH LOAD by the Dow Chemical Company. 2). Foamular 400 by Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation. 3). Or equal. 4. Preformed Concrete Masonry Unit Core Insulation: Provide individually molded expanded polystyrene core insulation complying with ASTM C236, and ASTM C578, Standard Type I. a. Physical Properties: 1). Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C177: 0.26 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2). Density, ASTM C303: 0.90 to 1.14 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) minimum. 3). Compressive Strength (psi at 5 percent deformation), ASTM D1621: 10 to 13 pcf. 4). Water Vapor Transmission, ASTM E96: 1.4 perm/inch. 5). Dimensional Stability: ASTM D2126: 0.55 percent maximum. 6). Flame Spread, ASTM E84: Five maximum. 7). Smoke Development, ASTM E84: 130 maximum. Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Korfil Standard U-Shaped Block Insulation by Concrete Block Insulating Systems, Inc, Division of W. R. Grace Construction Products, Inc. 2). Blocfil by Blocfil Company, Division of Patek Investment Corporation. 3). Or equal. 5. Sound Attenuation Fire Blanket Insulation: Provide insulation containing non-asbestos, non-combustible compounds of spun mineral fiber felt formed into flexible, resilient blankets complying with ASTM C665, Type I. a. Physical Properties: 1). Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C518: 0.27 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2). Density, Manufacturer’s Certified Test: 2.5 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). b. Thickness: three inches. c. Width: 16 inches. d. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Thermafiber SAFB Batts by USG Interiors, Inc. 2). Sound Control Fire Blankets by Fibrex, Inc. 3). Or equal. 6. Safing Insulation: Provide unfaced semi-rigid non-asbestos, non-combustible blankets composed of compounds of spun mineral fiber felt, complying with ASTM C665, Type I. a. Physical Properties: 1). Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C518: 0.25 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2). Density, Manufacturer’s Certified Test: Four pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 3). Flame Spread, ASTM E84: 15 maximum. 4). Smoke Developed, ASTM E84: Five maximum. 5). Fire Resistance Rating, ASTM E119: Three hours. b. Thickness: Four inches. c. Width: 2.0 feet. d. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Thermafiber Safing Insulation by USG Interiors, Inc. 2). FBX Safing Insulation by Fibrex, Inc. 3). Or equal. C. Loose Granular Perlite Insulations: Provide the following: 1. Loose Fill Insulation: Provide inert asbestos-free volcanic glass-like perlite aggregates expanded by special heat process and treated with non-flammable silicone complying with ASTM C549. Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Physical Properties: 1). Thermal Conductivity (k), ASTM C549: 0.37 Btu/inch/hour/square foot/degree F. 2). Density, ASTM C520: Five to eight pounds per cubic foot (pcf). 3). Flame Spread, ASTM E84: Zero. 4). Fuel Contributed, ASTM E84: Zero. 5). Smoke Development, ASTM E84: Zero. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Permalite by Grefco, Inc. 2). Or equal. D. Fire-Stop Sealants and Other Fire-Stop System Components: Provide the following: 1. Complete selection of fire-stop manufacturer’s recommended silicone rubber fire-stop systems. Provide complete systems complying with UL 1479 with two- or three-hour fire rating. Provide equal fire protection as provided by fire-rating of construction penetrated. 2. Provide multiple component systems coordinated to meet actual conditions encountered in the Work and as recommended by fire-stop manufacturer. In addition to providing fire resistance, fire-stop systems shall also be gas and watertight. 3. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 3M Fire Stop Systems by 3M, Inc. b. Or equal. E. Miscellaneous Materials and Accessories: Provide the following: 1. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and complying with fire resistance requirements. 2. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size shown or, if not shown, as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application shown and condition of substrate. 3. Safing Impaling Clips: Provide galvanized steel impaling clips complying with requirements of code authorities having jurisdiction at the Site and as recommended by insulation manufacturer for full system responsibility. 4. Protection Board: Fiberboard sheathing or heavy duty asphaltic panels as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 5. Adhesive Tapes: Complete selection of insulation manufacturer’s recommended taping materials. 6. Bitumen: Asphalt, ASTM D 449. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. CONTRACTOR and installer shall examine substrate and conditions under which building insulation Work will be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surfaces to receive building insulation shall be clean of all debris, dirt, and other contamination before installation begins. 3.03 INSTALLATION 3.04 GENERAL: 1. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to Site conditions, before proceeding with the Work obtain from manufacturer and submit to ENGINEER specific installation recommendations from manufacturer. 2. Extend insulations full thickness over entire surface to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions. Fill voids with insulation. 3. Apply number of layers of insulation specified, each of required thickness, or required thickness to provide thermal value shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, to make up the total thickness. B. Unit-type Building Insulation: 1. Apply insulation units of type shown or indicated to substrate by method indicated. If not otherwise indicated and except for units resting on horizontal surfaces, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. 2. Seal joints between closed-cell (non-breathing) insulation units by applying mastic or sealant of type recommended by the manufacturer to edge of each unit to form tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with mastic or sealant. 3. Set vapor barrier faced units with vapor barrier to warm side of construction, (usually toward inside), except as otherwise shown or indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces, except for fire-stopping. 4. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor barriers using adhesive tape of type recommended by insulation manufacturer, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction so as to ensure vapor-tight installation of the units. C. Loose-type Insulation: 1. Pour granular insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown or indicated to completely fill all void spaces. Screed horizontal applications to uniform thicknesses shown. 2. Place loose fiber insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown or indicated, either by pouring or by machine-blowing. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density, but not excessively compacted. Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Stuff loose mineral fiber insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces as indicated. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume to density of approximately 2.5 pounds per cubic foot. D. Safing Insulations and Fire-Stop Systems: 1. Install safing insulation and fire-stop systems to present continuous fire-rated fire barrier in areas shown and at perimeter of all fire-rated partitions and poke-through floor and wall penetrations, to maintain continuity of fire-rated construction whether or not shown. 2. Install fire stop sealants and other fire stop system components in thicknesses recommended by manufacturer at all locations where poke-through penetrations occur, at all locations where other penetrations such as ducts, pipe, cables, cable trays, and conduit occur and at perimeter of all fire-rated walls. 3. Include all components of manufacturer's fire/smoke-stop systems for complete system responsibility installed in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations and specifications. E. Board-type Perimeter Insulation: 1. Install perimeter insulation after concrete footings have been poured and before on-grade concrete slab work begins. 2. Remove projections that interfere with placing. 3. Apply single 2.0-foot-wide continuous band of insulation of required thickness and number of layers at slab-on-grade buildings whether or not shown. Stagger joints between layers of insulation and butt insulation tightly together. 4. Protect top surface of horizontal insulation from damage during concrete Work by applying protection course material recommended by insulation manufacturer. 5. On vertical surfaces, set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of board-type perimeter insulation. 6. Tape bottom edge of insulation before temporarily attaching insulation to wall with mastic. 7. Tape all joints in vertical wall insulation. 8. Protect insulation on vertical surfaces from damage during backfilling by applying protection course material recommended by insulation manufacturer. Set in adhesive in accordance with recommendations of insulation manufacturers and protection course material. F. Cavity Wall Rigid Insulation Board: 1. Install exterior wall rigid insulation board after all concrete unit masonry Work is complete. 2. Apply single layer of insulation cut to fit snugly and uniformly and in continuous contact with edges of continuous masonry horizontal joint reinforcement over entire plane of the wall. Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Apply exterior wall rigid insulation to exterior concrete unit masonry walls in areas shown or indicated as receiving masonry outer cavity wall wythes. 4. Set units in adhesive applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use type of adhesive recommended by manufacturer of board-type cavity wall insulation. G. Batt-type Insulation: 1. Install batt insulation above ceilings and between studs and rafters as shown. Extend insulation full width, length, and height in areas shown. 2. Fit tightly around obstructions to form uniform, insulated barrier. H. Loose Fill Insulation: 1. Pour granular insulation into spaces and onto surfaces to completely fill all void spaces. 2. Screed horizontal applications to uniform thickness. I. Correcting Defective Work: 1. System components that are dislodged, damaged, expanded, broken, penetrated, or crushed by subsequent installation operations or damaged by detrimental weather shall be immediately replaced with undamaged material in compliance with the Contract Documents and properly protected as specified. 2. Only original installer shall repair or replace deteriorated or defective Work. 3.05 SITE QUALITY CONTROL A. Submit results of all testing to ENGINEER with recommendations for remedial Work, to avoid delaying the Work. Coordinate submittal of tests and remedial Work in a manner that does not impact acceptability of substrate and that allows completion of finishing Work in accordance with the accepted Progress Schedule. B. Where testing indicates that foamed-in-place building insulation has not completely filled areas to be insulated, provide remedial Work to completely fill such areas, and retest. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protection from Elements: 1. Protect all components of the Work from detrimental weather conditions. Do not allow building insulation materials to become wet or soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Provide continuous protection of materials against damage, wetting and moisture absorption and storing materials as specified Work that cannot, for reasons acceptable to ENGINEER, be covered with complete construction system before onset of weather detrimental to the Work, shall be completely covered and protected in manner that deflects precipitation from building insulations without damaging adjacent Work. 2. Protect foam plastic building insulation from exposure to sunlight. B. Protection During Construction: Building Insulation 07 21 05 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Protect all components of the Work from construction operations including, but not limited to, backfilling, framing, and sheathing, aluminum siding, and concrete unit masonry Work, until work is completed and acceptable to ENGINEER. 2. Protect building insulations from damage and abuse by other contractors and installers until readiness for final payment. 3. Do not allow building insulations to come into contact with welding operations or other fire or ignition sources. 4. Do not allow construction traffic not associated with installation of building insulation in the area of building insulation Work. Protect the area from access by other installers and contractors until the building insulation Work has been incorporated into finished construction systems. C. Building insulation that becomes wet, damaged, or deteriorated shall be promptly removed from the Site and replaced with materials conforming to this Section. END OF SECTION Roof Board Insulation 07 22 16 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 22 16 ROOF BOARD INSULATION 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCES (INCLUDING LATEST REVISIONS) A. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes. B. Testing Laboratory Services: Test results shall meet or exceed established standards. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (Roofing Covering): Class A fire hazard classification. D. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) 1. C 177 Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus 2. C 209 Methods of Testing Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber), Structural and Decorative 3. C 728 Perlite Thermal Insulation Board 4. D 41 Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing and Waterproofing 5. D 312 Asphalt Used in Roofing 6. D 1621 Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics 7. D 4601 Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in Roofing E. The National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual F. American National Standards Institute/Single Ply Roofing Industry (ANSI/SPRI) G. American Society of Civil Engineers - ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures (for wind uplift criteria) 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Classified by Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) as Class A roof covering. 2. Follow local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes. B. Installation 1. Installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's current published application procedures, NRCA general recommendations, and ASCE 7 wind uplift criteria. 2. Roof system manufacturer's technical specifications shall be considered part of this specification and shall be used as reference for specific application procedures. C. Contract Documents 1. In the case of an inconsistency between the drawings and specifications or within either document not clarified by addendum, the better quality or greater quantity of work shall be provided in accordance with the Project Manager's/Architect's interpretation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's product data sheets for each product. Roof Board Insulation 07 22 16 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Shop Drawings: Layout of roof plan showing tapered design, tapered insulation pattern, direction of slope, amount of slope, spot elevations indicating thicknesses at high and low points. C. Certification: Submit roof manufacturer's certification in writing that insulation is acceptable as substrate for application of specified roof system. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. When stored outdoors: 1. Tarp and shield insulation from moisture and ultraviolet rays. 2. Elevate insulation above substrate four inches minimum. 3. Secure insulation to resist high winds. 4. Distribute insulation stored on roof deck to prevent concentrated loads that would impose excessive stress or stain on deck or structural members. Verify that structure can accommodate additional loading. 5. Wet insulation, or insulation that has been wet but which has dried, may not be used and shall be removed completely and immediately from the job site. 6. Do not double stack bundles of insulation on the roof top. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Substrate Acceptance: Roof system manufacturer's representative shall inspect roof deck and associated substrates and provide written acceptance of conditions. B. Manufacturer's approved roofing contractor shall inspect and approve deck and substrates. C. Plan roof layout with respect to roof deck slope to prevent rainwater drainage into completed roofing. D. Do not install more insulation than can be covered with complete roof system in same day. 1.06 PRODUCT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Apply roofing and insulation in dry weather. 2. Do not proceed with roof construction during inclement weather or when precipitation is predicted 40% or more possibility. 3. Do not apply insulation over wet or moist deck or in foggy conditions. 4. Days with wind speeds of 30 mph or greater shall be considered "Bad Weather" days. B. Emergency Equipment: Maintain on-site equipment and material necessary to apply emergency temporary seals I the event of sudden storms or inclement weather. C. Costs for emergency roofing shall be borne by Contractor. Roof Board Insulation 07 22 16 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION – FLAT STOCK A. All insulation shall be approved in writing by the membrane manufacturer as to thickness, type, and manufacturer. All insulation must be approved for the specific application, Underwriters Laboratory approved, and be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. B. Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation: Insulation shall be two layers of rigid polyisocyanurate foam board; meeting Federal Specification No. HH-I-1972/1 or 2 with 20 psi minimum compressive strength and 2.0 pcf minimum density. First layer shall be a minimum thickness of one and one-half inch (1-1/2"). Average R-value over each roof area shall meet or exceed R-33. Board shall be surfaced on two (2) sides with non-asphaltic facer material. 2.02 INSULATION – TAPERED A. Factory Tapered Polyisocyanurate Crickets: Factory cut twenty-four inch by forty-eight inch (24" x 48") polyisocyanurate board cut to one-half inch (1/2") per foot slope used in conjunction with standard thickness of polyisocyanurate board to provide positive slope. B. Factory Tapered Polyisocyanurate for Field of Roof: Shall be tapered polyisocyanurate board, with a 20 psi minimum compressive strength and nominal 2.0 pcf density. Insulation shall be of thickness required for one-fourth inch (1/4") slope per foot to roof drains as shown on drawings with a minimum edge thickness of one and one-half inch (1-1/2"). Average R-value over each roof area shall meet or exceed R-25. Insulation shall be surfaced on two (2) sides with a non-asphaltic facer material. 2.03 COVER BOARD A. Shall be fiberboard thickness of 1/2", board size four feet by eight feet (4' x 8'), impregnated six (6) sides with asphalt, Underwriters Laboratory approved and listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. 2.04 ASPHALT ROOF PRIMER A. Quick-dry asphalt-based primer for priming of asphalt roof surfaces, as manufactured by GAF, or approved equal. Applicable Federal Specification SS-A-701B ASTM D 41 Flash Point 105° F Viscosity at 80° F (ASTM D 217) 50-60 K.U. Weight per gallon 7.4 pounds Drying time (to touch) Min. 4 hours 2.05 BITUMEN A. Shall be ASTM D 312 Type IV extra steep asphalt. B. Contractor shall mix with the hot asphalt an additive that eliminates the asphalt odor, such as descent, as manufactured by ArrMaz Custom Chemicals, or approved equal. Roof Board Insulation 07 22 16 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2.06 FASTENERS A. Fasteners and fastening plates and/or termination bars shall be FM Approved and shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide, and as recommended by the insulation/fastener manufacturer for the specific application to meet the minimal requirements for wind uplift as required by the local jurisdiction and/or FM Global. B. Standard Fastener for Steel Applications for 18-24 gauge Steel and Wood Substrates: Shall be a #14 fastener with a minimum .220 thread diameter and .12.5 buttress threads and a 30 degree spade point. Fasteners shall be fluorocarbon coated with CR-10 corrosion resistant coating when subjected to 30 Kesternich cycles (DIN 50018) shows less than 15% red rust which surpasses FM Global Approval Standard 4470, as manufactured by OMG Roofing Products, or approved equal. All fasteners shall be used in conjunction with the manufacturers approved round pressure plate. Fasteners, plates, and/or bars shall be FM approved and listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 PROTECTION OF ROOFING A. Provide special protection from traffic on yet to be removed roofing. B. Provide special protection from traffic on completed work. 3.02 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION A. Do not install until defects are corrected and deck substrate meets roof system manufacturer's requirements. B. Do not apply insulation unless asphalt application temperature, EVT of approximately 375° F to 425° F, can be maintained or when water or moisture is present on substrate. Do not heat asphalt above flashing point, or 525° F. C. Examine substrate and related surfaces, and verify that there are no conditions such as inadequate anchorage, foreign materials, moisture, ridges, depressions, or other conditions which would prevent satisfactory installation of roof system. D. Start of work constitutes acceptance of deck substrate and site conditions. 3.03 APPLICATION OF INSULATION – GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS A. Manufacturer's Instructions: In regard to attachment, the manufacturer's instructions or specifications shall determine the suitability for an application. Installation must meet ASCE 7 criteria and meet local governing building codes. B. Precautions: The surface of the insulation must not be ruptured due to overdriving of fasteners. C. Thermal insulation boards shall be laid on the substrate in parallel rows with end joints staggered and butted as close as possible. All joints shall be tight and at the roof perimeter and roof penetrations, insulation shall be cut neatly and fitted to reduce openings to a minimum. All openings one-fourth inch (1/4") or larger shall be filled with insulation. D. Insulation shall be tapered or feathered at drains and scuppers to provide proper drainage (if applicable). Roof Board Insulation 07 22 16 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements E. No more insulation shall be installed than can be covered by the completed roof system by the end of the day or the onset of inclement weather. F. Tapered insulation and crickets, when specified, shall be placed in accordance with the drawings and/or as required to minimum of NRCA standards. 3.04 APPLICATION OF INSULATION OVER METAL DECK - MECHANICALLY FASTENED/ADHERED A. Specified flat stock insulation shall be mechanically fastened to conform to the ASCE 7 criteria for wind uplift as dictated by wind zone applicable to location of project. Fasteners and fastening patterns shall be determined by building height, location and geographical area of the United States. It is the contractor's responsibility to consult current publications, literature, and bulletins of IBC and the manufacturer that are in effect at the time of this project. Boards shall be staggered and butted as close as possible with voids over one-fourth inch (1/4") to be filled. B. Insulation shall be laid with edges parallel to flutes and bearing on deck surface/flats. The long dimension of base insulation layer must be fully supported by the top flange of the metal deck. The edges of insulation boards must not cantilever over the flutes of the metal deck. C. The top surface of the mechanically fastened layer of flat stock insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using twenty-five pounds (25#) ±20%, per one hundred (100) square feet of surface, and a second layer of specified flat stock insulation shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks joints to a minimum of six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately walked in place. D. The top surface of the preceding layer of insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using twenty-five pounds (25#) ±20%, per one hundred (100) square feet of surface, and specified tapered insulation shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks joints to a minimum of six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately walked in place. E. The top surface of the preceding layer of insulation shall be coated with hot asphalt using twenty-five pounds (25#) ±20%, per one hundred (100) square feet of surface, and specified cover board shall be applied using offset joints, so that each layer breaks joints to a minimum of six inches (6") both ways with the preceding layer, and immediately walked in place. 3.05 BACKNAILING/STRAPPING A. On slopes greater than one inch (1") in twelve inches (12"), refer to NRCA and/or manufacturer's guidelines for backnailing procedures and follow the more stringent guidelines for all specified materials. Slope Interply& Top Pour Backnail Strap 0 - ½" per 12" Type IV No No ½" - 2" per 12" Type IV Yes Strap if possible 2" - 3" per 12" Type IV Yes Yes 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Remove insulation which has been damaged (broken, cracked, punctured, wet, etc.) and install acceptable new units before installation of roof system. Roof Board Insulation 07 22 16 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.07 CLEANING A. Remove debris and material wrappers from jobsite. Leave insulation clean and dry, ready to receive roofing membrane. END OF SECTION Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 41 13 METAL ROOF PANELS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: B. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to furnish and install preformed, metal roof panels as shown and specified. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in preformed, metal roof panels to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into the preformed metal roof panels all items such as sleeves, inserts and all other items to be embedded in preformed metal roof panels for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections. 2. The extent of preformed, metal roof panels Work is shown and is defined to include exterior preformed, prefinished metal roofing, cap and drip flashings, metal closures and all other associated trim and accessories. 3. The types of preformed, metal roof panels Work required include the following: a. Preformed metal roof panels. b. Miscellaneous fasteners, trim, flashings, closures, and accessories. C. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or embedded in, the preformed prefinished roof panels. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 05 33, Anchor Systems. 2. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM A 167, Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. b. ASTM A 653, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated, (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. c. ASTM B 117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. d. ASTM D 522, Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. e. ASTM D 968, Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements f. ASTM D 2244, Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. g. ASTM D 2247, Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. h. ASTM D 4214, Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. i. ASTM E 283, Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. j. ASTM E 331, Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. k. ASTM G 152, Practice for Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials. l. ASTM G 153, Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non-Metallic Materials. m. ASTM G 155, Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Non- Metallic Materials. 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Incorporated, (UL). a. UL, Building Materials Directory. b. UL 580, Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 3. International Building Code, (IBC). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide company specializing in architectural sheet metal products with a minimum of ten years of experience. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage a single installer regularly engaged in preformed metal roof panels installation and with experience in the erection of the types of materials required; and who agrees to employ only tradesmen with specific skill and experience in this type of Work. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER. C. Component Supply and Compatibility: Obtain all preformed, metal roof panels and accessories from the same manufacturer. D. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Comply with UL Construction No. 95 for Class 1-90 wind uplift rating. 2. International Building Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Samples: Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Samples of each type of preformed metal roof panels panel and trim complete with factory-applied finish, two foot long by full-width. Samples will be reviewed by ENGINEER for pattern, texture and color only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. b. One of each type fastener employed, with statement of intended use. Samples will be reviewed by ENGINEER for material and color only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. c. Complete selection of manufacturer's standard and custom colors. 2. Shop Drawings: a. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, standard and custom detail drawings and installation instructions for preformed metal roof panels, supports and trim. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty on factory-applied finish of preformed metal roofing panel. b. Profiles of preformed prefinished roofing panel units, and the details of forming, jointing, gaskets (if any), supports, anchorages, trim, flashing, and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing at edges, terminations and penetrations of the preformed prefinished roof panel Work. Show 1/4-inch to the foot scale layout and elevations of entire Work. Show all details at 3-inch to the foot scale, indicating all internal components and intersection members, details and special fabrication techniques. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. Submit design computations signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Texas to verify structural adequacy of members and connections, for review with Shop Drawings. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Test Reports: Submit for approval certified laboratory tests reports for required performance tests: 1). Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283. 2). Water Infiltration: ASTM E 331. 3). Wind Uplift: UL-90 rated wind up-lift resistance requirement specified in UL 580 test. 4). Formability: ASTM D 522. 5). Weathering: ASTM G 152, ASTM G 153, and ASTM G 155. 6). Chalking Resistance: ASTM D 4214. 7). Color Change: ASTM D 2244. 8). Salt Spray: ASTM B 117. 9). Abrasion: ASTM D 968. 10). Humidity: ASTM D 2247. Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Qualification Statements a. Installer's qualifications. 3. Certificates: a. Submit for approval written certification prepared, signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Structural Engineer, licensed in the State of Texas, verifying that the design meets indicated loading requirements and codes of authorities having jurisdiction. b. Provide written certification to the ENGINEER from the coil manufacturer verifying that the coil to be used for on-site roll forming is compatible with the roll forming machinery that will be used. 1.05 GUARANTEES: A. Submit manufacturers and CONTRACTOR'S written guarantees as specified, herein. B. Site Quality Control Submittals: 1. Submit results of testing and inspection performed in the field by Manufacturer's technical representative. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Deliver preformed metal roof panels paneling and all accessories dry and undamaged, with manufacturer's protective coating intact. 2. Deliver preformed metal roof panels in bundles with banded wood surrounds and end caps intact. B. Storage of materials: 1. Store preformed prefinished roof paneling and accessory materials in a manner that will protect the panels from exposure to sun and condensation; with good air circulation around each piece. 2. Store preformed prefinished roof paneling and accessory materials in an area protected from dirt, damage and weather. 3. Do not store in contact with concrete or other materials that might cause corrosion. C. Handling of Materials: 1. Do not subject preformed prefinished roof paneling and accessory materials to bending or stress. 2. Do not damage edges or handle material in a manner that will cause scratches, warps or dents. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Provide manufacturer's standard warranty on the coil coated polyvinylidene fluoride based coating specified, herein. Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Guarantee that the polyvinylidene fluoride based coating meets all criteria specified and will not spall, check, craze, peel or otherwise lose adhesion for a period of twenty years from the date of Final Acceptance, to the extent that such shall create unsightly conditions or otherwise impair the intended architectural qualities of the building. C. In the event that the coil coated polyvinylidene fluoride based coating fails to meet the specified standards the manufacturer shall, at their own expense, replace or field paint, at the direction of the ENGINEER, all areas affected by the failure. In the event that repainting is selected, it shall be done at mutually agreeable intervals throughout the term of the warranty. D. The warranty does not apply where failure is caused by accidents, or external conditions or forces beyond the control of the manufacturer. E. Provide a written guarantee agreeing to replace preformed metal roof panels panel Work which fails in material or workmanship within one year of the date of Final Acceptance. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include, but is not limited to, deterioration in excess of normal weathering and lack of water or weather tightness. Imperfections, by reason of defective materials, workmanship or arrangement of the various parts shall be made good to the satisfaction of the OWNER, at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Provide preformed, prefinished roofing panels, framing and accessories that comply with the following minimum performance characteristics: a. Wind loading shall be 110 miles per hour, unless heavier loading is required by the International Building Code. 2. Anchorage system shall be designed so that panels are free to move for expansion and contraction and so that individual panels may be removed without disturbing adjacent panels. 3. Form panels in lengths, as required. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Preformed Prefinished Metal Roof Panels: 1. Custom-fabricated, roll-formed, 22 gauge minimum, but in no case lighter than required to meet deflection requirements. Panels shall be hot dipped galvanized ASTM A 653 Grade C steel panels. B. Flashing and Trim: 1. Provide flashings and sheet metal contour closure trim components, indicated or required for a complete installation, as part of the preformed metal roofing panels Work, including cap flashings, base and drip flashings, closure and batten cleats, panel stops and closures, surrounds at openings, soffits, and similar components of the Work. 2. Provide factory fabricated trim components. Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Except as otherwise shown or specified, match the material, gage, and finish of the preformed metal roof panels. 4. Provide all concealed fasteners for flashing and trim Work. C. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Provide manufacturer's custom, stainless steel, self-tapping concealed fasteners, and hold-down cap assemblies, and other components needed for a complete, permanently weatherproof installation. Provide stainless steel complying with ASTM A 167. 2. All fasteners used at all locations shall be stainless steel. 3. Sealant: Provide manufacturer's standard factory applied elastomeric sealant for use within this Section of the Work, where applicable. D. Provide strippable film of liquid applied to the top side of the painted coil to protect the finish during fabrication, shipping and field handling. This strippable film must be removed before installation. E. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Maxima Standing Seam System by McElroy Metal. 2. Or equal. 2.03 PREFORMED PREFINISHED ROOFING PANEL FABRICATION A. General: 1. Comply with the dimensions, profile limitations, gages and fabrication details as shown or specified. 2. Prefabricate all components of the system at the factory, ready for field assembly of preformed prefinished roofing panels, joint cleat, anchor clips, trim and accessories. 3. Fabricate components and assemble units to comply with the performance requirements specified for the completed installation of the Work. 4. Provide panels with 2 ribs per panel. 5. Size: 1 1/2 inch inch high seam by 18 inches wide. 6. Panels are to be mechanically seamed with factory applied sealant. 2.04 PREFORMED ROOF PANEL COATINGS A. Finish Coating: Apply full strength polyvinylidene fluoride based coatings at the factory by coil coating, prior to fabrication of the preformed, metal roof panels. Comply with the following: 1. Alkali clean and hot water rinse all surfaces to receive polyvinylidene fluoride based finish. 2. Prepare a chemical conversion coating on the metal panel surface using phosphates or chromates followed by a cold water rinse. Seal with a chromic acid rinse and dry, except where panel manufacturer recommends another method to achieve greater coating reliability. Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Apply a base prime coat of epoxy paint to the prepared surface in its coil form, by reverse roller coating. Fully cure in a gas-fired oven to a dry film thickness of 0.25 to 0.35-mils. 4. Apply finish coating over the primer by roller coating and fuse at a peak metal temperature of 470°F for a dry film thickness of 0.7 to 0.9-mils so that the total dry film is approximately 0.95 to 1.25-mil thick. 5. Color shall be selected by ENGINEER. B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Kynar 500 Fluropon by DeSoto, Incorporated. 2. Kynar 500 Duranar by PPG Industries. 3. Or equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR and installer must examine the alignment of the substrate framing before erection of the preformed metal roof panels Work begins and notify the ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the preformed metal roof panels panel Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Wherever possible, take field measurements, prior to completion of shop fabrication and finishing of preformed metal roof panels. Do not delay job progress. Allow for trimming where final dimensions cannot be established before fabrication. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with preformed metal roof panels panel manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation, erection and seaming of preformed metal roofing panel Work. B. Install light gauge metal framing in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. C. Anchor component parts of preformed metal roof panels panel and light gauge metal framing securely in place providing for necessary thermal and structural movement. D. Do not exceed fastener spacing recommended by the preformed metal roof panel manufacturer. E. All fasteners must be long enough to penetrate through the entire roof panel assembly and extend through the structural support a minimum of 1/2-inch. F. Fasten flashings and accessories 12-inches on center. G. Do not use exposed fasteners on the exterior panel faces. H. Drive all fasteners normal to the surface and to a uniform depth. Metal Roof Panels 07 41 13 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements I. Install sealants for the preformed metal roof panels panel Work as specified, and as required for watertight performance. Comply with sealant manufacturer's instructions for installation and curing. J. Do not fabricate flashings, closures and associated trim at the Site. K. Install all special flashing and trim shapes, and calking compounds required to maintain complete weathertightness. L. Comply with roofing panel manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Determine conformity of preformed prefinished metal finish to this Section as follows: 1. The manufacturer of the preformed, metal roof panels shall set aside a labeled sample of the preformed, metal roof panels from each production lot of panels at the Site. Protect sample preformed metal roof panels from weather. 2. Make sample preformed metal roof panels available at all times, for comparison with installed preformed metal roof panels, as requested by the OWNER, for the full time period of the warranty. 3. Make color comparison measurements with a Hunter Tristimulus Color Difference Meter employing methods of computation in use at the National Bureau of Standards conforming to ASTM D 2244. 3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Set preformed, metal roof panels plumb, level, and true to line, without warp or rack. B. Clean exposed surfaces of preformed metal roof panels panel Work promptly after completion of installation. Comply with recommendations of the preformed, metal roof panels panel manufacturer. C. Leave preformed metal roof panels panel and flashing perfectly flat, free from dents, burrs, scratches, holes or other blemishes. D. Do not erect components which have become scarred, chipped or otherwise damaged or defaced. E. Remove and replace with new material preformed, metal roof panels and component parts of the Work, including finish, which have been damaged beyond successful repair, as directed by the ENGINEER, in writing. Repair minor damage. F. Do not use roofing panel sheets, trim members, and flashing sheets, in which holes have been made in locations where fasteners are not required. G. At the completion of the Work, clean or replace adjacent work, marred by the Work of this Section. H. Remove all materials and debris and leave the Site of the Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements SECTION 07 53 00 COAL-TAR ELASTOMERIC ROOFING SYSTEM 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS ACM Asbestos Containing Materials ANSI American National Standards Institute ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials CTEM Coal-Tar Elastomeric Membrane EIP Ethylene Interpolymer EPA Environmental Protection Agency EPDM Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer EPS Expanded Polystyrene EVT Equiviscous Temperatures FM Factory Mutual IBC International Building Code KEE Ketone Ethylene Ester NDL No Dollar Limit NESHAP National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration SBS Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene SDI Steel Deck Institute SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. 1.02 REFERENCES (INCLUDING LATEST REVISIONS) A. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes. B. Testing Laboratory Services: Test results shall meet or exceed established standards. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (Roofing Covering): Class A fire hazard classification. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) E. The National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA) - Roofing and Waterproofing Manual F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual G. American Society of Civil Engineers – ASCE 7 1.03 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS A. Roofing installer must be: 1. Currently prequalified with the Owner in accordance with Owner's prequalification requirements. 2. Currently in good standing with the manufacturer. 3. Installer must be an experienced single firm specializing in the type of roofing repair and/or removal and replacement work required, employing only experienced workers for the class of Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements work in which they are employed, having at least five (5) years successful experience on projects similar in size and scope and acceptable as applicators by the Project Manager/Architect. 4. Contractor must have successfully completed previous projects warranted by the manufacturer. B. It shall remain each Bidder's responsibility to determine his current status with the manufacturer's certification plan. 1.04 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. A qualified manufacturer is one that is UL listed and has FM approvals for a membrane roofing system similar to that used for this project for a minimum of fifteen (15) years. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples and Manufacturer's Submittals: Submit prior to delivery or installation. 1. Samples of all roofing system components including all specified accessories. 2. Samples of all materials used on the project, which are not supplied by the membrane manufacturer, shall be submitted to the membrane manufacturer for written approval prior to work starting. 3. Submit sample of proposed warranty complete with any addenda necessary to meet the warranty requirements as specified. 4. Submit latest edition of manufacturer's specifications and installation procedures. Submit only those items applicable to this project. 5. A written statement from the roofing materials manufacturer approving the installer, specifications and drawings as described and/or shown for this project and stating the intent to guarantee the completed project. 6. Manufacturer's Equiviscous Temperatures (EVT) for the specified bitumens. B. Shop Drawings: Provide manufacturer's approved details of all perimeter conditions, projection conditions, and any additional special job condition details other than indicated in the drawings. C. Maintenance Procedures: Within ten days of the date of Substantial Completion of the project, deliver to the Owner two copies of the manufacturer's printed instructions regarding care and maintenance of the roof. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and rolls with all labels intact and legible including labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot numbers, and usage instructions. Materials damaged in shipping or storage shall not be used. B. Manufacturer's packaging and/or roll plastic is not acceptable for exterior storage. Tarpaulin with grommets shall be minimum acceptable for exterior coverings. All materials stored as above shall be a minimum of four inches (4") off the substrate, and the tarpaulin tied off with rope. C. Deliver materials requiring fire resistance classification to the job with labels attached and packaged as required by labeling service. D. Deliver materials in sufficient quantity to allow continuity of work. E. Handle and store material and equipment in such a manner as to avoid damage. Liquid products shall be delivered sealed, in original containers. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements F. Handle rolled goods so as to prevent damage to edge or ends. G. Select and operate material handling equipment so as not to damage existing construction or applied roofing. H. Moisture-sensitive products shall be maintained in dry storage areas and properly covered. Provide continuous protection of materials against wetting and moisture absorption. Store roofing and flashing materials on clean raised platforms with weather protective covering when stored outdoors. I. Store rolled goods on end. J. Protect materials against damage by construction traffic. K. The proper storage of materials is the sole responsibility of the contractor and any wet or damaged roofing materials shall be discarded, removed from the project site, and replaced prior to application. L. Comply with fire and safety regulations, especially with materials which are extremely flammable and/or toxic. Use safety precautions indicated on labels. M. Products liable, such as emulsions, to degrade as a result of being frozen shall be maintained above 40° F in heated storage. N. No storage of materials shall be permitted on roof areas other than those materials that are to be installed the same day. Any exception must be in written form. O. The contractor is to erect a temporary chain link fence, minimum six feet (6') in height, around work area stage and kettles. Fence is to be secured on a daily basis. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Job Condition Requirements: 1. Coordinate the work of the contractor with the work to be performed by other trades, to ensure proper sequencing of the entire work. The contractor is to schedule his work so that adequate time is allowed for other trades to perform their work. 2. Apply roofing in dry weather. 3. Do not apply roofing when ambient temperature is below 45° F. 4. Proceed with roofing work only when weather conditions are in compliance with manufacturer's recommended limitations, and when conditions will permit the work to proceed in accordance with specifications. 5. Schedule the work so the building will be left watertight at the end of each day. Do not remove more roofing materials than can be reinstalled in any working day. 6. Load placed on the roof at any point shall not exceed the safe load for which the roof is designed. 7. All surfaces to receive new roofing shall be smooth, dry, and free from dirt, debris, and foreign material before any of this work is installed. Competent operators shall be in attendance at all times equipment is in use. Materials shall be stored neatly in areas designated by the Project Manager/Architect. 8. The contractor is to be aware of the potential for roof leaks on the existing roof as a result of ruptured blisters and/or roof mat damage caused by the vacuum process, foot traffic, or material and equipment storage. The contractor is to take all necessary precautions to prevent Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements damage to the existing roof. All damage to the existing roof that could result in roof leaks is to be repaired on a daily basis by the roofing contractor. 9. The contractor shall follow local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes for the removal, handling, and disposal of asbestos containing materials, if present. When a conflict exists, follow the stricter document. 10. Due caution should be exercised so as not to alter the structural integrity of the deck. When cutting through any deck, care should be taken so as not to damage the deck or any part of the deck, such as post tension cables, etc. 11. All kettles shall have a fume recovery system, automatic thermostat control, and visible temperature gauge all in working order. 12. The contractor is to verify the location of all interior ducts, electrical lines, piping, conduit, and/or similar obstructions. The contractor is to perform all work in such a manner as to avoid contact with the above mentioned items. 13. Surface and air temperatures should be a minimum 40° F during applications of cleaner and waterproof coating and remain above 40° F for a minimum of four (4) hours following applications. Verify compatibility of cleaner with coatings, paints, primers and joint sealers specified. Advise Project Manager/Architect of any problems in this regard prior to commencing cleaning operations. B. Protection of Work and Property: 1. Work: The contractor shall maintain adequate protection of all his work from damage and shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from injury or loss arising from this contract. Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times any OSHA required danger signs, guards, and/or obstructions necessary to protect the public and his workmen from any dangers inherent with or created by the work in progress. All federal, state, and city rules and requirements pertaining to safety and all EPA standards, OSHA standards, NESHAP regulations pertaining to asbestos as required shall be fulfilled by the contractor as part of his proposal. 2. Property: Protect existing planting and landscaping as necessary or required to provide and maintain clearance and access to the work of this contract. Examples of two categories or degrees of protection are generally as follows: a) removal, protection, preservation, or replacement and replanting of plant materials; b) protection of plant materials in place, and replacement of any damage resulting from the contractor's operations. 3. Finished roof areas shall be protected from damage by the contractor during construction. 4. Twenty-four Hour Call: The contractor shall have personnel on call 24 hours per day, seven (7) days per week for emergencies during the course of a job. The Owner/Project Manager/Architect is to have the 24 hour numbers for the contact. Contractor must be able to respond to any emergency call and have personnel on-site within two (2) hours after contact. Numbers available to the Owner/Project Manager/Architect are to be both home and office numbers for: a) Job Foreman b) Job Superintendent c) Owner or Company Officer C. Damage to Work of Others: The contractor shall repair, refinish, and make good any damage to the building or landscaping resulting from any of his operation. This shall include, but is not limited to, any damage to plaster, tile work, wall covering, paint, ceilings, floors, or any other finished work. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements Damage done to the building, equipment, or grounds must be repaired at the successful contractor's expense holding the Owner harmless from any other claims for property damage and/or personal injury. D. Measurements: It will be the contractor's responsibility to obtain and/or verify any necessary dimensions by visiting the job site, and the contractor shall be responsible for the correctness of same. Any drawings supplied are for reference only. E. Use of Premises: 1. The contractor is advised that the Owner will occupy the building at all times, and the contractor must provide all safeguards required to protect personnel and to keep noise levels as low as reasonably possible for each operation. 2. The contractor shall: a) Coordinate work in such a manner as to not interfere with the normal operation of the building. b) Assume full responsibility for protection and safekeeping of products stored on premises. c) Agree to hold the Owner harmless in any and all liability of every nature and description which may be suffered through bodily injuries, including death of any persons by reason of negligence of the contractor, agents, employees, or subcontractors. F. Cleaning and Disposal of Materials: 1. Contractor shall keep the job clean and free from all loose materials and foreign matter. Contractor shall take necessary precautions to keep outside walls clean and shall allow no roofing materials to remain on the outside walls. 2. All waste materials, rubbish, etc., shall be removed from the Owner's premises as accumulated. Rubbish shall be carefully handled to reduce the spread of dust. A suitable scrap chute or hoist must be used to lower any debris. At completion, all work areas shall be left broom clean and all contractor's equipment and materials removed from the site. 3. All bituminous or roofing related materials shall be removed from ladders, stairs, railings, and similar parts of the building. 4. Debris shall be deposited at an approved disposal site. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate roofing schedule with work of other trades. B. Plan lay up of roofing membrane with respect to deck slope. Avoid situations where excessive drainage could pass into completed roofing. C. Maintain communication with roofing manufacturer's representative to inform of progress and to schedule periodic inspections. D. All penetrations shall be made in roof prior to beginning with roof installation. 1.09 WARRANTIES A. Roofing - Manufacturer: Project shall be installed in such a manner that the roofing material manufacturer will furnish a written twenty (20) year NDL type warranty with no exclusion for hail events containing hail stones up to and including four inch (4") diameter Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Roofing - Contractor: The contractor, jointly with any subcontractors employed by him, shall guarantee the work required and performed under this contract will be free from defects in workmanship and materials, and that the building will be and remain waterproof for a two (2) year warranty period, after the Owner accepts the work as substantially complete. The warranty shall be in approved notarized written form, to obligate the contractor and his subcontractors, if any, to make good the requirements of the warranty. C. Warranty repairs shall be performed by a certified installer. The repairs shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and recommended procedures so as to not void the warranty. Repair of the system, including materials and labor, shall be done at no cost to the Owner. D. During the proposal period each Bidder shall make arrangements with the material manufacturer to provide the required warranty. Refer to SUBMITTALS Paragraph in this section for requirements concerning submittals of warranty. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide materials that are recommended by manufacturers to be fully compatible with indicated substrates, or provide separation materials as required to eliminate contact between incompatible materials. B. All materials shall be furnished, specified, or approved in writing by the manufacturer issuing the warranty. C. All materials used on the project shall be asbestos free. 2.02 FINISH MEMBRANE A. The coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) shall be 60 mil overall calendered thickness. The membrane shall be a high-performance elastomeric membrane incorporating a DuPont Elvaloy® KEE (ketone ethylene ester), extended with coal-tar pitch and reinforced with polyester fibers as manufactured by Hyload, Inc., or approved equal. B. The coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) shall meet the following physical properties: Elongation 170%, ASTM D 412; Tensile Strength 1500 lbs/in2, ASTM D 412; Tear Strength 330 ppi, ASTM D 624; Density @ 70° F, 80 lbs/ft3; Low Temperature Flexibility, Pass, 37-GP-56M; and Water Absorption less than 0.1%, 37-GP-56M. 2.03 BASE WALL FLASHING - WHITE FLEECE-BACKED WELDED-SEAM A. Membrane shall be nominal one hundred ten (110) mil in overall thickness consisting of a white sixty (60) mil EIP thermoplastic membrane with fifty (50) mil thick backing of polyester fleece with a minimum one and one-half inch (1-1/2") dry selvage edge for welding. The white fleece-backed welded-seam membrane shall be a high-performance elastomeric membrane incorporating a DuPont Ethylene Interpolymer (EIP) alloy, reinforced with polyester fibers as manufactured by Hyload, Inc., or pre-approved equal. B. The white fleece-backed welded-seam membrane shall meet the following physical properties: Elongation 105%, ASTM D 412; Tensile Strength 1300 lbs/in2, ASTM D 412; Tear Strength 380 ppi, ASTM D 624; Density @ 70 F, 80 lbs/ft3; Low Temperature Flexibility, Pass, 37-GP-56M; and Water Absorption less than 0.1%, 37-GP-56M. Roll size shall be nominal forty inches wide by fifty feet long Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements (40" x 50') having one and one-half inch (1-1/2") wide dry lap for hot-air welding on one or both sides of the membrane. 2.04 WHITE SELF-ADHERING WELDED-SEAM VERTICAL FLASHING MEMBRANE A. Membrane shall be nominal fifty (50) mil in overall thickness consisting of a white thirty-five (35) mil EIP elastomeric membrane with fifteen (15) mil thick backing of styrene-butadiene-styrene (SBS) adhesive with a minimum one and one-half inch (1-1/2") dry selvage edge for welding. The white self-adhering welded-seam membrane shall be a high-performance elastomeric membrane incorporating a DuPont™ Ethylene Interpolymer (EIP) alloy, reinforced with polyester fibers as manufactured by Hyload, Inc., or approved equal. B. The white self-adhering welded-seam membrane shall meet the following physical properties: Elongation 70%, ASTM D 412; Tensile Strength 1200 lbs/in2, ASTM D 412; Tear Strength 270 ppi, ASTM D 624; Density @ 70 F, 80 lbs/ft3; Low Temperature Flexibility, Pass, 37-9P-56M; and Water Absorption less than 0.1%, 37-9P-56M. Roll size shall be fifty inches by three feet (50" x 3') long having one and one-half inch (1-1/2") wide dry lap for hot-air welding. 2.05 BITUMEN A. Shall be ASTM D 312 Type IV extra steep asphalt. 2.06 UNDERLAYMENT PLIES A. Shall be Underwriters Laboratory approved. B. Shall be nominal eighty-five (85) mil, smooth surfaced, SBS modified asphalt glass reinforced base sheet coated with flexible, SBS polymer-modified asphalt , meeting ASTM D6163, Type 1, Grade S. 2.07 CANT STRIP A. Structural: Shall be wood where used for structural purposes meeting NRCA, FM Global and Underwriters Laboratory guidelines. B. Non-structural: Shall be wood fiber where used for non-structural purposes, conforming to ASTM C208 and C209. 2.08 ROUGH LUMBER A. All wood nailers, structural cants, curbs, and other miscellaneous rough carpentry, shall be lumber as recommended by NRCA, and Underwriters Laboratory guidelines. B. Vertical Wall Shimming Material: Shall be exterior grade plywood, gypsum core board, or concrete core board unless otherwise accepted by Project Manager/Architect. Thickness shall be as required for attachment or to make material flashing flush or level with offsets and/or transitions, minimum three-fourths inch (3/4"). Proper selection of material is required to achieve UL guidelines. 2.09 SEALANTS A. One-part Urethane Sealant: Sealant for use at coping joints, reglet joints, etc., shall be a one- component, high performance, non-priming, non-sag, gun grade elastomeric polyurethane sealant designed for use in active exterior joints, ASTM C 920, shall meet the following physical and performance properties, SONOLASTIC® NP 1™ as manufactured by BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, or approved equal. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements Properties Results Test Methods Movement capability, % ±35 ASTM C719 Tensile strength, psi (MPa) 350 (2.4) ASTM D412 Tear strength, pli 50 ASTM D1004 Ultimate elongation at break, % 800 ASTM D412 Rheological, at 120° F (49° C) No sag ASTM C639 (sag in vertical displacement) Extrudability, 3 seconds Passes ASTM C603 Hardness, Shore A ASTM C661 At standard conditions 25 – 30 After heat aging (max Shore A: 50) 25 Weight loss, after heat aging 3% ASTM C792 Cracking and chalking, after heat aging None ASTM C792 Tack-free time, hrs, (maximum 72 hrs) Passes ASTM C679 Stain and color change Passes (no visible stain) ASTM C510 Bond durability,* on glass, aluminum, Passes ASTM C719 and concrete ±35% movement Adhesion* in peel, pli (min. 5 pli) 30 ASTM C794 Adhesion* in peel after UV radiation Passes ASTM C794 through glass (min. 5 pli) Artificial weathering, Xenon arc, 250 hours Passes ASTM C793 Artificial weathering, Xenon arc, 3,000 hours No surface cracking ASTM G26 Water immersion, 122° F (50° C) Passes 10 weeks with ASTM C1247 movement cycling *Primed for water immersion dictated by ASTM C920. B. Silyl-terminated Polyether Sealant: Sealant shall be a thermosetting, solvent free, non-slump, self- fixturing, multipurpose structural sealant which shall meet the following physical and performance properties, M-1 as manufactured by Chem Link, Inc., or approved equal. Properties Specific Gravity 1.62 (13.5 lbs./gallon) Viscosity 800,000+ cps Brookfield RTV, TF spindle, 4 rpm 73° F. Shear Strength (ASTM D-1002) 400 psi+ (7 day ambient cure) Elongation @ break (ASTM D-412) 400-550% (7 day ambient cure) Hardness Shore A (ASTM C-661) 45 ± 3 Tack free time (ASTM C-679) 20 minutes Low temperature flex ASTM D-816) Minus 10° F pass 1/4" mandrel Slump (sag) (ASTM C-697) Zero slump Shrinkage (ASTM D-2453) No measurable shrinkage (after 14 days) Service temperature -40° F to 200° F continuous service 2.10 FASTENERS A. Fasteners and fastening plates or bars shall be as recommended by the fastener manufacturer for the specific application. B. Fastener for Steel Deck: Shall be a #14 fastener, fluorocarbon coated, with CR-10 coating. A minimum .200 diameter shank and .250 diameter thread. To be used with round pressure plates or bar, and having a fluorocarbon CR-10 coating, when subjected to thirty (30) Kesternich cycles (DIN 50018) shows less than 10% red rust which surpasses FM Global Approval Standard 4470, as Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements manufactured by Olympic Manufacturing Group, Inc., or approved equal. Fasteners, plates, and/or bars shall be listed in the FM Global Approval Guide. 2.11 ROOFING AGGREGATE A. ASTM D 1863 covers the quality and grading of crushed stone and water worn gravel suitable for use as coarse mineral aggregate. B. General Characteristics of Crushed Stone and Gravel: The stone and gravel at the time of application shall be hard, durable, surface dry (up to 2%) by weight moisture content), free of clay, loam, sand, or other foreign substances, and shall conform to size grading and property requirements. C. Grading: The aggregate shall conform to sieve analysis as follows: Sieve Total Passing 3/4" 100 1/2" 90 to 100 3/8" 40 to 70 No. 4 0 to 15 No. 8 0 to 5 D. Physical Property Requirements: Moisture, crushed stone and gravel 2.0% max. Unit Weight (loose) 60 lbs./cu. ft., min. Dust 0.5% max. Hardness, amount passing 20% max. No. 5 (3.36 mm) sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1865 2.12 ASPHALT ROOF PRIMER A. Quick-dry asphalt-based primer for priming of asphalt roof surfaces, as manufactured by Gardner- Gibson, Inc. / GAF, or approved equal. ASTM D 41 Flash Point 105° F Viscosity at 80° F (ASTM D 217) 50-60 K.U. Weight per gallon 7.4 pounds Drying time (to touch) Min. 4 hours 2.13 ASPHALT PLASTIC ROOF CEMENT A. Trowel-applied mastic used on flanges of gravel stops, stacks, vents, and similar applications, as manufactured by Gardner-Gibson, Inc. / Johns-Manville, or approved equal. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements ASTM D 4586 Flash Point 105° F Weight per gallon (approximate) 11 lbs. Viscosity @ 80° F (ASTM D 217) 270-330 % Non-Volatile (Fed. Test Method 141) 70% Min. % Specially Processed Bitumen 30% Min. % Total Solids, by Volume 75% Min. Dry film thickness of 1 gal./15 sq. ft. 85 Mils Drying time 2 to 3 days Service Temperature, Extended Exposure -20° to +150° F Resistance to Oils & Solvents Poor Resistance to Sunlight Good Resistance to Chemicals Good Effects of Weathering Slight chalking Water Resistance Under Good Drainage Conditions Excellent Under Continuous Submersion Fair 2.14 ROOF DRAINS A. Shall be all cast iron roof drain with dome and non-puncturing clamp ring with integral gravel stop and medium sump with roof flange and bottom outlet, as manufactured by Josam, or approved equal. B. Pipe size shall be minimum four inch (4"), or sized to match existing. C. Lead Flashing: Shall be four pound (4#) lead, minimum thirty inches by thirty inches (30" x 30"), used for flashing of internal drains. 2.15 LEAD JACKS A. Shall be four pound (4#) lead, and of dimensions required to completely cover existing plumbing stack. 2.16 PITCH PAN SEALANT A. Pitch pan sealant shall be one part, self-leveling coal-tar elastomeric urethane which shall meet the following physical and performance properties, or approved equal. Test Typical Value Test Method Elongation 300% ASTM D 2370 Viscosity 15,000 – 25,000 cps ASTM D 2196 Flash Point 325°F minimum ASTM D 93 2.17 PIPE SUPPORTS A. Pipe support system shall be a prefabricated, engineered support system designed specifically for use on roofing without adhesive, roof penetrations, flashings, or damage to roofing system. Supports shall be as recommended by manufacturer as suitable for size and type of conduit or pipe being supported. Shall be as manufactured by Advanced Support Products, Inc., or approved equal. 1. Base shall be seventeen inches (17") circular base, injected molded polypropylene, with 227 square inches of surface on bottom, designed for weight disbursement; Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Dimensions shall be three inches (3") high by seventeen inches (17") in diameter, with molded insert for square tubing and two threaded rod couplings molded in. 3. Frame shall be pre-galvanized zinc coated 12 gauge channel meeting ASTM A653. 4. Hangers shall be clevis and/or band type as per pipe requirements. 5. Accessories shall consist of cadmium plated threaded rods, clamps, nuts, bolts, and washers. 6. Rollers shall be non-binding heavy duty SBR rubber. 2.18 ROOF WALKWAY MEMBRANE A. The walkway pad shall have the following minimum physical properties, and be applied with edges heat or solvent welded; size shall be 1/4" x 24" x 48", color shall be yellow, as manufactured by The Biltrite Corporation, or approved equal. Shore A Hardness (ASTM D2240) 85 +/- 5 Elongation (ASTM D412) 100% min. Tensile Strength (ASTM D412) 500 psi min. Dimensional Stability (ASTM D1204) 0.2% max. change 24 hours at 120 F Tear Resistance (ASTM D624) 95 min Tabor Abrasion, H-18 wheel/500 gr/1,000 rev. Weight Loss Grams 2.0 max. Gauge Loss Inches 0.025 max Heat Aging (ASTM D573), 70 hours at 158 F Tensile  15% Elongation  15% Shore A Hardness  10% 2.19 ROOF PLAQUE A. Contractor shall provide a sixteen inch by sixteen inch (16" x 16") metal plaque which shall contain the information listed below. Fasteners to attach plaque shall be stainless steel, short enough to not penetrate outer surface of hatch or door where mounted. Location of plaque to be determined by Project Manager/Architect. 1. Project Manager/Architect name, phone number, contact person. 2. School district phone number, contact person. 3. School district emergency phone number. 4. Contractor name, phone number, contact person. 5. Subcontractor name, phone number, contact person. 6. Roof Consultant, name, phone number, contact person. 7. Roof system, warranty information. 8. Roof Manufacturer, phone number, contact person. 2.20 ROOF HATCH A. Shall be pre-manufactured hatch, as manufactured by Bilco Company, or approved equal. Size shall be thirty-six inches by thirty-six inches (36" x 36") opening. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Material: Aluminum with 11-gauge cover and frame. 2. Cover: Break-formed, hollow-metal design with three inch (3") concealed fiberglass insulation, three inch (3") beaded, overlapping flange, fully welded at corners, and internally reinforced for 40 psf live load. 3. Curb: Sixteen inches (16") in height with integral cap flashing. One inch (1") fiberboard insulation, fully welded at corners, and three and one-half inches (3-1/2") mounting flange with seven-sixteenths inch (7/16") holes provided for securing frame to the roof deck. 4. Gasket: Extruded EPDM rubber gasketed permanently adhered to cover. 5. Hinges: Heavy-duty pintle hinges with three-eighths inch (3/8") Type 316 stainless steel hinge pins. 6. Latch: Slam hatch with interior and exterior turn handles and padlock hasps. 7. Lift Assistance: Compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes with automatic hold- open arm with grip handle release. 8. Finish: Aluminum with mill finish, or as selected by Project Manager/Architect. 9. Hardware: Aluminum with engineered compression spring tubes. Steel compression springs with electrocoated acrylic finish and Type 316 stainless steel hinges. All other hardware is zinc plated/chromate sealed. 10. Roof hatch must have a minimum R-value of 12. 2.21 TERMINATION/PRESSURE BARS A. Aluminum strip shall be extruded channel bar with a mill finish, width one inch (1"), thickness 0.100" ± .008", leg height one-fourth inch (1/4") top and bottom, leg angle ninety degrees (90°), for perimeter and curb anchorage, having predrilled holes six inches (6") on center, as manufactured by Olympic Fasteners, or approved equal. 2.22 ELASTOMERIC SEALANT A. Multi-Component Polysulfide Sealant: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard, non-modified, 2-or-more-part, polyurethane-based, elastomeric sealant; complying with either ASTM C 920, Type M, Class 25, or FS TT-S-00227E, Class A; self-leveling grade/type where used in joints of surfaces subject to traffic, otherwise non-sag grade/type, as manufactured by Sonneborn, or approved equal. B. Durability: Less than 0.5 square inch adhesion/cohesion loss for three (3) samples of both mortar and aluminum; ASTM C 719 test procedure. C. Adhesion in Peel: Fifteen pound (15#) peel strength and 10% maximum loss of bond to substrate; ASTM C 794. D. Bituminous Modification: Where joint surfaces contain or are contaminated with bituminous materials, provide manufacturer's modified type sealant which is compatible with joint surfaces (modified with coal-tar or asphalt as required). 2.23 SELF-ADHERING UNDERLAYMENT FOR TEMPORARY WATERPROOFING A. A premium heavyweight, minimum 60 mil, self-adhering underlayment, to use as a temporary waterproofing barrier. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2.24 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All materials shall be delivered with appropriate carton and can labels indicating appropriate warnings, storage conditions, lot numbers, and usage instructions. Materials damaged in shipping or storage shall not be used. 2.25 PRECAUTIONS A. Some of the indicated materials are extremely flammable and/or toxic. Use precautions indicated on can and carton labels. 2.26 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Other materials shall be as specified, or of the best grade for the proposed use, as recommended by the manufacturer of said product. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 REFERENCE A. In the instance of a conflict between these specifications and those of the manufacturer and/or current NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines, the more stringent specifications (better quality or greater quantity of work) shall take precedence. B. The manufacturer's Technical Specifications and current NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines shall be considered a part of this specification and shall be referred to for general application procedures and recommendations. C. Application of materials shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and current NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory and IBC guidelines, except where more stringent requirements (better quality or greater quantity of work) are shown or specified. D. General Installation: 1. Comply with governing local, state, and federal regulations, safety standards, and codes. 2. Protect adjacent areas with tarpaulin or other durable materials. 3. Contractor shall prevent overspray, and be responsible for parking lot areas and/or adjoining areas not part of this contract. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for sealing, as required, all openings that may allow bitumen migration or drippage, i.e. pitch dams, envelopes, and filler strips. 5. Prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's or applicator's published instructions. All metal that is to receive bitumen, or come in contact with bitumen or adhesive, shall be first primed with appropriate primer. Any prefinished galvanized sheet steel that is to receive bitumen, or come in contact with bitumen or adhesive, shall be scored, scuffed or abraded before receiving primer application. 6. Use cleaning materials or primers necessary to render an acceptable surface/substrate. 7. All surfaces/substrates shall be clean and dry prior to application of materials. 8. Prior to application of felts and membrane, all foreign matter, gravel, etc., shall be removed from the insulation and/or substrate. Gravel or debris between the insulation/substrate and plies is not acceptable. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 9. Prior to application of flashing membranes, substrate shall be clean and free of any previously installed roofing materials. Contractor shall ensure that all components of substrate be structurally sound before application of flashing materials. 10. Bitumen kettle shall have a fume recovery system, and visible thermometer to provide positive monitoring of the bitumen temperature when it is heated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 11. Ambient temperature shall be 40° F and rising. 12. The underlayment plies and field membrane are to be laid in the direction of maximum roof slope, working from bottom of slope toward ridge. 13. All roof areas will be picture framed with the 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) as the system is being applied. The outer edge of the picture frame sheet shall extend approximately two inches (2") above the top of the cant. All end laps of the field sheets of the 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane shall lap the picture frame sheet a minimum of eight inches (8") or the picture frame sheet side laps shall lap the field sheet a minimum of eight inches (8"). 14. Wrinkles, buckles, kinks, and fishmouths are not acceptable when laying felt and membrane. 15. Dry voids of felt on felt or membrane on membrane are not acceptable. 16. All surfaces that are to receive the self-adhered membranes shall be primed with a fast drying asphaltic primer, except when self-adhered membrane is to be installed over a CTEM surface. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. New Construction: Substrate shall be smooth and free of debris, sharp edges, and other surface irregularities prior to work starting. Substrate repair shall be performed as required to minimum of NRCA standards. 3.03 CATEGORY II (NON-FRIABLE) ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS (ACM) REMOVAL A. Owner and Contractor agree to exonerate, indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the roofing material manufacturer from and against all claims, demands, lawsuits, damages, expenses and losses incurred by Contractor's removal of asbestos-containing materials from Owner's building and work site. Contractor must conduct its operations according to applicable requirements including but not limited to those established by: 1. Occupation Safety and Health Administration (OSHA). 2. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA). 3. Department of Transportation (DOT). 4. State or Local Air Pollution Control Authorities/Agencies. 5. State or Local Solid Waste or Hazardous Waste Authorities/Agencies. 6. State or Local Health Department(s). 7. State or Local Building Code Authorities. 8. Other federal, state or local agencies or authorities. B. Contractor or Owner shall perform appropriate inspections, surveys and file timely notifications to proper authorities prior to starting roof renovation or demolition activities. Inspectors, project planners, project managers, contractors and workers involved in the roof project shall have Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements appropriate training, licenses and registrations. Contractor and Owner shall be responsible for determining and implementing regulatory compliance activities, including but not limited to work practices, engineering controls, personal protection, air monitoring, testing, hazard communication, material handling, record retention, and arranging for waste disposal/handling. C. Contractor must file a Uniform Hazardous Waste Manifest from proper landfill site for each load of asbestos containing material removed. Copies must be sent to Owner and material manufacturer/specifier. Transportation of waste shall be in accordance with applicable Department of Transportation (DOT) requirements. 3.04 ASPHALT HEATING A. Use low burner flames during initial melt-downs. Circulate asphalt after initial melt-down. 1. Maximum asphalt temperature shall be 25°F below the flash point. B. Avoid prolonged heating of asphalt at high temperatures. Reduce the asphalt temperature to below 500°F if asphalt is not being used for periods of four (4) hours or more. C. Kettle shall be free of contaminants. D. Application rates: Bitumen quantities for waterstop/tie-offs, flashings, miscellaneous detail applications, and minimum kettle capacity are not included in application rates. To account for these factors, add approximately 25 percent additional bitumen on a total job average basis. 3.05 ROUGH CARPENTRY A. Nailers shall be installed according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory, and IBC guidelines. B. Wooden nailers shall be installed at gravel stops, drip edges, expansion joints, and on outside perimeter of building. C. Gravel stop and drip edge nailers shall be the same height as the new insulation being installed where required. D. Nailers shall be raised if necessary by anchoring an additional nailer of appropriate height to the existing nailer if the existing nailer is not to be replaced. E. Expansion joint nailers shall extend upward a minimum of eight inches (8") above finish roof height. F. Where parapet wall exists, specified vertical wall shimming material shall be installed beginning at roof height up to a minimum of twelve inches (12”) above finished roof surface, or as detailed, to provide substrate for horizontal termination of roof to wall flashing system. G. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment, or to make material flashing flush or level with offsets and/or transitions, shall be incorporated in these specifications. 3.06 CANTS A. Provide full 45 degree cant strips (no partials) at all intersections of vertical and horizontal surfaces, such as walls, parapet walls, curbs, expansion joints, etc., and as recommended by membrane manufacturer. B. Cants shall provide a four (4) inch rise above the roof’s surface. C. Toe of cant shall be level with the surface to receive new roof membrane and in all cases anchored according to NRCA, Underwriters Laboratory, and IBC guidelines. D. Cant strips shall be installed at the intersection of the deck and all vertical surfaces. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 16 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements E. If a wood cant is used where insulation exists, cant shall be toe nailed into treated wood nailer under cant the same height as insulation. 3.07 APPLICATION OF UNDERLAYMENT PLY SHEETS A. Coverboard shall be covered with one (1) layer of specified SBS ply sheet fully adhered. B. All layers shall be solid mopped in a uniform and continuous manner at the nominal rate of thirty pounds (30#) ± 20% per one hundred (100) square feet using steep asphalt Type IV as required by slope, properly heated and applied within the Equiviscous Temperature (EVT) range. C. Apply adhesive no more than ten (10) feet ahead of each roll being embedded. D. Broom each ply from the unmopped side before adhesive cools. Ensure complete and continuous seal and contact between bitumen and ply sheets without wrinkles, including ends, edges, laps, fishmouths, or blisters. Broom width shall be thirty-four inches (34") minimum. Avoid walking on plies until adhesive has set. E. Specified layers shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and in accordance with general practices as set forth by the NRCA Roofing Manual. G. If slope dictates, underlayment plies shall be installed using the strapped method going with the slope as required by membrane manufacturer. 3.08 APPLICATION OF FINISH FIELD PLY A. Unroll at least ten feet (10') of the 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) and position the sheet. The properly heated steep asphalt (per specification) should be applied at the rate of approximately thirty pounds (30#) ± 20% per one hundred (100) square feet with a mop just ahead of the roll of the CTEM to form a pool of asphalt into which the membrane is to be rolled. The roll of CTEM should push a puddle of asphalt ahead of it with no voids. Care should also be taken not to trap air under the membrane. The pool of asphalt in front of the roll will eliminate entrapped air. B. The asphalt must be mopped so as to extend beyond both edges of the sheet. The amount of asphalt should be just sufficient for excess asphalt to squeeze out along the edges. C. If slope dictates, membrane shall be installed using the strapped method going with the slope as required by membrane manufacturer. D. Picture frame all roof areas with 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) as finish membrane ply is being applied. Rectangular type projections should also be picture framed. 3.09 FIELD LAP SPLICE A. Coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) shall be installed as above with side lap minimum three inches (3"), no maximum. End laps shall be minimum eight inches (8"), no maximum, and staggered a minimum of four feet (4'), no maximum. B. Field Lap Splice with Bitumen: The membrane shall be laid in the same direction as the base ply, but the laps shall not coincide with the base ply. While asphalt is still hot, pressure shall be applied to the laps with a trowel or similar tool to ensure complete contact with the asphalt, and a squeeze-out of bitumen shall be visible. The side laps in the 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) should not be located above those in the base ply, but located to one side or other to avoid excessive ply build-up. Lack of or no side lap bitumen squeeze-out is not acceptable. Contractor shall cut away dry material to dry material, and install a minimum of twelve inch (12") wide membrane overlaid in hot bitumen. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 17 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements C. Field Seams/Laps: 1. All laps/seams, cross seams, T-joints, seams/openings at penetrations, or other details shall be sealed and checked daily, no variance. 2. Laps: All laps shall be straight and free of wrinkles and/or fishmouths, no variance. 3.10 BACKNAILING/STRAPPING A. On slopes greater than one inch (1") in twelve inches (12"), refer to NRCA and/or manufacturer's guidelines for backnailing procedures and follow the more stringent guidelines for all specified materials. Slope Interply& Top Pour Backnail Strap 0 - ½" per 12" Type IV No No ½" - 2" per 12" Type IV Yes Strap if possible 2" - 3" per 12" Type IV Yes Yes 3.11 PERIMETER FASTENING A. Wood nailers are required for perimeter gravel stops or drip edges. Field membrane and all plies shall be mechanically fastened on the vertical face of nailer, twelve inches (12") on center maximum. 3.12 FLASHING - GENERAL A. Flash all penetrations, metal edge systems, walls, curbs, expansion joints, drains as shown on details and approved shop drawings with white Elvaloy® flashing membrane. 1. Field fabricate flashings for vent pipes, vent stacks, or other multi-angled roof projections/penetrations. 2. Mechanically fasten flashing at terminations according to approved details. 3. Fastening membrane flashing through metal counterflashing without the use of a termination bar is not acceptable. B. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment or to make material flashing flush or level with offsets and/or transitions shall be incorporated in the flashing specifications. 3.13 BASE FLASHING (APPROXIMATELY 8" IN HEIGHT MINIMUM) A. Base flashings shall be installed using the flashing membrane, with length of run not to exceed eight linear feet (8'). B. Wooden nailers or curbs shall be installed at all edges and openings in the roof, mechanically fastened to the deck. C. Cant strips shall be installed at the intersection of the deck and all vertical surfaces. D. The roofing field membrane shall extend up over and a minimum two inches (2") above the top of cant strips at all vertical intersections or out to the roof's edge. E. All flashings shall be mechanically fastened with a termination bar a maximum of six inches (6") on center, be a maximum of forty inches (40") above finished roof height, extend a minimum of four inches (4") / eight inches (8") onto the field of horizontal roof membrane, and not exceed eight linear feet (8') of run in length. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 18 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements F. All vertical flashing butted seams of the flashing membrane shall be covered with a six inch (6”) trim strip and hot-air welded. G. All flashing membrane shall be adhered with flashing bonding adhesive to the vertical substrate and hot-air welded to the field of roof membrane; hot-air weld six inch (6”) trim strip over the butted vertical seams/laps. H. Flashing welds shall be a minimum two inch (2") width, no maximum. I. Hot-Air Welding of Flashing: 1. When using a hand-held hot-air welder, the seams should be pressed together using a hand-held roller. The speed and temperature settings of the welding equipment can be affected by the weather conditions at the site of application, therefore, these parameters should be set by trial and error using two (2) pieces of the flashing membrane. Minimum width of hot-air weld two inches (2"), no maximum. 2. Lay the membranes together and apply pressure to the welded seam to ensure full adhesion. 3. Allow the seams to set fully, and probe the entire length for voids. Reseam voids immediately with a hot-air gun and roller. J. All hot-air welded seams/laps shall be tested daily with a probe for integrity, no variance. 3.14 VERTICAL WALL FLASHING (FOR USE APPROXIMATELY 8-18" ABOVE THE FINISHED ROOF LINE AND EXTENDING UPWARD) A. Flashing membrane shall be installed on the vertical beginning a minimum of eight inches (8") above the finished roof line (where the base flashing is terminated), with length of run not to exceed twenty feet (20'). Flashing shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The termination bar used to terminate the minimum eight inch (8") high base flashing shall be covered with the lower edge of the upper vertical flashing. This will cause the termination bar to be buried at the termination point. The selvedge edge of the upper flashing shall be hot-air welded to the base flashing membrane. Care should be taken to ensure the top edge of the base flashing and bottom edge of the vertical flashing are both secured. C. The vertical wall flashing membrane shall be set in flashing bonding adhesive according to manufacturer's guidelines. D. All vertical flashing joints shall be butted together and covered with 6” trim strip and hot-air welded to the flashing membrane. E. Flashing welds shall be minimum two inch (2") width, no maximum. F. Immediately following the laying of the flashing membrane, it shall be pressed or rolled in the width direction of the membrane. This will prevent excessive entrapment of air beneath the membrane. The pressing or rolling shall be in the width direction and with the laps so as not to buck the laps. G. Any flashing extending further than eighteen inches (18") up onto a vertical surface shall be installed using a hidden termination bar. The termination bar used to terminate the first flashing shall be covered by the lower edge of the upper vertical flashing and the selvedge edge shall be hot air welded to the lower flashing. This will cause the termination bar to be hidden at the termination point. Care should be taken to ensure the top edge of the bottom flashing and bottom edge of the upper vertical flashing are both secured. The upper flashing shall be installed and extended up and over the parapet wall and fastened to the nailer on the outside of the wall. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 19 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements H. The flashing membrane shall be run up the wall in lengths not to exceed twenty (20’) linear feet, run under the coping cap and be terminated on the outside of the wall six inches (6") on center; then the coping cap shall be reset. All vertical butt joints are to be stripped in with the 6” trim strip and hot-air welded. I. Hot-air Welding Laps/Joints/Seams: 1. When using a hand-held hot-air welder, the seams should be pressed together using a hand-held roller. The speed and temperature settings of the welding equipment can be affected by the weather conditions at the site of application, therefore, these parameters should be set by the contractor by using two (2) pieces of flashing membrane. Minimum width of hot-air weld shall be two inches (2"). 2. Lay the laps together and apply pressure to the welded seam to ensure full adhesion. 3. Allow the seams to set fully, and probe the entire length for voids. Reseam voids immediately with a hot-air gun and roller. J. All hot-air welded seams/joints/laps shall be tested daily with a probe for integrity, no variance. K. Any lumber or shimming required for attachment or to make material flashing flush or level with offsets and/or transitions shall be incorporated in the flashing specifications. 3.15 BASE FLASHING (APPROXIMATELY 8" IN HEIGHT MINIMUM) A. After proper termination of the base flashing at approximate eight inch (8") height, a saw cut reglet with counterflashing shall be installed according to NRCA and SMACNA guidelines. 3.16 SELF-ADHERING WELDED-SEAM VERTICAL WALL FLASHING (FOR USE APPROXIMATELY 8" ABOVE THE FINISHED ROOF LINE AND EXTENDING UPWARD) A. White self-adhered welded seam membrane flashing shall be installed on the vertical beginning approximately eight inches (8") above the finished roof line (where the coal-tar elastomeric membrane is terminated), with length of run not to exceed the width of the material roll. Strapped flashing method shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The termination bar used to terminate the eight inch (8") high base flashing shall be used to terminate the lower edge of the vertical flashing. This will cause the termination bar to be buried at the eight inch (8") minimum height. Care should be taken to ensure the top edge of the base flashing and bottom edge of the vertical flashing are both secured. C. All existing substrates receiving flashing membrane shall be clean and primed with asphalt primer, prior to application. D. All substrates receiving welded-seam flashing membrane shall be clean and primed with asphalt primer, prior to application. 3.17 PROJECTION FLASHINGS A. Plumbing Vents: Soil vent stack pipes shall receive new lead flashings installed in strict accordance with practices set forth in the NRCA Roofing Manual. The lead shall be carried up and over the top of the stack, and crimped down into the pipe to form a watertight seal. Projections that cannot be sealed thus should be boxed in and flashed as recommended by the roof membrane manufacturer. B. Square Projections: Lay the 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) up to the projection, and cut membrane so that it will extend twelve inches (12") beyond the projection. Cut a slit in the membrane to correspond with the position of the projection, and lay the membrane in hot asphalt. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 20 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements Apply another layer of membrane in exactly the same fashion, but from the opposite direction. For metal flange-type projections, after doing above, strip in with six inch (6") strips of membrane. C. Round Projections: Cut membrane square and eighteen inches (18") from perimeter of projection. Slit square membrane with an "X" of proper size to ensure a close fit and positive seal. Place over projection, and adhere to clean membrane already on the roof. Cut a six inch (6") piece of membrane to apply as a collar, and secure with an all stainless steel clamp. 3.18 CURB FLASHINGS A. The flashing substrate shall be free of any dirt and loose material. B. The underlayment ply or plies and the coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) shall be brought to two inches (2") past the top of the cant strip and adhered. C. Starting on the roof at least six inches (6") from the roofside edge of the cant strip, adhere two (2) plies of Type IV ply sheet extending over the cant and up the vertical a minimum of eight inches (8"). Each lap of the ply sheet shall be a minimum of three inches (3"). D. Over the Type IV ply sheet starting on the roof at least eight inches (8") from the roofside edge of the cant strip, adhere the coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) extending over the cant and up the vertical a minimum of eight inches (8"). Each lap of the coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) shall be a minimum of three inches (3"), hot-air welded, and shall not coincide with the laps of the underlayment sheet. E. Fasten the top edge of the flashings on six inch (6") centers using approved termination bar and fasteners. F. An NRCA-approved metal counterflashing shall extend down over the flashing a minimum of four inches (4"). 3.19 EDGING FLASHINGS A. An NRCA-approved gravel stop/fascia system shall be installed in strict accordance with published instructions to meet ANSI-SPRI ES-1 requirements. B. The 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric field membrane (CTEM) shall extend a minimum of one inch (1") below the base of the nailer, and be fastened six inches (6") on center. A metal edge of proper gauge and dimensions shall be mechanically fastened, using a continuous clip fastened six inches (6") on center, to the wood nailer over the membrane. The metal shall have a minimum of a three inch (3") flange, set in asphalt mastic and fastened into nailer a minimum of six inches (6") on center, and a minimum of a four inch (4") fascia (match existing). The lower elevation of the metal edge shall extend a minimum of one inch (1") below the juncture of the bottom edge of the wood nailer and adjoining wall surface. The metal edge shall have a minimum of one inch (1") gravel stop. C. All metal coming in contact with bituminous material shall be primed. Strip metal edge flange with one strip of Type IV fiberglass felt set in hot bitumen extending inward from the lip of the gravel guard a minimum of three inches (3") past metal flange. Strip in fiberglass felt with 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) flashing from the lip of the gravel guard to a minimum of three inches (3") past the edge of the fiberglass underlayment using hot bitumen. At the leading edge of the CTEM along the lip of the gravel guard, a liberal bead of silyl-terminated polyether sealant shall be applied. 1. NOTE: If internal flange of metal edge detail is tapered, CTEM self-adhered membrane shall be used in lieu of the 60 mil CTEM. Any laps of the CTEM self-adhered membrane shall be covered with a four inch (4") wide piece of the 60 mil CTEM field membrane centered over the lap, Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 21 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements hot-air welded and extending the full length of the lap. At the top leading edge where the self-adhered CTEM membrane does not have a selvedge edge for welding CTEM to CTEM, a liberal bead of silyl-terminated polyether sealant shall be applied. D. The coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) finishing strip shall have a minimum of four inch (4") lap joints that are staggered from any joints in the gravel guard. 3.20 PIPING/CONDUIT A. Piping/conduit shall be raised to NRCA recommended heights, and new supports furnished. Permanent supports shall be installed upon pads approved by membrane manufacturer. Coordinate work with Project Manager/Architect. B. All gas lines, piping, and conduits shall be coated with industrial grade yellow paint. 3.21 PIPE/EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. All gas lines, piping, and conduit must be supported on specified stands or hangars. B. Supports shall be attached to pipes with oversized strapping. C. Designated pipe/equipment supports shall be removed and replaced with new. D. Verify that roof surface is smooth and clean to extent needed to receive materials. Surface shall be cleaned by removing any loose gravel and any foreign matter. E. Install support systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings. Accurately locate and align pre-fabricated pipe supports in locations specified as per approved shop drawings. Pipe supports shall be placed not to exceed ten feet (10') on center and within two feet (2") of all elevation changes, intersections, and corners. F. Supports shall be set on a double layer of membrane, adhered to the roof surface using specified silyl-terminated polyester sealant, unless noted otherwise by support manufacturer. G. Provide bond breaker between dissimilar metals. 3.22 DRAINS A. All drain work, including installation of bowl and lines, shall be performed by a licensed professional master plumber. B. Drain installation shall comply with local plumbing codes. C. Replace all non-cast iron drains with new cast iron drain bowl and dome. D. Install new lead flashing and new roof membrane at all drains in accordance with the detailed drawing. E. Inspect and test drain and drain lines prior to start of work. Open if blocked or clogged, and replace all broken or missing drain components and lines. F. Replacement Drains: Size to match existing drain system. Install watertight to existing lines. Follow drain manufacturer's installation requirements. G. Drain Inserts: Install new drain inserts with permanent gaskets between insert and drain wall to prevent backflow of water and leakage. H. Remove dome and clamping ring. All broken or missing roof drain domes shall be replaced, and reset. I. Inspect every drain after roofing to ensure proper seal to leader line. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 22 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements J. Verify in writing to Project Manager/Architect that all drains and lines are free flowing and watertight prior to substantial completion. 3.23 DRAIN FLASHINGS A. Build a sump to the drain and create a smooth transition by installing tapered insulation around the drain. The slope of the drain sump shall not exceed one inch (1") per horizontal foot (8%). The drain sump should be eight foot by eight foot (8' x 8') sump minimum per roof plans. B. All drains shall receive new lead flashings. Flashings shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with practices as set forth in the NRCA Roofing Manual. C. Drain shall be covered with the 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric roofing membrane (CTEM) and underlayment plies as specified, slitting the membranes over the drain hole with an "X". D. Lead flashings as specified shall be installed and primed with asphalt base primer and allowed to dry prior to application of flashing layers. E. Lead flashing shall be covered with flashing membranes consisting of one layer of fiberglass ply sheet and one layer of 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric roofing membrane (CTEM). Each layer shall be installed in a solid bed of asphalt bitumen as specified and shall extend a minimum of twelve inches (12") past the outer edges of the three by three foot (3' x 3') lead flashing. Flashing membranes and lead flashing shall be slit over the drain hole with an "X", cutting excess material from the interior of the drain bowl. 3.24 EXPANSION JOINT A. Expansion joints at walls and field of the roof shall be curbed as outlined in accordance with NRCA and SMACNA guidelines. The curbs will be flashed as outlined above in Curb Flashings. 3.25 SURFACE FINISH A. Flood Coat and Aggregate: Shall be applied at the minimum rate of five hundred pounds (500#) per one hundred (100) square feet set in hot (liquid) flood coat of steep asphalt Type IV applied at the minimum rate of sixty pounds (60#) per one hundred (100) square feet. 3.26 MEMBRANE PROTECTION A. Walk Way Pads: Install manufacturer's walk way pads continuously on each side of each air-handling/mechanical unit on the roof in accordance with the manufacturer's recommended procedures. B. Where equipment pads, wood sleepers, or walkway slabs are to be installed over the roofing membrane, an additional layer of the roofing membrane shall be installed between the roofing membrane and the pad, sleeper, or slab. Due caution shall be exercised to prevent roofing membrane damage during placement. Where required, membrane shall be welded to field membrane to prevent slippage. 3.27 ROOF PLAQUE A. Metal plaque shall be installed on the underside of each roof hatch or on the inside of the maintenance room door. Location of plaque to be determined by Project Manager/Architect. B. Plaque shall be fastened with stainless steel screws that are short enough to not penetrate outer surface of hatch or door where mounted. Coal-Tar Elastomeric Roof System 07 53 00 - 23 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.28 ROOF HATCH A. Install hatch per manufacturer's guidelines. B. Provide required structural members to properly install the roof hatch. 3.29 OVERNIGHT SEAL A. Provide temporary weather protection during interval between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior surfaces and installation of new construction to ensure that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas of existing building. B. Installation shall be performed according to accepted roofing practice as outlined in the NRCA Roofing Manual. END OF SECTION Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install sheet metal flashing and trim. 2. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in sheet metal flashing and trim to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into the sheet metal flashing and trim all items such as sleeves, anchor bolts, inserts and all other items to be embedded in sheet metal flashing and trim for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections. 3. Extent of the sheet metal flashing and trim is shown. 4. Types of products required include the following: a. Stainless steel sheet flashing. b. Lead sheet flashing. c. Shop-formed, snap-lock metal coping flashing and shop-formed cap flashing requiring no exposed fasteners or splice-plates. d. Extruded gravel stops and fascia extensions. e. Custom shop-fabricated metal coping and gravel stop corner and transition flashings. f. Built-in-place reglets and counterflashing. g. Miscellaneous flashing not supplied under other Sections. h. Complete selection of custom and premium custom-blended full-strength, polyvinylidene fluoride finishes and colors with extended life topcoat. i. Protective strippable film on all surfaces of snap-lock metal coping, extruded aluminum gravel stops, fascia extensions and metal coping corner and transition flashings. j. Miscellaneous accessories, fasteners, cleats and incidental sheet metal flashing and trim system components necessary for a complete installation. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the sheet metal flashing and trim Work. 2. Work advanced without sheet metal flashing and trim items that are specified to be cast-in-place or built-in-place as the Work advances, shall be stopped, demolished and rebuilt incorporating specified sheet metal flashing and trim Work, at no additional cost to OWNER. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 2. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 3. Section 07 54 16, Coal Tar Elastometric Membranes Roof System (CTEM). 4. Section 07 71 00, Roof Specialties. 5. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. The Aluminum Association, (AA). a. AA, ASD-1 - Aluminum Standards and Data. b. AA, DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. c. AA, SAA-46 - Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM A 480, Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. b. ASTM A 666, Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. c. ASTM B 29, Specification for Refined Lead. d. ASTM B 32, Specification for Solder Metal. e. ASTM B 101, Specification for Lead-Coated Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. f. ASTM B 117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. g. ASTM B 209, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. h. ASTM B 370, Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction. i. ASTM B 749, Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products. j. ASTM D 395, Test Methods for Rubber Property-Compression Set. k. ASTM D 412, Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers - Tension. l. ASTM D 522, Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. m. ASTM D 523, Test Method for Specular Gloss. n. ASTM D 624, Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. o. ASTM D 746, Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements p. ASTM D 968, Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. q. ASTM D 1308, Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. r. ASTM D 2240, Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. s. ASTM D 2244, Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. t. ASTM D 2247, Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. u. ASTM D 3363, Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. v. ASTM D 4214, Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 3. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation, (FM). a. FM Loss Prevention Data for Roofing Contractors, 1-49 - Perimeter Flashing. 4. National Roofing Contractors Association, (NRCA). a. NRCA, Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual. 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Incorporated, (SMACNA). a. SMACNA 1013, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 6. The Society for Protective Coatings, (SSPC). a. SSPC - Paint 12, Cold Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage a single installer who is a recognized flashing and trim installer, skilled and experienced in the type of flashing and trim Work required, and equipped to perform workmanship in accordance with recognized standards so that there will be undivided responsibility for the performance of the Work. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with at least three successfully completed Projects including names and telephone numbers of owners, architects and engineers, responsible for the project and the approximate contract price for flashing and trim work. 2. The installer of the sheet metal flashing and trim Work shall be franchised or otherwise accepted in writing by the CTEM roofing materials manufacturer for installation of fully guaranteed CTEM roofing Work in accordance with these Specifications. B. Source Quality Control: 1. Except as otherwise shown, comply with recommendations of the built-up bituminous roofing manufacturer concerning the installation of flashing and trim that affects the CTEM roofing bond or guarantee. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.04 SUBMITALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Samples: a. 12-inch square samples of specified sheet metal flashing and trim metals. b. Each item of gravel stop and coping system, demonstrating assembly of system joint components and fasteners, securely mounted to substrate simulating actual installation in the Work. c. Polyvinylidene fluoride manufacturer’s color samples for final selection by ENGINEER. After initial selection of colors by ENGINEER from manufacturer’s color charts, submit ENGINEER’S preliminary color choices on actual samples of metal substrate for final color selections by ENGINEER. d. Samples will be reviewed by ENGINEER for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for sheet metal flashing and trim required. Include manufacturer's data substantiating that the materials comply with the requirements. b. Submit full selection of manufacturer's standard, custom and premium color charts. 3. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing the manner of forming, jointing and securing flashings and trim. Show fully dimensioned joint details and waterproof connections to adjoining Work and details at obstructions and penetrations. b. Drawings showing the coordination of the Work of this Section with Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction, and Section 07 54 16, Coal Tar Elastometric Membranes Roof System (CTEM). Provide detailed Shop Drawings showing large scale details of sections and profiles of all sheet metal flashing and trim to be used in the Work, with all items, including fastener locations, cleats and other miscellaneous accessories necessary to complete the Work, fully dimensioned, properly located, quantified and presented such that sequence of installation is acceptable to each roofing system and adjacent construction material installer. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer’s qualifications C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Gurantee: a. Submit guarantee as specified in section 1.7 2. Warranty a. Submit warranty as specified in section 1.7 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Deliver sheet metal flashing and trim materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, and undamaged containers and rolls, with labels intact and legible, indicating compliance with approved Shop Drawings. 2. Items delivered in broken, damaged, rusted, or unlabeled condition shall immediately be removed from Site and not offered again for approval by ENGINEER. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store materials in an area undercover and protected from construction traffic. 2. Store materials in same package in which they were shipped, off the ground and on platforms protected from dirt and other contamination. 3. Store in a manner which does not permit water to remain on sheet metal flashing and trim materials and system components. C. Handling of Materials: 1. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim from dents, scratches, warps and bends. 2. Remove strippable protective film, immediately proceeding installation of each system component. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduling: 1. Do not proceed with sheet metal flashing and trim Work until curb and substrate construction, cant strips, blocking, reglets and other construction to receive the Work is completed. 2. Deliver materials to the Site in sufficient quantities to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. 3. 4. Schedule the installation of sheet metal flashing and trim to coincide with the installation of built-up bituminous roofing, waterproofing, drains, piping, blocking, nailers, reglets, framing at openings, curbs, parapets and other adjoining and substrate Work. 5. Proceed with and complete the Work only when materials, equipment and knowledgeable tradesmen, required for the installation of sheet metal flashing and trim, are at the Site and are ready to follow, and integrate sheet metal flashing and trim Work with roofing Work, in order to maintain watertight conditions. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Provide coping and cap flashing manufacturer’s fifteen year warranty against blow-off, leak, or premature membrane failure in winds of up to 110 miles per hour. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Provide manufacturer's twenty-year warranty on the specified coil coated polyvinylidene fluoride based coating. C. Guarantee that the polyvinylidene fluoride based coating meets all criteria specified and will not spall, check, craze, peel or otherwise lose adhesion for a period of twenty years from the date of installation, to the extent that such shall create unsightly conditions or otherwise impair the intended architectural qualities of the building. D. In the event that the coil coated polyvinylidene fluoride based coating fails to meet the specified standards the manufacturer shall, at their own expense, replace or field paint, at the discretion of OWNER, all areas affected by the failure. In the event that repainting is selected, it shall be done at mutually agreeable intervals throughout the term of the warranty. E. The warranty specified shall not deprive OWNER of other rights OWNER may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under requirements of the Contract Documents. F. The warranty does not apply where failure is caused by accidents, or external conditions or forces beyond the control of the manufacturer. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Performance Criteria: 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim shall be permanently watertight, and not deteriorate in excess of manufacturer's published limitations. 2. Snap-lock coping shall be detailed, fabricated and installed to provide a minimum of FM 1-90 wind up-lift resistance and require no exposed fasteners of any kind. 3. Comply with fabrication details recommended by FM, SMACNA, NRCA and the requirements of the sheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer, and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Metal Sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Stainless Steel Sheet metal flashing and trim: Provide 26 gage sheet stainless steel, Type 316, complying with ASTM A 666, with No. 2D dead soft, fully annealed finish, unless required to be harder temper for proper forming and performance for application indicated. 2. Lead Sheet metal flashing and trim: Provide sheet formed from common desilverized pig lead complying with ASTM B 29 and ASTM B 749; weighing 6.0 pounds per square foot. 3. Lead-Coated Copper Flashings and Trim: Provide cold-rolled sheet copper complying with ASTM B 370 of proper temper for application shown and required forming. Provide Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements lead coating complying with ASTM B 101, Type 1, Class A, not less than 0.06 pounds per square foot of lead coating on one side; weighing 1.06 pounds per square foot. 4. Aluminum Sheet metal flashing and trim: Provide aluminum complying with ASTM B 209, alloy 3003, temper H14. Provide sheet aluminum 0.032-inches thick with AA-C22A41 finish. B. Formed Metal Coping, Caps and Trim: Provide smooth sheet of 16-gage, 5005-H134 aluminum alloy, complying with the following: 1. Provide coping and cap flashings, sized as shown, that provides for independent mounting and full expansion and contraction over prefabricated 6-inch wide aluminum retainers, compression clips mounted 12 feet - 0 inches on centers, and 2-inch wide aluminum retainer plates with single compression pad mounted between dual compression clips. 2. Provide system that incorporates a gutter bar with dual compression gaskets at each joint to drain water. 3. System shall not incorporate exposed sealants. 4. Provide internal face line-up splices at all joints. 5. All coping and cap flashings shall have all corners mitered and continuously heliarc welded watertight prior to shop-painting. Exposed mechanical fasteners, blind rivets and similar methods are not approved for the Work. Reinforce metal at welds as may be required to provide welded seams. 6. Concealed fasteners splice plates and neoprene compression pads shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 7. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Gutter Splice System TITE-LOC Coping by Peterson Aluminum Corporation. b. Or equal. C. Extruded Aluminum Gravel Stops and Fascia Sections: Provide extrusions of 6063-T-52 aluminum alloy, complying with the following: 1. Provide optional extruded fascia and optional aluminum soffit trim section finished to match gravel stops. 2. Provide gravel stops that utilize concealed joint covers for a flat, clean, unbroken line appearance. 3. Provide hold-down clips 36 inches on center. 4. Concealed Joint Plates: Same material and finish as gravel stop flashing 9 feet - 11 inches on center. 5. Provide special flashings as required, all pre-fabricated at the shop; of formed sheet 5005-H134, aluminum alloy, 16-gage. Finish to match extruded aluminum gravel stops and fascia sections. 6. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. 79591 Gravel Stop Section, 79589 Fascia Units and 79590 Soffit Trim by Architectural Products Company. b. Or equal. D. Elastic Sheet Flashing: 1. Polychloroprene synthetic rubber sheet, 1/16-inch thick, black, with the following physical properties: a. Hardness, ASTM D 2240: 50 to 70 Shore A. b. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 1500 psi. c. Tear Strength, ASTM D 624: 120 pounds per linear inch. d. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 300 percent. e. Brittleness Temperature, ASTM D 746: -30°F. 2. Butyl synthetic rubber sheet, 1/16-inch thick, black, with the following physical properties: a. Hardness, ASTM D 2240: 50 to 70, Shore A. b. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 1200 psi. c. Tear Strength, ASTM D 624: 200 pounds per linear inch. d. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 300 percent. e. Brittleness Temperature, ASTM D 746: -30°F. 3. Ethylene-propylene-diene monomer synthetic rubber sheet, 1/16-inch thick, black, with the following physical properties: a. Hardness, ASTM D 2240: 50 to 70, Shore A. b. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 1400 psi. c. Tear Strength, ASTM D 624: 125 pounds per linear inch. d. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 300 percent. e. Brittleness Temperature, ASTM D 746: -75°F. E. Flashing Reglets: 1. General: a. Provide snap-lock type reglets of Type 304 stainless steel, 0.020-inches minimum thickness. b. Provide reglets that engage counterflashing by use of a snap-lock or spring-lock profile. System shall employ only mechanical interlocking features for securing counterflashing in reglet, without the need for clips or screws. c. Provide manufacturer’s standard Type 304 stainless steel spring-lock profile flashing, 5-1/8-inches high, designed to incorporate a positive air break and to engage spring-lock reglet flange. d. Provide reglets with 1-inch end laps and spring-lock flashing with 3-inch end laps. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Built-In-Place Masonry Reglets: Provide built-in-place reglets for masonry installation with top flange 4-inches wide to penetrate the first wythe of brick. a. Provide reglets without exposed fasteners of any kind. Provide engagement flange 1-1/8-inch high by 1/2-inch wide with snap-lock profile designed to pressure-lock counterflashing in place. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Type MA-4 Masonry Reglet by Fry Reglet Corporation. 2). Or equal. F. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Burning Rod for Lead: Same composition as lead sheet. 2. Solder for Copper: ASTM B 32, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead, used with rosin flux. 3. Solder for Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead alloy grade 60A, used with an acid flux of the type recommended by the stainless steel manufacturer. Use a non-corrosive rosin flux over tinned surfaces. 4. Stainless Welding Rods: Type recommended by stainless steel sheet manufacturer for the type of metal sheets furnished. 5. Nails, Screws and Rivets: Same material as flashing sheet, or as recommended by manufacturer of flashing sheet. 6. Cleats: Same metal and gage as sheet being anchored, 2-inches wide, punched for two anchors. 7. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, cold-applied solvent-type bituminous mastic coating for application in dry film thickness of 15-mils per coat. 8. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 9. Roofing Cement: Provide a medium to heavy trowel-grade, cut-back asphalt mastic roof cement reinforced with non-asbestos fibers, and containing petroleum solvents and special mineral stabilizers, complying with ASTM D 4586, Type II. 10. Base Flashing Felts: Asphalt-coated, polyester/glass scrim reinforced flashing sheet or as recommended by the manufacturer of the built-up bituminous roofing. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricated Metal Flashing: Shop-fabricate metal sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with profiles and sizes shown, and to comply with manufacturer's recommended details. Except as otherwise shown or specified, provide soldered flat-lock seams, and fold back metal to form a hem on the concealed side of exposed edges. Comply with metal producers' recommendations for tinning, soldering and cleaning flux from metal. B. Fabricated Elastic Flashings: Shop-fabricate elastic flashing to comply with profiles and sizes shown and to comply with elastomeric material manufacturer recommendations. C. Provide completely shop-fabricated corners and transition sheet metal flashing and trim for all coping, cap flashing and gravel stops; heliarc welded to ensure watertight joints. Grind Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements all welds smooth so as to be indistinguishable from surrounding surfaces. Finish with specified paint system after fabrication. D. Where fabricator does not recommend grinding welds smooth, comply with SMACNA formed metal details requiring double-lock seamed construction. E. Pitch Pans: 1. Install pitch pans of 24-gauge stainless steel according to NRCA standards, minimum of six inches by six inches (6" x 6"). 2. Pitch pans shall be fabricated to minimum of four inches (4") above the finished roof membrane. Seams of pitch pans shall be soldered inside and out. 3. Mastic shall be applied under pitch pan flange a minimum of one-half pound (1/2#) per linear foot. 4. All metal flanges shall be primed with asphalt primer prior to flashing installation. Inside of pitch pan shall be cleaned and primed. 5. All projections enclosed in pitch pans shall be cleaned in any manner suitable and coated with a rust inhibitive coating as approved by the Owner/Project Consultant. Coating shall be allowed to dry prior to pitch pan fill. 6. Base of pitch pans shall be filled around penetration with M-1 sealant. Sprinkle mod bit granules over sealant 1/4" deep. 7. Top finish fill shall be coal-tar urethane, with maximum fill to within three-eighths inch (3/8") of top of pitch pan sides. 8. Strip metal flange of pitch pan with one strip of Type IV fiberglass felt set in hot bitumen extending from the outer edge of the flange a minimum of three inches (3") inward to base of pitch pan. 9. Strip in fiberglass felt with 60 mil coal-tar elastomeric membrane (CTEM) flashing set in hot asphalt extending from the outer edge of the Type IV fiberglass underlayment a minimum of three inches (3") inward to the base of the pitch pan. F. Bonnets/Hoods: 1. Fabricate and install above all pitch pans, where necessary, or reinstall as applicable, metal bonnets over all pitch pans, no exceptions. 2. Bonnets/Hoods shall be manufactured with metal compatible with metal to which bonnet is to be attached. 3. On beams and other steel, weld in place bonnets fabricated from one-fourth inch (1/4") steel plate. 4. Draw band bonnets fabricated from 22-gauge galvanized steel may be used on circular projections. 2.04 ALUMINUM COPINGS, GRAVEL STOPS AND CAP FLASHING FINISHES A. Exposed Aluminum Polyvinylidene Fluoride Based Coating: Apply full strength polyvinylidene fluoride based coatings at the factory by coil coating for sheet material and Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements spray coating for extruded or factory-fabricated material. Provide the following four coat finish system complying with the following: 1. Alkali clean and hot water rinse all surfaces to receive polyvinylidene fluoride based finish. 2. Prepare a chemical conversion coating on the surface, using phosphates or chromates followed by a cold water rinse. Seal with a chromic acid rinse and dry, except where manufacturer recommends another method to achieve greater coating reliability. 3. Apply a base prime coat of epoxy paint to the prepared surface in its coil form, by reverse roller coating. Fully cure in a gas-fired oven to a dry film thickness of 0.2 to 0.4- mils. Follow with a barrier coat, 1.0-mils thick. 4. Apply color coat containing mica pearlescent or metallic flakes over the barrier coat by roller coating for coil material and airless or Ransburg Elastrostatic Hand Spray for extrusions and fuse at a peak metal temperature of 440°F for a dry film thickness of 0.7- mils for coil coating and 1.2-mils for spray coating so that the total dry film is approximately 1.0-mil thick for coil material and 1.5-mils thick for extruded material. 5. Apply clear fluoropolymer top coat to provide a dry film thickness of 0.4 to 0.8-mils. The entire four coat system shall have a dry film thickness of 2.6-mils, minimum. 6. Provide the following physical properties, as proven by appropriate and recognized laboratory test methods acceptable to ENGINEER: a. Weathering, ASTM D 4214: Chalking, not more than No. 8, after exposure for 5000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. b. Color Change, ASTM D 2244: No greater than 5 NBS units after removal of external deposits and after exposure for 5000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. c. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D 2247; no blisters after 3000 hours. d. Salt Spray, ASTM B 117: Few scattered blisters no larger than ASTM No. 4, and no more than 1/16-inch creep from areas scribed to bare metal after 3000 hours. e. Dry Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch. f. Wet Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch; extruded material only. g. Boiling Water Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after one hour immersion in distilled boiling water. h. Water Immersion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after immersion in aerated distilled water 80 ±10°F after 500 hours. i. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 968: Coefficient of abrasion of 67, minimum. j. Gloss, ASTM D 523: 30±5 reflectivity at 60°F. k. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: HB-H minimum. l. Dry Film Thickness, ASTM D 3363: Primer, 0.2 to 0.4-mils; barrier coat, 1.0-mils; color coating, 0.7 to 1.5-mils; clear topcoat, 0.4 to 0.8-mils. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements m. Solvent Resistance: 100 Double MEK rubs minimum. n. Flexibility, ASTM D 522: No cracking prior to metal fracture. o. Acid Resistance, ASTM D 1308: 16 hour spot test with five percent hydrochloric acid - no effect. p. Alkali Resistance, ASTM D 1308: 16 hour spot test with five percent sodium hydroxide - no effect. B. Colors: Provide the following: 1. Full selection of manufacturer’s standard, custom and premium colors for final selection by ENGINEER. 2. ENGINEER will select custom special extended life premium colors for sheet metal flashing and trim at time of Shop Drawing and sample submission review. C. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Duranar Metallic XL Specialty Color 4-Coat System by PPG Industries Coatings and Resins Division, Incorporated. 2. Or equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR and installer shall examine the substrate and the conditions under which the sheet metal flashing and trim Work is to be performed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with sheet metal flashing and trim Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installing sheet metal flashing and trim, verify shapes, and dimensions to be covered. B. Prepare substrates as recommended by the sheet metal manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Separate dissimilar metals from each other by painting each metal surface in the area of contact with a heavy application of bituminous coating, or by other permanent separation as recommended by the manufacturers of the dissimilar metals. Comply with the following: a. Separate stainless steel from dissimilar metals, including regular steel and iron, and from cementitious materials by a course of roofing felt wherever possible. Where felt application is not possible, coat the stainless steel or the other material with a 15-mil bituminous coating. Where felt is applied under sheets which will be soldered or welded, cover felt with a course of building paper before installing stainless steel. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for other forms of protection of the stainless steel against Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. In addition to bituminous coatings, apply a heavy tinning of solder at locations where lead-coated copper contacts dissimilar metals. 2. Provide thermal expansion for running trim, flashing, valleys, and other items exposed for more than 15 feet-0 inches continuous length. Maintain a watertight installation at expansion seams. Locate expansion seams as shown or, if not shown, at the following maximum spacing for each general flashing use: a. Valleys: Midway between drains (at high points in slopes), but in no case more than 30 feet-0 inches apart, except as otherwise shown. b. Sheet metal flashing and trim: At 10 feet-0 inch intervals and 2 feet-0 inch each side of corners and intersections. 3. Fabricate and install Work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal. Provide uniform, neat flat-locked seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds and sealant. Except as otherwise shown, fold back the sheet metal to form a hem on the concealed side of exposed edges. All exposed edges of all sheet metal flashing shall be hemmed not less than 1/2- inch wide. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions wherever possible in exposed Work, and locate so as to minimize the possibility of leakage. Cover and seal Work as required for a watertight installation. a. Provide cleat-type anchorages for metal flashings and trim wherever practical, arranged to relieve stresses from building movement, and thermal expansion and contraction. 5. On vertical surfaces lap two-piece flashings a minimum of 4-inches. 6. On sloping surfaces, for slopes of not less than 6-inches in 12-inches, lap unsealed flashings a minimum of 6-inches. For slopes less than 6-inches in 12-inches use soldered flat locked seams. 7. For embedment of metal flashing flanges in built-up bituminous roofing or composition flashing or stripping, extend flanges for a minimum of 4-inches embedment. B. Installation of Stainless Steel Sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Tin the edges of plain stainless steel to be soldered, for a width of 1-1/2-inches, using solder for stainless steel and acid flux. Remove every trace of acid flux residue from the metal promptly after tinning or soldering. 2. Where welded joints are shown, provide upturned, 1/2-inch wide hooked flanges, and weld between adjoining sheets; lay seam flat. C. Installation of Lead Sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Where prefabricated units of lead flashing are to be set in felts the under side may be coated with roofing cement. 2. Cut and shape lead sheets in place with minimum of 1-inch lapped joints, and form bends and folds to provide corners and intersections as shown. Shave or wire-brush joint areas immediately before sealing joint. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Burn joints in lead sheets to provide true welded construction, exercising care to avoid reduction of sheet thickness. D. Installation of Aluminum Sheet metal flashing and trim: Bed base members and flashings of aluminum in roofing cement. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and anchorage of units. Provide gasket-type washers under exposed screw and bolt heads. Shim and seal under units as required to provide continuous, level, plumb and true lines. E. Installation of Metal Copings and Extruded Gravel Stops and Fascia Sections: 1. Install metal copings using concealed fasteners and plates in compliance with manufacturer’s written recommendations as shown on approved Shop Drawings. 2. Coping and cap flashings shall be installed with 3/8-inch wide butt joints 12 feet-0 inches on center, unless otherwise shown. 3. Use all items supplied by the manufacturer for a complete, watertight and blow-off resistant installation. 4. Set all flashings straight, level and plumb. F. Installation of Elastic Sheet metal flashing and trim: 1. Bond elastic sheet metal flashing and trim sheets to vertical substrates and to other surfaces as indicated or recommended by sheet manufacturer, and seam the G. Installation of Reglets and Reglet Counterflashing: 1. For installation of built-in-place masonry reglets refer to Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 2. Install counterflashing with positive pressure against base flashing and reglet and with air break at mid-point to prevent capillary action. No screws or exposed fasteners shall be permitted in the finished Work except those required at each pre-punched hole for surface-mounted reglet attachment. 3. End lap counterflashing horizontally a minimum of 3-inches. 4. Overlap built-up composition base flashing with counterflashing a minimum of 4-inches vertically and fold lower edge back on itself for 1/2-inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Polyvinylidene Fluoride Based Coatings: Determine conformity of sheet metal flashing and trim Work requiring painted finish to these Specifications as follows: 1. The manufacturer of the sheet metal flashing and trim Work shall set aside and label samples of each component of the sheet metal flashing and trim Work from each production lot for the Project. Protect samples from weather. 2. Make samples of sheet metal flashing and trim Work available at all times, for comparison with installed sheet metal flashing and trim Work as requested by OWNER, for the full time of the warranty. 3. Make color comparison measurements with a Hunter Tristimulus Color Difference Meter employing methods of computation in use at the National Bureau of Standards conforming to ASTM D 2224. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 07 62 00 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Protect sheet metal flashing and trim until Final Acceptance of the Work. B. Do not permit workmen, or others, to step directly on flashing sheets in place, or to place or move equipment over sheet metal flashing and trim surfaces. Protect surfaces during installation of permanent covering work and adjoining Work. C. Neutralize excess flux as the Work progresses with five percent to percent washing soda solution and rinse thoroughly. D. Clean exposed surfaces of every substance which is visible or might cause corrosion or prevent uniform oxidation of the metal surfaces. Exercise extreme care to remove fluxes and ferrous metal particles, including welding splatter and grinding dust. END OF SECTION Roof Specialties 07 71 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 71 00 ROOF SPECIALTIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all roof specialties Work. 2. The extent of the roof specialties is shown. 3. The types of roof specialties Work required includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Exposed surface-mounted polyvinylidene fluoride finished aluminum drains, sumps, and downspouts. b. Roof and overflow drains. c. All miscellaneous straps, fittings and fasteners. d. Welded miters, end caps, downspout elbows and downspouts. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that shall be installed with the roof specialties Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 2. Section 07 54 16, Coal Tar Elastometric Membranes Roof System (CTEM).. 3. Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 4. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. Federal Specification, (FS). a. FS H-C-494, Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent Type, Acid Resistant. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Standards: Comply with applicable standards and recommendations of SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, for the fabrication and installation of roof specialties Work, except to the extent more stringent requirements are specified. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: Provide roof drains, drainage sumps, and downspouts as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer specializing in the production of this type of Work, including hardware, accessories, mounting and installation components. Roof Specialties 07 71 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Shop Drawings showing the manner of forming, jointing and securing the metal to form roof specialties Work. Show expansion joint details and water-proof connections to adjoining work and at obstructions and penetrations. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for roof specialties applications. Include manufacturer's certification or other data substantiating that the materials comply with the requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials to preclude denting, scratching or otherwise marring the surface and finish of the roof specialties material. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduling: Coordinate roof specialties Work with roofing, flashing, trim, and the construction of decks, parapets and other adjoining work, to provide a permanently watertight, leak-proof, secure and non-corrosive installation. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide aluminum sheet or strip of 5005-H154 alloy, with smooth finish; downspout thickness of 0.05-inches; sump thickness of 10 gage minimum; wall penetration of 10 gage minimum. B. Finishes: Provide metallic dark bronze polyvinylidene fluoride finish for all Work. 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Duranar XL by PPG Industries, Incorporated. b. Or equal C. Size and Profile: 1. Downspouts: As shown. 2. Drainage Sump: Size as required for proper transition and drainage. D. Roof, Right Angled Drains, and Overflow Drains: Provide roof and right angled drains constructed of high impact ABS plastic, ultraviolet and extreme weather resistant. 1. Grates: Domed shape, constructed of nylon with ultraviolet inhibitor and integral weir. 2. Flexible Bellows: 3-inch and 4-inch diameter, constructed of thermoplastic rubber with Type 316 stainless steel clamping bands. Roof Specialties 07 71 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS: 1. Provide the materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, coatings, separators, aluminum wall penetration, sealants, and accessory items as recommended by the sheet metal manufacturer for roof specialties Work, except as otherwise shown. 2. Cleats and Straps: Same metal as roof specialties Work being anchored or supported. 3. Roofing Cement: Neoprene adhesive, compatible with substrate and adjoining work. 4. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphaltic coating, FS TT-C-494, Type II, compounded for minimum thickness per coat of 15-mils (dry). B. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Drainage Sumps, Type R.O.D. Roof and Overflow Drains, Type S.D. Right Angle Drain with Overflow and Downspouts by W.P. Hickman Aluminum Construction Products. 2. Or equal. 2.03 FABRICATION A. General: 1. The fabrication requirements for metal drainage sumps and downspout Work apply to both shop-fabricated and on-site-fabricated Work. 2. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with the recommendations and instructions of the manufacturer of the sheet metal being fabricated. 3. Provide for thermal expansion of exposed items. Maintain a water-tight seal at expansion joints. Locate expansion joints at the following maximum spacings: a. Midpoint of run. 4. Fabricate Work with lines and corners of exposed units true and accurate. Form exposed faces flat and free of buckles, excessive waves and avoidable tool marks, considering the temper and reflectivity of the metal. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds and sealant. Fold back the sheet metal to form a hem on the concealed side of exposed edges. 5. Fabricate drainage sumps and downspouts and supports as shown. 6. Support and Anchorage: Fabricate units with adequate provisions for support and anchorage, of the types required for the indicated method of installation. B. Overflow Scupper, Collector Head and Downspout: 1. Fabricate overflow scupper, collector head and downspout of profile and size indicated, taking care that the roof drain leader fits properly into the back of the collector head. Seal the pipe to the collector head for watertightness. 2. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. 3. Fabricate with required connection pieces. 4. Fabricate section square, true, and accurate in size, in maximum possible lengths Roof Specialties 07 71 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements and free of distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance. 5. Hem exposed edges of metal. 6. Form and seal all metal joints; provide for expansion joints per SMACNA. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR and installer shall examine the supporting structure and other elements of the substrate and conditions under which the roof specialties Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work and performance of the drainage sumps, roof and overflow drains, and downspouts. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Wherever possible, take field measurements, prior to completion of shop fabrication and finishing of metal drainage sumps and downspout Work. Do not delay job progress. Allow for erection tolerances corresponding with specified tolerances where final dimensions cannot be established before fabrication. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions. B. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: Coat all aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, steel and other metals as specified in Section 09 91 00, Painting. C. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions, wherever possible, in exposed Work, and locate so as to minimize the possibility of leakage. Cover and seal Work, as required, for a tight installation. D. Provide concealed cleat-type anchorages wherever practical and arrange to relieve stresses in the roof specialties Work which result from building movement and thermal expansion. E. Splice and Expansion Units: Use 0.050-inch thick splice plates. F. Bed flashing flanges in a bed of roofing cement or other setting compound which is compatible with adjoining work and substrate. G. On vertical overlaps, lap sheet metal a minimum of 3-inches. H. On sloping overlaps, of slopes of not less than 6-inches in 12-inches, lap unsealed overlaps a minimum of 6-inches. I. For embedment of metal flanges in elastic sheet flashing or stripping, extend flanges for a minimum of 4-inches embedment. J. Support and anchor each unit of Work in the manner as shown, but in no case in a manner which would be inadequate for thermal expansion stresses and the normal loading of water, wind and similar loadings. Roof Specialties 07 71 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements K. Install units with lines and corners true and accurate in alignment and location. Install drainage sumps to assure positive drainage to downspouts. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect the roof drains, metal drainage sumps, and downspouts from all damage until Final Completion. B. Roof drains, drainage sumps and downspouts damaged before Final Completion shall be replaced with new material as specified herein, at no additional cost to OWNER. C. Clean exposed surfaces of every substance which is visible or might cause corrosion of the metal or deterioration of the finish. END OF SECTION Roof Hatches 07 72 33 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 72 33 ROOF HATCHES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all roof hatch Work. 2. Extent of roof hatches is shown. a. Ladder access roof hatch. b. Miscellaneous hardware, safety posts, closures, fasteners and other B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with the roof hatches Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 54 16, Coal Tar Elastomeric Membranes Roof System (CTEM). 2. Section 07 62 00, Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Wood Preservers Association, (AWPA). a. AWPA, LP-2, Softwood Lumber, Timber and Plywood Pressure Treatment with Water-Borne Preservatives of Above Ground Use. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM A 1011, Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability. b. ASTM B 221, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles and Tubes. 3. Occupational Safety and Health Administration, (OSHA). a. Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, 29 CFR 1910 Subpart D - Walking and Working Surfaces, 1910.27 Fixed Ladders. 4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (NAAMM). a. NAAMM, Metal Finishes Manual. 5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, (SMACNA). a. SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 6. Uniform Building Code, (UBC). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE Roof Hatches 07 72 33 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Fabrication Criteria: 1. Ladder Access Roof Hatches: Provide the following: a. Fabricate access roof hatches to withstand a live load of 40 pounds per square foot over the horizontal plane of the hatch and a concurrently acting point load of 200 pounds located at the center of the hatches. Specified loadings shall not cause any permanent deflections in the hatch or support curbs or cause damage to operating hardware. B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of the International Building Code for roof accessory fabrication and installation and the requirements for resistance to superimposed loadings. 2. SMACNA, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 3. OSHA, Section 1910.27. C. Component Supply and Compatibility: Obtain materials only from manufacturers that will, if required: 1. Send a qualified technical representative to the Site, for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions during the installation of the items. 2. Engage manufacturers who has been successfully providing roof accessories of the type specified and who will submit a list of successful installations along with the telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for the Work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings a. Copies of manufacturers proposed fabrication details and material specifications for each roof accessory item. Include flashing and roughing-in drawings showing this Work coordinated with the roofing Work as appropriate to the location of the item. 2. Product Data a. Provide manufacturer's specifications, installation and coordination instructions and other data as may be requested by ENGINEER substantiating that products comply with the requirements. B. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Manuals: Upon completion of the Work, furnish six copies of detailed maintenance manuals including the following information: a. Product name and number. b. Name, address and telephone number of fabricator and manufacturer's local distributor. Roof Hatches 07 72 33 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning, including cleaning materials, application methods and precautions as to use of materials that may be detrimental to finish when improperly applied. 3. Guarantee: a. Guarantee as specified in section 1.7 of this specification. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Delivery all materials without damage and in manufacturer's original undamaged protective wrappings bearing name and model numbers of approved items. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Minimize the amount of time roof accessories are stored on Site. If roof hatches do arrive on Site before they can be incorporated into the orderly assembly of the roofing Work store in completely protected and secure enclosures, under cover and away from all construction traffic. 2. Do not store in contact with earth, wood or concrete, or other surfaces which could cause staining or other types of surface marks or blemishes of any kind. C. Handling of Materials: 1. Do not subject roof hatches to bending or stress of any kind. 2. Handle and protect units during installation in a manner recommended by the roof hatch manufacturer. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduling: 1. Coordinate the installation of roof hatch Work with roofing and flashing Work in order to provide continuity in the installation of roofing Work and to obtain complete and permanently weather-resistant and waterproof construction. 2. Schedule roof hatch items to arrive at the Site as installation of the roofing Work is proceeding such that roof accessory items can be built into the Work as shown on approved Shop Drawings and without the need for field changes to approved installation details or methods of flashing. B. Protection: 1. Provide continuous protection of materials against damage primarily by storing materials under cover and above ground and away from other construction traffic. C. Conform to applicable OSHA and the Uniform Building Codes. 1.07 GUARANTEE A. Latch Access Roof Hatches: CONTRACTOR shall furnish a written guarantee obtained from the manufacturer of the roof hatches. Guarantee shall state the following: Roof Hatches 07 72 33 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Roof hatch is to operate properly and be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years from date of Final Completion. 2. Should any part fail to function, or break in normal use during this period, manufacturer shall furnish and install a new part, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Ladder Access Roof Hatch: 1. General: a. Provide manufacturer's standard units, modified as necessary to comply with the requirements of these Specifications. Custom fabricate units wherever necessary for size, type and profile, using manufacturer's standard detailing to the extent applicable. b. Shop fabricate each unit complete with framing, gaskets, structure, curbs, flashing, well liner, hardware, accessories, anchorage provisions and other components. Disassemble only to the extent required for delivery c. Provide manufacturer's recommended operable steel safety posts mounted at center of roof ladder rungs. 2. Materials: a. Steel: Sheet specified by the manufacturer for strength, durability and proper application of finish. 1). Cover and Curb: 14 gauge, G-90 galvanized steel. 2). Cover Liner: 14 gauge, G-90 galvanized steel. 3). Finish: Alkyd based red oxide primed steel b. Insulation: One-inch glass fiber, between panels. c. Gaskets: Fingered design; polyvinyl chloride. d. Equip units with standard self-lifting mechanism. Provide stainless steel hardware including hold-open devices, hinges, compression spring operators enclosed in telescopic tubes, latch, and operating handles for inside and outside operation. e. Construct units for live loading specified, using manufacturer's standard gauges of metal and fabrication details. f. Size: 36 inch by 36 inch. g. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Type S with Ladder Up Safety Post by Bilco Company. 2). Or Equal. 3. Roof Hatch Railing System: Roof Hatches 07 72 33 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Provide fixed hatch railing system with spring loaded swing gate. Railing system to meet or exceeds OSHA fall protection regulations (29 CFR 1910.29). b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Bil-Guard® 2.0 by Bilco Company. 2). Or Equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR must examine the substrates to receive roof hatches and the conditions under which the roof hatch Work is to be performed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work and performance of the roof hatch. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: Separate metal surfaces of roof hatch from dissimilar metals, and from wood and cementitious substrates. Coat all aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, steel and other metals as specified in Section 09 91 00, Painting. B. Bed flanges of set-on accessories in mastic or compound, which is compatible with roofing and flashing. On sloping decks, flash flanges with other work for proper water shed. C. Anchor roof hatch Work permanently to the substrate, by approved methods which are adequate for the sizes and locations of units and which will develop load-resistance specified. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean surfaces of roof hatches as required preventing deterioration and uneven weathering. B. Protect roof hatch Work from damage until Final Completion. END OF SECTION Manufactured Roof Curbs 07 73 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 73 00 MANUFACTURED ROOF CURBS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all manufactured roof curbs Work. 2. The extent of the manufactured roof curbs is shown and specified. 3. The types of manufactured roof curbs Work required includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Roof curbs. b. All miscellaneous fittings and fasteners. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that shall be installed with the manufactured roof curbs Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM A653 – Standard Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. This section specifies curbs for mechanical equipment specified by Division 23, Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning and Section 07 72 33 Roof Hatches. These curbs are designed and fabricated as welded single piece units that are structurally designed to span structural framing. They require structural calculations from manufacturer. 2. Manufactured curbs are to be designed, engineered, and fabricated for exact mechanical units selected after bid. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings showing the manner of forming, jointing and securing the metal to form roof manufactured roof curbs Work. Show expansion joint details and water-proof connections to adjoining work and at obstructions and penetrations. Manufactured Roof Curbs 07 73 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and installation instructions for manufactured roof curbs applications. Include manufacturer's certification or other data substantiating that the materials comply with the requirements. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle materials to preclude denting, scratching or otherwise marring the surface and finish of the manufactured roof curbs material. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Scheduling: Coordinate manufactured roof curbs Work with roofing, flashing, trim, and the construction of decks, parapets and other adjoining work, to provide a permanently watertight, leak-proof, secure and non-corrosive installation. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Frames: 1. Material: ASTM A653 G90 hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. Minimum 14 gauge for curbs supporting HVAC units. 3. Corners: Mitered and welded. Bolted connections not accepted. 4. Base Plates: Integral to frame and welded. 5. Internally reinforced with galvanized 1 inch by 1 inch by 12 gauge angles for curbs exceeding 3 foot length. Reinforce internal bulkhead at equipment curbs to support lateral loads. 6. Wood Nailers: Factory installed. Size and width as suitable for support of items installed on curbs. B. Insulation: Factory installed 1-1/2 inch thick three-pound density fiberglass insulation. C. Curb Height: Minimum 10 inch above finished roof unless otherwise shown. D. Construct curbs to match roof slope with plumb and level top surface for mounting mechanical equipment. E. Gasketing: 1/4 inch thick, 1 inch wide EPDM gasket at roof top units. F. Counter Flashing: 18 gauge galvanized steel. G. Cants: Provide wood cants as required for roofing systems H. Fabricate platforms, adapters, pipe curbs, curb covers, square to round, column and tube counterflashings as necessary for complete watertight systems at roof penetrations. I. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Roof Products, Inc. (RPI). 2. Or equal. Manufactured Roof Curbs 07 73 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor and installer shall examine the supporting structure and other elements of the substrate and conditions under which the manufactured roof curb Work is to be performed and notify Engineer, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work and performance of the manufactured roof curb. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with Contract Document provisions and manufacturer’s instructions. Where in conflict, assume requirements that are more stringent, and verify with Engineer before beginning work. B. Weld, bolt, or screw roof curbs and expansion joint curbs as instructed by manufacturer, as shown on accepted Shop Drawings, and as accepted by Engineer. 3.03 ADJUSTMENTS A. Replace or repair installations not conforming to specified requirements including installations out of level and out of plumb. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect the manufactured roof curbs from all damage until Final Completion. B. Manufactured roof curbs damaged before Final Completion shall be replaced with new material as specified herein, at no additional cost to Owner. C. Clean exposed surfaces of every substance which is visible or might cause corrosion of the metal or deterioration of the finish. END OF SECTION Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install joint sealants. 2. Extent of each type of calking and sealant is shown or indicated and includes the following: a. Interior and exterior joints in equipment and construction systems not filled by another material, and that are not required to be open for operation. b. Exposed-to-view joints of all fire-rated sealants. c. Joints specified to be recalked. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before joint sealants. 2. Coordinate final selection of joint sealants so that materials are compatible with all calking and sealant substrates specified. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 05 11, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing. 2. Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction. 3. Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 4. Section 08 81 00, Glass Glazing. 5. Section 09 51 13, Acoustical Panel Ceilings 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM C510, Test Method for Staining and Color Change of Single- or Multicomponent Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM C661, Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Elastomeric Type Sealants by Means of a Durometer. 3. ASTM C793, Test Method for Effects of Accelerated Weathering on Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 4. ASTM C794, Test Method for Adhesion in Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 5. ASTM C920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 6. ASTM C1021, Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing Building Sealants. Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 7. ASTM C1087, Test method for Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems. 8. ASTM C1193, Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. 9. ASTM C1247, Practice for Durability of Sealants Exposed to Continuous Immersion in Liquids. 10. BAAQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51. 11. FS TT S 00227, Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 12. FS TT S 00230 Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures). 13. NSF/ANSI Standard 61, Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 14. SCAQMD Rule 1168. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Installer: a. Engage a single installer, approved by product manufacturer, regularly engaged in calking and sealant installation and with successful experience in applying types of products required, and who employs only tradesmen with specific skill and successful experience in the type of Work required. 2. Testing Laboratory: a. Furnish services of independent testing laboratory qualified according to ASTM C1021, for conducting testing required. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain materials only from manufacturers who will, if required: a. Furnish at the Site services of a qualified technical representative to advise installer of proper procedures and precautions for using materials. b. Test joint sealants for compatibility with substrates for conformance with FS TT S 00227, and recommend remedial procedures as required. 2. Before purchasing each sealant, investi¬gate its compatibility with joint surfaces, joint fillers, and other materials in joint system. Provide products that are fully compatible with actual installation condition, verified by manufacturer’s published data or certifica¬tion, and as shown on approved Shop Drawings and other approved submittals. C. Product Testing: Provide test results of laboratory pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing, as specified in Article 3.1 of this Section, by qualified testing laboratory, based on testing of current sealant formulations within a 36-month period preceding the Notice to Proceed for the Work. Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920 and, where applicable, to other standard test methods. 2. Test other joint sealants for compliance using specified post-construction field adhesion test. D. Mock ups: 1. Prior to installing joint sealant Work but after ENGINEER’s approval of Samples, provide Sample of each type of calking and sealant in areas selected by ENGINEER to show representative installation of calkings and sealants. Obtain ENGINEER’s approval of visual qualities of mock ups before starting calking and sealant Work. Retain and protect mock ups during construction as a standard for judging completed calking and sealant Work. Do not alter or destroy mock ups until so allowed by ENGINEER. 2. Perform the following testing on calking and sealant mock-up, as specified in this Section: Post-construction field adhesion testing and water leak test. 3. Work that does not comply with test requirements on Sample areas will be considered defective. E. Pre installation Conference: 1. Prior to installing joint sealants and associated Work, schedule and meet at the Site with calking and sealant installer, calking and sealant manufacturer’s technical representative, other trades involved in coordinating with calking and sealant Work, ENGINEER, and OWNER. Record discussions of pre installation conference and decisions, agreements, and disagreements, and furnish copy of record to each party attending conference. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to calking and sealant Work, including reviewing: a. Required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. b. Status of test reports. c. Mock-up construction results. d. Status of substrate and similar considerations. e. Each major calking and sealant application required. f. Availability of products, tradesmen, equipment, and facilities required for avoiding delays. 2. Reconvene conference at earliest opportunity if additional information must be developed to conclude subjects under consideration. 3. Record revisions or changes agreed upon, reasons therefore, and parties agreeing or disagreeing with them. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Schedule of joint sealants installation, indication each specific surface where calking or sealants are to be provided and the material proposed for each application. Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer’s data sheets including color charts, specifications, recommendations, and installation instructions for each type of sealant, calking compound, and associated miscellaneous material required. Include manufacturer’s published data, indicating that each product complies with the Contract Documents and is intended for the applications shown or indicated. b. Product test reports. 3. Samples: a. Each type of actual cured material of each calking and sealant specified, in each of manufacturer’s standard colors. b. Samples will be reviewed by ENGINEER for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is responsibil¬ity of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certify that materials are suitable for intended use and materials meet or exceed requirements of the Contract Documents. b. Certification from manufacturer that products furnished are appropriate for surfaces and conditions to which they will be applied. c. Certify that applicator is approved by manufacturer. 2. Field Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of tests on job mock-ups. b. Pre-construction and post-construction field test reports. c. Compatibility and adhesion test reports. d. Contractor’s Field Test Report Logs: 1). Indicate time present at the Site. 2). Include observations and results of field tests, and document compliance with manufacturer’s installation instructions and supplemental instructions provided to installers. 3. Pre installation conference record. 4. Qualifications: Submit qualifications for: a. Installer. b. Testing laboratory (if not already submitted under Section 01 45 23, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Owner, or Section 01 45 13, Testing Laboratory Services Furnished by Contractor). C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Recommended inspection intervals. b. Instructions for repairing and replacing failed sealant joints. 2. Warranty: Submit written warranties as specified in this Section. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with the following: 1. Delivery of Products: a. Deliver products in calking and sealant manufacturer’s original unopened, undamaged containers, indicating compliance with approved Shop Drawings and approved Sample color selections. b. Include the following information on label: 1). Name of material and Supplier. 2). Formula or Specification Section number, lot number, color and date of manufacture. 3). Mixing instructions, shelf life, and curing time, when applicable. 2. Storage of Products: a. Do not store or expose materials to temperature above 90 degrees F or store in direct sunlight. b. Do not use materials that are outdated as indicated by shelf life. c. Store sealant tape in manner that will not deform tape. d. In cool or cold weather, store containers for sixteen hours before using in temperature of approximately 75 degrees F. e. When high temperatures prevail, store mixed sealants in a cool place. 3. Handling: a. Do not open containers or mix components until necessary preparatory Work and priming are complete. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not install joint sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer’s recommended limitations for installation. 2. Proceed with the Work when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high-early bond strength. 3. Where joint width is affected by ambient temperature variations, install elastomeric sealants when temperatures are in the lower third of manufacturer’s recommended installa¬tion temperature range, so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation and bond stress at subsequent low temperatures. 4. When high temperatures prevail, avoid mixing sealants in direct sunlight. Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 5. Supplemental heat sources required to maintain both ambient and surface temperatures within the range recommended by manufacturer for material applications are not available at the Site. 6. Provide supplemental heat and energy sources, power, equipment, and operating, maintenance, and temperature monitoring personnel. 7. Do not use heat sources that emit carbon dioxide or carbon monoxide into areas of calking, sealants, and painting Work, and areas where OWNER’s personnel or construction personnel may work. Properly locate and vent such heat sources to outdoors so that joint sealants and other Work are unaffected by exhaust. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer and CONTRACTOR, agreeing to repair or replace sealants that fail to perform as air tight and watertight joints; or fail in joint adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resis¬tance, extrusion resistance, migration resistance, stain resistance, or general durability; or appear to deteriorate in any other manner not clearly specified in approved Shop Drawings and other submittals, as an inherent quality of material for exposure indicated. 1. Provide manufacturer warranty for period of one year from date of Substantial Completion of joint sealants Work. 2. Provide installer warranty for period of two years from date of Substantial Completion of joint sealants Work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants for interior and exterior joint applications that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates. B. VOC Performance Criteria: 1. VOC content of sealants used shall comply with current VOC content limits of SCAQMD Rule 1168. Sealants used as fillers shall comply with or exceed requirements of BAAQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51. a. Sealants: 250 g/L. b. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. c. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Provide colors selected by ENGINEER from calking and sealant manufacturer’s standard and custom color charts. “Or equal” manufacturers shall provide same generic products and colors as available from manufacturers specified. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Exterior and Interior Horizontal and Vertical Joints; Submerged and Intermittently Submerged in Potable Water or Water That Will be Treated to Become Potable: Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. One component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Sikaflex-1a by Sika Corporation. 2). Or equal. b. One component, moisture cured, gun grade, polyurethane sealant, complying with: 1). FS TT S 00230C, Type II, Class A; ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 2). Adhesion in Peel, FS TT S 00230C, ASTM C794 (minimum five pounds.): Glass, minimum 20 pounds per linear inch; Aluminum, minimum 20 pounds per linear inch; Concrete, minimum 20 pounds per linear inch. 3). Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM D2240: 20 to 25 (Shore A). 4). Stain and Color Change, FS TT S 00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5). Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6). Rheological Vertical Displacement at 120 degrees F, FS TT S 00227E: No sag. 7). VOC Content: 100 g/L, maximum. 8). Listed in NSF/ANSI 61 2. Two component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Sikaflex- 2c NS by Sika Corporation. 2). Or equal. b. Two-component, moisture cured, gun grade, polyurethane sealant, complying with: 1). FS TT S 00227E, Type II, Class A; ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2). Adhesion in Peel, FS TT S 00227E, ASTM C794 (Minimum five pounds per linear inch with no adhesion failure): 18 pounds. 3). Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C661: 25 (Shore A). 4). Stain and Color Change, FS TT S 00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5). Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6). Rheological Vertical Displacement at 120 degrees F, FS TT S 00227E: No sag. 7). Content: 220 g/L, maximum. 8). in NSF/ANSI 61 B. Exterior and Interior Horizontal and Vertical Joints; Submerged and Intermittently Submerged in Wastewater: 1. Two component Polyurethane Sealant: Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Sikaflex- 2c NS by Sika Corporation. 2). Vulkem 227 by Tremco Sealant/Waterproofing Division of RPM International, Inc. 3). Or equal. b. Polyurethane based, two component elastomeric sealant complying with: 1). FS TT S 00227E: Type II (non sag) Class A and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2). Adhesion in Peel, FS TT S 00227E and ASTM C794: (Minimum five pounds per linear inch with no adhesion failure): 18 lbs. 3). Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C661: 25 (Shore A). 4). Stain and color change, FS TT S 00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5). Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6). Rheological Vertical Displacement at 120 degrees F, FS TT S 00227E: No sag. 7). Content: 220 grams per liter, maximum. C. Exterior and Interior Vertical Joints; Non-submerged: 1. Two component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Sikaflex- 2c NS by Sika Corporation. 2). Dymeric 240 FC by Tremco Sealant/Waterproofing Division of RPM International, Inc. 3). Or equal. b. Polyurethane based, two component elastomeric sealant complying with: 1). FS TT S 00227E: Type II (non sag) Class A and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. 2). Adhesion in Peel, FS TT S 00227E and ASTM C794: (Minimum five pounds per linear inch with no adhesion failure): 10 pounds. 3). Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C661: 25 to 35 (Shore A). 4). Stain and color change, FS TT S 00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5). Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6). Rheological Vertical Displacement at 120 degrees F, FS TT S 00227E: No sag. 7). Content: 100 g/L, maximum. Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements D. Exterior and Interior Horizontal Joints; Non-submerged: 1. Two component Polyurethane Sealant: a. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Sikaflex- 2c SL by Sika Corporation. 2). THC/900 by Tremco Sealant/Waterproofing Division of RPM International, Inc. 3). Or equal. b. Polyurethane based, two-component elastomeric, self-leveling sealant complying with the following: 1). FS TT S 00227E, Type I (self leveling) Class A. and ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25 2). Water Immersion Bond, FS TT S 00227E: Elongation of 50 percent with no adhesive failure. 3). Hardness (Standard Conditions), ASTM C661: 35 to 45. 4). Stain and Color Change, FS TT S 00227E and ASTM C510: No discoloration or stain. 5). Accelerated Aging, ASTM C793: No change in sealant characteristics after 250 hours in weatherometer. 6). Content: 165 g/L, maximum. E. Miscellaneous Materials: 1. Joint Cleaner: As recommended by calking and sealant manufacturer. 2. Joint Primer and Sealer: As recommended for compatibility with calking and sealant by calking and sealant manufacturer. 3. Bond Breaker Type: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended for compatibility with calking and sealant by calking and sealant manufacturer, to be applied to sealant contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper performance of calking and sealant. Provide self adhesive tape where applicable. 4. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible rod stock polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible, permanent, durable nonabsorp¬tive material as recommended for compatibility with calking and sealant by calking and sealant manufacturer. Provide size and shape of rod that will control joint depth for sealant placement, break bond of sealant at bottom of joint, form optimum shape of sealant bead on back side, and provide highly-compressible backer to minimize possibility of sealant extrusion when joint is compressed. 5. Low-temperature Catalyst: As recommended by calking and sealant manufacturer. F. Products for Other Applications: 1. Glazing Sealants: Refer to Section 08 81 00, Glass Glazing. 2. Fire-Rated Sealants: Refer to Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Compressible Filler: Refer to Section 04 05 11, Masonry Anchorage and Reinforcing. 4. Acoustical Sealants: Refer to Section 09 51 13, Acoustical Panel Ceilings. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine joint surfaces, substrates, backing, and anchorage of units forming sealant rabbet, and conditions under which calking and sealant Work will be performed, and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work and performance of sealants. Do not proceed with calking and sealant Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. B. Laboratory Pre-construction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint sealant manufacturers for testing indicated below samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit at least eight pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For products that fail tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer’s written instructions for corrective measures including using specially formulated primers. 5. Immersion Testing: ASTM C1247 for potable water and wastewater. 6. Testing will not be required if joint sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data based on previous testing of current sealant products for adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted and mock-up field testing is acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Do not allow joint sealants to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces including rough textured materials. Use masking tape or other precautionary devices to prevent staining of adjoining surfaces, by either the primer/sealer or calking and sealant materials. B. Joint Surface Preparation: 1. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installing sealant compound. Remove dirt, weakly adhering coatings, moisture and other substances that would interfere with bonds of sealant compound as recommended in sealant manufacturer’s written instructions as shown on approved Shop Drawings. 2. If necessary, clean porous materials by grinding, sandblasting, or mechanical abrading. Blow out joints with oil free compressed air or by vacuuming joints prior to applying primer or sealant. Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Roughen joint surfaces on vitreous coated and similar non porous materials, when sealant manufacturer’s data indicates lower bond strength than for porous surfaces. Rub with fine abrasive cloth or steel wool to produce a dull sheen. 4. Concrete Joint Preparation: Refer to Section 03 15 00, Concrete Accessories C. Mixing: 1. Comply with sealant manufacturer’s written instructions for mixing multi component sealants. 2. Thoroughly mix components before use. 3. Add entire contents of activator can to base container. Do not mix partial units. 4. Mix contents for minimum of five minutes or as recommended by sealant manufacturer, until color and consistency are uniform. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install joint sealants after adjacent areas have been cleaned and before joint has been cleaned and primed, to ensure calking and sealant joints will not be soiled. Replace calking and sealant joints soiled after installation. B. Comply with sealant manufacturer’s written instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, and except where manufacturer’s technical representative directs otherwise, only as acceptable to ENGINEER. C. Prime or seal joint surfaces as shown on approved Shop Drawings and approved other submittals. Do not allow primer or sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces. Allow primer to dry prior to applying sealants. D. Apply masking tape before installing primer, in continuous strips in alignment with joint edge to produce sharp, clean interface with adjoining materials. Remove tape immediately after joints have been sealed and tooled as directed. E. Confirm that compressible filler is installed before installing sealants. Refer to Section 04 05 05, Unit Masonry Construction, for locations. F. Do not install sealants without backer rods and bond breaker tape. G. Roll back up rod stock into joint to avoid lengthwise stretching. Do not twist, braid, puncture, or prime backer rods. H. Employ only proven installation techniques that will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete “wetting” of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface slightly below adjoining surfaces. Where horizontal joints are between a horizon¬tal surface and a vertical surface, fill joint to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt. I. Install sealants to depths recommended by sealant manufactur¬er but within the following general limitations, measured at the center (thin) section of bead. 1. For horizontal joints in sidewalks, pavements, and similar locations sealed with elastomeric sealants and subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements exposures, fill joints to depth equal to 75 percent of joint width, but not more than 5/8 inch deep or less than 3/8 inch deep. 2. For vertical joints subjected to normal movement and sealed with elastomeric sealants and not subject to traffic, fill joints to a depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but not more than 1/2 inch deep or less than 1/4 inch deep. J. Remove excess and spillage of compounds promptly as the Work progresses. K. Cure calking and sealant compounds in compliance with manu¬facturer’s instructions and recommendations, to obtain high-early bond strength, internal cohesive strength, and surface durability. 3.04 EXISTING JOINTS A. Mechanically remove existing sealant and backer rod. B. Clean joint surfaces of residual sealant and other contaminates capable of affecting sealant bond to joint surface. C. Conduct laboratory pre-construction compatibility and adhesion testing on joint surfaces in accordance with Paragraph 3.1.B of this Section. D. Allow joint surfaces to dry before installing new sealants. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Post-construction Field Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field-test joint sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. Perform ten tests for the first 1,000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1,000 feet of joint length thereafter, and minimum of one test per each floor per elevation. c. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, and Method D, Water Immersion in Appendix X1 of ASTM C1193. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately by extending cut along one side and verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. d. Inspect joints for complete fill, absence of voids, and joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a log of field adhesion tests. e. Inspect tested joints and report on whether: 1). Sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer’s field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 2). Sealants filled the joint cavities and are free of voids. 3). Sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements f. Record test results in a log of field adhesion tests. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. g. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. h. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other requirements will be satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements. i. Do not proceed with installation of elastomeric sealants over joint surfaces that have been painted, lacquered, waterproofed, or treated with water repellent or other treatment or coating unless a laboratory test for durability (adhesion), in compliance with FS TT S 00227, has successfully demonstrated that sealant bond is not impaired by the coating or treatment. If laboratory test has not been performed or shows bond interference, remove coating or treatment from joint surfaces before installing sealant. B. Water Leak Testing: Field test for water leaks as follows: 1. Flood the joint exposure with water directed from a 3/4 inch diameter garden hose, without nozzle, held perpendicular to wall face, two feet from joint and connected to water system with 30 psi minimum normal water pressure. Move stream of water along joint at an approximate rate of 20 feet per minute. 2. Test approximately five percent of total joint system, in locations that are typical of every joint condition, and that can be inspected easily for leakage on opposite face. Conduct test in presence of ENGINEER, who will determine actual percentage of joints to be tested and actual period of exposure to water from hose, based on extent of observed leakage or lack of observed leakage. 3. Where nature of observed leaks indicates potential of inadequate joint bond strength, ENGINEER may direct that additional testing be performed at a time when joints are fully cured, and before Substantial Completion. 3.06 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Where leaks and lack of adhesion are evident, replace sealant. B. Clean adjacent surfaces of sealant and soiling resulting from the Work. Use solvent or cleaning agent recommended by sealant manufacturer. Leave all finish Work in neat, clean condition. C. Protect sealants during construction so that they will be without deterioration, soiling, or damage at time of readiness for final payment of the Contract. 3.07 PROTECTION Joint Sealants 07 92 00 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. During and after curing period, protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original Work. END OF SECTION Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Extent of hollow metal doors and frames is shown. 3. Types of products required include the following: a. Seamless, galvanized steel, paper honeycomb core, internally reinforced, flush doors. b. Fully welded, galvanized steel, internally reinforced, door frames. c. Fully welded, galvanized steel, fire-rated, internally reinforced, door frames. d. Knocked-down, mitered corner, galvanized steel, drywall frames. e. Knocked-down, mitered corner, galvanized steel, fire-rated, drywall frames. f. Miscellaneous supports; special, supplemental and standard finish hardware reinforcements and preparation items; fasteners and accessories; all for high frequency, high-endurance use. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the hollow metal doors and frames Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 14 00, Wood Doors. 2. Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. 3. Section 08 81 00, Glass Glazing. 4. Section 09 91 00, Painting. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI). a. ANSI in association with Steel Door Institute, ANSI/SDI 100, Steel Doors and Frames. b. ANSI in association with Door and Hardware Institute, ANSI/A115.1-A115.17/DHI, Specifications for Steel Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware. c. ANSI A224.1, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements d. ANSI A250.3, Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory-Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. e. ANSI A250.4, Test Procedures and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel Doors and Hardware Reinforcings. f. ANSI A250.5, Accelerated Physical Endurance Test Procedure for Steel Doors, Frames, and Frame Anchors. g. ANSI/NFPA 252, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM A 153/A 153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. b. ASTM A 366, Specification for Steel, Carbon, Cold-Rolled Sheet, Commercial Quality. c. ASTM A 653/A 653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc- Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by The Hot-Dip Process. d. ASTM B 117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. e. ASTM E 1408, Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems. 3. Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI). a. DHI, Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA). a. NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 5. Steel Door Institute, (SDI/Door). a. SDI/Door 105, Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. b. SDI/Door 106, Standard Door Type Nomenclature. c. SDI/Door 112, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized/Galvannealed) Standard Steel Doors and Frames. d. SDI/Door 117, Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames. e. SDI/Door 122, Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. f. SDI/Door 128, Guidelines for Acoustical Performance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 6. The Society for Protective Coatings, (SSPC). a. SSPC Paint 2, Cold Phosphate Surface Treatment. b. SSPC Paint 27, Basic Zinc Chromate-Vinyl Butyral Wash Primer. 7. Underwriters’ Laboratories Inc., (UL). a. UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience producing substantially similar equipment and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. 2. Provide hollow metal doors, frames, and accessories manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of Work and complying with specified standards of ANSI, NFPA, SDI and UL. 3. Provide hollow metal doors and frames from a manufacturer who is a member of SDI. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from a single hollow metal doors and frames manufacturer. 2. The hollow metal doors and frames equipment manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the hollow metal doors and frames manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown or scheduled for hollow metal doors and frames (3-hour, 1-1/2-hour, and similar designations), provide fire-resistance-rated hollow metal doors and frames tested as a fire door assembly, complete with type of fire 2. Identify each fire-resistance-rated door and frame with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire-resistance-rating of both door and frame. Provide fire- resistance-rated doors and frames with metal labels permanently fastened to door and frame. Labels shall display all UL required information. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: Wherever a temperature rise rating is required by the building code, provide doors for fire-resistance-ratings shown and in accordance with UL 10B. a. For a UL 3-hour (A) classification, provide doors with a temperature rise rating of not more than 250°F maximum to 30 minutes of exposure. b. For a UL 1-1/2-hour (B) classification, provide doors with a temperature rise rating of not more than 450°F or 650°F maximum to 30 minutes of exposure. 4. Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80, and as specified. Modify specified hollow metal door and frame system components to comply with requirements of governing jurisdictions for fire-resistance-rated construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS: SUBMIT THE FOLLOWING: 1. Shop Drawings: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Fabrication and installation drawings of hollow metal doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of each door type, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints, connections and every composite member. Show all door and frame reinforcements, including welds, plate lengths, locations and gauges, identified for each component of finish hardware specified in Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. b. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those shown. 2. Samples: a. Pressed metal corner section of frame, 12-inches by 12-inches minimum, showing all special, supplemental and standard reinforcements, attachments, supports and anchors specified. Provide corner sample for each type of frame specified. b. Stick system components showing corner detail and glazing stops of all types specified, 12-inches by 12-inches, minimum. c. Cut-away section of all door types specified, showing internal construction, edge details and reinforcements for butts, closers and similar items of finished hardware, 2 foot-0 inches by 2 foot-0 inches minimum. Include louver sections, vision panel and glazing stops. d. ENGINEER reserves the right to require samples showing fabrication techniques and workmanships of all component parts, and the detailing and fabrication of accessories and auxiliary items for all door and frame Work, before fabrication of the Work proceeds. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certification of Labeled Construction for fire-resistance-rated doors and frames. 2. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Laboratory test report for required performance and specified feature verification for doors and frames selected at random by ENGINEER for testing. b. Sound Retardant Doors and Frames: Laboratory test reports, verifying performance requirements for each type of unit required. c. Test reports indicating compliance with ANSI A250.4 and ANSI A250.5. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver hollow metal doors and frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store doors and frames at the Site under cover. 3. Place units up off floors in a manner that will prevent rust and damage. 4. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. 5. Provide a 1/4-inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Door Classification: Provide hollow metal doors of Grades and Models in accordance with ANSI/SDI 100, and ANSI A250.5 as follows: a. Grade II, Heavy-Duty, 1-3/4-inches thick (Level B); Model 2A, seamless design. B. Details of Construction: 1. Provide doors of two outer stretcher-leveled sheets, 18-GAUGE STEEL minimum. Construct doors with smooth, flush surfaces without visible joints or seams on exposed faces or edges, except around glazed or louvered panel inserts. No fillers shall be used. Provide weep hole openings in the bottom of exterior doors to permit the escape of entrapped moisture. 2. Reinforce inside of doors with honeycomb core completely filling the inside of the door and laminated to the inside of both face panels with an adhesive. The honeycomb material shall have a crushing strength not less than 6,000 pounds per square foot and the lamination shall withstand not less than 1,100 pounds per square foot in shear. C. Frame Construction: 1. Form frames of cold-rolled sheet material, 14-gauge minimum. Provide seamless frames for all Work, unless specifically specified and shown as permitting exposed fasteners. 2. Provide drywall frames, knock-down-type with exposed adjusting anchor screws in all gypsum wallboard metal stud partitions. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Series CH with DURA-WELD seams with Series F 14Frames and DW 14 Frames by Pioneer Industries, Incorporated. 2. Or equal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Door Faces and Frames: Zinc-coated, cold-rolled carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A 366, and ASTM A 653/A 653M, G 60 zinc coating, mill-phosphatized. B. Honeycomb Core: Phenolic resin-impregnated, nominal 1-inch hexagonal cell size, one piece, Kraft fiber core board, with 42 psi minimum crushing strength. C. Supports and Anchors: Formed sheet metal, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B, and in compliance with requirements of ANSI A250.5. Provide supports and anchors as follows: 1. Jamb Anchors: 16-gauge minimum, and of the following types: a. Masonry Construction: Adjustable, corrugated or perforated, T-shaped to suit frame size with leg not less than 2-inches wide by 10-inches long. b. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: 3/8-inch concealed bolts and expansion shields or inserts. c. Gypsum Wallboard and Steel Stud Construction: Two-piece compression anchors with exposed compression fasteners. 2. Floor and Head Anchors: 14-gauge minimum, and of the following types: a. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type, with two holes to receive fasteners, welded to bottom of jambs and mullions. b. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inches height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface. D. Inserts, Bolts and Fasteners: Sheet metal hot-dip galvanized complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C or D as applicable. E. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Head Strut Supports: 3/8-inch by 2-inch hot-dipped galvanized steel. 2. Structural Reinforcing Members: Provide structural reinforcing members as part of frame assembly, where shown at mullions, transoms, or other locations that are to be built into frame. 3. Head Reinforcing: For frames over 4 feet-0 inch wide, in masonry openings, provide continuous steel channel or angle stiffener, not less than 12-gauge for full width of opening, welded to back of frame at head. 4. Spreader Bars: Provide removable spreader bar across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. 5. Plaster Guards: 26-gauge minimum galvanized steel. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 6. Louvers, Stops and Moldings: 16-gauge minimum, cold-rolled, hot-dipped galvanized, formed sheet metal. 7. Insect Screen: 14 by 18 bronze wire mesh in a rigid, formed metal frame. 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Fabricate hollow metal units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free for defects, warp or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles. 2. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in the manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify Work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at the Site. Weld exposed joints continuously, grind, dress, and make smooth, flush and invisible. Filler to conceal manufacturing defects shall not be acceptable. 3. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise shown or specified, do not use exposed fasteners in the Work. Where exposed fasteners are shown or specified, provide countersunk flat Phillips or Jackson heads for exposed screws and bolts. B. Doors: 1. Fabricate all hollow metal doors and panels in compliance with ANSI A250.5. 2. Fabricate all doors with flush top and bottom closing channel, without exposed fasteners. Reinforce tops and bottoms of doors with inverted, flush-mounted, minimum 20-gauge, horizontal steel channels fastened to internal reinforcement channel and with 20-gauge closing plate spot-welded to closure channel. Close top and bottom edges to provide weather seal, as integral part of door construction or by addition of inverted steel channels and plates. 3. Hollow Metal Panels: a. Fabricate hollow metal panels of the same materials, construction, and finish as specified for hollow metal doors. b. Provide astragal integral with top of door where shown. 4. Edge profiles shall be provided on both stiles of doors beveled 1/8-inch in 2-inches. C. Frame Construction: 1. Fabricate all hollow metal frames in compliance with ANSI A250.5 and as specified. 2. Fabricate frames with reinforced, mitered corners that are continuously arc-welded for the full depth and width of the frame, with bottom spreader bar; except provide drywall frames as specified. 3. Grind all exposed welds flush and smooth. 4. Knock-down-type frames shall be used for drywall construction only and shall provide the following additional features: a. Specifically designed for drywall construction. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Frames shall be knocked down, designed to be securely installed in the rough opening after the wallboard is applied. c. Jamb and head connection shall be a neat, flush, miter with head securely locked to top of jamb. d. Mitered corners shall be reinforced with a concealed corner cup to provide a firm interlock of jamb to head. e. Provide two anchors at head of frames exceeding 3 foot-6 inches wide. f. Provide vertical steel head support struts extending from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 5. Head Reinforcing: Where installed in masonry, leave vertical mullions in frames open at the top so they can be filled with grout. 6. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. 7. Head Anchors: Provide two anchors at head of frames exceeding 3 foot-6 inches wide for frames mounted in drywall partitions. 8. Head Strut Supports: Provide vertical steel struts extending from top of frame at each jamb to supporting construction above, unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction above. Provide adjustable bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 9. Rubber Door Silencers: Drill stop to receive three silencers on single-door frames and four silencers on double-door frames. Install plastic plugs to keep holes clear during construction. 10. Plaster Guards: Provide manufacturer’s standard plaster guards or dust cover boxes. D. Finish Hardware Preparation: 2.05 GENERAL: a. Prepare hollow metal units to receive mortised and concealed finish hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling and tapping in accordance with approved Finish Hardware Schedule and templates provided by finish hardware supplier and as specified. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/DHI A115.1 to A115.17 and ANSI A250.4. Refer to Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. b. Obtain approved hardware schedule, hardware templates, and samples of finish hardware where necessary to ensure correct detailing and fabrication of the hollow metal doors and frames, from finish hardware supplier. 2. Doors: a. Preparation includes sinkages, and cut-outs for mortised and concealed finish hardware and reinforcements for both concealed and surface-applied finish hardware. b. Drill and tap mortise reinforcements at factory, using templates. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements c. Detail and fabricate reinforcements with concealed connections designed to develop full strength of reinforcements for high-frequency applications. d. Reinforce doors for required finish hardware, with minimum gauges of reinforcements provided as follows: 1). Hinges: Steel plate 3/16-inches thick by 1-1/2-inches wide by 6-inches longer than hinge and secured by not less than six spot or projection welds with top hinge further reinforced with a high-frequency back-up reinforcement. 2). Mortise Locksets and Dead Bolts: 12-gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than four spot or projection welds. 3). Cylinder Locks: 12-gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than two spot or projection welds. 4). Flush Bolts: 12-gauge steel sheet, secured with not less than two spot or projection welds. 5). Surface-Applied Closers and Overhead Stops: 3/16-inch steel plate, not less than 10-inches long, secured with not less than six spot or projection welds. 6). Push Plates and Bars: 16-gauge steel sheet secured with not less than two spot or projection welds. 7). Surface Panic Devices: 16-gauge sheet steel secured with not less than two spot or projection welds. 8). Automatic Door Bottoms: Reinforce for mortise-type units with 14-gauge steel, and 16-gauge for surface-applied units. 3. Frames: a. Reinforce frames for required finish hardware with minimum gauges as follows: 1). Hinges and Pivots: Special full width of frame, 3/16-inch thick steel plate by 8-inches longer than hinge, secured to both rabbets by not less than twelve spot or projection welds. 2). Strike Plate Clips: 10-gauge steel plate by 1-1/2-inches wide by 3-inches long with mortar guard boxout secured with not less than six spot or projection welds. 3). Surface-Applied Closers: 3/16-inch steel plate, secured with not less than six spot or projection welds. Coordinate closer function and presence of overhead stops and weather-stripping, with location of reinforcement plate. 4). Concealed Closers: Removable steel access plate, 12-gauge internal reinforcement of size and shape required, and enclosing housing to keep closer pocket free of mortar or other materials. B. Stops and Moldings: 1. Provide stops and moldings around solid, glazed and louvered panels in hollow metal units and in frames to receive glass. 2. Fabricate fixed stops and moldings integral with frame. Provide fixed stops on inside of hollow metal units exposed to exterior and on corridor side of interior units. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Provide removable stops and molds at other locations, formed of not less than galvanized 20-gauge steel sheets. Secure with countersunk machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 12-inches on center. Form corners with butted hairline joints. 4. Coordinate width of rabbet between fixed and removable stops with type of glass or panel and type of installation indicated. Refer to Section 08 81 00, Glass Glazing. 2.06 SHOP PAINTING A. Clean, treat and paint exposed surfaces of fabricated hollow metal units, including galvanized surfaces. B. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before the application of the shop coat of paint. C. Apply pretreatment to cleaned metal surfaces, using cold phosphate solution (SSPC Paint 2), or basic zinc chromate-vinyl butyral solution (SSPC Paint 27). D. Refer to Section 09 91 00, Painting, for field-applied primer and finish paint for exterior or interior exposed ferrous, non-ferrous, or galvanized surfaces. E. Apply shop-coat of prime paint within time limits recommended by pretreatment manufacturer. Apply a smooth coat of even consistency to provide a uniform dry film thickness of not less than 1.5-mils. F. Finish shall be rust inhibitive primer capable of passing a 500-hour salt spray and a 1,000- hour humidity test in accordance with ASTM B 117 as certified by an independent laboratory. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. After Shop Drawings approval, manufacturer shall not make any further detailing, fabrication or changes to approved methods of support and anchorage, nor shall doors and frames be brought to the Site, which do not conform, in all ways, to performance criteria specified. B. Allowable Tolerances: Provide door and frame manufacturing tolerances in compliance with SDI 117 and as follows: 1. Nominal Clearance between Door and Frame Head and Jamb: 1/8-inch. 2. Nominal Clearance between Meeting Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8-inch. 3. Nominal Clearance at Bottom of Door: 3/4-inch. 4. Nominal Clearance between Face of Door and Door Stop: 1/16-inch. 5. Provide all Work plumb and true to adjoining surfaces with all miters and copes accurately formed. 6. Provide completely water and vapor tight joints. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrate and conditions under which hollow metal doors and frames are to be installed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Frames that are bowed, twisted or otherwise unacceptable shall be removed from the Site and replaced with properly constructed frames. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied, finish hardware may be done at Site. B. Protective Coating: Protect inside, concealed, faces of door frames in plaster or masonry construction using fibered asphalt emulsion coating. Apply over shop primer approximately 1/8-inches thick and allow to dry before installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install hollow metal units and accessories in accordance with approved Shop Drawings, SDI 105 and as shown and specified. 1. Do not install doors and frames until all the Work, which could damage doors and frames, has been completed. 2. Provide temporary doors until construction sequencing allows installation of permanent doors and frames. 3. Do not proceed with the installation of permanent hollow metal doors until CONTRACTOR can provide finished Work complying with all requirements of these Specifications. 4. Protect built-in frame Work with temporary wood protection. B. Placing Frames: 1. Place frames at fire-rated openings in accordance with NFPA 80. 2. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. Remove spreader bars only after frames have been properly set and secured. 3. Make field splices in frames as detailed on approved Shop Drawings, welded and finished to match factory work. C. Setting Masonry Anchorage Devices: 1. Set anchorage devices opposite each anchor location, in accordance with details on approved Shop Drawings and anchorage device manufacturer's instructions as follows: a. Steel Stud Construction: Secure knocked-down-type drywall frames to gypsum wallboard metal studs using compression anchor assemblies. Install at least three jamb anchors per jamb up to 7 feet-6 inches height; four anchors up to 8 feet-0 inch jamb height; one additional anchor for each 2 foot-0 inch or fraction thereof over 8 feet-0 inch height. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of masonry anchorage devices and machine screws, if so indicated on approved Shop Drawings. D. Door Installation: 1. Fit hollow metal doors accurately in their respective frames, with the following clearances: a. Jambs and Head: 3/32-inch. b. Meeting Edges, Pairs of Doors: 1/8-inch. c. Bottom: 3/4-inch, where no threshold or carpet. d. Bottom: At threshold or carpet, 1/8-inch. 2. Place fire-resistance-rated doors with clearances as specified in NFPA 80. 3. Finish hardware installation is specified under Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. Locate finish hardware as shown on approved Shop Drawings, in accordance with hardware templates provided by finish hardware manufacturers and in accordance with Door and Hardware Institute, Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Check and readjust operating finish hardware items in hollow metal door and frame Work just prior to final inspection. Leave Work in complete and proper operating conditions. B. Where problems of installation or damage are cause for rejection of hollow metal door and frame Work, consult SDI 122 and the recommendations of the hollow metal door and frame manufacturer, for suggestions concerning required adjustments in the Work. Submit recommendations to ENGINEER for approval. Replace and repair unacceptable Work, as directed by ENGINEER, so that there will be no doubt as to the acceptability of the Work at the time of Substantial Completion. C. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after installation, sand smooth all rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. D. Protection: Protect installed hollow metal doors and frames against damage from other construction activities. END OF SECTION Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 11 16 ALUMINUM DOORS AND FRAMES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all aluminum doors and frames Work. 2. The extent of aluminum doors and frames Work is shown. 3. The types of aluminum doors and frames Work required includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Flush doors and frames. b. Miscellaneous accessories and fasteners. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the aluminum doors and frames Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. 2. Section 08 81 00, Glass Glazing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. Aluminum Association, (AA). a. AA DAF 45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 2. Architectural Aluminum Manufacturing Association, (AAMA). a. AAMA 701.1, Standard for Sliding Weatherstripping. 3. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM B 117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. b. ASTM D 522, Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. c. ASTM D 523, Test Method for Specular Gloss. d. ASTM D 968, Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. e. ASTM D 1308, Practice for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. f. ASTM D 2244, Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements g. ASTM D 2247, Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. h. ASTM D 4214, Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (NAAMM). a. NAAMM, Hardware Location for Custom Hollow Metal Doors. b. NAAMM, Metal Finishes Manual. 5. The Society for Protective Coatings, (SSPC). a. SSPC Paint 12, Cold Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Provide aluminum doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of Work. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience in the production of aluminum doors and frames, and shall be able to show evidence of satisfactory operation in at least five installations. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all products included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from a single aluminum doors and frames manufacturer. 2. The aluminum doors and frames manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the aluminum doors and frames manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Copies of manufacturer's fabrication and installation drawings of aluminum doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of each door type, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements of finish hardware and reinforcements, details of joints and connections. Show all door and frame reinforcements. b. Provide a schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those shown. 2. Samples: Submit the following: a. Samples of each required aluminum finish, on 12-inch long extrusions or 6-inch square sheets, of the alloys to be used for the Work. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include two or more units in each sample, to show the range of such variations. Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Samples shall be reviewed by ENGINEER for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver aluminum doors and frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store doors and frames at the Site under cover. Place units up off the floors in a manner that will prevent corrosion and damage. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. If the cardboard wrapper on the door becomes wet, remove the carton immediately. Provide a 1/4-inch space between stacked doors to promote air circulation. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: Provide aluminum Alloy 6063-T5 or equal for properties of strength (not less than 22,000 pounds per square inch ultimate tensile strength), corrosion resistance, abrasion resistance, application of required finish, and control of color. B. Aluminum Sheets: 1. Provide aluminum Alloy 5005-H14, or equal, for properties of strength corrosion resistance, abrasion resistance, application of required finish, and control of color. 2. Provide smooth sheet for exposed faces of doors and panels, except as otherwise specified. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive metal fasteners guaranteed by the manufacturer to be compatible with the doors, frames, stops, panels, hardware, anchors and other items being fastened. 1. For exposed fasteners (if any), provide Phillips flat-head screws with finish matching the item fastened. Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, except where unavoidable for the assembly of units, and unavoidable for the application of hardware. Provide only concealed screws in glazing stops. D. Reinforcement and Brackets: Manufacturer’s standard formed or fabricated aluminum units, of shapes, plates or bars. E. Inserts: For required anchorage into concrete or masonry work, furnish inserts of 12- gauge steel stainless steel after fabrication. F. Expansion Anchor Devices: Stainless steel, drilled-in, expansion bolt anchors. G. Bituminous Coatings: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Sizes and Profiles: The required sizes for door and frame units and the profile requirements are shown. Variable dimensions for profiles (if any) are shown along with maximum and minimum dimensions as required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. 2. The details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. Similar details by other manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with the size requirements, and with minimum/maximum profile requirements as shown. B. Flush Type Aluminum Doors: 1. Provide tubular frames members with minimum wall thickness of 1/8-inch, fabricated with reinforced mechanical or welded joints in accordance with manufacturer’s standard fabrication methods. Limit edge exposure and face molding exposure to 0.50- inch maximum width. 2. Fabricate flush doors with cores laminated between two sheets of 0.040-inch thick aluminum laminated to 1/8-inch thick oil-tempered hardboard with epoxy adhesive to form a door thickness of 1-3/4-inch and of a true 5-ply construction. 3. Provide cores of 20 percent phenolic resin-impregnated honeycomb material 80 lbs. per 3,000 sq. ft. ream, (7/16-inch cells) laminated with an epoxy adhesive between two sheets of 1/8-inch thick tempered hardboard. 4. Provide transom frames of the same material, finish, thickness and gauge as the door and frame material. 5. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 100 BE Doors with Frame by Cline Aluminum Doors, Inc. b. Or equal. C. Full Glass Aluminum Stile and Rail Doors: 1. Product and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 500 BE Doors with Frame by Cline Aluminum Doors, Inc. Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Or equal. 2.03 HARDWARE A. Doors: Refer to Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware, and to the frame, door and hardware schedules and details, for the furnishing and installing of hardware items. Hardware templates only will be furnished to the manufacturer for the fabrication of door and frames to receive hardware not supplied by door manufacturer. B. Hardware Installation: Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware, except do not drill and tap for surface-mounted items until the time of installation. Comply with hardware manufacturer’s instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners, wherever possible. 2.04 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: 1. Preparation: After fabrication of doors and frames, but before lamination of panels, prepare the aluminum surfaces for finishing in accordance with the aluminum producer’s recommendations and standards of the finisher or processor. Process all components of each assembly simultaneously to attain complete uniformity of color. 2. Samples: a. Comply with industry standard colors and texture samples. Establish Samples of the required finish, for ENGINEER’S acceptance, prior to fabrication of the Work. ENGINEER reserves the right to reject material finishes with objectionable variations from the established samples. b. Prepare samples on extrusions and sheets of the exact alloys to be used for the Work, and show range of natural variations to be expected in finished Work, by duplicate samples of varying color and texture. B. Exposed Aluminum Polyvinylidene Fluoride Based Coating: Apply full strength polyvinylidene fluoride based coatings at the factory by coil coating for sheet material and spray coating for extruded or factory-fabricated material. Provide the following four-coat finish system complying with the following: 1. Alkali clean and hot water rinse all surfaces to receive polyvinylidene fluoride based finish. 2. Prepare a chemical conversion coating on the surface, using phosphates or chromates followed by a cold-water rinse. Seal with a chromic acid rinse and dry, except where manufacturer recommends another method to achieve greater coating reliability. 3. Apply a base prime coat of epoxy paint to the prepared surface in its coil form, by reverse roller coating. Fully cure in a gas-fired oven to a dry film thickness of 0.2 to 0.4- mils. Follow with a barrier coat, 0.75 to 1.0-mil thick. 4. Apply color coat containing mica pearlescent or metallic flakes over the barrier coat by roller coating for coil material and airless or Ransburg Elastrostatic Hand spray for extrusions and fuse at a peak metal temperature of 440°F. Apply to a dry film thickness Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements of 0.7-mils for coil coating and 1.2-mils for spray coating so that the total dry film is approximately 1.0-mil thick for coil material and 1.5-mils thick for extruded material. 5. Apply clear fluoropolymer top coat to provide a dry film thickness of 0.4 to 0.8- mils. The entire four-coat system shall have a dry film thickness of 2.6-mils minimum. 6. Provide the following physical properties, as proven by the following laboratory test methods acceptable to Engineer: a. Weathering, ASTM D 4214: Chalking, not more than No. 8, after exposure for 5,000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. b. Color Change, ASTM D 2244: No greater than 5 N.B.S units after removal of external deposits and after exposure for 5,000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. c. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D 2247; no blisters after 3,000 hours. d. Salt Spray, ASTM B 117: Few scattered blisters no larger than ASTM No. 4, and no more than 1/16-inch creep from areas scribed to bare metal after 3,000 hours. e. Dry Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch. f. Wet Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch; extruded material only. g. Boiling Water Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after one-hour immersion in distilled boiling water. h. Water Immersion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after immersion in aerated distilled water 80 ±10°F after 500 hours. i. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 968: Coefficient of abrasion of 67, minimum. j. Gloss, ASTM D 523: 30±5 reflectivity at 60°F. k. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: HB-H, minimum. l. Dry Film Thickness, ASTM D 3363: Primer, 0.2 to 0.4-mils; barrier coat, 1.0-mil; color coating, 0.7 to 1.5-mils; clear topcoat, 0.4 to 0.8-mils. m. Solvent Resistance: 100 Double MEK rubs, minimum. n. Flexibility, ASTM D 522: No cracking prior to metal fracture. o. Acid Resistance, ASTM D 1308: Sixteen hour spot test with five percent hydrochloric acid - no effect. p. Alkali Resistance, ASTM D 1308: Sixteen hour spot test with five percent sodium hydroxide - no effect. 7. Colors: Provide the following: a. Complete selection of manufacturer’s standard, custom and premium colors and coating system components for final selection by Engineer. b. Engineer will select 2 custom special extended life premium colors for aluminum window wall system at time of Shop Drawing and Sample submission review. Aluminum Doors and Frames 08 11 16 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements Provide manufacturer capable of producing all standard, custom, special and premium colors and system components offered by the specified manufacturer. c. Interior extrusions, exterior panels and snap covers, flashing, trim and other accessories will, at the discretion of Engineer, have 2 different finished colors. 8. Protective Coating: Immediately upon completion of the aluminum window wall finish, apply a transparent, color-coded, strippable-film coating, not less than 1.0-mil dry film thickness, suitable for protection of the finish through completion of erection. 9. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Duranar Metallic XL Specialty Color 4-Coat System by PPG Industries Coatings and Resins Division, Incorporated. b. Or equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrate and conditions under which aluminum doors and frames Work are to be installed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer’s specifications and recommendations for the installation of aluminum doors and frames. B. Set units plumb, level and true to line, without warp or rack of frames, doors or panels. Anchor securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of frames and doors. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances. B. Where protective coating has been supplied, remove coating completely as soon as the completion of construction activities no longer requires its retention. C. CONTRACTOR shall provide protective treatment and other precautions required as recommended by manufacturer, through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that doors and frames will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at the time of Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION Wood Doors 08 14 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown specified and required to furnish and install all wood door Work. 2. The extent of wood doors is as shown in Door Schedule on the Drawings. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the Work that must be installed in association with the wood door Work. 2. Coordinate required material for each door and frame with Door Schedule on Drawings. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except where otherwise shown or specified. 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute, Quality Standards, Section 1300. 2. National Woodworkers Manufacturers Association, ANSI/NWMA Industry Standard I.S. 1, Wood Flush Doors. 3. NWMA, Care and Finishing of Wood Doors. 4. ANSI A135.4, Basic Hardboard. 5. ASTM E152, Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 6. AWI, Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute. 7. HPMA HP, Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. 8. NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. 9. UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 10. ANSI/NWWDA 1.S.1A Series, Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors of the National Wood Window and Door Association. 11. The specifications in this Section are subject to the administrative and procedural requirements specified in Division 1, as well as the broader requirements of the General Conditions. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: Wood Doors 08 14 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Obtain all equipment included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from a single wood door manufacturer. 2. The wood doors equipment manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the wood doors manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wherever a fire-resistance classification is shown or scheduled for wood doors (3-hour, 1-1/2-hour, and similar designations), provide fire-resistance-rated wood doors and frames tested as a fire door assembly, complete with type of fire door hardware to be used. 2. Identify each fire-resistance-rated door and frame with recognized testing laboratory labels, indicating applicable fire-resistance-rating of both door and frame. Provide fire- resistance-rated doors and frames with metal labels permanently fastened to door and frame. Labels shall display all UL required information. 3. Temperature Rise Rating: Wherever a temperature rise rating is required by the building code, provide doors for fire-resistance-ratings shown and in accordance with UL 10B. a. For a UL 1-1/2-hour (B) classification, provide doors with a temperature rise rating of not more than 450°F or 650°F maximum to 30 minutes of exposure. 4. Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80, and as specified. Modify specified hollow metal door and frame system components to comply with requirements of governing jurisdictions for fire-resistance-rated construction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit for approval the following: 1. Veneer sheet from each available flitch to be used for face veneers. 2. 3 foot-0 inch by 12-inch wide sample of actual wood door with veneer sheets of specie selected. Also submit strips of solid wood 1-inch by 3-inches of species to be used for exposed edges, trim and other solid wood components. 3. Samples will be reviewed for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of Contractor. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Copies of door manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of wood door required, including other data as may be required to show compliance with the specified requirements. 2. Provide manufacturer's recommended clear finishing specifications. 3. Details of core and edge construction, trim for openings and similar components. C. Guarantees: Submit copies of written agreement in door manufacturer's standard form signed by the manufacturer, and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors which have warped, bowed, cupped or twisted, or which show telegraphing of construction Wood Doors 08 14 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements below in face veneers, as defined in NWMA Standard Door Guarantee, except the NWMA provision for refunding the price received by the door manufacturer for any defective door shall not apply. The guarantee shall also include refinishing and reinstallation which may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Guarantee shall be in effect for the entire life of the installation after the date of Final Acceptance. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Protect wood doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and deterioration. Comply with, On-Site Care, recommendations of NWMA pamphlet, Care and Finishing of Wood Doors, and with manufacturer's instructions. B. Protection of Material: Provide protective coverings for doors at the factory prior to shipping. Use heavy paper cartons and mark with identification required for proper installation. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide wood doors complying with the applicable requirements of WDMA I.S.1-A- 11, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors" for the kinds and types of doors specified. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard 5-ply face panels, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Exposed Surfaces: Provide same exposed surface material on both faces of each door. 3. Exposed Surfaces for Semi-Transparent Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard thickness face veneers of the following quality. a. Quality: NWMA I.S. 1 premium quality exposed surfaces white oak face veneers. Plain sliced with even numbered pieces of veneer across door faces and with a joint occurring at the centerline of the door. Provide two pieces of veneer per 12-inches of door width. Provide exposed edges and other exposed solid wood components of the same species as face veneers. 4. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: a. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 1). All doors must meet specified WDMA Performance Duty Level, including face screw holding requirement. Surface applied hardware shall be installed with screws; through bolts are not acceptable. All doors must meet specified WDMA Performance Duty level, with the exception of face screw holding requirement. Surface applied hardware shall be installed with through bolts. 2.02 SOLID CORE WOOD DOORS A. Adhesive Type: Type I waterproof bond. B. Core Construction: Fire retardant wood particleboard, 32 pound density, conforming to NWMA 1.5.1.2., and ANSI A208.1. C. Provide all 1-3/4-inch thick wood doors. Wood Doors 08 14 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements D. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Marquis Series Solid Core Wood Door by Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc. 2. Solid Core Wood Door by Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 3. Solid Core Wood Door by Eggers Industries, Inc. 4. Or equal. 2.03 FRAMES A. Refer to Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2.04 FINISH A. Provide complete selection of manufacturer's standard and custom factory finish system including selection of semi-transparent coat. 2.05 REFITTING AND PREPARATION FOR HARDWARE A. Prefix and premachine wood doors for hardware at the factory complete with louvers as scheduled. B. Comply with the tolerance requirements of NWMA for refitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Factory install as much hardware as practicable. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor and his installer must examine the substrate and conditions under which wood door Work are to be installed and verify that openings are of the correct type and have been installed as required for proper hanging of corresponding doors. Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely installation of wood door Work; do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Condition doors to average prevailing humidity in installation area prior to hanging. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown. C. Clearance: For non-fire doors provide clearances of 1/8 inch at jambs and heads; 1/8 inch at meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/2 inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering, except where threshold is shown or scheduled provide 1/4 inch clearance from bottom of door to top of threshold. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely. Wood Doors 08 14 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation, as directed by Engineer, at no additional expense to the Owner. C. Protection of Completed Work: Installer shall advise Contractor of proper procedures required for protection of installed wood doors from damage of deterioration until Final Acceptance of the Work. END OF SECTION Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames 08 16 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 16 13 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC DOORS AND FRAMES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install fiberglass reinforced plastic doors and frames as shown and specified. 2. The extent of doors and frames Work is shown on the Drawings. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed or demolished in association with the doors and frames. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00, Calking and Sealants. 2. Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: Comply with the latest edition of the applicable provisions and recommendations of the following, except as otherwise shown or specified: 1. ANSI A115, Specifications for Door and Frame Preparations for Hardware. 2. ASTM A 103, Zinc (hot-galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated From Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. 3. ASTM A 123, Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip. 4. ASTM B 509, Cellular Elastomeric Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material. 5. ASTM D 2000, Classification for Elastomeric Materials for Automotive Applications. 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. “Standard for Fire Test of Doors, UL10B”. 7. ASTM D 635, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning or Extent and Time of Burning of Self Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position. 8. ASTM E 84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 9. ASTM D 2287, Nonrigid Vinyl Chloride Polymer and Copolymer Molding and Extrusion Compounds. 10. NAAMM, Entrance Manual. 11. Laminate properties: a. ASTM D 882 Tensile strength. b. ASTM D 790 Flexural strength. c. ASTM D 2583 Barcol Hardness. d. ASTM D 256 Impact resistance. e. ASTM D 792 Density/specific gravity of laminate. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames 08 16 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 12. Core Properties a. ASTM C 177 Thermail properties. b. ASTM D 1622 Density/specific gravity. c. ASTM D E 84 Surface burning characteristics. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide doors and frames manufactured by a single firm specializing in the production of this type of Work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer’s printed product data indicating characteristics of products specified in this Section. 2. Plans: Indicate location of each door opening assembly in project. 3. Elevations: Dimensioned elevation of each type door opening assembly in project; indicate sizes and locations of door hardware, and lites and louvers, if specified. 4. Details: Installation details of each type installation condition in project; indicate installation details of glazing, if specified. 5. Schedule: Indicate each door opening assembly in project; cross-reference to plans, elevations, and details. B. Selection Samples: Manufacturer’s standard color chips. C. Verification Samples: Two (2) samples to verify color match. D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Printed installation instructions for door opening assemblies. E. Warranty Documents: Manufacturer’s standard warranty documents, executed by manufacturer’s representative, countersigned by CONTRACTOR. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: 1. Package door opening assemblies in manufacturer’s standard containers. B. Storage of Materials: 1. Store door assemblies in manufacturer’s standard containers, on end, to prevent damage to face corners and edges. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fiberglass Met: Random glass fiber mat. Minimum 4.5 ounces per square foot weight of glass material. B. Roving: Unidirectional glass fiber mat, minimum 16 ounces per square yard weight. C. Resins: Formulated for specified environment, minimum flame spread 25 in accordance with ASTM E 84, self-extinguishing in accordance with ASTM D 635. D. Anchors: Manufacturer’s standard stainless steel fasteners. E. Bonding Materials: Manufacturer’s standard frame-to-opening bonding system. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames 08 16 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements F. Joint Sealer: Sealant, specified in Section 07 92 00. 2.02 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Sizes and Profiles: The required sizes for door and frame units, and the profile requirements are shown on the Drawings. Variable dimensions for profiles (if any) are shown along with maximum and minimum dimensions as required to achieve design requirements and coordination with other work. 2. The details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. Similar details by other manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with the size requirements, and with minimum/maximum profile requirements as shown. 2.03 HARDWARE A. Flush Doors: Refer to Section 08 71 00, Finish Hardware, and to the frame, door and hardware schedules and details, for the furnishing and installing of hardware items. Hardware templates only will be furnished to the manufacturer for the fabrication of door and frames to receive hardware not supplied by door manufacturer. B. Hardware Installation: Cut, reinforce, drill and tap frames and doors as required to receive hardware, except do not drill and tap for surface-mounted items until the time of installation. Comply with hardware manufacturer's instructions and template requirements. Use concealed fasteners wherever possible. 2.04 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Non-rated Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors: 1. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches. 2. Thermal Insulating Value: >R factor 12. 3. Construction: a. Style and Rail Structure: One-piece molded U-shaped cross-section, minimum 15 mil gel coat, minimum three (3) layers random-fiberglass mat, saturated with resins. b. Core: End-grain balsa wood, resin-impregnated. c. Face Sheets: Molded in one continuous piece, resin reinforced with hand-laid glass fiber mat, nominal 1/8 inch thick, minimum 15 mil gel-coated surface with minimum two (2) layers random-fiberglass mat ad one (1) layer roving, saturated with resins. d. Door Edges: Minimum three (3) layers resin-reinforced glass fiber mat, nominal 3/8 inch thick, machine tooled. 4. Sizes: Indicated on Drawings. 5. Finish: Smooth gloss surface, minimum value 88 in accordance with ASTM D 523. 6. Color: To be selected by ENGINEER. B. Non-rated Fiberglass Frames: Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames 08 16 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Construction: One-piece molded cross-section with molded stop, minimum 15 mil get coat, minimum two (2) layers random-fiberglass mat, saturated with resins polyurethane foam core. Sizes: For door sizes and frame depths indicated on drawings. 2. Frame Profile: 5-3/4 inches deep, 2 inches wide face; double rabbeted with 5/8 inch high stop. 3. Sizes: Indicated on Drawings. 4. Finish: Satin finish, with true and consistent color throughout frame thickness. 5. Color: To be selected by ENGINEER. C. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic door and frames by Chem-Pruf Door Company. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Doors: Workmanship is to be of the highest quality in order to meet quality control requirements. 1. Stile and Rail Structure: a. Form in mold of exact door size, with get coat layer to form, glass mat layers to a U-shaped channel interior. b. Formulate get coat for environment and integral color specified. c. Form structure as single component, jointed construction at intersections of stiles and rails is prohibited. d. Form mortise for lockset, and recess for strike plate in lock stile, at time of molding. e. Embed compression members at the time of molding in locations where thru-bolting of hardware is required. 2. Core: a. Fit core material within stile/rail structure, fit around compression members and projections of mortises. b. Mold openings for lites or louvers, if specified, form to sizes and at locations indicated. 3. Face sheets: a. Formulate get coat with integral color specified, embed glass materials. b. Chemically bond face sheets to stile/rail structure and core material. B. Fiberglass Frames: 1. Resin transfer in mold of exact wall opening size, with get coat. Glass mat layers to form solid fiberglass outer surface. 2. Formulate get coat for environment and integral color specified. 3. Form structure of fiberglass components. 4. Form mortise for kick strike, and recess for strike plate in lock jamb, at time of molding. 5. Embed reinforcement for hinges and other indicated hardware in fiberglass matriz, provide for hinge leaf recesses in hinge jamb at time of molding. 3.00 EXECUTION Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames 08 16 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR and his installer must examine the substrate and conditions under which doors and frames Work are to be installed and notify the ENGINEER in writing of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the ENGINEER. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install door opening assemblies in accordance with shop drawings, SDI-100, and manufacturer’s printed installation instructions, using installation methods and materials specified in installation instructions. B. Installation of door hardware is specified in Section 08 71 00. C. Install door hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions, using through-bolts to secure surface applied hardware. D. Site Tolerances: Maintain plumb and level tolerances specified in manufacturer’s printed installation instructions. 3.03 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Adjust doors in accordance with door manufacturer’s maintenance instructions to swing open and shut without binding, and to remain in place at any angle without being moved by gravitational influence. B. Adjust door hardware to operate correctly in accordance with hardware manufac- turer’s maintenance instructions. C. Clean surfaces of door opening assemblies and sight-exposed door hardware in accordance with manufacturer’s maintenance instructions. D. Protect door opening assemblies and door hardware from damage by subsequent construction activities until final inspection. END OF SECTION Access Doors and Panels 08 31 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 31 00 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all access doors and panels Work. 2. Extent of access doors and panels is shown. 3. Types of products required include the following: a. Wall access doors. b. Miscellaneous hardware, accessories and fasteners. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the access doors and panels Work. C. Related Sections 1. Section 09 26 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Copies of manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of access door and panel assembly. Transmit copy of the instructions for each type to the installer. Provide setting drawings, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage devices. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Description: 1. Provide access door and panel assemblies manufactured as integral units and complete with all components and accessories ready for installation. B. Wall Access Doors: Provide the following for wallboard: 1. Flush Door Panels: 20-gauge stainless steel with No. 4 finish. 2. Frames: 16-gauge stainless steel with No. 4 finish with 1-inch wide flange continuously welded and ground smooth at corners. 3. Finish Hardware: a. Hinge: Continuous stainless steel piano hinge. Access Doors and Panels 08 31 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Closer: Automatic, self-latching with interior latch release. c. Lock: Prepare access door for mortise locks and coordinate dead bolt and cylinder requirements with Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware. 4. Provide wall access. 5. Size: To fit steel studs on 16-Inch centers . 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Karp Associates, Inc. 2. Or equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR must examine the areas and conditions under which access doors are to be installed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of access doors and panels. B. Coordinate installation with work of other trades. C. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to support with face panels plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace panels or frames, which are warped, bowed or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 33 23 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install overhead coiling doors. 2. Extent of overhead coiling doors is shown. 3. Types of products required include: a. Galvanized steel, very high cycle, heavy-duty, overhead coiling doors with insulated slats and full perimeter weather-stripping. b. Chain operators. c. Electric operators and chain operators, control stations, starters, safety edge devices and similar and associated components with all power and control connections, including disconnect switches. d. Angles, brackets, hoods and supports. e. Inserts and anchoring devices. f. Miscellaneous materials and accessories for complete, functional system. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items that must be installed with or before overhead coiling door Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 91 000, Painting. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM A36/A36M, Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A366/A366M, Specification for Commercial Steel Sheet, Carbon, (0.15 maximum percent) Cold-Rolled. 3. ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 4. ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 5. NEMA MG 1, Motors and Generators. 6. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. 7. NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 8. Standards for Safety, UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 9. UL, Building Materials Directory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Supplier Qualifications: Supplier shall have a minimum of five years experience producing substantially similar products to those required and shall be able to document at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. 2. Installer Qualifications: a. Retain a single installer for all overhead coiling door Work, with documented and successful experience in type of Work required, and who is authorized representative of overhead coiling door manufacturer for installing and maintaining products required. Installer shall employ only tradesmen with successful experience in type of Work required. b. References: Provide names and telephone numbers of architects or engineers as applicable, and owner’s representatives for at least three successful projects performed by proposed installer, similar to the Work required for this Project. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all products included in this Section regardless of component Supplier from one overhead coiling door manufacturer. 2. Overhead coiling door Supplier shall review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and submittals for all products provided under this Section. 3. Components shall be suitable for specified service conditions and be integrated into overall assembly by overhead coiling door Supplier. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings showing all components and their assembly, all with accurate dimensions. Include details at frames, elevations of each overhead coiling door design type, details of construction and conditions at openings. b. Complete interconnecting wiring diagrams for power, signal and control systems indicating all system operating components and control station wiring required for complete, operational system complying with Specifications. Define and differentiate between components that are furnished and installed as part of overhead coiling door Work; both at the Site and in the factory, and those that must be furnished, or installed, as part of the Work under other Sections. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s specifications and data sheets, roughing-in diagrams, and installation instructions for each type and size of overhead coiling door. Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Include manufacturer's data on operators, operating instructions and maintenance data. Indicate by transmittal form that installer has received a copy of diagrams and installation instructions. c. Electric operator and other operating system component specifications indicating compliance with Specifications. Provide motor nameplate data and ratings; characteristics, mounting arrangements, size and location of winding termination lugs, conduit entry and grounding lugs; and coatings. 3. Samples: a. Specified galvanized, primed painted steel finish on 12-inch by 12-inch panel of insulated flat slats identical to those that will be used in the Work. Provide sample of full depth of door, demonstrating slat insulation and thermal-break feature. ENGINEER’s review will be to determine acceptability of finish only. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Design Data: a. Calculations showing that detailing and fabrication of components complies with structural performance specified. 2. Supplier Instructions: a. Provide manufacturer instructions for handling and installing specified products. b. Setting drawings; summary of loads on walls, jambs and structural elements; templates; and instructions and directions for installation of inserts and anchorage devices, furnished by overhead coiling door Supplier and installed under other Sections of these Specifications. 3. Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Provide report of all operating tests, problems encountered, and corrective actions implemented. Document successful completion of field operating test for all products. b. Provide report of each visit to Site by Supplier’s representative. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Supplier. b. Installer. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Provide complete operation and maintenance manuals, including test reports, maintenance data and schedules, description of operation, and information on recommended spare parts. b. Provide operation and maintenance manuals per Section 01 78 23, Operation and Maintenance Data. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver products to Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchorage devices to be embedded in concrete in ample time to prevent delaying the Work. 2. Deliver products to Site suitably crated, braced, and protected against distortion and damage during transit and unloading. Label all parts to comply with approved Shop Drawings and submittals. 3. Upon delivery, inspect products for damage. Notify ENGINEER in writing of loss or damage to products. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Minor damage may be repaired provided finished items are equal in all respects to new items and acceptable to ENGINEER; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to allow easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store doors and frames under cover. 3. Place units up off floor in manner that prevents rust and damage. 4. Avoid using non-vented plastic or canvas shelters. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Structural: Overhead coiling door components shall be capable of resistance to these loads: a. Wind Loading: Provide resistance to both positive and negative wind pressure loading of 30 pounds per square foot acting over entire plane of door curtain slats. b. Dead Loading: Provide resistance to deformation of door components caused by effects of gravity loads. c. Applied loadings shall not cause short-term or permanent deformation of system components. Doors shall remain operable and undamaged during and after application of specified wind pressure loading. 2. Helically-Wound Torsion Springs: Provide Very-High-Cycle design capable of performing for 100,000 operational cycles. Provide non-resetable electric counters for overhead coiling doors. 3. Electric Operators and Controls: a. Operator system shall be constructed so that motor can be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Operators shall be constructed for 100,000 service-free, operating cycles. c. Fixtures shall be listed and labeled as specified. 4. Chain Hoist Operation: Reduction roller chain and sprocket drive or suitable gearing, mounted on counterbalance shaft, shall operate with a maximum 35 pounds of pulling force. B. Definitions: 1. Operating Cycle: One complete cycle of an overhead coiling door or fire-resistance-rated overhead coiling door begins in closed position. Door is then moved to open position and back to closed position. 2. Listed and Labeled: Per NFPA 70, Article 100. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Non-fire Resistance-Rated Overhead Coiling Doors: 1. Products and Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: a. Thermo-Tite Door 800C Series Insulated Double Panel Overhead Coiling Doors, by Wayne Dalton Corp. b. Weather-Tite Insulated Service Doors by McKeon Door Company. c. Or equal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Door Curtain: 1. Door Curtain Slats: Fabricate door curtain of flat, interlocking slats, designed in compliance with structural performance criteria specified, but not less than 18 gauge back and front panels, of continuous length for width of door, without splices. 2. Unless otherwise shown or specified, provide double-panel flat slats, as follows: a. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Structural quality, cold-rolled, galvanized carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A366/A366M, and ASTM A653/A653M, G60 zinc coating, mill-phosphatized. b. Slat Size and Features: 3/4-inches by three inches; pressure filled, foamed-in-place polyisocyanurate plastic insulation with minimum resistance to thermal flow (R) value of 6.25 and UL Tested Flame Spread of 75 maximum according to ASTM E84; thermal-break construction. 3. Endlocks: Heavy malleable iron castings, galvanized after casting, secured to curtain slats with two galvanized rivets. Provide endlocks on alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement. 4. Windlocks: Heavy malleable iron castings, galvanized after casting, and secured to curtain slats with three galvanized rivets. Space windlocks 2.0 feet on centers on both edges of curtain, or as required to comply with structural performance criteria specified. 5. Bottom Bar: Consisting of two galvanized steel angles, each not less than 1.5 inches by 1.5 inches by 1/8-inch thick. Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 6. Bottom Astragal: Replaceable gasket of flexible vinyl or neoprene. B. Curtain Jamb Guides: 1. Fabricate curtain jamb guides of steel shapes with sufficient depth and strength to retain curtain against specified wind loading. Build-up units with minimum 3/16-inch thick steel sections complying with ASTM A36/A36M. Slot bolt holes for track adjustment. 2. Secure continuous wall angle to wall framing by 3/8-inch minimum diameter bolts at not more than 2.6 feet on centers, unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. Extend wall angles above door opening head to support coil brackets, unless otherwise shown. Place and locate anchor bolts on exterior wall guides so that they are concealed when door is closed. 3. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent over-travel of curtain, and a continuous bar for holding windlocks, if any. C. Fascia Panels: Same material as door curtain slats. D. Weather Seals: 1. Provide replaceable, compressible, and adjustable natural rubber or neoprene rubber weather-stripping for exterior doors. Secure weather seals with continuous metal pressure bars. At door heads, use a 1/8-inch thick replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of curtain coil hood. At door jambs, use a 1/8-inch thick continuous strip secured to exterior side of jamb guide. 2. Provide double guide weather-stripping that, when tested at 1.30 pounds per square foot pressure differential, allows maximum of 3.75 cubic feet per minute air infiltration per linear foot of overhead coiling door perimeter. 3. Provide weather-stripping continuously around all perimeter edges of door including hood baffle, astragal and guide weather-stripping. E. Counterbalancing Mechanism: 1. Counterbalance doors by an adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring, mounted around steel shaft, mounted in spring barrel, and connected to door curtain with required barrel rings. Use grease-sealed ball bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members. 2. Counterbalance Barrel: a. Fabricate spring barrel of hot-formed structural quality carbon-steel, welded or seamless pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall thickness to support roll-up of curtain without distorting slats and limiting barrel deflection to no more than 0.03-inch per foot of span under full load. b. Provide spring balance of one or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size springs to counterbalance the weight of curtain with uniform adjustment accessible from outside barrel. Provide cast steel barrel plugs to secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft. c. Fabricate torsion rod for counterbalance shaft of case-hardened steel, of required size to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load. Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Brackets: Provide mounting brackets of manufacturer's standard design, either cast-iron or cold-rolled steel plate with bell-mouth guide groove for curtain. F. Weather and Waterproof Hoods: 1. Form to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism at opening head, and act as weather seal. Contour to suit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce top and bottom edges for stiffness. Provide closed ends for surface-mounted hoods, and portion of between-jamb mounting projecting beyond wall face. Provide intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sag. 2. Fabricate steel hoods from 22-gauge hot-dip galvanized steel coating, complying with ASTM A653/A653M, phosphate-treat before fabrication. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Automatic Closing: 1. Provide automatic closing device and viscous fluid-type speed governor, complying with requirements of NFPA 80, operating when activated by temperature rise and melting of 165 degrees F replaceable fusible links on both sides of wall of door opening. Melting of single fusible link shall be sufficient to commence sequence of closing door. 2. Construct governor unit to be inoperative during normal door operations but, when engaged, limits speed of closing door to less than 2.0 feet per second. Design release mechanism for ordinary resetting. 3. Fabricate unit to permit manual lifting of curtain for emergency exit after automatic closing, with curtain returning to the closed position when released. B. Manual Door Operators: 1. Provide manual operators, except where electric door operators are shown. When not shown, provide chain hoist operator units. C. Chain Hoist Operator: 1. Provide manual direct drive chain hoist side-mounted operator consisting of endless stainless steel hand chain, chain cast-iron pocket wheel, and chain guard. 2. Provide chain hoist with self-locking mechanism allowing curtain to be stopped at all points in its travel and remain in position until movement is reactivated. Furnish hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide. 3. Provide endless chain length that extends to 3.0 feet above floor. 4. Gears shall be high grade gray cast-iron. D. Safety Stop Lock Bearings: Provide overhead coiling doors with safety stop lock bearings that will stop downward travel of overhead coiling door upon sensing a sudden, rapid acceleration of pipe shaft. E. Electric Door Operators: 1. General: Provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by overhead coiling door manufacturer; complete with electric motor and factory pre-wired motor controls, including reversing starter, gear reduction unit, Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements solenoid operated brake, clutch, remote control stations, and control devices and wiring complying with requirements of NFPA 70. Magnetic reversing starter shall be of internal type with thermal overload protection and reset button. 2. Provide operators and electric accessories suitable for use in NFPA 70, Class I, Division 1, Group D Hazardous Locations. 3. Provide hand-operated disconnect or mechanism for automatically engaging sprocket and chain operator and releasing brake for emergency manual operation. Mount disconnect and operator to be accessible from floor level. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when emergency operator is engaged. 4. Operator system shall be provided so that motor can be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator. 5. Door Operator Type: a. Provide wall or bracket-mounted door operator units consisting of electric motor, a worm gear running-in-oil primary drive from motor to reduction gear box, chain or worm gear drive from reduction box to gear wheel mounted on counterbalance shaft, and quick-clutch disconnect-release for manual operation. b. Provide motor, clutch, and drive assembly of horsepower and design as determined by door manufacturer for size of door required and as specified. 6. Electric Motors: a. Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty; Class A insulated electric motors, complying with NEMA MG 1, with overload protection. b. Size to start, accelerate, and operate door in either direction, from all intermediate positions, at not less than eight inches or more than twelve inches per second without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. C. Coordinate wiring requirements and current characteristics of motors with building electrical system, and refer to electrical Specification d. Provide totally enclosed, non-ventilated or fan-cooled motors, waterproof electric motors, fitted with a plugged drain, and controller with NEMA Type 4X enclosure. e. Provide adjustable limit switches, rotary-type, driven by time chain and interlocked with motor controls set to automatically stop door at fully opened and closed positions. Geared limit switches shall contain spare set of contacts. 7. Remote Control Station: a. Unless otherwise shown, provide momentary-contact, three-button control station with push button controls labeled, “OPEN”, “CLOSE”, and “STOP”. Provide at locations as shown or scheduled. b. Provide interior and exterior units, full-guarded type, standard duty, surface-mounted, weatherproof type, NEMA Type 4X enclosure, key-operated on exterior locations. 8. Safety Edge Device: Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Provide each door with pneumatic safety air switch, extending full width of door bottom, located within a U-shaped neoprene or rubber astragal mounted to bottom door rail. b. Unit shall operate such that contact with switch before fully closing will immediately change air chamber pressure sending signal from air switch to electric motor, that will stop downward travel and reverse door direction to fully opened position. c. Connect to control circuit through retracting safety cord with cable reels provided for each electric operating door. d. Compressible strip shall serve as a weather seal along bottom of door. e. Safety edge shall be acceptable for use in NFPA 70 Class I, Division 1 locations. 2.05 PAINTING A. Surface-prepare in the shop and shop-prime all ferrous metal and galvanized surfaces, exposed and unexposed, except lubricated surfaces, with door manufacturer’s standard rust inhibitive primer, drying to a flat sheen. B. Refer to Section 09 91 00, Painting, and coordinate compatibility of shop and Site-primed and finished paint for interior and exterior ferrous and non-ferrous metals. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which overhead coiling doors are to be installed and notify ENGINEER of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install, wire, connect and adjust doors, motors, starters, control stations, limit and safety switches and other electrical accessories and connections required, per manufacturer’s written instructions, approved Shop Drawings and submittals, and the Contract Documents. B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts and adjust mechanism so moving parts operate smoothly and are free of warp, twist, or distortion and fit watertight for door’s entire perimeter. C. Adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Test door closing when activated by detector or alarm connected fire release system. Reset door-closing mechanism after successful test. D. Repair damaged products and restore finish to match manufacturer’s original finish. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Perform operating tests on all products at the Site following installation of products, including controls. Should tests indicate malfunction, make necessary repairs and Overhead Coiling Doors 08 33 23 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements adjustments. Repeat tests and adjustments until, in opinion of ENGINEER, installation is complete and products are functioning properly and are ready for permanent operation. B. Supplier’s Services: 1. Provide services of factory-trained representative of Supplier for installation supervision, start-up, operation testing, and training of OWNER’s operating and maintenance personnel. Representative shall make at least 1 visit to the Site with at least 2 hours on-Site per visit (excluding travel time). First visit shall be to assist in installing products. Subsequent visits shall be for checking completed installation, start- up and training. Supplier’s representative shall test-operate system in presence of ENGINEER and verify that each overhead coiling door conforms to requirements. Supplier’s representative shall revisit Site as often as necessary until all installation is entirely satisfactory. 2. Costs, including travel, lodging, meals and incidentals, for Supplier’s representative’s visits shall be at no additional cost to OWNER. END OF SECTION Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 41 13 ALUMINUM STOREFRONTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install aluminum storefronts. 2. Extent of aluminum storefronts is shown. 3. Types of products required include the following: a. Thermal barrier aluminum extrusion storefronts fully glazed with glass types shown and specified in Section 08 81 00. b. Gaskets, pressure plates and snap covers in conjunction with each of the above components. c. Anchors, inserts, support brackets, expansion devices, fasteners, flashings, weeps, and similar elements in conjunction with each of the above components. d. Custom and premium, custom-blended, full strength polyvinylidene fluoride finishes and colors, with extended-life topcoat. e. Miscellaneous aluminum closure and transition plates, and other components and accessories shown to be provided by aluminum storefronts manufacturer. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the aluminum storefronts. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07920, Calking and Sealants. 2. Section 08120, Aluminum Doors and Frames. 3. Section 08520, Aluminum Windows. 4. Section 08800, Glass and Glazing. 1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Aluminum storefronts system is defined to include extruded two piece, face and gutter system, thermally isolated, exterior and interior aluminum storefronts and all associated trim and accessories. B. The complete glazed aluminum storefronts system shall include all internal reinforcements, fasteners, trim, dry-seal joint gaskets, pressure plates, closure plates, snap covers, anchors, inserts, support brackets, expansion devices, weeps, factory-formed transition plates and flashing, fascias, and all other components as necessary to complete the Work in a manner that provides a completely functioning system integrated into, and maintaining the continuity of, weather- and water-resistant perimeter wall construction, and with the ability to span vertically between supports as shown, and in compliance with performance criteria specified. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Provide aluminum storefronts finish applicator experienced in the handling and application of the finish coatings specified, acceptable to the coating or aluminum manufacturer. 2. Engage a firm with documented successful experience in the manufacturer of aluminum storefronts Work of scope and type similar to the required Work. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Engage a single installer regularly performing installation of aluminum storefronts and with successful and documented experience in the erection of aluminum storefronts systems of the scope and type required; and who agrees to employ only tradesmen with documented skill, training and successful experience in this type of Work. Submit name and qualifications to Engineer along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects: a. Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. b. Approximate contract cost of the aluminum storefronts system. c. Amount of area installed. 2. Engage a single installer for the entire aluminum storefronts Work including aluminum doors specified in Section 08 11 16, aluminum windows specified in Section 08 51 13 , and glass specified in Section 08 81 00, with undivided responsibility for performance and other requirements. C. Codes: Comply with the applicable requirements of governing authorities and the State and Local Building Codes. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: To qualify for approval, an independent testing agency shall demonstrate to Engineer’s satisfaction, based on evaluation of criteria submitted by testing agency, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. E. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit variations from plumb, level or dimensioned angle to the following: a. 1/8 inch maximum deviation in 10 foot-0 inch vertical or angular run, and in 20 foot- 0 inch horizontal runs. b. 1/4 inch maximum deviation in 40 foot-0 inch runs, all directions. 2. Limit variations from theoretical member locations shown, based on floor lines and column lines shown, including variations from plumb and level, to the following: a. 3/8 inch total maximum deviation for members at all locations. b. 1/8 inch maximum change in deviation for members for 10 foot-0 inch runs, all directions. 3. Limit offsets in end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignments of adjoining and consecutive members, which form planes, continuous runs and profiles, to the following: a. 1/16 inch maximum offset in flush alignment, including members which are to be 1/2 inch or less out-of-flush, and including members which are separated 2 inches or less by a reveal or protrusion in the plane of the aluminum storefronts. b. 1/8 inch maximum offset in alignments which are to be out-of-flush by more than 1/2 inch or separated by a reveal or protrusion of more than 2 inch width. F. Source Quality Control: 1. Obtain all aluminum storefronts components, flashing and accessories from the same manufacturer. 2. Use the same aluminum alloys throughout the Work. Choose sheet and extrusion alloys for color producing compatibility. Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Prepare range samples, to show the highest level of color control feasible, as determined by the licensor of the finishing process specified and selected, on actual extrusion and sheet members. 4. Maintain visual intention of aluminum storefronts as shown. G. Reference Standards: Comply with applicable provisions and recommendations of the following except as otherwise shown or specified. 1. ASTM A 123, Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products, Standard Specification for. 2. ASTM B 117, Operating Salt Spray Apparatus, Standard Practice for. 3. ASTM B 136, Stain Resistance of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum, Method for Measurement of. 4. ASTM B 137, Coating Mass Per Unit Area of Anodically Coated Aluminum, Test Method for Measurement of. 5. ASTM B 209, Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate, Standard Specification for. 6. ASTM B 221, Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes, Standard Specification for. 7. ASTM B 244, Thickness of Anodic Coatings on Aluminum and of Other Nonconductive Coatings on Nonmagnetic Basis Metals with Eddy-Current 8. ASTM B 429, Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Structural Pipe and Tube, Standard Specification for. 9. ASTM D 395, Rubber Property-Compression Set, Test Methods for. 10. ASTM D 412, Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomer-Tension, Test Methods for. 11. ASTM D 522, Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings, Test Methods for. 12. ASTM D 523, Specular Gloss, Test Method for. 13. ASTM D 573, Rubber - Deterioration in an Air Oven, Test Method for. 14. ASTM D 624, Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers, Test Method for. 15. ASTM D 746, Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact, Test Method for. 16. ASTM D 968, Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive, Test Method for. 17. ASTM D 1149, Rubber Deterioration - Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber, Test Method for. 18. ASTM D 1308, Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes, Test Method for. 19. ASTM D 2240, Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. 20. ASTM D 2244, Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates, Test Method for. 21. ASTM D 2247, Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity, Practice for. 22. ASTM D 3363, Film Hardness by Pencil Test, Test Method for. 23. ASTM D 4213, Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films, Test Methods for. 24. ASTM E 283, Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen, Test Methods for. 25. ASTM E 330, Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Pressure Difference, Test Methods for. Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 26. ASTM E 331, Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference, Test Method for. 27. ASTM E 783, Field Measurement of Air Leakage Through Installed Exterior Windows and Doors, Test Method for. 28. ASTM E 1105, Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference, Test Method for. 29. The Aluminum Association, AA ASD-1, Aluminum Standards and Data. 30. The Aluminum Association, AA SAA-46, Standards for Anodized Architectural Aluminum. 31. The Aluminum Association, AA DSA-45, Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. 32. Architectural Metal Products Division of The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, AMP 501, Finishes for Aluminum. 33. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, AAMA 501.1 - Standard Test Method for Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors for Water Penetration Using Dynamic Pressure. 34. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, AAMA 501.2 - Field Check of Metal storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage. 35. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, AAMA 605.2 - Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 36. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, AAMA CW-DG-1 - Curtain Wall Design Guide Manual. 37. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, AAMA CWG-1 - Installation of Aluminum Curtain Walls. 38. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, AAMA MCWM-1 - Metal Curtain Wall Manual. 39. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, AAMA TIR-A9 - Metal Curtain Wall Fasteners. 40. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, NAAMA, Architectural Metal Products Division, AMP 500 - Introduction to Metal Finishing. 41. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, NAAMA, Architectural Metal Products Division, AMP 505 - Applied Coatings. 42. Steel Structures Painting Council, SSPC, Systems and Specifications Surface Preparation Guide and Paint Application Specification. SSPC - Steel Structures Painting Council. 43. Steel Structures Painting Council, SSPC Paint 12 - Paint Specification No. 12: Cold- Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film). 44. American Society of Civil Engineers, ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 45. Factory Mutual Engineering Corporation, FM 1-7 - Wind Forces on Buildings and Other Structures. 46. American Welding Society, AWS D1.2 - Structural Welding Code - Aluminum. 47. American Welding Society, AWS D10.7, Recommended Practices for Gas Shielded-Arc Welding of Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Pipe. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Shop Drawings for the assembly and erection of the entire glazed aluminum storefront, showing all dimensions, gauges, finishes, location of joints, connections, fasteners, expansion provisions, and locations and types of glazing gaskets, pressure plates, internal reinforcements, snap covers and other related items as required. b. Provide wall elevations at 1/2-inch scale, and full size detail sections of every typical composite member. Coordinate the submittal of Shop Drawings for component parts (as specified in other Sections) with this submittal. Show anchorages and alignments not shown on Shop Drawings of the components. c. Indication, in a manner highlighted to ENGINEER, clearly identifying all deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Calculations of analysis required to show compliance with loading requirements, deflection requirements, and other anticipated movements in the glazed aluminum storefront and supporting system, and other system performance criteria specified. 1). Provide gauges of material specified for all Work or of heavier gauge if calculations based on performance criteria submitted as part of Shop Drawing approval process indicate the need for heavier gauge material. All such modifications shall be at no additional cost to OWNER. Where compliance with performance criteria indicates that materials of lesser gauge or size may be adequate, provide specified gauges and sizes as minimum acceptable standard. Where compliance with performance criteria indicates the need for materials of greater gauge or thickness, provide greater gauge or thickness at no additional cost to OWNER. b. Copies of manufacturers' specifications and installation instructions for required materials and components, which are not included in the other submittals, specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Coordinate the submittal of such other data with this submittal, and with the submittal of Samples required by other Sections. 3. Samples: a. Samples of each required type and color of aluminum finish, on 12-inch long sections of extrusion shapes used in the Work, and 6-inch squares of sheet aluminum as required for the glazed aluminum curtain wall units and accessories. b. Provide polyvinylidene fluoride coating manufacturer’s complete color charts showing all colors and finishes, including custom, special and premium colors, available from the manufacturer. c. Provide cut-a-way samples of vertical to horizontal intersections of each type of window wall system component intersection made from 12-inch lengths of full size components and showing the proposed details of jointing, anchorage, movement, glazing, flashing and drainage. d. ENGINEER reserves the right to require samples showing fabrication techniques and workmanship of component parts, and the design of accessories and other exposed auxiliary items for glazed aluminum curtain wall Work, before fabrication of the Work proceeds. e. One of each type fastener employed, with statement of intended use. f. Samples will be reviewed by ENGINEER for materials, fabrication techniques, proposed system components, workmanship and color. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Certificates: a. Licensed Professional Engineer who prepares, signs and stamps their seal shall provide a written statement confirming responsibility for the Work and attest that the Work prepared meets these Specifications and the requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, and conforms to the prevailing standards of practice for the type of Work specified. b. Welders certificates indicating that welders comply with requirements specified. 2. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Laboratory test reports for specified performance tests. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Detailed maintenance manual including the following information: a. Product name and number. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. 2. Warranty Documentation: a. Written guarantees, as specified. D. Certificates: Submit the following: 1. Licensed Professional Engineer who prepares, signs and stamps their seal shall provide a written statement confirming responsibility for the Work and attest that the Work prepared meets these Specifications and the requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, and conforms to the prevailing standards of practice for the type of Work specified. 2. Welders certificates indicating that welders comply with requirements specified. E. Guarantees: Submit copies of written guarantees, as specified. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver storefront materials, components and accessories dry and undamaged, with manufacturer’s original protective wrapping intact with information accurately representing package contents as accepted by Engineer. 3. Deliver storefront system components in cartons or crated to provide protection during transit and storage at Site. 4. Inspect products upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired provided that exposed-to-view finished items are not damaged. Remove damaged components from the Site immediately and replace with new undamaged material at no additional cost to Owner. 5. Do not subject aluminum window wall components to bending or stress. 6. Do not damage edges or handle material in a manner that will cause scratches, warps or dents. Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 7. Handle material throughout the duration of the Work using appropriate handwear that does not damage finish of items to remain exposed in the finished Work. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Do not store aluminum store front components in contact with concrete or other materials that might cause corrosion or staining or in a location where they may be damaged by construction activity. 3. Store all aluminum storefront components in an area protected from the weather and with good air circulation around each piece. Avoid the use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters, which could create a humidity chamber. Immediately remove wrapping if it becomes wet. 4. Provide a 1/4-inch space between aluminum storefront components in order to promote air circulation. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by Contractor upon delivery to the Site. Contractor shall notify Engineer, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Protection: Provide continuous protection of materials against damage primarily by storing materials under cover and above ground and away from other construction traffic. B. Scheduling: 1. Schedule the arrival of aluminum storefronts components and accessories to minimize the time they are stored at the Site before installation. 2. Coordinate with other Work by furnishing Shop Drawings, inserts and similar items at the appropriate times for proper sequencing of construction without delays. 1.07 SUBSTITUTIONS 1. Do not change material gage, mullion spacing or construction details after Shop Drawing approval by Engineer. 2. Provide gages of material specified for all Work or of heavier gage if calculations based on performance criteria submitted as part of Shop Drawing approval process indicates the need for heavier gage material. All such modifications shall be at no additional expense to Owner. Where compliance with performance criteria indicates that materials of lesser gage or size may be adequate, provide specified gages and sizes as minimum acceptable standard. Where compliance with performance criteria indicates the need for materials of greater gage or thickness, provide greater gage or thickness at no additional expense to Owner. 1.08 WARRANTIES A. Special Warranties: Provide the following: 1. Provide written warranty, signed by the manufacturer and running to benefit of Owner, agreeing to replace, for a period of ten-years from the date of Substantial Completion, Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements aluminum window wall finish that shows excessive wear, as specified, and stating that the coil and spray coated polyvinylidene fluoride based coating specified complies with the following: a. Coating will not spall, check, craze, peel or otherwise lose adhesion for a period of ten years from the date of installation, to the extent that such shall create unsightly conditions, impair the intended architectural qualities of the building or otherwise fail to meet performance criteria specified, when viewed from a distance of 5 feet-0 inches from the item. b. In the event that the coil coated polyvinylidene fluoride, based coating fails to meet the specified standards the manufacturer shall, at their own expense, replace or field paint, at the discretion of Owner, all areas affected by the failure. In the event that repainting is selected, it shall be done at mutually agreeable intervals throughout the term of the warranty. c. The warranty does not apply where any failure is caused by accidents, or any external conditions or forces beyond the control of the manufacturer. 2. Provide written warranty, running to benefit of Owner, agreeing to replace aluminum window wall system components that fail in material or workmanship within three years of the date of Substantial Completion. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include, but is not limited to, leakage or air infiltration, deflections, or deterioration of metal in excess of normal weathering, and in excess of performance criteria specified; and defects in, and improper arrangement of, the various parts, accessories, weather- stripping, and other components of the system. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Performance Criteria: 1. General: a. Standards: Comply with applicable standards, recommendations and specified publications of AAMA, ASCE 7 and FM 1-7, except to the extent more stringent requirements are specified or required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. b. Testing: Conduct tests using specimens representative of proposed materials and construction including perimeter components, according to AAMA 501 recommendations. c. Modifications: The aluminum storefronts system requirements shown are intended to establish basic dimensions of units, modules, profiles, mullion depths, sight lines, support locations of members and the visual design intention. Within these limita- tions Contractor shall be responsible for the structural adequacy, detailing and fabrication of the entire storefronts system, including anchorage, and to make whatever modifications of, and additions to, the details as may be required to fulfill the performance requirements as acceptable to Engineer. Maintain the visual design concept as shown, including member sizes, profiles, support locations and alignment of components. d. After carefully reading system performance criteria and other requirements of the Specification, Professional Engineer to whom design of the aluminum storefronts Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements system is delegated shall make all requests for clarification of requirements that may be necessary in writing, to Engineer. 2. Loading Analysis Criteria: Provide loading analysis of complete, fully glazed aluminum storefronts system including glass types shown and specified in Section 08800, to comply with the following: a. Live Loads: Provide glazed aluminum storefronts system, including anchorage, that accommodates supporting structure’s deflection and sideways caused by uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated, without failure of materials, loss of performance characteristics, or permanent deformation. b. Provide detailing and fabrication based on the most stringent combination of testing and engineering analysis specified. c. Provide complete loading analysis performance calculations and Shop Drawings for all storefronts system components prepared, signed and stamped with the seal of a Licensed Professional Engineer, licensed to practice in State of Michigan and recognized as an expert in the specialty involved. 3. Extruded aluminum storefronts framing shall incorporate a pressure equalization chamber designed to equalize the pressure behind the clamping bars with the exterior environment. Extruded aluminum storefronts framing shall incorporate a continuous air seal at the interior side where the glazing panel is supported by the extruded aluminum frame. 4. Based on recommendations of AAMA MCWM-1 provide storefronts system and accessory Work that complies with the following minimum performance characteristics, as verified by independent laboratory tests conducted in accordance with the following: a. Deflection of Framing Members, ASTM E 330: Maximum deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane shall be limited to L/175 at center of single span, when subjected to 150 percent of inward and outward applicable wind load pressures, with no deformation or damage when the load is removed. Provide concealed stiffeners and custom aluminum tube wall thicknesses to prevent greater deflection than specified. Static Test Pressure Water Penetration Testing, ASTM E 331: No evidence of uncontrolled water penetration to the interior of the building through the storefronts system when subjected to a static air pressure difference of eight pounds per square foot. b. Dynamic Test Pressure Water Penetration Testing, AAMA 501.1: No evidence of uncontrolled water penetration to the interior of the building through the storefronts system when subjected to a dynamic pressure equal to twenty percent of inward acting applicable wind load pressure as defined by ASCE 7, but not less than eight pounds per square foot. c. Air Infiltration Testing, ASTM E 283: Maximum air infiltration of 0.06 cubic feet per minute per square foot of curtain wall area, increased by not more than 0.50 cubic feet per minute per linear foot of operable vent crack when subjected to a static air pressure difference of 6.24 pounds per square foot. 5. Thermal Movements: Glazed storefronts system, including anchorage, shall withstand thermal expansion and contraction movements of system and supporting elements resulting from not less than an ambient temperature change of 120 F, which may cause a surface storefronts material temperature change of 180 F. Limit the deflection as for wind pressure loading. Thermal movements shall not cause permanent deformation, cracking, opening of joints, undue stress on fasteners, or other effects detrimental to weathering performance. Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 6. Thermal transmittance (U-Factor): When tested to AAMA specification 1503, the thermal transmittane shall not be more than 0.63 BTU/hr/ft2/˚F 7. The design of the glazed storefronts system, including anchorage, as shown and specified is intended to prevent excessive condensation on the indoor faces of the aluminum storefronts system, with the heating and ventilating system in operation, and under the following conditions. Provide storefronts system detailing and fabrication that achieves and maintain this design intention: a. Outdoor: Ambient temperature 0 F; 15 mph wind. b. Indoor: Ambient temperature of 75 F; relative humidity of 25 percent. c. Excessive condensation is defined as visible water. 8. Provide extruded aluminum mullions that incorporate internal drainage profiles to lead all infiltrated water to the exterior through weep slots. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Encore Thermal Framing System by Kawneer Company, Incorporated - An Alcoa Company. 2. Or Equal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Extrusions: 1. Provide aluminum tubular extruded mullions, pressure plates, snap covers, and glazing stops and trim, in compliance with ASTM B 221 and ASTM B 429, and equal to 6063-T5 alloy and temper, or as recommended by the aluminum storefronts manufacturer to comply with the requirements of performance, fabrication, application of finish and control of color. 2. Provide thicknesses as necessary to comply with the structural loading performance requirements of 1-3/4-inches by 3-9/16-inches, as shown. 3. Provide extrusions within commercial tolerances, formed true to details shown and free of defects impairing strength, durability, color or finish. B. Sheets: 1. Provide aluminum sheet flashings, closures and accessories, in compliance with ASTM B 209, and equal to 5005 alloy for exposed sheet and 3003 alloy for non-exposed sheet, or as recommended by the aluminum storefronts manufacturer to comply with the requirements of performance, fabrication, application of finish and control of color. 2. Provide thicknesses as necessary to comply with the structural loading requirements, but not less than the following: a. Principal Formed Sheet Members: 0.125-inches minimum thickness. b. Formed Glazing Stops and Trim: 0.050-inches minimum thickness. 3. Provide sheet free of defects impairing strength, durability, color or finish. C. Thermal Separators: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric thermal breaks. D. Non-Structural Gasket Glazing: Provide elastomeric glazing gaskets complying with either of the following: 1. Polychloroprene synthetic rubber with the following physical properties: a. Hardness, ASTM D 2240: 50 to 70 Shore A. b. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 1500 psi. c. Tear Strength, ASTM D 624: 120 lbs/lin. in. Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements d. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 300 percent. e. Brittleness Temperature, ASTM D 746: -30 F. 2. Ethylene propylene diene monomer synthetic rubber with the following physical properties: a. Hardness, ASTM D 2240: 50 to 70, Shore A. b. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 1400 psi. c. Tear Strength, ASTM D 624: 125 lbs/lin. in. d. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 300 percent.. e. Brittleness Temperature, ASTM D 746: -75 F. E. Fasteners: Provide type and size required for proper support and performance, fabricated in compliance with AAMA TIR-A9 of aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel. Provide Phillips flat-head screws where exposed, unless otherwise shown. Finish exposed aluminum fasteners to match aluminum Work. F. Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide aluminum brackets and reinforcements wherever possible. Where steel units are required for higher strength or other unavoidable necessity, hot-dip galvanize the pieces after fabrication, with 2.0 ounces zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 123. G. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30-mil thickness per coat. H. Slip-Joint Linings: Provide plastic sheets, spacers or bearing pads as required to ensure free movement between surfaces where expansion and deflection movements are intended. Provide fluorocarbon resin or equivalent plastic units of the sizes and thicknesses recommended by the manufacturer to permanently prevent "freeze-up" of joints. I. Inserts for Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry: Furnish stainless steel anchors of the type required for proper anchorage based on performance criteria specified. J. Expansion Anchor Devices: Where inserts have not been provided in supporting concrete or masonry structure, provide drilled-in expansion bolt anchors of toothed stainless steel design. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Complete the fabrication and assembly of aluminum storefronts Work at the shop to the greatest extent possible, so as to minimize on-Site cutting, splicing, fastening, sealing, finishing and similar Work. Maintain provisions for expansion and movement as required. Disassemble only as necessary for shipment and erection. Maintain true continuity of line and accurate relation of planes and angles. Provide secure attachment and support at mechanical joints, with hairline fit of contacting members. B. Provide sizes, shapes and profiles as shown and required to fabricate aluminum storefronts Work. C. Provide tubular mullions as shown, projecting inside the plane of the glass with one pressure plate section per mullion. There shall be no through metal in horizontal rails or vertical mullions. D. Reinforce the Work internally with continuous structural sections, as may be necessary to comply with performance criteria specified, and for support of the system. Separate dissimilar metals with bituminous paint to prevent corrosion. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive concealed inserts which will permanently prevent "freeze-up" of the joint. Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements E. Provide mullions fabricated for on-Site connection at intersections, using screws and channel clips furnished by the manufacturer. F. Fabricate pressure plates for screw attachment, with snap covers provided for application over pressure plates to eliminate exposed fasteners. G. Complete the cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of all metal prior to cleaning, finishing, treatment, and application of coatings. H. Welding: 1. Follow recommendations of AWS D10.7, to avoid discoloration at welds. Grind exposed welds smooth. Remove arises from cut edges and ease edges and corners to a radius of approximately 1/64 inch. 2. Weld components to comply with referenced standards and approved Shop Drawings. Weld before finishing components. Weld in concealed locations to the greatest extent possible. Remove all weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed joint surfaces by descaling and grinding. Restore finish to match adjacent surfaces so that weld location will not be visible on final finish. I. Conceal fasteners wherever possible, except as otherwise shown. J. Provide aluminum storefronts capable of accommodating 1-Inch thicknesses of glass products as specified in Section 08800. 2.05 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT COATINGS A. General: 1. After fabrication of the aluminum storefronts Work, prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with recommendations of the aluminum producer and the finisher or processor. 2. Finish all components of each assembly simultaneously so as to attain complete uniformity of color. 3. Sequence the finishing and processing of materials in a predetermined bay-by-bay plan, which will minimize color and texture differences between adjacent components. B. Exposed Aluminum Polyvinylidene Fluoride Based Coating: Apply full strength polyvinylidene fluoride based coatings at the factory by coil coating for sheet material and spray coating for extruded or factory-fabricated material. Provide the following four-coat finish system complying with the following: 1. Alkali clean and hot water rinse all surfaces to receive polyvinylidene fluoride based finish. 2. Prepare a chemical conversion coating on the surface, using phosphates or chromates followed by a cold-water rinse. Seal with a chromic acid rinse and dry, except where manufacturer recommends another method to achieve greater coating reliability. 3. Apply a base prime coat of epoxy paint to the prepared surface in its coil form, by reverse roller coating. Fully cure in a gas-fired oven to a dry film thickness of 0.2 to 0.4- mils. Follow with a barrier coat, 0.75 to 1.0-mil thick. 4. Apply color coat containing mica pearlescent or metallic flakes over the barrier coat by roller coating for coil material and airless or Ransburg Elastrostatic Hand spray for extrusions and fuse at a peak metal temperature of 440°F. Apply to a dry film thickness of 0.7-mils for coil coating and 1.2-mils for spray coating so that the total dry film is approximately 1.0-mil thick for coil material and 1.5-mils thick for extruded material. 5. Apply clear fluoropolymer top coat to provide a dry film thickness of 0.4 to 0.8- mils. The entire four-coat system shall have a dry film thickness of 2.6-mils minimum. Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 6. Provide the following physical properties, as proven by the following laboratory test methods acceptable to Engineer: a. Weathering, ASTM D 4214: Chalking, not more than No. 8, after exposure for 5,000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. b. Color Change, ASTM D 2244: No greater than 5 N.B.S units after removal of external deposits and after exposure for 5,000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. c. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D 2247; no blisters after 3,000 hours. d. Salt Spray, ASTM B 117: Few scattered blisters no larger than ASTM No. 4, and no more than 1/16-inch creep from areas scribed to bare metal after 3,000 hours. e. Dry Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch. f. Wet Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch; extruded material only. g. Boiling Water Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after one-hour immersion in distilled boiling water. h. Water Immersion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after immersion in aerated distilled water 80 ±10°F after 500 hours. i. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 968: Coefficient of abrasion of 67, minimum. j. Gloss, ASTM D 523: 30±5 reflectivity at 60°F. k. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: HB-H, minimum. l. Dry Film Thickness, ASTM D 3363: Primer, 0.2 to 0.4-mils; barrier coat, 1.0-mil; color coating, 0.7 to 1.5-mils; clear topcoat, 0.4 to 0.8-mils. m. Solvent Resistance: 100 Double MEK rubs, minimum. n. Flexibility, ASTM D 522: No cracking prior to metal fracture. o. Acid Resistance, ASTM D 1308: Sixteen hour spot test with five percent hydrochloric acid - no effect. p. Alkali Resistance, ASTM D 1308: Sixteen hour spot test with five percent sodium hydroxide - no effect. 7. Colors: Provide the following: a. Complete selection of manufacturer’s standard, custom and premium colors and coating system components for final selection by Engineer. b. Engineer will select 2 custom special extended life premium colors for aluminum window wall system at time of Shop Drawing and Sample submission review. Provide manufacturer capable of producing all standard, custom, special and premium colors and system components offered by the specified manufacturer. c. Interior extrusions, exterior panels and snap covers, flashing, trim and other accessories will, at the discretion of Engineer, have 2 different finished colors. 8. Protective Coating: Immediately upon completion of the aluminum window wall finish, apply a transparent, color-coded, strippable-film coating, not less than 1.0-mil dry film thickness, suitable for protection of the finish through completion of erection. 9. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Duranar Metallic XL Specialty Color 4-Coat System by PPG Industries Coatings and Resins Division, Incorporated. b. Or equal. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Contractor and installer shall examine the supporting structure and other elements of the substrate and conditions under which the aluminum storefronts Work is to be performed and notify Engineer in writing of unsatisfactory tolerances which exceed specified limits in other work adjoining aluminum storefronts Work, and other conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with erection until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Take field measurements prior to completion of shop-fabrication and finishing of aluminum storefronts. Do not delay progress of the Work. Allow for erection tolerances corresponding with specified tolerances where final dimensions cannot be established before fabrication. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturers specifications and recommendations for the installation of aluminum storefronts components as shown on approved Shop Drawings. B. Do not install component parts which are observed to be defective in any way, including warped, bowed, dented, abraided and broken members, and including glass with edge damage. C. Do not cut, or trim, component parts during erection, in a manner which would damage the finish, decrease the strength, or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance of the aluminum storefronts. Return component parts which require alteration to the shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement by new parts. D. Install component parts level, plumb, true to line and with uniform joints and reveals. Secure to structure with non-staining and non- corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers. Use erection equipment which will not mar or stain finished surfaces, and will not damage the component parts. E. Apply two coats of bituminous paint of approximately 30-mil dry film thickness per coat, or other suitable permanent separator, on concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials before installation, wherever there is the possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action. F. Anchor component parts securely in place as shown, by bolting, or other permanent mechanical attachment system, which will comply with performance requirements and permit movements which are intended or necessary. Install slip-joint linings to ensure movement as intended or necessary. G. Clean debris, dust and other substances from behind the aluminum storefronts as it is erected, and provide temporary closures if necessary to prevent the accumulation of such substances in the void spaces behind the Aluminum storefronts. H. Install thermal barrier between pressure plate and mullion. I. Attach pressure plate with screws. Install snap covers over pressure plates. J. Install glass using dry glazing retainers which provide a firm but resilient clamping grip on the glass. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer’s Services: Furnish the services of a manufacturer’s technical representative who shall: Aluminum Storefronts 08 41 13 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Be present at the start of the Work in order to provide clarification of manufacturer’s approved installation instructions and assistance in establishing acceptable procedures and methods for erection of aluminum window wall system components. 2. Inspect the completed Work of the window wall installer and assist Engineer with opinions on acceptability of completed installation. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction traffic near completed storefronts Work. Only the original installer shall be permitted in the work area and only as required to perform the Work. B. Protect the aluminum storefronts Work, including glass, during the remainder of the construction period. 3.06 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Maintain the aluminum wall in a clean condition throughout the construction period, so that it will be without any evidence of deterioration or damage, other than the effects of normal weathering, at the time of final acceptance. Select methods of cleaning which will promote the achievement of uniform appearance and stabilized colors and textures for materials that weather or age with exposure. B. Remove and replace with new material aluminum storefronts components which have been damaged, including finish, beyond successful repair, as directed by Engineer. Repair minor damage. END OF SECTION Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all aluminum windows Work. 2. Extent of the aluminum windows is shown and specified. 3. Types of products required include the following: a. Custom High Performance Insulated Thermal-Barrier Aluminum Windows: 1). Fixed thermal barrier aluminum windows. 2). Tubular muntins and intermediates providing true divided lites, mullions and all custom accessories and fasteners. 3). Gaskets, pressure plates and snap covers in conjunction with each of the above components. 4). Intermediate mullions and all accessories and fasteners. 5). Hardware, custom panning and miscellaneous materials. 6). Anchors, inserts, support brackets, expansion devices, fasteners, flashings, weeps, and similar elements in conjunction with each of the above components. b. Complete selection of custom and premium custom-blended full-strength polyvinylidene fluoride finishes and colors with extended life topcoat. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before the aluminum windows Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 81 00, Glass Glazing. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association, (AAMA). a. AAMA 101, Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum Prime Windows and Sliding Glass Doors. b. AAMA 302.8, Specification for Aluminum Windows. c. AAMA 701-702, Voluntary Specification for Pile Weatherstrip and Replaceable Fenestration Weatherseals. d. AAMA GS-001, Guide Specifications for Aluminum Architectural Windows. Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM B 117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. b. ASTM B 221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. c. ASTM D 522, Test Methods for Mandrel Bend Test of Attached Organic Coatings. d. ASTM D 523, Test Method for Specular Gloss. e. ASTM D 968, Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive. f. ASTM D 1308, Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. g. ASTM D 2244, Practice for Calculation of Color Tolerances and Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. h. ASTM D 2247, Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. i. ASTM D 4214, Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. j. ASTM E 283, Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. k. ASTM E 330, Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. l. ASTM E 331, Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 3. Federal Specification, (FS). a. FS RR-W-365, Wire Fabric. 4. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (NAAMM). a. NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products. 5. International Building Code, (IBC). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years experience producing substantially similar equipment and shall be able to show evidence of at least five installations in satisfactory operation for at least five years. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Installer shall be certified by the manufacturer of the aluminum windows to install the product accepted for this Project. Installer shall provide evidence of at least five years installing similar product to the product accepted for this Project as well as at least three Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements references for projects where the exact product accepted for this Project has been successfully installed. 2. Submit name and qualifications of the installer to the ENGINEER. C. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain all products included in this Section regardless of the component manufacturer from a single aluminum window manufacturer. 2. The aluminum window manufacturer to review and approve or to prepare all Shop Drawings and other submittals for all components furnished under this Section. 3. All components shall be specifically constructed for the specified service conditions and shall be integrated into the overall assembly by the aluminum window manufacturer. D. Mock-Ups: 1. Prior to the installation of custom aluminum window system with Project operable vent and accessories, but after ENGINEER'S approval of Samples and Shop Drawings, install sample of custom aluminum window system with Project operable vent, in an area selected by ENGINEER to show a representative installation of the Work. Obtain ENGINEER'S acceptance of visual qualities of the mock-up before start of the Work. Retain and protect mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed custom aluminum window system with Project operable vent Work. Do not alter mock-ups, unless given written permission by ENGINEER. 2. Work that does not meet the standard approved on the sample areas shall be removed and replaced with new material, as required by ENGINEER. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Fabrication and installation of aluminum window units and associated components of the Work. Include wall elevations at 1/4-inch scale, typical unit elevations at 1- inch scale and full-size detail sections of every typical composite member. Show anchors, hardware, operators and other components not included in manufacturer's standard data, including glazing details. Indicate clearly on the Shop Drawings, all deviations from Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations and standard details for aluminum window units, including fabrication, finishing, hardware and other components of the Work. Include certified test laboratory reports as necessary to show compliance with the requirements. b. Copies of manufacturers' specifications and installation instructions for required materials and components, which are not included in the other submittals, specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Coordinate the submittal of such other data with this submittal, and 3. Samples: Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Samples of each required aluminum color and finish, on 12-inch long sections of extrusion shapes as required for the aluminum window units. b. Samples will be reviewed by ENGINEER for color and texture only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test and Evaluation Reports: Certified laboratory test reports for required performance tests. 2. Qualification Statements: a. Installer C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operations and Maintenance Documentation: Upon completion of the Work, furnish five copies of detailed maintenance manual including the following information: a. Product name and number. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Except as otherwise shown or specified, the requirements for aluminum windows, and the terminology and standards of performance and fabrication workmanship, are those Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements specified and recommended in AAMA 101, and the applicable general recommendations published by Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association, National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers and Aluminum Association. 2. All custom and standard features and finishes offered by the named manufac-turers shall be made available to ENGINEER from any “or equal” manufacturer submitted by CONTRACTOR. 3. Custom High Performance Insulated Thermal-Barrier Aluminum Windows: a. Performance and Testing: Except as otherwise specified, comply with the air infiltration tests, water resistance tests and applicable load tests specified in AAMA 101 for the type and classification of aluminum window units required in each case. b. Comply with Architectural Performance Class and Section 4 “Optional Performance Grades” of AAMA 101 Group II-Compression Seal Window Products AW-PG100-FW, Architectural. c. Design Pressure: 1). Provide uniform structural test pressure of 75 pounds per square foot. 2). Air Infiltration Test, ASTM E 283: Maximum infiltration 0.065 cubic feet per minute per linear foot of operating ventilator when tested at 6.24 pounds per square foot differential pressure. 3). Water Penetration Test, ASTM E 331: No water penetration for 15 minutes when window is subjected to rate of flow of five gallons per hour per square foot with differential pressure across window unit of ten pounds per square foot. 4). Wind Load Test, ASTM E 330: Minimum 50 pounds per square foot positive and negative load for ten seconds. Maximum deformation of frame or sash member L/175 of span length. d. Testing: Wherever manufacturer's standard window units comply with the requirements and have been tested in accordance with the specified tests, provide certification by the manufacturer of compliance with such tests; otherwise, perform the required tests through a recognized testing laboratory or agency and provide certified test results. e. Other Loading: Applicable requirements of the International Building Code. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Provide products of one of the following: 1. TR 7100 series fixed windows by Traco Architectural Systems, Inc. 2. Or equal. 2.03 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION A. Aluminum Extrusions: Alloy and temper, ASTM B 221, 6063-T5 and not less than 1/8-inch thickness at any location for mainframe sash members and tube supports. Vertical mullions and support clips as recommended by the window manufacturer. Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Thermal Separator: Interior and exterior aluminum frame sections shall be thermally separated by a continuous urethane connector. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel, guaranteed by the manufacturer to be non-corrosive and compatible with the aluminum window members, trim, hardware, anchors and other components of the window units. 1. Do not use exposed fasteners, except where unavoidable for the application of hardware. Match the finish of the metal surrounding the fastener, unless otherwise specified. 2. Provide Phillips flat-heat machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise specified. D. Glazing Gaskets: Neoprene or EPDM. E. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Section 08 81 00, Glass Glazing. 2.04 WINDOW CLASSIFICATION (GRADE) A. AW-PG100-FW, Architectural Windows: Provide window units complying with the following: 1. Extruded aluminum-glazing stops of 0.062-inch minimum wall thickness, except 0.050-inch minimum for snap-on type. 2. Hardware and anchors of non-magnetic stainless steel and white bronze. 3. Fabricate units with all main corners and intersections of frame and sash mitered. Provide double tubular frame with hydraulically crimped gusset corner construction. Mortise or cope secondary members to fit, and weld in place with hairline joints. 4. Provide metal thickness as required to withstand performance requirements, but not less than 0.078-inch for frame members. 5. Provide means of drainage for water and condensation, which may accumulate in members of the window units. 2.05 FABRICATION AND ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide specified manufacturer's standard fabrication and accessories, except to the extent more specific or more stringent requirements are specified. Include complete system for assembly of components and anchorage of window units, and prepare sash for glazing. B. Sizes and Profiles: The required sizes for window units and the profile requirements are shown. The details shown are based upon standard details by one or more manufacturers. It is intended that similar details by other manufacturers will be acceptable, provided they comply with the size requirements, and with minimum/ maximum profile requirements specified. C. Coordination of Fabrication: Wherever possible check actual window openings in the construction Work by accurate field measurement before fabrication, and show recorded measurements before fabrication, and show recorded measurements on final Shop Drawings. However, coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by CONTRACTOR to avoid delay of the Work. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements without field measurements, and coordinate installation tolerances to ensure proper fit of window units. D. Provide mullions and cover plates as shown, matching window units and complete with anchors for support to structure and for installation of window units. Allow for erection tolerances and provide for movements of window units due to thermal expansion and building deflections. E. Provide insect screen unit for each operable exterior sash. Locate screen units on outside of sash. Wherever possible, design window units and hardware to accom-modate screens in a tight-fitting removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches, and with aluminum-extruded frame continuous wickets along lower edge of screen for cam handle access. F. Provide serrated sash for pre-shimmed glazing tape. G. Provide extruded aluminum true-divided mullions, and custom aluminum panning as shown. 2.06 ALUMINUM WINDOW FINISHES A. Exposed Aluminum Polyvinylidene Fluoride Based Coating: Apply full strength polyvinylidene fluoride based coatings at the factory by coil coating for sheet material and spray coating for extruded or factory-fabricated material. Provide a four-coat system complying with the following: 1. Alkali clean and hot water rinse all surfaces to receive polyvinylidene fluoride based finish. 2. Prepare a chemical conversion coating on the surface, using phosphates or chromates followed by a cold-water rinse. Seal with a chromic acid rinse and dry, except where manufacturer recommends another method to achieve greater coating reliability. 3. Apply a base prime coat of epoxy paint to the prepared surface in its coil form, by reverse roller coating. Fully cure in a gas-fired oven to a dry film thickness of 0.2 to 0.4- mils. Follow with a barrier coat 1.0-mils thick. 4. Apply color coat containing mica pearlescent or metallic flakes over the barrier coat by roller coating for coil material and airless or Ransburg Elastrostatic Hand Spray for extrusions and fuse at a peak metal temperature of 440°F for a dry film thickness of 0.7- mils for coil coating and 1.2-mils for spray coating so that today dry film is approximately 1.0-mil thick for coil material and 1.5-mil thick for extruded material. 5. Apply clear fluoropolymer topcoat to provide a dry film thickness of 0.4 to 0.8-mils. The entire system shall have a dry film thickness of 2.6-mils, minimum. 6. Provide the following physical properties, as proven by appropriate and recognized laboratory test methods acceptable to ENGINEER: a. Weathering, ASTM D 4214: Chalking, not more than No. 8, after exposure for 5,000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. b. Color Change, ASTM D 2244: No greater than 5 N.B.S units after removal of external deposits and after exposure for 5,000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements c. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D 2247: No blister after 3,000 hours. d. Salt Spray, ASTM B 117: Few scattered blisters no larger than ASTM No. 4, and no more than 1/16-inch creep from areas scribed to bare metal after 3,000 hours. e. Dry Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch. f. Wet Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch; extruded material only. g. Boiling Water Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after one-hour immersion in distilled boiling water. h. Water Immersion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after immersion in aerated distilled water 80 ±10°F after 500 hours. i. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 968: Coefficient of abrasion of 67, minimum. j. Gloss, ASTM D 523: 30 ±5 reflectivity at 60°F. k. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: HB-H minimum. l. Dry Film Thickness: Primer, 0.2 to 0.4-mils, barrier coat, 1.0-mils, color coating, 0.7 to 1.5-mils; clear topcoat, 0.4 to 0.8-mils. m. Solvent Resistance: 100 Double MEK rubs, minimum. n. Flexibility, ASTM D 522: No cracking prior to metal fracture. o. Acid Resistance, ASTM D 1308: Sixteen hour spot test with five percent hydrochloric acid - no effect. p. Alkali Resistance, ASTM D 1308: Sixteen hour spot test with five percent sodium hydroxide - no effect. 2.07 COLOR: 1. Full selection of manufacturer’s standard, custom and premium colors for final selection by ENGINEER. 2. ENGINEER will select custom special extended life premium colors for aluminum windows at time of Shop Drawing and sample submission review. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrate and conditions under which custom aluminum window system Work is to be installed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's specifications, installation manuals and recommendations for the installation of window units, hardware, operators, and other components of the Work. Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit variations from plumb, level or dimensioned angle to the following: a. 1/8-inch maximum deviation in story height or in 10-foot vertical or angular run, and in 20-foot horizontal runs. b. 1/4-inch maximum deviation in 40 foot runs, all directions. 2. Limit variations from theoretical member locations shown, based on established floor lines and column lines, including variations from plumb and level, to the following: a. 3/8-inch total maximum deviation for members at all locations. b. 1/8-inch maximum change in deviation for members for ten foot runs, all directions. 3. Limit offsets in end-to-end and edge-to-edge alignments of adjoining and consecutive members, which form planes, continuous runs and profiles, to the following: a. 1/16-inch maximum offset in flush alignment, including members, which are to be 1/2-inch or less out-of-flush, and including members, which are separated 2-inches or less by a reveal or protrusion in the plane of the aluminum window wall. b. 1/8-inch maximum offset in alignments, which are to be out-of-flush by more than 1/2-inch, or separated by a reveal or protrusion of more than 2- inch width. C. Anchor units securely in place. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials. D. Refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants, for compounds, fillers and gaskets to be installed concurrently with window units. E. Do not install component parts, which are observed to be defective in any way, including warped, bowed, dented, abraded and broken members, and including glass with edge damage. F. Do not cut, or trim, component parts during erection, in a manner, which would damage the finish, decrease the strength, or result in a visual imperfection or a failure in performance of the aluminum window wall. Return component parts, which require alteration to the shop for refabrication, if possible, or for replacement by new parts. G. Install component parts level, plumb, true to line and with uniform joints and reveals. Secure to structure with non-staining and non-corrosive shims, anchors, fasteners, spacers and fillers. Use erection equipment, which will not mar or stain finished surfaces, and will not damage the component parts. H. Apply a bituminous coating of approximately 30-mil dry film thickness, or other suitable permanent separator, on concealed contact surfaces of dissimilar materials before installation, wherever there is the possibility of corrosive or electrolytic action. I. Anchor component parts securely in place as shown, by bolting, or other permanent mechanical attachment system, which will comply with performance requirements and permit movements, which are intended or necessary. Install slip-joint linings to ensure movement as intended or necessary. Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements J. Clean debris, dust and other substances from behind the aluminum window wall as it is erected, and provide temporary closures if necessary to prevent the accumulation of such substances in the void spaces behind the aluminum window walls. K. Install thermal barrier between pressure plate and mullion. L. Attach pressure plate with screws. Install snap covers over pressure plates. M. Install glazing using dry glazing retainers, which provide a firm but resilient clamping grip on the glazing. N. Adjust operating sash and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. O. Refer to Section 08 81 00, Glass Glazing, for installation requirements. P. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage of the finish. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts. Q. Advise CONTRACTOR of protective treatment and other precautions required through the remainder of the construction period, to ensure that window units will be without damage or deterioration, other than normal weathering, at the time of Final Completion. R. Maintain the aluminum window wall in a clean condition throughout the construction period, so that it will be without any evidence of deterioration or damage, other than the effects of normal weathering, at the time of Final Completion. Select methods of cleaning which will promote the achievement of uniform appearance and stabilized colors and textures for materials that weather or age with exposure. S. CONTRACTOR shall advise ENGINEER, in writing, of protection and surveillance requirements that CONTRACTOR shall provide at no additional cost to the OWNER, to ensure that the aluminum windows Work will be without deterioration or damage at the time of Final Completion by OWNER. T. Remove and replace with new material aluminum window components, which have been damaged, including finish, beyond successful repair, as directed by ENGINEER. Repair minor damage. U. Immediately before the time of Final Completion, clean the aluminum windows thoroughly, inside and out. Demonstrate proper cleaning methods to OWNER’S maintenance personnel during this final cleaning. V. At the completion of the Work, clean or replace adjacent work, marred by the Work of this Section. W. Remove all materials and debris and leave the Site of the Work in clean condition. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Water Penetration Test: Perform test in accordance with NAAMA Standard FC-1: “Field Check for Water Leakage of Metal Curtain Walls”, except limit test area to one bay wide (but not less than 20 feet or more than 40 feet) by one story high, located from mid-bay to mid-bay and from mid-story-height to mid-story-height. Aluminum Windows 08 51 13 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Depending upon the prevalence or absence of leakage in the initial water penetration test, and upon measures adopted by the aluminum window wall CONTRACTOR to eliminate sources of leakage from subsequently erected work, the ENGINEER will determine the necessity, and scope of, additional tests. In no case will the total of tested area amount to less than one percent, nor more than ten percent of the aluminum window wall area, except as subsequently authorized by the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install door hardware. Furnish door hardware for all doors in compliance with these Specifications herein. 2. Extent of door hardware is specified. Door hardware is defined to include all items known commercially as door hardware, except special types of unique and non matching hardware specified in the same Section as the door and door frame. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the door hardware. 2. Coordinate the Work of other Sections to provide clearances and accurate positioning of recessed or cast-in-place items. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Section 08 11 16, Aluminum Doors and Frames. 3. Section 08 14 00, Wood Doors. 4. Section 08 16 13, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI). a. ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI), in association with Builders Hardware Manufacturers' Association, (ANSI/BHMA). a. ANSI/BHMA A156.1, Butts and Hinges. b. ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Exit Devices. c. ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Door Controls - Closers. d. ANSI/BHMA A156.6, Architectural Door Trim. e. ANSI/BHMA A156.7, Template Hinge Dimensions. f. ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders. g. ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Mortise Locks and Latches, Series 1000. h. ANSI/BHMA A156.16, American National Standard for Auxiliary Hard-ware. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements i. ANSI/BHMA A156.18, Hardware - Materials and Finishes. j. ANSI/BHMA A156.21, Thresholds. k. ANSI/BHMA A156.22, Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems. 3. ANSI, in association with Door and Hardware Institute, (ANSI/DHI). a. ANSI/DHI A115.1, Preparation of Mortise Locks in 1-3/8-inch and 1-3/4-inch Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 4. ANSI, in association with National Fire Protection Association, (ANSI/NFPA). a. ANSI/NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 5. ANSI, in association with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL). a. UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 6. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (Public Law 101-336), Appendix A to Title 28 Code of Federal Regulations Part 36 (Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities - ADAAG). 7. Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI). a. DHI, Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. DHI, Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. c. DHI, Sequencing and Format for the Hardware Schedule. 8. Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association, Division of National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (HMMA). a. HMMA 830, Hardware Preparation and Locations for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 9. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA). a. NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 10. Steel Door Institute, (SDI). a. SDI 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. SDI 118, Basic Fire Door Requirements. 11. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL). a. UL 305, Panic Hardware. b. UL, Building Materials Directory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: 1. Provide door hardware and accessories manufactured by firms specializing in the production of this type of Work and complying with specified standards of ANSI, BHMA, DHI, NFPA, HMMA, SDI and UL. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Provide door hardware from manufacturers who are members of BHMA and participate in BHMA certification programs. B. Installer’s Qualifications: 1. The door hardware installer shall have in his employ an architectural hardware consultant. The architectural hardware consultant shall be a member of the Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI), who has passed the DHI certification examine and successfully completed an apprenticeship program. The architectural hardware consultant shall be responsible for preparing door hardware schedules and Shop Drawings and be present at the Site for the purpose of checking and supervising the Work of the installer during the time of installation and adjustment of the door hardware Work, and shall prepare a written field report on status of completed door hardware installation as specified. 2. Submit name and qualifications of the installer to ENGINEER. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Provide door hardware for fire resistance-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80. 2. Provide only door hardware that has been tested, listed and labeled by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. 3. Modify features of door hardware items specified, and provide additional accessories and features as required to meet UL and NFPA requirements, at no additional cost to the OWNER. D. Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of codes. E. Source Quality Control: 1. Obtain each type of door hardware item from only one manufacturer. 2. Provide door hardware schedule, for submission to, and for approval by, ENGINEER, prepared in compliance with DHI standards. 3. Comply with specified BHMA standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's data for each item of door hardware. Include whatever information may be required to show compliance with specified requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and exposed finishes. Include mounting heights and locations for each item of door hardware. Provide ENGINEER with latest complete technical catalogue of all available door hardware manufactured by proposed manufacturers, even if manufacturer specified by ENGINEER is submitted by CONTRACTOR to perform the Work. Furnish templates to fabricators of other Work, which is to receive door hardware. 2. Shop Drawings: Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Copies of the Door Hardware Schedule in the manner and format specified, complying with the actual construction Progress Schedule requirements (for each draft). Include explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes used to present scheduled information. 1). Prepare and submit Door Hardware Schedule in compliance with HDI standards. b. Based on the door hardware requirements specified, organize the final Door Hardware Schedule into "hardware sets," indicating complete designation of every item required for each door or opening. Furnish initial draft of schedule at the earliest possible date, in order to facilitate the fabrication of other Work (such as hollow metal frames) which may be critical in the Project Schedule. Furnish final draft of schedule after Samples, manufacturer's data sheets, coordination with Shop Drawings for other Work, delivery schedules and similar information have been completed and accepted. c. Include a separate key schedule, showing clearly how OWNER'S final instructions on keying of locks have been fulfilled. d. Door Hardware Schedules are intended for coordination of the Work. Review and accep-tance by ENGINEER does not relieve CONTRACTOR of responsibility to fulfill the requirements as shown and specified. 3. Samples: Submit the following: a. Actual unit of each door hardware item specified incorporating all standard and special features and finishes specified, demonstrated and identified by manufacturer's representa¬tive to ENGINEER. Samples shall be presented at time of Shop Drawing submittal, as ENGINEER will not review or approve Shop Drawings without concurrent sample submissions. b. Approved samples may be incorporated into the door hardware Work. c. ENGINEER’S review will be for appearance and for general compliance with required features. Compliance with all other requirements is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test and Evaluation Reports: a. Certified independent laboratory test reports for BHMA certification program and certification tests for each type of product specified. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer. C. Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Documentation: Upon completion of the Work, furnish five copies of detailed maintenance manuals, including the following information: a. Product name and manufacturer. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements c. Detailed procedure for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. e. Parts identification manual and maintenance manuals for each piece of door hardware. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver all items of door hardware in manufacturer’s original, undamaged packages, bearing accurate representation of the item within each package. 3. Pack each piece of door hardware separately, complete with screws, keying, instructions and templates, tagged to correspond with items submitted on approved Shop Drawings and as specified. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identifica¬tion. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Provide secure storage area for door hardware items, secured by locks and accessible only to door hardware installer, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR. 3. Store door hardware in manufacturers' original packages. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Items that arrive in a damaged condition shall be removed from the Site and not offered again for acceptance. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Description: 1. Where the door, shape, size, fire-resistance-rating, frequency of use, or function of a member receiving door hardware is such as to prevent, or make unsuitable, the types of door hardware specified, furnish similar types having as nearly as practicable the same operation but of type or kind more appropriate to the design intension and requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. Clearly identify and highlight to ENGINEER all such required modifications on Shop Drawings submitted for approval. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. If door hardware for any location is not specified, provide door hardware equal in design and quality to adjacent door hardware specified for comparable openings at no additional cost to OWNER. 3. Furnish door hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements, as necessary for proper installation and function. 4. Unless otherwise specified, comply with DHI, Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 2.02 DETAILS OF CONSTRUCTION A. General: 1. Hand of Door: The Drawings show the swing or hand of each door leaf (left, right, reverse bevel, etc.). Furnish each item of door hardware for proper installation and operation of the door swing as shown. 2. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products which have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates), except in conjunction with labels required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 3. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of the basic metal and forming method specified, using the manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper and hardness. Do not substi¬tute materials or forming methods for those specified. 4. Fasteners: Manufacture door hardware to conform to published templates, generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide door hardware, which has been prepared for self tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 5. Furnish screws for installation, with each door hardware item. Provide Phillips flat head screws except as otherwise specified. Finish exposed (exposed under any condition) screws to match the hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces on other Work, to match the finish of such other Work as closely as possible, including "prepared for paint" in surfaces to receive painted finish. 6. Provide fasteners which are compatible with both the unit fastened and the substrate, and which will not cause corrosion or deterioration of door hardware, base material or fastener. 7. Provide concealed fasteners for door hardware units, which are not exposed when the door is closed, except to the extent no standard manufacturer units of the type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where the bolt head or the nut on the opposite face is exposed in other Work under any condition, except where it is not possible to adequately reinforce the Work and use machine screws or concealed fasteners of another standard type to satisfactorily avoid the use of through bolts. 8. Tools for Maintenance: Furnish two complete sets of specialized tools as required for OWNER'S continued adjustment, maintenance, removal and replacement of door hardware. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Mortise Hinges: 1. Templates and Screws: Provide only template produced units. 2. Base Metal: Except as otherwise specified, fabricate hinges from stainless steel and finish to match the latch and lock set. 3. Number of Hinges: Provide three hinges on each door leaf of less than 60 inches in height; provide one additional hinge for next 30 inches of door height or fraction thereof; provide two additional hinges for each 30-inches, or fraction thereof, for doors above 90 inches tall. 4. Hinge Size: Except as otherwise specified or as required to comply with UL and NFPA, provide hinges of the following sizes: a. Interior Doors: 1). Average Use, Maximum 36 Inches Wide: 4-1/2 inch standard weight (0.134- inches). 2). Heavy Use, Maximum 36 Inches Wide: 4-1/2 inch heavy-weight (0.180-inches). b. Exterior Doors, Maximum 36 Inches Wide: 4-1/2 inch heavy-weight (0.180-inch). c. Wide Exterior and Interior Doors: 1). Maximum 48 inches wide: 5 inch heavyweight (0.190-inch). 2). Over 48 inches wide: 6 inch heavy weight (0.203-inch). 5. Types of Hinges: Provide full mortise type, ball bearing hinges, swaged for mortise applications, inner leaf beveled, square cornered, unless manufacturer's recommendations indicate that half mortise, half surface, full surface or other type should be used for the frame and door type or condition. 6. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise specified, provide hinge pins as follows: a. Pins: Stainless steel. b. Exterior Doors: Non removable pins. Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed. c. Tips: Slope ends of hinge barrel. 7. Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.7. 8. Comply with UL, List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials and NFPA 80 requirements. 9. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. FBB 199 and FBB 191 by Stanley Commercial Hardware, Division of The Stanley Works. b. T4B3386 and TB3313 by McKinney Products Company, Division of ESSEX Industries, Incorporated. c. Or equal. C. High-Security Mortise Locks and Latch Sets: Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike, for each location and use shown. Provide stainless steel curved lip strikes, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer, finished to match lock or latch set trim. 2. Lock Throw: Provide minimum of 3/4 inch anti friction latch bolt and 1 inch dead bolt throw. Comply with UL requirements for throw of latch bolts and deadbolts on fire- resistance-rated openings. 3. Materials: Provide the following features and materials: a. Latch Bolt: Two-piece; mechanical; anti-friction, stainless steel. b. Dead Bolt: One-piece, stainless steel with two enclosed hardened-steel roller armor pins. c. Case: Wrought steel, zinc dichromatized. d. Cylinders: High-security; brass; pick- and drill-resistant; ANSI/BHMA A156.5 - E09211A. e. Armor Front: 8-inches by 1-1/4-inches wide, minimum; steel. f. Escutcheon: 8-inches by 2-1/2-inches wide by 3/16-inches thick, minimum; stainless steel, US 32D. g. Hubs: Sintered steel, copper infiltrated. h. Lever with Stop Pin: Brass, plated to match stainless steel, with additional built-in stop to prevent over-torquing of lever. i. All components shall be of marine quality, wherever possible. 4. Backset: 2-3/4-inches. 5. Modify specified locks and latches to comply with UL, Building Materials Directory, and List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials and NFPA 80 requirements. 6. Finish: US 32D satin. 7. Conform to ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Security Grade 1. 8. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. High Security SL8700 Mortise Lockset Augusta - ASL Lever Handles and Trim by Yale Security, Incorporated, Division of Yale Security Group. b. Or equal. D. Panic Exit Devices: 1. Exit Doors: Where required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, provide panic exit devices, of the type required, including UL labels. 2. Fire Doors: Where shown or specified as a fire-resistance-rated door, provide units listed and labeled by UL, to comply with the fire-resistance-rating and size of door shown. 3. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought stainless steel jamb-mounted top latch bolt and bottom latch bolt for each location and use shown to allow independent opening and closing of each leaf of double doors with panic exit devices; complying with Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements UL List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials and NFPA 80 requirements. 4. Lock Throws: Provide minimum of 3/4 inch latch bolt throw complying with UL List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Materials and NFPA 80 requirements. 5. Provide concealed vertical rod type exit device and mortise type exit devices as specified. 6. Provide the following features and materials: a. Latch Bolt: Two-piece; mechanical; anti-friction, stainless steel. b. Dead Bolt: One-piece, stainless steel with two enclosed hardened-steel roller armor pins. c. Case: Wrought steel, zinc dichromatized. d. Cylinders: High-security; brass; pick- and drill-resistant; ANSI/BHMA A156.5 - E09211A. e. Armor Front: 8-inches by 1-1/4-inches wide, minimum; steel. f. Escutcheon: 8-inches by 2-1/2-inches wide by 3/16-inches thick, minimum; stainless steel, US 32D. g. Hubs: Sintered steel, copper infiltrated. h. Crossbar: Oval, seamless with interlocking expansion collets and roll pins; knurled, satin stainless steel, 0.062 inches minimum thickness, with steel reinforcing tube. i. Concealed bolts: Minimum 1/2 inch diameter, stainless steel. 7. Backset: Provide minimum backset of 2-3/4-inches. 8. Finish: US 32D satin. 9. ANSI/BHMA: A156.3, Type 3 and Type 8, Grade 1; F08, entrance by lever, key locks or unlocks lever for entrances shown as accessible to people with disabilities as required by ADAAG; and F05, entrance by thumb piece, key locks or unlocks thumb piece. 10. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 1530-L8 (F) and -T8 (F) Series Mortise Exit Devices and 1520(F) CVR Concealed Vertical Rod Exit Devices; with Escutcheon Trim and Augusta - ASL Lever Handles and Thumbpiece/Handle/Cylinder Unit by Yale Security, Incorporated, Division of Yale Security Group. b. Or equal. 11. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following for non-rated narrow style pairs of doors requiring electric latch retraction exit device. a. 7220 Series concealed vertical rod exit devices and with escutcheon trim and 480F series pull trim by Yale security, incorporated, division of Yale security group. b. Or Equal. 12. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following for non-rated pairs of doors: Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. 7100 Series concealed vertical rod exit devices and with escutcheon trim and augusta - asl lever handles and thumbpiece/handle/cylinder unit by Yale security, incorporated, division of Yale security group. b. Or Equal. E. Electric Strike 1. Provide tamper resistant low profile 1-3/8 inch depth, heavy-duty stainless steel electric strike where shown in hardware schedule. 2. Provide the following features and materials: a. Static Strength: 1,500 lbs. b. Dynamic strength: 70 ft-lbs. c. Field selectable fail safe / fail secure. d. Dual Voltage 12 or 24 VAC/VDC. e. Internally mounted solenoid. f. Plug-in conector. 3. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 9600 Series non-rated Electric Strike by HES, b. Or equal. F. Cylinders and Keying System: 1. Standard System: Except as otherwise specified, provide new master key system for the Project. 2. Multiple Building System: Except as otherwise specified, provide new grandmaster key system for Project. 3. Existing System: Grandmaster key or great-grandmaster keys the locks to OWNER'S existing system, with a new master key for the Project. 4. Review the keying system with OWNER’S and provide the type required (master, grandmaster or great grandmaster), either new or integrated with OWNER'S existing system. 5. Furnish all locks with manufacturer's cylinders for interchangeable-core pin tumbler inserts. Furnish only temporary inserts for the construction period, and remove these before Substantial Completion. Construction control keys and cores shall not be part of OWNER’S permanent keying system. Permanent cores and keys shall be furnished to OWNER prior to Substantial Completion. 6. Comply with the OWNER'S instructions for master keying and, except as otherwise specified, provide individual change key for each lock which is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. 7. Permanent keys and cores shall be stamped with the applicable key mark for identification. These visual key control marks or codes shall not include the actual key cuts. Permanent keys shall also be stamped “DO NOT DUPLICATE”. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 8. Cylinder Material: Brass, bronze or Series 300 stainless steels. 9. Cylinder Features: Seven-pin, high-security, removable core. 10. Key Material: Nickel silver. 11. Key Quantity: Furnish three keys for each lock and five keys for each master and grandmaster system. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. 12. Provide a key control system including envelopes, labels, tags with self locking key clips, receipt forms, three way visible card index, temporary markers, permanent markers and standard metal cabinet, all as recommended by system manufacturer, with capacity for 150 percent of the number of locks required for the Project. Provide a hinged panel type cabinet, for wall mounting. G. Overhead, Surface-Mounted, Door Closers: 1. Provide all doors, unless specially shown or speci¬fied as being provided with floor- mounted or concealed overhead closers, with surface-mounted overhead door closers. Provide both active and inactive door leafs with closers. 2. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specified, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit, depending upon size of door, exposure to weather, and antici¬pated frequency of use. 3. Where parallel arms are specified, and for closers on exterior doors, provide closer unit one size larger than recommended for use with standard arms. 4. Use parallel arm arrangement for doors that would otherwise have the door closer appear¬ing in finished corridors or entries. 5. Comply with UL, Building Materials Directory, and List of Inspected Fire Protection Equip-ment and Materials, and NFPA 80. Modify closers specified as required. 6. Provide hold open feature for all non fire-resistant-rated doors, unless otherwise specified. 7. Provide corner bracket mounting on exterior doors. Select all arms to clear weather- stripping, and overhead door holders. 8. Provide long arm to allow door to swing 180 degrees where long arm will eliminate floor-mounted stops. 9. Provide closers with spring power adjustment feature capable of increasing spring power 15 percent minimum in all closer sizes. 10. Provide individual regulating valves for closing and latching speeds, and separate adjustable back check valve. 11. Provide delayed closing action feature on all door closers. Position valve at top of closure. 12. Provide the following materials and features: a. Full Metal Cover: Aluminum. b. Case: Cast-iron. c. Arms: Plated to match full metal covers. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements d. Other Parts: Steel. e. Extreme temperature fluid. f. Security torx machine screws. g. Ten-year warranty. h. Provide manufacturer's optional corrosion protection. 13. Finishes: US 26D satin chrome. Color coordinate all arms and other accessories. 14. Highly Corrosive Atmospheres: Provide all closers with specified manu-facturer's optional corrosion protection. 15. ANSI/BHMA: A156.4, C02011, in compliance with PT 1 and PT 4. 16. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. DC2000DA M71, M73, M74, M75, M87 by Corbin Russ¬win, Incorporated, Division of Yale Security Group. b. Or equal. H. Extra Heavy-Duty Overhead Holders and Stops: 1. Provide surface-mounted, extra heavy-duty overhead holders and stops with hold-open feature for doors included in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3. 2. Materials: Provide the following materials: a. Arm: Type 316 stainless steel, 3/4-inch diameter rod minimum. b. All Other Parts: Extruded brass. 3. Coordinate placement of extra heavy-duty overhead holder and stop with weather- stripping for non-inter¬ference. Provide angle jamb brackets as required to mount to surfaces encountered in the Work. Coordinate and provide additional drop-brackets for non-interference with overhead closer mounting. 4. Design and reinforce connections of extra heavy-duty holder and stops where they are fastened to other materials, to resist a superimposed load of 30 pounds per square foot acting on the plane of the doors. Mount to door using a minimum of four countersunk mounting holes with four 5/16-inch diameter stainless steel pan head machine screws. 5. Provide all manufacturer recommended door reinforcements and coordinate the furnishing of hardware templates required for the installation of the units. 6. Finish: US 26D satin chrome, except rod shall be US 32D satin. 7. ANSI/BHMA: A156.8, C58511. 8. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. GJ79H Extra Heavy-Duty Surface-Mounted Overhead Door Holders with J Mounting (as required) by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand. b. Or equal. I. Flush Bolts and Automatic Flush Bolts: 1. Provide flush bolts on the inactive leaf of all pairs of doors, unless otherwise specified. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Provide flush bolts at the top and bottom of door. 3. Provide downset of 12 inches for all automatic flush bolts, and manufacturers' automatic flush bolt strikes, for the locations specified in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3. 4. Comply with UL, Hardware, Automatic or Surface Bolts, and NFPA 80, for automatic flush bolt requirements. 5. Provide the following features and materials: a. Automatic Flush Bolts: All parts bronze. b. Flush Bolt Levers: Forged Brass. c. Flush Bolt Plate: Forge Brass. d. Flush Bolt Guide and Strike: Wrought Brass. e. Flush Bolt Rods: 1/2 inch round rods, bronze, 12 inches minimum length. f. Bolt Head: Brass. 6. Provide extension flush bolts with 3/4-inch throws and with top bolt not over 6 foot-0 inches above finished floor. Provide bottom flush bolt 12-inches long. 7. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16: L14081, L14251 and L14091. 8. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. GJ FB6 Extension Flush Bolts by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand. b. Or equal. 9. Where required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, provide cast bronze automatic flush bolts bearing the UL label. 10. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. GJ FB30 Automatic Flush Bolts by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation. b. Or equal. J. Coordinators: 1. Provide coordinator device on all pairs of doors required or specified to have automatic flush bolts, or panic exit devices. Comply with UL, List of Inspected Fire Protection Equipment and Material, and NFPA 80 requirements. 2. Provide manufacturer's standard units equipped with a safety release mechanism which allows the active leaf to close if under extreme pressure and whose active door lever, located nearest the active door stop, holds the active door ajar until the trigger mechanism is released to the retracted position by the closing of the inactive leaf. 3. Materials: Anodized aluminum. 4. Finish: US 27 satin. 5. ANSI/BHMA: A156.3, BHMA 5.1, Type 21A. 6. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. COR 1, 2 and 3 Series with FB Series by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Inger¬soll- Rand. b. Or equal. K. Astragals: 1. Provide metal astragal bar, not less than 1/8-inch by 2-inches, for exposed flathead screw mounting on active leaf of all pairs of doors. Comply with UL and NFPA requirements for types and locations of astragals. 2. Provide astragal of cold-rolled steel with prime painted finish. 3. Provide astragal of extruded aluminum with clear anodized finish. 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. No. 357 Series by Pemko Manufacturing Company. b. Or equal. L. Dust Proof Strikes: 1. Provide brass dust proof strikes, which incorporate a slotted plunger raised to flush position by spring tension for all flush bolts. 2. Provide 5/8 inch inside diameter dust proof strikes; threshold mounted and surface mounted. 3. Finish: US 26D satin chrome. 4. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16, L14011-L14012. 5. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. DP-1 and DP 2 by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand. b. Or equal. M. Door Pulls, Push and Protection Armor: 1. Door Pulls: Provide heavy-duty surface-mounted door pulls with pull plates where specified in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3. a. Door pulls shall be stainless steel US 32D and have 1-inch diameter 12-inch long handles which project 2-1/2-inches from pull plate surface. b. Pull plates shall be 8-inches by 16-inches, stain¬less steel US 32D; 0.050-inches thick. c. Provide all non-removable fasteners. d. Pulls shall be fastened to plates at factory. e. ANSI/BHMA: A156.6, J405; B3E. f. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). 40 Series Pull Plates and Handles by Hager Hinger Company. 2). Or equal. 2. Push Plates: Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Provide 0.125-inch thick stainless steel plate with No. 4 finish. b. Size: 8-inches by 16-inches with beveled edges. c. ANSI/BHMA: A156.6, J304; B3E. d. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). 80S Beveled by Hager Hinger Company. 2). Or equal. 3. Protection Armor: a. Provide one armor plate per leaf of each door scheduled to receive armor-plate protection. b. Provide 16-gauge stainless steel with No. 4 finish 2 foot-0 inches high by 12-inches less in width than width of door. c. ANSI/BHMA: A156.6, J101; B3E. d. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). 193S Beveled Stainless Steel Armor Plate by Hager Hinge Company. 2). Or equal. N. Stripping and Seals: 1. Provide perimeter weather stripping at all exterior doors. Provide stripping and seals for interior doors where scheduled in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3. 2. Continuity of Stripping: Except as otherwise specified, stripping at each opening shall be continuous and without unnecessary interruptions at door corners and hardware. 3. Replaceable Seal Strips: Resilient or flexible seal strip of every unit shall be easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by the manufacturer. 4. Provide bumper-type weather-stripping at jambs and head, including a resilient insert and metal retainer strip, surface a¬pplied, of the following metal, finish and resilient bumper material: a. Housing: Extruded aluminum with dark bronze anodized finish; 0.062 inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. b. Dimensions: 1-3/8-inches by 7/8-inches, stop-mounted. c. Seals: Closed-cell extruded silicone. d. ANSI/BHMA: A156.22, R3E264. e. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). No. 350DSPK and 2891 DPK (for parallel arms) by Pemko Manufacturing Company. 2). Or equal. 5. Provide heavy-duty automatic drop seal sound stripping door bot¬tom unit of manufacturer's standard design, with operating seal bar of the following material, retained in an extruded metal bar and capable of operating to close a 3/4 inch gap (from Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 16 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements door bottom to floor or threshold). House mechanism and operating bar in the following metal housing, for mounting in doors as follows: a. Housing: Extruded aluminum, 0.062 inch thick, with mill aluminum finish. b. Seal: Closed cell extruded silicone. c. Mounting: Full-mortise. d. ANSI/BHMA: A156.22, R3E344. e. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). No. 434APKL by Pemko Manufacturing Company. 2). Or equal. O. Thresholds: 1. All exterior and interior doors shall be provided with thresholds. 2. Metal: Mill finish extruded bronze. 3. Surface Pattern: Fluted tread, manufacturer's standard. 4. Provide countersunk stainless steel screws and expansion shields. 5. Width: Five inches wide and of length sufficient to span full width of rough openings, coped and scribed neatly at and around door frames. 6. Construction: a. Single piece, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Profile: Provide manufacturer's unit, which conforms to the minimum size and profile requirements specified. a. Floor Drop: Except where no change in floor elevation is shown from one side of threshold to the other, provide profile that accommodates 1/2-inch drop in floor elevation, unless another dimension is shown. b. For doors equipped with panic hardware, including floor bolts, provide profile with stop bar of proper size and shape to function as the strike plate for the floor bolts. 8. Thickness: 1/2-inch, minimum. 9. ANSI/BHMA: A156.21, J12100. 10. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. 171B by Pemko Manufacturing Company. b. Or equal. P. Silencers: 1. Provide silencers for all door frames. 2. Provide pneumatic design that, once installed, forms an air pocket to reduce noise. 3. Provide minimum of three per strike side of door jambs. 4. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16, BHMA 6.5, L03011. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 17 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 5. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. GJ 64 by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand. b. Or equal. 6. Wall and Floor Stops: Provide the following where scheduled in List of Door Hardware Items at end of Part 3: 7. Dome-Type Floor Stops: a. Cast bronze extra heavy-duty wall mounted door stop, one per leaf. b. Coordinate height of dome-type floor mounted doors stops with threshold condition and undercut of door. c. Finish: US 26D satin chrome. d. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16, L12161. e. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). FB13/14R, FB17 by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation. 2). Or equal. 8. Wall Stops: a. Cast bronze extra heavy-duty wall mounted door stop, one per leaf. b. Convex rubber bumper. c. ANSI/BHMA: A156.16, L12101. d. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). GJ 50C by Glynn-Johnson Part of Worldwide Ingersoll-Rand Corporation. 2). Or equal. Q. Sealants: Provide elastomeric sealant complying with FS TT S 00227, Type 2 (non sag) Class A for use with thresholds. 2.03 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Provide matching finishes for door hardware units at each door or opening, to the greatest extent possible in compliance with ANSI/BHMA A156.18. B. Reduce differences in color and textures as much as commercially possible where the base metal or metal forming process is different for individual units of door hardware exposed at the same door or opening. In general, match all items to the manufacturer's standard finish for the latch and lock set for color and texture. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrate to receive door hardware, and the conditions under which the Work will be performed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 18 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements conditions. Do not proceed with the door hardware Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Templates: Furnish door hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other Work to be factory prepared for the installation of door hardware. Check the Shop Drawings of such other Work, to confirm that adequate provisions are made for the proper installation of the door hardware. B. Prepare Work to receive door hardware Work in compliance with ANSI/DHI A115.1. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installer shall check and approve the installation before operation. Installer shall assure that the system operates to the OWNER'S satisfaction. B. Mount door hardware units at heights recommended in, Door and Hardware Institute, “Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames” and “Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames", except as otherwise specified or required to comply with governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, HMMA 830 and ADAAG requirements. C. Install each door hardware item in compliance with the manu¬facturer's instructions and recommendations and approved Shop Drawings. Wherever cutting and fitting is required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, install each item completely, then remove, and store in a secure place during the finishapplication. After completion of the finishes, re install each item. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. D. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installa¬tion and operation. E. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. F. Cut and fit threshold and floor covers to profile of door frames, with mitered corners and hair line joints. Join units with concealed welds or concealed mechanical joints. Cut smooth openings for spindles, bolts and similar items, if any. G. Screw thresholds to substrate with No. 10 or larger screws, of the proper type for permanent anchorage and of bronze or stainless steel that will not corrode in contact with the threshold metal. H. Set thresholds in a bead of elastomeric sealant to completely fill concealed voids and exclude moisture from every source. Do not plug drainage holes or block weeps. Remove excess sealant before sealant cures to a firm set. I. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Lubricate moving parts with the type lubrication recommended by manufacturer (graphite type if no other recommended). Replace units that cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate freely and smoothly as intended for the application. Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 19 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements J. Final Adjustment: Where door hardware installation is made more than one month prior to Substantial Completion, return to the Work during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of all door hardware items in each space and area. Clean and re-lubricate operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of door hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operating of heating and ventilating equipment. K. Provide manufacturer’s authorized representative to instruct and train OWNER'S personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware during the final adjustment of door hardware. L. Door hardware, which is blemished or defective, will be rejected even though it was set in place before defects were discovered. Remove and replace with new door hardware. Repair all resultant damage to other Work. M. Continued Maintenance Service: Approximately six months after the acceptance of door hardware in each area, the installer, accompa¬nied by the representative of the latch and lock manufacturer, shall return to the Project and re adjust every item of hardware to restore proper function of doors and door hardware. Consult with and instruct OWNER'S personnel in recommended additions to the maintenance procedures. Clean and lubricate operational items wherever required. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials or installa¬tion of door hardware units. Prepare a written report of current and predictable problems (of substantial nature) in the performance or the door hardware. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide a written field report, prepared by installer’s architectural hardware consultant, identifying actual condition, location, manufacturer, and product designation for each item of door hardware actually present on each door at the Site, including whether door hardware is adjusted and operating properly, compared with each item referenced to approved Shop Drawings and Contract requirements. B. Installer’s hardware consultant shall provide opinions to, and assist ENGINEER in determining, acceptability of installation as Work proceeds. All comments and discussions, conversations and meetings with ENGINEER shall be included in written field report for submission to ENGINEER for review and approval at completion of door hardware installation. C. As part of written field report to be submitted to ENGINEER for approval, recommend remedial actions for Work not in compliance with these Specifications. No payment for Work shall be made until remedial recommendations and actions have been approved by ENGINEER and incorporated into the Work. 3.05 LIST OF DOOR HARDWARE ITEMS A. Scheduled items for each door are generic and rely on information specified above. The listing of hardware functions and types provided are only a general guideline for the final Door Hardware Schedule. CONTRAC¬TOR shall submit a Door Hardware Schedule acceptable to all governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. B. Provide the following door hardware items: Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 20 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Set 1: Doors: A105-1 Refer to Section 08 71 13 for automatic door operator Qty Description 6 Hinges 2 Closer 2 Panic Exit Device – Concealed Vertical Rod 2 Electric Latch Retraction Exit Device 1 Power Supply 6 Silencers 1 Threshold 1 Weatherstripping 2 Stops 1 Automatic Door operator 2. Set 2: Doors: A105-2 Refer to Section 08 71 13 for automatic door operator Qty Description 6 Hinges 2 Closer 2 Panic Exit Device – Concealed Vertical Rod 2 Electric Latch Retraction Exit Device 1 Power Supply 6 Silencers 2 Stops 1 Automatic Door operator 3. Set 3: Doors: A101-1, A119-1, RW101-1, LL101-1, LL101-2, LL102-1, RR101-1, RR101-2 Qty Description 3 Hinges 1 Closer 1 Panic Exit Device 3 Silencers 1 Stops 1 Protection Armor 1 Threshold 1 Weatherstripping 4. Set 4: Doors: A101-2, A101-3, A103-1, A103-2, A106-1, A110-1, A118-1, 119-1 Qty Description 3 Hinges 1 Closer 1 Lockset – Passage 3 Silencers 1 Stops 1 Concealed overhead holder 5. Set 5: Doors: A108-1, A109-1, A111-1, A112-1, A113-1 Qty Description Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 21 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3 Hinges 1 Lockset – Office 3 Silencers 1 Stops 6. Set 6: Doors: 107-1, A115-1 Qty Description 3 Hinges 1 Closer 1 Lockset – Storage 3 Silencers 1 Stops 7. Set 7: Doors: A116 Qty Description 6 Hinges 1 Closer – Active Door 1 Flush Bolt top and bottom (inactive door) 1 Lockset – Storage 3 Silencers 1 Stops 8. Set 8: Doors: A117-1, A118-1 Qty Description 3 Hinges 1 Door Pull 1 Push Plate 1 Protection Plate 3 Silencers 1 Stops 9. Set 9: Doors: E101-1, E101-1 Qty Description 3 Hinges 1 Closer 1 Electric Strike 1 Panic Exit Device – Rim 3 Silencers 1 Stops 1 Protection Armor 1 Threshold 1 Weatherstripping 10. Set 10: Doors: O101-1 Qty Description 6 Hinges 2 Closer 2 Panic Exit Device – Concealed Vertical Rod Door Hardware 08 71 00 - 22 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2 Electric Latch Retraction Exit Device 1 Power Supply 6 Silencers 1 Threshold 1 Weatherstripping 2 Stops 11. Set 11: Doors: O101-2 Qty Description 6 Hinges 2 Closer 2 Panic Exit Device – Concealed Vertical Rod 6 Silencers 2 Stops END OF SECTION Automatic Door Operators 08 71 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 71 13 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install automatic door operators. Furnish automatic door operators for all doors in compliance with these Specifications herein. 2. Extent of automatic door operators is specified and as shown on drawings. B. Coordination:Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the automatic door operators. 1. Coordinate the Work of other Sections to provide clearances and accurate positioning of recessed or embedded items. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 71 00, Door Hardware 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI). a. ANSI A117.1, Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (Public Law 101-336), Appendix A to Title 28 Code of Federal Regulations Part 36 (Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities - ADAAG). 3. Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI). a. DHI, Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. b. DHI, Recommended Locations for Builders’ Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. c. DHI, Sequencing and Format for the Hardware Schedule. 4. Steel Door Institute, (SDI). a. SDI 109, Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL). a. UL 305, Panic Hardware. b. UL, Building Materials Directory. 6. American Association of Automatic Door Manufactures (AAADM). 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Automatic Door Operators 08 71 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Provide automatic door operators and accessories manufactured by firms specializing in the production of this type of Work and complying with specified standards of ANSI, BHMA, DHI, NFPA, HMMA, SDI and UL. 2. Provide automatic door operators from manufacturers who are members of BHMA and participate in BHMA certification programs. B. Installer’s Qualifications: 1. The automatic door operator installer shall have in his employ an architectural hardware consultant. The architectural hardware consultant shall be a member of the Door and Hardware Institute, (DHI), who has passed the DHI certification examine and successfully completed an apprenticeship program. The architectural hardware consultant shall be responsible for preparing automatic door operators schedules and Shop Drawings and be present at the Site for the purpose of checking and supervising the Work of the installer during the time of installation and adjustment of the automatic door operators Work, and shall prepare a written field report on status of completed automatic door operators installation as specified. 2. Submit name and qualifications of the installer to ENGINEER. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1. Provide only automatic door operators that has been tested, listed and labeled by UL for the types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. D. Codes: Comply with the applicable requirements of governing authorities and the state and local building codes. E. Source Quality Control: 1. Obtain each type of automatic door operator item from only one manufacturer. 2. Provide automatic door operators schedule, for submission to, and for approval by, ENGINEER, prepared in compliance with DHI standards. 3. Comply with specified BHMA standards. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit the following: 1. Copies of manufacturer's data for each item of automatic door operators. Include whatever information may be required to show compliance with specified requirements, and include instructions for installation and for maintenance of operating parts and exposed finishes. Include mounting heights and locations for each item of automatic door operators. Provide ENGINEER with latest complete technical catalogue of all available automatic door operators manufactured by proposed manufacturers, even if manufacturer specified by ENGINEER is submitted by CONTRACTOR to perform the Work. Furnish templates to fabricators of other Work, which is to receive automatic door operators. 2. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the Work, furnish five copies of detailed maintenance manuals, including the following information: Automatic Door Operators 08 71 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Product name and manufacturer. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor. c. Detailed procedure for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. e. Parts identification manual and maintenance manuals for automatic door operators. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast- in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver all items of automatic door operators in manufacturer’s original, undamaged packages, bearing accurate representation of the item within each package. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Provide secure storage area for automatic door operators items, secured by locks and accessible only to automatic door operators installer, ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR. 3. Store automatic door operators in manufacturers' original packages. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Items that arrive in a damaged condition shall be removed from the Site and not offered again for acceptance. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Besam Automated Entrance Systems, Inc. 2. DORMA Architectural Hardware. 3. Dor-O-Matic, Inc.; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 4. LCN Closers; an Ingersoll-Rand Company. 5. Nabco Entrances Inc. 6. Stanley Access Technologies; Div. of The Stanley Works. Automatic Door Operators 08 71 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 7. Or equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, complying with standards indicated below: 1. Sheet: ASTM B 209 2. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T-6. B. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10. 2.03 AUTOMATIC DOOR OPERATORS, GENERAL A. General: Provide operators of size recommended by manufacturer for door size, weight, and movement; for condition of exposure; and for long-term, maintenance- free operation under normal traffic load for type of occupancy indicated. 1. Provide door operators that comply with NFPA 80 requirements for doors as emergency exits. B. Electrohydraulic Operating System: Low-pressure unit with separate cylinders for power and checking; with spring action for closing under manual operation. Provide self-contained units with connections for power and control wiring. C. Hinge Operation: Refer to Section 08710, Finish Hardware. D. Housing: Fabricated from 0.125-inch- thick extruded or formed aluminum. E. Exposed Cover: Fabricated from 0.125-inch- thick extruded aluminum with enclosed end caps, provision for maintenance access, and fasteners concealed when door is in closed position. 1. Finish: Color anodized 2. Color: As selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of colors. 3. Latch mechanism shall allow door to swing free during automatic operation; when fire is detected, latch actuator shall cause exit hardware to latch when door closes. Provide latch actuators with fail-safe design. 4. Equip system to discontinue power to automatic door operator when door is in emergency breakout position, and to return to closed position after breakout and automatically reset. 2.04 LOW-ENERGY, POWER-OPEN DOOR OPERATORS A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.19. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Not more than 15 lbf 1 inch from latch edge of door to prevent stopped door from opening or closing. 2. If power fails, not more than 30 lbf 1 inch from latch edge of door to manually set door in motion. C. Operation: Power opening and spring closing. When not in automatic mode, door operator shall function as manual door closer, with or without electrical power. 1. Control speed of cycle by motor as dynamic brake. Automatic Door Operators 08 71 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Power-Assisted Opening: Power-assisted opening that reduces force to open self-closing door. Pushing or pulling on door activates automatic door operator. D. Operating System: Electrohydraulic. E. Microprocessor Control Unit: Solid-state controls. F. Features: 1. Adjustable opening and closing speed. 2. Adjustable opening and closing force. 3. Adjustable backcheck. 4. Adjustable latch speed. 5. Adjustable hold-open time of not less than 0 to 30 seconds. 6. Adjustable time delay. 7. Adjustable acceleration. 8. Obstruction recycle. 9. Mounting: Surface. 2.05 ACTIVATION AND SAFETY DEVICES A. Post Mounted Push-Plate Switch: Manufacturer's standard semiflush, post- mounted, door control switch; consisting of square, flat push plate; of material indicated; and actuator mounted in recessed junction box with post. Provide engraved message as indicated. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Message: "International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open." B. Post Mounted Vestibule Double Push-Plate Switch: Manufacturer's standard semiflush, double post-mounted, door control switch; consisting of two square, flat push plate with directional arrows; of material indicated; and actuator mounted in recessed junction box with post. Provide engraved message as indicated. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Message: "International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open." C. Wall Mounted Push-Plate Switch: Manufacturer's standard semiflush, door control switch; consisting of square, flat push plate; of material indicated; and actuator mounted in junction box. Provide engraved message as indicated. 1. Material: Stainless steel. 2. Message: International symbol of accessibility and "Push to Open.". 3. Mounting: 42 inches above finished floor. D. Electrical Interlocks: Unless units are equipped with self-protecting devices or circuits, provide electrical interlocks to prevent activation of operator when door is locked, latched, or bolted. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Low-Energy Automatic Door Operator Signage: Comply with BHMA A156.19. 2.07 FINISHES, GENERAL Automatic Door Operators 08 71 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, door and frame supports, and other conditions affecting performance of automatic door operators. 1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical systems to verify actual locations of power connections before automatic door operator installation. C. Examine roughing-in for compressed-air piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before automatic door operator installation. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install complete automatic door operator system, including activation and safety devices, control wiring, and remote power units. B. Low-Energy Power Door Operator Installation Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.19 for installation. C. Automatic Door Operators: Install door operator system, including control wiring, as follows: 1. Refer to Division 16 Sections for connection to electrical power distribution system. D. Activation and Safety Devices: nstall devices and wiring, including connections to automatic door operators, according to BHMA A156.10 and as follows: 1. Wall Switches: Provide push plates on both sides of each opening indicated to receive automatic door operators. E. Connect wiring according to Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Automatic Door Operators 08 71 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Testing and Inspecting: After installation has been completed, testing and inspecting of each automatic door operator shall be performed to verify compliance with applicable BHMA standards. 1. Inspection Report: Submit report in writing to Architect and Contractor within 24 hours after inspection. C. Remove and replace automatic door operators where test results indicate they do not comply with specified requirements. D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, shall be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices to operate smoothly, easily, and properly, and for safe operation and weathertight closure. 1. Adjust doors with low-energy door operators to close according to BHMA A156.19. B. Lubricate operators, hardware, and other moving parts. C. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished automatic door operators, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes. D. Readjust automatic door operators and activation and safety devices after repeated operation of completed installation equivalent to three days' use by normal traffic (100 to 300 cycles). Lubricate hardware, operating equipment, and other moving parts. E. Occupancy Adjustment: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose, without additional cost. END OF SECTION Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 81 00 GLASS GLAZING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install glass glazing. 2. Extent of glass glazing is shown. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the glass glazing Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 2. Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 3. Section 08 11 16, Aluminum Doors and Frames. 4. Section 08 14 00, Wood Doors. 5. Section 08 16 13, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames. 6. Section 08 51 13, Aluminum Windows. 7. Section 08 41 13, Aluminum Storefronts. 8. Section 10 28 05, Toilet and Bath Accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association, (AAMA). a. AAMA 800, Voluntary Specifications and Test Methods for Sealants. 2. American National Standards Institute, (ANSI). a. ANSI Z97.1, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings. b. ANSI/ASTM E 774, Specification for Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. c. ANSI/ASTM E 1300, Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings. 3. American Society of Civil Engineers, (ASCE). a. ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures. 4. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM C 509, Specification for Elastomeric Cellular Performance Gasket and Sealing Material. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. ASTM C 719, Test Method for Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants under Cyclic Movement (Hockman Cycle). c. ASTM C 793, Test Method for Effects of Laboratory Accelerated Weathering on Elastomeric Joint Sealants. d. ASTM C 794, Test Method for Adhesion-in-Peel of Elastomeric Joint Sealants. e. ASTM C 864, Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting Blocks, and Spacers. f. ASTM C 920, Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. g. ASTM C 1021, Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants. h. ASTM C 1036, Specification for Flat Glass. i. ASTM C 1048, Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kinds HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. j. ASTM C 1087, Determining Compatibility of Liquid-Applied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural Glazing Systems. k. ASTM C 1115, Specification for Dense Elastomeric Silicone Rubber Gaskets and Accessories. l. ASTM C 1172, Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass. m. ASTM C 1249, Guide for Secondary Seal for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Structural Sealant Glazed Applications. n. ASTM C 1281, Specification for Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications. o. ASTM C 1330, Specification for Cylindrical Sealant Backing for Use with Cold Liquid- Applied Sealants. p. ASTM D 412, Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension. q. ASTM D 624, Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers. r. ASTM D 2240, Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness. s. ASTM E 548, Guide for General Criteria Use for Evaluating Laboratory Competence. 5. Code of Federal Regulations, (CRF). a. 16 CFR, Consumer Product Safety Commission, CPSC Part 1201, Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. 6. Glass Association of North America, (GANA). a. GANA, Glazing Manual. b. GANA, Laminated Glass Design Guide. c. GANA, Glass Tempering Division, GTA 95-1-31, Specification for Decorative Architectural Flat Glass. 7. Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory National Technical Information Service, (LBL). Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. LBL-35298 Window 4.1, “A PC Program for Analyzing the Thermal Performance of Fenestration Products.” 8. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA). a. NFPA 80, Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. b. NFPA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. c. NFPA 257, Standard on Fire Tests for Window and Glass Block Assemblies. 9. National Fenestration Rating Council, (NFRC). a. NFRC 100, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-Factors. b. NFRC 200, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence. c. NFRC 300, Procedures for Determining Solar Optical Properties of Simple Fenestration Products. 10. National Glass Association, (NGA). a. NGA, Glazier Certification Program. 11. Primary Glass Manufacturers Council, (PGMC). a. PGMC Specifiers' Guide to Architectural Glass. 12. Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association, (SIGMA). a. SIGMA TM-3000-90, Vertical Glazing Guidelines and TB-3001-90, Sloped Glazing Guidelines. 13. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL). a. UL Building Materials Directory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Primary Glass Manufacturer and Glazing Materials Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Provide glass glazing materials manufactured by firms specializing in the production of the types of glass glazing products specified, in compliance with specified standards. 2. Provide glass from manufacturers who are members of GANA and PGMC and participate in certification programs. 3. Obtain glass glazing materials from manufacturers who will send a qualified technical representative to the Site, for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the materials and who will assist ENGINEER with opinions on the acceptability of materials and Work. B. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. Provide laminated and insulating glass fabrications from fabricators who are licensed by primary glass manufacturer to produce specified units and with documented skill and successful experience in this type of Work and who agree to employ only tradesmen who are trained, skilled and have successful experience in this type of Work. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Provide laminated and insulating glass fabrications from fabricators who are members of GANA or SIGMA and participate in certification programs. 3. Obtain laminated and insulating glass fabrications from fabricators who will, if required, send a qualified technical representative to the Site, for the purpose of assisting ENGINEER with opinions on the acceptability of materials and installation methods. C. Installer's Qualifications: 1. The installer of the glass glazing materials shall be a firm with documented skill and successful experience in the installation of the types of materials required and who agrees to employee only tradesmen who are trained, skilled and have successful experience in the types of materials and glazing systems specified and who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 3 (Master Glaziers). 2. Submit records of experience and certifications to ENGINEER. D. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing specified, as documented according to ASTM E 548. E. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct testing specified, as documented according to ASTM E 548. F. Source Limitation: All materials provided under this Section shall be obtained from a single supplier or manufacturer who, with CONTRACTOR, shall assume full responsibility for the completeness of the Work. The supplier or manufacturer shall be the source of information on all material furnished regardless of the manufacturing source of that material. G. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Wherever a fire resistance-rating classification is shown or scheduled for doors or windows, (1 hour, 2 hour, 3 hour), provide glass complying with the requirements specified and established by UL, NFPA and other governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 2. Safety Glass: Comply with ANSI Z97.1, with label on each piece of glass as required by governing authorities having jurisdiction. H. Codes: Comply with applicable requirements of codes referenced in Section 01 42 00, References. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Plans and elevations showing location of each type and kind of glass specified and details of glazing system. Include manufacturer's recommenda¬tions for glazing. b. Dimensions and details of manufacturer's glue line thickness and bite dimensions and verifications. 2. Product Data: Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Copies of manufacturers' specifications, "Spec-Data" sheets, instal¬lation instructions for each type of glass, glazing sealant or compound, gasket and associated miscellaneous material and all recommended installation precautions for required materials and com¬ponents, which are not included in other submittals, specified in other Sections. Coordinate the submittal of such other data with this submittal, and with the submittal of samples required by other Sections. b. Structural performance calculations indicating that detailing and fabrication have been based on the results of the required analysis and performance criteria specified. 3. Delegated design Submittals: a. Structural silicone sealant performance features and calculations indicating sealant joints have been detailed and fabricated in compliance with silicone sealant manufacturer’s recommended guidelines for dissimilar metal adhesion. Structural and other performance calculations for the structural silicone joints shall be prepared, signed and stamped with the seal of a Registered Professional Engineer, licensed to practice in the State of (--1--), and recognized as an expert in the required Work. 4. Samples: a. 12 inch square samples of each type of glass required. b. Insulating glass samples need not be hermetically sealed, but edge construction, wavelength-selective interlayer and low-E coatings shall be included and identified. Include specially prepared samples with each interlayer film product's identity marked on film and incorporated into sample. c. Submit 12-inch long samples of each color for each type of exposed-to-view glazing sealant and gasket. Install sample between two strips of material similar to, or representative of, channel surfaces where sealant or gasket will be used, held apart to represent typical joint widths. d. Review of samples by ENGINEER will be for color, texture and pattern only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. low-E glass fabricator shall provide a letter of compliance verifying performance characteristics of each glass unit. b. Certification that all glass materials subject to the applicable standards of the CPSC are in compliance. The certification shall be issued in conformance with procedures stated in the standard. c. Include primary glass manufacturer's and fabricator’s published data, and letters of certification, based on certified test laboratory reports, indicating that each material complies with specified requirements and is acceptable for the applications shown. d. Certification that fabricated products comply with manufacturer's published performance. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements e. Age of silicone sealant. 2. Test Reports: a. Certified laboratory test reports for required performance tests in compliance with ASTM E 548. b. Provide wavelength-selective insulating glass or low-E glass manufacturer's computer-aided sheet engineering analysis to determine deflection and rabbet depth for individual applica-tions, specified loadings, performance requirements, support criteria and other parameters, in order to indicate compliance with these Specifications. c. Wavelength-selective polyester film insulating glass or low-E glass fabricator’s computer performance analysis of each glass configuration including (--1--)-filled interlayers for insulating glass units. d. Adhesion and compatibility test report from glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing material. e. Performance analysis of each configuration of insulating glass incorporating wavelength selective interlayer or low E coating using LBL-35-298, Window 4.1. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Fabricator. b. Installer. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Warranty Documentation: a. Manufacturer’s and fabricator’s guarantees, as specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identifica¬tion. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Protect glass glazing materials according to manufacturer’s and fabricator’s written instructions to prevent damage to glass glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 3. For insulating glass that will be exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass fabricator’s written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. General: The special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive OWNER of other rights or remedies OWNER may otherwise have under the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: 1. Laminated Glass: Provide written warranty, signed by the fabricator and CONTRACTOR and running to benefit of OWNER, agreeing to replace, for a period of five-years from the date of Substantial Completion, glass units that show deterioration, as specified. 2. Insulating Glass: Provide written warranty, signed by the fabricator and CONTRACTOR and running to the benefit of OWNER, agreeing to replace, for a period of ten-years from the date of Substantial Completion, glass that shows signs of deterioration, as specified. 3. Structural Silicone: Provide structural silicone manufacturer’s twenty-year limited adhesion warranty and non-staining warranty for silicone structural adhesive, commencing from the date of Substantial Completion. Perform all testing required to achieve the warranties. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Design Criteria: For glass performance, manufacture, size, type, construction and thickness, comply with the following: 1. Provide glass glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements and wind and impact loads without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants (both structural and weather-resisting) to remain watertight, airtight and to maintain structural performance characteristics specified; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. 2. Normal Thermal Movement: Provide glass that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximum temperature range of 120°F in ambient and 180°F surface temperature acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base structural performance calculations on surface temperatures of materials caused by both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky loss. 3. Comply with requirements of Consumer Product Safety Commission, Part 1201, Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials, for all the Work. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 4. Structural Performance: Provide structural calculations for analysis of required glass thicknesses for glass lites shown, that are used to establish final fabricating and detailing requirements. Indicate compliance with the following minimum criteria for all glass shown: a. Project Wind Speed: 70 miles per hour based on ASCE 7 and the other governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. b. Importance Factor: Category 1; Iw = 1.15; Design Factor: 1.15. c. Exposure Category: Exposure C; Ce = 1.13. d. Wind Stagnation Pressure: qs = 12.6 psf. e. Long-Duration Loading: One month. f. Short-Duration Loading: Sixty seconds, based on three-second gust speed. g. Probability of Breakage for Vertical Glazing: Eight lites per 1,000 under wind action. h. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required to limit center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1-inch, whichever is less. 5. Glass thicknesses shown are minimums. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project structural loadings and in-service conditions using glass manufacturer's recommended load tables and other structural performance criteria specified. Where manufacturer’s load tables indicate acceptability of lesser thickness material than required by performance criteria specified, provide specified thicknesses and features as a minimum. Where load tables indicate the need for greater thickness, or additional features, than specified, provide greater thicknesses and features at no additional cost to OWNER. Comply with practice for determining minimum thickness and types of glass, to resist loadings required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, according to ANSI/ASTM E 1300. 6. Test sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s recommendations. 7. Provide each configuration of insulating glass incorporating wavelength-selective interlayers or low-E coatings. 8. Glazing Sealant System Compatibility: a. Glazing sealants shall be compatible with the channel surfaces, joint fillers, insulating glass sealing system, laminated glass interlayer material and other materials in contact with the glazing channel in compliance with ASTM C 1087. b. Provide insulating glass secondary sealant system compatible with structural silicone glazing system and in compliance with ASTM C 1249. c. Provide only materials and manufacturer's recommended variation of the speci¬fied materials, which are known to be fully compatible with the actual installation conditions, as shown by manufacturer's pub¬lished data or certification submitted to ENGINEER for approval. 9. Adhesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 793 and ASTM C 794. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 10. Center-of-Glass U-Values: NFRC 100 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer-aided software design, expressed as Btu/square foot by height by degree F. 11. Center-of-Glass Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200 methodology using LBL-35298 WINDOW 4.1 computer-aided software design. 12. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. B. Definitions: 1. Interspace: The space between lites of an insulating glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. 2. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects that develop from normal use, that are attributed to the manufacturing process, and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. 3. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects that develop from normal use, that are attributed to the manufacturing process, and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass or structural performance or safety of units; blemishes exceeding those allowed by specified laminated glass standards; and cracking, crazing or color change of films concealed in the lamination. 4. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the fabricating process or incompatibility of sealants or mishandling during installation, and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Evidence of failure shall include the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of insulating glass. 2.02 GLASS A. Clear, Float Glass: 1. Uncoated, Monolithic, Clear, Float Glass: Provide clear glass in compliance with ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select); 1/4 inch thick, minimum. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Clear Float Glass by PPG Industries, Incorporated. b. Clear Float Glass by Pilkington Libbey Owens Ford Company. c. Or equal. B. Fully Tempered, Float Glass: 1. Uncoated, Monolithic, Fully Tempered, Float Glass: Provide glass, with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass, in compliance with ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), Kind FT. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Provide heat-strengthened glass that has been heat strengthened by manufacturer's special process (after cutting to final size,) to achieve a flexural strength of up to five times that of annealed glass strength; 1/4 inch thick, minimum. 3. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Herculite Clear by PPG Industries, Incorporated. b. Fully Tempered Clear Glass by Guardian Industries, Corporation. c. Or equal. C. Coated Monolithic Solar Control Low-E Glass: 1. Coated, Monolithic, Float Glass: Provide float glass with solar-reflective metallic-oxide coating applied by pyrolytic deposition during initial manufacture in compliance with ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select); 1/4 inch thick, minimum. Solar control low-E coating on number 2 surface. 2. Physical Properties: a. Tint Color: Bronze. b. Visible Light Transmittance: 38 to 40 percent. c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.46. d. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: Eleven percent. e. Shading Coefficient: 0.53. 3. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Energy Advantage Low-E Clear Float Glass by Pilkington Libbey Owens Ford Company. b. Or equal. D. Clear, Insulating, Float Glass Units: 1. Uncoated, Monolithic, Clear, Float Glass: Provide clear glass in compliance with ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). 2. Insulating Glass Units: Provide preassembled units consisting of two lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class C units, permanently and hermetical¬ly sealed together at edges with spacers and sealant. 3. System Sealing: Dual seal with polyisobutylene primary sealant and silicone secondary sealant, complying with ASTM C 1249. 4. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: a. Overall Thickness: 1-inch. b. Each Lite: 1/4 inch. 5. Physical Properties: a. Exterior Appearance: Clear. b. Visible Light Transmittance: 78 percent, minimum. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.70. d. Outdoor Visible Light Reflectance: 15 percent. e. Shading Coefficient: 0.81. f. Winter Nighttime U-value: 0.48. g. Summer Daytime U-value: 0.55. 6. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Clear Twindow by PPG Industries, Incorporated. b. Clear Thermopane by Pilkington Libbey Owens Ford Company. c. Or equal. E. Ceramic-Coated, Opaque, Float Glass: 1. Ceramic-Coated Opaque Glass: Provide float glass with fired, decorative, ceramic enamel coating applied by silk-screening process on second surface and complying with ASTM C 1048, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), Condition B (spandrel glass, one surface ceramic coated), Kind HS (heat-strengthened glass); 1/4-inch thick, minimum. 2. Ceramic Coating Color and Pattern: Complete selection of manufacturer’s standard and custom ceramic colors and patterns. 3. Fallout Resistance: Provide spandrel units identical to those passing the fallout- resistance test for spandrel glass in ASTM C 1048. 4. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Vitrolux Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass by Interpane Glass Company. b. Spandrel Glass by AFGD, Incorporated. c. Or equal. 2.03 GLAZING SEALANTS, TAPES AND GASKETS A. General: 1. Colors: Provide black or other natural color wherever no other color is available. Wherever material is not exposed-to-view, provide manufacturer's standard color, which has the best overall performance characteristics for the application shown. a. Provide manufacturer's standard colors as shown or, if not shown, provide color selected by ENGINEER from manu¬facturer's standard colors to either blend or contrast with adjoining surfaces. b. Provide custom colors, as selected by ENGINEE¬R. 2. Hardness specified is intended to indicate the general range necessary for overall performance. Submit glazing and sealant manufacturer’s recommendations for actual hardness for each condition of installation and use. Except as shown or specified, provide glazing materials within the following ranges of hardness (Shore A, fully cured, at 75°F): Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. 15 to 35 for elastomeric compounds and tapes used with rigid stops and frames for large glass sizes (in excess of 100 united inches). Provide material sufficiently hard to withstand exposure to abrasion and vandalism. b. 25 to 50 for rubber like curing compounds used with rigid stops and frames for medium and small glass sizes (less than 100 united inches). Provide materials sufficiently hard to withstand impact of moving sash and doors. c. 35 to 60 for molded gaskets used with rigid stops and frames, depending upon strength needed for application or insertion of units. d. 75 to 80 for structural gaskets (not supported by stops). e. Non Elastomeric Compounds: (Shore A not applicable) 2 to 12 mm penetration for 5.0 seconds of penetrometer needle on nominally cured compound, complying with ASTM D 2451. 3. Provide size and shape of gaskets and preformed glazing units as recommended by the manufacturer and as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 4. Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements for each liquid-applied, chemically curing sealant specified. 5. Where additional movement capability is specified, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement, in compliance with ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements in ASTM C 920 for uses shown. B. Preformed Butyl Rubber Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: 1. Preformed tape of polymerized butyl or mixture of butyl and polyisobutylene with inert fillers with built in spacer of synthetic rubber, solvent based with minimum 95 percent solids, non sag consistency, tack free time of 24 hours or less, paintable, non staining, complying with AAMA 806.3. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Polyshim II Glazing Tape by Tremco, Incorporated. b. Or equal. C. Dense Compression Wedge Gaskets: 1. Provide molded or extruded, closed-cell silicone wedge gaskets in compliance with ASTM C 1115, Type C. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Dense Silicone Wedge Gaskets SCR-900 by Tremco, Incorporated. b. Or equal. D. Exterior, One Part, Silicone Rubber Sealant: 1. Silicone rubber based, one part elastomeric sealant, complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A and O. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Spectrem I by Tremco, Incorporated. b. 863 Architectural Silicone Sealant by Pecora Corporation. c. Or equal. E. Structural Silicone Sealant: 1. Provide a one-component, self-priming, shelf-stable, neutral-cure, elastomeric adhesive complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, G and A, and specifically formulated for silicone structural glazing complying with the following as- cured physical properties, after seven days at 77°F and 50 percent relative humidity: 2. Durometer Hardness, Shore A, points; ASTM D 2240: 27 to 40. 3. Ultimate Tensile, ASTM D 412: 225 to 350 psi. 4. Ultimate Elongation, ASTM D 412: 525 to 550 percent. 5. Tear Strength, Die B; ASTM D 624: 40 to 49 ppi. 6. Peel Strength, ASTM C 794: 30 to 40 ppi. 7. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. DOW CORNING 995 Silicone Structural Adhesive by Dow Corning Corporation. b. 895 Silicone by Pecora Corporation. c. Or equal. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standards, requirements of manufacturers of glass glazing materials for applications shown, and approved Shop Drawings. Provide materials with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces shown and specified. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, with proven compatibility with sealants used in the Work and as recommended by the glass manufacturer. C. Spacers and Edge Blocks: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions, with a Shore A durometer hardness recommended by glass manufacturer to maintain lites in place and to limit lateral movement for installation shown, and with proven compati¬bility with sealants used in the Work. D. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: Closed cell or waterproof jacketed rod stock of synthetic rubber or plastic foam complying with ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), proven to be compatible with sealants used, flexible and resilient, with 5 to 10 psi compres-sion strength for 25 percent deflection. E. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant, gasket and glass manufacturer. 2.05 FABRICATION OF GLASS AND OTHER GLAZING PRODUCTS Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Glass manufacturer's recommended glazing channel dimensions are intended to provide for necessary minimum bite on the glass, minimum edge clearance and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correct glass size for each opening, within the tolerances and necessary dimensions established on approved Shop Drawings. 2.06 TOLERANCES A. Allowable Tolerances: Provide fully tempered and heat-strengthened glass, formed by horizontal roller-hearth process, free of tong marks, and not exceeding the following flatness tolerances (either face, any direction, any location) based on 1/4 inch glass thickness with inversely proportion¬ate tolerances for other thicknesses: 1. For 12 inch Run: 1/16 inch bow. 2. For 3 foot Run: 1/8 inch bow. 3. For 7 foot Run: 1/4 inch bow. 4. For 10 foot Run: 3/8 inch bow. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. To the greatest extent possible, provide each type of glass glazing materials from one manufacturer. B. Providing insulating glass with a certified Class A rating according to SIGMA. C. Obtain glass and sealant test results for product test reports from qualified testing agencies regularly engaged in the business of testing glass and sealant products. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the framing and glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and the conditions under which the glass glazing is to be performed, and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the glazing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean the glazing channel, or other framing members to receive glass, immediately before glazing. Remove coatings, which are not firmly bonded to the substrate. Remove lacquer from metal surfaces wherever elastomeric sealants are used. B. Apply primer or sealer to joint surfaces wherever recommended by sealant and glass manufacturer. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Comply with combined recommendations of glass, window and glazing products manufacturers and other materials used in glazing, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. 2. Comply with GANA, Glazing Manual, except as shown and specified otherwise, and except as specifi¬cally recommended otherwise by the manufacturers of the glass glazing materials, as accepted by ENGINEER on approved Shop Drawings. 3. Inspect each piece of glass immediately before installation, and remove from Site all that have observable edge damage or face imperfections. 4. Unify appearance of each series of lights by setting each piece to match others as nearly as possible. Inspect each piece and set with pattern, draw and bow oriented in the same direction as other pieces. 5. Cut and install tinted and reflective glass as recommended in manufacturer's technical bulletin as provided on approved Shop Drawings. 6. Install sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturers, and as recommended on approved Shop Drawings. 7. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip or abrade glass on Site, which is tempered, heat strengthened, or coated. 8. Do not proceed with installation of liquid glazing sealants under adverse weather conditions, or when temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installa¬tion. 9. Proceed with glazing only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable to proper cure and development of high early bond strength. Wherever channel action is affected by ambient temperature variations, install glazing sealants only when temperatures are in the middle third of manufacturer's recommended installation temperature range, so that sealant will not be subjected to excessive elongation or compression, and bond stress will not be excessive at extremely low or high temperatures. 10. Coordinate the installation of the glass glazing Work with the Progress Schedule in order to avoid delay of Project. B. Tape and Sealant Glazing: 1. Place setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant for heel bead. Position glass on setting blocks and press against tape for full contact. 2. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 4 foot-2 inches. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 3. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite for spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 4. Provide edge spacers are shown on approved Shop Drawings and as required to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 16 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 5. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops. Install horizontal strips first, extending over width of opening, before applying vertical strips. 6. Remove paper backing from tape. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glass. Install tapes continuously. Do not stretch tape to make them fit openings. Place joints in tapes at corners of openings with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal butt joints of tape with joint sealant. 7. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 8. Install removable stop, avoiding displacement of tape, and exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. Calk space above glazing tape to top of glazing stop. Tool exposed surfaces of sealant compounds to provide a substantial "wash" away from the glass. 9. Clean and trim excess glazing materials from the installation, and eliminate stains and discolorations. 10. Where wedge shaped gaskets are driven into one side of the channel to pressurize the sealant or gasket on the opposite side, provide adequate anchorage to ensure that gasket will not "walk" out when subjected to dynamic movement. Anchor gasket to stop with matching ribs, or by proven adhesives, including embedment of gasket tail in cured heel bead. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 11. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended on approved Shop Drawings and to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant as recommended by gasket manufacturer and as shown on approved Shop Drawings. C. Dry Gasket Glazing: Install glass in gaskets as recommended by the glass and window manufacturer. Refer to Section 08 11 13, Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, Section 08 11 16, Aluminum Doors and Frames, Section 08 14 00, Wood Doors, Section 08 16 13, Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Doors and Frames, 08 41 13, Aluminum Storefronts and 08 51 13, Aluminum Windows. D. Structural Sealant Glazing: Install glass using a system of structural silicone sealants as recommended by the glass and sealant manufacturers. Refer to Section 08 41 13, Aluminum Storefronts . E. Cure glazing sealants and compounds in compliance with manu¬facturer's instructions and recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. F. The installer shall advise CONTRACTOR of procedures required for the protection of glass glazing sealants and compounds during the construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage, other than normal weathering, at the time of Substantial Completion. Glass Glazing 08 81 00 - 17 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements G. Furnish specific instructions on the precautions and provisions required to prevent glass damage resulting from the alkaline wash from concrete surfaces and similar sources of possible damage. H. Protect exterior glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass. I. Remove and replace glass, which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism. J. Maintain glass in a reasonably clean condition during construction, so that it will not be damaged by corrosive action and will not contribute (by wash off) to the deterioration of glazing materials and other work. K. Remove non-permanent labels and wash and polish glass on both faces not more than four days prior to Substantial Completion. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Watertight and airtight installation of each piece of glass is required, except as otherwise shown. Each installation must withstand normal temperature changes, wind loading, impact loading (for operating sash and doors) without failure of any kind including loss or breakage of glass, failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and air tight, deterioration of glazing materials and other defects in the Work. B. After nominal cure of exterior glazing sealants, which are exposed to the weather, test for water leaks. Flood the joint exposure with water directed from a 3/4 inch hose held perpendicular to wall face, 2 foot 0 inches from joint, connected to a water system with 30 psi minimum normal water pressure. Move stream of water along joint at an approximate rate of 20 foot-0 inches per minute. C. Test approximately five percent of total glazing system, in locations which are typical of every joint condition, and which can be inspected easily for leakage on opposite face. Conduct tests in the presence of ENGINEER, who will determine the actual percentage of joints to be tested and the actual period of exposure to water from the hose, based upon the extent of observed leakage, or lack thereof. D. Repair glazing installation at leaks or, if leakage is excessive, replace glazing sealants as directed by ENGINEER. E. Wherever nature of observed leakage indicates the possibility of inadequate glazing joint bond strength, ENGINEER may direct that additional testing be performed at a time when joints have been fully cured, followed by natural exposure through both extreme temperatures, and returned to the range of temperature in which it is feasible to conduct testing. Repair or replace Work as required and directed by the ENGINEER. END OF SECTION Louvres and Vents 08 90 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 08 90 00 LOUVERS AND VENTS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all louvers and vents Work. 2. Extent of louvers and vents Work is shown. 3. Types of products required include the following: a. 6-inch fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers. b. Sill extensions, bird screens, insect screens, and other miscellaneous trim, fasteners, blank-off panels, supports and other accessories. c. Polyvinylidene fluoride finish. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under other Sections and coordi¬nate the installation of items that must be installed with the louvers and vents Work. 2. Verify size, location and placement of louver and vents prior to fabrication, wherever possible. Coordinate field measurements and Shop Drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field assembly of units. Preassemble units in as large sections as practicable. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM B 117, Practice for Operating Salt Spray Apparatus. b. ASTM D 522, Test Methods for Mandrel Bond Test of Attached Organic Coatings. c. ASTM D 523, Test Method for Specular Gloss. d. ASTM D 1308, Test Method for Effect of Household Chemicals on Clear and Pigmented Organic Finishes. e. ASTM D 2244, Test Method for Calculation of Color Differences from Instrumentally Measured Color Coordinates. f. ASTM D 2247, Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity. g. ASTM D 3363, Test Method for Film Hardness by Pencil Test. Louvres and Vents 08 90 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements h. ASTM D 4214, Test Methods for Evaluating Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Criteria: Comply with Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association, Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, recommendations for fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures, except as otherwise shown on the Drawings or specified. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Obtain each separate type of louver and vents from a single supplier and from a single manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following 1. Shop Drawings: a. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. Show blade profiles, angles and spacing. b. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring for motorized adjustable louvers. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's material specifications, recommended written installation instructions and manufacturer's specifications showing 3. Delegated Design Submittals: a. For installed louvers and vents indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by a Registered Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Texas, who is responsible for their preparation. 4. Samples: For units with factory-applied color finishes. a. Cut-a-way samples of corner section of each type of louver made from 12-inch lengths of full size components and showing the proposed details of joinery, anchorage, movement, glazing, flashing and drainage and with specified finish, prior to fabrication of the Work. 5. ENGINEER reserves the right to require samples demonstrating design, detailing and fabrication techniques and workmanship for each auxiliary louver component and accessory, before fabrication proceeds. a. Provide polyvinylidene fluoride coating manufacturer's complete color charts showing all colors and finishes, including custom, special and premium colors, available from the manufacturer. b. Where normal color and texture variations are to be expected, include three or more 12-inch by 12-inch by 1/16-inch aluminum plates, painted as specified, to show the range of such variations. Provide minimum possible color range variation. ENGINEER reserves the right to reject material finishes with objectionable variations from the established samples. Louvres and Vents 08 90 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements c. Provide anodized finish manufacturer's complete color charts. d. One of each type fastener employed, with statement of intended use. e. Samples will be reviewed by ENGINEER for materials, fabrication techniques, proposed system components, workmanship and color. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Source Quality Control Submittals: a. Comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency or by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of louver. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify louver openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide written warranty agreeing to replace louver and vent Work which fails in materials or workmanship within three years of the date of Final Acceptance. Failure of materials or workmanship shall include, but is not limited to, excessive leakage or air infiltration, excessive deflections, deterioration of finish or metal in excess of normal weathering, and defects in accessories, weatherstripping, and other components of the Work. B. Guarantee that the polyvinylidene fluoride based coating meets all criteria specified and will not spall, check, craze, peel or otherwise lose adhesion for a period of twenty years from the date of Final Acceptance, to the extent that such shall create unsightly conditions or otherwise impair the intended architectural qualities of the building. C. In the event that the polyvinylidene fluoride based coating fails to meet the specified standards, the manufacturer shall, at his own expense, replace or field paint, as directed by ENGINEER, all areas affected by the failure. In the event that repainting is selected, it shall be done at mutually agreeable intervals throughout the term of the warranty. D. The warranty does not apply where failure is caused by accidents, or external conditions or forces beyond the control of the manufacturer. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVER AND VENTS PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide louvers and vents capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act on vertical projection of louvers. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure of 30 lbf/sq.ft., acting inward or outward. Louvres and Vents 08 90 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Seismic Performance: Provide louvers capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to the International Building Code and ASCE 7, “Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures”: Section 9, “Earthquake Loads”. 1. Seismic Design Criteria: Refer to Structural contract drawings. C. Thermal Movements: Provide louvers that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 20°F, ambient; 120°F, material surfaces. D. Airborne Sound Transmission Loss: Provide acoustical louvers complying with airborne sound transmission loss ratings indicated, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those specified, except for length and width according to ASTM E 90. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 5005 with temper as required for forming or as otherwise recommended by the metal producer to provide the required finish. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063 T52. C. Fastenings: Use same material as items fabricated. Provide types, gages and lengths to suit unit installation conditions. Use Phillips flat head machine screws for exposed fasteners, unless otherwise specified. Use continuous aluminum closure angles on the inside perimeter frame of all louver and vents Work, finished to match louvers and vents. D. Post-installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to four times the loads imposed, for concrete, or six times the loads imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing conforming to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Protection of aluminum from dissimilar materials shall conform to Section 09 91 00, Painting. 2.03 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers and vents in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Vertical Assemblies: Where height of louver and vent units exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate units to permit field-bolted assembly with close-fitting joints in jambs and mullions, reinforced with splice plates. 1. Continuous Vertical Assemblies: Fabricate units without interrupting blade-spacing pattern, unless horizontal mullions are shown. C. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to produce uniform appearance. Louvres and Vents 08 90 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements D. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes as shown, with allowances made for fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel, unless otherwise shown and as specified. E. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. F. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacing shown, but not more than recommended by manufacturer, or 72-inches on centers, whichever is less. 1. Fully Recessed Mullions: Where shown, provide mullions fully recessed behind louver blades. Where length of louver exceeds fabrication and handling limitations, fabricate with close-fitting blade splices designed to permit expansion and contraction. G. Where shown, provide subsills made of same material as louvers. H. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds concealed from view, unless otherwise shown or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary. 2.04 FIXED, EXTRUDED ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Furnish 6-inch fixed louvers where shown, or scheduled. Drainable blades shall incorporate a front lip gutter and recessed second gutter, both of which direct water to jamb and mullion drains. B. Free Area Velocity: Maximum 960 feet per minute free area velocity at a pressure drop of not more than 0.17 inches water gage carrying less than 0.01 ounces of water per square foot of free area. C. All blades shall be 0.081 inch thick. Provide all blades with integral drainage trough along edge of blades. Frame shall be 0.125 inches thick. Mullions shall be of the sliding interlock type. D. Free Area: Not less than 7.3 square feet for a 48-inch by 48-inch high louver. E. Provide louver supports designed to carry 30 pounds per square foot wind load. F. Install gravity backdraft damper and louver screen behind the louver. G. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. No. A6177 by Construction Specialties, Incorporated. 2. No. K6776 by the Airolite Company. 3. Or equal. 2.05 FINISHES A. Exposed Aluminum Polyvinylidene Fluoride Based Coating: Apply full strength polyvinylidene fluoride based coatings at the factory by coil coating for sheet material and spray coating for extruded material. Provide the following four coat finish system complying with the following: 1. Alkali clean and hot water rinse all surfaces to receive polyvinylidene fluoride based finish. Louvres and Vents 08 90 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Prepare a chemical conversion coating on the surface, using phosphates or chromates followed by a cold water rinse. Seal with a chromic acid rinse and dry, except where manufacturer recommends another method to achieve greater coating reliability. 3. Apply a base prime coat of epoxy paint to the prepared surface in its coil form, by reverse roller coating. Fully cure in a gas-fired oven to a dry film thickness of 0.2 to 0.4- mils. Follow with a barrier coat, 1.0-mils thick. 4. Apply color coat containing mica pearlescent or metallic flakes over the barrier coat by roller coating for coil material and airless or Ransburg Elastrostatic Hand Spray for extrusions and fuse at a peak metal temperature of 440°F for a dry film thickness of 0.7- mils for coil coating and 1.2-mils for spray coating so that the total dry film is approximately 1.0-mil thick for coil material and 1.5-mils thick for extruded material. 5. Apply clear fluoropolymer topcoat to provide a dry film thickness of 0.4 to 0.8-mils. The entire four coat system shall have a dry film thickness of 2.6- mils, minimum. 6. Provide the following physical properties, as proven by appropriate and recognized laboratory test methods acceptable to ENGINEER: a. Weathering, ASTM D 4214: Chalking, not more than No. 8, after exposure for 5,000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. b. Color Change, ASTM D 2244: No greater than 5 N.B.S units after removal of external deposits and after exposure for 5,000 hours in Sunshine Arc Weatherometer XWR using 60/60 cycle. c. Humidity Resistance, ASTM D 2247: No blisters after 3,000 hours. d. Salt Spray, ASTM B 117: Few scattered blisters no larger than ASTM No. 4, and no more than 1/16-inch creep from areas scribed to bare metal after 3,000 hours. e. Dry Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch. f. Wet Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over 1/16-inch cross hatch; extruded material only. g. Boiling Water Adhesion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after one hour immersion in distilled boiling water. h. Water Immersion: No pick-off when tape tested over cross hatch area after immersion in aerated distilled water 80±10°F after 500 hours. i. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM D 968: Coefficient of abrasion of 67, minimum. j. Glass, ASTM D 523: 30±5 reflectivity at 60°F. k. Pencil Hardness, ASTM D 3363: HB-H minimum. l. Dry Film Thickness: Primer, 0.2 to 0.4-mils; barrier coat, 1.0-mils; color coating, 0.7 to 1.5-mils; clear top coat, 0.4 to 0.8-mils. m. Solvent Resistance: 100 Double MEK rubs, minimum. n. Flexibility, ASTM D 522: No cracking prior to metal fracture. o. Acid Resistance, ASTM D 1308: 16 hour spot test with five percent hydrochloric acid - no effect. Louvres and Vents 08 90 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements p. Alkali Resistance, ASTM D 1308: 16 hour spot test with five percent sodium hydroxide - no effect. 7. Provide the following colors: a. Full selection of manufacturer's standard, custom and premium colors for final selection by ENGINEER. b. ENGINEER will select custom special extended life premium colors for louvers and vent Work at time of Shop Drawing and Sample submission review. 8. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Duranar Metallic XL Specialty Color 4-System by PPG Industries Coatings and Resins Division, Incorporated. b. Or equal. 2.06 LOUVER SCREENS A. Provide removable screens for all louvers. B. Fabricate screen frames of the same metal and finish as the louver units to which secured. Provide frames consisting of extra heavy duty extruded 0.090 inch aluminum for permanently securing screen mesh. Frames shall be rewirable. C. Provide bird screen, 1/2-inch square stainless steel wire, 0.063-inch diameter wire. D. Locate screens on inside face of louvers. Secure screens to louver frames with machine screws, spaced at each corner and at 12-inches on centers. E. Provide minimum No. 8 stainless steel metal screws, unless larger screws are required by screen size. F. Provide cross bar screen reinforcement of same material and finish as louver which subdivides screens into maximum area of 50 square feet. 2.07 SILL EXTENSION A. Gage and Finish: Same as louver. 2.08 ATTACHMENT FRAME A. Gage and Finish: Same as louver. B. Size: As shown on the Drawings. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR and his installer must examine the areas and conditions under which louvers and vents Work and associated items are to be installed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of conditions detri¬mental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. Louvres and Vents 08 90 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for the installation of anchorages which are to be embedd¬ed in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate the delivery of such items to the Site. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units plumb, level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use stainless steel expansion bolt anchors with stainless steel washers and neoprene gaskets. Use spring clips at all anchors to stop deflection of the louver frame. Provide anchors spaced 2 feet 0 inches on centers. Provide continuous aluminum angles for anchoring all operable louvers. C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers, as shown. D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations required for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes and prime coats of paint so that there is no evidence of corrective Work. Return items which cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make the required alterations, and refinish the entire unit, or provide new units, as determined by ENGINEER. E. Protection of Aluminum from Dissimilar Materials: Coat all aluminum surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials such as concrete, masonry, steel and other metals as specified in Section 09 91 00, Painting. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Determine conformity of louver polyvinylidene fluoride finish to these Specifications, as follows: 1. The manufacturer of the louver and vents shall set aside and label samples of the metal from each production lot for the job. Protect samples from weather. 2. Make sample louver and vent available at all times, for compari¬son with installed louver and vent Work as requested by OWNER, for the full time of the warranty. 3. Make color comparison measurements with a Hunter Tristimulus Color Difference Meter employing methods of computation in use at the National Bureau of Standards conforming to ASTM D 2224. 3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Set adjustable louver blades for uniform alignment in open and closed positions. B. Adjust louvers so moving parts operate smoothly. C. Louvers with dents, warps, gouges or scratches shall be replaced with new louvers, at no additional cost to OWNER. END OF SECTION Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install gypsum board assemblies. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in gypsum board assemblies to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections, and building into gypsum board assemblies all items to be embedded in or penetrate gypsum board assemblies. b. Providing openings in gypsum board assemblies to accommodate work under other contracts and assisting other contractors in building into gypsum board assemblies all items furnished under other contracts to be embedded in or penetrate gypsum board assemblies. 2. Extent of gypsum board assemblies is shown. 3. Types of products required include: a. Various types of interior wall and ceiling gypsum board. b. Various types of tile backing boards. c. Sound attenuation blankets. d. Joint reinforcement and finish system. e. Textured finishes. f. Sealant system for restriction of air, sound, or smoke passage through joints. g. Auxiliary materials, trim, and fasteners. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before gypsum board assemblies Work. 2. Coordinate furnishing and installing products for maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board assemblies at perimeters and penetrations where built-in and recessed items and transitions with other building components occur in the Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 2`1 05, Building Insulation. 2. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 3. Section 09 22 16, Non-Structural Metal Framing. 4. Section 09 30 13, Ceramic Tiling. 5. Section 09 91 00, Painting. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI A108.11, Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units. 2. ANSI A118.9, Test Methods and Specifications for Cementitious Backer Units. 3. ASTM C11, Terminology Relating to Gypsum and Related Building Materials and Systems. 4. ASTM C423, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. 5. ASTM C475/C475M, Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. 6. ASTM C514, Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. 7. ASTM C665, Specifications for Mineral Fiber Blanket, Loose-Fill and Spray-Applied Insulation. 8. ASTM C754, Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 9. ASTM C834, Specification for Latex Sealants. 10. ASTM C840, Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 11. ASTM C919, Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. 12. ASTM C954, Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033-in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112-in (2.84mm) in Thickness. 13. ASTM C1002, Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Metal Studs. 14. ASTM C1047, Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. 15. ASTM C1177/C1177M, Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 16. ASTM C1178/C1178M, Specification for Coated Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Panel. 17. ASTM C1396, Specification for Gypsum Board. 18. ASTM D578, Specification for Glass Fiber Strands. 19. ASTM D3273, Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. 20. ASTM D4977, Test Method for Granule Adhesion to Mineral Surfaced Roofing by Abrasion. 21. ASTM D5034, Test Method for Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test). Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 22. ASTM D5035, Test Method for Breaking Force and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Strip Method). 23. ASTM D5420, Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic Specimen by Means of a Striker Impacted by a Falling Weight (Gardner Impact). 24. ASTM E84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 25. ASTM E90, Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 26. ASTM E119, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 27. ASTM E413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 28. ASTM E488, Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 29. ASTM E695, Test Method of Measuring Relative Resistance of Wall, Floor and Roof Construction to Impact Loading. 30. GA-214, Recommended Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 31. GA 216, Application of Gypsum Board. 32. GA-235, Gypsum Board Typical Mechanical and Physical Properties. 33. GA-530, Design Data. 1.03 DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY A. Definitions: The following terms are defined for this Section and supplement the terms defined in the General Conditions: 1. Level of Finish: The designated finish of gypsum board assemblies established in ASTM C840. B. Terminology: 1. Terminology used in this Section is in accordance with ASTM C11, ASTM C754 and ASTM C840. 2. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: a. “Critical lighting” is strong side lighting from windows or surface-mounted light fixtures. b. “Joint photographing” is the shadowing of finished joint areas through the surface decoration. c. “Drywall primer” is paint material specifically formulated to fill pores and equalize the suction difference between gypsum board surface paper and the compound used on finished joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories and over skim coats. d. “Skim coat” is thin coat or joint compound, or material manufactured especially for this purpose, applied over the entire surface to fill imperfections in the joint Work, smooth the paper texture, and provide a uniform surface for decorating. Excess compound shall be immediately sheared off, leaving a film of skim coating compound completely covering the paper. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements e. “Spotting” is to cover fastener heads with joint compound. f. “Texture” is decorative treatment on gypsum board surface. g. “Texturing” is regular or irregular patterns typically produced by applying a mixture of joint compound and water, or proprietary texture materials including latex base texture paint, to a gypsum board surface previously coated with primer/sealer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Provide gypsum board, accessories and trim manufactured by firms specializing in production of types of products specified, in compliance with reference standards listed in this Section. b. Provide gypsum board assemblies manufactured by firms that are members of the Gypsum Association (GA) and participate in GA’s certification programs. 2. Installer: a. Engage a single installer that regularly performs gypsum board assemblies installation, with documented skill and successful experience in installing types of materials required; and that employs only tradesmen who are trained, skilled, and have successful experience in installing types of materials specified. b. Submit name and qualifications with the following information for at least three successful projects: 1). Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. 2). Approximate contract cost of the gypsum board assemblies. 3). Quantity (area) installed. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Furnish gypsum board assemblies materials from manufacturers who retains qualified technical personnel who will visit the Site for purpose of advising installer of proper procedures and precautions for using materials and who will assist ENGINEER with opinions on whether gypsum board assemblies Work conforms to the Contract Documents and manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. Provide gypsum board assemblies materials from manufacturer who furnishes test certificates for published fire, sound, and structural data covering systems designed and constructed according to manufacturer’s published specifications. 3. Furnish gypsum board assemblies materials from manufacturers whose products comply with GA-235. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Where fire resistance classification (four-hour, three-hour, and similar designations) is shown or scheduled which includes gypsum board assemblies, provide components com Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements complying with applicable requirements for materials and installation established by UL and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Fire Resistance Directory for applicable fire-resistant construction systems. 3. Comply with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D, National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. D. Mock Ups: 1. Before proceeding with purchasing materials and installing gypsum board assemblies and after ENGINEER’s approval of Samples and other submittals, install 100 square foot Samples of each type of gypsum board assembly, including accessory trim, framing specified in Section 09 22 16, Non-Structural Metal Framing, insulation specified in Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation, control and expansion joints specified in Section 07 95 13, Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies, built-in items that may be specified in other Sections, Work under Section 09 30 13, Ceramic Tiling, as applicable, and Section 09 91 00, Painting, and decorative finishes specified in this Section indicating the final relationship and configurations of various parts and components and quality of workmanship to be achieved in the Work. Locate mock-ups in areas selected by ENGINEER to indicate representative installation of each type of gypsum board assembly. 2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for mock-up review. 3. Incorporate materials and methods of installation that are identical to Project requirements. 4. Obtain ENGINEER’s approval of visual qualities of mock up before starting installation of gypsum board assemblies. Retain and protect mock up during construction as a standard for judging completed gypsum board assemblies Work. Do not alter or remove approved mock ups. 5. Build as many mock-ups as required to obtain ENGINEER’s approval. Disassemble rejected mock-ups and remove components from the Site. Do not incorporate rejected mock-up components into the Work. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into the Work. 6. Do not commence gypsum board assemblies installation without obtaining ENGINEER’s approval of associated mock-up. 7. Remove and replace with new material gypsum board assemblies that do not meet standard of workmanship on the approved mock-up. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Show locations, fabrications, and installation of control and expansion joints, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s product data, specifications, and performance data for gypsum board assembly component required. Indicate compliance with requirements of reference standards included in this Section and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. b. Include copies of certified test reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents, including specified performance characteristics and physical properties. c. Submit UL Design Numbers, descriptions of fire-resistive construction systems and of each proposed fire-resistive system component. d. Where sound transmission coefficients (STC-rating) for gypsum board assemblies are shown or specified, submit complete data on all required system components and final STC-rating achieved by the system. e. Manufacturer’s design criteria for transverse loading capabilities of system assemblies indicating compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, for unbraced supported partition heights shown and system performance criteria specified. 3. Samples: Sample submittals will be reviewed by ENGINEER for color, texture and pattern only. Compliance with all other require¬ments is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Submit the following: a. Full-size Sample, each 12-inch long, for each trim accessory used in the Work. b. Each textured finish, applied on 12-inch square Sample of actual substrates. Indicate location of each texture in the finish Work. c. Mock-up(s). B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates. a. Certificates signed by manufacturer stating that materials meet or exceed requirements of the Contract Documents, including performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements, and stating that materials have been provided as specified to meet fire-resistance-ratings, thickness requirements, and application requirements. 2. Supplier Instructions: a. Step-by-step joint treatment installation instructions for each Level of Finish specified for each area of the Work. 3. Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of specified inspections and observations. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacturer, when required by ENGINEER. b. Installer. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable requirements of reference standards used in this Section, Section 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements, and Section 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Temperature: Comply with the more stringent of ASTM C840 and manufacturer’s written recommendations. 2. Ventilation: a. Provide ventilation during and following application of adhesives and joint treatments. b. Use temporary air circulators in enclosed areas that lack natural ventilation. c. Under slow drying conditions, allow additional drying time between coats of joint treatment. d. Protect installed materials from drafts during hot, dry weather. 3. Do not install panels that are any of the following: wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. a. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged includes, but is not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. b. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. 1.08 SEQUENCING A. Prior to starting installation of gypsum board, coordinate Work requiring openings, chases, frames, access panels, support, and similar integrated requirements, including heating and ventilating and electrical work. B. Do not proceed with gypsum board installation until blocking, framing, bracing, and other supports for subsequently applied Work are installed. C. Do not install gypsum board until thermal insulation to be concealed by board has been installed. D. Install sound attenuation blankets where indicated and where required to achieve STC ratings or fire-resistance ratings, before installing gypsum board, unless blankets can be readily installed after board has been installed. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Description: Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Gypsum board assemblies include finishing systems for walls, columns and ceilings that consists of panels with various types of specially treated, hydrated calcium sulfate cores reinforced with paper laminated to both faces of panels and manufactured for direct application of decorative finishes, including a joint treatment system known as self- setting drywall finishing and other drywall trim system accessories, and a system of metal studs, furring and bracing. 2. Complete systems shall conform to combined performance criteria in the Contract Documents. 3. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that post- consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes minimum of: a. Gypsum: 25 percent by weight. b. Paper: 100 percent. 4. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. B. Performance Criteria: 1. General: a. Standards: Comply with GA-530 and ASTM standards specified in this Section, except when more-stringent requirements are mandated by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Level of Finish for Gypsum Board Assemblies: In accordance with ASTM C840, provide the Level of Finish for all gypsum board assemblies indicated in Paragraph 3.6.A.5 of this Section. 3. Sound Transmission Characteristics (STC): For gypsum board assemblies with STC- ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies indicated, complying with ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. STC-Rated Assemblies: As shown or indicated on the Contract Documents. 4. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics of Gypsum Board Assemblies: For gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance-ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, and in compliance with ASTM E119. a. Fire-Resistance-Rating: As shown or indicated on the Contract Documents, conforming to UL Fire Resistance Directory. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Board Products, Accessories and Trim: Provide products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Gold Bond Building Products, by National Gypsum Company. 2. ToughRock Products, by G-P Gypsum Corporation. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. SHEETROCK Brand Products, by United States Gypsum Company, Subsidiary of USG Corporation. 4. Or equal. B. Metal Support System Components: Refer to Section 09 22 16, Non-Structural Metal Framing. 2.03 SUSPENDED CEILING AND SOFFIT FRAMING A. Refer to Section 09 22 16, Non-Structural Metal Framing. 2.04 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Exposed Gypsum Board: Provide the following types of interior gypsum board with two edge configurations where available from manufacturers specified; with 100 percent recycled paper on front, back, and long edges bonded to the core; complying with ASTM C1396: 1. Panel Size: Provide all panels in maximum lengths and widths available that minimize joints in each area and correspond with spacing of support system components. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E84: Flame Spread: 15, Smoke Development: Zero. 3. Regular Gypsum Board: Gypsum core wall panel surfaced with paper front, back, and long edges; ASTM C1396 (Section 5). 4. Fire-Rated Gypsum Board: Gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance fire resistance of the core and surfaced with paper on front, back, and long edges, Type X. 5. Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance the mold and water resistance of the core; surfaced with moisture/mold resistant paper on front, back and long edges; ASTM C1396 (Section 5). a. Mold and Mildew Resistance: Panel score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 6. Fire-Rated Moisture and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance the fire resistance of the core and the mold and water resistance of the core; surfaced with a moisture- and mold-resistant paper on the front, back, and long edges, Type X. a. Mold and Mildew Resistance: Panel score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273. 7. Sound-Rated, Moisture and Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: Gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance rating of the core and the mold and water resistance of the core; surfaced with moisture- and mold-resistant paper on the front, back, and long edges, Type X. 8. Gypsum Ceiling Board: Gypsum core ceiling panel with additives to enhance sag resistance of the core and surfaced with paper on front, back, and long edges; ASTM C1396 (Section 12). Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 9. Glass-Mat Gypsum Board: Gypsum core sheathing panel with additives to enhance water-resistance of the core; surfaced with fiberglass mat on front, back, and long edges: ASTM C1177. a. Product and Manufacturer, provide one of the following: 1). Dens Series Products by G-P Gypsum Corporation. 2). Or equal. 10. Thickness: 5/8-inch, except 1/2-inches for regular gypsum board and 1/4-inch for double layer installations and flexible gypsum board. 11. Long-Edge Profile: Tapered. 2.05 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Gypsum Backing Board: Provide the following types of moisture-resistant interior gypsum board for use as base for applying ceramic tile, with 100-percent recycled paper on front, back, and long edges, complying with ASTM C1396: 1. Panel Size: Provide panels in maximum lengths and widths available that minimize joints in each area and correspond with spacing of support system components. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E84: Flame Spread: 25, Smoke Development: Zero. 3. Water-resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance water resistance of the core; surfaced with water-repellant paper on front, back, and long edges; ASTM C1396 (Section 7). 4. Fire-rated Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Gypsum core wall panel with additives to enhance fire resistance of the core and the water resistance of the core; surfaced with water repellant paper on front, back, and long edges, Type X. 5. Cement Backer Board: Aggregated Portland cement board with woven glass fiber mesh facing; complying with ANSI A118.9. a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1). DUROCK Cement Board by USG Gypsum Corporation. 2). Wonderboard by Custom Building Products. 3). Or equal. 2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C475. B. High-Strength Joint Reinforcing Tape for Exterior and Interior Applications: Fiberglass, self- adhering, two inches wide, in compliance with ASTM D578, ASTM D5034, and ASTM D5035. C. Joint Compound for Exterior and Interior Applications: Provide dry-powder, sandable, self- setting chemical hardening compounds for all gypsum board assemblies Work, recommended by manufacturer as being unaffected by humidity after hardening and drying. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. For each coat use formulation compatible with other compounds applied previously, and compatible with successive coats. 2. Provide special chemical hardening type, slow-setting, or regular-setting-type compounds for gypsum board assemblies. a. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. b. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges use setting-type taping compound. c. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. d. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. e. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting- type, sandable topping compound. 2. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. 3. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 2.07 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Polystyrene Aggregate Ceiling Finish: Provide water-based, Site-mixed, polystyrene aggregate finish recommended by manufacturer for interior ceilings. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E84: Flame Spread: 25 maximum; Smoke Development: 25 maximum. 2. Texture: Fine. B. Non-aggregated Finish: Provide water-based, Site-mixed, non-aggregated, drying-type texture finish recommended by manufacturer for interior ceilings. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E84: Flame Spread: 25 maximum; Smoke Development: 25 maximum. 2. Texture: Provide complete selection of standard and custom finishes for final selection by ENGINEER. C. Acoustical Finish: Provide water-based, Site-mixed, non-aggregated, drying-type texture finish recommended by manufacturer for interior ceilings. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics, ASTM E84: Flame Spread: 25 maximum; Smoke Development: 25 maximum. 2. NRC, ASTM C423: 0.55 minimum. 3. Minimum Thickness: 1/2-inch. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements D. Primer/Sealer: As recommended by the manufacturer, and shall comply with Section 09 91 00, Painting. 2.08 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C1047. B. Products: Provide manufacturer’s standard trim accessories of types shown or indicated for gypsum board assemblies, formed of hot-dipped galvanized steel or zinc, with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide corner beads, L type edge trim beads, U type edge trim beads, special L kerf type edge trim beads, J-type wallboard casings and one piece control joint beads. 1. Finishing Type: Manufacturer’s standard trim units to be finished with joint compound. 2.09 GYPSUM BOARD FASTENERS A. Gypsum Board Fasteners: Comply with GA 216, and with gypsum board manufacturer’s recommendations; choice is installer’s option where more than one type is recommended for application specified. 1. Annular Ring Nail: ASTM C514. 2. Smooth Shank Nail: ASTM C514. 3. Steel Drill Screws: Self drilling, self tapping, bugle-head complying with ASTM C954 and ASTM C1002, for use with power-driven tools. a. Type S for wallboard to sheet metal. b. Type W for wallboard to wood. c. Type G for wallboard to wallboard. 2.10 SOUND ATTENUATION A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Non shrinking, non migrating, non staining, sealant of either non drying or permanently elastic type, complying with ASTM C834, that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E90. 1. Where exposed-to-view, provide paintable type acoustical sealant, either latex or acrylic based type, or acrylic latex type. 2. Provide sealants that have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Semi rigid, friction fit, spun mineral fiber blanket complying with ASTM C665, Type 1 (blankets without membrane facing); flame spread, smoke and fuel contributed ratings of less than 25; manufactured by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers obtained from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Recycled Content: Provide blankets with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes minimum of 25 percent by weight. 2.11 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. Laminating Adhesive: Setting-type, for directly adhering gypsum boards to continuous substrate. Use adhesives that have VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Water-resistant Sealant: Type recommended by gypsum board manufac¬turer for sealing cut edges and holes in water-resistant gypsum board. Provide sealants that have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Isolation Strips: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell, vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8-inch thick in width to suit stud size. D. Thermal Insulation: Refer to Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. E. Vapor Barrier: Refer to Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates and spaces to receive gypsum board assemblies, and conditions under which gypsum board assemblies will be installed, and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that spacing of installed, non-load-bearing steel framing does not exceed maximum allowable for types of gypsum board assemblies approved for the Work. B. Verify that doorframes are set for thicknesses of gypsum board shown on approved Shop Drawings and in the Contract Documents. C. Repair protrusions of framing, twisted framing members, and unaligned members before commencing gypsum board installation. D. Protect adjacent surfaces against damage and stains. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Refer to Section 09 22 16, Non-Structural Metal Framing. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GYPSUM BOARD A. General: 1. Standards: Comply with ASTM C840. Comply with requirements for fire resistance- ratings and STC-ratings shown. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Provide sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3. Provide ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. 4. Provide gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16-inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 5. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Do not make joint other than control joints at corners or framed openings. 6. Attach gypsum board to steel studs and blocking so leading edge or end of panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. 7. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. 8. Cut back paper; do not tear or snap. 9. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. 10. Control Joints: Form control joints and expansion joints with 1/2-inch continuous opening between edges of adjacent boards for insertion of control joint trim accessory. Provide control joints as shown; if not otherwise shown or indicated, provide at the following locations: a. Ceilings: 1). Areas exceeding 2,500 square feet. 2). Not more than 50 feet on centers. 3). Where ceiling framing or furring changes direction. 4). In furred assemblies where control joints occur in structural ceiling. 5). Where expansion joints occur in steel framing. b. Walls: 1). In partitions and wall furring runs exceeding 30 feet. 2). Not more than 30 feet on centers. 3). In furred assemblies where control joints occur in base exterior wall. 4). Where expansion joints occur in steel framing. c. Do not locate joints within eight inches of corners or openings, except where control joints are shown at jamb lines or where openings occur adjacent to corners in partition/wall layout. Where necessary, provide a single vertical joint over center of wide openings. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 11. Provide gypsum board on both faces of steel stud partition framing above ceilings and in similar concealed spaces, except in chase walls that are properly braced internally. a. Where partitions in concealed spaces are not required for STC-ratings, fire resistance-ratings, or control of air distribu¬tion, smoke or heat, studs may be faced with scraps of gypsum board applied in a single layer. Apply each piece with two or more screws in each stud, 12-inch maximum screw spacing. Cover at least 75 percent of each face. 12. Provide perimeter isolation where non load bearing partitions abut structural decks or ceilings, or vertical structural elements. Allow not less than 1/4-inch, or more than 1/2- inch gap between gypsum and structure. Finish edges of face layer with J Type (semi finishing) casing bead. Seal space between casing bead and structure with continuous acoustical sealant bead. Attach gypsum board to studs not less than 1/2-inch below bottom edge of ceiling track flanges and to first stud adjacent to vertical tracks. Do not attach board directly to tracks. 13. Where concrete columns are to be enclosed with gypsum board assemblies, provide freestanding vertical steel stud furring as required supporting gypsum board with not less than 1/2 inch clearance between concrete and furring, and between concrete and gypsum board. 14. Floating Construction: Where feasible, and recommended by manufacturer, provide gypsum board with “floating” internal corner construction, unless isolation of intersecting boards or control or expansion joints are shown. B. STC-Rated Gypsum Board Assemblies: Comply with ASTM C919 and the following: 1. Seal construction at perimeters, behind control and expansion joints, and at openings and penetrations with continuous bead of acoustical sealant. 2. Provide acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through gypsum board assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. C. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to manufacturer’s written recommendations and reference standards used in this Section. 1. Space screws maximum of 12 inches on centers for vertical applications. 2. Space fasteners in panels that are ceramic tile substrates a maximum of eight inches on centers. D. Panel Installation Methods: 1. General: In addition to complying with reference standards used in this Section, comply with specific requirements indicated for each type or arrangement of gypsum board assembly shown. 2. Single Layer Applications: a. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible, and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise shown or indicated. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 16 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise shown or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. 1). Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternative courses of board. 2). At stairwells and other high walls, provide panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless otherwise shown or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. c. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate end joints over furring members. d. For parallel applications, locate edge joints over sup¬ports; for right angle applications, stagger end joints over supports. e. Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 3. Multi Layer Applications: a. On ceilings, apply gypsum board base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise shown or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. b. On partition/walls, apply gypsum board base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise shown or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. c. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members. d. Laminate face layer to base layer with laminating adhesive and supplemental permanent screw fasteners penetrating through base layer and into supports. Apply in direction which results in minimum end joints, and offset joints (both directions). e. Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. 4. Direct Bonding to Substrate: Where gypsum board is shown or indicated to be directly laminated to substrate, other than studs, joists, furring members or base layer of gypsum board, comply with gypsum board manufacturer’s recommendations, and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum board until laminating adhesive has set. 5. Tile Backing Panels: Provide water-resistant backing board confirming to Laws and Regulations, as follows: a. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 17 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: Comply with manufacturer’s written installation instructions and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations. 6. Ceramic Tile: Refer to Section 09 30 13, Ceramic Tiling. 7. Areas Not Subject to Wetting: Install regular-type gypsum wallboard panels to produce flat surface except at showers, tubs, and other locations indicated to receive water- resistant panels. 8. Where tile-backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces. E. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Gypsum Board Faces: 1/16 inch offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/8-inch in eight feet for plumb, level, warp, and bow. 2. Gypsum Board Faces: 1/8 inch offsets between planes of board faces, and 1/4-inch in eight feet for plumb, level, warp, and bow. 3. Suspended Ceilings: Level main carrying channels to 1/8-inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide trim accessories in accordance with ASTM C840. Coordinate, and integrate where possible installation of trim accessories with installation of gypsum board. Use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. B. Install metal corner beads at external corners of gypsum board assemblies. C. Install metal edge trim where edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi exposed. 1. Provide L Type trim beads, for joint compound, where edge is shown to be tightly fitted to abutting Work, without reveal or sealant pocket. 2. Provide U Type trim beads, for joint compound, where edge is not tightly fitted to abutting Work, or is exposed, revealed with sealant pocket, gasketed, or with other separation, except as otherwise shown. a. Provide special kerf type I trim where adjoining Work is kerfed to receive leg of trim unit. 3. Provide J Type semi finishing trim, not for joint compound, at the following locations and where shown: a. Edges of exterior gypsum board not covered by applied moldings. b. On interior wall panels of exterior walls at juncture with ceilings. c. At sealant-filled isolation joints and sound control joints, where gypsum drywall work abuts other construction including walls and ceilings. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 18 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements d. At sealant-filled or gasket filled building expansion joints, install back to back units spaced as shown or, if not shown, at 1/4-inch spacing. D. Install control joint bead units where control joints are shown. E. Provide H Molding in exterior gypsum board assemblies where control joints are shown. Do not exceed spacing recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. F. Miter corners of exposed molding and trim (semi finishing) units. Align joints and support to eliminate offsets. 3.06 FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: 1. Comply with GA-214 and finishing materials manufacturer’s written instructions for mixing, handling, and applying materials. Machine- or hand-application is installer’s option. 2. Apply treatment at joints in both directions, flanges of trim accessories, but not semi finishing types, gypsum board penetrations, electrical boxes, piping and similar work, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as shown or specified. Apply in manner that will result in each of these being concealed when applied decoration has been completed. 3. Where open joints of more than 1/16-inch occur, including edges of boards with rounded or beveled corners, prefill joint with chemical hardening type bedding compound, prior to bedding of joint tape. 4. Apply joint tape at joints between gypsum boards, except where trim accessory is shown. 5. Level of Finish for Gypsum Board: As established by ASTM C840, provide the following Level of Finish for all gypsum board assemblies: a. Level 0: No taping, finishing, or accessories required. Provide for the following areas: 1). Inside plumbing chase. b. Level 4: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Cover fastener heads and accessories with three separate coats of joint compound. Joint compounds shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Coat all prepared surfaces with drywall primer prior to applying final finish. Coordinate with Section 09 91 00, Painting. Provide for the following areas: 1). All exposed gypsum board assemblies. 6. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use as exposed soffit board. 7. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Finish according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 19 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.07 APPLYING TEXTURED FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving textured finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Textured Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment recommended by textured finish materials manufacturer to provide uniform texture free of starved spots and other evidence of thin application, and without indicating application pattern. C. Prevent textured finishes from contacting surfaces not shown to receive textured finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other effective means of protecting surfaces not identified to receive textured finish. If, despite these precautions, textured finishes contact surfaces not designated to receive textured finish, immediately remove droppings and overspray according to textured finish manufacturer’s written recommendations. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before installing gypsum board ceilings, inspect ceiling support framing accompanied by ENGINEER and submit written report of deficiencies. Do not proceed with installing gypsum board on ceiling support framing until deficiencies are corrected. 1. Notify ENGINEER 5 days in advance of the date and time when Work, or part of Work, will be ready for above ceiling observation. 2. Before notifying ENGINEER, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings: a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation. b. Installation of insulation, and successful testing of piping conveying fluids and automatic fire suppression system. c. Installation of ventilation duct system. d. Installation of air distribution devices. e. Installation of ceiling support framing. 3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Nail Pop: 1. Repair nail pop by driving new nails approximately 1.5 inches from popped nail and reseat nail. 2. When face paper is punctured, drive new nail or screw approxi¬mately 1.5 inches from defective fastening and remove defective fastening. 3. Fill damaged surface with self-setting joint filler compound. B. Ridging: 1. Do not repair ridging until condition has fully developed, approximately six months after installation or one heating season. Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 21 16 - 20 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Sand ridges to reinforcing tape without cutting through tape. 3. Fill concave areas on both sides of ridge with topping compound. 4. After fill is dry, blend in topping compound over repaired area. Fill cracks with compound and finish smooth and flush. 5. Installer shall advise CONTRACTOR, who shall advise ENGINEER, of required procedures for protecting completed gypsum board assemblies from damage and deterioration during remainder of construction. CONTRACTOR shall provide required protection. END OF SECTION Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, professional services, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and install non-structural metal framing. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in non-structural metal framing to accommodate the Work under other Sections and building into non-structural metal framing items such as sleeves, anchorage devices, inserts, and all other items to be embedded in non- structural metal framing for which placement is not specifically provided under other Sections. 2. Provide the following types of products: a. Runner channel ceiling suspension systems. b. Interior steel stud partition systems. c. Exterior steel stud partition systems. d. Furring members. e. Auxiliary products. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before non-structural metal framing Work. 2. Coordinate furnishing and installing products for maintaining fire-resistance rating of non-structural metal framing at perimeters and penetrations where built-in and recessed items, and transitions with other building components, occur in the Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 53, Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ASTM A153/A153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A366/A366M, Specification for Commercial Steel Sheet, Carbon (0.15 Maximum Percent), Cold-Rolled. 3. ASTM A510, Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel. 4. ASTM A570/A570M, Specification for Structural Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot- Rolled. Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 5. ASTM A641/A641M, Specification for Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. 6. ASTM A645/A645M, Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Five Percent Nickel Alloy Steel, Specially Heat Treated 7. ASTM A653/A653M, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 8. ASTM C645, Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members. 9. ASTM C754, Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw- Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 10. ASTM C840, Specification for Applying and Finishing Gypsum Board. 11. ASTM C841, Specification for Installation of Interior Lathing and Furring. 12. ASTM C955, Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases. 13. ASTM C1063, Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster. 14. ASTM D226, Specification for Asphalt-saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 15. ASTM E90, Test Methods for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 16. ASTM E119, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 17. ASTM E413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. 18. ASTM E488, Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. 19. ISO 9002, Quality Systems – Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and Servicing. 20. UL, Fire Resistance Directory. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Provide non-structural metal framing, furring and auxiliary products and accessories manufactured by firms specializing in producing types of products specified, in compliance with the Contract Documents. b. Provide non-structural metal framing, furring and auxiliary products and accessories manufactured by firms that are members of ML/SFA and AWCI, and participate in certification programs. c. Obtain materials from manufacturers who will, when required, furnish services of qualified technical representative at the Site, for purpose of advising installer of proper procedures and precautions for using the materials. Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements d. Provide products from manufacturers who participate in ISO 9002 Quality Control Programs. 2. Professional Engineer: a. Engage a registered professional engineer legally qualified to practice in the jurisdiction where the Site is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. b. Submit qualifications data. c. Responsibilities include but are not necessarily limited to: 1). Carefully reviewing non-structural metal framing performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents. 2). Preparing written requests for clarifications or interpretations of performance or design criteria for submittal to ENGINEER by CONTRACTOR. 3). Preparing or supervising preparation of design calculations and related drawings, Shop Drawings, interpretation of quality control results, and a comprehensive engineering analysis verifying compliance of the non-structural metal framing with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 4). Signing and sealing all calculations and design drawings, and Shop Drawings. 5). Certifying that: a). It has performed the design of the non-structural metal framing in accordance with performance and design criteria stated in the Contract Documents, and the said design conforms to Laws and Regulations, and to the prevailing standards of practice. 3. Installer: a. Engage a single installer regularly performing non-structural metal framing and furring installation, and with documented skill and successful experience in installing types of materials required; and who employs only tradesmen who are trained, skilled, and have successful experience in installing types of materials specified. b. Submit name and qualifications with the following information for at least three successful projects: 1). Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for each project. 2). Approximate contract cost of non-load-bearing steel framing. 3). Quantity (area) installed. B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Furnish all components of non-structural metal framing and furring from a single manufacturer, and from a single supplier, where possible, with adequate resources to provide products of consistent performance characteristics, physical properties and appearance, without delaying the Work. C. Regulatory Requirements: Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Where fire resistance classification (four hour, three hour and similar designations) is shown or indicated which includes non-load-bearing steel framing, provide components complying with applicable requirements for materials and installation established by UL and authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Fire Resistance Directory for applicable fire resistant construction systems. 3. Vibration, Seismic and Wind Controls: The Work shall conform to seismic, vibration and wind requirements in Section 40 05 96, Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. Support system shall conform to Laws and Regulations, including building code referred to in Section 01 42 00, References. Refer to Section 01 45 33.00, Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures. D. Mock Ups: 1. Prior to installing non-structural metal framing, but after ENGINEER'S approval of Samples and Shop Drawings, install a 100 square foot mock-up, in area selected by ENGINEER, using materials and workmanship demonstrat¬ing proposed range of color, texture and allowable tolerances to be expected in the completed Work. Obtain ENGINEER’s approval of color, texture and tolerances before proceeding with the Work. Compliance with other requirements is responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Do not alter, move or destroy mock-up panels until corresponding plaster and gypsum board Work is acceptably completed. 2. Approved mock-ups may become part of the completed Work if approved mock-ups remain undamaged and undeteriorated at Substantial Completion. 3. Remove and replace with new material non-structural metal framing Work that does not meet the standard approved on mock-up panels. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Drawings locating all hangers and support anchors for suspension. Include locations of all accessories and framing components; and location of control joints based on the Contract Documents. 2. Product Data: a. Manufacturer’s product data and specifications for each item and each system specified. b. Test Reports: Certified test reports on materials identical to those to be furnished demonstrating compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties c. Include reports and other data as may be required to show compliance with the Contract Documents. 3. Delegated Design Submittals: Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Calculations for complete structural analysis of non-structural metal framing systems including calculations showing compliance with system performance criteria specified. Calculations shall be signed and sealed by professional engineer. Professional engineer’s seal shall be clearly legible, including state of registration, registration number, and name on seal. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates. a. Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements. 2. Supplier Instructions: a. Manufacturer’s installation instructions for each material specified 3. Site Quality Control Submittals: a. Results of inspection upon completion of installation. 4. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacturer, when required by ENGINEER. b. Professional engineer. c. Installer. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Limiting Heights of Walls: Comply with ASTM C754 and ASTM C955 based on loading requirements according to Laws and Regulations and authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, and lateral pressure of 10 psf. Limit deflection of gypsum board assemblies to L/360. 2. Vibration and Seismic Controls: Support system shall conform to Laws and Regulations including building code referred to structural contract drawings. Refer to structural contract drawings for Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures, and Vibration, Seismic, and Wind Controls. 3. Concrete Inserts: Size anchorage devices for ceiling hangers for five times supported load, unless requirements that are more stringent are required by Laws and Regulations or required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Fabricator is responsible for structural analysis and detailing of non-structural metal framing curtain wall system. Submit complete structural calculations and verification of other system performance criteria at same time as Shop Drawings submittal, for all non- structural metal framing members, anchorage devices, and all other support from manufacturer’s certified load tables signed and sealed by professional engineer. 5. Sound Transmission Characteristics (STC): For non-structural metal framing with STC ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements indicated, complying with ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by a qualified independent testing agency. a. STC-rated Assemblies: As shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 6. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics of Non-Structural Metal Framing: For non-load- bearing steel framing with fire-resistance-ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblies by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and complying with ASTM E119. a. Fire-Resistance-Rating: As shown or indicated in the Contract Documents. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Non-Structural Metal Framing Components and Accessories: Provide products of one of the following: 1. Dietrich Metal Framing, Inc. 2. Marino\Ware, Division of Ware Industries, Inc. 3. Or equal. 2.03 MATERIALS A. General: 1. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: Except where otherwise required to comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, provide type, weight, grade and finish of materials recommended by manufacturer, and include for each system clips, fasteners, ties, reinforcing, stiffeners, shoes, tracks, hangers, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for the application shown or indicated. 2. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Provide products with average recycled content of steel products such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent. 3. Metal and Finishes: Manufacturer’s standard for steel products, unless otherwise shown or indicated as solid zinc alloy or other metal. Provide manufacturer’s standard galvanized finish on steel products. B. Ceiling Suspension/Furring Materials: 1. Wire Tires: ASTM A641, Class 1, galvanized soft steel wire, 0.0625-inch diameter wire or double strand 0.0475-inch diameter wire. 2. Carrying Channels: two inch, cold-rolled, commercial steel sheet, with minimum base metal thickness of 0.538-inch, 1/2-inch wide flange, complying with ASTM A366. 3. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch minimum base metal thickness, with minimum 1/2- inch wide flanges, 3/4-inch deep 4. Steel Studs: 3 5/8-inch deep, cold rolled commercial quality steel channels, 0.0312-inch minimum base metal thickness, complying with ASTM A645. Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 5. Hat shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: 7/8-inch deep, 0.0538-inch minimum base metal thickness, screw type commercial quality steel sections, complying with ASTM C645. 6. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch deep, 0.0296-inch minimum base metal thickness, screw type, hat-shaped, commercial quality steel sections, complying with ASTM C645. a. Resilient Type: Where shown or indicated as, “resilient”, provide manufacturer’s special resilient furring channels designed to reduce sound transmission. 7. Hangers: a. Wire Hangers: Galvanized, soft temper steel wire complying with ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, pre-stretched; minimum base metal diameter of 0.162-inch, minimum. b. Rod Hangers: Commercial steel complying with ASTM A510, mild carbon steel; 1/4- inch minimum base metal rod diameter; hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153, Class B-1. c. Flat Hangers: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A366; base metal size of one-inch by 3/16-inch, minimum, and of lengths shown; hot-dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153, Class B-1. d. Angle Hangers: Two-inch by two-inch by 1/4-inch, base metal size, minimum; hot- dip galvanized in compliance with ASTM A153, Class B-1. 8. Hanger Anchorages: a. Provide expansion anchors fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching hangers, capable of sustaining, without failure, load equal to five times the load imposed by construction. b. Comply with ASTM E488 for concrete inserts, clips, bolts, screws and other devices applicable to indicated method of structural anchorage for hangers. C. Interior Metal Stud System Materials: 1. Punched Steel Curtain Wall Studs: Rolled channels of 18-gage steel, with 1 3/8-inch flanges and depths as shown, ASTM A570/, Grade D steel, 40,000 psi. 2. Studs and Runners: ASTM C645, formed C shaped steel channels of 0.0312-inch thick, base metal minimum, steel with 1.75-inch flange depth as shown, 40,000 psi steel complying with ASTM A653. 3. Slip-type Head Joints: a. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C645 top runner with two-inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of top of studs to provide lateral bracing. b. Double-Runner System: ASTM C645 top runners, inside runner with two-inch deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. c. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. d. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1). VertiClip SLD and VertiTrack Series by VTD Steel Network Inc. 2). Superior Flex Track System (SFT) by Superior Metal Trim. 3). Or Equal. 4. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1). Fire Trak with Fire Trak Slip Clip by Fire Trak Corporation. 2). The System by Metal-Lite, Inc. 3). Or Equal. 5. Stiffeners: 0.0538-inch minimum base metal thickness, 3/4-inch by 1/2-inch, cold rolled channel. Provide rust-inhibitive paint finish. 6. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated 0.0312-inch minimum base metal thickness. 7. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch minimum base metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 1.5 inches deep. a. Clip Angle: Not less than 1.5 by 1.5 inches, 0.068-inch, minimum base metal thickness, galvanized steel. D. Wall/Partition Metal Furring Materials: 1. Channel Furring: 0.0538-inch minimum base metal thickness, 3/4-inch by 1/2-inch, cold rolled channel. Provide rust-inhibitive paint finish. 2. Hat Shaped Rigid Furring Channels, ASTM C645: 0.0312-inches, minimum base metal thickness, 1.5-inches deep, screw type hat shaped section. 3. Resilient Furring Channels, ASTM C645: 0.0312-inches, minimum base metal thickness, ½-inch deep, screw type hat shaped section. a. Resilient-Type: Where shown or indicated as “resilient”, provide manufacturer’s special hat-shaped rigid furring channels designed to reduce sound transmission. 4. Furring Brackets: 0.0312-inch minimum base metal thickness, serrated arm type, adjustable from 1/4-inch to 2.25-inch wall clearance for channel furring. 5. Tie Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch minimum base metal diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch minimum base metal diameter wire. Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 6. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1.25- inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8-inch, minimum base metal thickness of 0.0179-inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. E. Auxiliary Products and Trim: 1. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with installation requirements in the Contract Documents. a. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: a. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D226, Type I No. 15 asphalt felt. b. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8-inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which non-structural metal framing Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Anchorages: Coordinate Work with structural ceiling Work to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions are installed to receive hangers. B. Maintain environmental conditions, including temperature, humidity, and ventilation, within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer’s recommended limits. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with ASTM C754, except where framing sizes and spacing are indicted in the Contract Documents. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Comply with ASTM C841 relative to framing installation. 2. Cement Plaster Assemblies: Comply with ASTM C1063 relative to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Comply with ASTM C840 relative to framing installation. B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. For flat surfaces, do not exceed 1/8-inch in twelve feet for bow, warp, plumb and level. C. Isolation: Where non-structural metal framing system abuts building structure horizontally, and where partitions abuts overhead structure, isolate the Work from structural movement sufficiently to prevent transfer of loading into non-structural metal framing and support Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements framing from the building structure. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. 1. Frame both sides of control and expansion joints independently, and do not bridge joints with non-structural metal framing or auxiliary system components. 2. Locations: Provide control joints as shown or, if not shown or indicated, at the following locations: a. Walls and Ceilings: 1). Where framing and furred assemblies cross expansion joints in substrates. D. Fixture Support Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing where non- structural metal framing Work is shown or indicated, to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar Work requiring attachment and support. E. Wire Tying: Except as otherwise shown or indicated, tie interior furring with 16-gage or double 18-gage wire; tie interior lath with 18-gage wire and tie exterior furring with 14-gage or double 16-gage wire; and tie exterior lath with 16-gage wire. F. Splicing Members: Lap furring members eight inches and runner channels 12 inches, and wire tie near each end of lap. Lap light-gage studs 12 inches and install screws in both flanges near each end of lap. Splice plastering accessories by using concealed splines, anchored to prevent offsets. 3.04 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Space runner channels as shown; if not shown space at four feet on centers. B. Install hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers near each end and spaced four feet along each channel or direct hung runners, unless otherwise shown or indicated. C. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. D. Splay hangers only where required and, if allowed by Laws and Regulations and authorities having jurisdiction for fire-resistance-rated construction assemblies, to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. E. Where width of ducts and other obstructions within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interfere with location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, provide supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established in reference standards and publications referred to in this Section, and designed by a professional engineer. F. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members by looping or wire tying with minimum of three tight turns, either directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, clips or other anchorage devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements G. Connect hangers directly to structural members, including additional framing members introduced for ceiling support, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for both structure to which hangers are attached and type of hanger involved. Install hangers in manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. H. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Provide cast-in- place hanger inserts that extend through forms. I. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. J. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. K. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, piping, or conduits. L. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. M. Wire-tie furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for installing assemblies shown or indicated. N. Install suspended steel framing components in sizes and spacing shown, but not greater than required by steel framing and installation standards referenced in this Section. 1. Carrying Channels: Four feet on centers. 2. Hangers: Four feet on centers. 3. Furring Channels: 16 inches on centers. O. Fire-resistive-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. 3.05 STUD SYSTEMS A. General: Comply with ASTM C645 and ASTM C754. Install steel studs with continuous runner tracks at top and bottom of each wall/partition area, and above and below each opening more than two feet wide. Anchor tracks to floor and overhead structure at each end and two feet on centers, maximum, unless otherwise shown. B. Extend partition stud system through suspended ceilings to structural support above, except where shown to terminate at ceiling. Cut studs short where abutting underside of structural support. C. Terminate partition stud system at ceiling line, except extend system to structure above, where shown. D. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. E. Space studs 16 inches on centers, including jack studs above and below openings, except as otherwise shown. F. Anchor exterior wall studs to bottom and top runner tracks, at both flanges. Install stud shoes or clips, or weld or screw-fasten to tracks. G. Anchor light-gage screw type partition studs to runner tracks by friction fit, except screw end studs to both tracks at both flanges. Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements H. Install minimum of three studs at partition corners and intersections, spaced as recommended by stud manufacturer for the application indicated. I. Install horizontal stud system stiffeners in continuous runs at the spacing indicated. Weld or wire tie at each stud intersection. 1. Space curtain wall stiffeners 4.5 feet on centers, and install double stiffeners, one each face, where unsupported wall height exceeds 18 feet. 2. Space partition stiffeners 4.5 feet on centers in light-gage screw type stud systems, which are to receive gypsum lath and plaster. J. Provide additional studs at each jamb of openings more than two feet wide, and secure jamb studs to frames of openings and to runner tracks above and below openings in manner indicated. Screw to frame anchors or directly to frames, or wire tie or weld, if not otherwise indicated. 1. Install two studs at each jamb, except as otherwise shown. 2. Install stud system stiffeners not more than six inches above and six inches below each opening, and extend two regular stud spaces beyond opening both ways. K. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. 1. Firestop Track: Where shown or indicated, provide to maintain continuity of fire- resistance-rated assembly indicated. L. Sound-Rated Partitions: Provide framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. M. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. Refer to Section 06 10 53, Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry, for wood framing requirements. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced two feet on centers. 3.06 METAL FURRING A. Space furring members: 16 inches on centers, unless otherwise shown or indicated. B. Space furring members: two feet on centers, unless otherwise shown or indicated. C. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation, vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced two feet on centers. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced two feet on centers. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.07 AUXILIARY STEEL STUD SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Anchor each flange of auxiliary non-structural metal framing system components to plaster base eight inches on centers. B. Miter or cope accessory corners and install with tight joints accurately aligned. C. Install prefabricated control joints of one-piece design, where shown or indicated as control joint. D. Install prefabricated expansion joints of two-piece design, where shown or indicated as expansion joint, 1/4-inch joint width for interior Work, 3/8-inch for exterior Work. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Before installing non-structural metal framing ceilings, inspect deck accompanied by ENGINEER and prepare written report of deficiencies. Do not proceed with installation of non-structural metal framing until defective Work is corrected. 1. Notify ENGINEER at least 5 days in advance of date and time when Work, or part of Work, will be ready for above ceiling observation. 2. Before notifying ENGINEER, complete the following in areas to receive non-load-bearing steel framing ceilings: a. Installation of insulation, and successful testing of piping conveying fluids and automatic fire suppression system. b. Installation of ventilation duct system. c. Installation of air distribution devices. B. Special Inspections: Coordinate with the Coordinating Special Inspector. Refer to structural contract drawings for detailed requirements. 3.09 ADJUSTING AND REPAIR A. Cut, repair, and align non-structural metal framing Work as required and as necessary to accommodate other work. Repair bent and dented members. Repair or replace the Work as necessary to comply with specified tolerances. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove temporary covering and other provisions made to minimize debris on other work. Repair surfaces that have been stained, marred or otherwise damaged during non-structural metal framing Work. When Work is completed, remove unused materials, containers, and equipment and debris. 3.11 RELATED WORK A. Gypsum Board Installation: Refer to Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies. 3.12 PROTECTION OF EXECUTED WORK A. Provide adequate precautions for protecting non-structural metal framing Work from deterioration and damage during remainder of construction. Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 22 16 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements END OF SECTION Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 09 30 13 CERAMIC TILE 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all ceramic tile. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in ceramic tile to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections, and building into the ceramic tile all items to be embedded in or penetrate ceramic tile Work. 2. Extent of ceramic tile Work is shown or indicated. 3. Types of products required include: a. Glazed ceramic wall tile. b. Unglazed ceramic floor tile. c. Portland cement slurry mortar bed bond coat. d. Latex-portland cement setting bed mortar. e. Latex-portland cement bond coat mortar. f. Latex-portland cement sanded grout. g. Custom marble thresholds. h. Auxiliary materials, additives, accessories, and trim. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate installation of items to be installed with or before ceramic tile Work. 2. Comply with ANSI American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile for related trade coordination. 3. Coordinate substrate finishing and curing techniques for type of ceramic tile installation required. 4. Coordinate substrate finishing with other Sections and coordinate installation requirements of those Sections with the Work of this Section. 5. Coordinate final locations of structural expansion joints, control joints, cold joints, and saw-cut control joints so that such joints do not interrupt ceramic tile pattern shown. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 2. Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCES Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI, American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. 2. ANSI A10.20, Safety Requirements for Ceramic Tile, Terrazzo and Marble Work. 3. ANSI A108.1, Installation of Ceramic Tile. 4. ANSI A108.5, Ceramic Tile. 5. ANSI A108.10, Installation of Grout in Tilework. 6. ANSI A118.4, Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 7. ANSI A118.7, Polymer Modified Cement Grouts for Tile Installation. 8. ANSI A137.1, American National Standards Specification for Ceramic Tile. 9. ASTM A82, Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. 10. ASTM A185, Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain for Concrete. 11. ASTM C109/C109M, Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or 50-mm Cube Specimens). 12. ASTM C144, Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 13. ASTM C150, Specification for Portland Cement. 14. ASTM C171, Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 15. ASTM C241, Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic. 16. ASTM C373, Test Method for Water Absorption, Bulk Density, Apparent Porosity and Apparent Specific Gravity of Fired Whiteware Products. 17. ASTM C424, Test Method for Crazing Resistance of Fired Glazed Whitewares by Autoclave Treatment. 18. ASTM C482, Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement Paste. 19. ASTM C485, Test Method for Measuring Warpage of Ceramic Tile. 20. ASTM C499, Test Method for Facial Dimensions and Thickness of Flat, Rectangular Ceramic Wall and Floor Tile. 21. ASTM C501, Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser. 22. ASTM C503, Specification for Marble Dimension Stone (Exterior). 23. ASTM C627, Test Method for Evaluating Ceramic Floor Tile Installation Systems Using the Robinson-Type Floor Tester. 24. ASTM C648, Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile. 25. ASTM C650, Test Method for Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Chemical Substances. 26. ASTM C847, Specification for Metal Lath. 27. ASTM C1026, Test Method for Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Freeze-Thaw Cycling. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 28. ASTM C1028, Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 29. ASTM C87, Test Method for Melting Point of Petroleum Wax (Cooling Curve). 30. ASTM D2240, Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. 31. TCNA, Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 32. USGBC LEED-NC, Reference Guide For New Construction and Major Renovation. 1.03 TERMINOLOGY A. Terminology used in this Section is in accordance with: 1. Terminology, explanations, requirements, and notes in the Foreword to ANSI Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. 2. All terms in ANSI A137.1. B. The following words or terms are not defined but, when used in this Section, have the following meaning: 1. “Ceramic tile” is a ceramic surfacing unit, usually relatively thin in relation to facial area, made from clay, or mixture of clay and other ceramic materials, called the body of the tile, having either a glazed or unglazed face and fired above red heat in the course of manufacture to temperature sufficiently high to produce specific physical properties and characteristic specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: a. Provide ceramic tile and auxiliary products and accessories manufactured by firms specializing in producing types of products specified, in compliance with reference standards used in this Section. b. Provide ceramic tile and auxiliary products and accessories manufactured by firms that are members of TCNA and participate in TCNA certification programs. 2. Installer: a. Engage a single installer regularly performing ceramic tile installation, and with documented skill and successful experience installing types of materials required; and that employs only tradesmen who are trained, skilled, and have successful experience installing types of materials specified. b. Submit installer name and qualifications, and the following information for at least three successful projects: 1). Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. 2). Approximate contract cost of the ceramic tile. 3). Quantity (area) installed. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements B. Component Supply and Compatibility: 1. Provide each type of ceramic tile from only one manufacturer. 2. Provide ceramic tile from source with adequate resources to provide ceramic tile of same color, grade, finish, type, and variety, and from same production run, and of consistent quality, appearance, and physical properties, for each contiguous area, without delaying the Work. 3. Provide modified cement mortars, bonding adhesives, and grouts of generic type specified, but of brand acceptable to or recommended by ceramic tile manufacturer. 4. Obtain all ceramic tile setting and grouting products from one manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (Public Law 101-336), Appendix A to 28 CFR 36 (Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities - ADAAG). D. Mock Ups: 1. Prior to installing ceramic tile and accessories, but after ENGINEER's approval of Samples and Action Submittals, provide four foot square Sample of each type of ceramic tile floor and wall system in areas selected by ENGINEER to show representative installation of the Work. 2. Obtain ENGINEER’s approval of colors, patterns, textures, and tolerances before starting ceramic tile Work. Retain and protect mock ups during construction as a standard for judging completed ceramic tile Work. Do not alter, move, or destroy mock-up panels until corresponding ceramic tile Work is acceptably completed. 3. Approved mock-ups may become part of the Work if approved mock-ups remain undamaged and undeteriorated at Substantial Completion. 4. Remove and replace with new material ceramic tile Work that does not conform to the standard approved on mock-ups. 5. Do not commence ceramic tile installation without obtaining ENGINEER’s approval of associated mock-up. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Completely-dimensioned and detailed drawings for ceramic tile Work utilizing modular planning to minimize cutting. Show ceramic tile pattern and recommended location of control joints and expansion joints in finished ceramic tile Work. b. Show all ceramic tiles including location of each type, color, and pattern. Show coordinated details for construction systems adjacent to ceramic tile that may affect ceramic tile pattern. Submit large-scale details for interrelated thresholds, floor drains, coves, equipment pads, trench drains, shower bases, horizontal pipe chases, columns, and similar items that will interrupt or be coordinated with ceramic tile system, based on dimensions obtained through Site measurements. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer’s specifications and literature for all required materials. Include manufacturer’s published data, indicating that each material complies with the Contract Documents and is suitable for the application shown. b. Test Reports: Submit certified laboratory test reports, for products identical to those to be provided for the Project, indicating conformance with the requirements specified. 3. Samples: Sample submittals will be reviewed by ENGINEER for color, texture and pattern only. Compliance with all other require¬ments is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. Submit the following: a. Ceramic tile mounted on 12-inch square hardwood boards showing color, type, and class of each ceramic tile required. b. Manufacturer’s full selection of standard and custom colored grout. Provide actual Samples of each grout material color, applied between metal or plastic flanges, for selection by ENGINEER. c. Marble thresholds with color, profile, and finish specified, full width and 12 inches long. d. Mock-up(s). B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates. a. Master Grade Master Grade Certificate and Tile Contractor’s Certificate signed by manufacturer and installer, for each type of ceramic tile in compliance with procedures established by ANSI A137.1 for ceramic tile. b. Certificate stating that products licensed by the TCNA have been supplied, where applicable. c. Certify that tiles from the same production run are available in sufficient quantity for the Work. d. Installer certification. e. Certify that setting bed mortars and grouts have been stored off the ground in factory-sealed containers and bags, and in areas maintained within humidity limitations recommended by product manufacturer. f. Certify that setting bed mortar and grout materials were manufactured within 12 months of installation and have not and will not be subjected to freezing temperatures. 2. Supplier Instructions: a. Copies of TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation showing proposed installation system, materials and details for each area of the Work. 3. Qualifications Statements: a. Manufacturer, when required by ENGINEER. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Installer. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s instructions for recommended maintenance practices for each type of ceramic tile, including the following: a. Product name and number. b. Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. D. Maintenance Material Submittals: 1. Extra Stock Materials: At time of completing ceramic tile installation, deliver stock of extra material and store in accordance with Section 01 78 43, Spare Parts and Extra Materials. Furnish full-size units, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels. a. Ceramic Tile: Furnish quality of ceramic tile equal to two percent of quantity installed, or at least one full package. b. Do not furnish partial packages of materials. Round-up quantities to furnish only complete, unopened and undamaged packages; with legible labels accurately representing contents of package indicating compliance with approved Samples and submittals, and matching materials actually installed. c. Submit quantities of each system component required for the Work, based on actual purchase order to manufacturer for materials used in the Work, with calculations establishing quantity of extra materials to be furnished. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with the following. 1. Deliver ceramic tile bearing manufacturer’s name with standard grade labels complying with ANSI A137.1. 2. Tile shall be accompanied by certificate and shipping receipt from manufacturer stating grade of tile, number and kinds of containers and shipping identification. 3. Include identification and formula numbers on containers of setting and grouting materials produced under TCNA license. 4. Failure to comply with requirements of this Article shall be sufficient cause for ENGINEER’S rejection of the material in question. Remove unacceptable material from the Site and provide new material conforming to the Contract Documents. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Supplemental Heat: Do not apply ceramic tile to surfaces that contain frost. Install ceramic tile only when substrate is at least 50 degrees F and rising. Maintain minimum Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements temperature for curing period recommended under applicable ANSI reference standard for the substrate and setting bed specified. a. Provide supplemental heat and protection as required to maintain ceramic tile at minimum of 50 degrees F during and after installation. b. Supplemental heat and power sources, as may be required should ambient temperature fall below 50 degrees F, are not available at the Site. Provide supplemental heat, including fuel, equipment, operating and maintenance personnel and power sources. c. Distribute heat uniformly and provide deflection or protective screens as required to prevent concentrati¬ng heat on ceramic tile near heat source. 2. Damp-cure latex-portland cement mortar setting bed under cover for minimum of 20 hours at temperatures of at least 70 degrees F and allow setting bed to dry before installing ceramic tile. Lower temperatures shall necessitate longer curing times. Comply with written recommendations of latex-portland cement mortar manufacturer. 3. Warm Weather Requirements: Do not install ceramic tile when temperature of substrate is 100 degrees F or is expected to rise above 100 degrees F during curing period. B. Site Measurements: 1. Where field measurements cannot be taken at the Site without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with Shop Drawing preparation without Site-verified dimensions. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and equipment locations to ensure dimensions shown on Shop Drawings correspond to dimensions established for ceramic tile Work. 1.08 SCHEDULING A. Do not install ceramic tile until other Work to be embedded in ceramic tile systems has been acceptably installed. B. Sequence the Work so that other installers do not interfere with or need to Work in the ceramic tile installation areas until such time as ceramic tile Work can be adequately protected from potential damage from their work, or access requirements. C. Cooperatively schedule and assist in sequencing of work of other contracts so that other contractors do not interfere with or need to work in ceramic tile installation areas until ceramic tile is adequately protected from potential damage that may be caused by work of or access requirements of other contractors. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Performance Criteria: 1. Standards: Comply with applicable reference standards using this Section and recommendations of TCNA and ANSI, except to extent that more-stringent requirements are required in the Contract Documents. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. All requirements of ANSI American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile, including its General Requirements, Forwards, and Explanation and Notes, shall be part of this Section. 3. Ceramic Tile Floor System Service Requirements, ASTM C627 and TCNA Performance- Level Requirement Guide and Selection Table: a. Floors: Heavy. b. Walls: Commercial Construction – Wet. 4. Environmental Profile: Provide environmentally-friendly ceramic tile manufactured using either a minimum of 55 percent recycled glass or post-industrial waste feldspar tailings as part of waste-free manufacturing process. 5. On exteriors, use only ceramic tile recommended by manufacturer as suitable for climatic conditions of the Site. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Ceramic Tile, General: 1. Provide ceramic tile manufactured from shale and fire clays. 2. Comply with ANSI A137.1. Provide standard-grade ceramic tile. Seconds are unacceptable. 3. Where required to meet performance criteria specified, provide manufacturer’s standard abrasive surfaced ceramic tile with fused aluminum oxide, uniformly impregnated on face of flat tile. Tiles showing an uneven distribution are unacceptable. 4. Provide ceramic tile with patterned backs. Dovetail backs are unacceptable. 5. Ceramic tile shall be precisely formed with uniform, straight edges and facial surfaces. 6. Provide only ceramic tile recommended by tile manufacturer as suitable for climatic conditions at the Site. B. Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile: Provide the following: 1. "Standard Grade" units, complying with ANSI A137.1, 2 inch by 2 inch square, 1/4 inch thick. 2. Type: Porcelain units, with water absorption not exceeding 0.5 percent. 3. Provide all purpose edge units. 4. Special Shapes: Rounded external and round internal corners. 5. Color: To be chosen by Engineer. 6. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaics by American Olean Tile Company. b. Unglazed Ceramic Mosaics by Dal-Tile Corp. c. Or Equal. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 7. Provide complete selection of special radiused cove base, bullnosed, stair tread and riser shapes, and other special trim shapes as shown and as required by ENGINEER for a complete installation. Provide same material, color, size, and finish as floor tile unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. C. Glazed Ceramic Wall and Ceiling Tile: Provide the following: 1. "Standard Grade" units, complying with ANSI A137.1, 4 1/4 inches by 4 1/4 inches square, 5/16 inch thick. Provide cushion edge units with bright gloss and smooth matted finishes. 2. Trim and Special Shapes: Rounded external corners, and trim shapes at head, jamb and sills of openings, of same material and finish as field tile, and as follows: a. Base: Sanitary cove units. b. External Corners: Bullnose shapes, with a radius of not less than 3/4 inch, unless otherwise shown. c. Internal Corners: Field butted square, except use square corner, combination angle and stretches type cap. d. Recessed ceramic tile soap holder to match color and glaze of wall tile. 3. Colors: a. Wall Colors: To be chosen by Engineer. 4. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Bright and Matte Series with No. BA35 Soap Holder by American Olean Tile Company. b. Dal-Crystaltex and Dal-Coordinates by DalTile Corp. c. Or Equal. 5. Provide complete selection of all special radiused cove base, bullnosed, stair tread, and riser shapes and other special trim shapes as shown, or as required for a complete installation. Provide same material, color, size, and finish as floor tile, unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents. 6. Colors: Provide specified manufacturer’s complete selection of standard and custom colors for final selection by ENGINEER. ENGINEER will select maximum of four colors. D. Thin-Set Mortar: 1. Provide high-performance, high-tack, non-flammable, non-toxic, water cleanable, ceramic tile mortar. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Laticrete 272 Premium Floor N’ Wall Thin-Set Mortar gauged with Laticrete 3701 Mortar Admix by Latricrete International, Inc. b. ProSpec Superior Permaflex 600 by Bonsal American, Inc. c. Or equal. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Latex-Portland Cement Bond Coat: Provide pre-blended, pre-sanded, portland cement mortar with latex additives complying with ANSI A118.4. 4. Physical Properties: Provide the following: a. Compressive Strength, ANSI A118.4: 2,500 psi, minimum. b. Water Absorption, ANSI A118.7: Four percent, maximum. c. Shear Bond, Porcelain Tile, Water Immersion, ANSI A118.4: 300 psi, minimum. d. Service Rating (TCNA), ASTM C627: Cycles 1 to 14 “extra heavy”. e. VOC Content: 0.00 grams per liter. E. Grout: Provide the following grout for areas receiving the Work of this Section: 1. Provide high-performance, premium sanded grout complying with ANSI A118.7 and recommended by grout manufacturer as acceptable for use in extra-heavy commercial and industrial applications. 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Laticrete 500 Series gauged with Laticrete 1776 Grout Admix Plus by Laticrete International, Inc. b. ProSpec Sanded Tile Grout (700) by, Bonsal American, Inc. c. Or equal. 3. Latex-Portland Cement Grout: Provide sanded cement grout consisting of blended mix of portland cement, graded aggregates, and color-fast pigments mixed with latex additive in place of water, complying with ANSI A118.7. 4. Physical Properties: a. Compressive Strength, ANSI A118.7: 3,500 psi, minimum. b. Water Absorption, ANSI A118.7: Five percent, maximum. c. Hardness, ASTM D2240: 60 to 70 D-Scale; 72 hours. d. Linear Shrinkage, ANSI A118.7: 0.19 percent, seven-day maximum. e. Service Rating (TCNA), ASTM C627: Cycles 1 to 14 “extra heavy”. f. VOC Content: 0.00 g/L. 5. Colors: Provide specified manufacturer’s complete selection of standard and custom colors for final selection by ENGINEER. ENGINEER will select maximum of four colors. F. Tile Backer Panels: 1. Refer to Section 09 21 16, Gypsum Board Assemblies. G. Auxiliary Materials: 1. Thresholds: a. Provide sound Group “A” marble with an abrasive hardness of not less than 10.0 when tested in accordance with ASTM C241. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Provide beige colored, honed marble, complying with ASTM C503, for thresholds, where shown. 2. Metal Lath: ASTM C847, galvanized expanded metal lath, 3.4 pounds per square yard. 3. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Provide one of the following complying with ASTM A82 and ASTM A185. a. Two inch by two inch mesh, 16/16 wire. b. Three inch by three inch mesh, 13/13 wire. c. 1.5 inch by two inch mesh, 16/13 wire. 4. Cleavage Membrane: Provide polyethylene sheeting, four mils thick, complying with ASTM C171. 5. Burlap or Cheese Cloth: Provide to keep drainage layer free of mortar from mortar bed installation Work. 6. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joint materials in accordance with TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation and applicable ANSI installation standards. Provide expansion joint assemblies with neoprene filler between metal flanges. 7. Metal Edge Strip: Provide (--1--)stainless steel metal edge strip with integral provisions for anchorage to substrate for transition between ceramic tile and other floor materials. 8. Temporary Protective Coating: Provide petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with melting point of 120 degrees F to 140 degrees F in compliance with ASTM C87, formulated to protect exposed ceramic tile surfaces against adherence of modified portland-cement mortars and grouts. Temporary protective coating shall be easily removable after grouting completion without damaging grout or tile. 9. Ceramic Tile Cleaner: Neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, and recommended for cleaning ceramic tile and modified portland-cement materials by the tile and grout manufacturers. 10. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 11. Water: Clean and potable. 2.03 MIXES A. Setting Bed Cement Mortar: 1. Provide latex-portland cement setting bed mortar mixed in accordance with ANSI A108.1 and manufacturer’s written specifications. 2. Machine-mix in mortar Supplier-approved mixer in which quantity of water is accurately and uniformly controlled. 3. Add only sufficient water to produce workable mix allowing for maximum compaction during tamping of mortar bed. B. For mixing of bond coats, grouts, and similar materials, comply with manufacturer’s instructions and applicable ANSI reference standards using in this Section. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine the substrates to receive mortar bed and ceramic tile and conditions under which the ceramic tile Work will be performed. Notify ENGINEER in writing of unsatisfactory tolerances that exceed specified limits in other work adjoining the ceramic tile Work, and other conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with installing ceramic tile Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Comply with recommendations for condition and inspection of surfaces, including tolerances, contained in the “Forward” and “General Requirements” of ANSI Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare and cure substrates in accordance with ANSI A108.1, setting bed mortar manufacturer’s recommendations, TCNA recommendations, and installation methods in applicable ANSI reference standards used in this Section. 1. Remove substances that are incompatible with ceramic tile setting materials by using terrazzo grinder, drum sander, or polishing machine equipped with heavy-duty wire brush. B. Provide structurally sound, dry substrate free of ridges and depressions and finished in accordance with installation method specified. C. Comply with ANSI suggestions for related trade preparations presented in the “Foreword” of ANSI American National Standard Specifications for the Installation of Ceramic Tile. D. Clean substrate of waxy and oily films and curing compounds. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install ceramic tiles in accordance with ANSI A108.1 and ANSI A10.20. B. Erection Tolerances: 1. Limit out-of-plane variation of ceramic tile floor to 1/4 inch in 20 feet. 2. Limit height offsets (lippage) between individual ceramic tiles to 1/32¬-inch. 3. Limit joint width variation to plus-or-minus 1/16-inch in 20 feet. C. Ceramic Tile Tolerances: 1. Comply with ASTM C499. 2. Determine structural defects in flat tile and trim units in accordance with Appendix of ANSI A137.1. D. Install ceramic floor tile and thresholds in accordance with TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, as follows: 1. Floor Tile: Handbook method F111, and in accordance with ANSI A108.5, except as otherwise specified. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Base Cove Alternative: Flush. 3. Thresholds: Install stone thresholds complying with TCNA, “Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation” Method TR611-2K. E. Ceramic Wall Tile: Install ceramic wall tile complying with TCNA, Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, as follows: 1. Wall Tile: Handbook method W243, and in accordance with ANSI A108.5, except as otherwise specified. F. Expansion Joints: 1. Install ceramic tile associated with expansion joints, control joints, and cold-joints in accordance with TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation, Method EJ171-2K. 2. Provide expansion joints in locations and in manner recom¬mended by TCNA and as shown. 3. Locate openings for expansion joints directly over structural joints in horizontal surfaces, where backing materials change and where ceramic tile Work abuts restraining surfaces such as perimeter walls, curbs, columns, piping, and conduits. 4. Width of openings for expansion joints over structural joints shall be at least as wide as corresponding structural joint. 5. Provide interior expansion joints same width as grout joints with minimum size of 1/4- inch. 6. Provide exterior expansion joints of 3/4-inch. Refer to Section 07 95 13, Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies. G. Provide 95-percent mortar bond coat coverage for each ceramic tile back. Back butter each tile with bond coat or select a notched trowel sized to facilitate proper coverage, key mortar into substrate with flat side of trowel, and comb with notched side of trowel in one direction. Embed tile in mortar by beating-in, pushing in direction perpendicular to combed ridges, or other means to achieve 95 percent coverage. Corners and edges shall be fully supported by bonding mortar. 1. Periodically remove and check ceramic tile in presence of ENGINEER to ensure that proper coverage is being attained. H. Extend ceramic tile Work into recesses and under equipment, fixtures, and permanent furniture such as laboratory metal casework, lockers, and shop equipment to form complete covering without interruptions, except as otherwise shown or indicated. Terminate ceramic tile Work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disruption of pattern or joint alignment. Provide standard pre-manufactured trim components. I. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of ceramic tile without marring visible surfaces. J. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight, aligned joints. Cut and ground edges shall be uniform and straight without marring tile faces. Extend ceramic tile half way under door thresholds. Fit ceramic tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, conduit, and fixtures so that plates, collars, or covers overlap ceramic tile. Use bullnosed tile adjacent to carpet. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements K. Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown or indicated, lay ceramic tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining ceramic tile on floor, base, and trim are same size. Lay out ceramic tile Work and center tile fields both directions in each space. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform (--1--)-inch joint widths. L. Grout joints (except control and expansion joints) with specified grout, in accordance with ANSI A108.10. 1. Dampen tile surfaces with water. Spread grout with a sharp, firm, rubber grout float. Work the grout paste into the joints until completely filled. Use diagonal strokes to pack the tile joints. Ensure that joints are filled and that grout is not bridging the joint. 2. Provide full flush joints for ceramic floor tiles by sprinkling thin layer of dry grout powder over surface immediately after grouting. When grout darkens over joint, buff with burlap, carpet remnant, or cotton rag to pack joint and clean face of tile. M. Protect ceramic tile against damage from high performance grout by coating exposed faces of tile with wax coating to produce a thin, continuous film. Use wax that is compatible with grout and is removable by steaming method approved by tile and grout manufacturer. Apply wax in manner to avoid coating edges or backs, and handle coated tile to prevent waxed surfaces from contacting the backs or edges or other units. N. Cure ceramic tile Work using materials and techniques recommended by mortar and grout manufacturer and ANSI A108.5. O. Do not use chipped, cracked, or defaced ceramic tile. P. Provide divider strips and accent strips to same depth as finished ceramic tile floor and wall system, including setting bed. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Remove grout and mortar from ceramic tile faces and adjoining Work before grout or mortar hardens. Follow grout and mortar manufacturer’s written recommendations for primary and secondary cleaning. Leave ceramic tile clean and free of foreign matter. B. Prohibit traffic from using ceramic tile floors for seven days after grouting is completed. C. Before traffic is allowed over finish ceramic tile floors, cover with heavy building paper. D. Lay board walkways on floors that are to be trucked-over. Provide continuous runways of required width installed over building paper. E. Remove protective wax surfacing in accordance with ceramic tile manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Do not acid clean unglazed ceramic tile unless allowed by ceramic tile manufacturer’s printed instructions and, if allowed, do so no earlier than 14 days after grouting. Mild acid cleaners that do not contain muriatic acid will be acceptable if recommended by ceramic tile manufacturer. Where acid cleaners are acceptable, comply with the following: 1. Soak unglazed ceramic tile with water before cleaning with saturated solution of sulfuric acid in room temperature water. 2. Protect metal and enamel surfaces, and cast iron and vitreous plumbing fixtures, from effects of acid cleaning by coating such items with petroleum jelly. Ceramic Tile 09 30 13 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Thoroughly flush ceramic tile with water before and after acid cleaning and restore protected surfaces to their original condition. G. Do not use acid or acid-based cleaners to clean glazed ceramic tile. H. Remove cracked, broken, unbounded, or damaged ceramic tile and replace with new material. I. Protection: 1. Protect adjoining work from the Work of this Section. 2. Where acid solutions are required to clean surfaces of finished Work, first cover exposed adjoining work to protect adjoining work from possible effect of acid or its fumes. 3. Clean adjoining surfaces soiled by ceramic tile Work. 4. Replace adjoining work damaged beyond repair by the Work of this Section. J. Immediately prior to inspection to determine Substantial Completion, remove protective coverings and wash ceramic tile floors and walls clean. END OF SECTION Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install acoustical panel ceilings. The Work also includes: a. Providing openings in acoustical panel ceilings to accommodate the Work under this and other Sections and building into the acoustical panel ceilings all items to be embedded in, or penetrate, acoustical panel ceilings. b. Providing openings in acoustical panel ceilings to accommodate the work under other contracts and assisting other contractors in building into the acoustical panel ceilings all items furnished under other contracts that are required to be embedded in, or penetrate, acoustical panel ceilings. 2. Extent of acoustical panel ceilings is shown. 3. Types of products include the following: a. Non-directionally textured, ceramic, acoustical panel ceiling tiles. b. Intermediate-duty, exposed acoustical panel suspension system. c. Acoustical sealants. d. Miscellaneous fasteners, clips, hangers, tie-wire and other accessories. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the acoustical panel ceilings Work. 2. Coordinate furnishing and installing products for maintaining the fire-resistance-rating of ceiling construction at perimeters and penetrations where built-in and recessed items and transitions with other building components occur in the acoustical panel ceilings Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation. 2. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM). a. ASTM A 153/A 153M, Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. ASTM A 366/A 366M, Specification for Commercial Steel Sheet, Carbon, (0.15 maximum percent) Cold-Rolled. c. ASTM A 510, Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, d. ASTM A 641/A 641M, Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire. e. ASTM B 221, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. f. ASTM C 423, Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. g. ASTM C 635, Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panel Ceilings. h. ASTM C 636, Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. i. ASTM C 834, Specification for Latex Sealants. j. ASTM E 84, Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. k. ASTM E 119, Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. l. ASTM E 413, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation. m. ASTM E 488, Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements. n. ASTM E 580, Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. o. ASTM E 795, Practice for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests. p. ASTM E 1264, Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products. q. ASTM E 1414, Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. r. ASTM E 1477, Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers. s. ASTM F 593, Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws and Studs. t. ASTM F 594, Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts. 2. Architectural Metal Products Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, (AMP). a. AMP, 501, Finishes for Aluminum. 3. Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association, (CISCA). a. CISCA, Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice. b. CISCA, Ceiling Systems Handbook. 4. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., (UL). a. UL, Fire Resistance Directory. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Engage a single installer regularly performing installation of acoustical panel ceilings with documented skill and successful experience in the installation of the types of materials required; and who agrees to employee only tradesmen who are trained, skilled and have successful experience in installing the types of materials specified. 2. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects: a. Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. b. Approximate contract cost of the acoustical panel ceilings. c. Amount of area installed. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: The independent testing agency shall demonstrate to ENGINEER’S satisfaction, based on evaluation of criteria submitted by testing agency, that it has the experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct the testing indicated without delaying the Work. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Wherever a fire-resistance-rated construction assembly classification is shown or scheduled that includes acoustical panel ceiling assemblies (2-hour, 1-hour and similar designations), provide components complying with the applicable requirements for materials and installation established by UL, and other governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. 2. UL Compliance: Comply with UL’s “Fire Resistance Directory”, for applicable fire-resistant construction systems. 3. Size anchorage devices for ceiling hangers for three times supported load, except size direct-pull concrete inserts for five times supported load, for structural classification specified, complying with ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung, unless more stringent requirements are specified by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site and in compliance with ASTM E 488. 4. Attachment Devices: Size internal attachment devices within suspended ceiling system for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung. D. Source Quality Control: 1. Furnish all components of each acoustical panel ceiling system from a single manufacturer and from a single supplier with adequate resources to provide products of consistent performance characteristics, physical properties and appearance, without delaying the Work. E. Mock-Ups: 1. Before proceeding with final purchase of materials and installation of acoustical panel ceiling systems, but after ENGINEER'S acceptance of Samples and Shop Drawings, install 100 square foot samples of each type of acoustical panel ceiling system, including all Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements accessory trim, insulation specified in Section 07 21 05, Building Insulation, control and expansion joints specified in Section 07 95 13, Expansion Joint Cover Assemblies, built-in items that may be specified in other Sections, indicating the final relationship and configurations of the various parts and components and the quality of workmanship that shall be achieved in the Work. Locate mock-ups in areas selected by ENGINEER to show a representative installation of each type of acoustical panel ceiling system. 2. Incorporate materials and methods of installation that are identical to Project requirements. 3. Obtain ENGINEER'S acceptance of visual qualities of mock-up before start of acoustical panel ceiling Work. Retain and protect mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed acoustical panel ceiling. Do not alter or remove approved mock-ups. 4. Build as many mock-ups as required to obtain ENGINEER'S acceptance. Disassemble rejected mock-ups and remove all components from Site. Do not incorporate rejected mock-up components into the Work. Accepted mock-up may be incorporated into the finished Work. 5. Acoustical panel ceiling Work that proceeds without approved mock-ups shall be stopped, and mock-ups prepared for ENGINEER’S acceptance. 6. Acoustical panel ceilings that do not meet the standard of workmanship on the accepted mock-up shall be removed and replaced with new material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Copies of manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system. Include certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these Specifications. b. Include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning and refinishing acoustical units, including precautions against materials and methods, which may be detrimental to finishes and acoustical performances. 2. Reflected ceiling plans of suspension systems, showing hanger, anchor and acoustical panel locations, drawn to a scale of 1/4-inch equal to 1 foot-0 inch, and details of all transitions of acoustical panels with other items such as light fixtures, air diffusers, and perimeter walls and all supporting and suspension system details, including method of attachment of suspension system hangers to building structure, drawn to a scale of 3/4- inches equal to 1 foot-0 inches. a. Show and coordinate locations of ceiling-mounted items, automatic fire suppression system sprinkler heads, speakers, and penetrations for other items of Work that are to be coordinated with the ceiling, and show framing and support details for Work supported by the suspension system. b. Complete information on all anchors and supports indicating maximum resistance to tension, in compliance with performance criteria specified. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Samples: a. Full size samples for each acoustical panel specified. Samples shall show the full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in the completed Work. b. 12-inch long samples of each exposed runner and molding. c. ENGINEER'S review will be for color and texture only. Compliance with other requirements is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: a. Certify compliance with ASTM C 635 and other specified requirements, and indicate structural classification of each type of suspension system. b. Evidence of acoustical panel ceiling system’s compliance with requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. c. Certified field quality control test reports for required anchor performance tests. 2. Qualifications Statements: a. Installer. b. Testing laboratory. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded, in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver accepted materials in original, unopened, undamaged, protective packaging, with manufacturer's and testing and inspection agencies labels accurately indicating brand name, pattern, size, thickness and fire-resistance-rating of packaged materials. 3. All markings and labels shall be legible and intact. 4. Inspect acoustical panel ceiling materials and reject components differing from accepted Samples and Shop Drawings. Immediately remove rejected components from the Site and do not incorporate into the Work. 5. Handle materials in a manner that avoids chipping edges or damaging units in any way and as recommended by manufacturer’s approved installation recommendations and the recommendations of specified standards. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store materials in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage and constantly within limits of manufacturer’s written recommended environmental conditions. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting. 4. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Before installing acoustical panels permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 2. Do not install interior acoustical panel ceilings until the space has been enclosed and is weathertight, and until installation of moisture-bearing material in the space has been completed and the space is nominally dry, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity are continuously maintained at levels indicated for final occupancy. B. Scheduling: 1. Do not begin installation of acoustical panel ceilings until all Work above ceilings has been completed and accepted by ENGINEER. 2. Furnish cast-in-place, and built-in-place anchors and their locations, to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordinating locations of acoustical panel ceiling supports with other Work that must share plenum area above acoustical panel ceilings. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: 1. At time of completing the installation, deliver stock of extra material and store in a secure area at the Site as directed by OWNER. Furnish full-size units, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with appropriate labels. 2. Acoustical Panels: Furnish an amount equal to two percent of the amount installed, or at least one full package of acoustical panels. 3. Do not provide partial packages of materials. Round-up quantities to furnish only complete, unopened and undamaged packages; with legible labels accurately representing contents of package indicating compliance with approved Samples and Shop Drawings, and matching materials actually installed. 4. Submit quantities of each system component required for the Work, based on actual purchase order to manufacturer for materials to be used on this Project, with calculations establishing quantity of extra materials to be furnished to OWNER. 2.00 PRODUCTS Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2.01 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Performance Criteria: 1. General: a. Standards: Provide manufacturer’s standard acoustical panel ceiling systems that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light deflections. b. References: In general, the recommendations of CISCA, “Acoustical Ceilings: Use and Practice” shall be considered part of this Section, unless otherwise specified. c. Standards for Terminology and Performance: Applicable publications by the Ceiling and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA), including “Ceiling Systems Handbook” and ASTM C 635. 2. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): The average of sound absorption coefficients when tested in accordance with ASTM C 423 for a specification range of ten points, for middle frequencies of 250, 500, 1000, and 2000 Hertz with face of test specimen mounted in compliance with ASTM C 795 for Mounting Type E-400 (400 millimeter air space) standard mounting according to ASTM E 1264. Provide not less than the following: a. NRC Rating: Range of 0.50, except as otherwise specified. 3. Ceiling Attenuation Class: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that have been tested for sound transmission loss through the acoustical tile ceiling, determined in accordance with ASTM E 1414 and ASTM E 413. Provide not less than the following: a. CAC Class: 40, for Mounting Type E-400. 2.02 CEILING PANELS A. General: Unless otherwise specified, provide standard lay-in panels of the type selected by ENGINEER. Provide sizes shown on reflected ceiling plans or, if not otherwise shown, 24- inch by 48-inch grid-size panels. B. Acoustical Panels: 1. Mineral Fiber Acoustical Panels: Provide units not less than 15/163/4-inch thick and of density not less than 1.25 pounds per square foot, medium-coarse non-directional texture, NRC 0.50 to 0.60, STC 35-39, light reflectance over 67 percent. [1] 2. Surface Finish: Factory-applied white vinyl latex paint. 3. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: a. Cirrus Tegulant beveled edge by Armstrong World Industries, Inc. b. Frost shadow line tapered edge by USG. c. Or equal. 2.03 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 635, as applicable to the type of suspension system required for the type of acoustical panel ceiling units specified. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Structural Class, Heavy-Duty System (Direct Hung): 16 pounds per linear foot of main runners, minimum. a. Main Runners: 0.020-inch thick metal, minimum. b. Cross Tees: 0.020-inch thick metal, minimum. B. Exposed Suspension System: Manufacturer's standard, 5/16-inch wide by 1-1/2-inch high exposed runners, cross-runners and accessories, with exposed cross runners stepped to lay flush with main runners; manufactured from hot-dipped galvanized G90, commercial steel CS Type B, complying with ASTM A 653; double-webbed construction with stainless steel clip end tap feature interlocking with cross tee slots to prevent lateral pull-out. 1. Finish of Exposed Members: Provide uniform factory-applied finish on exposed surfaces of ceiling suspension system including moldings, trim and accessories. a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish, white, unless otherwise selected by ENGINEER. b. Finish: Natural color anodized aluminum, 0.4-mil coating, NAAMM AA-C22A31. C. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. 1200 System and Fire Front 1250 Direct Hung Suspension Systems by Chicago Metallic Corporation. 2. Or equal. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Hangers: 1. Wire Hangers: Galvanized, soft-temper steel wire complying with ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class C zinc coating, pre-stretched; bare steel diameter of 8-gauge (0.162-inch). 2. Anchors: a. Provide built in place anchors abricated from stainless steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Group 1, alloy Type 316 for bolts, and anchors with holes or loops for attaching hangers. b. Comply with ASTM E 488 for concrete inserts, clips, bolts, screws and other devices applicable to the indicated method of structural anchorage for acoustical panel ceiling hangers. B. Hold-Down Clips for Non-Fire-Resistance-Rated Ceilings: For interior ceilings consisting of acoustical panels weighing less than one pound per square foot, provide hold-down clips spaced 2 foot-0 inches on centers on all cross tees. C. Sheet Metal Edge Molding and Trim: Type and profile shown, or if not shown, manufacturer's standard metal channel molding for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems specified; formed from commercial grade sheet steel of same material, color and finish as used for exposed flanges of suspension system members. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 2. For circular penetrations in ceiling, provide shop-fabricated edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetrations exactly. 3. For narrow-face suspension systems, provide suspension system and manufacturer’s standard edge moldings that match width and configuration of exposed runners. D. Extruded Aluminum Edge Molding and Trim: Type and profile shown, or if not shown, manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum molding for edges and penetrations that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems specified; including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying with the following: 1. Aluminum Alloy: 6063-T5 complying with ASTM B 221. 2. Finish of Exposed Members: Provide the following finish for all edge moldings and trim components: a. Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish, white, unless otherwise selected by ENGINEER. b. Finish: Natural color anodized aluminum, 0.4-mil coating; NAAMM AA-C22A31 complying with AMP 501. E. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Provide a modified acrylic-latex, non- sag, paintable, non-staining, sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90 and acceptable for use with UL Design Designations specified. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the conditions under which the acoustical panel ceiling Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Concrete Inserts: Provide inserts for incorporation into formwork. Furnish layouts for cast- in-place ceiling support anchors whose installation is specified in other Sections. B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid the use of less-than-half width panels at borders and comply with accepted Shop Drawing layout. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. As a minimum standard, unless otherwise shown, specified, required by accepted Shop Drawings, or governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with CISCA’s “Ceiling System Handbook.” 2. Where acoustical panel ceilings must resist lateral forces, comply with requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site and ASTM E 580. B. Install suspension systems to comply with ASTM C 636, with hangers supported only from building structural members. Locate hangers near each end and spaced four feet along each carrying channel or direct-hung runners, unless otherwise shown. 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required and, if permitted by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site for fire-resistance-rated construction assemblies, to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter-splaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other obstructions within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing that interfere with the location of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by Reference Standards and publications. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members by looping or wire-tying with a minimum of three tight turns, either directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, clips or other anchorage devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 7. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit. Sway-brace suspended steel framing with hangers used for support. 9. Space hangers not more than 4 foot-0 inches on centers along each member, supported directly from hangers and provide hangers not more than 8-inches from ends of each member. 10. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from structural members as required for hangers, without attaching top permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or post-installed anchors. 11. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. C. Arrange acoustical panels and orient directionally-patterned panels in the manner shown on accepted Shop Drawings. Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspension system, with edges concealed by support of suspension members. 2. Install acoustical panels with pattern running in one direction. 3. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 4. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. 5. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 6. Install hold-down clips in areas shown, and in areas where required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site, or for fire-resistance-ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer, unless otherwise specified. D. Install edge moldings and trim of the type shown at edges of each acoustical ceiling area, and at locations where edge of units would otherwise be exposed after completion of the Work. 1. Sealant Bed: Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon, concealed on back of vertical legs of molding before fastening to vertical surface. 2. Secure moldings to building construction by fastening with screw-anchors into the substrate, through holes drilled in vertical leg. Space holes not more than 3- inches from each end and not more than 16-inches on centers along each molding, leveling with ceiling suspension system to tolerances specified. 3. Miter corners of moldings accurately to provide hair-line joints, securely connected to prevent dislocation. 4. Do not use exposed fasteners, including blind rivets, on molding or trim. E. Install sound attenuation insulation in areas shown. Lay insulation directly on ceiling system, and close major openings to completely cover all areas shown to receive sound attenuation insulation. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: 1. CONTRACTOR shall engage a qualified independent testing agency, accepted by ENGINEER, to perform quality control testing. 2. Perform all specified testing in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E 488. 3. Extent and Testing Frequency: Testing shall take place in successive stages in areas described below. Proceed with installation of acoustical panel ceilings only after results for previously installed hangers comply with requirements. 4. Extent of Each Test Area: When installation of ceiling suspension systems on each floor has reached 20 percent completion, but no acoustical panels have been installed, perform the following tests: 5. Within each test area testing agency will, select one of every ten anchors used to attach hangers to concrete and will test them for 1,140 pounds of tension. It will also select Acoustical Panel Ceilings 09 51 13 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements one of every two post-installed anchors used to attach bracing wires to concrete and will test them for 1,620 pounds of tension. 6. When testing discovers fasteners and anchors that do not comply with requirements, testing agency will test those anchors not previously tested until twenty consecutively pass and then will resume initial testing frequency. 7. Testing agency shall report test results promptly and in writing to ENGINEER. 8. Where fasteners and anchors are removed and replaced, additional testing shall be performed to determine compliance with specified requirements. B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Surfaces to Receive Acoustical Treatment: Free from irregularities and level to within 1/4-inch in 12 feet. 2. Deflection: 3. Suspension System Components, Hangers, and Fastening Devices Supporting Light Fixtures, Ceiling Grilles, and Acoustical Units: Maximum deflection 1/360 of the span. 4. Deflection Test: ASTM C 635. 5. Allowable Tolerance of Finished Acoustical Ceiling System: Level within 1/8-inch in 12 feet-0 inches. 6. Accessibility Percentage: 100. 3.05 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Do not proceed with installation of acoustical panels until testing is completed and non- complying fasteners and anchors have been replaced with new material complying with the requirements of these Specifications. B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace Work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. C. Installer shall advise CONTRACTOR and ENGINEER of required protection for the acoustical panel ceilings, including manufacturer’s recommended temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the Work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall provide required protection. END OF SECTION Concrete Hardener 09 61 53 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 09 61 53 CONCRETE HARDENER 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all concrete hardener Work. 2. The extent of the concrete hardener includes all interior concrete floors not shown or scheduled to be finished with another material. 3. The types of concrete hardener Work required include, but are not necessarily limited to, silicate penetrant. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with, or before, the concrete hardener Work. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: Engage a single installer regularly engaged in the installation of concrete hardeners with five years experience in the application of the types of materials required, and who agrees to employ only tradesmen with specific skills and experience in this type of Work. Installer shall meet the requirements of the concrete hardener manufacturer for providing guarantee coverage. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER. B. Source Quality Control: Obtain all material from only one manufacturer who will send a qualified technical representative to the Site for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the material, at no additional cost to the OWNER. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Copies of manufacturer’s specifications, recommendations and installation instructions. Include manufacturer’s published data, indicating the material complies with the requirements and is intended for the application shown. b. Submit installer's qualifications in accordance with Article 1.2, above. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: Submit a certificate of coverage signed by a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer. Concrete Hardener 09 61 53 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Data: Upon completion of the Work, furnish five copies of detailed maintenance manual including the following information: a. Product name and number. b. Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedure for light repair such as scratches and staining. 2. Guarantee Documentation: a. Submit for approval written guarantee agreeing to replace the concrete hardener should it fail to perform as specified in Article 1.6, below. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: 1. Deliver materials to the Site to ensure uninterrupted progress of the Work. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices which are to be embedded, in ample time to prevent delay of that Work. 2. Deliver materials in concrete hardener manufacturer’s original unopened containers. 3. Include the following information on the label: a. Name of material and supplier. b. Formula or specification number, lot number and date of manufacturer. c. Mixing instructions, shelf life and curing time when applicable. 4. Failure to comply with these requirements shall be sufficient cause for the rejection of the material in question, by ENGINEER, and requiring its removal from the Site. In such a case, supply new material conforming to the specified requirements, at no additional cost to OWNER. 5. Handle materials carefully to prevent inclusion of foreign materials. 6. Do not open containers or mix components until all necessary preparatory Work has been completed. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep all material off the ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 2. Store materials so as to preclude the inclusion of foreign material. 3. Protect material from freezing. C. Acceptance at Site: 1. All boxes, crates and packages shall be inspected by CONTRACTOR upon delivery to the Site. CONTRACTOR shall notify ENGINEER, in writing, if any loss or damage exists to Concrete Hardener 09 61 53 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements equipment or components. Replace loss and repair damage to new condition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: 1. Do not apply concrete hardener to uncured concrete. Comply with manufacturer’s written instructions for minimum ten days of curing time. 2. Apply hardener only when temperature of concrete is 50°F or above. B. Protection: 1. Do not allow concrete hardener to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces. 2. Remove concrete hardener that is splashed on surfaces not designated to receive concrete hardener immediately by flushing with water. C. Sequencing: 1. Coordinate the Work so that the concrete hardener is installed when best results will be obtained, as recommended by the manufacturer’s technical representative. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. Provide a five year written guarantee, signed by CONTRACTOR and installer, stating that should concrete floors show signs of dusting because of wear and abrasion they will be re- installed, in the manner specified herein, at no additional cost to OWNER, from the date of Final Acceptance of the Work. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete Hardener: Provide a clear, colorless, aqueous solution of chemically active silicates and fluosilicates plus a wetting and penetrating agent, that reacts with the free lime and calcium carbonates to bind soft, loose particles together and form a hard dense vitreous surface which is resistant to chemical attack and the growth of mildew, fungi and other organisms. Use potable water only. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1. Lapidolith by Sonneborn Division of Contech, Incorporated. 2. Armortop by Anti-Hydro Waterproofing Company. 3. Or equal. 2.03 MIXES A. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for the proper mixing, dilution and coverage of each coat. Concrete Hardener 09 61 53 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2.04 FINISH A. The finished installation of the concrete hardener shall have a smooth, uniform even finish without discontinuities or discolorations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the substrates and the conditions under which the concrete hardener Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work and performance of the concrete hardener. Do not proceed with the concrete hardener Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 SUBSTRATE PREPARATION A. Steel trowel concrete in strict accordance with printed directions supplied by the concrete hardener manufacturer. B. Provide concrete free of all honeycombing and fins. C. Do not use sealers, curing or parting compounds on the concrete. D. Provide wet curing only. E. Surfaces to receive concrete hardener shall be clean, dry and free of all loose dirt, oil, wax and other foreign matter. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Provide the services of a manufacturer’s technical representative for the purpose of advising the installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the material prior and during the installation of the concrete hardener. B. Apply concrete hardener using the coverage recommended by the manufacturer per coat. C. Apply a minimum of three separate coats. D. Apply a fourth coat using undiluted material should the manufacturer’s technical representative recommend this procedure, based on field conditions, and as directed by ENGINEER. E. Apply each coat by spray. F. Mop up excess solution or puddles. G. After each of the first and second applications, allow the floor to dry until no longer visibly wet. H. To avoid the development of crystals, when applying the third coat, flush the surface liberally with clean, hot water. At the same time, brush the floor rapidly with a stiff-bristle broom. Mop up excess water. I. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions should white crystals develop after the first or second coat. Consult manufacturer’s technical representative. Concrete Hardener 09 61 53 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of concrete hardener resulting from the Work. Use solvent or cleaning agent recommended by the concrete hardener manufacturer. Leave all finished Work in a clean neat appearance. B. Protect the concrete hardener until fully cured. END OF SECTION Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 09 65 05 RESILIENT FLOORING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install resilient flooring. 2. Extent of resilient flooring is shown. 3. Types of products required include the following: a. Vinyl floor tile. b. Vinyl cove base and pre-molded cove base corners. c. Vinyl sanitary cove base and pre-molded sanitary cove base corners. d. Edging strips. e. Floor and tile adhesive. f. Cove adhesive. g. Miscellaneous accessories, fillers and fasteners. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures under this and other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed with or before, the resilient flooring Work. 2. Coordinate requirements for maximum safe moisture-emission level of concrete slabs in compliance with resilient flooring manufacturer’s written recommendations and in compliance with ASTM E 1643 and Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 3. Coordinate the finishing of substrates for acceptability of substrates to resilient flooring manufacturer, as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 4. Remove all chemicals, compounds and other materials from substrates to receive the Work of this Section, as may be required by the resilient flooring manufacturer, even if other Sections permit chemicals, compounds and other materials. 5. Coordinate and schedule filling and grinding of cementitious underlayments to avoid later difficulty or delay in performing the resilient flooring installation Work. 6. Coordinate required thickness of cementitious underlayments with doors, thresholds, piping and equipment, adjacent materials and similar items in order to provide smoothly aligned transitions acceptable to ENGINEER and in compliance with governing authorities. 7. Coordinate the use of products specified in other Sections to provide substrates acceptable to the resilient flooring manufacturer and ENGINEER. 8. Coordinate the installation of moisture barriers and insulation, specified in other Sections, to substrates before the installation of resilient flooring. Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Standards referenced in this Section are listed below: 1. The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (Public Law 101-336), Appendix A to Title 28 Code of Federal Regulations Part 36 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities - ADAAG. 2. ASTM C 501, Test Method for Relative Resistance to Wear of Unglazed Ceramic Tile by the Taber Abraser. 3. ASTM D 2047, Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. 4. ASTM D 2240, Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. 5. ASTM E 648, Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 6. ASTM E 662, Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 7. ASTM E 1643, Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 8. ASTM F 386, Test Method for Thickness of Resilient Flooring Material Shaving Flat Surfaces. 9. ASTM F 540, Test Method for Squareness of Resilient Tile Flooring by Dial Gage Method. 10. ASTM F 710, Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. 11. ASTM F 925, Test Method for Resistance to Chemicals of Resilient Flooring. 12. ASTM F 1344, Specification for Rubber Floor Tile. 13. F 1516- Practice for Sealing Seams of Resilient Flooring Products by the Heat Weld Method (when Recommended). 14. F 1700 Specification for Solid Vinyl Floor Tile. 15. F 1859 Specification for Rubber Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing. 16. F 1861, Specification for Resilient Wall Base. 17. F 1869, Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride. 18. ASTM F 1913, Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing. 19. ASTM F 2170, Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Slabs in Situ Probes. 20. Code of Federal Regulations, CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Consumer Products. Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 21. ISO, 9002, Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Production, Installation and Servicing. 22. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 253, Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 23. National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 258, Method of Test for Specific Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: 1. Provide all components of resilient flooring system and auxiliary products produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives and edging strips, as required. 2. Provide products from manufacturer who participates in ISO certification programs and who manufacture resilient flooring systems and auxiliary products conforming to the requirements of those programs. B. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Engage a single installer regularly performing installation of resilient flooring with documented skill and successful experience in the installation of the types of materials required; and who agrees to employee only tradesmen who are trained, skilled and have successful experience in installing the types of materials specified. 2. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with the following information on a minimum of three successful projects: a. Names and telephone numbers of owners, architects or engineers responsible for projects. b. Approximate contract cost of the resilient flooring. c. Amount of area installed. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Furnish all components of resilient flooring system from a single manufacturer, and from a single supplier with adequate resources to provide products of consistent performance characteristics, physical properties and appearance, without delaying the Work. 2. Obtain materials only from manufacturers who will, if required, send a qualified technical representative to the Site, for the purpose of advising installer of proper procedures and precautions for the use of the materials. 3. Provide products from manufacturers who participate in ISO 9002 Quality Control Programs. 4. Colors and Patterns: Provide resilient floor tile and stair-covering units with uniformly distributed color and pattern throughout the thickness of the tile, except as otherwise specified. Variation in shades and off pattern matches between containers will not be acceptable. Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements D. Definitions: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): According to ASTM E 648, the measure of the ability of a floor covering to resist the spread of flames when located in a corridor exposed to flames and hot gases from a room fire. The higher the CRF value, the more resistant the material is to flame spread. 2. Excessive Wear: Loss of thickness of more than 0.0025-inches of rubber material per year based on specified traffic conditions. 3. Low Vibration Profile: The combination of resilient rubber compounds and tile profile design that will eliminate or noticeably reduce vibration of wheeled vehicles. Wheels of 4-inch diameter or greater should cause no vibration or noticeable sound and should not contribute to ambient noise. 4. Migrating Waxes: Waxes and soil-releasing agents that are chemically a component of the product’s formulation, continually traveling to the product’s surface when activated by use. 5. Non-Solvent Adhesives: Adhesives with a non-solvent base requiring no open time to permit solvent flash. 6. Optical Smoke Density: The optical density of smoke developed by burning a solid material, such as resilient flooring, established according to ASTM E 662. E. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Wherever a flame spread, smoke development or CRF classification is shown or specified for resilient flooring (Class B, Class I and similar designations), provide components complying with applicable requirements for materials and installation established by ASTM, and other governing authorities having jurisdiction at the Site. F. Mock-Ups: 1. Before proceeding with final purchase of materials and installation of resilient flooring systems, but after ENGINEER'S approval of Samples and Shop Drawings, install 100 square foot samples of each component of resilient flooring system, and one landing and run of stairs including all stair flooring components and accessory trim, indicating the final relationship and configurations of the various parts and components and the quality of workmanship that will be achieved in the Work. Locate mock-ups in areas selected by ENGINEER to show a representative installation of each type of resilient flooring system. 2. Incorporate materials and methods of installation that are identical to Project requirements. 3. Obtain ENGINEER'S acceptance of visual qualities of mock-up before start of resilient flooring system Work. Retain and protect mock-up during construction as a standard for judging completed resilient flooring. Do not alter or remove approved mock-ups. 4. Build as many mock-ups as required to obtain ENGINEER'S acceptance. Disassemble rejected mock-ups and remove all components from Site. Do not incorporate rejected mock-up components into the Work. Accepted mock-up may be incorporated into the finished Work. Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 5. Resilient flooring system Work that proceeds without approved mock-ups shall be stopped, and mock-ups prepared for ENGINEER’S approval. 6. Resilient flooring that does not meet the standard of workmanship on approved mock- ups shall be removed and replaced with new material. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Plans drawn to a scale of 1/4-inch equal to 1 foot-0 inch showing all flooring and all stair covering units and components accurately located in final positions as they will occur in the finished Work, and showing actual dimensions of areas to receive the Work. Show all patterns required for the Work and the location of each color and texture required for each tile pattern. b. Details drawn to a scale of 1-1/2-inches equal to 1 foot-0 inch showing all intersections of stair covering components with actual dimensions of stair treads, risers, landings and stringers and with all products accurately located and positioned as they will occur in the finished Work. 2. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of resilient flooring, stair floor covering, auxiliary material and accessory required. 3. Samples: Submit the following: a. Each type and color of resilient flooring and stair floor covering required. Provide full size samples of each type of flooring and stair covering product and 12-inch lengths of each auxiliary product and accessory specified. b. Samples shall show the full range of color and pattern variation. Sample submittals will be reviewed for color, texture and pattern only. Compliance with all other requirements is the responsibility of CONTRACTOR. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Product certificates signed by the manufacturer certifying materials comply with the specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements. b. Certified Installer. 2. Test Results: Certified test reports showing compliance with specifiedperformance characteristics and physical properties. 3. Site Quality Control submittals: a. Existing Conditions Report. C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Operations and Maintenance Data: Furnish five copies of manufacturer's instructions for recommended maintenance practices for each type of resilient flooring, including the following: a. Product name and number. b. Name, address and telephone number of manufacturer and local distributor. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as dents, scratches and staining 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards, Section 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements and Section 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: 1. the existing conditions effecting the surface preparation and installation of resilient flooring and submit a report to the ENGINEER before installation. Existing facilities must meet all the requirements listed in 1.6.B. below. All deficiencies must be corrected before beginning installation. B. Environmental Requirements: 1. Do not begin installation until permanent environmental control systems are operating as needed to maintain consistent temperatures in installation areas. Continuously maintain temperature in areas to receive resilient flooring systems at 68°F for at least 48 hours prior to, during, and 48 hours after installation. 2. Perform moisture testing of cast-in-place concrete slabs when temperature in the spaces where resilient flooring will be installed is greater than 50°F. C. Scheduling. 1. Schedule the arrival of materials to minimize storage on-Site and only as required by manufacturer to allow materials to acclimate to areas of installation. 2. Store only sufficient quantities of material on-Site as required to advance the Work without causing delays. 3. Close spaces to traffic during flooring installation and for time after installation recommended, in writing, by the resilient flooring manufacturer. 4. Install resilient flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 5. Where demountable partitions and similar demountable items are indicated for installation on top of resilient flooring, install resilient flooring before these items are installed. 1.07 WARRANTY Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. General Warranty: The special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive OWNER of other rights or remedies OWNER may otherwise have under the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by CONTRACTOR under the Contract Documents. B. Special Warranties: 1. Resilient Flooring Wear Warranty: Provide written warranty, signed by CONTRACTOR and manufacturer and running to benefit of OWNER, agreeing to replace, for a period of ten years from the date of Substantial Completion, resilient tile units that show excessive wear, as specified. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Extra Materials: 1. Furnish extra materials from the same manufactured lot as the materials installed. 2. Unless otherwise directed by the ENGINEER, furnish two percent of each type and color of resilient flooring, stair floor covering, auxiliary material and accessory used in the Work and store in a secure area at the Site as directed by OWNER. 3. Do not provide partial containers or packages of materials. Round-up quantities to furnish only complete, unopened and undamaged containers and packages; with legible labels accurately representing contents of container or package indicating compliance with approved Samples and Shop Drawings, and matching materials actually installed. 4. Submit quantities of each system component required for the Work, based on actual purchase order to manufacturer for materials to be used on this Project, with calculations establishing quantity of extra materials to be furnished to OWNER. 5. Do not furnish materials whose remaining shelf life will be less than six months, at the time of Substantial Completion. Furnish only materials that are accompanied by a documented record of proof of being continuously stored and handled according to manufacturer’s recommended storage and temperature limitations. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Description: 1. The system shall include all necessary vapor retarders and underlayments, specified and installed under other Sections, and all surface preparation, and testing to provide a complete system, and acceptable performance, complying with the requirements of these Specifications. B. Performance Criteria: 1. Optical Smoke Density, ASTM E 662: Less than 450. 2. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF), ASTM E 648: Not less than 0.45 watts per square centimeter; Class 1. 2.02 MATERIALS Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. General: Manufactured units shall contain no polyvinylchloride or other halogens, and shall be completely asbestos-free. B. Vinyl Resilient Plank Flooring: 1. homogeneous solid vinyl Resilient Plank flooring, composed of binder, filler and pigments compounded with suitable lubricants and processing aids. The binder consists of one or more polymers or copolymers of vinyl chloride, other modifying resins, plasticizers and stabilizers.. 2. Standards: a. Tile: ASTM F 1700, Class II printed film vinyl plank. b. Finish: ExoGuard Quartz Enhanced Urethane. 3. Physical Properties: Provide the following: a. Abrasion Resistance, ASTM C 501 (H-18 Wheel, 500-gram load, 1,000 cycles): 0.40- gram loss weight, maximum. b. Hardness, ASTM D 2240 (Shore A): 85, minimum. c. Slip Resistance: ADA complient. d. Chemical Resistance, ASTM F 925: 4. Size: 6-inches by 48-inches. 5. Thickness: a. Wear layer thickness: 0.012 inches. b. Overall thickness: 0.098 inches. 6. Colors: a. Complete selection of manufacturer’s standard colors for final selection by ENGINEER. 7. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Woodland View Flax 30790 vinyl planks by Patcraft. b. Or Equal C. Vinyl Cove Base: Vinyl, composed of binder, filler and pigments compounded with suitable lubricants and processing aids.; 0.125-inches thick with connection dimension matching final resilient tile thickness; approximate 4 foot-0 inch long sections, with matching end stops and pre-molded inside and outside corner units, as follows: 1. Standard: ASTM F 1861, Style B, Group TV 2. Physical Properties: Refer to 2.2.F.3. above. 3. Accessories: 4. Size: 4-inches high. 5. Colors: Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Complete selection of manufacturer’s standard and custom colors for final selection by ENGINEER. b. ENGINEER will select a maximum of 4 colors. 6. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: a. Tandem Vinyl Cove Base and Sanitary Base by Armstrong World Industries, Incorporated. b. Vinyl Cove Base and Sanitary Base by Johnsonite Incorporated a Tarkett Company Incorporated. c. Equal D. Vinyl Accessories: 1. Feature Strips: Complete selection of vinyl strips, including transitional reducers, thresholds, tile joiners and caps. Size and color as shown, of the same material composition and thickness as the adjacent tile units. 2. Edging Strips: 1/8-inch thick, homogenous, vinyl, tapered or bullnosed edge, color as selected by ENGINEER from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Rods: Homogenous, vinyl, color as selected by ENGINEER from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Physical Properties: Refer to 2.2.F.3 above. E. Metal Edge Strips: Width shown, of required thickness to protect exposed edge of resilient flooring. Provide units of maximum available length, to minimize number of joints. 1. Material: Extruded aluminum with mill finish, unless otherwise shown. 2. Type: Butt-type metal edge strips for concealed anchorage. F. Auxiliary Products: 1. Concrete Slab Primer: Non-staining type recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Underlayment: As recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. 3. Sanitary Base Cove, Non-Solvent Adhesive: Provide a fortified acrylic emulsion recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer, maximum VOC’s of 50 g/l. 4. Flooring and Stair Floor Covering, Non-Solvent Adhesive: Provide a high performance, solvent-free, two-part polyurethane adhesive with excellent resistance to moisture, heat and humidity, maximum VOC’s of 50 g/l. 5. Epoxy Nose-Filler and Adhesive: Provide solvent-free, non-sag epoxy as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer to completely fill all stair nosings to prevent cracking or flexing of treads and nosings by uniformly molding a bonding support for the step, maximum VOC’s of 50 g/l. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. CONTRACTOR shall examine the areas and conditions under which resilient flooring Work will be performed and notify ENGINEER, in writing, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Confirm that moisture barriers, recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer, installed under other sections, are properly installed. B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Ensure that surfaces to receive resilient flooring are sufficiently cured, dry and are ready to receive resilient flooring installation as recommended by manufacturer, in writing. D. Prepare cast-in-place concrete slabs in compliance with ASTM F 710. Remove substances incompatible with resilient flooring and adhesives using methods recommended, in writing, by the resilient flooring manufacturer. E. Test cast-in-place concrete for moisture, in compliance with ASTM D 4263 and in compliance with RFCI. Perform testing, as developed by the Rubber Manufacturers Association calcium chloride test, in order to determine that the maximum safe moisture- emission level recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer’s written installation limitations will not be exceeded, before installation of resilient flooring. 1. Allow thirty days drying time for each 1-inch of cast-in-place concrete slab thickness before testing concrete. 2. Perform minimum of one test for every 1,000 square feet of floor area to receive resilient flooring. 3. If moisture tests indicate unacceptable levels of moisture remaining in the slab, do not install resilient flooring. Report existing conditions, along with recommendations, to ENGINEER, in writing. Allow additional time for slab to dry and retest. 4. CONTRACTOR may, at their option and expense, dehumidify or provide additional heat, in order to speed the drying process. If, after remediation measures are implemented, retesting the cast-in-place concrete continues to indicate unacceptable levels of moisture, submit resilient flooring manufacturer’s recommended penetrating-sealer and remedial moisture barrier product for ENGINEER’S approval. F. Perform relative humidity testing, using in situ probes, ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum of 75 percent relative humidity measurement. G. Perform one adhesive bond test for every 2,000 square feet of area receiving resilient flooring, but not less than one in each space, to verify acceptable adhesion of resilient flooring manufacturer’s approved adhesive. Examine after 72 hours to determine whether bond is solid and no moisture is present. Do not proceed with Work until bond tests produce acceptable results. H. Concrete pH Test: Perform pH test for every 2,000 square feet of area receiving resilient flooring, but not less than one in each space, to verify acceptable adhesion of linoleum Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements flooring manufacturer’s approved adhesive. If pH is greater than 10, concrete slab must be neutralized prior to beginning the installation. I. Installation Surfaces: 1. Survey surfaces to receive resilient flooring and verify tolerances are within limits specified. Do not install resilient flooring where surfaces are outside of allowable tolerances specified. 2. Use leveling compound as recommended by resilient tile manufacturer for filling small cracks and depressions in installation surfaces. 3. Level cast-in-place concrete surfaces, to receive resilient flooring, to provide concrete level to within 1/8-inch variation in ten-feet. Comply with recommendations of both the cementitious underlayment manufacturer’s and resilient flooring manufacturer’s written and approved recommendations for product compatibility and installation. 4. Concrete floors with slick finish or with curing or hardening compounds shall be mechanically abraded using methods approved by the resilient flooring manufacturer. 5. Prior to start of installation of resilient tile units, clean all surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring using high-efficiency particulate air filter vacuum cleaners and inspect the subfloor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. J. Concrete Primer: Apply concrete slab primer if recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer, prior to application of the adhesive. Apply in compliance with manufacturer's written and approved instructions. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Upon OWNER’s request and with at least 72 hours notice, provide manufacturer’s field representative with product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of flooring installation, in accordance with manufacture’s instructions. 1. Site Visits: One before, during and after installation. B. Allowable Tolerances: 1. Surfaces to Receive Resilient Flooring Systems: Surface shall be smooth, level, at the required finish elevation, without more than 1/8-inch in ten feet variation from level, or slopes, shown. Provide surfaces free of depressions, raised areas, or other defects that may telegraph through installed flooring. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Place resilient flooring units using manufacturer’s dry laying installation method with all embossed arrows pointing in the same direction and with adhesive cement mixed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's written and approved installation instructions. Follow all product use precautions as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Butt resilient flooring units tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings and edgings. Scribe around obstructions to produce neat joints, laid tight, even and in straight, parallel lines. Extend resilient flooring units into toe spaces, door reveals, and into closet and similar openings. Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements C. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or plainly marked for future cutting by repeating on the finish resilient flooring as marked on the subfloor. Use chalk or other non-permanent marking devices. D. Install resilient flooring on covers for telephone, electrical ducts and floor hatches, and other such items as occur within the finished resilient flooring areas. Maintain the overall continuity of color, joints, and pattern with resilient flooring installed on these covers. Tightly cement edges of resilient flooring to perimeter of sanitary cove base. E. Lay resilient flooring from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so that resilient flooring at opposite edges of the room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Lay resilient flooring square to room axis, unless otherwise shown. F. Match resilient floorings for color and pattern by using resilient flooring from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Cut resilient flooring neatly around all obstructions. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed resilient flooring shall be replaced. G. Apply resilient flooring to flooring surfaces using a full spread of adhesive applied to flooring surface to comply with resilient flooring manufacturer’s written approved instructions, including those for notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. H. Tightly cement resilient flooring to flooring surfaces without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks through resilient tile, or other surface imperfections. I. Lay resilient flooring with grain in all resilient tiles running in the same direction. J. Place resilient edge strips tightly butted to resilient flooring and secure with adhesive. Provide edging strips at all unprotected edges of resilient flooring, unless otherwise shown. K. Cove Base: Apply to all columns, pilasters, casework and other permanent fixtures in rooms or areas where base is required. Install base in as long lengths as practicable, with preformed corner units. Tightly bond base to backing throughout the length of each piece, with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces. 1. On masonry surfaces, or other similar irregular surfaces, fill voids along top edge of resilient wall-base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 2. Install pre-molded outside and inside corners before installing straight pieces. L. Metal Edge Strips: 1. Apply butt-type metal edge strips where shown and prior to installing resilient flooring. Secure units to substrate with countersunk stainless steel screws, complying with manufacturer's recommendations for the type of substrate. M. Resilient Accessories: 1. Apply resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to surfaces with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: Resilient Flooring 09 65 05 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Remove all adhesive and other surface blemishes from resilient flooring, using neutral- type cleaners as recommended by the resilient flooring manufacturer. 2. Vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 4. Damp-mop floor to remove marks and soil. B. Protect installed flooring from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of the construction period and to Substantial Completion. Use protection methods recommended in writing by the resilient flooring manufacturer. C. Do not move heavy or sharp objects directly over floor surfaces. Place plywood or hardboard panels over flooring and under objects while they are being moved. Slide or roll objects over panels without moving panels. D. Clean floor surfaces not more than four days before scheduled inspection to determine Substantial Completion of the Work. Clean products according to manufacturer’s approved written recommendations. E. Resilient flooring system components, damaged for any reason, shall be replaced with new, undamaged material, in compliance with the requirements of these Specifications, at no additional cost to the OWNER. END OF SECTION Resinous Flooring 09 67 23 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 09 67 23 RESINOUS FLOORING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals as shown, specified and required to furnish and install all resinous flooring Work. 2. The extent of resinous flooring is shown and specified herein. 3. The types of resinous flooring Work required includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following: a. Substrate preparation. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation procedures and products under other Sections and coordinate the installation of items that must be installed before the resinous flooring Work to provide an acceptable substrate for the Work of this Section as specified. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm specializing and certified in resinous flooring Work and which is acceptable to manufacturer of resinous flooring required for the Work. B. Source Quality Control: Provide each type of resinous flooring as produced by a single manufacturer, including recommended primers, sealants and bases as required. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit for approval sets of 12-inch samples of each type and color of resilient sheet flooring required, illustrating the range of color and pattern variation. B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval the following: 1. Manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of resinous flooring required. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices for each type of resinous flooring required. C. Applicator Qualifications: Submit proof of certification or license by the flooring materials manufacturer. D. Provide three (3) complete sets of full, unopened cans of three-component coating for the Owner’s maintenance and repair use. 1. Each set shall be proportioned and packaged to repair a 5-10 sf area. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Materials: Deliver materials to project site in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures and in original unopened containers, clearly marked with name and product identification. B. Handling or Materials: Carefully handle all materials and store at not less than 65°F (18°C) for at least 48 hours before start of installation. Resinous Flooring 09 67 23 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain minimum temperature of 65°F in spaces to resinous flooring for at least 48 hours prior to installation, during installation, and for not less than 48 hours after installation. Subsequently, maintain minimum temperature of 55°F in areas where work is completed. 2. Install resinous flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed and permanent heating system is operating. Moisture content of concrete slabs, building air temperature, and relative humidity must be within limits recom- mended by resinous manufacturer. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Resinous Flooring System: 1. Etching Solution: Acid solution as recommended by the Manufacturer. 2. Primer: Two-component epoxy primer. 3. Undercoat: Three-component, solvent free epoxy undercoat. 4. Aggregate: Broadcast selected graded colored aggregates. 5. Sealer: Two-component, solvent free, UV resistant clear epoxy sealer. 6. Cove Fillet Strip: No cove fillet strips will be permitted. 7. Termination Strips: With metal, tapered bar type as recommended by the manufacture. 8. Coved Base: Comply with Drawings; color to match adjacent resinous flooring. 9. Flexible Membrane: 100% solids, flexible epoxy membrane with fiberglass mesh as recommended by manufacturer to be used underneath the resinous flooring system. 10. Physical Properties: a. Compressive Strength (ASTN /C579): 16,000 psi cured binder and 10,500 psi system after 7 days. b. Tensile Strength (ASTM D-638): 3,000 psi minimum. c. Percent Elongation (ASTM D638): 7.5%. d. Flexural Strength (ASTM D580): 2,900 psi system; (ASTM D790): 4,000 psi. e. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity (ASTM D790): 5.5 x 105 psi. f. Hardness (ASTM D2240/Shore D Durometer): 70-80 min. g. Bond Strength: Greater than 400 psi (100% concrete failure). h. Indentation (MIL D3134F): .025 MAX. i. Abrasion Resistance (ASTM C501): 35 mg maximum weight loss. j. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM D2047): 0.8. k. Flammability (ASTM D635): Self extinguishing. B. Product and Manufacturer: Provide one of the following: 1. Primer: a. DUR-A-FLEX: Dur-A-Shield™ 2, two component, transparent epoxy primer @ 6.0 mils DFT. 2. Matrix Coat: a. DUR-A-FLEX: Dur-A-Guard™, two component 100% solids, thermosetting epoxy @ 16.0 mils DFT. 3. Top Coat: Resinous Flooring 09 67 23 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. DUR-A-FLEX: Poly-Thane™ 2 with Dur-a-Grip™ non slip aggregate, two component high solids, clear polyester top coat. 4. Texture: Non-slip aggregates surface. C. Colors: Manufacturer's of "or approved equal" material shall be required to supply the same color selections as manufacturer specified. 1. Provide complete selection of manufacturer's standard and custom colors. 2. Engineer will select a maximum of three colors for the Work. D. Adhesives, Cements: Waterproof, stabilized type as recommended by the sheet flooring manufacturer for the type of service and substrate indicated. Provide only resilient sheet flooring manufacturer's approved products. E. Seam Sealant: Fluid-applied sealing compound recommended by manufacturer of sheet flooring material for bonding and sealing flooring seams. F. Concrete Primer: Non-staining type as recommended by the sheet flooring manufacturer. G. Provide integral cove by extending the flooring materials (4") up the wall supported by a cove stick having a minimum radius of 3/4" and adhering to the wall with adhesive and chemical welding the seams. Cap the integral coving with an approved cap strip installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Contractor and his installer must examine the areas and conditions under which resinous flooring is to be installed and must notify Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Engineer. B. Examine surfaces to receive flooring materials. If surfaces are defective and will not permit proper finished installation, immediately notify the Owner's Representative, in writing, or assume responsibility for and rectify any unsatisfactory condition resulting there from. 1. Concrete substrate shall have cured a minimum of 28 days utilizing moist curing methods as described in Section 03 30 00, Cast-In-Place Concrete. C. Concrete shall have a light steel trowel finish. D. Coordinate concrete slab depression and finishing and location of all expansion or control joints with concrete slab installers prior to concrete slab installation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Delivery, Storage and Protection: 1. Comply with Sections 01 65 00, Product Delivery Requirements and 01 66 00, Product Storage and Handling Requirements. 2. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers with labels intact. Check for shipping damage upon receipt. 3. Store under cover in a dry, enclosed area between 60ºF and 90ºF. Protect from damage and contamination. B. Surface Preparation: 1. Remove grease, dirt, oil, paint, wax, adhesives, curing compounds or any foreign substances which may interfere with adhesion of flooring to slab. Resinous Flooring 09 67 23 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Concrete surface preparation shall be by mechanical means and include use of a scabbler, scarifier or shot blast machine for surface removal and etching. Include vacuum attachment to contain all dust. 3. Fill all surfaces irregularities as recommended by the manufacturers. 4. Maintain positive mechanical ventilation at all times during preparation work. Provide at least 10 complete air changes per hour within the immediate work area(s). C. Subfloors: Prior to start of resinous flooring, broom clean or vacuum surfaces to be covered and inspect the subfloor. D. Etching: Acid etching of substrates will not be permitted. E. Flexible Membrane: Install membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Primer: 1. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's directions prior to application of the base coat as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. 2. Maintain positive mechanical ventilation at all times during primer work. Provide at least 10 complete air changes per hour within the immediate work area(s). 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install all products in strict accordance with manufacturer's specification, requirements, instructions and recommendations. B. Apply termination strips as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Install coved base of type and size shown on the Drawings. Cove base color shall match the flooring. D. Base Coat Application: 1. Mix materials and apply base coat in accordance with manufacture's instruction for bonding on substrate. 2. Provide extra thickness base coat application at areas of electrical poke-throughs to maintain a level floor surface immediately around the service box or floor plate. Taper base coat back down to nominal base coat thickness. 3. Broadcast colored aggregate granules into the freshly applied base coat, using manufacturer's recommended equipment in order to ensure an even distribution of aggregate. 4. Allow base coat and aggregate to thoroughly harden (8 hours minimum), then sweep off excess aggregate with a stiff fiber broom. 5. Vacuum all surfaces clean to remove any dust or residue. E. Apply epoxy top coat material as recommended by manufacturer and allow to cure. F. Apply final top coat or coats of satin finish seal coat to achieve finished texture and appearance of approved sample reviewed by the Owner’s representative. G. Cure in compliance with and for duration of manufacturer's recommendations. H. Provide sealants in all floor joints per Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. Sealant shall be flush with adjacent floor surfaces. I. Maintain positive ventilation at all times during installation and curing work. Provide at least 10 complete air changes per hour within the immediate work area(s). 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION Resinous Flooring 09 67 23 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements A. Immediately after completion of the troweled floor topping in any area or room, comply with requirements described in Section 01 74 05, Cleaning and provide a temporary "walk- off" floor mat service at all door or room openings into the area or room. 1. The temporary floor mat service shall continue throughout the remainder of the Work up to Substantial Completion. B. Conform to the requirements of Section 01740 for cleaning requirements of all finished floor topping areas. C. Remove any surface blemishes from installed floor topping surfaces using neutral cleaners and procedures as recommended by the flooring manufacturer. D. Protect installed flooring from damage by use of heavy kraft paper, heavy cardboard or other similar protective floor covering. E. Final cleaning: Just prior to the final inspection of the work, thoroughly clean floors and apply a final top coat, if required, over scuffed or worn areas in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION Painting 09 91 00 - 1 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 09 91 00 PAINTING 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. CONTRACTOR shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals as shown, specified, and required to furnish and apply paint systems. a. CONTRACTOR is responsible for surface preparation and painting of all new and existing interior and exterior items and surfaces throughout the Project areas included in the general contract and other contracts described in this Section. b. CONTRACTOR is responsible for surface preparation and painting of all new and existing interior and exterior items and surfaces throughout the Project areas included under this and other Sections. 2. Extent of painting includes the Work specified below. Painting shown in schedules may not provide CONTRACTOR with complete indication of all painting Work. Refer to Article 2.2 of this Section where all surfaces of generic types specified are specified for preparation and painting according to their status, intended function, and location, using the painting system for that surface, function, and location as specified, unless specifically identified on the Drawings as a surface not to receive specified painting system. a. All new and specifically identified existing surfaces and items except where the natural finish of the material is specified as a corrosion-resistant material not requiring paint; or is specifically indicated in the Contract Documents as a surface not to be painted. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint them the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. b. Mechanical and process items to be painted include: 1). Piping, pipe insulation, pipe hangers, and supports, including electrical conduit. 2). Heat exchangers. 3). Tanks. 4). Ductwork and insulation. 5). Motors, mechanical equipment, and supports. 6). Accessory items. c. Surface preparation and painting of all new and specifically identified existing items, both interior and exterior, and other surfaces, including items furnished by OWNER, are included in the Work, except as otherwise shown or specified. d. Removal of all substances, top coats, primers and all intermediate coats of paint and other protective or decorative coatings on those items and surfaces to remain that are identified to receive a painting system under this Section, to provide surfaces acceptable for application of painting specified. Painting 09 91 00 - 2 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements e. Approved stepped-down mock-ups for all painting systems showing all components of the surface preparation and paint system application before start of Work. Check all dry film thicknesses; demonstrate methods of surface preparation, and methods of application, and obtain ENGINEER’s approval of colors and textures to be used in the Work. B. Coordination: 1. Review installation, removal, and demolition procedures under other Sections and coordinate them with the Work specified in this Section. 2. Coordinate painting of areas that will become inaccessible once equipment, laboratory furniture, lockers and similar fixed items have been installed. 3. Coordinate primers with finish paint materials to provide primers that are compatible with finish paint materials. Review other Sections and other contracts where primed surfaces are provided, to ensure compatibility of total painting system for each surface. CONTRACTOR is responsible for coordinating compatibility of all shop primed and field painted items in other Sections and in general contract and other contracts. 4. Furnish information to ENGINEER on characteristics of finish materials proposed for use and ensure compatibility with prime coats used. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and repaint as required. Notify ENGINEER in writing of anticipated problems using specified painting systems with surfaces primed by others. Reprime equipment primed in factory and other factory-primed items that are damaged or scratched. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. D. Work Not Included: The following Work is not included as painting Work, or are included under other Sections or in other contracts: 1. Shop Priming: Shop priming of structural metal, miscellaneous metal fabrications, other metal items and fabricated components such as shop-fabricated or factory-painted process equipment, plumbing equipment, heating and ventilating equipment, electrical equipment, and accessories shall conform to applicable requirements of this Section but are included under other Sections or in other contracts. 2. Pre-finished Items: a. Items furnished with such finishes as baked-on enamel, porcelain, and polyvinylidene fluoride shall only be touched up at Site by CONTRACTOR using manufacturer's recommended compatible field-applied touchup paint. b. Items furnished with finishes such as chrome plating or anodizing. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Non-metallic wall or ceiling surfaces in areas not exposed to view, and generally inaccessible areas, such as furred spaces, pipe chases, duct shafts, and elevator shafts. 4. Concrete surfaces below elevation grade, unless otherwise shown or specified. 5. Concrete floors, unless specifically shown as a surface to be painted. Painting 09 91 00 - 3 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 6. Face brick, glazed structural tile, and prefaced, ground-faced or split-faced concrete unit masonry. 7. Exterior face of architectural precast concrete. 8. Collector bearings, shafts and chains, wood flights, wood stop logs, and wood or fiberglass baffles. 9. Corrosion-Resistant Metal Surfaces: Where the natural oxide of item forms a barrier to corrosion, whether factory- or Site-formed, including such materials as copper, bronze, muntz metal, terne metal, and stainless steel. 10. Operating Parts and Labels: a. Do not paint moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, interior of motors, and fan shafts. b. Do not paint over labels required by governing authorities having jurisdiction at Site, or equipment identification, performance rating, nameplates, and nomenclature plates. c. Cover moving parts and labels during the painting with protective masking. Remove all protective masking upon completion of Work. Remove all paint, coatings, and splatter that comes in contact with such labels. 11. Structural and miscellaneous metals covered with concrete need not receive primers, intermediate, or finish coats of paint. otherwise shown or specified. E. Description of Colors and Finishes: 1. Color Selection: a. A maximum of 20 different colors will be selected by ENGINEER in addition to color coding of pipelines, valves, equipment, ducts, and electrical conduit. b. ENGINEER reserves the right to select non-standard colors for paint systems specified within ability of paint manufacturer to produce such non-standard colors. Provide such colors at no additional expense to OWNER. 2. Color Coding of Pipelines, Valves, Equipment, and Ducts: a. In general, color-coding of pipelines, valves, equipment and ducts shall comply with applicable standards of ANSI A13.1, ANSI Z535.1 and 40 CFR 1910.144. Provide color-coding for pipelines per Table 09 91 00-B, Pipeline Color Table. b. For equipment on roofs or exposed to view, such as on exterior building facades and in offices and lobbies, color shall be selected by ENGINEER. 3. Color Coding of Pipelines and Equipment: a. Finish coats of paint for pipelines and equipment shall be coded in basic colors. Colors shall be brilliant, distinctive shades matching the following safety and pipeline colors per ANSI Z535.1, Recommended Standards for Water Works; Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities, color specifications for safety colors and other primary colors: Painting 09 91 00 - 4 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements TABLE 09 91 00-A TABLE OF STANDARD COLORS Color Designation* Aqua Aqua Sky: 10GN Black Black; 35GR Blue True/Safety Blue; 11SF Brown Terra Cotta; 07RD Charcoal Deep Space; GR34 Dark Blue Old Glory Blue; 78BL Dark Brown Medium Bronze; 85BR Dark Gray Blackthorn; GR31 Gray Gray-ANSI 61; 33GR Green Spearmint/Safety Green; 09SF Light Blue Fontainebleau; 25BL Light Brown Twine; 68BR Light Gray Light Gray; 32GR Light Green Misty Jade; GB38 Olive Clover; 110GN Orange Tangerine/Safety Orange; 04SF Red Candy Apple/Safety Red; 06SF White White; 11WH Yellow Lemon/Safety Yellow; 02SF *Color designations are provided per Tnemec Company, Inc. paint color numbers and are provided as a standard of quality; equivalent colors matching these colors are acceptable. Provide with Shop Drawing submittal direct color comparisons of color numbers available from manufacturer submitted. b. General Color Code: Unless otherwise specified, use the following color code: Painting 09 91 00 - 5 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements TABLE 09 91 00-B PIPELINE COLOR TABLE Pipeline Color WATER Air Conditioning Water Blue Chilled Water Return Blue Chilled Water Supply Blue Circulating Water Blue City Water Blue Cold Water Blue Condenser Water Blue Cooling Water Blue Dangerously Hot Water Charcoal Domestic Hot Water Blue/Red Bands Drinking Water Light Blue Finished Water Dark Blue Fire Water Red Hot Water Return Blue/Red Bands Hot Water Supply Blue/Red Bands Potable Water Dark Blue Pump Flushing Water Gray Raw Water Olive and Green Return Chilled Water Supply Blue Sprinkler Water Red Treated Water Blue Unsafe Water Red AIR AND GAS City Gas Red Defoamant Red Engine Air Green Freon Red Painting 09 91 00 - 6 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements Fuel Gas Red Natural Gas Red/Black Bands PROCESS Floor Drains Gray c. Color of final coats shall match as closely as possible, without custom blending, color tabulated for specific pipeline service. 4. After approval by ENGINEER of colors and Shop Drawings and prior to commencing painting Work, ENGINEER will furnish color schedules for surfaces to be painted. F. Abbreviations and Symbols: 1. Abbreviations and symbols used in painting systems are explained in Article 2.2 of this Section and provide information on generic composition of required materials, manufacturers, number of coats and dry mil film thickness per coat (DMFTPC), and coverage for determining required number of gallons for the Work. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Referenced Standards: Standards referenced in this Section are: 1. ANSI A13.1, Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems. 2. ANSI Z535.1, Safety Color Code. 3. ANSI/NSF Standard 60, Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects. 4. ANSI/NSF Standard 61, Drinking Water System Components – Health Effects. 5. ASTM D16, Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials and Applications. 6. ASTM D2200, Pictoral Surface Preparation Standards for Painting Steel Surfaces. 7. ASTM D4258, Practice for Surface Cleaning Concrete for Coating. 8. ASTM D4259, Practice for Abrading Concrete. 9. ASTM D4262, Testing Method for pH of Chemically Cleaned or Etched Concrete Surfaces. 10. ASTM D4263, Test Method for Indicating Moisture in Concrete by the Plastic Sheet Method. 11. ASTM D4285, Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air. 12. ASTM D4417, Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel. 13. ASTM D4541, Test Methods for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion- Testers. 14. ASTM E329, Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction. 15. AWWA C652, Disinfection of Water-Storage Facilities. Painting 09 91 00 - 7 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 16. AWWA D102, Coating Steel Water-Storage Tanks. 17. Green Seal, Inc. Paint, (GS-11). 18. Great Lakes Upper Mississippi River Board of Public Health and Environmental Managers (GLUMRB) Recommended Standards for Water Works. 19. GLUMRB, Recommended Standards for Wastewater Facilities. 20. National Association of Piping Fabricators, NAPF 500-03, Surface Preparation Standard For Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings in Exposed Locations Receiving Special External Coatings And/or Special Internal Linings. 21. Ozone Transport Commission, (OTC), OTC Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings. 22. SSPC PA 2, Measurement of Dry Coating Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 23. SSPC SP 1, Solvent Cleaning. 24. SSPC SP 3, Power Tool Cleaning. 25. SSPC SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 26. SSPC SP 10, Near-White Blast Cleaning. 27. SSPC SP 11, Power Tool Cleaning To Bare Metal. 28. SSPC VIS 1, Visual Standard for Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel. 29. SSPC VIS 2, Method of Evaluating Degree of Rusting/Painted Steel Surfaces. 30. SSPC Volume 2, Systems and Specifications. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D16 apply to this Section, including: 1. Paint: Pretreatment and all painting system materials, such as primer, emulsion, enamel, organic/inorganic polymer coating, stain sealer and filler, and other applied materials whether used as prime, filler, intermediate, or finish coats. 2. Exposed: All items not covered with cement plaster, concrete, or fireproofing. Items covered with these materials shall be provided with specified primer only, except where specified as a surface not to be painted. Exposed-to-view surfaces include areas visible after permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, ceiling tile, covers for finned tube radiation, grilles, and similar covering products are in areas scheduled to be painted. 3. Low VOC: All interior and exterior field-applied coatings that have maximum VOC content as listed in OTC Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings. 4. OTC: Ozone Transport Commission, which recommends standard VOC content levels in several Northeastern and Mid-Atlantic states. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Painting 09 91 00 - 8 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Engage a single applicator that regularly performs installation of paint materials, with documented skill and successful experience in installing types of products required and that agrees to employ only trained, skilled tradesmen who have successful experience in installing types of products specified. 2. Submit name and qualifications to ENGINEER along with following information for at least three successful, completed projects: a. Names and telephone numbers of owner and design professional responsible for project. b. Approximate contract cost of paint products. c. Amount of area painted. 3. Submit to ENGINEER proof of acceptability of applicator by manufacturer. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Provide an independent testing agency for testing specified in this Section. Testing agency shall be selected by OWNER and paid for by CONTRACTOR. When requested, submit documentation demonstrating to satisfaction of ENGINEER, that testing agency has experience and capability to satisfactorily conduct testing required without delaying the Work, in accordance with ASTM E329. C. Source Quality Control: 1. Obtain materials from manufacturers that will provide services of a qualified manufacturer’s representative at Site at commencement of painting Work, to advise on products, mock-ups, installation, and finishing techniques and, at completion of Work, to advise ENGINEER on acceptability of completed Work and during the course of the Work as may be requested by ENGINEER. 2. Certify long-term compatibility of all coatings with surfaces. 3. Do not submit products that decrease number of coats, surface preparation, or generic type and formulation of coatings specified. Products exceeding VOC limits and chemical content specified will not be approved. 4. ENGINEER may review manufacturers’ recommendations concerning methods of installation and number of coats of paint for each painting system. CONTRACTOR shall prepare construction costs based on painting systems, number of coats, coverage’s and installation methods specified. 5. Submit “or equal” products, when proposed, with direct comparison to products specified, including information on durability, adhesion, color and gloss retention, percent solids, VOC's grams per liter, and recoatability after curing. 6. “Or equal” manufacturers shall furnish same color selection as manufacturers specified, including intense chroma and custom pigmented colors in all painting systems. 7. Color Pigments: Provide pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit surfaces and services to be painted. Comply with: a. Lead and Chromate: Lead and chromate content shall not exceed amount permitted by authorities having jurisdiction. Painting 09 91 00 - 9 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements b. Areas subject to hydrogen sulfide fume exposure will be identified by ENGINEER. Through CONTRACTOR, paint manufacturer shall notify ENGINEER of colors that are not suitable for long-term color retention in such areas. c. Manufacturer shall identify colors that meet the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site for use in locations subject to contact with potable water or water being prepared for use as potable water. d. Comply with paint manufacturer’s recommendations on preventing coating contact with levels of carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide that may cause yellowing during application and initial stages of curing of paint. 8. Obtain each product from one manufacturer. Multiple manufacturing sources for the same system component are unacceptable. 9. Certify product shelf life history for each product source for materials manufactured by the same manufacturer, but purchased and stored at different locations or obtained from different sources. 10. Constantly store materials to be used for painting Work between 60 degrees F and 90 degrees F, and per paint manufacturer’s written recommendations, for not more than six months. Certify to ENGINEER that painting materials have been manufactured within six months of installation and have not, nor will be, subjected to freezing temperatures. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Painting systems for surfaces in contact with potable water, or water being treated for potable use, shall not impart any taste or odor to the water or result in any organic or inorganic content in excess of the maximum allowable contaminant level established by authorities having jurisdiction at Site. Such painting systems shall be approved by the regulatory agency. Revise painting systems specified herein to provide manufacturer's regulatory agency approved painting system(s) where required. 2. Comply with VOC content limits of OTC Model Rule for Architectural and Industrial Maintenance Coatings: a. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 340 grams per liter. b. Interior and Exterior Non-Flat Coatings: 250 grams per liter. 3. Comply with the following: a. 29 CFR 1910.144, Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards. b. 40 CFR, Subpart D-2001, National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings. c. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976 (RCRA). d. SW-846, Toxic Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP). 4. Comply with the California South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD) Rule 1113, or California Air Resources Board (CARB) Revised Suggested Control Measure (SCM), and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction for air quality and material disposal. Revise painting systems specified herein to provide manufacturer's regulatory agency approved painting systems. Painting 09 91 00 - 10 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 5. Comply with Maricopa County, Arizona Architectural Coatings Rule 335. 6. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction at Site for blast cleaning, confined space entry, and disposition of spent abrasive and debris. E. Stepped-down Mock-ups: 1. Demonstrate installation of specified painting systems on actual wall surfaces and building components at locations selected by ENGINEER. 2. Provide 4-foot by 8-foot stepped-down sample area for each painting system. Prior to application of painting system, but after ENGINEER's approval of the components of each painting system, apply a 4-foot wide sample of each operation and application step required by this Section and specified manufacturer’s written application recommendations. Show each application step as a 2-foot long section that shall remain exposed to demonstrate work performed in that step. Continue application procedures until topcoat is provided. Topcoat shall be a minimum of two feet long. When completed, finished mock-up for each paint system shall reveal each step and each coat of paint required for paint system with 2-foot wide strips revealing Work performed to prepare surface and apply each coat. Lengthen overall mock-up as required to completely demonstrate each painting system. Use tinted shades differing from coat to coat for each component of each painting system. 3. ENGINEER may approve or disapprove each component of each painting system on an individual component basis. 4. Painting Work that does not meet standard approved on sample areas shall be removed and replaced. 5. Painting Work advanced without approved mock-ups shall stop, and mock-ups prepared for approval by ENGINEER. F. Pre-painting Conference: 1. Prior to installing painting systems, arrange a meeting at Site with painting applicator and its foreman, paint manufacturer’s technical representative, installers of other work in and around painting that must follow painting Work, ENGINEER, and other representatives directly concerned with performance of painting Work. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements and disagreements and furnish a copy of record to each party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures relating to painting Work including: a. Review Project requirements including Contract Documents, approved Shop Drawings, pending and approved Change Orders, requests for information that submitted by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER, and other pertinent documents. b. Review required samples and submittals, both completed and to be completed. c. Review status of surfaces including drying, surface preparations, and similar considerations. d. Review availability of materials, tradesmen, equipment, and facilities required for progress, to avoid delays, and to protect Work from damage. e. Review required inspection, testing, certifying, and quality control procedures. Painting 09 91 00 - 11 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. Supplemental heating sources required to for working in low-temperature conditions, shall be operating and acceptable to paint applicator and ENGINEER. g. Review methods for complying with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction at Site, such as compliance with environmental protection, health, safety, fire, and similar regulations. h. Review laws and procedures covering removal and disposal of blast debris. 2. Reconvene meeting at earliest opportunity if additional information must be developed to conclude the required topics of the meeting. 3. Record revisions or changes agreed upon, reasons therefore, and parties agreeing or disagreeing with them. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Product Data: a. Copies of manufacturer’s technical information and test performance data, including paint analysis, VOC and chemical component content in comparison to maximum allowed by the Contact Documents, and application instructions for each product proposed for use. b. Submit proof of acceptability of proposed application techniques by paint manufacturer selected. c. Copies of CONTRACTOR’s proposed protection procedures in each area of the Work explaining methods of protecting adjacent surfaces from splatter, for confining application procedures in a manner that allows other work adjacent to surface preparation and painting Work to proceed safely and without interruption, and for maintaining acceptable application, curing, and environmental conditions during and after painting systems application. d. List each material and cross-reference to the specific painting system and application, including a list of site-specific surfaces to which painting system will be applied. Identify by manufacturer’s catalog number and general classification. State number of gallons of each product being purchased for delivery to Site and square foot area calculated to be covered by each painting system specified based on theoretical loss of 20 percent. Where actual area to be covered by paint system exceeds area submitted to ENGINEER for that system, proof of additional material purchase shall be provided to ENGINEER. Calculated coverage shall be as specified for each component of each painting system specified. This requirement does not take precedence over CONTRACTOR’s responsibility to provide dry film thickness required for each component of each painting system. e. Identify maximum exposure times allowable for each paint system component before next coat of paint can be applied. Submit proposed methods for preparing surfaces for subsequent coats if maximum exposure times are exceeded. Painting 09 91 00 - 12 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements f. Information on curing times and environmental conditions that affect curing time of each paint system component and proposed methods for accommodating variations in curing time. Identify this information for each painting system in the Work. g. Specification for spray equipment with cross-reference to paint manufacturer’s recommended equipment requirements. 2. Samples: a. Copies of manufacturer's complete color charts for each coating system. b. Mock-ups specified for the Site. B. Informational Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Certificates: a. Certificate from paint manufacturer stating that materials meet or exceed Contract Documents requirements. b. Evidence of shelf life history for all products verifying compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. c. CONTRACTOR shall provide notarized statement verifying that all painting systems are compatible with surfaces specified. All painting systems components shall be reviewed by an authorized technical representative of paint manufacturer for use as a compatible system. Verify that all painting systems are acceptable for exposures specified and that paint manufacturer is in agreement that selected systems are proper, compatible, and are not in conflict with paint manufacturer’s recommended specifications. Show by copy of transmittal form that a copy of letter has been transmitted to paint applicator. 2. Test Reports: a. Certified laboratory test reports for required performance and analysis testing in compliance with ASTM E329. b. Adhesion testing plan and procedures. c. Results of adhesion testing on existing surfaces containing paints or other coatings to be topcoated with paint systems specified. Prior to adhesion testing, submit a testing plan establishing methods, procedures and number of tests in each area where existing coatings are to remain and become substrate for painting Work. Based on results of adhesion testing, recommend methods, procedures, and painting system modifications, if necessary, for proceeding with Work. d. Locations of and test methods for soil sampling before beginning Work and after Substantial Completion. e. Proposed methods for testing, handling, and disposal of waste generated during Work. f. Results of alkalinity and moisture content tests performed in accordance with ASTM D4262 and ASTM D4263. g. Results of tests of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections. Painting 09 91 00 - 13 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Provide paint manufacturer’s storage, handling, and application instructions prior to commencing painting Work at Site. 4. Manufacturer’s Site Reports: Provide report of paint manufacturer’s representative for each visit to Site by paint manufacturer’s representative. 5. Special Procedure Submittals: a. Proposed protection procedures for each area of Work, explaining methods of protecting adjacent surfaces from splatter, for confining application procedures in a manner that allows other work adjacent to surface preparation and painting Work to proceed safely and without interruption. b. Site-specific health and safety plan. c. Procedures for maintaining acceptable application, curing and environmental conditions during and after painting systems application. d. Procedures for providing adequate lighting, ventilation, and personal protection equipment relative to painting Work. 6. Qualifications: a. Applicator. b. Testing laboratory C. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Maintenance Manual: Upon completion of the painting Work, furnish ENGINEER five copies of detailed maintenance manual including the following information: a. Complete and updated product catalog of paint manufacturer’s currently available products including complete technical information on each product. Identify product names and numbers of each product used in the painting Work. b. Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of manufacturer, local distributor, applicator and technical representative. c. Detailed procedures for routine maintenance and cleaning. d. Detailed procedures for light repairs such as dents, scratches and staining. 2. Statement of Application: Upon completion of the painting Work, submit a notarized statement to ENGINEER signed by CONTRACTOR and painting applicator stating that Work complies with requirements of the Contract Documents and that application methods, equipment, and environmental conditions were proper and adequate for conditions of installation and use. 3. LEED Certification: Certify that the Work complies with the specified LEED requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery Requirements: Deliver products to Site in original, new, and unopened packages and containers, accurately and legibly and accurately labeled with the following: 1. Container contents, including name and generic description of product. 2. Manufacturer’s stock number and date of manufacture. Painting 09 91 00 - 14 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Manufacturer’s name. 4. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Grams per liter of volatile organic compounds. 6. Thinning instructions, where recommended. 7. Application instructions. 8. Color name and number. B. Product Storage Requirements: 1. Store acceptable materials at Site. 2. Store in an environmentally controlled location as recommended in paint manufacturer’s written product information. Keep area clean and accessible. Prevent freezing of products. 3. Store products that are not in actual use in tightly covered containers. 4. Comply with health and fire regulations of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. C. Product Handling Requirements: 1. Handle products in a manner that minimizes the potential for contamination, or incorrect product catalyzation. 2. Do not open containers or mix components until necessary preparatory work has been completed and approved by ENGINEER and painting Work will start immediately. 3. Maintain containers used in storing, mixing, and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Site Facilities: 1. Supplemental heat sources, as required to maintain both ambient and surface temperatures within range recommended by paint manufacturer for paint system application, are not available at Site. 2. Provision of supplemental heat energy sources, power, equipment, and operating, maintenance and temperature monitoring personnel is responsibility of CONTRACTOR. 3. Do not use heat sources that emit carbon dioxide or carbon monoxide into areas being painted. Properly locate and vent such heat sources to exterior such that paint systems are unaffected by exhaust. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Existing surfaces to receive painting Work shall be surface-prepared to meet requirements of painting systems specified. Prior to commencing painting Work, perform adhesion tests on existing surfaces to be painted. Perform testing per ASTM D4541 or other method acceptable to ENGINEER. Number and location of tests shall be sufficient to determine condition of existing coatings and suitability of existing coatings to remain to provide acceptable substrate for new coatings. Submit testing plan prior to testing and provide ENGINEER a copy of adhesion test results. Painting 09 91 00 - 15 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Provide abrasive blasting, scraping, or other abrading or surface film removal, or preparatory techniques accepted by ENGINEER. 3. Before commencing painting in an area, surfaces to be painted and floors shall be cleaned of dust using commercial vacuum cleaning equipment equipped with high- efficiency particulate air (HEPA( filters and dust containment systems. C. Environmental Requirements: 1. Apply water-base paints when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s published instructions. 2. Surfaces to be painted shall be at least 5 degrees F above dew point temperature and be dry to the touch. Apply paint only when temperature of surfaces to be painted, paint products, and ambient air temperatures are between 65 degrees F and 95 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s published instructions. 3. Apply paint system within shortest possible time consistent with manufacturer’s recommended curing instructions for each coat. If chemical, salt, or other contamination contacts paint film between coats, remove contamination per SSPC SP 1 and restore surface before applying paint. 4. Do not paint tanks or pipelines containing fluid without specific permission of ENGINEER and only under conditions where “sweating” of outside surface of vessel being painted is not likely to occur within 24 hours of paint application. 5. Do not apply epoxy paints if ambient temperature is expected to go below 50 degrees F within twelve hours of application. Follow manufacturer’s instructions when manufacturer’s published recommendations require a higher minimum ambient temperature. 6. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent. Do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces or when surfaces will reach dew point due to falling or rising temperatures and humidity conditions during course of paint application, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s published instructions. 7. Do not paint unacceptably hot or cold surfaces until such surfaces can be maintained within temperature and dew point ranges acceptable to paint manufacturer. Arrange for surfaces to be brought within acceptable temperature and dew point ranges as part of painting Work. 8. Moisture content of surfaces shall be verified to ENGINEER as acceptable prior to commencement of painting using methods recommended by paint manufacturer. 9. Painting may be continued during inclement weather only if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer for application and drying. 10. Provide adequate illumination and ventilation where painting operations are in progress. D. Protection: Painting 09 91 00 - 16 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Cover or otherwise protect finished work of other trades and surfaces not being painted concurrently, or not to be painted. 2. During surface preparation and painting, facility shall remain in operation. Use procedures that prevent contamination of process or cause or require facility shutdown. 3. Coordinate and schedule surface preparation and painting to avoid exposing personnel to hazards associated with painting Work. Provide required personnel safety equipment per requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at Site. 4. Submit protection procedures to be employed. Do not begin surface preparation and painting Work until ENGINEER accepts protection techniques proposed by CONTRACTOR. 5. When working with flammable materials, provide fire extinguishers and post temporary signs warning against smoking and open flame. E. Testing: 1. Obtain and test eight soil samples from each Site, at locations within twenty feet of the tank and spaced equally around tank circumference. Four samples shall be taken and analyzed at Substantial Completion is achieved and all surface preparation and paint application operations are completed. 2. Test at a laboratory residue from sand blasting to determine whether blast residue can be landfilled as required by disposal facility. 3. Test at a laboratory sediment in tank prior to disposing of sediment to determine suitability of sediment for landfilling. Test for TCLP and RCRA characteristics. Perform additional tests as required by disposal facility. 4. Perform additional testing of waste materials and existing paint required under Federal, state, or local regulations not specifically addressed in this Section. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish, tag, and store an additional one percent by volume of all coatings and colors installed. Provide a minimum of one gallon of each coating and color. Store in unopened containers as specified until turned over to OWNER. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINTING SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS A. Products and Manufacturers: Where referenced under painting systems provide products manufactured by the following: 1. Tnemec Company, Inc. (TCI). 2. The Carboline Company, part of StonCor Group, an RMP Company (TCC). 3. Sherwin-Williams Company (SWC). 4. Benjamin Moore & Company (BMC). 5. ICI Paints (ICI). Painting 09 91 00 - 17 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 6. Righter Group Inc. (RGI) 7. Duron Inc. (DI) 2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS A. New and Existing Concrete Unit Masonry Walls; Moderate Corrosion and Abrasion Resistant, Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.B.1., 3.2.B.2. and 3.2.B.8. 2. Filler, Surfacer and Patching Compound: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 68 percent volume solids, high-build, three-component, waterborne cementitious acrylic block filler; 75 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 130 Envirofill (TCI); Sanitile 600 TG (TCC); Cement-Plex 875 (SWC): One coat, 10 to 14 dry mils. 3. Intermediate/Finish: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 80 percent volume solids, high-build, chemical-resistant, high-gloss, modified, polyamine or polyamido-amine catalyzed epoxy finish; 180 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 280 Tneme-Glaze (TCI); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Cor-Cote HP (SWC): a). Horizontal Surfaces: Two coats, 6.0 to 12.0 dry mils, per coat. b). Vertical Surfaces: Two coats, 4.0 to 8.0 dry mils, per coat. B. New and Existing Ferrous Metals, Structural Steel (With or Without Sprayed Fireproofing), Miscellaneous Ferrous Metals, Exterior Surfaces of Valves, Exterior Surfaces of Ferrous Piping, and Exterior Surfaces of All Ferrous Metal (Both Exposed and to be Later Covered with Insulation); Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.C.1., 3.2.C.2. 2. Shop Primer: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, cycloaliphatic amine-catalyzed epoxy or polyamido-amine epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series N69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); Macropoxy HS Epoxy (SWC): One coat, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils. 3. Field Primer and Touch-Up: Painting 09 91 00 - 18 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 100 percent volume solids, high-build, two-component, polyamide- catalyzed epoxy; 8 grams per gallon VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 165 Epoxoline 100 (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); Cor-Cote HP (SWC): One coat, 8.0 to 12.0 dry mils. 4. Finish: High-Gloss: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 80 percent volume solids, high-build, chemical-resistant, high-gloss, modified, polyamine- or polyamidoamine-catalyzed epoxy finish; 25 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 280 Tneme-Glaze (TCI); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Cor-Cote HP (SWC): a). Horizontal Surfaces: One coat, 6.0 to 12.0 dry mils. b). Vertical Surfaces: One coat, 4.0 to 8.0 dry mils. C. New and Existing Ferrous Metals, Structural Steel (With or Without Sprayed Fireproofing), Miscellaneous Ferrous Metals, Exterior Surfaces of Valves, Exterior Surfaces of Ferrous Piping, and Exterior Surfaces of All Ferrous Metal (Both Exposed and to be Later Covered With Insulation); Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.C.1., 3.2.C.2. 2. Shop Primer/Field Primer and Touch-Up: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 67 percent volume solids, build, two-component, polyamido-amine epoxy coating; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series V69 Hi-Build Epoxoline (TCI); Carboguard 890 LT (TCC); Macropoxy HS Epoxy (SWC): Two coats, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils, per coat. 3. Finish: Gloss: a. Generic Components: 1). Same as specified above for this system, shop primer/field primer and touch-up. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Same as specified above for this system, shop primer/field primer and touch-up. a). Horizontal Surfaces: Two coats, 3.0 to 6.0 dry mils, per coat. b). Vertical Surfaces: Two coats, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils, per coat. D. New and Existing Galvanized Metal, Non-Ferrous Metal, and Fiberglass; Non-submerged, Interior: Painting 09 91 00 - 19 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.D., 3.2.E. and 3.2.F. 2. Primer: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum, 39 percent volume solids single-component, self-cross linking acrylic primer-sealer, 140 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 115 Uni-Bond DF (TCI); Galoseal Wash Primer (TCC); Pro-Cryl Universal Primer (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. 3. Finish: Satin: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum, 41 percent volume solids, single component, self-cross linking acrylic; 208 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 116 Uni-Bond (TCI); Carbocrylic 3359 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Coating (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. E. New and Existing, Fiberglass; Non-Submerged, Exterior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., and 3.2.F. 2. Primer: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 17 percent solids, waterborne modified polyamide epoxy, 170 grams per liter, VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 151 Elasto-Grip FC (TCI); Sanitile 120 (TCC); Centurion WB Urethane (SWC): One coat, 1.5 dry mils. 3. Finish: Gloss: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 49 percent solids, two-component, aliphatic acrylic, polyurethane coating; 247 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 1080 Endura-Shield (TCI); Carbothane 134 VOC (TCC); Centurion WB Urethane (SWC): Two coats, 2.0 to 3.0 dry mils, per coat. F. New and Existing Aluminum in Contact with Dissimilar Materials: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A. and 3.2.D. 2. Primer/Finish: a. Generic Components: Painting 09 91 00 - 20 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1). Minimum 100 percent volume solids, high-build, two-component, polyamido- amine or polyamine epoxy; 49 grams per gallon VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 165 Epoxoline 100 (TCI); Carboguard 954 HB (TCC); Dura-Plate UHS (SWC): Two coats, 8.0 to 15.0 dry mils, per coat. G. New and Existing Pipe and Duct Insulation, Cloth, Paper and Canvas Jacketed; Non- submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A. and 3.2.G. 2. Primer: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 38 percent volume solids single-component, self-cross linking acrylic primer-sealer; 159 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 115 Uni-Bond DF (TCI); Sanitile 120 (TCC); Pro-Cryl Universal Primer (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. 3. Finish: Satin: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 37 percent volume solids, single component, self-cross linking acrylic; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 116 Uni-Bond (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); Pro-Cryl Universal Primer (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. H. New and Existing PVC and CPVC Piping and Fiberglass Insulation Covering; Non-submerged, Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A. and 3.2.F. 2. Primer: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 37 percent volume solids single-component, self-cross linking acrylic primer-sealer; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 115 Uni-Bond DF (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. 3. Finish: Satin: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 37 percent volume solids, single component, self-cross linking acrylic; 226 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: Painting 09 91 00 - 21 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 1). Series 116 Uni-Bond (TCI); Carbocrylic 3358 (TCC); DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish (SWC): One coat, 2.0 to 4.0 dry mils. I. New and Existing Exterior Surfaces of Steel Pipe; Buried Exterior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A., 3.2.C.1., and 3.2.E. 2. Primer/Finish: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 75 percent volume solids, build, coal tar polyamide epoxy coating; 330 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 46 Hi-Build H-413 Tneme-Tar (TCI); Bitumastic 300M (TCC); Targuard (SWC): Two coats, 9.0 dry mils, per coat. J. New and Existing Gypsum Wallboard and Wood; Interior: 1. Surface Preparation: Refer to Paragraphs 1.5.A.2., 3.2.A. and 3.2.H. 2. Gypsum Wallboard, Plaster, and Wood Primer: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 17 percent solids, 100 percent waterborne modified polyamine epoxy or cross-linked water-based acrylic-epoxy; 170 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 151 Elasto-Grip FC (TCI); Sanitile 255 (TCC); 3478 Epoxy Primer/Sealer (SWC): One coat, 0.7 to 1.5 dry mils. 3. Gypsum Wallboard and Wood Finish: a. Generic Components: 1). Minimum 44 percent solids, waterborne acrylic epoxy or water-based epoxy; 250 grams per liter VOC, maximum. b. Products and Manufacturers: Provide one of the following: 1). Series 113/114 HB Tneme-Tufcoat (TCI); Sanitile 555 (TCC); 3479 High Performance Epoxy Coating (SWC): Two coats, 4.0 to 6.0 dry mils, per coat. 2.03 CALKING AND SEALANTS A. Refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. 2.04 INSTRUMENTS A. Instruments: 1. Provide one new dry-film thickness gauge for checking film thickness, one holiday detector to detect holidays or holes in the coating, and one set of visual standards to check surface preparation. Calibrate dry film thickness gauge at Site using Bureau of Standards standard shim blocks. Painting 09 91 00 - 22 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Products and Manufacturers: Provide the following: a. Film Thickness Testers: Model FM-III manufactured by Mikrotest, or equal. b. Holiday detector shall be Model M-1 as manufactured by Tinker & Rasor, or equal. c. Visual Standards: ASTM D2200, Swedish Standards, SSPC VIS 1. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas and conditions under which painting Work is to be performed and notify ENGINEER in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to ENGINEER. B. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film capable of performing in accordance with claims made in paint manufacturer’s product literature for surfaces and conditions encountered. C. Do not paint over existing paint where there is no assurance that existing paint will provide an acceptable surface for long-term adherence and durability of painting systems specified or where paint manufacturer requires removal of all existing paint to recommend use of specified painting system. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Test for moisture content of surfaces before commencement of painting Work. Test for moisture in concrete in compliance with ASTM D4263. Report results to ENGINEER before commencing Work. 2. Prepare existing surfaces to be painted as specified for new surfaces. Submit substitute methods of preparing existing surfaces, when proposed, with Shop Drawing submittal. ENGINEER’s acceptance of substitute surface preparation methods does not relieve CONTRACTOR of performance required under the Contract Documents. To provide surfaces acceptable for application of painting system specified: a. Clean and roughen surfaces of existing paint and other decorative or protective toppings on surfaces to remain that are to receive a painting system under this Section. b. Where existing surfaces to be painted have corrosion, peeling paint, or unacceptably adhering coatings, remove all topcoats, primers, and intermediate coats of paint, and other protective or decorative coatings. 3. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures as specified herein and in strict accordance with paint manufacturer’s approved instructions for each surface and atmospheric condition. Painting 09 91 00 - 23 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 4. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items already in place that do not require field painting, or provide effective surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. 5. Remove as necessary items that must be field-painted where adjacent surfaces cannot be completely protected from splatter or overspray. Following completion of painting of each space or area, the removed items shall be reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. 6. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying painting system components. Remove oil and grease with clean cloths and cleaning solvents prior to mechanical cleaning. 7. Prepare surfaces that were improperly shop-painted and abraded or rusted shop- painted surfaces as specified. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete, Precast Concrete and Masonry Surfaces: 1. Prepare surfaces of concrete unit masonry to be painted by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and other contamination using soap and water. Surfaces shall be clean and dry at time of paint system application. 2. Concrete unit masonry that cannot be adequately cleaned using soap and water shall be acid etched with a commercial solution of 15 percent muriatic acid. 3. Prepare and clean cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete surfaces per ASTM D4259 to provide a uniform and continuous anchor profile of approximately one mil. Provide mechanical abrading and abrasive blasting per ASTM D4259. Use 40 to 80-mesh abrasive and clean, dry, compressed air. Compressed air cleanliness shall be per ASTM D4285. Pressure at blasting nozzle shall not exceed 80 pounds per square inch. Do not concentrate blast on surface; instead, move at a fairly rapid rate to provide a surface free of laitants and contaminants. Provide post-surface preparation cleaning per ASTM D4258 to remove loose material. Surface preparation shall open all surface air holes by removing laitance shoulders surrounding air holes. Vacuum surfaces to remove dust and sand, and wash with potable water. 4. Where paint system is for chemical containment barrier protection, repair cracks and expansion joints in concrete and provide 2-inch radiused cove base fillets at equipment pads and containment walls as part of complete chemical containment paint system Work. Use materials and techniques recommended by manufacturers of the paint and concrete repair products. 5. Remove from cast-in-place concrete fins, projections, and other surface irregularities that would protrude above level of finished intermediate fillers and surfacers. Remove by chipping and scarification by mechanical abrasion. 6. Using specified filler and surfacer, patch cast-in-place concrete and precast concrete surfaces as required to completely fill surface air holes and honeycombing. Level all protrusions, grind filler and surfacing compounds smooth, and level with adjacent surfaces. 7. Perform tests per ASTM D4262 and ASTM D4263 to verify alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted, and report findings to ENGINEER. If, in ENGINEER’s opinion, surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of paint, correct the condition before applying paint. Provide suitable testing materials for Painting 09 91 00 - 24 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements alkalinity and moisture tests. Do not paint surfaces where the moisture content exceeds eight percent. 8. Where a concrete unit masonry block filler is specified, spot patch holes and cracks with a putty knife using specified block filler. Apply to large surfaces by airless spray and backroll uniformly using a roller with a synthetic nap cover. Follow with a rubber squeegee to provide a smooth finish. C. Ferrous Metals: 1. Ferrous Metals Except Ductile and Cast Iron: a. Comply with paint manufacturer’s recommendations for type and size of abrasive to provide a surface profile that meets manufacturer’s painting system requirements for type, function, and location of surface. Verify that paint manufacturer- recommended profiles have been achieved on prepared surfaces. Report profiles to ENGINEER using Test Method C of ASTM D4417. b. Clean non-submerged ferrous surfaces including structural steel and miscellaneous metal to be shop-primed, of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by commercial blast cleaning complying with SSPC SP 6 at time of paint system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison. c. Clean submerged ferrous surfaces including structural steel and miscellaneous metal to be shop-primed of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by near-white blasting complying with SSPC SP 10 at time of painting system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison. d. Clean non-submerged, ferrous surfaces that have not been shop-coated of all oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other contamination by commercial blasting complying with SSPC SP 6 at the time of painting system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison. e. Clean submerged ferrous surfaces that have not been shop-coated or that have been improperly shop-coated of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by near-white blasting complying with SSPC SP 10 at time of painting system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison. f. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats that have damaged or have bare areas with primer recommended by paint manufacturer after commercial blasting complying with SSPC SP 6 at the time of painting system application, using SSPC VIS 1 as a standard of comparison, to provide a surface profile of not less than one mil. g. Power tool-clean per SSPC SP 3 to remove welding splatter and slag. h. Remove all rust and contamination on existing ferrous metals to sound surfaces by power tool-cleaning complying with SSPC SP 11 to provide a surface profile of not less than one mil. i. Cleaning: Clean tank to remove sediment and coarse debris, including aluminum or magnesium anode rods, from tank floor and other horizontal surfaces. Sediment and debris shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. 2. Ductile and Cast Iron: Painting 09 91 00 - 25 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements a. Comply with paint manufacturer’s recommendations and NAPF 500-03 for type and size of abrasive to provide a surface profile meeting paint manufacturer’s requirements for type, function and location of surface. Verify that paint manufacturer-recommended profiles are achieved on prepared surfaces. b. Clean submerged and non-submerged ductile and cast iron surfaces to be shop- primed of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by solvent cleaning and abrasive blasting complying with NAPF 500-03-01, NAPF 500-03-04, and NAPF 500-03-05 at time of paint system application. c. Clean submerged ductile and cast iron that have not been shop-coated or that have been improperly shop-coated of all oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, and other contamination by solvent cleaning and abrasive blasting complying with NAPF 500- 03-01, NAPF 500-03-04, and NAPF 500-03-05 at time of paint system application. d. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats that are damaged or have bare areas with primer recommended by paint manufacturer, after power tooling complying with NAPF 500-03 at the time of painting system application. e. Remove all contamination on existing ductile and cast iron to sound surfaces by power tool cleaning complying with NAPF 500-03-03. D. Non-Ferrous Metal Surfaces: Prepare non-ferrous metal surfaces for painting by light whip blasting or by lightly sanding with 60- to 80-mesh sandpaper. E. Galvanized (Zinc-Coated) Surfaces: Prepare galvanized surfaces for painting by lightly sanding with 60- to 80-mesh sandpaper or by light whip blasting. F. PVC and CPVC Piping and Fiberglass: Lightly sand and clean surfaces to be painted. Fiberglass surfaces shall be prepared by solvent washing to remove wax and other contaminants, before abrading surfaces with 60- to 80-mesh sandpaper to provide an anchor pattern with scratches no further apart than 1/16-inch. G. Covering on Pipe Insulation: 1. Remove all oil and surface contaminants as recommended by paint and insulation cover manufacturer for surface and application required. 2. Do not cut or damage insulation and covering. H. Gypsum Wallboard, and Plaster: 1. Patch, sand, and seal rough spots before applying prime coat. Remove all dust and other contaminants prior to painting. 2. Touch-up suction spots and hot spots with primer before applying finish coats. I. Wood: 1. Clean wood surfaces to be painted of all dirt, oil, or other foreign substances using scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Use sandpaper to smooth finished surfaces exposed to view and dust off. 2. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be painted at Site immediately upon delivery to Site. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling and similar items. Painting 09 91 00 - 26 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 3. Backprime paneling or interior partitions only where masonry, plaster, or other wet-wall construction occurs on backside. 4. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of wood doors with a heavy coat of sealer as recommended by door manufacturer immediately upon delivery to Site. 5. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying priming coat. 6. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler as recommended by manufacturers of paint and filler, sandpaper smooth when dried and dust off. 3.03 PROTECTION OF PROPERTY AND STRUCTURES A. Protect property and structures adjacent to the Work from waste residues resulting from cleaning, surface preparation and paint application. B. Use shrouding, vacuum blasting, or other approved methods for cleaning and surface preparation of exterior surfaces. C. During blast cleaning and surface preparation of interior and exterior surfaces, control discharge of dust and grit, using shrouding, negative-pressure containment/dust collection systems, or other means to protect adjacent property and structures and prevent dust/grit from escaping. Similarly control removal and temporary storage of residues to protect adjacent property and structures. D. For painting of exterior surfaces, use rollers, shrouding or other approved methods as required to protect adjacent property and structures from wind-blown paint residues. E. Submit proposed procedures for cleaning, surface preparation and paint application describing methods for protecting adjacent property and structures from residues. Do not proceed with cleaning, surface preparation or painting until proposed procedures are approved by ENGINEER. 3.04 MATERIALS PREPARATION A. General: 1. Mix and prepare paint products in strict accordance with paint manufacturer’s product literature. 2. Do not mix painting materials produced by different manufacturers, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Where thinners are required, they shall be produced by paint system manufacturer unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer’s product literature and submitted to and accepted by ENGINEER with Shop Drawings. B. Tinting: 1. Where multiple coats of the same material are to be provided, tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat of paint. Painting 09 91 00 - 27 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 2. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat of paint, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. Provide a code number to identify material tinted by manufacturer. C. Mixing: 1. For products requiring constant agitation, use methods in compliance with manufacturer’s product literature to prevent settling during paint application. 2. Mix in containers placed in suitably sized non-ferrous or oxide resistant metal pans to protect floors from slashes or spills that could stain the floor or react with subsequent finish floor material. 3. Mix and apply paint in containers bearing accurate product name of material being mixed or applied. 4. Stir products before application to produce a mixture of uniform density and as required during the application. Do not stir into the product film that forms on surface; instead, remove film and, if necessary, strain product before using. 5. Strain products requiring such mixing procedures. After adjusting mixer speed to break up lumps and after components are thoroughly blended, strain through 35 to 50-mesh screen before application. 3.05 APPLICATION A. General: 1. Apply paint systems by brush, roller, or airless spray per manufacturer’s recommendations and in compliance with Paint Application Specifications No. 1 in SSPC Volume 2, where applicable. Use brushes best suited for type of paint applied. Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high pile sheeps wool as recommended by paint manufacturer for product and texture required. Use air spray and airless spray equipment recommended by paint manufacturer for specific painting systems specified. Submit a list of application methods proposed, listing paint systems and location. 2. Paint dry film thicknesses required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has completely dried. 3. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is uniform finish, color, and appearance, particularly for intense chroma primary colors. Ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners, receive a film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Surfaces of items not normally exposed-to-view do not require the same color as other components of system of which they are part, but require the same painting system specified for exposed surfaces of system. 5. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint before final installation of registers or grilles. 6. Paint backs of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 7. Paint aluminum parts in contact with dissimilar materials with specified paint system. 8. Paint tops, bottoms, and side edges of doors the same as exterior surfaces. Painting 09 91 00 - 28 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 9. Omit field-applied primer on metal surfaces that have been primed in the shop. Touch-up paint shop-primed coats and pre-finished items only when approved by ENGINEER using compatible primers and manufacturer’s recommended compatible field-applied finishes. 10. Welds shall be stripe-coated with intermediate or finish coat of paint after application of prime coat. 11. Paint steel water storage tanks per AWWA D102. B. Minimum/Maximum Paint Film Thickness: 1. Apply each product at not less than, nor more than, manufacturer’s recommended spreading rate, and provide total dry film thickness as specified. 2. Apply additional coats of paint if required to obtain specified total dry film thickness. 3. Maximum dry film thickness shall not exceed 100 percent of minimum dry film thickness, except where more stringent limitations are recommended by paint manufacturer for a specific product. C. Scheduling Surface Preparation and Painting: 1. As soon as practical after preparation, apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting. Apply first-coat material before subsequent surface deterioration due to atmospheric conditions existing at time of surface preparation and painting. Surfaces that have started to rust before first-coat application is complete shall be brought back to required standard by abrasive blasting. 2. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion to undercoat. 3. Scarify primers and other painting system components by brush-blasting if paint has been exposed for lengths of time or under conditions beyond manufacturer’s written recommendations for painting systems required, intended use, or method of application proposed for subsequent coats of paint. 4. Schedule cleaning and painting so that dust and other contaminants from cleaning process do not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. D. Prime Coats: Recoat primed and sealed walls and ceilings where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects caused by insufficient sealing. E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. F. Brush Application: 1. Brush out and work all brush coats onto surfaces in an even film. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections are unacceptable. Neatly draw all glass and color break lines. 2. Brush-apply primer or first coats, unless otherwise permitted to use mechanical applicators. Painting 09 91 00 - 29 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements G. Mechanical Applicators: 1. Use mechanical methods for paint application when permitted by governing ordinances, manufacturer, and approved by ENGINEER. 2. Limit roller applications, if approved by ENGINEER, to interior wall finishes for second and third coats. Apply each roller coat to provide the equivalent hiding as brush-applied coats. 3. Where spray application is used, apply each coat to provide equivalent hiding of brush-applied coats. Do not double back with spray equipment for purpose of building up film thickness of multiple coats in one pass. H. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint Work not in compliance with specified requirements as required by ENGINEER. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. ENGINEER may invoke the following material testing procedure at any time for a maximum of five times during field painting Work: 1. CONTRACTOR shall engage service of an independent testing laboratory to sample paints used, as designated by ENGINEER. Samples of products delivered to Site shall be obtained, identified, sealed, and certified as to being products actually applied to surfaces in each area, in presence of CONTRACTOR. 2. A testing laboratory selected by OWNER and paid for by CONTRACTOR shall perform appropriate tests for any or all of the following: a. Abrasion resistance. b. Apparent reflectivity. c. Flexibility. d. Washability. e. Absorption. f. Accelerated weathering. g. Dry opacity. h. Accelerated yellowness. i. Recoating. j. Skinning. k. Color retention. l. Alkali resistance. m. Quantitative materials analysis. 3. If test results show that products being used do not comply with specified requirements, CONTRACTOR may be directed to stop painting Work and remove non-complying paint, Painting 09 91 00 - 30 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements and shall prepare and repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint with material complying with the Contract Documents. B. Notify ENGINEER after completing each coat of paint. After inspection and checking of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections, and after acceptance by ENGINEER, proceed with succeeding coat. Provide testing instruments specified in Article 2.4 of this Section for testing by CONTRACTOR. Testing instruments shall become property of OWNER. C. Notify ENGINEER after completing each coat of paint. After inspection and checking of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections, and after acceptance by ENGINEER, proceed with succeeding coat. Perform testing using testing instruments specified in Article 2.4 of this Section. D. Notify ENGINEER after completing each coat of paint. After inspection and checking of film thickness, holidays, and imperfections by OWNER, and after acceptance by ENGINEER, proceed with succeeding coat. 1. ENGINEER will witness all testing and shall be notified of scheduled testing at least twenty-four hours in advance. 2. Apply additional coats, if required, to produce specified film thickness and to correct holidays and to completely fill all surface air holes. E. For magnetic substrates, measure thickness of dry film nonmagnetic coatings following recommendations of SSPC PA-2. These procedures supplement manufacturers’ approved instructions for manual operation of measurement gauges and do not replace such instructions. F. Record time, location, number of coats, dry film thickness, holidays, and other imperfections and submit testing results to ENGINEER. 3.07 MISCELLANEOUS TANK REHABILITATION A. Sealant Replacement: Remove all existing sealant material between tank bottom and concrete ring wall foundation. Thoroughly wet space between bottom of tank and top of wall and provide 1-inch thick cane fiber filler. Seal entire outer edge of tank bottom to ring wall with a 1/2-inch width of two-compartment polysulfide compound. Refer to Section 07 92 00, Joint Sealants. B. Provide new rubber gaskets and Type 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts for access hatches (two roof and two ground-level shell hatches). Remove and dispose of old nuts, bolts, and gaskets. New gasketing system shall prevent leakage from tank through access hatch. C. Seal existing cathodic protection system manhole covers to tank roof using an NSF 61- approved sealant product. Covers and sealant shall prevent entrance of water into tank. 3.08 DISINFECTION A. Disinfection shall conform to applicable requirements of AWWA C652, except as modified below. B. After tank painting is complete and interior surfaces thoroughly dried, remove all visible dirt and contaminating materials. Disinfect interior of tank by spraying all surfaces, including underside of roof and roof support members, with a chlorine solution measuring at least Painting 09 91 00 - 31 DTN18104 – Lake Lewisville Water Treatment Plant Phase II Improvements 200 mg/L chlorine. Chlorine solution shall remain in contact with surfaces for at least thirty minutes. Provide a sterile environment inside tank. After spray-disinfection, flush tank contents to drain by spraying disinfected surfaces with potable water for at least ten minutes, then fill tank to result in overflow for another ten minutes, after which samples for bacteriological testing will be obtained by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall provide proper disinfection until successful bacteriological testing results are achieved. C. Water for initial disinfection and filling will be furnished by OWNER. CONTRACTOR shall provide pumps, hoses, and other temporary equipment required to fill tank. CONTRACTOR shall furnish chlorine. D. First set of bacteriological testing will be paid for by OWNER. E. If tank must be emptied, re-disinfected, flushed, and refilled to obtain satisfactory bacteriological samples, or because of extensive leakage, CONTRACTOR shall pay for additional chlorine, re-testing, and water at the utility owner’s standard rates. F. Water VOC Concentration Testing: 1. After tank has filled and allowed to stand for twenty-four hours, OWNER will provide one set of water samples for testing for total volatile organic compounds per EPA Method 524.2 and bacteriological levels to confirm acceptability of water with applicable drinking water standards. 2. If a sample does not meet applicable requirements, CONTRACTOR shall drain tank and allow the paint system to further cure. CONTRACTOR shall pay costs for additional refilling, testing, and disposal of water necessary to achieve compliance with applicable drinking water standards. 3.09 PROTECTION OF NEW FINISHES A. Provide signs that read, “Wet Paint” as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary wrappings provided for protection of the Work and work of other contractors after completion of painting. 3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Correct damages to work of other trades through cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to ENGINEER. B. During progress of Work, remove from Site all discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans, and rags at end of each workday. C. Upon completion of painting, clean paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, while avoiding scratching or otherwise damaging finished surfaces. D. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces as determined by ENGINEER. END OF SECTION